Full text of "The Articles of Christian Instruction in Favorlang-Formosan, Dutch and English: From Vertrecht's ..."

See other formats

Google 



This is a digital copy of a book that was preserved for generations on library shelves before it was carefully scanned by Google as part of a project 

to make the world's books discoverable online. 

It has survived long enough for the copyright to expire and the book to enter the public domain. A public domain book is one that was never subject 

to copyright or whose legal copyright term has expired. Whether a book is in the public domain may vary country to country. Public domain books 

are our gateways to the past, representing a wealth of history, culture and knowledge that's often difficult to discover. 

Marks, notations and other maiginalia present in the original volume will appear in this file - a reminder of this book's long journey from the 

publisher to a library and finally to you. 

Usage guidelines 

Google is proud to partner with libraries to digitize public domain materials and make them widely accessible. Public domain books belong to the 
public and we are merely their custodians. Nevertheless, this work is expensive, so in order to keep providing tliis resource, we liave taken steps to 
prevent abuse by commercial parties, including placing technical restrictions on automated querying. 
We also ask that you: 

+ Make non-commercial use of the files We designed Google Book Search for use by individuals, and we request that you use these files for 
personal, non-commercial purposes. 

+ Refrain fivm automated querying Do not send automated queries of any sort to Google's system: If you are conducting research on machine 
translation, optical character recognition or other areas where access to a large amount of text is helpful, please contact us. We encourage the 
use of public domain materials for these purposes and may be able to help. 

+ Maintain attributionTht GoogXt "watermark" you see on each file is essential for in forming people about this project and helping them find 
additional materials through Google Book Search. Please do not remove it. 

+ Keep it legal Whatever your use, remember that you are responsible for ensuring that what you are doing is legal. Do not assume that just 
because we believe a book is in the public domain for users in the United States, that the work is also in the public domain for users in other 
countries. Whether a book is still in copyright varies from country to country, and we can't offer guidance on whether any specific use of 
any specific book is allowed. Please do not assume that a book's appearance in Google Book Search means it can be used in any manner 
anywhere in the world. Copyright infringement liabili^ can be quite severe. 

About Google Book Search 

Google's mission is to organize the world's information and to make it universally accessible and useful. Google Book Search helps readers 
discover the world's books while helping authors and publishers reach new audiences. You can search through the full text of this book on the web 

at |http: //books .google .com/I 





HARVARD 
COLLEGE 
LIBRARY 




C|)e :^ttieie0 



IN 



FAVORLANG-FORMOSAN 




THE ARTICLES OF 



Cfirffiitiatt 3fttSitruction 



IN 



FAVORLANG-FORMOSAN 

DUTCH AND ENGLISH 

FROM VERTRECHT's MANUSCRIPT OF 1650 

WITH 

PSALMANAZAR'S DIALOGUE 

BETWEEN 

A JAPANESE AND A FORMOSAN 

AND 

HAPPART'S FAVORLANG VOCABULARY 



EDITED BY 
REV. WM. CAMPBELL, M.R.A.S. 

BNOUtH rRBSBTTBUAN MIlttON 
TAINANFV 



LONDON : KEGAN PAUL, TRENCH, TROBNER & CO. LTD 

PATERNOSTER HOUSE, CHARING CROSS ROAD 

MDCCCXCVI 









HARVARD COLLEGE UDMRir 

GIH OF 

ERNL8T QOODKICH STiLLMAN 

1940 



L0RARV 




AUG L iVVl 



INiniW ^y T M<l A. Cimi«taio» Ftinlm to H«r M^filj 




PREFACE 

|H£ main object of this book is to call attention 
to the need for missionary effort among the 
non-Chinese-speaking aborigines of Formosa. 
Two hundred and fifty years ago they were in full 
possession there, although many of their villages ac- 
knowledged allegiance to a colony of Dutch traders 
who established themselves in the neighbouring little 
island of Tayoan. 

That was a prosperous time with the natives of 
Formosa, for not only did the recently opened trade bring 
many material advantages, but quite a new world began 
to unfold itself before them under the influence of those 
Dutch pastors who came to labour for their intellectual 
and spiritual good. At least three of the local dialects 
were reduced to writing, chapels and school-houses were 
erected in every village under Dutch control, and very 
marked improvement of the public manners was followed 
by thousands of the people being welcomed into the 
membership of the Christian Church. 

The circumstances which led to the arrest of this 
hopeful movement cannot be fully stated here. Suffice 
it to say, that while prosperity was thus flowing in upon 
Formosa, changes of a very dififerent kind were taking 

place 



vi Preface 

place on the opposite mainland of China. Invaders from 
the north had entered that unhappy country, overthrowing 
its own Ming dynasty, and setting up the present Manchu- 
Tartar dynasty in its place. Koxinga, a chieftain of 
Fokien, was foremost in withstanding the Manchus. He 
directed the military operations of his followers on land ; 
and when vanquished there, took command of a large 
fleet of war-junks, which swept the seas, and in every 
possible way tried to break the power of the hated 
usurpers. At length, however, all eflForts were seen to 
be in vain ; the result being that this daring leader was 
compelled either to tender his submission or to save his 
life by flight. No sooner was this latter alternative 
decided upon than the fleet was ordered to make a descent 
on Formosa, where it did succeed in expelling the Dutch, 
and where Koxinga proclaimed himself king over the 
Chinese refugees and adventurers who now flocked in 
thousands to his standard. But the monarchy was a very 
short-lived one; for in 1683 Koxinga's grandson was 
tightly hemmed in by the great Manchu power, and 
made unconditional surrender ; thus clearing the way for 
that Imperial administration of western Formosa which 
continued down till the spring of last year. 

Of course, missionary work had been stopped at the 
time of Koxinga's conquest, and terrible were the suflFer- 
ings which both pastors and people endured under the 
process of stamping out every trace of Christianity from 
the island. There can be no doubt that many of the 
native brethren escaped a cruel death by retreating 
into those mountain fastnesses which are still little 

known 



Preface vii 

known to Europeans, and only very partially to the 
Chinese themselves. 

The long night of heathenism lasted till 1865, when 
the Presbyterian Church of England broke ground in 
the south-western capital of Tainanfu; the only other 
Protestant Mission in Formosa being one from the Pres- 
byterian Church of Canada, which was begun at the 
northern port of Tamsui during the opening months of 
1872. They both minister to the now largely increased 
Chinese population, and to those civilised aborigines called 
Pi-po-hoan who follow the language and customs of the 
Chinese, who were content to live under Mandarin rule, 
and whose hamlets are chiefly to be found about twenty 
miles inland from the western coast-line. 

Neither of the Missions has attempted work among 
the non-Chinese-speaking aborigines, nor is there the 
least likelihood that they will ever be able to do so. 
Moreover, the Polynesian character of the language 
spoken by those aborigines, with the fact of their territory 
being mostly on the farther side of a lofty range of 
mountains, renders it necessary that teachers coming 
amongst them should settle down in the region itself, and 
be given a somewhat free hand in the management of 
afl^airs. In other words, eastern Formosa can never be 
advantageously worked as a sub-centre from Tainanfu or 
Tamsui, but would require to be occupied by some other 
Mission specially appointed thereto. 

Several years ago a reprint of Gravius's Formosan 
version of St. Matthew awakened much interest in 
Holland, and many were led to hope that, in the person 

of 



viii Preface 

of one or two of her missionary representatives, the 
Church there would return to a land consecrated by the 
sufferings of men like Winsem, Mus, and Anthonius 
Hambroek ; but beyond a good deal of enthusiasm shown 
at the Amsterdam Missionary Conference of 1890, no 
definite action was taken, the great work which that 
Church is bravely carrying on throughout Netherlands- 
India leaving no opportunity for outside extension. 

And yet, who knows but the recent cession of Formosa 
to Japan may turn out to be God's own way of work- 
ing out a much grander development ? Whenever the 
victorious troops had taken possession of the island, two 
Japanese ordained Commissioners were sent by their 
Presbyterian Synod to ascertain its increased responsi- 
bilities; and those friends were filled with grateful 
surprise to see the field already occupied by two vigorous 
Missions having more than one hundred congregations 
connected with them ; whereupon they gave something 
like an assurance to the resident missionaries that any 
aggressive work the Synod might enter upon would 
be confined to immigrants from Japan, and to districts 
where no other brethren were labouring. Surely action, 
like this is fitted to cheer the heart and to open 
another ' door of hope ' for people still sitting in the 
region and shadow of death. 

So far as mere Government measures are concerned, a 
change will doubtless be made on the old Chinese policy 
of doing little more than attempting to exterminate the 
aborigines; because the Japanese are shrewd enough to 
know that something of a parental attitude towards them 

will 



Preface ix 

will not only bring the practice of head-hunting to an 
end, and thus gain six thousand square miles of very 
valuable land, but strengthen their own hands by the 
creation of many loyal and most useful fellow-subjects. 
In view of all this, it is impossible to forget the Japanese 
expedition to Formosa of 1874. The punitive nature 
of that expedition will be remembered, but the self- 
restraint with which the members of it acted is less 
generally known. Bun-kiet, second son of chief Tok- 
i-tok, once told the writer that the native tribes were 
very sorry when the time came for the Japanese soldiers 
to leave, and it is quite possible the name of General 
Saigo continues to be mentioned with feelings of 
respect in the villages east from Long-Kiau. May a 
like firm, yet generous, course be followed in the 
present much larger undertaking ! 

One important question which emerges here is that 
of the extent of the non-Chinese-speaking population. 
As few inland villages have been visited by Europeans, 
the information on this point must be very defective, 
but the Peking Gazette of 26th June 1887 contains a 
statement which is worthy of notice. It is in the form 
of a Report from the late Governor, Liu Ming Chuan. 
After several months' employment of a force which was 
operating against the independent tribes, he was able 
to inform his Imperial master that no fewer than 478 
villages, containing 88,000 persons, had been brought 
within the exercise of Chinese law. From the phrase- 
ology made use of, it would seem that the latter number 
includes fighting men only, to the exclusion of elderly 

people. 




X Preface 

people, women, and children ; while nothing whatever is 
said of other villages and other tribes never reached by 
this vigorous crusade. In any case, however, eastern 
Formosa is quite as worthy of attention as many South 
Sea islands which are now rejoicing in the possession of 
Christian privileges, and it has other inducements besides 
mere extent of population to stir the heart of those who 
feel burdened with the command to go into all the world 
and preach the Gospel to every creature. 

With regard to the ethnography, language, customs, 
present condition and capabilities, of the Formosan tribes, 
there is also much need for fuller and more definite 
information than we now possess. The problem which 
these questions present will be better understood on con- 
sidering the beginnings of population in various parts of 
the island. For example, storms and strong currents are 
known to have drifted thither boat-loads of people who 
were permitted to land and form little communities of 
their own. Then, the southern Tipuns began their 
tribal history when several families came from some 
northern island, with the express purpose of settling 
down, the place of debarkation being still pointed out, 
and made the scene of an annual religious offering to the 
spirits of their ancestors. It is easy to see how such 
occurrences should have influenced the manners and 
speech of people connected with two or three settlements 
on the eastern seaboard; and, as a matter of fact, the 
villagers there spend their lives in constant oscillation 
between loyalty to traditions which have come across 
the sea and efforts to adapt themselves to their present 

surroundings. 



Preface xi 

surroundings.' Mr. Dodd {ut supra) brings all this out 
while writing about the aborigines of the northern end 
of Formosa, and Mr. Taylor renders a similar service in 
his notes on the narrow Heng-Chun region of the 
extreme south; although it must not be forgotten that 
the great central and eastern regions of Formosa remain 
a terra incognita^ and that, apart from the collection of 
several short word-lists, no European of the present 
generation has studied on the spot any one branch 
of the aboriginal philology. 

Let it be noted, therefore, that it is in these circum- 
stances the Sinkang-Formosan St. Matthew, with the 

present 



' In investigating the subjects referred to in this paragraph, it is well to distin- 
guish between second-hand statements and the writings of those who were eye- 
witnesses of the things they describe. Of the latter class the following may be 
consulted with advantage: — R. Swinhoe (British Consul), Notes on tbe Etbnogrdpby 
of Formosa, in Report of the Brit. Assoc, for 1 863 ; T. L. Bullock (British Consul), 
A Trip into tbi Interior of Formosa, in Proceed, of Royal Geogr. Soc. for July 
1877 ; C. W. Le Gendre (U. S. Consul), Account of a Fisit to tbe Soutbern Tribes, 
in Report of Commercial Relations for 1868 and 1869 ; M. Guerin (French Vice- 
Consul), Les Aborigines dt file de Formose, in Bullet. Soc. Geogr. for June 1868 ; 
E. C. Taintor (Chinese Customs Service), Tbe Aborigines of Nortb Formosa^ in 
Jour, of North China Royal Asiatic Soc. for 1875; G. Taylor (Chinese 
Customs Service), Characteristic Traits of tbe Aboriginal Inhabitants of Formosa, in 
Proceed, of Royal Geogr. Soc. for April 1889 ; Dr. C. Collingwood (English 
Naturalist), r/j/V to tbe Kibalan Village of Sawo, on tbe Nortb-East Coast of 
Formosa, in Trans, of Ethnol. Soc. for 1868; Prof. J. B. Steere (American 
Naturalist), Tbe Aborigines of Formosa^ in Jour, of American Geogr. Soc. for 
■876 ; J. Thomson (Photographer), Notes of a Journey in Soutb Formosa, in 
Jour, of Royal Geogr. Soc. for 1873 ; J. Dodd (Merchant), Tbe Aborigines of 
Formosa^ in Report of Brit. Assoc, for 1895. The works of the early Dutch 
annalists. Van Rechteren, Valentyn, Nieuhof, Montanus, Dapper, Struyss, and 
Van Braam, also contain a large amount of curious and still useful information. 



xii Preface 

present Favorlang-Formosan volume, now exhibit the 
full grammatical structure of two dialects once spoken 
by the non-Chinese-speaking aborigines. The dialects 
themselves suggest one or two general remarks, i. It is 
even probable that, with slight modification, both of 
them may still represent the speech of tribes in the 
interior. The complete data in support of this statement 
include such facts as: (a) The flight eastward of per- 
secuted converts at the time of the Dutch surrender ; (S) 
the favour shown by Koxinga towards all non-Christian 
people in villages where churches had been established ; 
(f) the fact that certain title-deeds of land and other 
documents have been found, which were written at the 
beginning of the present century, in Roman letters, and 
in dialects reduced to writing by the early missionaries. 
2. It may be taken for granted that some knowledge of 
the Sinkang and Favorlang vernaculars would greatly 
facilitate an acquaintance with cognate dialects now in 
use among the whole of the Malay-Polynesian inhabit- 
ants of Formosa. 3. According to recent advance in 
philology, these linguistic remains are valuable for 
determining the exact ethnological place of the Formosan . 
tribes, and in helping to disprove statements which have 
been made as to their being incapable of civilisation. 
4. This and the Sinkang volume aflford glimpses of a 
chapter in the history of the Church which is still 
inspiring, and they come before her now with dumb 
appeal on behalf of those who cannot plead their own 
cause. Doubtless it will be said that all this is pure 
sentiment, and we admit it ; but sentiment has a potent 

place 




Preface xm 

place in the arena of human affairs. Had it been 
possible, sentiment would have brought our beloved 
Dutch brethren back again to Formosa six years ago, 
and that would have been a good thing, even although 
Gravius's version of St. Matthew had turned out to be 
utterly unintelligible. Sentiment carefully preserves 
the martyr's grave on the lonely moorland, and we 
venture to think that the present exercise of it is more 
elevating by far than that which parts with ^loo for 
some old curio or rare kind of postage-stamp. What- 
ever else may be said about the Sinkang and Favorlang 
dialects, it is beyond all question that they were once 
used by the Spirit of God for enlightening and com- 
forting those who now 'serve Him day and night 
in His temple.' It is hard to be denied some little 
room for our Christian antiquities. 

The writer has often been in danger and has often 
met with kindness in the mountain regions of Formosa, 
and his colleagues share with him the burden of living 
near an interesting race for whom they can do nothing. 
Impending changes in the island will also bring in- 
crease of opportunity from the missionary point of view, 
while one cannot cease thinking of that glorious Lord, 
and of His world-wide Church against which even 
the gates of hell could not prevail. Surely, then, 
this volume may go forth to fulfil its humblest func- 
tion of 'beckoning to our partners in the other ship 
that they should come and help us.' We rejoice to 
think of what God is doing for Japan, and nothing 
would gladden our hearts so much as to have it said 

that 



xiv Preface 

that some of her own earnest, capable sons Mivided 
the spoil ' with us in this best and highest sense of the 
word. 

Only a few more introductory remarks are needed. 
The 'Christian Instruction' of the following pages is 
from an old manuscript preserved in the archives of the 
Batavian Society of Arts and Sciences. On application 
through Mr. J. A. Grothe (esteemed editor of the 
Ar chief voor de Geschiedenis der Oude Hollandsche Zending) , 
the Directors courteously allowed it to be copied, Dr. J. 
Brandes rendering valuable help in the work of collation. 
After this, further scrutiny was made to eliminate mis- 
takes which may have arisen from displacement of the 
old unpaged sheets, the sentences were numbered to 
facilitate reference, and all accents filled in as they occur 
in the original manuscript.* It was also thought best 
that the Dutch version given here should be in black 
letter, to correspond with Gravius's Gospel of St. 
Matthew, and that the value of the work would be still 
more enhanced by the addition of an English translation 
— which, by the way, owes much to the scholarly pen 
of Mr. H. J. Millard of Utrecht. 

The Batavian manuscript was written by * Jac. Ver- 

trecht,* 

' As much may depend on the somewhat peculiar use made of those accents, 
the following is a copy of the author's own note on the subject : — * Waar boven 
de syllabe een schuinsche linie (') staat, dat die hard en lang moet uitgesprook- 
ken werden; desgeliks boven de g een liggende linie, aldus (g) wyst aan die 
hard tegen de syde van de strot word uitgesprookken ; en waar onder s op 
dese wyse een comma staat (s) g^eft te kennen, dat d'selve fast en light word 
uitgesprookken ab een c' 



Preface xv 

trecht/ one of the Dutch pastors who laboured in 
Formosa between 1647 and 1651. He is thus referred 
to in a still extant letter from the Consistory of Tayoan 
to the committee on Indian Affairs of the Amsterdam 
Classis : — * Mr. Vertrecht has made great progress in the 
language, not only translating several small pieces into 
the Favorlang tongue, with some sermons and a dialogue 
(in which the rejection of the heathen gods and their 
service is advocated), but surprising us even more by 
repeatedly preaching in that language. . . . He has 
most faithfully served the Indian churches for seven- 
teen years ; and, whilst burdened with work pertaining 
to his office, and meeting with many and various 
troubles, he has not considered his life or his health, 
that he might proclaim the kingdom of God's grace 
to the heathen of various races.' 

As can be seen from its opening title, the contents of 
the manuscript at Batavia were prepared for the use of 
people living in the Favorlang district. Now, the early 
records show that, as in the case of Tamsui, the name 
was applied to two districts, one to the south of Castle 
Zeelandia, where the Rev. Hans Olof laboured, and the 
other to the north of Tilosen, Tsu-lo-san, or Ka-gi, 
where the Rev. Simon van Breen began work. How 
far Favorlang lay to the north of Tilosen can only be 
inferred, but it must have been some distance, for several 
letters make mention of a proposal that both north 
Tamsui and Kelang should be included in that curacy. 
Some authors have been a little misled about the position 
of north Favorlang by failing to distinguish between 

Gilbertus 




xvi Preface 

Gilbertus Happart and Johannes Happart, and by suppos- 
ing that it lay not far from Sakam; whereas (i) Sakam 
was the village in which the early Dutch colonists built 
Fort Provintia ; (2) all the heavy lower sub-structures of 
that fort still exist in situ within the Great West Gate of 
what is now the city of Tainanfu ; and (3) the writer has 
only too good reason to know that the central town 
of Tilosen or Ka-gi lies forty miles to the north of 
Tainanfu. By keeping these distinctions in view, 
it is possible to correct what has been written about 
Gilbertus Happart having been directed to prepare 
a Dictionary of the Sakam or Favorlang dialect of 
the Formosan language/ and the Vocabulary of y. 
Happart as being already in print. In short, it is safe 
to conclude that Vertrecht's Favorlang — or, Vovorollang, 
as it is sometimes written — ^very much coincides with 
the Chiang-hoa region of to-day. 

Of course, the Batavia manuscript is written in Roman 
letters, and this might have been taken for granted 
without remark were it not that, several years ago, the 
late Professor Delacouperie gave wide-spread currency to 
his belief that Psalmanazar's Formosan characters were 
not fictitious after all, as there really did exist a native 
writing in Formosa which was neither Chinese nor 
European in its origin. The Professor thus expressed 
himself :—* Psalmanazar, the author of the well-known 
fictitious Description of Formosa in 1704, has given in that 
work an alphabet of sixteen letters, composed of twenty- 
one characters. It has been generally and wrongly 
supposed that these were nothing more than another 

freak 



Preface xvii 

freak of his imagination, like the palaces, altars, costumes, 
and moneys which figure in his book. But he must be 
acquitted of that accusation, as we shall sec presently/ * 
The evidence which follows, however, can hardly be 
said to advance matters, for Dr. Delacouperie has to 
acknowledge that Auer's Formosan Paternoster was very 
likely copied from the Description itself, while it is mere 
speculation to write as he does about Le Gendre's docu- 
ments and those Amiah ones which Mr. Taylor never 
saw. In this inquiry one cannot forget that Psalmanazar 
made confession of deliberate forgery, that early notices 
all agree in representing the Formosans as being wholly 
ignorant of the art of writing,^ and that present-day 
missionaries — keenly interested, and with unrivalled op- 
portunities for obtaining information — have never yet 
come across a single sheet written in native characters. 
They have often been informed of the existence of 
certain writings throughout the island ; but in every 
case these have turned out to be old Romanised 
script in the dialects first taken in hand by Candi- 
dius, Gravius, Happart, and their colleagues, the 
paper handed to Consul Le Gendre by Dr. Maxwell 
forming no exception to this ; as, indeed, any one can 
see from the Consul's own official report.^ 

Before leaving this subject, attention may be called to 
a seal which will be found represented on the fly-leaf of 
the present volume. The seal itself was formerly used 
by 

' Fide his Formosa Notes^ § 21, and Academy for 9th April 1887. 

• Ogilby*8 At las Cbimnsis^ P» > 5« 

' yidi U.S. Commercial Relations for 1869, £x. Doc. No. 18, p. 107. 




xviii Preface 

by the Tbong^sUy or local aboriginal officer, in the town- 
ship of Oan-li, some thirteen miles to the north-east of 
Tainanfu. Its horizontal and two upright columns of 
Chinese characters present no difficulty. What about 
the four symbols forming the middle upright column ? 
After a number of attempts, the problem they offer 
still remains unsolved, and they have been reproduced 
here in the hope that some satisfactory and interesting 
explanation may be suggested. 

And now, with regard to the following reprint 
of Psalmanazar's * Dialogue,* and Gilbertus Happart's 
' Favorlang Vocabulary.' It was decided to include the 
former because of — (i) its brevity; (2) its rarity; (3) its 
usefulness in proving that, while Vertrecht's work has 
also a Dialogue, the coincidence ends there; (4) its 
interest at a time when the Japanese are brought, unex- 
pectedly and in a very real sense, face to face with 
the hill tribes of Formosa. 

The raison cTetre for this reproduction of the Vocabulary 
cannot be stated so briefly. As already hinted, Happart 
was one of the early Dutch pastors, and the manuscript 
of his Favorlang Vocabulary lay hidden out of sight at 
Batavia till 1839, when it was discovered by Dr. van 
Hoevell. In 1840, a small Favorlang-English edition 
of it was issued by Rev. W. H. Medhurst, while two 
years later, a Favorlang-Dutch edition appeared in the 
Transactions of the Batavian Society of Arts and Sciences, 
the Formosan text of which is practically the same as 
Medhurst's. They are both made up oi^ firsts the main 
list of words ; and, secondy of a selection of nominatives 

taken 




Preface xix 

taken from it and printed at the end ; but which second 
list also contains a number of words not included in the 
former larger one ; another confusing thing being that 
almost every page of the entire work presents instances 
of words occurring out of their proper place. Further, 
the following significant sentence occurs at the close of 
Medhurst's second list of words : — * The remarks which 
here follow are the result of a second perusal and careful 
comparison of the preceding sheets. By this reperusal, 
many faults have been discovered and obscurities cleared 
up. The friendly reader will kindly excuse this, as the 
manuscript was originally written in a very antique and 
rather illegible hand, and the language of which it treats 
was at first wholly unknown to the translator.* The 
corrections he then gives cover more than twenty pages. 
These have all been noted here, and the second list has 
been dispensed with by bringing every word into its 
right place under one alphabetic arrangement. Hap- 
part's Favorlang dialect differs in many respects from 
that used by Vertrecht, but, on that very account, it is 
hoped that this specimen will give a completeness to the 
present volume which it could not otherwise possess. 



WoODVlLLE, HiLENSBURGHy 

August, 1896. 




CONTENTS 

I. THE ARTICLES OF CHRISTIAN INSTRUCTION. IN 
THE FAVORLANG DIALECT OF FORMOSA :— 

1. The Lord's Prayer, . . . . . i 

2. The Christian Creed, . . . . s 

3. The Ten Commandments, .... 3 

4. The Morning Prayer, ..... 5 

5. The Evening Prayer, ..... 7 

6. Prayer before Meals, ..... 8 

7. Prayer after Meals, . . -9 

8. Prayer before Religious Instruction, . . .11 

9. Prayer after Religious Instruction, . . .11 

10. Dialogae between a Favorlanger and a Dntchman, i> 

33 
38 

4> 
68 

75 

79 
86 

9' 
98 



11. Christian Maxims, .... 

12. Questions on the Lord's Prayer, . 

13. Questions on the Christian Creed, 

14. Catechism for those about to receive Christian Baptism, 

15. First Sermon. Isaiah Izvi. 79. 

16. Second Sermon, i Timothy ii. 5, 

17. Third Sermon. Hebrews xi. 6, . 

18. Fourth Sermon. John xvii. 3, . 

19. Fifth Sermon. John xvi. 23, . 



II. SPECIMEN OF THE DIALECT NOW USED BY THE 

SEK-HOAN ABORIGINES AT TOA-SIA, . .102 

III. Dialogue between a Japonese and a Formosan. By 

George Psalmanazar, 103 

IV. HAPPART'S FAVORLANG VOCABULARY, .122 



Christian Instruction 




LEER- 
STUKKEN 

TEN GEBRNIKKE DER 

SCHOOLEN VAN 'T FAVOR- 

LANGS' DISTRICT. 

I. 

*T Gebed onses Heeren Jesu 

Christi. 

:nse aiatier Hie (nUe 
Ijemeleti dpH, laat ge^ 
pre0en toecHeti dltoen 

Haat dPltoe ^eer0c^app(t toe^ 
bometi. 

Haat dOitoett tofUe ac^terbolgt 
toecHen, gelpk f nUeti ^emeU al0oo 
op Her aarDen ooL 

(Sttlt on0 pencil on0 genoe^ 
ff0aam brooH. 

(CnUe tiergeeft on0 on0e ober-- 
treHfiigen, gelpb top oob tjerffe-- 
t3eti Hie oti0 quaaH Hoen. 

Haat on0 tifet ber0oc|)t toer- 
Hen enHe t3erlo0t oti0 ban Hen 
boo0en. 

QOlant WL (0 He ^eer^c^appfe, 
enHe He brac^t, enHe He lof> 
altpH en altoo0, iamen« 

Hct 



TUJPONO 
ATIL 

INOIPATTIL LALLUM 

ATILLAIJAN O 

TERNERN. 

I. 

Ai-ach*o ma-achichimit ja 
Torro ta Jesus Christus. 



Amoa tamau tamasea 
paga de bocsum, ip^- 
da^ joa naan. 



Ipfeaija joa chachimit o ai. 

Ipa-i-jorr'o oa airab maibas de 
boesum, masini de ta channumma. 

£pe-e namono piadai torro uppo 
ma-atsikap. 

So-o abo-e namo tataap o kakossi 
natnoa, maibas channumma namo 
mabo tamasea parapies i namo. 

Hai p^bas i namo, ^o-o bar- 
ras'i namo innai rapies ai. 

Inau joa micho chachimit o ai, 
so-o barr'o ai, §0-0 adas ai, taulau- 
lan, Amen. 

Autat 




ARTICLES OF FAITH FOR THE USE OF THE SCHOOLS IN THE 

DISTRICT OF FAVORLANG. 

I. THK PRAYER OF OUR LORD JRSUS CHRIST. 

Our Father which art in Heaven, let Thy Name be praised. Let Thjr dominion 
come. Let Thy will be done, as in Heaven, so also upon earth. Give us this day suffi- 
cient bread. And forgive us our trespasses, as we also forgive them that do us eviL 
Let us not be tempted, and deliver us from evil. For Thine is the dominion, and the 
power, and the praise, for ever and ever, Amen. 

A 




M^ir 



fC 



f Jet CJiraieKkkc Cdcovc 
%% firtiMtw te (fas intXbiier 

^itm€(a ea9€ tec aaeatnj, 

fta^f 9(< Miimfm vs tent 
i«n retiWA Jieai <Cs«3, iea 
t», (f4W#(^ fti«ciu mt 9€ tec^ 

ImQK MM« #itf<. 

Bit fttatn %tiU mma icn 
Bicittt pwUni ^iUamg, » 
ffnifdf i»t |ef con*, §»- 
itrlMii, NfMkeii, f(t«aif m tea 
^ ttt 9itt§f utitte Idle. 

'^Ten tefVen >ifr tfgtfuum 

€f§tU»mmttt ten land, dit> 

iliterf 3iimu%ti§ ; 

iUn iMir ^ tirtrrtomtii 
ML im ff Cf(|ttii U MtnMt en 

Jk fdoflc in ten rdntn 

Siftm 9K9§, Off! I?. <f^r0t. 

31 rdMvr etn tierfaordnffc 
Ian een €htitttn rein ofte 
leiUf Mkf tit Inn ouw 90»tt9t 
i0t nil i#« en #teet# bljftien 0al. 

1^ meteteel, oat (0, i!;entein< 



T 



304 inni a. 



rnnaiAr Afiriiar a 
arfiimit, zi Sgirim '^'""^ 

Sfrnachnce o 2t <ie 




dOaai 

K2 BUOcnK <b xtpfi 




f (lap Oer t^efUfen. 



lerf clinf e Ut ironoen. 



3)e 



isnuimnf m pdi i 

ten i JraHawM^ o 

katnaharr^ja tapes o ax ; 

Innaide kiio sasai 
aOa merien o duciiah o dbo 
ricb-2 so-o machaifa az. 

Ka f»-2poccuxt2t inni CI Ancharo 
Deos o ms^achimic, ci Spirito SsuitOL 

Na-a pittaa o aigarrorro-no cho 
Christan o ma-achimic, o ai pinaga 
ani-aicho, paga pta so-o kapapoet- 
autachsar. 

RofT6no-a4ro cbono ma-achimit 
ai. 

Xbono tataap o kakossi ai. 



lU THE CHKIftTIAS BELIEF. 

I Mt)#f « In (UA th« Y%\htif the Almighty Creator of Heaven and earth : and in Jesus 
ChfM, \U% t/tt\y )mfUiMm% H<m, our Ix/rd, who was conceived by the pure breath of God, 
Om» iio)f (iy/%i, Uftn tfl th« Utrr^ihed virgin Mar^, who suffered under the judge Pontius 
VUnl¥f WM fi«IM iff Otn trtf^, wh/i die^l, wa« liuried, and descended into the pool of fire, 
thai )# Hiill i i\m third day f fe urtAe from the dead ; ascended to Heaven, and sitteth on the 
#l|[hl hand t/f llii f^allMrf, lh« Almighty; from whence He shall return to judge the quick 
nm fh« d4Nul. f fMili«v« In th« pure Ueath of God, the Holy Ghost ; I believe in*ii com- 
nnirtl«m uf « ptirt or holy Christian people, that has been of times of old, is now, and always 



Instruction 



3 



9De op0tanliitig;e l>tfi blet-- 
(CttDe eeti altoo0tiueretilie 

III. 

De Thien Geboden des 
Heeren. 

GjDti 0praii alU He^e tooor- 
Hen: 
Jb ben tie t^eece utoe (Koti, 
Hie u gelefH ^ebbe uft ^et lanH 
(Cgipten, t'^uf^ De0 Iifen0te0. 

1. (Kp en 0ult geen anliere go&en 
Ijebben t30or mpn iaange0(c§te* 

2. (Kp en 0ult u geen ge^neHen 
beelH niaben of eenfge gelpb^ 
beni00e, geen0fn0 tian feli0 Haar 
bot3en U\ Hen fjemel: g;een0fn0 
t3an feli0 beneDen op Her aarHen : 
geen0in0 t3an feli0 fnHe toateren 
onHer Her aarHen: g;^ en 0ult 
boor "^aar niet neHerbuigen, enHe 
g^ en 0ult "^aar nfet Hienen, 
toant Ik He l^eere utoe (PoH, ben 
een Pberfg^ (PoH, Hie He boo^beiH 
Her HaHeren 0oekke (n Hen Kin- 
Heren tot fjet HerHe, enHe t3ierHe 
ge0lac^te, Hie mp l^aten; enHe 
Hoe barm^ertfgliefH aan beel 
Hu(0enHen Hie mp Uef^ebben, 

enHe 



Aseas o bo'ai. 

So-o moricho o ma-^chonsar ai. 
Amen. 

III. 

Tschiet o Attillmo ta yehova. 

'T'A Deos ma-cho tapos o atitc o 
^ minisar : 

Ka-ina paga ta Jehova oa Deosoe, 
tamasea pin^-i-jor ijo innai ta Egip- 
ten, don o aran ai. 

1. Alii papaga ijonoe Dcos a 
roman katinnaamona-amorra-dech. 

2. Alii mamerien ijonoe a oa boa 
o isas a ginaat ja charri o tatschier ; 
pagaga chaddai innai charri o ai 
laluim boesum de babo : pagaga 
chaddai innai charri o ai babo ta 
de rapo : paeaga chaddai innai 
charri o ai lalTum to de rapo ta : 
alii papadachum ijonoe katinnaam 
o dccho, so-o alli allecho aran o 
decho, inau ka-ina ta Jehova oa 
Deosoe, Deos maddobor a tsjes, 
tamasea summad'o arapies o tamau- 
no inni sisjiem pana natorroa, so-o 
kanaspat a tupponodon, tamasea 
mas^sso ina; so-o kamabo ina o 
mapan manna-achpil a tschiet eis, 

tamasea 



shall remain ; in the communion that is, the communion of Saints ; the forgiveness of sins ; 
the resurrection of the flesh ; and in life everlasting. Amen. 

III. THE TKN COMMANDMENTS OP THE LORD. 

God Spake all these words : I am the Lord Thy God, who hast led thee out of the land 



of Egypt, the house of bondage. 
I. T 



*hou shalt have no other Gods before me. 
2. Thou shalt not make unto thee any graven image, or any likeness, of anything above 
in Heaven, of anything here below on earm ; or of anything in the waters under the earth ; 
thou shalt not bow down thyself to them, and thou shalt not serve them ; for I the Lord 
thv God am a jealous God, visiting the iniquity of the fathers upon the children, unto the 
third and fourth generation of them that hate me ; and showing mercy to many thousands 
that love me and keep my commandments. 



4 



Christian 



ttibt mpne geboHtn acjiurdoU 

3' (B^ en 0ult nfet p&elik ne-. 
men ofte boecen Hen naam 
tie0 l^eeren utoed (E!oti0, toant 
(EoH 0al Hen genen nfet tier- 
0c^oonen Hie fi^intn naam pHeUb 

4- (KeHenbt tie0 ^abbat"^-- 
liaacb0> Hat sp H(en re(n(gt, 
ofte befUfft. &e0 Hagen 0ult bp 
arbefHen, enHe al u toecck af^ 
Hoen ^ enHe He 0ebenHe Hag (0 
He &abbatb) Hat in te ^eggen, 
He ru0te He0 l^eecen utoe0(DOH0: 
gp en 0ult op Hen 0elt3en geen 
toerb Hoen, gp nfet, utoe 0oone 
nfet, utoe Hocbter nfet, utoe 
Hfenetlmecbt ofte Hfen^tmaagt 
nfet, utoen toerbo00e nfet, utoe 
tiremHeling nfet, Hfe fn u lanH 
f0, toant m 0e0 Hagen faeeft He 
!^eere t3olefnHfgt b^ntel, aacHe 
enHe lee^enHe ailed Hat Haar fn 
f0, enHe f?p ni0te Hen 0et3enHen 
Hag, Haarom beeft He l^eere Hoen 
bferen Hen &abbatbHacb> enHe 
Hen 0elt3en gebefligt. 

5- &pH 0cbaambaftfg, ofte 
eerbfeHfg fegen^ liix^tn baHer 
enHe moeHer, op Hat utoe Hagen 
benneerHert toetHen f nHen lanHe, 
Hat He ^eere utoe (0oH0 u geeft. 

6. (Bg 



ina, so-o um- 



tamasea maukat o 
mior o na-a atillo. 

3. AUi mamarach o baak o naan 
o Jehova oa Deos-ech, inau ta 
Jehova alli mamabono chono ai^ 
kamarach o baak o choa naan. 



4. Tuppina o zijsj'o Sabbath-ai, 
all'ijo pachimit o aicho. Nataap a 
rummies tatummaap ijonoc, so-o 
a-ummoob o tapos oa tataap i so-o 
naitoa zijsja paga Sabbath, micho- 
sar a pattite, aissassen o Jehova oa 
Deos-ech : paga tatummaap ijo de 
ailo charri o ai, pa ijo, pa oa 
sjiem badda, pa oa sjiem mammali, 
pa oa aran o badda, ja mammali pa 
oa loan o tummaap, pa oa azjies- 
cch de oa ta ; inau iallum nataap a 
zijsja ta Jehova inummoob o boc- 
sum, o ta, a abas, so-o tapos o ai de 
Iallum ailoe, so-o kanaitoa zijsja 
pissassen icho, inau decho ta Jehova 
pindrab o zijsj'o Sabbath ai, so-o 
pinachimit o micho. 



5. A-arich£ oa tamau so-o oa 
tanai, alia moab o zijsja de ta-ech, 
ta Jehova oa Deos pe'o ijo. 



6. Alli 



3. Thou shalt not idly pronounce or use the name of the Lord thy God, for the Lord 
will not hold him guiltless that taketh His name in vain. 

4. Remember the Sabbath day, to keep it pure or holy. Six days shalt thou labour and 
finish all thy work ; but the seventh day is the Sabbath, that is, the resting time of the Lord 
thy God ; on that day thou shalt not do any work, neither thyself nor thy son, nor thy 
daughter, nor thy man-servant, nor thy maid-servant, nor thy ox, nor thy stranger that 
dwelleth in thy land ; for in six days the Lord finished creating Heaven and earth, the sea, 
and all that therein is, and He rested the seventh day, therefore the Lord commands to 
celebrate the Sabbath day, and to keep it holy. 

5. Be modest or respectful to thy father and mother, that thy days be prolonged in the 
land, that the Lord thy God giveth thee. 




Instruction 



S 



6. (S^ en 0ult nfet Hooli^laam 

7- (E!p en 0ult nfet ec^tbreben. 

8. (Ep en 0ult nfet 0telen. 

9- (Kp en jSuIt seen t3al0 
getuf 0enf00e 0preben teg;en utoen 
naa0ten. 

10. (Bp en 0ult nfet begeeren 
utoe0 naa0ten |)uf0, gp en 0ult 
nfet beffeecen utoe0 naa0ten0 
tDPf) ofte dpnen tifen0tbnecit, 
otte liien0tmaag;t, ofte 0pnen 
toerbo00e, ofte 0^nen e0el, ofte 
feli0 Hat utDe0 naa0ten epsen f0. 

IV. 

Het Morgen Gebed. 

D 0rmbertfge 92atier ^ top loben 
^ m. Hat (Bp Hen tjoocleDen nacbt 
000 toaadib oter on0 Ijebt toacgt 
gebouHen, entie bfHHen WL Hat 
(Pv o\\9 toflt 0terbben met ii\x^tn 
retnen ianeni, Hen !^. (Stttity Hat 
!^? on0 boortaan gelefHe, op Hat 
top fn alle toerbben Her gereclj- 
tfgbeiH enHe refnfs'^efH mogen 
ten efnHe brengen He0en Hag, 
gelpb ook alle He Hagen on0e0 
ret3en0 ; enHe toaar top on0 toe- 

0etten 



6. AUi papach'o machi ijoiioe. 
y. Alii chachummod ijonoe. 

8. Alii mamchap ijonoe. 

9. Alii papattite ijonoe o tattas- 
sal ma-attosik kasjabaan oa ma- 
achiddik o cho. 

10. Alii mamaksas o don oa ma- 
achiddik o cho, alii mamaksas o 
roos oa ma-achiddik o cho, ja cho 
aran o badda, ja mammali, ja choa 
loan o tummaap, ja chao loan o 
maraag, ja charri o ai kamaunis a 
oa ma-ach^ddik o chonoe. 

IV. 

Ai-ach*o Patsjisimma. 

\TA-ab6 a Tamau madas ijo 
'^^-''namOjalPijo rinummi i torroani 
bi-ini masini o gagil, so-o me^ch'ijo, 
alia merab ijo pibarr'i torro o ta 
joa Auchar o ma-£chimit-ech, alia 
pana rummi-es pa-i-jor i namo ja 
ichosar, alia namo inni tapos o 
tataap o babisse a chimit ummoob 
o zijsj'o mini, maibas channumm'o 
tapos zijsj'o torroa morich : so-o 
tummalpon onumm'ija namo, alia 
torro tallochon maddobor o pattite 



6. Thou shall not kill. 

7. Thou shalt not commit adultery. 

8. Thou shalt not steal. 

9. Thou shalt not bear false witness against thy neighbour. 

10. Thou shalt not covet thy neighbour's house, and thou shalt not covet thy neighbour's 
wife, nor his man-servant, nor his maid-servant, nor his ox, nor his ass, nor anything that 
belongs to thy neighbour. 

IV. THB MORNING PRAYBR. 

Merdful Father 1 we praise Thee, that Thou hast so faithfully watched over us during 
the past night, and we pray Thee that Thou mayest strengthen us by Thy pure breath, the 
Holy Ghost ; that He may henceforth lead us, so that in every work of righteousness and 
parity we may end this day, as also all the other davs of our life ; and that to whatsoever 
we apply ourselves we may always endeavour openly to declare Thy praise, since we can 



6 



Christian 



0etteti) Hat top 0tttie0 ong beb- 
Utfgen, om Wx>tn lot opentUb 
uftte0preben ; al0oo tiat top t3an 
dUtoe mtlHe^attli alleene bectoac^- 
ten He tiuipe ban alien on0en 
arbelti. (EnDe op Hat top He^e 
genalie berbrpgen ban m^ toilt 
on0 becffeben, bolffen0 't ge- 
tui0enf00e 9Itoe0 tooorb0, alle 
on0e obertcebingen, om bat ref ne 
Ipben enbe bloebbergietfnge 
on0e0 t^eeren enbe 9^tbbelaar0 
3e0u C^ri0tf^ toant on0 et- 
moeb berouto baac ban ^tzfu 
(UerUcbt oob on^e 0felen, op bat 
top, alle toerbben bee buidteC' 
ni00e toeggetoorpen 0pnbe« al0 
bfnberen be0 ltcbt0 on0 beg:e^ 
ben tot een nim leben, om te 
toanbelen in alle gerec^ticbeib 
(E!ob0. 9Doet oob Oltoe bulpe 
baar toe, bat uftgeroepen en 
bunbaar gemaabt toerben WL 
tooorb in alle plaat0en. 92e^ 
0troft alle toerbben bed &atan0« 
&terbt alle leeraren utoe0 
tooorb0, en bebelbebberen Btoed 
bolb0^ ^roo0t alle berbolgbe 
per0oonen, enbe mf0troo0ttge 
0{elen, om Iltoed gelieCben 
&oon0 3e0u Cbrf^tf toflle, 
toelbbe on0 betutgt l^ttlt. bat 
alle0 toat top in &pnen i^aam 
beg:eeren, (Ep on0 de&erUb geben 
0ult, enbe baarom on0 bebolen 
beeft al0oo te btbben:— i3)n0e 
alaber, etc^ Het 



o tapos assabaji oa adas ; masinisar 
alia torro tummassin o a-olli-eul 
o torroa tapos o tataap innai joa 
ma-adalddl a rima ma-akamun- 
chisar. §0-0 alia namo marach o 
b6no mini innai ijo, eribbana mabo 
i namo, kamaibas o al'o joa ranied, 
o tapos torroa kakossi, inau ma- 
chote o ma-^chimit, so-o sasa-od o 
tagg'o torroa ma-ach^chimit a ma- 
azinado ta Jesus Christus; inau 
machia ja torroa tsjes aicho-ies. 
Ipirara channumm'o torroa tsjes, 
alia namo, kaitis o tapos o tataap 
o odum, maibas o sisjiem o rara 
tummalpon o bao a morich, alia 
mababat inni tapos o babisse o ta 
Deos. Ipachipp'oa a-olli-eul chan- 
numma, ino akaukauan so-o ipab'oa 
ranied de tapos o ta. Ipiurtatach'o 
tapos o tataap o ta Saitan. Ipa- 
barra o tapos ma-atil o joa ranied, 
so-o ta ma-achachimit o joa chosar. 
Talattala o tapos liollioon a cho, 
so-o tsiannanni a tsjes, inau oa 
auk^ttan a sjiem baada ta Jesus 
Christus, tamasea minaunis o al'i 
namo, alia tapos o ai torro mcach'- 
inni choa naan, gagil oa pape'i 
namo, so-o inau micho pinattillo 
torro mcach'o masini : — Namoa 
Tamau, etc. 



jtt-ach'o 



expect from Thv bounteous hand alone the assistance required in all our labours. And in 
order we may obtain this mercy from Thee, forgive us, according to the testimony of Thy 
word, our transgressions, only and alone for the sufferings of our Lord and Mediator, who 
shed His blood for us ; and because we repent of our sins. Enlighten also our souls, so that 
after abandoning all the works of darkness, we may as the children of light enter upon a 
new life, and walk in the righteous paths of God. Give also Thy assistance in the work of 
proclaiming Thy word, and making it known in all parts of the world. Disperse all the 
works of Satan. Strengthen all teachers of Thy Word, and all the chiefs of Thy people. 



Instruction 



7 



V. 



Het Avond Gebed. 

D £Irm^ert(Q;e (Eoti ^ teutofg 
" Ucfjt ttoelk jsc^gnt Uibt tiuf0- 
ternf00e, life (Bp fterncpft Heu 
tiac^t Her boo0er toerbben, etitie 
^et bUnHe gemoeti: aang;e0fen 
(Pp tien nac^t Hoet bometi om te 
ru0»n, gelpb Hett Hag; om te 
arbefHen, top bfDbeu 92, laat 
on0e Ussamett 0tfl enbe bcebig; 
tu0ten, op bat0e baac na 
bequaam 0uUett 0pn te b^i^ben 
beti arbeib, bfe^e berrfcljten 
moeten. 9^at(gt on^en 0laap, 
bat be 0elbe nfet onorbentelib en 
0P> op Oat on0e Ug^ameti enbe 
0teleti fiixibn bipben; fa, bat 
oilmen 0laap oor^abe gebe (Utoeti 
name te loben. (Uerlfcbt be 
oogen on0e0 ber0tanb0, bat top 
nfet en bipben 0lapen in ben boob : 
baar en tegen laat on0 0tebe0 
toac^ten, om berlo0t te toerben 
ban be boo0e broeffenf00e op 
Oe0er aarben. 25e0cbermt on0 
oob ban alle aanbecbtfnge be0 
&atan0: gelefb on0 al0 utoe 

bfnberen 



V. 



Ai-acKo Marpesa. 

p\Eos o ma-ibo a tsjes rar£ o ma- 
-■^^chonsar o ai tumsar i odum, 
tamasea paube o bi-ini o tataap o 
arapies, so-o rapalna tsjes ; inau ka- 
itan ijo p^i o bi-ini, alia pissassen, 
maibas o zijsja, alia tummaap ; 
meach'ijo namo ipaissassen'o torroa 
bog kakaitsitsi a ina-a-arra, alia 
mamatsikap asag-£ moddon o ta- 
taap, o ai maspot a ummcx>b aicho- 
ies. Ipaka-qua'o torroa sasarra, 
depa matsiball^ch ja micho, alia 
michonsar ma-ichimit o torroa bog 
a tsjes-oe ; hena channumma alia 
padis ja oa naan torroa sas£rra. I pa- 
rar'o machi o torroa saan, depa 
mdchonsar summarra ja namo inni 
macha : kasjabaan ipatassina torro 
tallochon ino barrasan ja torro 
innai zichil o rapies de babo ta 
mini. Aladikk'i namo channumma 
innai tapos o lalal'o ta §aitan : 
maibas oa sisjiem a-i-jorr'i namo 
o ta joa ma-4chimit o Auchar-ech. 
§o-o pagatomma torro inummoob 
o zijsj'o mini, alii marotul o ka- 

kossi 



Comfort all persons who are persecuted and who suffer affliction ; for the sake of Thy 
beloved Son, who hast testified unto us that Thou wilt give us all things we pray for in His 
Name, and therefore Thou bast taught us thus to pray : — Our Father, etc 



V. THE EVENING PRAYER. 

Merciful God ! Eternal Light, that shinest in the darkness, who dispellest the darkness 
of wicked works and enlightenest the benighted mind, inasmuch as Thou dost appoint the 
night for rest, even as the day for labour ; we pray Thee that our bodies mav rest in quiet 
and peace, so that they may be fit to perform the work they have to do. Moderate our 
sleep, so that it may not be excessive, and that our bodies and minds may remain pure ; nay, 
may our sleep give cause to praise Thy Name. Enlighten also the eyes of our under- 
standing, so that we may not remain sleeping unto death, but let us rather live in constant 
hope otbeing delivered from the evil afflictions of this world. Protect us also from all the 
temptations of Satan ; lead all as Thy children by Thy pure breath (the Holy Ghost), and 




8 



Christian 



fifnliereti met Jtl\x^tn vtintn 
8ibtm. (Hen % (Bttgt) enoe 
tioetoet top nitt bonnet ober^ 
tretifngen He^en Haff ten etntie 
gebraclt ^ebben; groote enHe 
boo0e obertreHfngen tegett Wttx>tn 
toflle ; top bfHHen Wiy toilt on0e 
otiertretifngen beHebben Hoor 
utoe barmbertiff^efli, KelpftkeC' 
top0 (Ep aile tifngen op He^er 
aarHen DeHebbet met He Huf^ter- 
nf00e lie0 nac^t^, op Hat top 
Haarom nfet tiec^tooten toetHen 
ban WL aange^fcfite^ Haat oob 
ru0ten, en bectroo^t alle branbbe 
pec^oonen, alle bebroeHie enbe 
aangebocfitene 0felen ban ben 
&atan, om on0e0 l^eeren le0u 
C^rf0tf tofUe, bfe on0 geleerb 
beeft albu0 te bfbben :— i3)n0e 
aiaber, etc^ 

VI. 

Gebed voor den Eten. 

A met ooffen toac^ten 31: enbe 
-^^(Bp geeft Jen Jare 0pp0e tot 
tiaarber 0tonb. (Sv boet utoe Janb 
open, enbe ber^abigt aUe0 toatter 
leeft na ben lu0t tltoe^ 
toillen^. 

I^eecdc'^apper^^lmactitige (Eob^ 
bte aUe0 ge^cjapen tiebt, en 
jSonber opbouben onber^teunt 

met 



kossi; tataap o kakossi mato a 
rapies kasjabaan oa airab ; me^ch'ijo 
namo, er£bbana tummakkoop tor- 
roa kakossi o joa bo, maibas ijo 
tummakkoop o tapos ai babo ta 
mini o odum o bi-ini, depa inau 
decho kartattisan ja namo innai joa 
morra-dech. Ip^issassena chan- 
numma so-o talattala o tapos cho 
ma-idig, mi-azichil, so-o lalan a 
a tsjes innai ta Saitan, inau ma- 
ach^chimi t ja torro ta Jesus Christus, 
tamasea pinittil i namo me^ch'o o 
masini : — Namoa Tamau, etc. 



VI. 

AUach^o tinnaam Man. 

X^'Ach^ o tapos o ai tummassin 
-'•'^•'•ijo : so-o ijo pc'i decho cho'ino- 
chan ka choa rasoom. Ijo kumrir 
oa rima, so-o padabbi o tapos, o 
ai morich, kamaibas o aukat 
oa airab. 

Ma-achachimit ta Deos kama- 
barr'ija tapos o ai, tamasea mineri- 
ensar o tapos ai, so-o tumka taulau- 

lan 



although we have not finished this day without having committed great and wicked sins 
against Thy will ; we pray Thee, that Thy mercy may cover all our trespasses, even as Thou 
dost cover all things upon this earth with the darkness of night, so that we may not be cast 
forth from Thy countenance. Give also rest and consolation to all sick persons, to all who 
are afflicted, to all souls harassed by Satan ; for the sake of our Lord Jesus Christ, who hath 
taught us thus to pray : — Our Father, etc. 

VI. PRAYER BEFORE MEALS. 

All eyes wait upon Thee, and thou givest them food in due season. Thou openest Thy 
hand, and satisfieth every thing that liveth, according to Thy almighty will. 

Almighty Ruler, Almighty God 1 who hast created all things, and who by Thy divine 



Instruction 



9 



met (Utoe (KoHHeUbbe brac^t, (Ep 
tiie ^et bolb J^rael ge0pp0t ijebt 
fnUe tofllieruf0de, toilt uft^trebs 
bett utoe mfltilieiD t30or on0 dDtoe 
acme Hiettaar^, enUe oti0 bequaam 
tnabeii lie0e gaten, Hfe to^ oiit^ 
fangeti ban (Utoe milUe ^anH, 
Hat \DP0t na (lltDeti goetieti toille 
maticgliti eiiDe 0uiberliti nuttf^ 
StWy entie Haar uft befcenneti Hat 
(R^ on0e dlatier, entie een toare 
oor0pronb ailed 0oeD0 0pli. (Keeft 
oob Hat top altpHd ett boor alle 
Hfngen doekbett b^t brooH ber 
0felen, (U toootb, toaar boor on0e 
0ielen Be0pp0t toerbett ten eeu-- 
tofgen leben, ttoelb (Kp on0 toe^ 
gedegt bebt te 0ullen geben, om 
bat reine Ipben <Utoe0 gelfefben 
&oon0 3|e0u Cljri0tf, 0men. 



VII. 

Gebed na den Eten. 

A 110 SP 0ult gegeten "^ebben 
-^^ enbe berdabfgt 0pn, 0ult gp 
(oben be ^eere (Utoen (Pob ober 't 
goebe lanb, bat !^p u Ifeben 0al 
gegeben ^ebben. QOlac^t u 0tU 

ben, 



Ian oa barr'o Deossar, ijo tamasea 
pinain o chono Israel inni ma- 
aimoch a bonna, eribbana tummd 
joa al-£l i babo torro joa aran o 
ma-asabba, so-o paitsikap i namo 
^sosono mini, torro marach innai 
joa ma-adald£l a rid, alia torro 
kamaibas o mario oa airab tsimimis 
o qua a chimit aicho-ies, so-o 
innai micho madarram alia paga ijo 
namoa Tamau, so-o chupp6d o 
gagil o tapos rid. £pe-e chan- 
numma alia tallochon so-o tinnaam 
o tapos ai torro summad'o uppono 
tsjes$ar,oa ranicd inninumma chan- 
nan ja torroa tsjes pana morich o 
ma-^chonsar, o ai pinab'o pape'i 
namo ijonoe, inau machote o ma- 
^chimit oa aukattan a sjiem badda 
ta Jesus Christus, Amen. 



VII. 

Ai-acb^o a-i-jor a Man. 

IT'A ochal mam^n a mamaddabi 
-•^ ijonoe, mamadas ijo i ta Jehova oa 
Deos-ech, inau mario a ta, o ai 
ochal icho pape'imonoe. £-illa na 
joa micho boa, depa poach ijo i ta 

Jehova, 



power constantly upholdest all things ; Thou who hast fed Thy people Israel in the wilder- 
ness, praciouslv extend now Thy bountv to Thy poor servants, and bless these gifts unto us ; 
the giAs which we receive from Thy bountiful hand ; so that we may moderately, and in 
singleness of heart, partake of them, thus acknowledging that Thou art our Father, and that 
Thou art the source from whence all good cometh. Grant that we may always, and above 
all other things, seek the Bread of the soul, Th^ Word, so that our souls may be fed unto 
Life everlasting, which Thou hast promised to give us, only for the sake of the great suffering 
of Thy beloved Son Jesus Christ. Amen. 



VII. PRAYER TO BE USED AFTER MEALS. 

After thou hast partaken of food, and art satisfied, thou shalt praise the Lord Thy God 
for the fertile land that He hath given thee. Take heed that ye do not forget the Lord thy 

B 




lO 



Christian 



t3ett, tiat sn tiiet ett bergetet iie0 
l^eeren utoe0 (Koti0, Hat gp mi^- 
0cl)fett afet ac^terbolffet &pne 
geboHeti eiiHe &pne rec|un, enHe 
tiln^etttngen &pne0 tooocti^, Hie 
ik u IteHeti ti^Heti gebfeDe. 

!^eer0ciapper i (KoH t^e- 
mel0cbe (UaDer^ top lo&en (HI 
ot3er aile ?|[2toe toelHaHen, tite toj) 
0tflie0 ontbangeti batt (Ktoe 
milDel^anti, Hat fjet ^toettcKoDHe- 
libkett tDille i0 on0 te onHer^ 
bouHen tti Hit betffanbbdikke 
feben, entie ong te geben aUe0 
toattop bait nooHett bebbeti: int 
bp0onDer« bat (Ep on0 tDeberge-. 
boren b^ot tot be ^ope ban een 
betec leben, ttoelb (Ep on0 b^bt 
te benneti gegeben boor ^et mU 
bere tooorb WL\x>t0 (CbangeUum^. 

TBarm'^ertige (Kob enbe ^abec^. 
to|^ bibbeti WL^ bat (Kp niet toe en 
laat bat on0e 0telen giec 0ouben 
blpben aanbletien be berganbbe- 
Ukbe ffoeberen op be0er aarben : 
baerentesen laat on0 gebuericb 
optoaact^ 0ten na ben kernel, om 
ban baar te bertoacfiten on^en 
(Kerlo00er Je^um C^n0tum« tot 
bat l^p t3er0c^pnen 0al tnbe 
toolbben tot on0er berlo^^fnge* 

amen. Gebed 



Jehova, oa Deossar, kailau ijo pa 
ummior o choa ^tillo, a choa bisse- 
bisse, a sasirau choa ranied, o ai 
na-a pattillo imoa piad^i. 



Ma-achichimit ta Deos Tamau 
de bocsum, madas, ijo namo inau 
tapos joa tataap o rio, torro talloch- 
on marach innai joa ma-adaldal a 
rima, alia paga oa airab o Deossar 
porich torro boa inni morich o ma- 
auribal o mini, so-o pe'i torro tapos 
o ai masabb'ija namo : kamaunionis, 
airijo pinodd'o tattaul'i namo ka 
tattassin o m^so mario a morich, o 
ai pinab'i namo ijonoe inni oa ma- 
achimit o ranied o Evangelium. 



Deos o Tamau ma-^bo a tsjes, 
meach'ijo namo, depa kummono 
ijo alia mamachonsar torroa tsjes 
insini mikkap o ma-aurib^l a bal- 
lach de ta mini : kasjabain ipidau- 
koa torro tallochon pana boesum, 
all'innaide tummassin torroa ma- 
ababirras ta Jesus Christus, ite 
tatummoach icho lallum rabbo 
pana torroa babarris, Amen. 



God, and that ye neglect not to keep His commandments and His statutes, as well as the 
institutions of His Word, which I have (given) commanded you this day. 

Almighty Ruler, God our Heavenly Father, we praise Thee for all Thy benefits, which 
we are contmually receiving from Thy bountiful hand ; that it is Thy divine will we should 
he sustained by Thee in this transitory life ; and that Thou dost give us all that we require ; 
above all things, that Thou hast begotten us unto the hope of a better life, which Thou hast 
made known unto us through the pure word of Thy Gospel. 

Merciful God and Father ! we pray Thee, that Thou wilt not suffer our souls to cleave 
unto the perishable possessions of tnis world ; let us on the contrary continually look up to 
heaven, whence we expect our Saviour Jesus Christ, till He shall appear in the clouds to 
deliver us. Amen. 



Instruction 



II 



VIII. 

Gebed voor de Onderwy- 

singe. 

\\T (CI aan laat on0 (Eoti alliu0 
^^ brtUen:— 

(Eon ^emel0c^e (Ualier^ QUtoen 
naam bestnti op te gaatt otier 
on0; tnUe top 0pti bp ben am 
beren te tauten, om aantefiooren 
enbe te leeren (Eto tooorb: openb 
on0e boobe oocen, tnl>t be^traalt 
on0e bui0tere l^emn, op bat top 
ter bege baten, ber^taan, tnl}t 
obtcbenkbett mogett <Utoe leere, 
om le0u Cbrf0ti 3P[toe0 gelief^ 
l}ti\ &oon0 toflU, iamen. 



IX. 

Gebed na de Onderwysinge. 

(^ (C'-elnblcbt^ebbenbe te leecen, 
^^kompt^ faat on0 (Bob albus 
lobeti en orp0en. 

(Eob £limacl)tfg;e 92aber^ top 
bebben gefjoort bat (Pp on0t 
olaber 0pb, bat (Ep alle men-- 
0ctien formeert,0pp0t enbe onber^ 
lioub^ 9Qlp loben (IXtoen j^aam, 

om 



VIII. 



Ai-acha katmnaam Atil. 



A Ssinman-a torro meach'o Deos- 
'^^'sar masini : — 

Deos o Tamau de boesum, ka- 
pesasa tummoach i namo joa naan : 
so-o marorro ja namo, alia masini 
so-o pattil o joa ranied. Tsikakk'i 
torroa chorrien a charrina, ^o-o 
ip^tillagg'o torroa ma-audum a 
tsjes, alia marach ja namo, maba, 
so-o tump'o gagil oa atil inau ta 
Jesus Christus oa sjiem badd'au- 
kattan, Amen. 



IX. 

Ai'Ocha a-i-jor a Atil. 

l/'Aposisi pattil o pia annum- 
-^^ mannumma torroa mamad& 
i ta Deos masini. 

Deoso Tamau kamabarr^ja tapos 
o ai, kaminasinija namo, alia paga 
ijonoe namoa Tamau, airiio me- 
riensar, paan so-o porichsar o 
tapos o cho. yizAis namoa joa 

naan. 



Vin. PRAYER BBFORB RELIGIOUS INSTRUCTION. 

Come, let us thus pray to God : — 

O God our heavenly Father I Thy Name is beginning to shed its light upon us, and we 
are now gathered together to listen to Thy Word, and to be instructed therein : Open our 
deaf ears, and illumine our dark understandings, in order that we may fully comprehend, 
understand, and ponder on Thy doctrine, for the sake of Jesus Christ Thy beloved Son. 
Amen. 

IX. PRAYER AFTER RELIGIOUS INSTRUCTION. 

Come, let us praise and laud our God, now that we have been instructed in His Word. 
O God, Almighty Father I we have heard that Thou art our Father, that Thou createst, 
feedest, and sustamest all men. We praise Thy Name, because Thou hast pity upon us, and 



J 




12 



Christian 



om bat (Rp WL on0er ontfermt, 
tniz on0 Rompt roepen, om te 
0vn WL efgen hoik, en bfntiereii 
(DOti0. (Eeeft tiat top on0 mogeti 
berblptien, en metter fjecten ot^er- 
Henkeit tie0e (Utoe groote genaHe, 
ten efnUe top Hen ouDen men0c|)e 
toegHoen, enHe al0 nieutoe men- 
0c]^en natiolgen l)et leten ^toed 
&oon0 le0u C^rt^ti, Hie on0 
ffeleerti (eeft alliu0 te bfHHen :— 
€>n0e (UaHer, etc* 

X. 

Tsamen-gesprek tusschen 
een Favorlanger en Hol- 
lander Vreemdeling. 

1. jfatjotlanffet. I^ou tjtem&el'. 
inSy t3an toaar t0 He bom0te "^fer ? 

9IremtieUnff. Jk ben gebomen 
ban fterre, tjan't efntie ban't 
toe0ten* 

2. jfab. (LUat 0e0f e Hoc^ ^ 0pti f e 
niet moeHe dan 000 bercen toeg: 
te gaan ? 

aire, 'b (Cn "^ebbe nfet gegaan ^ 
^b ^ebbe ge^eten in een groot 
0cbfp pa00et:enlie obec 0ee al0 
een xiogeU 

3- if ab- 



naan, inau mabo ijonoe a torro 
boa, so-o mai malod namono, alia 
paga oa maunis a cho, so-o sisjiem 
o Deos. Epe-e maukat namo, 
so-o tump'i tsjes matoto oa b6no 
minisar, alia namo tummis o raras 
a cho, so-o maibas o bao a cho 
tsimichier o morich oa sjiem badda 
ta Jesus Christus, tamasea pinittil 
i namo meach'o masini : — Namoa 
Tamau, etc. 



X. 

Karri-atite tuppacb sjam 

Tememy so-o ta Holland -- 

azjies. 

1. Ternern. Azjies au innainum- 
tn'ijo kamai insini ? 

Azjies. Kaminai ja ina innai 
maro, innai sies o tsipan-ech. 

2. Ter. Tanaas ! ja alii orachan 
o mababat talcho a maro a tar- 
ran ? 

Jzj. Paga minababat ina ; ka 
minero-os ja ina de don o mato 
pasji tarran o abas, maibas o mam- 
pa. 

3. Ter. 



didst come to call us, to be Thine own peculiar people and children of God. Grant that we 
may rejoice, and ponder in our hearts on this Thy great mercy, so that we may put off the 
old man, and as new men follow in the steps of Thy Son Jesus Christ, who has taught us 
thus to pray : — Our Father, etc. 



X. DIALOGUB BETWEEN A FAVORLANGER AND A DUTCH STRANGER. 

1. Favorlanger, Well, stranger, from whence do you come ? 

Stranger, I come from a great distance, from the extreme part of the west. 

2. Fav, You don't say so 1 Are you not tired of having walked such a long distance? 

Sir. I have not walked ; I was sitting in a large ship, that passed over the sea like a 
bird. 




Instruction 



13 



f. 



ifab. QOlat f 0t mogelf k^ &pli(e 
ang otitietlDeeff getoee^t ? 

dlre^ Ja: al laager al0 uu 
^alf faar. 

4- iFab. QQlat bompt SH |)fer ma-- 
ken? 

Witt. Jk borne tie ifador- 
langer^ be0oeiiiieti. 

5- ifab. I&omt sn 0lec|)0 om te 
be^oekben ? 

Witt, ^ttn: nfet alleeti om te 
be0oebbett. 
6. <ab. QQleltoat^ebtgptttioeti? 

Witt. Jk bebommere mp om 
ti^iFaborlanger0 te leereti ben 
toeg tia liett bemeL 
7- ifab. QQlel "^oe, toaac lang^ 
|eeu 0trebt He toeg na Hen fie- 
mel ; f00er toel een 000 langen 
laHHer tot Hen ^emel ? 

aire* (Bp 0pD mal ; toett gp 
met Hat O^oH He recfateerHfge 
0felen fnHen ^emel ^aalH ? 
8* iF^ti. lb meinHe Hat ]^afbo0 
on0e 0Uun toegnanu 

Witt. QOlat (0 "^afbo^, een 
men^cfi of gedpeud ? 
9. jab. ^b (UUeet niet. 

(Ure. QQlel Han, toat noemt gp 
tia(bo0 ? 

10. ifab. 



3. Ter. Tanaas! ja milip de tar- 
ran ijonoe ? 

Jzj\ Hena ; maso milip a 
geroan a baas. 
4« Ter. Mai merien onumm'insini ? 

Azj. Na-a mai tumboel Tcr- 
nern. 

5. Ter. Ja oa mai tumboel baak- 
sar ? 

Azj. Maini : pagaga baaksar ? 

6. Ter. Mai maspot onumma ? 
jfzj. Ka na-a maddobor pattil 

i Tcrncrn o tarran i boesum al- 
oe. 

7. Ter. Oedan, pasji dem'ausoan 
tarran pana boesum ai ; ja paga 
talcho a ma-atsiI6 a kittas pana 
boesum? 

jfzj. Chubboen ijo, ja mautsiri 
alia ta Deos maracho ma-abissea 
tsjes o ai i boesum-ech ? 

8. Ter, Na'esurro alia ta haibos 
marach o torroa tsjes-oe. 

jfzj, Numm'ija haibos ja ba- 
bosa Ja rich£ ? 

9. Ten Nacha. 

jfzj, Oedan, pattonan onum- 
m'ijo ta haibos. 

10. Ter, 



3. Fav, Is it possible ? Were you long on the way ? 
Sir, Yes, even more than half a year. 

4. Fav. What do you come here for ? 
Sir, I came to visit the Favorlangers. 

5. Fav. Have you come only to visit us ? 
Sir. No, not only to visit you. 

6. Fav. Well, what do you come to do here ? 

Sir. I desire to teach the Favorlangers the way to heaven. 

LFav. Well, how ? Where is the road that leads to heaven ? Does there exist such a long 
der that it will reach to heaven ? 

Sir, You are very foolish ; do you not know that God leads the righteous souls to 
heaven ? 

8. Fav. I thought that haibos took away our souls. 
Sir, Who is haibos, a man or a ghost ? 

9. Fav. I don't know. 

Sir, Well then, whom do you call haibos? 




H 



Christian 



10. ifab^ llfto^^t^^^tto"*^^^^ 
noemt gp ®oli ? 

WLvt. S)tn &c^epper tian 

liemel) aarbe, enUe }ttj noem fb 

(Eon. 

11. jfat3« (Ep bait) (00et: eett 
&c^epper t3an kernel en aac&e ? 

9tre. &eiier faa't. 

12. Jfat3. QQlat f0 0pii naam ? 
aire. &pti eigeti naam (0 

le^oba, fn&er tiremlien tale 

13' ifab. WLat (0 tiat te 0eggen, 
Ifefiotja ? 

dire. 3el)0ba, Hat (0 te fits-- 
gen, een toe^en of per0oon Hie 
altPH getoee0t (0, (0, enHe 
blptt. 

14* ifad. OQlp en toeten dan (EoH 
nfet; bunti gp toel betop0en 



batter een (Eoti 0p. 

: fbbc 

bat? 



SPire. la : fti Kan. 
15- iFat3. (ullaar u(t betop0t gp 



Witt. Jb betop0e bat uft be 
0eer sroote bennf00e enbe mac^t 
(Eob0. 

i6. jfab. (LUaar bet^oont (Eob 
0pn beelboubfge mac^t, mu 
bennf00e ? 

2Hre. 



10. Ter. Nachinumma: tomm'ijo 
pattonan ta Deos ? 

Azj. Ni'Z pattonan o Airien 
o boesum, o ta, a abas, ta Deos. 

11. Ter. Ijo mauranies : ja pagi 
Airien o boesum a ta ? 

Azj. Gagil pagi. 

12. Ter. Naan onumm'icho ? 
jfzj. Choa maunis naan pagi 

ta Jehova, inni atite o azjies, ta 
Deos. 

1 3. Ter. Numma micho a pattite, 
Jehova ? 

jfzj. Jehova, micho a pattite, 
nattada ga ja boa tamasea pinaga, 
paga, so-o machonsar taidaulan. 

14. Ter. Mautsiri i ta Deos ja 
namo ; ja mab'o pait'ijonoe aUa 
paga ta Deos ? 

jfzj. Hena: maba. 

15. Ter. Innainumm'ijo pait'o ail- 
oe? 

jfzj. Na-a pait'o micho innai 
aba so-o barr'o Deos talcho a 
mato. 

16. Ter. Dema ta Deos pait'o 
choa barro, so-o aba matoto ? 

jfzj. 



10. Fop. 
Sir. 

11. Fav, 
Sir. 

12. Fav, 
Sir, 

13. Fav, 
Sir. 

remain. 

14. Fav. 
God? 

Sir. 

15. Fav. 
Str. 

16. Fav. 



I don't know. Whom do you call God ? 

The Creator of heaven, of the earth and of the sea : Him I call God. 

You talk nonsense 1 Is there a Creator of heaven and earth ? 

Certainly, there b. 

What b his name ? 

His own name is Jehovah ; in foreign languages, it is Deos. 

What does Jehovah signify ? 

Jehovah signifies a being or person who has always been, is, and always will 

We do not know anything about God. Can you indeed prove that there is a 

Yes, I can. 

How do vou prove that? 

I prove that from the great wisdom and power of God. 

In what things does God prove His manifold power and wisdom ? 




Instruction 



Witt. Jti 0ptt tlstn toerii- 

17- £at3. QQlat toerbben ? 

Sire, ^tn mac||tig;e, en&e 
lieerUiiiie toerbiiett. 
i8. jFat3* (Keeft lie0e toeciiiien te 
bennen ? 

(Ure. 9Den ^tmtlj aarHboHem, 
^ee, 0onne, mane, gcoote, kltlnt 
0urren>oliiben, bltjcetn, Honliet:, 
aarHbebfnge. 

19- jfab. &)?ttliftaltemaal(Koli0 
efgett totckbeti ? 

Wivu !&et 0pn^ 

20. jfat). !^oe betop0t gp Hat ? 
^re. Jk betDp0'et altiu0: of 

He kernel, aartie, |ee, 0pti altoo0 
getDee^r, oCte 0pn ban een antier 
Sentaaiit^ 

21. jFat3. 9^f00c^fen (0 Hen ^e^ 
mel nfet gemaafct ban een anHer, 
tnaar ban fitlSn altoo0 ge- 
toeedt 

(Eire. (E!' ^ebt mi0ber0tanti. 
3>at be kernel ban een anber 0p 
gemaabt^ beto^de fb uft 0pn 
ciecaab. 

22. jfab. QOlat (0 J^zt cferaab be0 
liemeU ? 

lire* 



IS 



^z/. Inni choa maunis o tar 
taap. 

1 7. 7>r. Tataap onumma ? 

Azj, Tataap mauchus a nui- 
ibarra. ma-adsso. 

1 8. TSt. Ipab'o tataap o mini ? 

jtzj, Boesum, tapos o ta, abas, 
ziisja, idas, babdan, aisennas, rabbo, 
lalka, bioa, sasio, 

19. Ter. Ja mini tapos ai paga 
maunis a tataap o Deos ? 

jfzj. Pag^na. 

20. Ter. Moed'ijo pait'o micho ? 
Azj\ Na-a paita masini ; ja 

pinaga taulaulan boesum, a ta, so-o 
abas, ja inerien, innai de roman- 
ech. 

21. Ter. Matalam alli inerien in- 
nai de roman-ech. kamaunis pin- 
aga bocsum taulaulan I 

Azj. Ijo poelakiet. Airin- 
crien ja bocsum innaide roman, 
na-a pait'innai cho'a-li. 

22. Ter. Numm*ija a-li o boe- 
sum ? 

Azj. 



Sir, In His own works. 

17. Fao. What works? 

Str, VtTf mighty and glorious works. 

18. Fav, What may these works be? 

Str, Heaven, the earth, the sea, son, moon, large and small stars, the clouds, lightning, 
thunder, earthquakes. 

19. Fav. Are these all God's own works? 
Str, They are. 

aa Fav, How do you prove that ? 

Sir, I prove it in this way : cither heaven, earth, and the sea have always existed, or 
some one has made them. 

31. Fav, Perhaps heaven has not bees made by some one, but has always existed of 
itseU: 

Sir, You err. That the heaven has been made by another. Is proved by its 
glory. 

aa. Fav. What Is the glory of heaven? 



i6 



Christian 



Wivz^ 9Dat tip kloot0»0etop0 
ronn, pnt0 Hoorlucljtict)) en in 
0pn ommebanff ban bfnnen bele 
licljten 0|in^ 

23- iFab^ 310 Hen fieniel ban een 
anbec cierUk ffemaakt, of 0pn 
cferaab geffeben f 

9LIre. ^eeft ben fiemel 0elff0 
0pn Ifct)aam cierlik gemaakt f 

24. *ab. 99(00cb(en^ 
tire* (t)een0m0^ 

25. |ab« OiOlaarom ? 

tlre« 9Daar 10 geen leben, 
ffeen ber0tanb) of kennf00e in 
0pn gel^eele Ii0t)aam« 9Daac uir 
bolfft fnbien ben t)emel 0pn cie-' 
raab 0p gegeben ban anber, bat 
lip 00k ffeniaakt 0p ban een anber. 
Mt ben bemel cferlik gemaakt 
fieeft, fieeft 00k hzn kernel 0elff0 
ffemaakn 

26. jfab. 'k (0ebe u g:elpt OiOlaar 
Hit beb)p0t ffp meet bat be t)emel 
0? gemaakt ban een anber ? 

33re* iDm bat be fiemel, be 
0onne) mane, enb'al 0pn Ifcgten 
ffefioor0aam 0pn b't)eer0ct)appfe 
ban een anber, bie b'0elbe bien0t^ 
baar maakt, en gebieb bfen0t te 
boen aan be men0cben, b'aarbe, 
krufben en 't g:eb)a0« 27. jfab. 



Jzj. Alia mogarinigini, mach- 
allo-chlllo o auchos aicho-ech so-o 
mapan rari inni choa baan o 
lallum. 

23. Ter. Ja inaal-U innai de roman 
boesum aioe ? 

j/zj. Ja boesum maunis min- 
all'o cho'achieb ? 

24. Ter. Matalam ! 
jfzj, Pagaga chaddai ! 

25. Ter. Inaunumma? 

jfzj. Pa morichsar, pa saan 
ja aba ini choa tapos achieb : innai- 
numma ummior, sja inaal-l£ innai 
de roman boesum ai, all-ineriensar 
channumma innai de roman-ech : 
tamasea pinaal-la o boesum kamau- 
nis minerien o boesum chan- 
numma. 

26. Ter, Ka ummior ina. Innai- 
numm'ijo paita taulan all'ineriensar 
innai de roman boesum-ech ? 

jfzj. Inau boesum, zijsja, idas, 
so-o tapos choa rara ummior o 
chachimit o roman-ech, tamasea 
pauloan aicho-ies, so-o pattillo 
aran o cho, o ta, o baziep, o 
inochan. 

27. Ter. 



Sir. That it is round like a globe, quite transparent, and that in its whole circumference 
there are many lights. 

23. Fop, Has heaven been made and adorned by another being ? 
Sir, Has heaven itself adorned its structure ? 

24. Fav, Perhaps! 
Str, By no means I 

25. Fav. Why? 

Str, There is neither life, nor understanding, nor knowledge in its whole structure. 
Hence it follows, that if heaven has been adorned by some one else, it has also been made by 
some one else. He who has adorned heaven, has also created heaven. 

26. Fav, You are in the right. What other evidence liave you that heaven has been created 
by some one ? 

Str, Because heaven, the sun, moon and all its lights, are subservient to the dominion 
of a being who makes them subservient to Him, and who commands them to serve man, the 
earthy the herbs, and the fruits of the field. 



Instruction 



17 



27. jfab. OiOlel toat, Hoen He {le-- 
meU 0onne, mane Hfen^t aait be 
men0ct)en, H'aartie, fcrufHen, en 
't ffetoa0 ? 

aire. &ptioentoaarUfcli(en0t. 

28. fa\}. )BetoP0 dau 

^re. 9Den j^emel loopt ffeHue- 
rfff ban't oo^ten na 'ttoe^ten, en 
0poeli 0(cbtoelier te keecen na liet 
oo0tem m 0onne, mane fnHen 
t)emel mf00en noiH op entie onHer 
re ffaan. 9De 0onne pat op om 
Hen aarHbotiem te berUct)ten, te 
bertoarmen, en ben regen te bren-^ 
sen ober t)et ffetoa0, kcuiben, enbe 
boomen, bat b'0elbe uit^pruiten, 
toa00en, enbe bruct)t ffeben. 

29. jfab. (UUat bfen0t boet be 
mane aan be men^cben, 't getoa0, 
enbe tintfben ? 

dUre^ 2)e mane gaat op, en ber- 
banfft be 0onne, om te berbcpben 
be bontiecbeib be0 nacbt0, en met 
laat boct)tigt)eib te temperen be 
litte ber 0onne, bat t)et g:eb)a0 
en liruiben nfet en berborren* 
to. ipab. t^et ftf toaarlik ttn groore 
ieer0cbappie bien^tbaat te dtel-- 
[en en te gebfeben 0uliike groote 
liffcbamen^ bat b'0elbe gebuerfg 
0taan ten bfen^te ban be aarbe 

?ifer beneben, banbe knifbetu en 
eeftocbt be0 men^cben. aire. 



27. Ter. Mai numma. ja boesum, 
zijsja, idas, aran o cho, o ta, o 
baziep, o inochan ? 

jfzj. Ka-aran eagilna. 

28. Ten Ipait'o ailo. 

jfzj. Boesum tallochon ma- 
garieb innai baijan pana tsipan, 
so-o madaap pachcoach pana bajan. 
Zijsja-da idas inni boesum alli poe- 
lakies o tummoach a meodup. Ka- 
tummoach zijsja-da alia parar'o 
tapos o ta, alia pattadach 1^0-0 
pautas o inochan, o bazicp, o baron, 
alia chummo-o, ^ummoos, 90-0 
poa. 

29. Ter. Mocda idas aran o cho, 
o inochan, o bazicp ? 

Jzj, Katumoach idas, bo-o 
rummodsi o ziisja^da, alia odum 
o bi-ini, so-o pakaqua o choa tach 
tadach o zijsja, pa machi inochan 
ja baziep. 

30. 7irr. Gagil mato a chachimit 
pauloan so-o pattillono talcho a 
mato achicb, all'aicho tallochon 
aran o ta mini rapo, o baziep, o 
inochan o cho« 



27. Fav. Indeed ! do heaven, sun, and mooo, tenre nuui, the c«itb, bcrU, ind fniiU of the field 7 
S/r. They indeed serve them. 

28. J^av, Prove this. 

S/r, Heaven move!i continually from ea^tt to west, and hatteni to reiitm M^in to the east 
The sun and the moon in heaven never fall to rite aiKJ to set. The tun rnet In «>rder lo 
illuminate the earth, to warm ir, anr] to bring rain over the fruits of the field, the herhSf and 
the trees ; so that they may bud, (^r'/w, aivl bring forth fruit. 

29. Fav, What service does the mftrm rentier to man. Vt the fruits '/the field, and to the herbs? 
Sir. The moon rites and takes the plai:e '/f the sun, in 'jf^ U> dispel the darkncM of 

night ; and throagh means of her m'^ure, she tempers the hea^. of the son, so that the fntlts 
of the field and the herbs may not wither. 

3a Far. The power must indeed be great that can command sadb immense UAutM, and makt 
them sobservieot to Him, so that they are constantly ttar'tng the «vth here bel^nr, the herbs, 
and the fruiU of the field, destined Ux the food of aMO. 

C 



i8 



Christian 



WLvt. &00 iat: en Haar u(t 
bolfft, ffdpb ik Wl betopiaten, Hat 
He liemeU lafonne, en mane ban 
een anber gemaabt 0pn: om 
bat0e nfet anberiet al0 bten^t- 
knecbten be beerietcbappfe en bet 
bebeiacbterbolffen. 

31. jfab« 3|k 0temmet 00k toe. 
mt t>tn bemel met al ts^n licbten 
bebeetiett en bfeniettbaat maakt, (0 
toaarlik be &cbeppet be0 bemel0, 
ffelpck S2 ^^ betoe^en bebt 

WLtt. Mtn 00k, bat be 
&cbepper beiet b^meliet fnberbaat 
macbtiff, milbabicb) en ffoebaar^ 
biff ifS. betoelkke ffebuericb bet 
men0cben ffebenkt, be 0onne 
ooffaan enbe reffenen laat, en 
01 ff onder 0eet ontfermt 

32. ifab. i^u ber0taan (kket : 
certe(n, 000 't n(et en reffenbe, 
nocb be 0onne opffinff, be book- 
men, kruiben, koei^en, paarben, 
bertebee0ten en men^cben aoiu 
t^tn altemaal kommen te 0terben« 

tire. '% ifi nu betoessen, bat 
ben bemel en 0pn ffant^cbe Ucb- 
ten ban een anber 0pn ffemaakt, 
ffel^kkertoP0ookbe aarbe, enbe }ee. 

33. ifab. mtl ff'en en bebt nocb 
nfet betoe^en, bat be bemel, aarbe, 
0ee) 0pn b'eiffen toerkken ban 
3|eboba, ffel^k S2 blu0)e0 0eibet. 

JHre. 



jfzj. Gagilna : so-o innai decho 
ummior maibas merab o paita ina, 
alia boesum, zijsja, idas ineriensar 
innai de roman-ech, inau aicho mai- 
bas o aran ummior o chachimit 
so-o atillo. 

31. Ten Na-a ummior channum- 
ma, tamasea pauloan so-o chummi- 
mit o boesum, o tapos choa rar^ 
gagil pag£ airien o boesum, maibas 
o pia pinait'ija. 

j/zj. Aba channumma, all'ai- 
rien o boesum gagil mabarra, ma- 
al-al, so-o mario a tsjes, tamasea 
tallochon tump'o babosa, patoach o 
zijsja, pautas, so-o kamabo mauchus 
torro boa. 

32. Ter. Ka mab'o pia : oedan, sja 
alii moetas, alii tummoach a zijsja, 
kamamach^ tapos o baron, baziep, 
binnan, loan, a babosa. 

jfzj, Ka inipait'o pia, alia boe- 
sum so-o tapos choa rar£ ka-ineri- 
ensar innai de roman-ech, maibas 
o ta channumma, §0-0 abas. 

33. 7Vr. Mai, acho ijo pinaita, alia 
boesum, a ta, a abas paga maunis a- 
taap o Jehova ja Deos, maibas ijo 
pala naassa-da. 

Jzj. 



Str, So it is : and hence it follows, as I wished to prove, that heaven and earth, the sun 
and moon, have been created by some Being, so that they may be nothing else but the servants 
of His power, and obey His command. 

31. Fav, I also agree to this. He who has dominion over heaven and all its lights, and 
causes them to serve Him, is surely the Creator of heaven, as you now have proved. 

Str, Know, too, that the Creator of heaven is indeed powerful, bountiful, and kind ; He 
constantly remembers man, causes the sun to rise, and also gives rain, and has pitv upon us. 

32. Fav, Now I understand the matter. Certainly, if it did not rain, if the sun did not rise, 
all things would perish ; trees, herbs, cows, liorses, deer, and men, would all die. 

Str. Now it is proved that heaven and all its lights have been made by some Being, as 
also the earth and the sea. 

33. Fav, Well, you have not yet proved that heaven, earth, and the sea, are Jehovah's own 
works, as you just now declared. 



Instruction 



19 



WLtt. OiOlat, 0pn't (00110 e(g:m 
toerkkeit nfet^ tofend toerkken 0pit 
tin Han? Bonneit Hie tifngen 
He niendcfien Horn ? 

34- fab* 9^f0je(c|)Uit t)eeft i)a(bo0 
Hit alleiet grmaakt ? 

WLvt. I^outi ffp t)albo0 boor 
beit &ct)epper ban t)emeU aarbe, 
0ee? 

35- #ab. 3k !)ouDe. 

lire* 000 0al bait |iafbo0 
toare (Bob 0pn ? 
36. fab* flBfeiEfc^fen tip fjeft. 

aire* monb sn bat betoPden, 
oC laat ffp 't u ^lec^td bunkken ? 

37- ifab. 3|k bolffe t)et geloof ban 
mpn boorouber0 ban ober beel 

aren. 

WLtt. 9Dat 10 een pbel sebo- 
elen of gelooC* 

38- *ab. I^oe betogjaft gp bat ? 
oLTre. 31 boorouber0 en fieb- 

ben ben toaren (Bob niet gekent. 

39- £ab* OOlaarom ? 

adre* &e letpn onkunbig se- 
toeedt ban fiet bedcfireben tooorb 
(Bob0* 

40. ifab. aaiel toat, fgjafer een 
ba^cljreben tooorb (DOb0 ? 

aire, 3|aa't, 4'- ifab. 



jfzj. Oedan ! sja alii maunis a 
taap o Deos, tomm'ija tataap paga 
micho, ja babosa mab'o merien 
aicho-ies ? 

34. Ter. Matalam ta haibos min- 
erien o mini tapos ai« 

Jzj. Ja poetat o haibos airien 
o boesum, o ta, a abis ijonoe ? 

35. Ter, Na-a poetatsar. 

Jzj, Masini papaga Deos o 
gagil ta haibos ? 

36. Ter. Matalam paga. 

jfzj. Ja mab'o pait'o ailoe, ja 
poetat o baaksar ? 

37. Ter, Na-a ummior o autat na-a 
boeboeno anibaas. 

jfzj. Autat o baak ja micho. 

38. Tir. Mocd'ijo pait'o aicho ? 
Jzj, Oa boeboc-no minaut- 

siri o gagil o Deos. 

39. Ter. Inaunumma? 

jfzj. Minautsiri o ranied o 
Deos kabinidoan dechonoe. 

40. Ter, Mai numma, ja paga 
kabinidoan ranied o Deos r 

jfzj, Pagiina. 41. Ter. 



Sir. What I are they not God's own works ? Whose works are they then ? Can man do 
those things? 

34. Fau, May it not be that hiubos has made them all ? 

S/r. Do you think haibos is the creator of heaven, the earth, and the sea ? 

35. Fav. I think so. 

S/r, That, therefore, haibos is the true God ? 

36. Fav, Perhaps he is. 

Sir, Can you prove that, or do you only imagine this ? 

37. Fau, I follow the ancient belief of my forefathers. 
Sir, That is a very foolish idea or belief 

38. Fav, How do you prove that? 

Sir, Your forefathers have not known the true God. 

39. Fav. Why? 

Sir, They have been ignorant of the written Word of God. 

40. Fav. Well, then, is there a written Word of God ? 
Sir, Yes, there Is. 



20 



Christian 



41- iFab. OiOlat ift Hat boot een 
be0cireben tooorb ? 

Hre* (Cen tooorb be0 (Bobbe- 
Ufc&eit 0e00en0 ban ^^n eigeit 
toeden of perdoon. 
42. fab* wft (Bob fepn rtgen 
perietoon 0elff0 te kennen ge« 
ffeben ? 

aire. 3a t)p* 
43- flfllanneer? 

Hre. iDber lans, bait ben be- 
fffnne af, bat alle bfngen ge- 
maakt 0pn. 

44* ifab. 0n toat bolk fi^eft (0ob 
&pn tooorb te kennen gegeben ? 

aire, iaan bet 3loob0cbe bolk, 
en b'recbtbeerbfffe propbeten bfe 
ban oub0 getoeedt 0pn, al0 £lbra- 
bam, 3|acob) 9l^o0e0, &anniel, 
SDabfb, toelcke be (Bobbelikke 
leere ontfangen b^bben, ten 
efnbe 0p al0 ber^tanbige leer- 
mee0ter0 b^t gemeene bolk 
0ouben onbectopden^ 
45- ifab. dOlaarom in (Kob 000 
ern0ticb om ^zm 0elben te be- 
tuigen en t'openbaren ? 

aire. S)m bat on0 ber^tanb 
bloob en pbel (0 ban be kennf00e 
(Bob0. 

46. if ab. (En kennen top ban on0 
0elben ttn toaren (0ob nfet? 

aire. 



41. Ter. Numma kabinidoan ra- 
nted ja micho ? 

jfzj. Atite o al'o Deos innai 
choa micho ga ja boa. 

42. Ter, Ja maunis pinab'o choa 
boa ta Deos ? 

Jzj. Hena. 

43. Ten Aninumma? 

jfzj, Ani milip, innai aisas'o 
inerien o mini tapos ai. 

44. Ter. Tomma-da cho pinab'o 
choa ranied ta Deos ? 

jfzj. Chono i Judea, so-o ta 
ma-aijaab ma-abisse-bisse tsjes ani- 
baas, ta Abraham, ta Jacob, ta 
Moses, ta Samuel, ta David, tama- 
sea minarach o atil o Deos, alia 
maibas o ma-atil o mabada tsjes 
allecho pattil o chono baak decho- 
noe. 

45. Ter, Annumma maddobor 
maunis-o-ala so-o pab'o choa boa 
ta Deos? 

yfzj, Inau marotul o ab'o Deos 
torroa saan. 

46. Ter, Ja torro alii madarram o . 
Deos o gagil innai autat torroa 
micho ? jfzj. 



41. Fav, What kind of written Word is that ? 

Sir, A Word, or divine declaration, in which God speaks of His own being or person. 

42. Fav, Has God Himself niade His own person known ? 
S/r. Yes, He has. 

43. Fav, When? 

Str, Long ago, from the beginning, when all things were made. 

44. Fav. To which people did God reveal His Word ? 

S/r. To the Jewish people, and to the righteous prophets, who have been of old, as 
Abraham, Jacob, Moses, Samuel, David ; who received the divine doctrine, so that they, as 
intelligent teachers, might instruct the common people. 

45. Fav, Why does God so earnestly desire to declare and reveal Himself? 

Sir, Because our imderstanding b void, and bereft of the knowledge of God. 

46. Fav. And do we not of ourselves know the true God? 



Instruction 



21 



dUre. Mttn : of0c&oon Hit 
ffant0c^e gebouto \>an boben tot 
beneHen sii^ntn &cbepper aan-* 
tDp0t, Hatter een 0ehec pet0oon 
ofte (Eiee0t 0p, tie altierber0tan'' 
lifc^0te) He aUiermacbtfff0te) Hie 
alle tie0e Hfuffeit semaaht, en 
Ijaac cieraaH gcffcben Ijeeft; of 
al 0cljoon 0^11 toptllieiti enHe 
mact)t ffetiien toecH, 000 i0t noc^ 
geen0fn0 kenbaar, tofe Heden 
&c^eppec 0p. 9De &c^epper 
0oulie pnt0ct)eUk bert)oleu blp- 
ften, 000 (BoH 0pit (UUoorti niet 
batme toegeboegt, 000 fit 0^n 
be0ct)reben tooocH ban ober beel 
faten t)P niet afgemaalt {laHHe 
een gerplikennf00e ban &pn 
eiffen pec0oom 

47- jfab. QiOlaarom blpft (Bob 
000 j:ant0 berborgen ? 

gUre. !^g (0 ffebeel een gee-. 
0teUk b)e0en, 't toelk niet g:e0ien, 
nocb ffeta0t toorb gelph be ligb^- 
men. (Bob beeft geen beenbecen, 
0enuVDen, bloeb, blee0c|i ofte 

48- iPab. !^aibo0 i0 ooli een 
ffee0t ? 

dire. (Bv en kenb t)aibo0 en 
0pn boo0aaroicbeib niet. 

49- £ab. OjQIat, f0 baibo0 boo0 ? 
Qltt. SiUel troutoen, utoe 

boorouDer0 



Jgj, Pa : pagatomma tapos o 
tataap o mini innai babo pana rap6 
pait'o cho'airien, alia pafi;a charri o 
boa ja tsjes, kummasjics a ma- 
acheer, a ma-abarra, tamasca min- 
erien so-o pinaal-lii o mini tapos ai i 
pagatomma itan choa aba, a barra, 
pagaga aban chaddai, tomm*ija 
Airicn o mini, kapai)octautachsar o 
auchos ma-acharricb Airien o ai, 
sia alii pinachip o choa ranicd ta 
Deos, sja inni cho'atitc kabinidoan 
anibaas alii pinattas o tatchier o 
choa micho boa. 



47. Ter, Inaunumma macharricb 
ta Deos? 

yfzj, Paga tftjcs o auchot icho, 
tamasca pa itan, pa ^iddo-on mai- 
bas o bogsar i pa oot, ogJ[ach, 
tagga, boa, bog.^ar ta Deos. 



48. Ter. Ta haibot paga chan- 
numma baak o tsjcs t 

Jzj, Ijo mautsiri o haibos, 
i^x) cho*arapics. 

49. 7>r. Numma, ja rapict ta haibos I 
jfzj, Ocdan, ja oa bocboc-no 

anibaas, 



Sir. No. Althoagh this entire ttructure (umi top to UHl'mi teftliri«t of h» CJrvftioff ftjuj 
proves that there is a certain Person or Spirit, the tnf>«t Intrllitftnl, the mmt \Mi¥/tiih\, wlio 
has made and adorned all these things; ihtmgn Ills wivUmi and iKmrr »re %»0U, tlill w« rsn 
by no means see who this Creator is. Tlie Crcatf/r w*mUi rrmam (|tiili* Itl<ti1«ri| If ('nit\ hiul 
not added I lis Word ^iven to us so many years a^Of mui if llo hail fMH ((Ivcrit us an iutai^a of 
His own person in His written Word. 

47. Fap. Why does God remaio so cmipleti;ly hM'kn ? 

Sir. He is quite a spirittul Ikrinff, wh'/m we uiiin'H vem tptf handUi, •« w« can our 
bodies ; God has no bones, sinews, lAood c/r Aeth, n'>f hu I U a lio<1y* 

48. Fau. Is haibos also a spirit ? 

Sir. Ycm do not know haibos, nor his malignUy. 

49. Fa9. What! is haibos wicked ? 

Sir. Certainly. Have oo( fom fmtkihent wbii liv«d Many y««ri §i^i, M4iU$ftmmti 




22 



Christian 



boorouliet0 ban ober beel faren, 
en ffp 0elff0, morti en knorti gp 
nfet geHuerig: op ba(bo0, klaagt 
gplniet Hat |ip u 0iaat en krank 
maakt, noempt s^ fiem nfet Hen 
boo0en |iafbo0 ? 

50. ifab. 9^ije(0cl)(en fiebben top 
mf^betdtanti* 

^re. (Been0fn0: t)p (0 cer^ 
tefn boo0, en gefieel boo0aartifff* 
^ferom toorH I)aibo0 genaamt 
Hen boo0en, Hat (0 te 0e00en, een 
belfiamer ban toeHer0pannfcfiefti 
enHe boo0tofc^t ? 
51- jfab. mv noemen fiem 00k 
ben ffoeben bafbo0* 

mvt. diOlat (0 I)afbo0 guaab, 
en (0 tp ffoeb 00k? 3lnbien bP 
quaab (0, toaarom prp0t gp ben 
boo0b)fct)t ? 10 t)P ffoeb, itoaa^ 
torn knorb en klaafft gp ober 0pn 
boo0aarbi£beib ? 

52. ifab* mn ^cbepper ban be- 
mel) aarbe, 0ee,b^Bt S2 te booren 
0epre0en toegen 0pn milbteib 
enbe toelbaben, 

WLvt. 9Dat (0 recbt en beta- 
melik bat top htn ^cgepper prp^ 
0en. bie be men0ct)en 000 lief 
beett en eben 0taa0 on0er ge- 
benkt, be 0onne boet oppan, bet 
akkertoerk beregent, en faarlfjc 
fiet 0etoa0 brucfitbaar maakt« 

53- ifab. 



anibaas, so-o ijo channumma alii 
makarrichi tallochon i haibos, alii 
poddodo inau simioch so-o pach'ijo 
madig, alii pattonan ja icho rapies 
haibos? 

50. Ter. Matalam poelakies ja 
namo. 

jfzj. Main! : pag£ g^gil ^ra- 
pies icho, so-o o auchos rapies tsjes. 
Inau micho attonannan ta haibos 
rapies ai, micho a pattite^ ma-alca- 
kossi a ma-arapies ? 

51. Ten Torro pattonan icho 
channumma mario haibos. 

jfjsj, Numma, ja rapies haibos, 
so-o mario channumma ta haibos, 
sja rapies haibos, inaunumma sum- 
mo-al o rapies ai i Sja mario hai- 
bos, inaunumma malcarrichi so-o 
poddodo o cho'arapies ? 

52. Ter. Ani tinnaam ijo sum- 
moal o Airien o boesum, o ta, a 
abas inau cho'al-il a tataap a rio. 

j/zj. Mabisse micho, so-o mak- 
kesjap alia namo madas i Airien o 
ai-oe, tamasea masini maukat o 
babosa, tallochon tump'i namoa, 
patoach o zijsja, pautas o tsinaap, 
so-o pabo'o inochan atatta 
baas. 

53. Ter. 



yourselves, murmur and grumble about haibos ? Do you not complain that he beats you and 
makes you ill ? Do you not call him the wicked haibos ? 

50. Fav, Perhaps we make a mistake. 

S/r. Not at all ; he is decidedly wicked and malignant. Therefore haibos is called the 
wicked one ; that is to say, he is a ringleader in rebellion, and the evil-doer. 

51. Fav. We call him also the good haibos. 

Str, What I is haibos bad, and is he good too? If he is bad, why do you praise the 
evil-doer ? If he is good, why do ^ou murmur and complain about his maligmtv ? 
C2. Fav, You have just now praised the Creator of heaven, of the earth and sea, for His 
bottntifUIness. 

5/r. It is but right and proper that we should praise the Creator, who loves man so 
dearly, and who constantly thinks of us ; who causes the sun to rise, who sends down rain 
upon the fields, and every year causes the fruits thereof to be abundant. 



Instruction 



2'3 



53* iFftti« iai0oo prp0en top |iaf« 
bo0 ooti, en tioemeti |iem Hen 
goetien t)afbo0^ 

dure. (Kp 0Pli 0eer bupten He 
toeff; ebeit ot ffp ^toart toft 
noemtiet. SDe0en naam pa0t 
(EioH alleen. iaiiiu0 fit^vplt g:p 
He eere, Die (KoH eig:en i0 gaibo0 
toe, boor ontoetenbeib, en bat gp 
nocb niet en benb be toelbaben 
(Efob0* 

54* ifab. !^et laat fiem aan^fen 
bolg:en0 u betop0, bat t)et seloof 
aan ba{bo0, aan jabani, pbel, en 
bebrog ban baibo0 0p* 

(lire. 9Dat (0 toaar : ih ktnm 
0?n bebroff) gelpbkertop^ in ben 
beginne, al0 alle bingen gedc^a- 
pen toaren, t)p ben eer0ten 
mentic^e bie Sibani genaamt 
tDa0, bebroffen beeft, mftdgaberd 
alle 0pne nabomeUngen al0 baar 
0pn alle anbere brembelfngen o 
t^tn aarbbobem, al0oo beeCt bi? oo 
^ boor be0en midleib utoe boor- 
otiberd ban ober beel faren, 
enbe b^te nabouuUngen, eben 
alle intooonberen be0e0 e(lanb0, 
bat0e gelooben be tooorben ban 
een outoe leugenacbtfge totebelle, 
bat0e geloobe 0tellen in ^et ge- 
0ang ban een tileen bogelhen, 't 
toelb ben naam boerb ban iabam, 
al0 on0en eer0ten boorbaber. 

55. fab. 



I 



53. Ter. Masini namo summoal i 
haibos channumnia, so-o pattonan 
ja mario haibos. 

jfzj. Mauchuspoelakiesimoa; 
maibas moa pattonan o ma-orum, 
ma-ausi. Naan o mini makkesjap 
ta Deos ma-akammichisar. Masini 
inau otsiri, so-o inau acho madar- 
ram o tataap o rio o Deos, imo 
pe'o adas, kamaunis a Deos, ta 
haibos-ech. 

54. Ter, Matalam maibas pait*ijo 
autat inni ta haibos, inni Adam, 
paga baak, so-o sasall'o haibos-ech. 

Azj\ Gagil micho. Mab*o in'o 
choa sasalla, maibas inni aisas'o 
inerien o mini tapos ai, icho pinau- 
lakics o babos'o pesasa tamasea 
naan ta Adam, so-o choa sjiem o 
sjiem, tapos roman azjies de babo 
ta, masini channumm'ani milip 
icho pinaulakies oa boeboe-no ani- 
baas, so-o choa sjiem, tapos o cho 
de borroch o ta mini, alia decho 
poetat inni ranied o masini ma-at- 
tattosik, alia poetat inni babo o 
kotsi mampa-dech, o ai marach o 
naan ta Adam, maibas o torro boe- 
boc-no pesasa. 



55. Ter. 



53. Fav, We praise haibos in the same way, and call him the good haibos. 

Sfr, You are quite wrong ; just as if you were to say black is white. This name be- 
longs to God alone. In that way, and in your ignorance, you ascribe to haibos the honour 
which is due to God ; and because the blessings of God are not known to vou. 

54. Fav. According to your declaration, the belief in haibos and in Adam is vain, and a 
deception of haibos. 

S/r, That is true. I know his deceilfulncss, for just as in the beginning, when all things 
were created, he deceived the first man called Adam, as well as all his posterity, and nnany 
more of our sojourners in the world, so, also, has he in former years deceived vour forefathers 
and their posterity, just as he has deceived all the inhabitants of this islana, whereby thev 
now believe the words of a lying old slut, and put their confidence in the tong of a little biro, 
bearing, as our first forefather (ud, the name of Adam. 




24 



Christian 



55- iFab« SDen {iaibo0 fieeft ge- 
0e0t) Hat bp 0elff0 0tiam Doet 
0fn0en en 6oot0eff0en^ 

tire, l^p liefft. flDe toffelen 
0inffen Conner be0ct)etli. 3l0 ^^n 
000 eett kleeu boffelben ljaibo0 
ptopbeet? 9l^t00cbiett f^tttt bP 
0eu0 't ffetfatiff bait bit boffelhen 
nageaapt, cm bie bait %tvntvn 
en anbere fntooonber0 ban bit 
eilano te bebrieffen. 
s6. ifab. %ot tDat einbe beeft 
Ijaibo0 bit boffelben ben naani 
gegeben ban iSbam ? 

WLvt^ 9Daarmebe be0pot ben 
boo0toifft ben eer0ten men0cbe, 
toelktien bP op ben booltoeff se^ 
bracbt beeft. 

57- ifab. 3|nOien baibo0 be toare 
(Kob niet en i0, toat i0 bP 
ban? 

^te. ^eeft baibo0 b^nt 0el'' 
ben niet te kennen ffeffeben ? 
58. fab. )^aibo0 0e0t bat bP be 
men0cben fotmeett, be 0onne 
boet oppan, regen geeft, en 't 
0etoa0 brucbtbaar maabt 

dUre. 0lteniaalleug:en0^ 8lh 
000 berffiftifft be men0cben i>\t 
oube 0lan0e. (Ep aapt en bot0t 
C^ob na, en bebriegt be men-* 

0tben, 



55. Ter, Ka pinala ta haibos all'- 
icho p^bo so-o me^pab'i ta Adam, 

Jzj, Tummosik icho. Mampa 
po baaksar. Ja kotsi mampa ma- 
sin i paga ma-aijaab o haibos? 
Matalam icho maunis tsinimichier 
o b£bo o kotsi mampa mini, alia 
summall'i Ternern, so-o roman 
azjies de borroch o ta mini. 

56. Ter, Inonumma ta haibos pina- 
tonan o kotsi mampa mini Adam ? 

jfzj. Masini rapies a man- 
nach'o babos'o pesasa, o ai pinau- 
labies icho. 

57. Ter. Sja pagaga Deos o gagil ta 
haibos, numm'ija icho ? 

jfzj. Ja alh' pinab'o choa boa 
ta haibos ? 

58. Ter, Macho ta haibos all'icho 
merien o babosa, patoach o zijsja, 
pautas, so-o pabo'o inochan. 

yfzj, Tapos ja tattosik ! Ma- 
sini raras a ibien aicho sumbach o 
babosa. PazigaPi ta Deos, so-o 
summall'o cho, alia poetat icho 

Deos 



55. Fav, Haibos has declared that he makes even Adam to sing and to prophesy. 

Sfr, He lies. The birds sing without discrimination. Is, now, such a little bird the 
prophet of haibos? Perhaps he has even imitated the sin^ng of this little bird in order to 
deceive the people of Temem and other inhabitants of this island. 

56. J*av. What has been the object of haibos in giving the name of Adam to this little bird ? 
Sir, That by thus mocking the first man the villain might lead him into the path of 

error. 

57. Fav, If haibos is not the true God, what is he, then ? 
S/r, Has haibos not told you who he is ? 

C8. Fav, Haibos says that he has formed man, that he causes the sun to rise, and that he 
fertilises the fruits of the fields. 

S/r, All lies ! Just so the old serpent poisons man. Like an ape he imitates God and 
deceives men, so that they may believe that he is the true God, that they may fear him and 
sacrifice to him. 



Instruction 



^5 



0cien) ten e(ntie 0p {(ouHen ge^ 
looben, Hat fip He toare C^oli 0?, 
Iiem tiree0en, en offerfianlie Hoen. 
59- ifab. OiOlel^ 0OUII 0|i toel kom 
nen 0e00en toat I)aibo0 boor een 

(0? 

^re. |a: fkkam 
6o. jfab« OiOIaar uft kend gp 
Jem? 

aire. (CoH {ieeftfn0pnbe0ct)'^ 
reben toootti Hen t)aibo0 arge- 
0cl)iltiert, en getupgt ban 0pne 
boo0t)eflK ten efnHe top on0 0OU'' 
Hen toacgten boor 0pn beHrocI). 
6i. ifab* ^oe Hocf) ? (Peeft'et te 
kennen. 

aire. iaiHu0 fnHen beg:fnne, 
al0 Hen fiemel boIefnHffft toa0, 
lieeft C^oH Heel Huf0ent onUg^a- 
melikke Hienaren semaakt, 0eer 
0ubtpl, HeerHfg, 0terk,rect)tbeer< 
Hiff en t)are tDOonplaat0e ge0telt 
fnHen t)emel, op Hat0e 0pn beer< 
0c^appfe aan0clioutoen, en 0pn 
bebeien uftrtc^ten 0ouHen. 9Den 
naam He0er Htenaar0 i0 iangelu0, 
Hat f0 te 0eg0en boHen en Hfen0ts 
barfge gee0ten (EoH0. &p en 
eten, Hrfnkken, 0lapen, nocljte 
genereren nfet gelpk He mzn' 
0ct)en, 0pn Hele, ]a ontelbaar In 
mennfgte, leben altoo0 0onHer 

te 



Deos o gagiL fdla me'il so-o paan 
icho. 

59« 7>r. Mai, ja mab'o pattite 
i-jono-e numm'i-ja haibos ? 

jfzj. Mabina. 
6o. Ter. Innainumm'i-jo mab'o 
icho-ech ? 

jfzj, Ta Deos pinattas o hai- 
bos inni choa ranicd kabinidoan, 
so-o tummassal o cho'arapics, alia 
torro mamc-il o choa sasalla. 

6i. Ter, Moedafar? Ipabina. 

Azj. Masinifar : ani pesasa, 
ka-inoob o boesum, ta Deos mine- 
rien o aran tna-arotul o bog, mapan 
mama-achpil i uchiet eis, maucnus 
ma-acheerna, ma-aamgilch, ma^ 
abarra, ma-abisse a tijcs i i^o-o 
pinasos' inni bocsum-cch dcchonocf, 
alia mit'o choa chachimit i^o-o um- 
moob o cho'attilo. Naan o aran o 
mini paga ta Angclus, micho^r a 
pattite, aran o Deos baak o tijci. 
Alii man, micham, summarra. alii 
pausjicm dccho maibas o baiKJta, 
kamatasasna, pa tochcn inau 
mauchut matatat. machon^ mo- 
rich, alii mach*ija, choa airab a 

aukat 



59. Fav, Well, cooM you now fay what kind of being halboi U ? 
Sir, Yes, I can. 

60. Fau, By what means do vott know him ? 

Sir, God has depicted haibos in I lis written Word, and tellf uf how wicked b« Is, so 
that we may be on our guard ag ainit his deceilfuiness, 

61. Fap, How so? I wish to know. 

Sir. Well, then, in the beginning, when lieaven was finally completed, God created 
many thousands of incorprircal iervit^irs wh/j w^rrrr vrrv volatile, riuick, strong, and just^ 
giving them a dwelling in heaven, so that thev might l^cnold His d//minion, aiwireceive His 
commaiKis. The name of these servit/>rs is Angelus, tliat is, servants and serving spirits of 
God. They neither eat, n^^r drink, nor ilo they sUutrp ; th^-y have no offs|>ring as man in 
general has ; they are many in number, yea, they are innttrnerabic ( they live on lir ever, and 

fi 




26 



Christian 



te 0tertien^ ^aren toille en ber^ 
maab (0 C^oti tt loben ett geHue:: 
riff 0|in tDOorH gefioor^aam te 
0pn. !^atbo0 (0 bait te boreit 
ook een goebeit enjel, en rect)t' 
beerbigen bienaar ODob0 g:eb)ee0t, 
bocf) 0p en bele 0pnev metge- 
0ellen0|in naberfianb C^obeliauen 
&ct)epper b)eber0panniff getoor^ 
ben. &p benpbbe 0pn groote 
|ieer0c{iappie, enbe macbt 0tons 
ben na be gelpbfieib (Eiob0, en 
0ocf|ten een eigen beer0c|iappfe 
op te recfiten, om te bolgen tacen 
eigenen toUIe. d)p be0e to^0e 
Ibeeft |iafbo0 en alle 0pn mebge^ 
0enen mf0baan fnben beginne, 
en bipben 0teeb0 quaabaarbfg en 
b)eber0pannig^ 

62. fab. I^ebben0e geen berouto 
banjare b)eber0pannig^eib ? 

"Ire. iPeen, 0e berfiarben 
liaar 0elben, en fiaar boo0t)efb 
tDorb altpb meecber. 

63. ^ab. ^eeft (Bob tare toeber-- 
0pannigt)efb bergeben ? 

^re. (Been0in0. !^p 0traft 
liaar 0ct)tik6elifi. 

64. fab* l^oebaniger to?0e ? 
Hue. WLan toegen ber onge- 

lboor0aam]b^ib (0 |aibo0 en alle 
0pn metge0eUen uft ben fiemel 
getoorpen* 65. fab. 



aukat paga madas i ta Deos, so-o 
ummior dillochon o cho'atite. Ta 
haibos ani tinnaam channumma 
mario Angelus, so-o aran o Deos 
mabisse a tsjes, kasagha icho, so-o 
ma-atasis choa ara pesas'o kum- 
mossi i ta Deos choa Airien, ma- 
sannan o choa chachimit matoto 
dechonoe, pazigal'i ta Deos, so-o 
summad'o maunis a chachimit, all'- 
ummior o maunis choa airab. Ma- 
sini ta haibos so-o tapos choa ara 
pinarapies ani pesasa, so-o machon- 
sar rapies a ma-akakossi. 



62. 7>r« Ja alii machi'o kakossi 
choa tsjes-oe ? 

jfzj. Maini, kamoddon o tsjes 
dechonoe, so-o moab tallochon 
cho'arapies. 

63. Ter, Ja ta Deos minabono 
choa kakossi ? 

jfzj. Pagaga chaddai. Ka- 
mauchus chummote i dechonoe. 

64. Ter. Masanno? 

Jzj. Inau kakossi initis innai 
boesum ta haibos so-o tapos choa 
ara. 

65. Ten 



will never die. To praise God is their desire and delight, so also to obey His word. 
Haibos was formerly also a good angel, and a just servant of God ; but afterwards, he, and 
many of his fellows, rebelled against God. They envied His vast power and dominion, they 
desired to become eaual with God, endeavoured to establish a dominion of their own, and to 
follow their own will. It is in this way that haibos and all his followers sinned in the begin- 
ning, and still remain malicious and rebellious. 

62. Fav. Do they not repent of their rebellion ? 

Str. No, they persist in their rebellion and wickedness, which are continually 
increasing. 

63. Fav. Has God forgiven them their rebellion ? 
S/r, By no means ; He will punish it terribly. 

64. Fav. In what way ? 

Sir, On account of his disobedience, haibos and all his fellows have been cast out of 
heaven. 



Instruction 



^1 



65- ifab^ i^a Hat Hie boo0e Hie-- 
naar0 toaren uftgetoorpen, 0pn0e 
boort brp gelateu ? 

33re. I^een: 0e toorHen alle 

frebanffen ffe^ouHett om eeutofff'- 
fk ffeiettraft te toorHen fnlieti tiuil 
lie0 bfer0, genaamt (Kelienna. 

66. jfab. 9Dreigt (Koti toaarlife 
|iaibo0 al0oo te 0traffen ? 

(lire. OiOlaarUti fa. 

67. jfab. iD 0ct)rik^ dfllee fiaf'- 
bo0 en 0ptt metge^elleit^ 

dure. &e 0cf dkben 0eer boot 
000 ffetoelbfgen t^oorn ett beben. 

68. jfab. OiOlaaromeitbebrebfgen 
0p ntet met (Kob ? 

dure* (Kob toefgert ^atet ge-- 
tiabfff te 0^n. 

69. fab* (uUaarom ? 

aire. &e 0ptt t)al0tarrfcfi, en 
fiare boo0b^ib 10 te gtoot. 

70. if ab. iUllat (0 b^^^ boo0t)efb ? 
(lire. (Pob on0eboor0aam te 

0pn, enbe men^cbett quaab te 

boeit. 

71* jfab. OiOlat 0effie^ bragen0e 

ook bpanb0ct)ap en npb tegen be 

men0cben ? 

ilce.la:onibat0e(lPobbpanb 
0pn, 000 benpiien0e* bat top men- 
0cben C^ob IteC b^boen, zxi\^t 0pn 
geboben nakommen. 72. jfab. 



65. Ter. Ka ochal itis rapies aran 
ai, ja binarrasan dechonoe ? 

A%j. Maini : kakoemen ja pa- 
tapos, inochote-in taulaulan lallum 
chauch o chau, o ai attonannan 
gehenna. 

66. Ter. Ja gagil ta Deos lummal- 
lak o pachote i ta haibos masini ? 

A%j. Gagilna. 

67. Ter. Tanaas ! Anana i hai- 
bos, so-o choa arada ! 

A%j. Decho mauchus me-il o 
rais talcho a mato, so-o matirtir. 

68. Ter. Talla alii maborr'i ta 
Deos dechonoe ? 

A%j. Madaddo mabono decho 
ta Deos. 

69. Ter. Inaunumma ? 

A%j. Decho maraas a tsjes, 
so-o mauchus mato cho'arapies. 

70. Ter. Numm'ija cho'arapics ? 
A%j. Kummossi i ta Deos, so-o 

parapies o babosa. 

71. Ter. Tanaas ! ja kamazjies 
so-o masannan o babosa channum- 
ma dechonoe ? 

Axj. Hcna : inau kamazjies i ta 
Deos choa tsjes-oe, decho masan- 
nan torro babosa maukat i ta Deos, 
so-o ummior o cho'atillo. 72. Ter. 



65. Fav, After those wicked servants had been cast out, have they been set at liberty ? 

Sir, No, they are all kept in bonds, in order to be eternally punished in the pit of fire, 
called Gehenna. 

66. Fav, Does God really threaten to punish haibos in that manner? 
Str, Yes, certainly. 

67. Fav, Oh, frightful I Woe unto haibos and his fellows 1 

Str, They are sorely afraid of such frightful anger, and tremble. 

68. Fav, Why do they not appease God ? 

Str, God refuses to be merciful unto them. 

69. Fern, Why? 

Str, They are stiff-necked, and their wickedness is too great. 

70. Fav, In what does their wickedness consist ? 
Str, In disobeyingGod and doing evil to men. 

71. Fav, Is that so ? uo they harbour enmity and envy against men ? 

Str. Yes, because they feel enmity against God, they also feel envy that we men love 

God and obey His commands. 




28 



Christian 



toel, Hat \i enHe topIufHen t0a- 
men tegen (Bod op^tonHen ? 
dare. 31^ tiat tontien^e paecfi. 

73- ifdt)* 31 ti ffeHenlibe Hat gp een 
toefntct) te borett u beblaci) HeHet, 
enHe Ijaibo0 obecfiaaltiet, om Hat 
t)piaHamHeneer0tenmen0c|ieop't 
Holen 0ebract)t l^eeft: boe i0 Hat? 
Jllre. ^afbo0 teeft ban Hen 
beginne Hen men0ct)e beel quaaH0 
geHaan, en bP l^o^t liet nocf)* 
&pnen rect)ten naam (0 ^atana^. 
Hat 10 te 0eff0en een bpanH en 
benpHer. 3|e0u0 Ct)rf0tu0 He 
&one (15oH0 noemt ]^aibo0, een 
bpanH, men0ct)enmoorHer, en 
baHer Her Utegenen* 't 3l0 tiai- 
bo0 Hen belbamer Her teener 
0pannict)efH, Hie He nien0ct)e tot 
toeHer0panni0t)eiH berleiH beeft. 
i9Dn0e eer0te boorouHer0 toaren 
ffe^eel goeH enHe recfitbeerHiff 
ffemaakt. (E>oH t)aHHe t)aar ffe^ 
maa&t ttoee perdoonen, man 
enHe^topff, He naam He0 man0 
toa0 iaHatru He naam Her brou^ 
toen toa0 (rba. tlan He0e ttoee 
0pn boortffe0proten alle men-- 
0c|ien, en ffe0lagten Her aarHe. 
9Doen0e eer0t 0e0c|iapen toaren, 
fienHen0e nocl^ geen quaaH, tof0s 

ten 



72. Ter* Matalam choa airab alia 
decho so-o torro babosa karri-ka- 
kossi i ta Deos ? 

A%j. Hena mauchus merab o 
micho dechonoe. 

73. 7>r. Katumpa ina, ijo poddo- 
do ani naassada, so-o makarrichi i 
haibos inau icho pinaulakies i ta 
Adam babos'o pesasa : moeda mi- 
cho? 

A%j. Ta haibos mauchus pina- 
rapies o babos'ani pesasa, so-o ma- 
chonsar parapies. Choa naan o 
gagil paga ta §aitan, michosar a 
pattite, ^zjies-in so-o ma-assannan. 
Sjiem badd'o Deos ta Jesus Christ- 
us pattonan o haibos, ^zjics-in ma- 
ach'o cho, so-o tamau o tattosik. 
Ta haibos ma-akakossi ai, tamasea 
linummal'i kakossi o babosa. Ka- 
ineriensar o auchos mario, ma- 
abisse a tsjes torroa bocboe-no 
pesasa. Ta Deos minerien decho 
narroa chosar, sjam a sini, naan o 
s)am paga Adam, naan o sini, Eva. 
Innai choa boa tsinummoach tapos 
o cho, so-o tupponodon de ta. Ka 
bao ineriensar dechonoe, acho mab'o 
arapies, acho mab'o kummossi, 
maukat choa tsjes i ta Deos, mau- 
kat o tataap o babisse, so-o um- 
mior o atillono Deos. Ta haibos, 
inau mit'o aukat so-o aborra tup- 

pach 



72. Fav, Perhaps they would much like that he and we should jointly rise against God ? 
Sir, Yes, they would very much like that. 

73. Fav, I think that you complained a short time ago of haibos, and accused him that he 
led Adam, the first man, into error. How is that ? 

Sir, From the very beginning, haibos has done much harm, and he does so still. His 
real name is Satan, which means an enemy, one filled with envy. Jesus Christ, the Son of 
God, calls haibos an enemy, a murderer, and the father of lies. It is haibos, the rebellious 
ringleader, who has induced man to rebel against Him. Our first forefathers were perfect 
and righteous. God had made two persons, a man and a woman ; the name of the man was 
Adam, the name of the woman was Eve. From these two persons all men and generations 
of the earth have sprung. When they first were created, tney knew no evil ; they did not 



Instruction 



29 



ten nfet ongelioor^aam te 0pn, 
bare gitlt fiaHtie (KoH Uef, fiaHlie 
ru0t rec^t en toel te Hoen. om 
(So\>0 ffeboti te act)terboig:en. 
I^aibo0 0ieiibe be Uefbe en brebe 
tu00cben (Kob enbe be men^cben, 
toa0 0eer n^bfcf), quam on0e 
eer0te boorouber^ iabam enbe 
(Cba ber0oehtien, berfffftfcbbe 
t)are semoeberen al0 een flange, 
en bebcooff t)aar met 0^ne 
leugend, bat0e fnt 0poor traben 
ban 0pne onget)oor0aambeib. 
74* iFab. (liUel, 0pn ooti be men- 
0ct)en C^ob on0et)oor0aam ge^ 
toorben ? 

^re* 3|a. !^aibo0 ^ntt Sir^am 
en (Eba mi0lefb en tot onffe^oor-' 
0aamt)eib gebtacfit* 
75* ifab. &pn 00b t)are na&ome^ 
Ifngen in obertrebf nge geballen ? 

(lite, la, alle mendc^enhfn^ 
beren fiebaen fnben begfnne In 
Slbam enbe (Cba obecgetreben, 
enbe bolgen ^ace onget)ooc0aanb 
liefb na, gelphbectop0 al0 0p 
nagebolgt btuben b^ongeboor-' 
0aanibeib ban bafbo0* 
76. ifab* l^oe^ fepn alle men-. 
0cben boo0boenber0, en ober- 
treber0 ? 

aire. &^ t)ebben alle ober-- 

Setreben, en toorben geboren (n 
oo0t)eib. 77. ifab* 



pach o Deos a babosa, mauchus 
masannan, sai lummall'i ta Eva, 
so-o Adam torroa micho boeboeno 
pesasa, maibas ibien sumbach o 
choa tsjes-oe, so-o summairi decho 
o choa tattosik, alia tsimichier o 
kakossi o haibos dechonoe. 



74. 7Vr. Mai numtna, ja babosa 
channumma kinummossi 1 ta Deos ? 

Azj. Hena. Ta haibos pinau- 
lakies i ta Adam a Eva, so-o pina- 
kossi o choa boa. 

75. Ter. Ja choa sjiem o sjicm 
kinummossi channumma ? 

j/zj. Hena, tapos sisjiem o 
babosa kinummossi ani pesasa inni 
ta Adam a Eva, so-o tsimichier o 
choa kakossi, maibas tsinimichier o 
Kakossi o haibos dechonoe. 



76. Ter. Oedan ! Ja ma-arapies a 
ma-akakossi tapos o babosa ? 

Azj. Kinummossi ja patapos, 
so-o ausjimen inni arapies. 

77. Ter. 



know what disobedience was ; they loved God ; they were desirous to do what was ri^ht 
and proper, and to obey God*s commands. Haibos, on witnessing the love and peace exist- 
ing between God and man, became very jealous ; he came to tempt our first forefathers ; he 
poisoned their minds like a serpent, and deceived them with his lies, so that they followed in 
the steps of his disobedience. 

74. fav. Well, has man also disobeyed God ? 

Str. Yes. Haibos has deceived Adam and Eve, and led them to disobey. 

75. Fav» Did their posterity also transgress? 

S/r, Yes, all the children of men have in the beginninff trans^essed in Adam and Eve, 
and have imitated their disobedience, just as they imitated the disobedience of haibos. 

76. Fav. What ! are all the children of men evil-doers and trespancrt? 
S(r, They have all transgressed, and are bom in sin. 




30 



Christian 



n. jfab« ^ouH {iafbo0 nocfi al 
aati om He men^cfieti tot onge^ 

Joor0aam]^e(li te brengen, en tot 
oo0t)efti te berlefben ? 

^re. la: \i loopt 0in0 en 
toeer gelpi een 0lange, om on0 
te berffiWffen* t^p ont0teekt f nt 
lierte guabe gebacbten ; blu0ct)t 
uit be bree0e (£!ob0, tienni00e, en 
't geloof in C^ob \ berbp^tert fiet 
ffemoeb, bat l^et ttopffeit, en met 
pbele bree0e fngenomen toorb ; 
bat'et ffelooft aan |iaibo0, aan 
0pn bebroff, en (eugenaclitige 
0uper0titien« ^p toenb alle be« 
boir aan, bat bermeerbere b'on- 
toetenfieib (15ob0, fiet bui0tere bet- 
0tanb, bron6en0c{iap, boob0laff, 
ober0pel, npb, bebrog, Ieu0en0, 
bieberie, onffegoor0aem|ieib, fial- 
0tarricfiefb. en alle boo0t)eib. 

78- jfab* wl en al 0ct)oon blpft 
afraben, 000 0^n top bocb ban 
oub0 tot baibo0 getoenb, enbe 
on0e 0iele lleeft fiem 0eer aan. 

WLtt. (Kp en liebt 0pn boo0' 
Ibeib niet gekent. 

79- ifab^ tlree0en fiem te ber* 
toerpen, bat tp niet mf00c^ien 
toornfff en toorbe, enbe on0 
quaab boe« 

dXre. &00 eji |iafbo0 toflt 

nabolgen, 



77* Ter. Ja ta haibos machonsar 
o pikossi o babosa, so-o lummal'i 
arapies ? 

jfzj. Hena : pallidollido mai- 
bos o ibien, alia sumbach i namo. 
Pisor inni tsjes o tattuppau rapies. 
Potup o ikkil o Deos, o aba, o autat 
inni ta Deos. PaiUakies o tsjes, 
alia mar mi mi a mikkil o baak ; 
alia poctat inni haibos, inni choa 
sasalla, choa arien o ma-atattosik. 
Maddobor ja icho alia moab otsiri 
o ta Deos, ma-audum a tsjes, irab, 
ach'o cho, chachod, sannan, sasalla, 
tattosik, achab, kakossi, ma-araas a 
tsjes, so-o tapos o arapies. 



78. Ter, Pagatomm'ijonoe mach- 
onsar o ummaddo ; ani milip torro 
madarram i ta haibos, so-o mauchus 
mikkap icho torroa tsjes-oe. 

jfzj, Minautsiri o cho'arapies 
imonoe. 

79. Ter. Torro mikkil o tummis 
icho, depa makabol sai parapies i 
namo. 

jfzj, Sja merab o ummior o 

haibos. 



77. Fav, Does haibos rather persevere in leading men to disobey God and to tempt them to 
commit wickedness ? 

Sir, Yes, he goes to and fro, like a serpent, to poison us. He causes evil thoughts to 
arise in the heart, extinguishes the fear of God, as also knowledge of and faith in God» 
harasses the mind, so that it is filled with doubt and vain fears ; thus it believes in haibos, in 
his deceitftilness, and lying superstitions. He does all he possibly can to increase man's 
ignorance concerning God, drunkenness, murder, adultery, envy, deceit, lies, theft, disobedi- 
ence, obstinacy, and every wickedness. 

78. Fau. However much you may continue to dissuade us, our souls entirely cleave to 
haibos, because we are long accustomed to him. 

Str, You have not known his wickedness. 

79. Fav. We fear to reject him ; perhaps he will be angry with us, and do us harm. 




Instruction 



31 



nabolffen, 000 bet^aaiit ffpUeHen 
(EtoH^ enUe 0|?li (em tpanli. 
80. jpab^ 92lel maar, id|? btee^en 
te 0eer He sramdc^ap ban ^afbo0. 
9Ir^ (Cn bree0t ffp niet bed 
meet be ffram^cbap (15ob0? 

?|nbfeti ffp Ueben (rob 0ult na-. 
olffeit^ ^p 0al beti Ijafbo0 onber 
utoe boeten bertteben, enbe u in 
0pn betoatfnge nemen. l^p en 
(eeft geen mac^t om be menr 
0c$en quaab te boen, ten 0p bat 
(et O^ob ^em toelate. ^t 30 
genoeci t^m ffebree0t en ffe0pp< 
0offert, bUeb ban (aibo0 al0 ban 
een berffiftige 0lanffe« 

dSIee alle be gene bfe ^afbo0 
blpben aanf^angen, toant \itn 
tootn (15ob0, en be 0traSe be0 
iel0c^en bfer0) bolgt taar ge^ 
buerfff ac|)ter be ^felen na. 

iDm een einbe ban 0prefien te 
mafien^ toel aan^ betoaart be 
bfngen bfe ge0efft 0pn in u tecte, 
en ont|)oub be0e brfe 0tukfien :— 

Jnben eet:0ten beb Ik betoeden, 
bat kernel) aacbe^ 0ee) niet altpb 
of eeutofff en 0pn geb)ee0t ban 
(aar 0elben; 0e 0^n gemaabt 
ban een anber. 

a)ft beb)p0e ik uft fjet eferaet 
be0 (emel0, al0 mebe om bat be 

temel, 



haibos, imo lummido i ta Deo8| 
so-o kaniaziics icho, 
8o. 7>r. Ocdan, mauchus torro 
me-il o rais o ta haibos. 

Azj. Ja alii maso milckil o rais 
o Deos ? Sja a-ummior i ta Dcoet, 
tatummallas o haibos icho de rap6 
oa asieL so-o inamaladik imoa. 
AUi mabarra ja icho i)arapics o ba« 
bosa, sja alii pauss'icho ta Deos. 
Chauee mikkil, chauge paan icho ( 
obca innai ta haibos, maibas innai 
ibien o bocsum. 



Anana i tanos chono a! ka ma- 
chonsar o mikkap i ta haibos, iirnu 
rais o ta Deos^ 90-0 chachalt o chau 
Gehenna taulaulan marior i dcchu. 

Alia na-a no^is! u pattite, assin- 
man-a, aladiklc*o ranicd i tsjcs, 90-0 
tu[i[A natorroa da tup|>ono mini : — 

Ka pcsasa, pinaitn ina alia l)oe- 
sum, ta, a alms alii piniiga maunis 
o taulalan ( ka incricuHar Innal-de 
roman aicho-cch. 

Na-a paitVi mini Innai a-U o 
boesum, i|^o-o channumma, Inau 

l)<)esuiii 



Sir. If ye will continue to follow hftibot, y« forimka (Uh\, uml iMBiMima I III untmy. 
8a Fav, Yes, but we fear too much the wrath oi tmilKM. 

S/r. And do ye not fear the wrath of (Uh\ much mora f If ya will fullow after (Um\, ||o 
will trample haibos under your feet, arul lakr vou umhr IIU own cam. WIlluHit (iml'i {Mr* 
mission haibos has no power to harm men. Ye have fimiMl and sacilhiied to him enimgh ) 
flee from haibos as a p<^nv>nou« s^rfKrnt. 

Woe unto all who adhere to hail>of, fur the wrath of CiiMl and the |iuiiUhiiitnt of hall fira 
contintially threaten to overtake them. 

To conchide oarcomreriation. tike heed to liear in mind tha things thai liava liaan mM Io 
yon, and remember these three things {-— 

In the first place, I have prft¥tA tlial heaven, earth, and tha tea. liava not always, or 
from all eternity, ezistH of themselves i they have lieen nia/le liy Siiuie lieInK or otl»«f. 

In proof, I have spoken of the aiWnment i/f iMNivan, and I liava ats^i Mid lltal liaaven, with all 




32 



Christian 



iemel^ mftstgaiiet^ alle 0pti Uci- 
ten eeti atiner^ tl^erjstc^appfe se- 
Iioor0aam 0?n; Hie He ^elte 
Hfeit^tbaar maabt, eti gebfeH 
Hfen^t te Hoen aan He aame, 
aan ^t getoa^ Her meti0cfieit, en 
He bee0ten He0 beltd. 

%tn ttoeeHen^ fjeb f b te iiennen 
ffcffeben^ Hat Je^oba ofte 9Deo0, 
10 He &c)epper ban bemel^ aacHe, 
enHe 0ee, Hie Hit alle^ ffemaabt, 
en met etecaat bebleeH beeft, 
toaar utt Holgt Hat fip alleen 0p 
He toare O^oH. 

%tn HerHen^ ^eb (ft opengelegt 
^et beHroff ban batbo0, Hie He 
toare (EoH na^aapt^ en utoe Hoor^ 
ouHerjs Han ouH0 mf0lefH ^eeft, 
Hat0e gelooHien aan t)atbo0, aan 
ianani) en toaarnamen He tooor- 
Hen ban een ouH logenacbtig 
b)pC« proptete00e ban bafpo^^ 
toelKbe Hie ban ^ernern, en 
anHere fntooonHeren He0e0 et- 
lanH0 geleecH ^eeft pHele ^uper- 
0titfen na te bolgen, op Hat gp 
naniaal0 boor 0pn beHrog u 
toacbtet, en geloobet He tooocHen 
He0 toaaracbtfgen (EioH0; Hen 
toelbben efffen (0 alle lizzt^ 
tfcbappfe^ enHe macbt, enHe lof, 
altpH en altoo0, iamen^ 

^inHe He0't0amen''ffe0preft0. 

Christelikke 



boesum a tapos choa rar^ ummior 
o chachimit o roman-ech ; tamasea 
pauloan aicho-ies, so-o pattillo aran 
o ta mini, o inochan o cho, o bin- 
nan de bonna. 



Ka narroa, na-a pinaba, alia ta 
Jehova ja Deos paga airien o boe- 
sum, o ta, a abas, tamasea mine- 
rien so-o pinaal-l£ o mini tapos ai, 
innai-numma ummior all'icho ma- 
kammichi gagil o Deos. 

Ka natorroa, na-a innummillag 
o sasall'o haibos-ech, tamasea pazi- 

fil'i ta Deos o gagil, so-o pinaula- 
ies oa boeboeno anibaas, alia pinoe- 
tat dechonoe inni haibos, inni 
Adam, so-o tump'o ranied o ma- 
si ni ma-atattosik, o ai pinaga ma- 
aijaab o haibos, so-o pinattil i Ter- 
nern, a roman azjies de borroch o 
ta mini ummior o arien o baak, alia 
rummi-es mame-il o choa sasalla, 
so-o poetautat inni ranied o Deos 
o gagil, maunis o ai chachimit o 
tapos, a barra, so-o adas, taulaulan. 
Amen. 



§i$i o karri-atite. 



Jtite 



its lights, is subservient to the dominion of another Being, who commands them to render their 
services to the earth, to the fruits of the field belonging to man, and to the beasts of the field. 

Secondly, I have explained that Jehovah, or Deos, is the Creator of heaven, earth, and 
the sea ; that it is He who has made and adorned all things. From hence it follows that He 
alone is the true God. 

Thirdly, I have laid bare to you the deceit of haibos, who simulates the true God, and 
who has misled your forefathers from the beginning, so that they believed in haibos, in Adam, 
and have listened to the words of lying old women, the prophetesses of haibos, who have taught 
these inhabitants of Temem, and other inhabitants of this island, to follow after vain supersti- 
tions, in order to put you hereafter on your guard against his deceit, and make you believe 
the words of the true God, to whom belong aU dominion, and power, and praise, for ever and 
ever. Amen. 

END OF THE DULOGUE. 




Instruction 



33 



XI. 



Christelikke Leerspreukken. 

1. (Cob 10 ffefieel eeit <Btt0U 

S>t 0iele itt iieit mea0c^e i0 
tereenffft met tet ligfiaam. 
(Con (0 onliffliamelth. 

2. S>t tztitt boocouDer0 ban tet 
men0c|ieUftfte ffe0laffte 0ptt Slbam 
en (Cba. 

(Bob tieeft in ben btslnnt \^tn 
nun0cbe goeb en m^tbeerbiff 
gemaabu 

l^aibo0 )eeCt ben men0clje ber^ 
lefb tot onffe(oor0aamt)eib. 

3. £lbam en (Cba 0pn in \itn 
befftnne (Cob onge(oor0aam ge- 
toee0t mit00aber0 alle tiace na« 
komelingen. 

2)aac en i0 geen men0cl)e 
mtitbrerbiff; 0p liebben alle 
ffe0onbigt) en toorbrn geboren 
in boo0^eib. 

O^ob (0 recfitbeerbfg en 0trart 
be boo0|)efb bet men0c|ien. 

4. 5Dm ber obectrebinge toflle 
0traCt (Cob alle men0cljen ntetter 
boob. 

(Cob i0 op ^tt I)ooc|i0te bec^ 
toornt ober be ong;e|ioor0aaml)eib 
ber men0cl)en. C^ri0tu0 



XI. 

^///^ ^ ^/// ^ Cbristan. 

1 . Ta Deos paga tsjes o auchos. 
Tsjes inni babos*aarpanni o bog- 

sar. 

MarotuI o bog ta Deos. 

2. Boeboeno pesas*o tapos o ba- 
bosa paga ta Adam a Eva. 

Ta Deos ani pesasa minerien o 
babosa mario a ma-ibisse. 

Ta haibos linummal*! kakossi 
o babosa. 

3. Ta Adam a Eva ani pesasa 
kinummossi i ta Deos, so-o tapos 
choa sjiem o sjiem. 

Allipa babosa mabisse tsjes : 
kinummossi ja patapos, so-o ausji- 
men inni arapies. 

Ta Deos mabisse tsjes, so-o 
pachalt o arapies o babosa. 

4. Inau kakossi ta Deos pachalt o 
tapos o babos'o macha. 

Mauchus ja makabol inau ka- 
kossi o babosa ta Deos. 

Ta 



XI. CHRISTIAN MAXIMS. 

1. God is essentially a Spirit. 

The soul in man is united with his body. 
God is incorporeal. 

2. The first forefathers of the human race were Adam and Eve. 
In the beginning God made man just and good. 

Haibos has tempted man to disobedience. 

3. In the beginning, Adam and Eve disobeyed God, so also have all their 
There is not one man who is righteous ; all have sinned and have been 
God is just, and punishes the wickedness of man. 

4. On account of transgressions, God punishes all men with death. 
God is highly incensed at the disobedience of man. 

E 




erity. 
n in sin. 



34 



Christian 



C)ri0nt0 10 He tretiemafier 
oCte Sl^iDtielaar msifft^tn (l^oti 
rnHe He menjKcIjen. 

5. C|iri0ru0 iff tie &oone (Coti0, 
ett te 0amen gelpb een &oonc 
tta men^ctien. 

Ct)rf0ru0 f0 fn een perc^oon 
toaraffttc^ (BoD ett toacagcic^ 
men0c^. 

Ct)rt5tu0 al0 mendcfi (0 nfet 
geborett in boo0'' of bcrDerfte^ 
ni00e. 

6. C|[ri0ni0 (0 eeti ffant0 rec^t^ 
beerDiff men0c||. 

2)e men0cbe Cljri0ru0 (eeft 
ffeleDeti) etibe (0 ben boob ge-. 
0torben boor be on0e)oor0aam' 
defb ber tnen0cljen. 

C(d0ru0 10 ffe0torbeti om 
on0e 0onben, enbe ban \^tn boo- 
ben opffe0taan op bat top fn ^em 
leben 0ouben. 

7. 2Uit be boob Cfirf0tf 0pruft fiet 
eeutofge leben, 

(Cob lieeCt be onffe^oor0aam^ 
efb ber menc^c^en ffe0ti:aft in 
>pnen efgenen &one 3le0unt 
Cgn^tum. 

C|in0ru0 ber0oent en 0telt 
O^ob te breben boor 0pn bloeb. 

8. I^et bloeb C|)rt0ti be0 &oon0 
(15ob0 reinifft on0 ban alle 
0onbe. 

Ct)ri0tu0 



Ta Christus paga ma-aborra 
tuppach o Deos a babosa. 

5. Ta Christus paga sjiem o Deos, 
so-o maibassar a rorro sjiem o ba- 
bosa. 

Inni nattada boa paga Deos 

^ g^S*^ ^^^-^ g^gil o babosa ta 
Christus. 

Ta Christus maibas o babosa 
alii inausjiem inni arapies. 

6. Ta Christus paga babos'o 
auchos ma-abisse-bisse a tsjes. 

Ta Christus o babosa mina- 
chote, so-o minachd inau kakossi o 
babosa. 

Ta Christus minach^ inau tor- 
roa kakossi, so-o minaseas a macha, 
alia mamorich ja namo inni icho- 
sar. 

• _ 

7. Innai macha o ta Christus tum- 
moach o morich o ma-^chonsar. 

Ta Deos pinachalt o kakossi o 
babosa inni choa maunis a sjiem ta 
Jesus Christus. 

Ta Christus o choa tagga pa- 
borra so-o tummalattal*i ta Deos. 

8. Tagg'o ta Christus Sjiem o . 
Deos mitatsiel torro boa innai ta- 
pos arapies. 

Ta 



Christ is the Peacemaker, or Mediator between God and man. 

5. Christ is the Son of God, and at the same time a Son of man. 
Christ is in one person : truly God and truly man. 

Christ, as man, is not born in iniquity or corruption. 

6. Christ is a perfectly righteous man. 

The man Cnrist has suffered, and has died on account of man's disobedience. 

Christ has died for our sins, and has risen from the dead, so that we may live in Ilim. 

7. The death of Jesus Christ is the source of life eternal. 

God has punished man's disobedience in His own Son, Jesus Christ. 
The blood of Christ reconciles and satisfies God. 

8. The blood of Jesus Christ, the Son of God, cleanscth us from all sin. 




Instruction 



35 



ban bare 0ontien. 

C|iri0ni0 (0 De bcrlo00er Her 
mrndcfieii. 

9. 5Dm Ijet Ip&rn euDe tieit tiooD 
&;?n0 &oon0 toil CSoD gcnaDfg 
0^h alle be pne^ tife beroulo 
(ebben ban ^aue 0ontitiu 

SDe Dcoetliefb ban toegen be 
0onbe (0 (Eob aangenaam. 

S)t bergebinge ber 0onben 
bolfft bet geloof in 3|e0um Cbrf^- 
turn. 

10. C|)rf0tu0 f0 ten kernel opge-- 
gaan, op bat % ^p\\ bolh g;ebue« 
rfff doube booc^pre&en bp &pnen 
(Llaber, en on0e boo0b^iO bebeb- 
&fn met 0pn gerecfiticbeib. 

!^et toace geloof in C||il0tum 
rec^tbeerbist alle be gene^ bie 
onrecbtbeerbfg 0pn. 

!^et toare geloobe refnfgt b^t 

fierte ban boo0b^ibf ^t^be b^^^t 
u0t tot be toecbken ber gececb- 
ticfieib. 

11. !^et toare geloof berge0el' 
0c|iapt allertoegen be bree0e 
(IPob0, be bree0e OEfob0 berbrpCt 
l}tn boo0en toflle en gebacbcen, 
enbr toeert be 0onbe. 

SDe brebe (Bob0, tcoo0t, en 
blpb0c|)ap 9e0 0ee0te0 berge0el'. 

0c|iappen 



Ta Christus parras o choa cho- 
sar innai choa kakossi. 

Ta Christus paga ma-abab£rras 
o babosa. 

9. Inau machote so-o machi o 
choa Sjiem ta Deos mabono tapes 
chono ai kamachi*o kakossi. 

Ta Deos maukat o zichil inau 
kakossi. 

Abono kakossi kamarior o au- 
tat inni ta Jesus Christus. 

10. Sinoss*i boesum ta Christus, 
alia tallochon papaz^inadono choa 
chosar katinnaam o choa tamau, 
so-o tatuinmakkum torro*arapics o 
choa babisse. 

Autat o gagil inni u Christus 
pabisse-bisse o tapos chono ai, allipa 
ja mabisse. 

Autat o gagil mitatsiel o tsjes 
innai arapies, so-o maukat o tataap 
o babisse. 

11. Autat o gagil tallochon par*o 
ikkil o Deos, ikkil o Deos paube o 
rapies airab a tattuppa, so-o miel o 
kakossi. 

Aborr*o ta Deos, tattalattala, 
so-o aukat o tsjes tallochon par'o 

autat 



Christ delivers His people from their sins. 
Christ is the Saviour of man. 
9. On account of the suffering and death of His Son, God will have mercy upon all those 
who repent of their sins. 

Sorrow for our sins is acceptable to God. 

Faith in Jesus Christ is followed by the forgiveness of sins. 

10. Christ has ascended to heaven, so that He may continually intercede with His Father, 
and (hat His righteousness may hide our unrighteousness. 

True faith in Christ justifies all men, who are unrighteous. 

True faith cleanseth the heart from iniquity, and inclineth man to perform the works of 
righteousness. 

1 1. True faith always accompanies the fear of God ; the fear of God expels our wicked will 
and thoughts, and wards off sin. 




36 



Christian 



0ci)appeit ffedunfff t^t toar^ ge-. 
loof en ffoeDe toerbken. 

!^et toare geloobe en tet ge^ 
ben gaan te 0amen al0 0u0tcr en 
broebetr. 

12. !^et ffebeb bet geloobfffe betr> 
toerfr 0eer beel. 

(Cob berfjoorb tet gebeb en 
be 0meekkfnge &pne0 bolkd. 

iaile ffoebe gaben komen ban 
boben, ban ben QUaber ber lic^ten. 
13* OQlel bat bolb tDirn0 (Bob be 
l^eere 10. 

O^ob ber&fe0t &pn bemfnbe 
bie !^p lief Ijeeft uit alle ge^lacti^ 
ten ber aarbe. 

C|iri0tu0 (0 ^n fiooHi ban 
alle kfnbecen (Eiob0. 
14- ^lle toare geloobige 0pn &fn- 
beren (0ob0. 

SDaar 0pn beel C^rf0tenen) 
toefnig to are geloobtge. 

(Bob henb alleen be toare 
geloobrge* en geeft fjaar tiet 
eeutofge leben. 

15* ^et eeutofge leben (0 in ben 
&oone (Bob0 3|e0u C|iri0to. 

2)it eeutoige leben be0taaD tn 
b'aan0c|ioub)tnge (Bobe0 in ben 
liemel, brebe^ ru0te, enbe altoo0 
buerenbe breuc^be, 0onber etnbe* 

Ct)ri0tu0 



autat o gagil, so-o tataap o ba- 
bisse. 

Autat o gagil so-o ai-acha ma- 
babat a rorro maibas o atoasa. 

12. Ai-ach'o ma-autat a cho ka- 
mauchus marach. 

Ta Deos masini o ai-acha so-o 
annoggonoggono choa chosar. 

Tapos ja asosono mario kasai 
innai de babo, innai de tamau o rara. 

13. Kamario ija chono ai, kamau- 
nis tamasea Deos paga ta Jehova. 

Ta Deos piri o choa aukattan a 
cho innai tapos o tupponodon de ta* 

Ta Christus paga oeno o tapos 
sisjiem o Deos. 

14. Tapos o gagil o ma-autat a 
cho paga sisjiem o Deos. 

Mapan Christan a cho, alii pa 
ja mapan gagil o ma-autat a cho. 

Ta Deos makammichi mab'o 
gagil o ma-autat a cho, so-o pe'i 
decho morich o ma-achonsar. 

15. Morich o ma-dchonsar o paga 
inni tasjiem o Deos ta Jesus Christus. 

Morich ma-achonsar o mini 
paga o ai-all'o ta Deos i boesum, 
aborra, ^rra, so-o aukat o taulaulan 
pa sisi-ech. 

Ta 



The peace of God, consolation, and gladness of heart continually accompany true faith 
and good works. 

True faith and prayer go hand in hand, like sister and brother. 

12. The prayer of tne believer obtaineth much. 

God grants the prayer and supplication of His people. 
All good gifts come from above, from the Father of Light. 

13. Blessed is the people whose God is the Lord. 

God elects His chosen, whom He loves, out of all the generations of the earth. 
Christ is the head of all the children of God. 

14. All true believers are the children of God. 
There are many Christians, but few true believers. 

God knows only true believers, and gives them eternal life. 

15. Eternal life is in the Son of God, Jesus Christ. 

This eternal life consists in the beholding of God in heaven, in peace, rest, and everlast- 
ing joy, without end. 




Instruction 



37 



Cf)tf0tu0 10 tt op0tantifnffe 
bait Drit tiooH^n enDe |iet leben. 
tit in !^rm geloofr, 0al leben, at 
toarr ^p ooh ffegtorben. 
i6. (Beipfeliectop0 C^rffiftud ffe-- 
^torbrn^ rntir bait Deit ooobeit 
opg:e0taait f0, al0oo ooh life iit 
C|iri0to 0terbtn, dulleit bait tieit 
booDrn opgetoeht toocDen. 

%ti\ riitDe bait alle Diitgeit 0al 
Hen Dag bed algem^inm oorbeel0 
ber0cl))?neit. 

^eii bage bed algemefiteit 
ootbeel0 0al C|iri0tu0 eeit ^geltb 
geben na 0pnr toechKen. 
I?- j^a bft leben bolgt |iet loon ; 
of be breucljbe bed |iemel0 of be 
dtraffe bed beldc^en bferd. 

SQiee alle bronhbaartd. 

Met alle aCgoben-bfenaard) 
rnbe nit (afbod dp^dofferen. 
18. (Kiiee be booben^ bfe in tare 
donben dterbrn, toant (aar brel 
id in ben poel ttg birrd- 

(UUel be booben, bie brcouto 
fiebbrn ban Iiare donben, rnbe in 
Ctiridto dterbrn ; de rudtrn, enDe 
fiarr toerbhen tit bolgen (aar 
na. 

t^et Ifff^aam dterft, be dfele 
blpft lebenbfff. 

19. l^et 



Ta Christus paga aseas o ma- 
ch^ so-o morich o ai, tamasea 
poetautat inni ichosar, mamorich, 
pagatomma kamach'ija icho. 

16. Maibas o ta Christus minach^, 
so-o minaseas a mach^ masini 
channumm'a tamasea kamach'ija 
inni ta Christus, allecho ip^seas a 
mach^. 

Ka sisi o mini tapos ai tatum- 
moach o zijsja d'o chachalt o tapos 
o cho. 

Ka zijsj*o chachalt o tapos o 
cho ta Christus pape o atatta cho- 
sar kamaibas o choa tataap. 

17. A-i-jor a morich o mini um- 
mior o chachad ; ja aukat i boe- 
sum, ja chachalt o chau i Gehenna. 

Anana i tapos chono ma-£rab. 
Anana i tapos aran o Dcos o 
baak, so-o tamasea paan o haibos. 

18. Anana i machida ai, tamasea 
kamach'ija inni choa kakossi, inau 
choa ^da paga inni chauch o chau. 

Ka mario ija machada ai, tama- 
sea machi'o kakossi, so-o kamach'- 
ija inni ta Christus ; pissassen ja, 
so-o choa tataap ummior i decho. 

Ka mach'ija bog, m^chonsar 
morich ja tsjes. 

19. Ka 



Christ is the Resurrection from the dead, and the Life ; he that believeth in Him shall 
live though he were dead. 

16. As Christ died and rose again from the dead, so they also who die in Christ shall be 
raised from the dead. 

At the end of all things, the day of judgment will come. 

In the final day of judgment Christ will recompense every one according to his works. 

17. Recompense will follow after this life : either the joy of heaven or the punishment of 
hell-fire. 

Woe unto all drunkards. 

Woe unto all idolaters, who sacrifice to haibos. 

18. Woe unto those who die in their sins, for their part shall be the lake of fire. 

Blessed are the dead who have repented of their sins, and who die in Christ ; they rest, 
and (heir works do follow them. 

The body dies, the soul remains alive. 




38 



Christian 



19* ^et Uffliaam 10 becgank&eUb} 
He fiielt onberganfifidik. 

%t Uff^aam berrot fnt graf^ 
He ffitlz Her geloobiffen ber^tti^t 
in ntn fiemd. 

20. ^en tiagr lie0 algemeentn 
oorlieel0 0\\llzn De tiooDe lisW- 
men met ^are 0ieleit toetiec ber^ 
eemgt, en lebenDiggemaahttoer^ 
ben: baar na 0ullen be gene, bie 
bootffaan0 be gerec^tfc^eib nagr^ 
bolfft iiebben, gaan in t^tn kernel ; 
maar bit 0onber opfiouben bet 
quaab gepUegt fiebben, sullen 
gaan fnt |iel0c|ir birr. 
(CfnDe ber C(ri0teliftbe leer' 
0preukfirn. 



XII. 

Vragcn over 't Gebed des 
Heeren. 

enrage* Wlit mtmt gp be 
Haber fnbe fjemelrn ? 

ianttooort (Kob. 

Ura. SQiaarom toorb l^p m0t 
?Oaber ffenaamt ? 

iant. S)m bat !^p on0e Ugfia'' 
mtn enbe 0UIen gemaakt )eeft, 
enbe on0 oob onber^oub* 

lira. 



19. Ka moribal ja bog, pa moribal 
ja tsjes. 

Ka mabocho ja bog i robaan, 
maboas ja tsjes o ma-autat acho i 
boesum ai. 

20. Ka zijsj'o chachalt o tapos o 
cho bog o machad'ailecho aarpanni 
o tattaul'o choa tsjes, so-o ipau- 
richsar : kasagh-£ tamasea inum- 
mior tallochon o babisse, sasoss'i 
boesum ; kasjabaan tamasea tal- 
lochon pinarapies, sasoss'i chau o 
Gehenna. 



§isi o atite o atil o Christan. 



XII. 



Chachod Ai-Ach'o Christ an. 



Chachod. Tomm'ijo pattonan o 
tamau de boesum ? 
Tattaam, Ta Deos. 
Cha. Inaunumma attonannan ja 
icho namoa tamau ? 

Tatt. Inau icho mineriensar 
torroa bog a tsjes-oe, so-o porich- 
torro boa channumma. 

Cha. 



19. The body is perishable, the soul is imperishable. 

The body decays in the grave, the soul of the believer goes to heaven. 

20. In the day of general juogment the dead bodies shall be again united to their souls and 
live again ; thereupon they who ordinarily have followed after righteousness shall go to 
heaven, but they who have constantly done iniquity shall enter into hell-fire. 

END OF THE CHRISTIAN MAXIMS. 
XII. QUESTIONS ON THE PRAYER OF THE LORD. 

Quistion. Whom do you call the Father in heaven ? 

Anrwer, God. 

Q, Why is He called our Father? 

A, Because it is He who has made our bodies and souls, and He also who supports us. 




Instruction 



39 



93ra. SQiaarom toorti l^p ge^ 
naamt een ?ll2atm f n&e t^meUii ? 

iant €)m bat 1^^ niet en (0 
ffflpk De QarO0c(e baHerisf. 

oira. (Ullat toocDen to^ geleero 
uft oe0e \DoorDen, €)n0e (UaDer 
Hie in oe ^emden 0pD ? 

SIM. SDat al0 top homeit biD- 
ben^ bett ^oogmoet be0 tierteit 
toefftoerpen, tn (Eob bruc^teit 
moetcn^ bfe 000 Ijooc) tooonb 
bobrit be toolhhen. 

(lira. (Ullie ^eeft 0110 bft gebeb 
ffeleerb ? 

Slnt. 9De &one (Eob0 on0e 
l^eece 3|e0u0 CI)ri0rti0. 

(lira, t^oebeel biitgeit beffereti 
top baa (Cob ? 

ant. 2De0e 0e0 :— 
i«>. jjDat top fepnen ffcoo^ 
ten naam mogen prp0en. 

2«". gDat !^p 000 toel regere, 
en recl)tbeecbiff make gelph al0 
^p 0elf0 (0. 

3«°. 2Dat top al0 een recfit-- 
beerbfff bolft acliterbolgen &pn 
gebob. 

4« 2Dat !^p on0 ber0orQ:e 
ban Ipftoclit, enbe on0 onber- 
^oube gelph een babec 0pn Ktn^ 
beren* 5*""- 2>at 



Cha. Inaunumma attonannan ja 
icho tamau de boesum ? 

Tatt. Inau alii maibas o tam- 
auno de ta ja icho. 

Cha. Numm'attill^ ja name 
innai atite o minisar, namoa tamau 
tamasea pa^a de boesum ? 

Tatt. AUa namo, sabanno mat 
meacha, maspot a tummis o asies o 
tsjes, so-o mikkil o Deos, tamasea 
pattodon mauchus a ro de babo 
rabbo. 

Cha. Todacho ja pin^ttil torro 
ai-ach'o minisar ? 

Tatt. Sjiem badd*o Deos, torroa 
ma-achachimit ta Jesus Christus. 

Cha. Naida tuppo torro me- 
ach'o Deos-sar. 

Tatt. Nataap o minisar : — 
Kapesasa, alia torro madas o 
choa naan mauchus mato. 

Ka narroa, alia mariona icho 
chummimit torro boa, §0-0 merien 
torro ma-abisse-abisse tsjes maibas 
icho. 

Ka natorroa, alia torro maibas 
o ma-abisse tsjes chonoe ummior o 
cho'atillo. 

Ka naspat, all'icho pe'i torro 
inochan, so-o paan torro boa mai- 
bas o tamau choa sisjiem. 

Ka 



Q, Why is He called a Father in heaven ? 
j4. Because He is not like our fathers on earth. 
Q. What do these words teach us : Our Father, which art in heaven ? 
A, They teach us that, when we pray, we should put away from us the pride of the heart, 
and that we should fear God, who lives so high above us, above the clouds. 
Q, Who has taught us this prayer ? 
A. The Son of God, our Lord Jesus Christ. 
Q, How many things do we desire God to give us ? 
ji. These six : — 

I®. That we may praise His great name. 

79. That He may reign over us, and make us righteous, as He is righteous. 

3<>. That we may follow His commandments as a righteous people. 

4<'. That He may provide us with bodily sustenance, and support us as a lather does 
his children. 




40 



Christian 



5» a>at on0 (Eon uft gena-' 
Hf It bf rgebe, al0 to^ quaaD Doeti, 
enbr niet en 0traffr. 

6«°. a)at (Cob 0110 be^oebe 
boot (aibo0, on^eti bpanb rit 
benpb^r. 

dura* diOIaatom ? 

iant. iDm bat top 006 anbere 
men0cyrtt bcrgebrn, al0 sfp on0 
quaab boem 

iUta. l^oe boe( ? 

£lnt. SDat !^p brit fiaibod be^ 
bUbe^ en geen fierlof en gebe on0 
te bergtttigen^ bat 10 te brc^oeb- 
lien tot quaab. 

(Dra. oOlaarom toorb |iaibo0 
genaamt litn boo0en ? 

jant. S)m bat (|^ inber baab 
boo0aarbfp: (0, en (Bob0 tooorb 
0eer ongegoordaam. 

Wiu. mat 10 bat te ^eggen, 
£lnien ? 

iant. £Imen, bat 10 te 0eggen, 
f)et (0 ^eheCf enbe CPob 0al boen 
gelpb al0 to^ begeeren. 

inra* diOIaar uu toeet gp bat ? 

iSnt. iDm bat l^p alleen alU 
|eer0c^appir enbe mac^t (eeft^ 
t0p fnbrn fjemel, 10^ op ber aa^ 
ben, enbe bit ailed, op bat top 
&pnen naam 0oubrn prp0en. 

Vragen 



Ka nachap, alia Deos mabono 
torro boa, sabanno torro rumma- 
pies, so-o alii tummea. 

Ka nataap, alia Deos maladik 
o torroa boa innai ta haibos-ech, 
torro'azjies-in so-o ma-asannan. 

Cha, Inaunumma? 

Tatt, Inau channumma namo 
mabono roman a cho sabanno par- 
apies i namo dechonoe. 

Cha. Moedasar ? 

Tatt. Alia maddik i ta haibos, 
so-o alii pauss'i icho sumbach i 
namo, michosar a pattite, lum- 
mal'i arapies. 

Cha, Inaunumma attonannan 
ta haibos rapies ai ? 

Tatt, Inau gagil icho rapies 
tsjes, so-o mauchus kummossi o 
attite o Deos. 

Cha. Numma micho a pattite. 
Amen ? 

Tatt. Amen, micho a pattite 
gagilna, so-o allecho merien ta 
Deos maibas ja torro meacha. 

Cha, Innaidem'ijo maba dai ? 

Tatt, Inau ma-akammichisar 
icho paga chachimit o tapos a barra, 
pagatomma de boesum, pagatomma 
de ta, so-o mini tapos ai, alia torro 
mamadas o choa naan. 

Chachod 



t 



|<>. That God in His mercy may forgive us when we commit evil, and not punish us. 

><>. That God may protect us from haibos, oar enemy and envier. 
Q. Why? 

A. Because we also forgive others, when they do evil to us. 
Q, How then ? 

A. That He may forbid haibos, and not permit him to poison us, that is, tempt us to evil. 
Q, Why is haibos called the evil -one? 

A. Because he is indeed very malignant and very disobedient to God's word. 
Q, What is the signification of Amen ? 

A, Amen signifies that it is certain, and that God will do as we wish. 
Q, Whence do you know that ? 

A. Because He alone has the dominion and the power, be it in heaven, be it on earth, and 
all this in order that we should praise His Name. 




Instruction 



41 



XIII. 

Vragen over het Chrlstelikke 

Geloovc. 

1. asiat in (et CKi0teIt&&e ffe< 
loobe ? ' 

^et Ct)rf0teUk&e gelooC (0 een 
0eiiere &ennf00e ban O^oH^ enDt 
ban ^et 0Cffgeit &pn0 b)oorb0, 
toaar uft fb ten bollen ber^eherc 
ben^ enbe in m^n ffemoeb be^en 
troo0t ont0taet) bat (0ob be Olaber 
om &pn0 &ooa0 3|e0u Ct)ri0tf 
toflle m^n (Bob enbe (Uabec 0p, 
bie m^ utt genaben alle m^ne 
0onbtn tofl bergebtn, mp op 
be0er aarben leeftoc^t geben^ en 
namaal0 (et eeutoige lebe fnben 
(emeU 

2. aoiat noemt gp O^ob ? 

Jb noenie (Eob enbfteUb een 
(]^ee0t, ttu^z een b)e0en oft peD 
0oon) bfe ban 0fg 0elben altoo0 
fl:etoee0t (0, enbe blpft. 

3. I^oebeel (Boben 0j?nber ? 
SDaatr (0 een (Pob in bcfe pec^ 

0oonen, be (llaber^ be ^oone^ 
enbe be t^* (0ee0t. 

4- 9Qlat 



XIII. 



Chachod Autat Christan. 



I. Numm'ija autat o Christan ? 

Autat o Christan paga ngil o 
ab*o Deos, so-o o al*o choa ranied^ in- 
nainumma kamachaggi ja ina, so-o 
tummoach i na-a tsjes tattalattal*o 
mini, alia Deos o tamau inau choa 
sjiem ta Jesus Christus paga na-a 
micho Deos a tamau, tamasca merab 
o mabono tapos na-a kakosst, pe*o 
inochan ina de ta mini, so-o sagha-a 
rummi-es morich o ma-ichonsar i 
boesum ai. 



2. Pattonan onumm'ijo ta Deos i 
Na-a pattonan o ta Deos tsjes o 

auchos, so-o nattada ga ja boa, 
tamasea maunis pinaga, so-o paga 
taulaulan. 

3. Naida Deos paga ja ? 

Paga nattasar a Deos inni nator- 
roa-da boa, o 'Famau, ta Sjiem, so-o 
ta auchar o Deos o ma-iichimit ta 
Spirito Santo. 4. Numma 



XIII. QUESTIONS ON THE CHRISTIAN BELIEF. 

1. What is the Christian belief? 

The Christian belief is a sure knowledge of God, and of the testimony of His Word, 
whereby I am fully assured— causing mv heart to be filled with consolation— that God the 
Father is my God and Father for the safce of His Son Jesus Christ, who will mercifully for- 
give me all my sins, give me on this earth sustenance, and hereafter life everlasting in 
neaven. 

2. What do vou call God ? 

I call God essentially a Spirit, and a Being or Person who is lelf-aeated, and who will 
always exist. 

3. How many gods are there ? 

There is one God in three persons — the Father, the Son, and the Holy Ghmt 

F 




42 



Christian 



4- ^at i0 Dat te deggen, (ft ge^ 
loobe (It (EoD tieit WLat\n ? 

SDat 10 te 0effgen, ik beit ten 
tolleii ter^ekert tut Ijet deggett 
batt 0^0110 tooom, enbe )ouDe 
boor ba0t fn mptt gemoeUt tiat 
(Eon tie ^laDec bait eeulDigfietD 
gebaacD Ijeeft &pnett &oone, tiet 
toare beelb en 0clj^n0el &pn0 
per0oon0, enbe toarac^tig (boi 
eben al0 !^p« 

5. (0enereei't ofte baacb (Eoti al0 
een men0cb ? 

iReen: !^p genereert op een 
fieel bp0onDere \Dp0e. €)m 
eenige gelpkkenni00e te geben ; 
al0 be 0iere uit Ijaatr 0elben ^et 
bec0tanti, toflle enbe be gebac^-- 
ten boortbrengt, ofte al0 een 
fonreine tiit tiaatr 0elben toatec 
tut0troomt^ (15el^k(&ertop0 ijet 
ber0tanb) toflle^ en gebacfiten 
boortbomen aft be 0tele, en in be 
0elbe blpben, al0oo gaat be 
&oone (Sot}i ban ben 9]aber uit, 
enbe blpft in l^em. O^el^b&er^ 
b)p0 een fonteine nietop en ^oub 
tDatec uitte0troomen) al0oo en 
boub be miaber niet op, ban 
&pnen &oone te baren. 

6. dOiaarom bougt gp baar b|^ 
be0e tooocben, ^c^epper be0 ^e-- 
mel0 enbe betr aarben ? j3Dm 



4. Numma micho a pattite, na-a 
poetautat inni Deos o Taniau ? 

Micho a pattite, kamachaggi ja 
ina innai al'o ranied o Deos, so-o 
poetat o na-a tsjes, alia Deos o 
tamau ani taulaulan pinausjiem o 
choa sjiem, gagil a isas so-o tatsar 
o choa micho boa, so-o Deos o 
gagil maibas icho. 



5. Ja ta Deos pausjiem maibas o 
babosa? 

Pa : maun ion is ja choa pausjiem. 
Alia na-a pe*o charri o tatschier ; 
maibas o tsjes patoach o saan, o 
airab a tattuppa, maibas o chuppod 
pachuppod o to. Maibas o saan, 
airab, a tattuppa, sai innaide tsjes, 
so-o machonsar inni tsjes, masini 
sjiem o Deos sai innai o tamau, 

so-o machonsar inni ichosar. Mai- 

• * • 

bas o chuppod alii pittol o pachup- 
pod o to, masini o tamau alli 
posisi o pausjiem o choa sjiem. 



6. Inaunumm'ijo pachip o atite x> 

Inau 



mmi, Airien o boesum a ta ? 



4. What does that mean — I believe in God the Father ? 

That signifies — I am quite convinced and firmly persuaded in my heart that, according 
to the testimony of God's Word, God the Father has, from all eternity, begotten His Son, 
the true image and likeness of His person, and that He is truly God, even as He is. 

5. Does God beget or generate as men do ? 

No ; He generates in quite a different way. Let me mention some comparisons: such as, 
the soul spontaneously generates the understanding, will, and thoughts, as a fountain pours 
out its waters of its own accord. Thus, our understanding, will, and thoughts proceed from 
the soul and abide in the same ; in like manner, the Son of God proceeds from the Father 
and abides in Him. As a fountain does not cease to let its waters flow, even so the Father 
does not cease to beget His Son. 

6. Why do you add these words — Creator of heaven and earth ? 




Instruction 



43 



S)m Hat ift ten bollett berisfe^ 
&ect ben ttit bet 0egffen ban (Pob0 
tooorb, en 6oor badt boube in 
mpn ffemoeb, bat (0ob be (llabec 
ban ben beffinne gemaoht Ijeeft 
(emel, aarbe, 0ee) zntiz aUe0 toat 
fn^aren ommebang; i0,betoelbke 
alle be0e bfngen boor &^ne 
&rac|)t onbec^teunt) en boor 
&pne toeten0c|iap regeect^ 

7. diOIat in bat te sfeggen, SiU 
macbtfff ? 

9De0e tooorben geben te ktix- 
nen bat CSob be dUaber al &|^nen 
tofile boet, en &pn ffcoote hrac^t 
betboont fnbe &cbeppfng;e ban 
liemel) aarbe^ enbe }ee, betoelhhe 
nofb moebe en toorb, en g^pnen 
toflle en toorb ban geen anber 
belet. 

8. aaiat troo0t rptft'er (n u ge-- 
moeb uft ^et ffeloof in O^ob ben 
aiaber, iaimacbtiff ? 

SDaar uit ben ik ten bollen 
bewekert, ffelpkkectop^ nipn ge-. 
moeb ooh ffetuffft, bat (rob be 
(Uaber out S^i^n^ &oon0 3|t0u 
Cbtf0ti toflle nt^n OPob enbe 
illaber 01^, mt nip lief (eeft al0 
&pn &inb, en betoaact boor alle 
qtiaab^ 

9. QOlelfi 



Inau kamachaggi ja ina innai 
al'o ranied o Dcos, so-o poctat o 
na-a tsjcs, alia Deos o tamau ani 
pesasa mincrien o boesum, o ta, a 
abas, so-o tapos o ai lalium choa 
baan, tamasea tumk'o mini tapos ai 
o choa barra, so-o chummimit o 
choa aba. 



7. Numma micho a pattite, kama- 
bara'ija tapos o ai ? 

Atite o mini pab'ija alia Deos o 
tamau ummoob o tapos choa airab, 
SQ-o pait'o choa barra mato inni 
tataap o boesum, o ta, a abas ; 
tamase*alli mab'o orachan, so-o 
choa airab alii ilen innai-de roman- 
ech, 

8. Numm'ija tattalattala tummo- 
ach i joa tsjes innau autat inni Deos 
o tamau, kamabarr'ija tapos o ai ? 

Innai micho kamachaggi ja ina, 
maibas o na-a tsjes channumma 
maunis-o-ala, alia Deos o tamau 
inau choa sjicm ta Jesus Christus 
paga na-a micho Deos a tamau, 
tamasea maukat ina maibas o choa 



sjiem< 



so-o maladik o na-a boa 



mnai patapos rapies. 



9. Tomm'ija 



Because by the Word of God I am c^uite convinced and fally persuaded in my heart that 
God the Father has, from the very begmning, made heaven, the earth, the sea, and all that 
therein is, that He upholdeth all these things by His power, and that He rules over them by 
His wisdom. 

7. What is the meaning of Almighty? 

These words signify that God the Father performs everything according to His will, 
and that He shows His great power in the creation of heaven, of the earth, and the sea ; that 
His power never tires, and that His will and His word are not restricted by any other 
being. 

8. What consolation does faith in God the Father Almighty give to your heart? 

It gives me the full conviction — even as my mind also bears witness thereto— that God 
the Father is my God and Father for the sake of His Son Jesus Christ ; that God loves me 
as His child, and guards me from all evil. 




44 



Christian 



9- diOIelk (0 be ttoec&e perisoon 
2)e &oone (BOI10 !3e0u0 

10. (0elooft ff^ ooii in Hen »^oone 

Sja^ Ik geloobe te 0amen ge- 
l2?ft in O^oD Sen ^laDtr^ enoe itt 
&pnea &oone : gel^kktrtop^ tie 
&one (Boti0 ffebieb, 0effgeittie: 
gp gelooft in (0oti) gelooft oob in 

11. diOIat f0 Hat te ^eggen^ f& 
eloobe in Hen eenig geboren 
^oone (EoD0 ? 

SDat 10 ih ben ten bollen be^ 
0eliert tift ijet 0egffen ban (IPob0 
tooorb, enbe boube boor ba0t in 
m]gn gemoetK bat be ttoeebe per^ 
0oon 3|e0u0 Cbn0tu0 0^ be eigen 
&one (Eiob0, toare O^ob uit (0ob. 

12. (LQiat naam l^zztt be &oone 
(15ob0? 

&l^nen naam, gelpb &pn0 
9IIaber0, i0 Jeboba, om bat !^p 
i0 toaracbtig (Bob« 

13. (UUat naam ifi bat 3|e0u0 ? 
3|e0u0 i0 te 0eggen een ber-- 

lo00etr betr men0cben. 

14- ^oert be &oone (0ob0 be0en 

naam ? 

3|a. ten aan0ien bat l^p 
menscQe i0* 15- 9QIei 



9. Tomm'ijakanarroa-daboainni 
ga o Deos-sar ? 

Sjiem o Deos ta Jesus Christus. 

10. Ja poetautat ijonoe inni ta 
sjiem o Deos channumma ? 

Hena, maibassar a rorro na-a 
poetautat inni Deos o tamau, so-o 
inni choa sjiem : maibas ja pattillo 
ta sjiem o Deos; imoa poetautat 
inni ta Deos, oetautatta inni na-a- 
da boa channumma, macho. 

11. Numma micho a pattite, na-a 
poetautat inni sjiem o Deos natta- 
sar o binodda ? 

Micho a pattite, kamachaggi 
ja ina innai al'o ranicd o Deos, so-o 
poetat o na-a tsjes, alia kanarroa-da 
boa ta Jesus Christus paga maunis 
a sjiem o Deos, gagil o Deos innai 
Deos-sar, 

12. Naan onumma paga ta sjiem 
o Deos? 

Choa naan, maibas o choa 
tamau, paga ta Jehova, inau paga 
gagil o Deos icho. 

1 3. Naan onumma micho ta Jesus ? 
Ta Jesus micho a pattite ma- 

abab^rras o babosa. 

14. Ja ta sjiem o Deos marach o 
naan o mini ? 

Hena, maibas paga babosa ja 
icho. 15. Mai 



9. Who is the second Person in God's nature ? 
The Son of God, Jesus Christ 

10. Do you believe in the Son of God ? 

Yes ; I believe at the same time in God the Father, and in His Son, just as the Son of 
God commands, saying, Ye believe in God, believe also in Me. 

11. What does this signify — I believe in the only-bejjolten Son of God ? 

That I am fully convinced, according to the testimony of God*s Word, and in my mind 
hold fast thereunto, that the second Person, Jesus Christ, is God*s own Son, very God of 
God. 

12. What is the name of the Son of God? 

His name, like that of His Father, is Jehovah, because He is truly God. 

13. What does that name of Jesus signify r 
Jesus signifies a redeemer of men. 

14. Does the Son of God bear this nam^ ? 
Yes, with regard to His human natiure. 




Instruction 



45 



15- ^el )oe, tie &oone (Boti0 f0, 
tit oob ttn men0c(e ? 

3|a: !^^ (0 De &ooite O^otid, 
en te 0Qmeii gelpk eett een0 
0men0c|ie &oone. 
i6. ^i^noer ttoee per0oiten ftt 
l^em, tie per^ooit een0 meiu 
0c(en, eit tie per0oon (Boti0 ? 

il^een, tiaar si^n in l^em 
ttoee toe0en0 ofte narueren, enUe 
eeii per0ooit; gelpbkertop^ tie 
0iele in tieu nun^ciie bereenfgt 
(0 met (et Usfiaam tot een per-- 
0oon, altoo0 10 tie natuere tie0 
tiien0c(en bereenfgt met De 
(Eotmeli^kke natuere tot een per- 
0oon in C|irf0to 3|e0u. 
1 7- 3|0 tie &oone (Sotfi alt^ti 
men0clje ffetoee0t? 

il^een: om tie obemetifnge 
tier men0c)en 10 1^]g op tie0ei: 
aartien ber^c^enen fnDe natuere 
een0 men0ct)en, op tiat l?p 0outie 
boeten boor on0e on0e!)oor0aam'. 
iieib. 

i8. aoiaarom (0 tie &oone (Eoti0 
ber0ctienen inbe natuere een0 
men0ct)en ? 

iDp bat (Eob &pn rec||t0oube 
bolbrengen, enbe b'obertrebinge 
0traffen in &pnen &oone, fnbe 
men0ct)elikbe natuere, toelKke te^ 
o:cn O^ob yabbe obeigetrebem 

19. (UUaarom 



15. Mai numma, ja ta sjiem o 
Deos paga babosa channumma ? 

Hena : paga sjiem o Deos, so-o 
maibassar a rorrd sjiem o babosa, 

16. Ja paga narroa-da boa inni 
ichosar, bo*o babosa, so-o bo'o 
Deos-§ar ? 

Pa : narroa ja ga paga inni 
icho, so-o nattada boa. Maibas o 
tsjes aarpanni o bogsar inni babosa 
pana nattada boa, masini ga o 
babosa aarpanni o ga o Deossar 
pana nattada boa inni ta Jesus 
Christus. 



17. Ja ta sjiem o Deos taulaulan 
pinaga babc^ ? 

ra : inau kalcossi o babosa 
tsinummoach i ta mini inni ga o 
babosa, alia lalummaslas o torroa 
kalcossi. 



18. Inonumma ta sjiem o Deos 
tsinummoach inni ga o babosa ? 

Alia ta Deos a-ummior o choa 
babisse, so-o pachalt o kakossi inni 
choa sjiem, inni ga o babosa, o ai 
kinummossi i ta Deos. 

19. Inonumma 



15. How, then, is the Son of God also a man ? 

Yes ; He is the Son of God, and at the same time like unto a son of man. 

16. Are there two persons in Him, the person of a man, and the Person of God? 

No ; there dwell in Him two beings or natures and one person. As in man the soul is 
united to the body in one person, so also the nature of man is united with the divine nature 
into one person in Christ Jesus. 

17. Has the Son of God been always human? 

No ; for the transgression of man He appeared in this world in the nature of man, so 
that He might suffer for man's disobedience. 

18. Why did the Son of God appear in the form of man ? 

That God might execute His judgment, and punish (our) transgressions in His Son, 
appearing in the form of man, who had transgressed against God. 




4<5 



Christian 



19- QQIaarom fieeft OSob be obe^ 
trebfnge ber men^cfieti ge^traft 
fti &pnen efgeneti Cootie ? 

M!)p bat l^p &pne IfeCbe tot 
be metiisclieti 0oubeti betopj^fen, 
enbe fiaar brp ^tellen t^anbe 
0traffe ber jsonbe. 
20. 10 bat recfit bat OSob be ober> 
trebinge ber men^cfieti 0traft in 
&pneti &oone ? 

laa't: om bat be &oone (Eob0 
be a^fbbelaar f0 tu00ctieti OSob 
en be men0ctienf bfe boor &pn 
boob OSob &pnen (|[}aber ber^oent 
en tebreben 0telt^ op bat alle be 
gene bfe berouto nebben ban bare 
donben, en aan i^em gelooben, 
bergebinge ber 0onben, enbe bet 
eeutoige leben berhrpgen jsouben 
in &pnen naam. 

21. oaiat 10 Cbri0tu0 ? 

SDe0en naam Cbri0tu0 b)p0t 
aan bat OSob be 91aber &iintn 
&oone be bequaamb^ib gegeben 

fieeft om be nien0cben te ber^ 
O00en. 

22. OOiaarom noemt gp ben 
&oone <Boi}0 on0en l^eere ? 

S)m bat l^p met &pn bloeb 
^em een efgen boU gekocbt 
teeft* 

23. QQife 0pn bft efgen bolk ? 

MI? 



19. Inonumma ta Deos pinachalt 
o kakossi o babosa inni choa maunis 
a sjiem ? 

Alia papait'o choa aukat pana 
babosa, so-o parras i decho innai 
chachalt o kakossi. 

20. Ja mabisse micho, alia ta Deos 
pachalt o kakossi o babosa inni 
choa sjiem ? 

Hena : inau ta sjiem o Deos 
paga ma-dborro tuppach o Deos a 
babosa, tamase'o choa mach^ pab- 
borra so-o tummalattal'i ta Deos 
choa tamau, alia tapos chono ai 
kamachi'o kakossi, so-o poetautat 
inni choa boa, mamarach o dbono 
kakossi. so-o morich o ma-achonsar 
inni choa naan. 

21. Numm'ija ta Christus? 
Naan o mini ta Christus paita 

alia Deos o tamau pinaatsikap o 
choa sjiem, alia paparras o babosa. 



22. Inaunumma pattonan ijonoe o 
sjiem o Deos ma-achachimit ja torro? 
Inau o choa tagga pinattodoch 
o cho maunis icho. 



23. Tomm'ija maunis a chono 
micho ? Torro 



19. Why has God punished the transgressions of men in His own Son ? 

In order that He might show His love to man, and deliver him from the punishment of 
sin. 

20. Is it righteous that God should punish the transgressions of man in His own Son ? 

Yes, it is, because the Son of God is the Mediator between God and man, who by His 
death reconciles and satisfies God, Ilis Father ; so that all who are repentant of their sins 
and believe in Him may obtain the forgiveness of sins and life eveilasting in His name. 

21. What is Christ ? 

This name denotes that God the Father has given His Son the power to deliver man. 

22. Why do vou call the Son of God our Lord ? 

Because He has purchased a peculiar people with His blood. 

23. Who is this peculiar people ? 



Instruction 



47 



QQlp alle Hfe aati l^em ge^ 
loobeitf en ua &pn 0teninie lui< 
0teren. 

24. &pit top &pne lifen0tbnecti' 
tttij en efgen boik ? 

3|a: onise lig^amen, on0e 
0(elen gpn l^em eigen. (Ker 
toaren Otendtbnec^ten ban Ijai-- 
bo0, en bolffHen na 0pne onge^ 
|)oor0aam^eiD, Oetoelbke on0 
liienstbaar sStelUe onDer 0pnen 
tDflle: He &oone (ISOD0 Ijeeft ons 
ban tiafbocf getoelt en beer- 
0cbappfe berlo0r, op bat top al0 
&pne b(en0tknectjren, Ijtti0ge^ 
noten, en eigen bolk 0ouben na- 
bolgen &pn tooorb en bebel. 

25. aaiat troo0t rp0t'er in u ge-- 
moeb utt geloof in ben &oone 
(So\^0 be l^eere 3|e0u0 Cbn0tu0? 

SDaar u(t ben ik ten boUen 
ber0ekert, bat be &oone (Song 
mp Uef beeft gebab, en fn be 
men0cbelikhe natuece ber^djen^ 
en (0, ten e(nbe % nip 0oube 
berlo00en banbe 0tratte ber 
0onbef en be0cbermen banbe 
ieet0c^app(e en *t getoelb ban 
iafbo0, om bat ffc &pn bien0t« 
;necbt enbe l^em efffen ben. 

26. 30 Cbrf0tu0 ontfangen fn 
&pn0 moeber0 ligb^^^nt gelpk al0 
alle anbece men0cben ? j^ttix : 



Torro patapos tamasea poet- 
autat inni choa boa, so-o ummior 
o choa char^ar. 

24. Ja torro paga choa aran, so-o 
maun is a cho ? 

Hena : torroa bog, torroa tsjcs 
maunis icho. Ani torro paga aran 
o haibos, so-o tsimichier o choa 
kakossi, tamasea pinauloan torro 
boa pana de rapo choa airab. Ta 
sjiem o Deos pinarras o torroa boa 
innai barra so-o chachimit o haibos, 
alia torro maibas o choa aran, 
chodon, so-o maunis a cho a- 
ummior o cho'atite so-o dtillo. 



25. Numm'ija tattalattala tum- 
moach i joa tsjes innai autat inni 
ta sjiem o Deos, ma-ach£chimit o 
ai ta Jesus Christ us ? 

Innai micho kamachaggi ja 
ina alia ta sjiem o Deos minaukat 
o ina tsinummoach i ga o babosa, 
alia paparras o na-a boa innai cha- 
chalt o kakossi, so-o mamaladik 
innai chachimit a barr'o haibos, 
inau paga ja ina choa aran, so-o 
maunis icho. 



26. Ja ta Christus inararain inni 
tsjes o choa tanai maibas o tapos 
roman a babosa i Maini : 



All we who believe in Him and listen to His voice. 
24« Are we His servants and His peculiar people ? 

Yes ; our bodies and our souls belong to Him. Formerly we were the servants of hailxM, 
and followed after him in his disobedience, so that we were made subservient to his will ; 
the Son of God has delivered us from hai))os' power and dominion, in order that we should, 
as servants, domestics, and as Mis peculiar people, follow His word and command. 

25. What consolation does faith in the Son of God, the Lord Jesus Christ, give unto your 
heart ? 

Thereby I am fully convinced that the Son of God has loved me, that He has appeared 
in human nature, in order that He might deliver me from the punishment of sin, and that 
He will protect me from the dominion and violence of haibos, inasmuch as I am His 
servant and belong to Him. 

26. Has Christ been conceived in His mother*s body, as all other persons ? 



48 



Christian 



il^een: l^p (0 op eeti bp^ 
0onliere toP0e ontfangeti \>an 
beti sioem (Eioli0, Oen !^. OSee^n 

27. i^eeft !^g geenen 3HaDer ? 
i^een, 000 ^p een 0men< 

0et)eti 0oone (0 -, 000 al0 l^p 
0^000 &oone (0, tieeft ^p £en 
Qlalier^ 

28. '^eeft l^g een moeHec ? 

Ija, 000 al0 l^p een 0inen'. 
0et)ett &oone {0; 000 al0 ^p 
(lSoD0 &oone (0, i0 ^^ 0onOer 
moeiier^ 

29. (UUfe (0 &pti moeber ? 

SDe berloocDe maget a^arfa. 

30. ajaia0 &pn moener een t^er- 
loofbe en toare niaffet ? 

3|a: acacia feeft gebaart 
t)aren &oone 3le0um Ctirf0tum 
toate maffet 0pnOe, eer0e noc^ 
met3|o0ep(i b^ren man ber0eUet 
tDa0f 0'i0 be0toangert getooroen, 
liat0e nocb met geenen man ber« 
&eert en ^ahht^ 

31. QQIel, f00e tan 0elff0 be^ 
t^rucbt getoornen ? 

il^leen: Hen SiDtm 0^000, ben 
^. (l?ee0t ^zttt Door &pn ber^ 
borgene iiraebt be t^erloofbe 
maafft 9^aria 0toanger ban 
kfnbe gemaahn 

32. saiaarom 



Maini : maunionis karinab icho 
innaide Auchar o Deos o ma- 
achimit, ta Spirito Santo. 
27. Ja alpa tamau icho ? 

Pa, maibas o sjiem o babosa, 
maibas o sjiem o Deos paga tamau. 



28. Ja paga tanai ? 

Paga maibas o sjiem o babosa ; 
maibas o sjiem o Deos, pa ja tanai. 



29. Tomm'ija choa tanai ? 
Patom^mmali ta Maria. 

30. Ja paga patomammali, so-o 
mammali o gagil choa tanai ? 

Hena: ta Maria pi nodd'o choa 
sjiem badda ta Jesus Christus 
mammali o gagil ; acho par'o choa 
r6bs ta Joseph ; karinummab, acho 
pinar'o sjam. 



3 1 . Oedan, ja maunis o rinummab ? 

Maini : ta Auchar o Deos 
Spirito Santo pinararain o patomim- 
mali Maria o choa barr'o ma- 
acharrieb. 

32. Inonumma 



No ; He has been conceived or begotten by the Breath of God, the Holy Spirit. 

27. Has He no Father? 

No, not as Son of man ; as the Son of God He has a Father. 

28. Has He a mother? 

Yes, as a Son of man ; as the Son of God He has no mother. 

29. Who is His mother ? 

The betrothed Virgin Mary. 
3a Was Hb mother a betrothed and true virgin ? 

Yes ; Mary being a true virgin brought forth her Son Jesus Christ ; being yet betrothed 
to her husband Joseph, she became pregnant, although she had not known any man. 
31. Did she, then, conceive of herself? 

No ; the Breath of God the Holy Ghost did, by His hidden power, make Mary, the 
betrothed virgin, pregnant with child. 




Instruction 



49 



32. saiaarom ift Ct)rf0tu0 ont-- 
tanffen en ffegenereert fnt ben 

d)p Hat be men0c^eU66e 
natuere in fiem ffe^eel ree^t'* 
beerbig 0oube 0pn. enbe niet 
ffeffenereert in boo09efb al0 alle 
anbere men0eben» 
33* 92lla0 bat betameUb ? 

3|a: ^et betaamt ben a^lbbe- 
laar ber men0ctien, bat !^p rec^t-^ 
beerbiff sii en onnoo0el fnt quaat« 
34- In toat lanb f0 C|)r{0tu0 ge-- 
boren ? 

In bet Joob0e^e lanb, in fiet 
blem 25etbie^em« 
35* dSlanneer ? 

iDber 0e0tfen^onbert en bpf^ 
tfc^ (aren« 

36. aian toat natfe tDa0 &pn 
moeber ? 

(Cen 3|oob0et)e maget, ban 
oub0 affcom0tf9 ban SDabfb ben 
Confnefc ber 3|oben. 

37. (Uttat troo0t rp0t'er (n u ge- 
moeb uitffeloobe fn3|e0umCtir(0'. 
turn ben &oone 9^ar(ae, ben 
&oone be0 men0ctien, ontfangen 
en ffegenereert uit ben 1^» (Bee0t ? 

2>aar uit ben fk ber0eiiet:t, 
bat Ctirf0tu0 m^n blee0c^ enbe 

bloeb, 



32. Inonumma karinab soo inaus- 
jiem ta Christus innaide Auchar o 
ma-achimit, ta Spirito Santo ? 

Alia ga o babos'inni ichosar 
papaga o auchos ma-abisse a tsjes, 
so-o alii ausjimen inni arapies, mai- 
bas o tapos roman babosa. 

33. Ja makkesjap o micho ? 
Hena : makkesjap o ma-^borr'o 

babosa, alia mabisse-bisse tsjes, so-o 
alii mab'o arapies. 

34. Inni ta onumma binodda ta 
Christus ? 

Inni ta o chono i Judaea lal- 
lum assaban Bethlehem. 

35. Aninumma? 

Ani manna-achpil a tschiet eis, 
mannatorro-us a tschiet eis, so-o 
narroa eis tschiet a baas. 

36. Azjies onumma pinaga choa 
tanai ? 

Mammali o chono i Judaea, 
kabossot ani o mario-a-cho o chono 
i Judaea ta David. 

37. Numm'ija tattalattala tum- 
moach i joa tsjes innai autat inni 
ta Jesus Christus sjiem o Maria, 
sjiem o babosa, karinab so-o maus- 
jiem innaide Spirito Santo ? 

Innai micho kamachaggi ja 
ina, alia ta Christus paga na-a 

boa 



33. Why is Christ conceived and generated by the Holy Ghost ? 

That human nature might be made perfectly righteous in Him, and not be generated in 
iniquitv, as all other men. 

33. Was that proper ? 

Yes ; it was proper that the Mediator of man should be righteous, and innocent of evil. 

34. In what country was Christ born ? 

In the country of the Jews, in the village of Bethlehem. 

35. When? 

About sixteen hundred and (ifly years ago. 

36. To what nation did His mother belong ? 

(She was) a Jewish virgin, remotely descended from David, the King of the Jews. 
37* What consouition does faith in Jesus Christ, the Son of Mary, the Son of man, begotten 
and generated by the Holy Ghost, give to your heart ? 




so 



Christian 



bloeO, mpn oub^te broeHer enoe 
naa^ten 0p, toelfike in He mem 
0cbeli6fie tiatuere mptien reetit« 
beerOigen 9^iOlielaar 10, op Oat 
i^p met 0pn gereebtfg^eib mpne 
boo0ti<ili enbe obertre&inge boor 
<Boh bebeiibe. 

38. 99aaiit Cbn'0tu0 boot &pne 
ffereebtfgb^ib u reef) tteerbfg boor 
OSob? 

3|a: &pne gereefitfgb^^b etibe 
ffoebe toerEbeti 0pn mpti efgen, 
enbe toorben gere&ent al0 m^nt 
gereebtigb^ib boor OSob. 
39- ^oe ge0et){et bat ? 

SlUt be gene bie fit Cbri0tum 
toaarlfk gelooben, 0pii l^em in^ 
gelpft. enbe bebbeti ffemeen0ebap 
aati bpae fferee^tigfiefb enbe 
ffoebe toerkfiem 
40. SOlaarom ? 

Cbri0tu0 bie 0et)enfit fiaar 
&pn gereebtfgb^ib, enbe b^t 
toare geloof al0 een b^nb neemt 
ban 0elf0 &pne geree^tigfieib 
enbe toelbaben an. 
41* (UUaar ^tztt Ct)rf0tu0 gele- 
ben, en toaar {0 !^p ge0torf3en ? 

3|n bet J|oob0cbe lanb, bfgt 
bp be 0tab 3(eru0alem. 
42. SOlie regeerbe boen in t)et 
3|oob0ct)e lanb ? i^ontiu0 



boa so-o tagga, na-a machen §0-0 
ma-achiddik o cho, tamasea inni 
ga o babosa paga ma-aborra ina ma- 
abisse-bisse tsjes, all'o choa babisse 
tummakkoob o na-a arapies so-o 
kakossi katinnaam o Deos. 

38. Ja ta Christus pabisse-bisse oa 
boa katinnaam o Deos o choa ba- 
bisse? 

Hena: choa babisse, so-o 
mario a tataap paga maunis ja 
ina, so-o katochen maibas o na-a 
micho babisse katinnaam o Deos. 

39. Moed'ija micho ? 

Tapos chono ai kapoetautat o 
gagil inni ta Jesus Christus, inaar- 
pan o choa bo^ so-o paga rorrono- 
ad'inni choa babisse a mario a ta- 
taap. 

40. Inaunumma? 

Ta Christus passoso i decho 
choa babisse, so-o autat o gagil 
maibas o rima tummaap a maunis- 
o-arach o choa babisse, a mario-a 
tataap. 

41. Dema minachote so-o minachi 
ta Christus ? 

De ta i Judaea, chaddik o assa- 
ban mato Jerusalem. 

42. Todacho baas ai merien o assa- . 
ban o chono i-Judaea ? Ta 



It assures me that Christ is my flesh and blood, that He is my eldest Brother and Kins- 
man, who, in His human nature, is mv righteous Mediator, so that He hides my iniquity 
and transgressions from God by His righteousness. 

38. Does the righteousness of Christ make you righteous before God ? 

Yes; His righteousness and good works are my own, and are considered as my 
righteousness before God. 

39. How does that happen ? 

All they who truly believe in Christ are incorporated into Him, and participate in His 
righteousness and good works. 

40. Why? 

Christ imparts unto them His righteousness and true faith ; and, as a hand, accepts of 
its own accora His righteousness and benefits. 

41. Where has Christ suffered, and where did He die ? 
In the land of the Jews, near the city of Jerusalem. 

42. Who governed the land of the Jews then ? 




Instruction 



SI 



t^otttfujS )d{latu0 een IGtO'- 
mzinn bremOelfng toa0 be- 
0ct)erm'.^eer enne l&fcljter bfm 
nerxjeruisalem* 

43- weft 5? C5rt0tum tot Jet 
Ip&en £nlie ben HooO gebraebt ? 

la : be boo0e 3lobeti Kelben 
0tarR aan en ber0oet)ten uft npb 
C]^rf0tum te booben, en ]&flatu0 
al0 een boo0e IGlfc^ter tolUfgbe 
baar in, en 0pra6 tegen Cbrf0tum 
bet bonn{00e ofte be 0traffe be0 
.boob0« 

44- 92Uaarom en belette OSob bat 
nfet, bat l^p &pnen &oone ban 
ben boob berlo0te ? 

't aaia0 (E;ob0 tofUe 0eir0, bat 
&;nen &oone 0oube Ipben en 
:e0lagen toorben banbe boo0e 
joben, om met &pn boob te 
loeten boor be obertrebfnge ber 
men0e]^en. 

45- ^oe (0 Ct)rf0tu0 ter boob 
ffebragt ? 

iai0 0? C]^rf0tum ffe0lagen, 
be0pot, en 0eet mf0bdnbelt 
liabben, nagelben 0p &pne l^an- 
ben enbe boeten aan een l^outen 
kru(0, enbe l^ebben bat opgeteebt 
tu00c^en ttoee mootbenaar0f b(e 
ook an fiet fiout genagelt toarem 

46- 310 Ct)ri0tu0 0e0torben an 
^et fouten iiruf0 ? Ja : 



Ta Pontius Pilatus azjies o 
chono Roman! pinaga ma-aladik 
so-o Airien lallum assaban Jeru- 
salem. 

43. Ja icho pinachote, so-o pinach'i 
ta Christus ? 

Hena : rapies chono i Judaea 
madobdob inau sannan pach'i ta 
Christus, so-o ta Pilatus maibas o 
rapies Airien, pauss'i decho, so-o 
pattite o chachalt o mach^ kasja- 
baan ta Christus. 

44. Inaunumma ta Deos alii miei 
o micho, alia parras o choa sjiem, 
depa machd ? 

Paga maunis a airab o Deos 
alia choa sjiem mamachote so-o 
allecho achan innai rapies chono 
i Judaea, alia lummaslas o choa 
machd o kakossi o babosa. 

45. Moeda inipicha ta Christus ? 

Ka ochal simioch, mannacha, 
so-o parapies o mauchus i ta Chris- 
tus, decho tummiltil o choa rima a 
asiel i sasakimottono baron, so-o 
pinase-^r aicho tuppach o narroa 
ma-ach'o cho tsiniltillan i baron 
channumma. 

46. Ja minacha ta Christus i sasa- 
kimottono baron ? Hena : 



Pontius Pilate, a Roman stranger, was protector and judge in Jerusalem. 

43. Did he cause the suflferings and death of Christ ? 

Yes ; the wicked Jews urgently insisted, and, from envy, demanded Christ's death ; 
while Pilate, as a wicked judge, consented by pronouncing against Christ the sentence or 
punishment of death. 

44. Why did not God prevent His Son's being put to death ? 

It was God's own will that His Son should suffer and be beaten by the wicked Jews, in 
order that, by His death. He might be a ransom for the transgressions of men. 

45. In what way was Christ put to death ? 

After they had beaten, mocked, and sorely ill-treated Christ, they nailed His hands and 
feet to a wooden cross, which they erected between two murderers, who were also nailed 
to the cross. 

46. Did Christ die on the cross of wood ? 




52^ 



Christian 



3|a: en &pn OooUe Ifgfiaam 
in begtaten, om Oat tiet toaarUfi 
HooH toa0« 

47- SSIat (0 Hat te 0eggen, l^p f^ 
nebergegaanftiHen hud lie0 bier^. 
Hat f0 He ijelle, (0 Ctin0tu0 met 
&?n Ugfiaam gepan fnt t)el0e^e 
bfer? 

i^eett; Oe0e tooorOen ontlee^ 
neti een gelpk6eni00e tan t)et 
i)el0cte tier, en ^ebben Oe^en 
^in, Oat fnOer HaoO b^t IpOen 
Cbrf0ti in Ufffiaam enOe 0iele 
al0oo 0toaar, l^avt^j enoe gcoot i0 

fetoee0t« al0 of ^p toaarliti fnt 
el0cbe lifer gegaan toare. 
48. Offllat f0 be meenfnge lie0et 
tDOorOen OSebenna, Hen kufl bed 
Wtftj en t)et bfer ban OSefienna ? 
OSebenna f0 een kufl ofte poel 
lie0 bfei:0 baar OSob |)afbo0 en 
alle boo0e nien0cben eeutofgUii 
0al 0ttaffen. 

49- SQlorb b^t ^el0ct)e tfer nofb 
uftgeblu0t ? 

il^een: be terbolgent^efb 
(Cob0 ont0tee{it gebuerfg bet 
t)el0ct)e tfen betoarenbe t0elt3e 
op bat alle Doo0e eeutofglfb ge-- 
0trart toerbem 

so. Mlat troo0t rptft'er fn u ge-- 
moeb uit t)et toare geloobe fn get 

Ipben 



Hena : §0-0 choa bog o mach- 
ada, kachinap o ta, inau gagil 
mach'ija micho. 

47. Numma micho a pattite, si- 
noss'i chauch o chau, ja ta Christus 
o choa bog sinoss'i chau o gehenna ? 



Main! : atite o mini marach 
o tatschier innai chau o gehenna, 
so-o pe'o lido o mini, alia machote 
o ta Christus inni choa bog a tsjes 
gagil pinaga talcho a ma-atauch, a 
ma-araas, a mato maibas o gagil 
sinoss'icho i chau o gehenna. 

48. Numm'ija lido o atite o mini, 
gehenna, chauch o chau, so-o chau 
o gehenna ? 

Gehenna paga, chauch o chau, 
dema ta Deos allecho pachote i ta 
haibos taulaulan, so-o tapos chono 
ma-arapies. 

49. Ja alii otuppen o chau o ge- 
henna ? 

Maini : rais o Deos tallochon 
pisor o chau i gehenna, so-o mala- 
dik, ino-chote-in taulaulan tapos ja 
ma-arapies. 

50. Numm'ija tattalattala tum- 
moach i joa tsjes innai autat o gagil 

inni 



Yes ; and His dead body was buried, because it was reallv dead. 

47. What does that signify — He has descended into the pit of fire, that is, hell? Did Christ 
bodily enter the fire of hell? 

No ; these words are a simile of the fire of hell, and mean that the sufferings of Christ, 
body and soul, were truly as great, severe, and intense as if He actually had entered hell- 
fire. 

48. What is the signification of these words — Gehenna, the pit of fire, and the flames of 
Gehenna ? 

Gehenna is a pit or pool of fire, where God will eternally punish haibos and all wicked 
men. 

49. Will the fire of hell never be extinguished ? 

No ; the wrath of God continually kindles hell-fire, and keeps it burning, so that all the 
wicked may be eternally punished. 




Instruction 



S3 



I^Hen enUe 0tetben Cfirf^tf an 

%et Ipoen enOe fttttbtn 3|e0u 
Ct)rf0t( iie0 &oon0 (EOI10 aati ^et 
bout best fitufee^ 10 oen eenfgeii 
toarafftigett troo0t mpner 0fele *, 
aan get l^ouO tied &rutce0 aan- 
tfc^outoe fb He Ueflie (Bond, eitOe 
&pne0 &ooti0 tot He men^c^en, 
fk 0fe Hen tootn (EOI10 tegen He 
0onlie, enoe He 0traffe bantie 
0onlie Her men0c^en in &pnen 
efgenen t^oone, (k 0ie Haar Hele 
tDonHen, enHe Ijet bloeH He0 
&oon0 dSoH0 an b^nHen, Hoeten, 
en &;n gant0c|)e Ugti^am ban 
toegen mpne obertceHfngen. 
SDaat u(t ben 16 ber0ekett Hat 
He &oone (EOH0 3!e0u0 Cljrl0tu0 
Boor &;n l^Hen enHe 0terben 
(nHe men0c^eUbke natuere toaar^ 
Uk geboet ^tztt boor He obertre^ 
Hinge Her men0ctien. om mp te 
berro00en banbe Hree0e He0 
toorn0 (ISOH0, banbe mac^t enHe 
beer0ct)appfe He0 Hu(bel0, enHe 
banbe 0traffe be0 tiel0cben bfer0» 
&00 toanneer be gram0etiap 
(Kob0 mp bree0e aaniaacljtf 000 
0al ik mp bfepe berbergen inbe 
bloebiffe toonben be0 &oon0 
(Kob0, op bat ben toorn &^ne0 
Slaber0 boorbp ga, fk 0al met 
alle ern0t an^ouben om berge- 
binge ber 0onbenf om bet Ipben 
enbe 0terben &pn0 beminben 
&oon0, bie &pnen (Eaber 'tmi^ 
toaart0 ber0oent fieeft* 

SI. ai0 



inni machote a macha o ta Christus 
i baron o ^asakimotto ? 

Machote so-o machi o ta Chris- 
tus sjiem o Deos i baron o sasaki- 
motto paga nattada tattalattal'o 
gagil o na-a tsjes; inni baron o 
sasakimotto na-a miall'o aukat o 
Deos, a choa sjiem pana babosa, 
na-a miall'o rais o Deos inau ka- 
kossi, so-o chachalt o kakossi o 
babos'inni choa maunis a sjiem, 
na-a miall'o mapan soa, so-o tagg'o 
sjiem o Deos inni rim'a asiel, inni 
tapos choa bog inau na-a kakossi. 
Innai-numma kamachaggi ja ina, 
alia ta Christus sjiem o Deos inni 
ga o babos'o choa machote a machi 
linummaslas o kakossi o babosa, ino 
barrasan ja ina innai ikkil o rais o 
Deos, innai barra so-o chachimit o 
haibos, so-o innai chachalt o chau o 
gehenna. Sja rais o Deos pa-ikkil 
na-a tsjes, na-a papaddabo mauchus 
a r6 inni soa ma-atagg'o sjiem o 
Deos, alia pasji rais o choa tamau, 
na-a a-um-illo-ilono abono kakossi 
inau machote a machd o choa au- 
kattan a sjiem, tamasea pinaborr'o 
choa tamau na-a boa. 



51. Kamach'ija 



5a What consolation does true faith in the sufferings and death of Christ on the cross of 
wood mt to ]rour heart ? 

The sufferings and death of Jesus Christ, the Son of God, on the cross, is the only sure 
consolation of my soul. On the cross I behold the true Iotc of God and of His Son toward 
man ; I see the wrath of God against sin, and the punishment of man's sin in His own Son ; 
there I see many wounds and the blood of the Son of God coTering— on account of my sins 




54 



Christian 



51- Sllsi C]^r{0mj$ ffe0tort)en toast, 
toaar ^tntn {0 &vn siizU gegaan ? 

52. 31^ )$pti Ugi^aam betrot (n 
tietffraf? 

I^leeti : op ben OerHeti Hag (0 
l^p toeoer kbenoig getoorOen, en 
berre0en ban ben OooOen. 

53- ^^oelian(ger top0e ? 

a>e 0iele in toeOergekeert in 
t)et Ugijaam, en met fiet booOe Ug- 
Ibaam toener beteenfgt getoorHem 

54- QSiie tieeft Oat geOaan ? 

SDe &oone (EOO0 fieeft boor 
&pn bract) t t^^ ^^^l^ bereenfgt 
met ti^t booUe Ugbaam, enOe 
al0oo f0 t)et toetier lebenliig st- 
toornen. 

55- SOlaarom bleef Ct)rf0tu0 nfet 
in&en Ooob gelpk al0 alle anbere 
men0eiien ? 

flDm brie oor0aken :— 
I*". !^p en (0 nfet ffe0tor* 
ben om &pn efgen 0onben* 

2*". met fegn Ipben enbe 
boob geeft l^p ten bouen geboet 

boor 



51. Kamach'ija ta Christus sinosse 
dema choa tsjes-oe i 

I boesum ai. 

52. Ja minabocho i robaan choa 
bog ? 

Main! : kanatorroa-da zijsja 
pinaijoch o morich ja aicho, so-o 
minaseas a macha. 

53. Masanno? 
Kapinacheoach ja tsjes i bog, 

so-o inaarpan o tattaul'o bog o 
machada ai. 

54. Tomm'ija minerien o micho ? 
Ta sjiem o Deos o choa barra 

pinaarp'o tsjes o bog o machada, 
so-o pinaijoch o morich ja aicho- 
ech. 

55. Inaunumma alii machonsar 
machd ta ^Christus maibas o tapos 
roman a babosa ? 

Inau natorroa-da tuppo : — 
Kapesasa, alii minach'ija icho 
inau choa maunis a Icakossi. 

Ka narroa, o choa machot6 
a mach^ iinummaslas o auchos o 

kakossi 



— His hands, feet, and whole body. Hence I am sure that the Son of God, Jesus Christ, 
has, through His suflferings and death in His human nature, truly paid the penalty for the 
transgressions of man, so that I may be delivered from the wrath of God> from the power 
and dominion of the devil, and from the punishment of hell-fire. Thus, when the wrath of 
God fills me with fear, I will deeply hide myself in the bloody wounds of the Son of God, so 
that the anger of His Father may pass bv ; and I shall most earnestly seek the forgiveness of 
sin, for the sake of the sufferings and death of His beloved Son, who has reconciled His 
Father to me. 

51. After Christ had died, where did Hb soul go to ? 
To heaven. 

52. Did His body see corruption in the grave ? 

No : on the third day He returned to life, and rose firom the dead. 

53. In what way ? 

The soul returned to the body, and was united again with His dead body. 

54. Who did that ? 

The Son of God did, by His own power, unite His soul with His dead body, and thus it 
became again living. 

55. Why did not Christ remain in death like all other persons? 
For three reasons : — 

I®. He did not die for His own tins. 




Instruction 



5S 



boor He obertceOfngeti Oer mem 
ftt^tn ; t)ferom tooro !^p fti ti^t 
ffraf nfet gefiouOen gelpS anoere 
men^etiett* 

3«». oe Jeewcjappfe ober 
lebeti enbe boob f0 l^etn dgen 
al0 OSob^ &ootu ; enbe Ifl mag* 
tfg ]^et boobe Ugfiaam lebenbfg 
te maken. 

56. azilat troostt u be op^tanbfnffe 
C|)r{0t( bati ben booben ? 

9>e opsttanbfnge C^rf^tf tan 
ben booben betop^t bat l^p be 
toaragtfge &oone (Eob0 dP, be-- 
tDelkke ben boob onbec s>pne 
boeten getreben, en be banoen 
be0 boobst in fttuMitn gebroben 
tieeft 1 toaar nit ih ber^ekect ben« 
bat t^tlfimfSy i}it in t)et gtat 
opge0loten f0 getoee^t om be 
0onben ber men0c^en en ban 
i}zn boob ont0lagen i0 getoorben, 
gant0e]^eUk en ten bollen boor be 
obertrebfnge ber men0c^en eu 
boet en betaalt fieeft *, betDelbke 
eenmaal ook mpn Ug^aam ban 
be banben be0 ooobtf berlo00en 
HaU en bat lebenblg maken boor 
&^ne kragt, nfettegen^taanbe 
battet in ^n graf al berrot en 
bergaan i0. 

57. in CirfsftujS, na bat !^p toe-- 
ber Tebenbfg getoorben toa^, op 
betrer aarben gebleben ? i^tzn: 



kakossi o babosa ; inau micho alii 
machonsar o koemen i robaan^ 
maibas o roman babosa. 

Ka natorroa, chachimit o 
morich a macha maunis icho mai- 
bas o sjiem o Deos ; so-o mabarra 
ja icho, paurich o bog o machi. 

56. Numm'ija tummalattala joa 
tsjes aseas o Christus a mach^ ? 

Aseas o Christus a machi 
paita, alia choa paga gagil o sjiem 
o Deos, tamasea tsinummallas o 
mach^ de rapo cho'a§iel, so-o pin- 
^pil o kakoen o machd ; innai- 
nummia kamachaggi ja ina, alia ta 
Christus, o ai kakinoen i robaan 
inau kakossi o babosa, so-o binarra- 
san a macha, oppen ja chinnummalt 
o kakossi o babosa ; tamase'o man- 
tas channumma paparras o na-a bog 
innai kakoen o macha, so-o pa- 
paurich ai-oe o choa barra, paga- 
tomma kamabocho i robaan. 



57. Kapaijoch o morich, ja pinoe- 
tach babo ta mini ta Christus f 

Maini : 



20. By His death He paid the full penalty for the transgression of man, therefore He 
did not remain in the grave like other men. 

y*. The dominion over life and death belongs to Him as the Son of God, and He has 
the power to give again life to the dead body. 

56. What consolation does the resurrection of Christ from the dead give you 7 

The resurrection of Christ from the dead proves that He is the true Son of God, who has 
trampled death under his feet, and has snapped asunder the bonds of death, and this gives 
me the assurance that Christ, who was confined in the grave for the sins of man, and who 
was delivered from death, has fully and completely paid and suffered the penalty for the 
transgressions of man ; that He will likewise also deliver my body from the bonds of death, 
and through His strength will give it new life, although it has decayed and lain rotting in 
the grave. 

57. Did Christ, after He had again returned to life, remain on this earth ? 




S6 



Christian 



0i€n : nt ticerdf tifrn c; 110 
<^ % 0f frfcl0ininrii ten |nnel. 
5^^ uOat nnt Mf ttntif taf m 
^ ter Mtitn ? 

^ (0 tier0c|eneii aan beU^ 
li(r » bottn firm fffctnt If aotrn^ 
f fite lecfr &if n letimte ufflaam 
firrroofit^ op natgi fUkttlik toeten 
tfOttOen^ tar tff torOrr Ictienniff 
fetDOftm toa0^ en belial ten 
noaatf )ong;eren9 &ifne tien^t^ 
fcnegten, tat0e cfouten gaan Uer^ 
en aUe fiotkeren^ ente fiaar 
toopen mer toater (nten naam 
De0 (Datertf, lie0 &oon0, ente 
te0 1^* (Bttfittfi. 

59' ^oe (0 C|irf0nt0 ten fiemel 
opgeff aan ? 

ja(0c^efD genomen bebbenbe 
ban bVM bfenstkneebten op 
eenen berg, it &pn Ugbo^nt 
boor %diit ooffen fn een toolkke 
opffebeben na boben, en al0 0p 
na ben b^niel 0taroogben, 0pn 
ttoee (Enffelen bersebenen, toeU-. 
ke ffetufirben bat Cbrf0tu0 al0oo 
0oube toeberkomen, gel)?k 0p 
t?em ten b^niel b^bben 0fen 
op0tmn. 

60. mi^u Cbrf0tu0 fnben bt' 
melr 

3|a: tot ben bag be0 alge- 
meenen oorbeel0. 61. oaiaartoe 



Maim : »4-jor a nomn ( 
mi-cs tsuiommanch i 
58. Nu]iim*i|a icbo mcrien de ta 
narroads mmmi-cs? 

TsJimminnarh o mapan cfaooo 
ai madarram ani icho^ so-o pait\> 
choa bog moricha, aUa kam»- 
machaggi dcchonoe, kapaijoch o 
morich ja icbo, so-o pausra cbosi 
aran tsdiict narroa cbo, aUa sa- 
sosse patdl o tapes o cbo^ so-o 
sumkir i to i decbo iimi naan o 
tamau, ta sjiem, so-o ta Auchar o 
Deos, Spirito Sajita 



59. Moeda sinoss*! boesum ta 
Christus? 

Kapoberies o choa aran babo 
nattada ranna, inalappoon ja choa 
bog lallum nattada rabbo pana 
babo katinnaam o choa machi 
so-o kamabaddabadd'o boesum de- 
chonoe, tsinummoach narroa-da 
Angelas, o ai pinaba, alia masini- 
sar sasai pacheoach ta Christus, 
maibas decho minit'ichosar turn- 
magach i boesum. 

60. Ja machonsar inni boesum ta 
Christus ? 

Hena: ate zijsj'o chachalt o 
tapos o cho. 61. Inonumma 



No ) after forty dtyi He ascended into heaven. 

58. What did He do on earth during these forty days? 

He appeared unto many who had formerly known Him ; He showed them Hb living 
body, so that they might certainly know that He had again returned to life ; and He com* 
manued His twelve disciples, His servants, to go unto all nations, and to baptize them with 
water. In the name of the Father, the Son, and the Holy Ghost. 

59. 1 low did Christ ascend into heaven ? 

Having taken leave of His servants on a mountain. His body ascended on high, before 
their eyes. Into the clouds ) and while they were gazing towards heaven, two angels appeared, 
who testified that Christ would return in the same manner as they had seen Him ascend 
Into heaven. 
6a Doei Christ remain in heaven ? 

Yes I till the day of general judgment. 




Instruction 



57 



6i. a^Oaartoe ig Ctir(0tu0 (nUett 
^tmtl gegaan ? 

d)p bat i^p Hen fiemel 0oulie 
openen, life om on^ec 0ontieii 
tDiUe toatf toege0loten« entie ge^ 
Huerfff on0e boor0prake 0pii bp 
&;neti ajaoer* 

62. OQiat (0 bat te atssztij isitu 
enbe tec reebter^anb &pi\0 
aiaber0 Sllmatm \ tieeft (Bob 
eeit l^anb ofte recQter^anb ; 0ft 
C|irf0tu0 al0 men0cbe fnben 
bemel ter rec^terlb^tib &pn0 
tllaber0 ? 

i^een: !^;, be0e tooorben 
ontleeneti een 0elp66enf00e 
banbe Confngett ber aatben, 
toelkfie ib^re naa0te eti 1300^ 
treffeU60te mebegenooteti tot 
t)are rectiter^anb 0etten, en 
tDP0en aan, bat al0oo mebe 
C9ri0tu0 al0 men0cbe, be 
booe$0te en alber^eerlfR0te 0? 
fnben bemel boben alle (Cngelen 
enbe men0ct)en, betoeUbe eenen 
naam ontfangen ti^eft boben 
alle namen, tnDz naQ0t &pnen 
92aber alle ^eer0c|)appie enbe 
mact)t bteft 't 0p inben tiemel 
of op ber aarben, op bat % 
alle 0?ne bpanben l^em 0elben 
onbertoerpe, enbe be0ctierme 
&]gn efgen bolk^ te toeten, alle 
be ffene bfe aan l^tm gelooben, 
tnl^t &pnen naam Uef^ebben. 

63. &al 



61. Inonumma sinoss'i boesum ta 
Christus ? 

Alia tatummann'o boesum, o 
ai kinapos inau torroa kakossi, soo 
papaga tallochon torroa nia-azinado 
katinnaam o choa tainau. 

62. Numma micho a pattite, airo- 
ossen i kallamas o choa tamau, 
kamabarr'ija tapos 6 ai ; ja ta 
Deos paga rima ja kallamas ; ja ta 
Christus maibas o babosa mero-os 
inni boesum i kallamas o choa 
tamau ? 

Main! : atite o mini marach o 
tatschier innai mario-acho de ta, 
tamasea pairo-os o choa ara, o ai 
maso machiddik a matisso, i choa 
kallamas, so-o paita, alia masini 
channumma ta Christus, maibas o 
babosa, kummasjies a maro a ma- 
tasso i boesum bab6 tapos Angelus 
a babosa, tamasea minarach o naan 
babo tapos o naan, so-o a-i-jor a 
choa tamau paga chachimit o 
tapos a barra pagatomma de 
boesum, pagatomma de ta, alia 
pauloan o tapos cho'azjies-in, 
so-o maladik o choa maunis a 

• 

cho i tapos chono ai ka poetautat 
inni choa boa, so-o maukat o choa 
naan. 



63. Ja 



61. With what purpose did Christ ascend into heaven ? 

That He might open heaven, which was closed against us on account of our sins, and 
that He might continually be our Intercessor with the Father. 

62. What does that signify— Sitting on the right hand of His Father Almighty? Has God 
a right hand? Docs Christ, as a human being, sit in heaven, on the right hand of His 
Father ? 

No ; these words are taken from a simile of the kings of the earth, who put their nearest 
and most excellent compeers on their right hand, and thus signify that Chrbt also, as man, 
occapies the highest ana most glorious place in heaven, above all angels and men, having 

H 




S8 



Christian 



63. &al Ct)rf0tu0 uft Hen l^emel 
toeHtrkomen ? 

la: ^p 0al tet^cfi^nen fnHe 
tDolkketi ai0 l&it^ttt otet alle 

64. aaianneer? 

^en ein&e ban l^emel, aarHe, 
en&'alle bfngem OSeen nun^cfie 
en toeet ban Hfen Oaff« 

65. (KUat 0al ^p Ooen ? 

^p 0al 0itten op &pnen 
tliroon fnDe toolhfien, enOe 0al 
&?ne Oienaar^ be C^ngelen sitiu 
ben, bat0e alle men^cijen b? een 
berpberen; be gcaben 0uUen 
l^ace booben geben, tni^z be 5ee 
0al l^are booben geben, en aile 
men0cljenf 000 lebenbe, al0 tiz 
te boren ge0torben 0pn. 0ullen 
ber0cf)gnen boor i}zn iBlfcfjter 
0toel 3|e0u Ct)rt0tL op bat0e 
loon ontfangen na gare toerb 
ken« SDaar na 0al C(iri0tu0 ijet 
bonnf00e uft0preken ober alle 
men0etien, enbe boo0e boen 
toerpen int ^zlfit^t bier; maar 
be reetitbeerbfge enbe 0pne brfen^ 
i}zn 0al !^p gelefben in be breucf)^ 
ben be0 ^zmtlsi. 

66. QQiat troo0t rp0t'er in u 

gemoebf 



63. Ja papaijoch innai boesum ta 
Christus ? 

Hena : tatummoach i rabbo 
maibas o ma-achachalt o tapos o 
cho. 

64. §abanno? 

Kasisi o boesum, a ta, so-o 
mini tapos ai : allipa ja cho mab'o 
zijsja aicho-ech. 

65. Mamerien onumm'ichonoe ? 
Mamero-os i babo choa ba o 

rasan lallum rabbo, so-o allecho 
pauss'o choa aran, ta Angelus, 
alia paidarr'o tapos o cho : robaan 
pape'o choa machdda, so-o abas 
pape'o choa machada, so-o patapos 
babosa, morich-a ja ani mach^ 
tatummoach katinnaam o ba o 
rasan o ma-achachalt ta Jesus Chris- 
tus, alia marach o chachad kamai- 
bas o choa tataap. Kasach-a ta 
Christus papattite o chachalt o 
tapos o cho, so-o papa-itis o tapos 
ma-arapies i chau o gehenna ; kas- 
jabaan papa-i-jor o ma-bisse tsjes 
chonoe, so-o choa aukattan a cho 
i aukat o boesum-ech. 



66. Numm'ija tattalattala tum- 

moach 



received a name above all names, and possessing, next to His Father, all dominion and 
power, be it in heaven or on earth, so that He may subdue all His enemies, and protect His 
own people — to wit, all those who believe in Him, and love His name. 

63. Will Christ return again from heaven ? 

Yes ; He will appear in the clouds, as the Judge of all men. 

64. When? 

At the end of heaven and earth and of all things. No man knows when that day will 
come. 

65. What will He do ? 

He will sit on His throne in the clouds, and will send His servants, the angels, to 
assemble all men ; the graves shall render their dead, and the sea shall render its dead, and 
all men then living, as well as those who have died before, shall appear before the judgment- 
seat of Jesus Christ, to be rewarded according to their works. Then Christ will pronounce 
sentence on all men, and cast the wicked into hell-fire, but the righteous and His friends He 
wiU lead into the joys of heaven. 




Instruction 



59 



ffemoeb, om Hat ev gelooft, Hat 
Cl)rf0tu0 un kernel opgegaan (0, 
eti tDeOerkometi 0al om te rfc^^ 
ten He lebenOe ettoe He bootie ? 

9>aar uft ben f 6 getof0 ber^e-- 
fiert, Hat Ct)rf0tu0 mpn fiooft 
boben alle mpne tpanHen f0, 
Hetoelfibe Hen bemei Hoor mp 
bettoorben b^^^t, ^i^ seHuerfg 
tu00c^en treeH met &pne boor- 
0pra&e, op Hat !^p &^nen JllaHer 
tmptoaart0 ber0oene, toelkben ik 
do& ten Hage He0 alffemeinen oor^ 
Heel0 Hit Hen btmel bertoacbte, op 
Hat l^p fypwz enHe mj^ne bpanHen 
fn ^et Ijei0cIje bier toerpe, enHe 
mv met bem 0telle in Hen fiemel, 
geipii ^? tot &pi\tn Wltibtt ge- 
0egt l^eeft, Ik tod Hat toaar ib 
ben, 00& mpnen Hfenaar 0p^ 

67. dOife (0 He HerHe per0oon in 
tiet tDe0en (EOH0 ? 

SDen ianem (ISOH0, He !^« 
d5ee0t. 

68. (Belooft ff? (n Hen !^. (Pee0t ? 

la: (6 ffeloobe te 0amen 
ffel^R fn Hen ^aHer, fn Hen 
&oone, enHe fn Hen i^Hem (ISOH0, 
Hen i^« (lSee0t, om Hat He0e Hrfe 
per0oonen 0pn He eenfge enHe 
toaracbtfge (doH» 09. OQiat 



moach i joa tsjes, inau poetautat 
ijonoe alia ta Christus sinoss'i boe- 
sum, so-o sasai pacheoach, alia 
merien o chachalt o cho moricha 
so-o machada ai ? 

Innai micho kamachaggi ja 
ina, alia ta Christus na-a oeno 
paga babo tapos na-a izjies-in, 
tamasca pinaaunis o boesum ina, 
so-o tallochon paz-inado alia pa- 
bo rr'o choa tamau na-a boa ; o ai 
na-a tummassin channumma innai 
boesum ka zijsj'o chachalt o tapos 
o cho, alia pa-itis o choa so-o na-a 
micho ^ziies-in i chau o gehenna, 
so-o paubarri ina rorro icho inni 
boesum, maibassar pinal'o choa 
tamau, na-a merab, alia dema paga 
ina, na-a aran paga channumma. 



67. Tomm'ija ka natorroa-da boa 
inni ga o Deos-sar ? 

Ta Auchar o Deos o ma- 
achimit ta Spirito Santo. 

68. Ja poetautat ijonoe inni ta 
Spirito Santo ? 

Hena : na-a poetautat mai- 
bassar a rorro inni o tamau, inni 
ta sjiem, so-o inni ta Auchar o 
Deos, Spirito Santo, inau natorroa- 
da bo'o mini paga nattasar ai, so-o 
gagil o Deos. 69. Numma 



66. What consolation does your belief, that Christ has ascended into heaven and that He wiU 
return to judge the quick and the dead, give to your heart ? 

It gives me the sure conviction that Christ, my Head, is raised above all m^ enemies, 
that He has obtained heaven for me, and that He continually intercedes for me, m order to 
reconcile His Father to me ; and that I also expect Him to come from heaven on the day 
of general judgment, in order that He may cast His and my enemies into hell-fire, and that 
He may give me a place in heaven with Him, as He spake to His Father, ' I will that where 
I am, my servants shall be also. ' 

67. Who is the third Person in God's being? 
The Breath of God, the Holy Ghost. 

68. Do you believe in the Holy Ghost ? 

Yes ; I believe at the same time in the Father, in the Son, and in the Breath of God, the 
Holy Ghost, because these three Persons are the only and true God. 




6o 



Christian 



69. mat Ifi te Oat ^effpit, ik 
oeloobe in Den laiiem (Poti0, tien 

% (B£££(t ? 

SDat f0 te deggen, {& toeet 
boor geto(0 uft 0egffeit bati (ISO&0 
tooorti, enUe IjouDe boor ba0t fn 
m]in gemoeOf Oat He !^« (lSee0t 
ban&en dUalier enOe ban ben 
&oone te jsamen uftpat, toare 
OSob uft OSob, be toelbbe ^e- 
mel0etie gebac^ten fnaa00emt 
ofte fnblaa0t, enbe geleib op ben 
toeg ber geboben (Eob0^ 

70. (KUat {0 tiet efffen en bp0om 
ber toerh ban be0e Drie per- 
0oonen ? 

OSob be (Ilaber (0 be ^clb^pper 
ban bemelf aarbe, enbe 0ee, om 
bat f^p eer0t bepnnen geeft 
alle bfngen te mafien, enbe i^tn 
&oone, mft00aber0 ben ^. 
(Szzfit boen aanbangen l^eeft 
om mebe te toerfiken , be &oone 
(0ob0 f0 be berlo00er ber men^ 
0cljen, om bat !^p fn &pn 
per0oon, en be men0c]b^ltfike 
natuere, be 9^ibbelaar enbe boor- 
bibber f0 tu00ct)en C^ob en be 
men0ct)en ; be ^. (Szm 10 ben 
troo0ter ber kfnberen (Eob0, om 
bat l^p in l^are fierten tooont, 
enbe i^aar ffebuerfff bertroo0t« 

71- &00 



69. Numma micho a pattite, na-a 
poetautat inni ta Auchar o Deos o 
ma-achimit, ta Spirito Santo ? 

Micho a pattite, kamachaggi 
ja ina innai al'o ranted o Deos, so-o 
poetat o na-a tsjes, alia ta Spirito 
Santo sosse rorro innai o tamau, 
so-o innai ta sjiem, gagil o Deos 
innai Deossar, tamasea pauchar o 
tattupp'o boesum, so-o pa-i-jor i 
tarran o atillono Deos. 



70. Numm'ija maunis a tataap o 
natorroa-da bo'o mini ? 

Deos o tamau paga Airien o 
boesum, o ta, a abas, inau icho 
tsinummaas o merien o mini tapos 
ai, so-o pinaisas'i ta sjiem a ta 
Spirito Santo karri-tataap ; ta sjiem 
o Deos paga ma-ababirras o babosa, 
inau inni choa boa, so-o inni ga o 
babosa paga ma-^borra a ma-izinado 
tuppach o Deos a babosa ; ta Spirito 
Santo paga ma-attal^ttal'o sisjiem o 
Deos, inau summos'i choa tsjes, so-o 
tallochon tummalattal'i decho. 



71. Moeda 



69. What does that signify— I believe in the Breath of God, the Holy Ghost ? 

That signifies — I know for certain from the testimony of God's Word, and am firmly con- 
vinced in my mind, that the Holy Ghost jointlv proceeds from the Father and from the Son, 
being very God of God, who infuses or breathes heavenly thoughts, and conducts us in the 
way of God's commandments. 

70. What is the peculiar and especial work of these three Persons ? 

God the Father is the Creator of heaven and earth, and of the sea, because it was He 
who first began to make all things, and caused His Son, as also the Holy Ghost, to join in 
this work ; the Son of God is the Redeemer of man, because He in His person, and 
according to His human nature, is the Mediator and Intercessor between God and man ; the 
Holy Ghost is the Comforter of the children of God, because He dwells in their hearts, and 
constantly comforts them. 




Instruction 



6i 



71- &00 betttoo0t tie !^« (l^ee0t 
on0e lietten ? 

I9v (ie(M on0 toe l)et IpDen 
entie Deit D00& Cl)il0t(, ni(t0^ 

faDer0&^ne recfitbnrDfffe toerft-- 
en, op Dat top ontgaan 0ouDen, 
enDe bri? ge^telt toerben bait be 
dtraffe oer 0onbe ; baar na blaa^r 
^p on0 in eenen ffoebeit toille 
ttibt ffebacfiten, bat top al0 
nfeutoe men0c|)en een becmaa& 
liebben fnbe toer&&en bee ffer- 
ecfitfffliefb, enbe nabolgen fiet 
Uben on0e0 l^eeten 3|e0u Cfiri0tf, 
baar uft l^p getuffft tot on^en 
(Efee^t^ bat top toaacUb 0pn bin-' 
beten (l^ob0« 

72. diOlat troo0t brenat u aan fiet 
toate geloobe in ben l^« d^ee^t ? 

fiDat d^ob be dOiaber ben !^. 
d^ee^t mp ffe0c|)on&lien fieeft, ten 
efnbe l^p gebuecfff bp mp 0oube 
0pn, enbe bertroo^ten inht bro^ 
effen(00e, betoelbfte (n mpn lierre 
&pne ffaben u(t0tort, al0 bcebe, 
ni0te enbe Uefbe (Eiob0, baar uft 
ik ber0ekert toorbe, bat (6ob be 
QIaber mp Uef fieeft, enbe l)et 
eeutofge leben mp ffe0c|)on&lien 
beeft om &pn0 geueCben &oon0 
%tfSa Cl)r(0ti todle. 

i^aar 



71. Moeda ta Spirt to Santo tum- 
malattal't torroa tsjes ? 

Icho paaunis torroa bo'o ma- 
chote a macha o ta Christus, so-o 
choa tataap o babisse, tno barrasan 
ja torro tnnai chachalt o kakossi ; 
kasach-£ pauchar i torroa tsjes o 
airaba tattuppau mario, alia maibas 
o bao a cho torro niaukat o tataap 
o babisse, so-o tsimichier o morich 
o ta Jesus Christus, torroa micho 
ma-achachimit, innai-numm'icho 
pab*i torroa tsjes, alia torro paga 
gagil sisjiem o Deos. 



72. Numm'ija tummalattala joa 
tsjes autat o gagil inni ta Spirito 
Santo? 

Alia Deos o tamau pinass6s6 
ina ta Spirito Santo, alia papira 
tallochon ina, so-o tummalattal'inni 
zichil, tamasea summa-od o choa 
asoso i na-a tsies, maibas o iborra, 
^rra, so-o aukat o Deos, innai- 
numma kamachaggi ja ina, alia 
Deos o tamau maukat o ina, so-o 
pinassosono morich o ma-^chonsar 
ina, inau choa aukattan a sjiem ta 
Jesus Christus. 

A- 



71. Thus the Holy Ghost comforts our hearts? 

He appropriates unto us the sufferings and death of Christ, in order that we may escape, 
and be exempted from the punishment of sin ; thereupon He breathes into our hearts good 
will and thoughts, so that we, as new creatures, may take delight in the works of righteous- 
ness, and imitate the life of our Lord Jesus Christ ; thereby testifying unto our spirits that 
we truly are children of God. 
73. What consolation does true faith in the Holy Ghost afford you ? 

That God, the Father, has given me the Holy Ghost, so that He may constantly abide 
with me and comfort me in affliction ; that He sheds abroad in my heart His gifts, such as 
peace, rest, and the love of God ; from which I may be assured that God the Father loves 
me, and that He has granted me eternal life, for the sake of His beloved Son Jesus Christ. 




6a 



Christian 



i^aar fiet ffeloof in (Eoti bolfft 
fiet geloofie ban (Eioti0 bol&* 
73- wft (Eiob eeit eiffen bolfi op 
lie0er aarben f 

74. &pn alle men^cljeit Ijet eigen 
en beminbe bolb (Eiob0 ? 

iReen: (Eiob bectife^t een 
efffcn bol& tn bemfnbe Mnberen 
uit alU g:e0laffttn bet aatbe. 

75. flfllfe 0pn bit ? 

iaile toare ffeloobfge 0pn 
tifnberen (Bob0. 

76. QjQlat f0 bat te fStsstn: ik 
ffeloobe een bergaberinffe ban 
een Cl^n'^ten rein ofte \tti\\s 
bolb, bfe ban oub0 getoee^t 10, 
nil f0, en 0reeb0 blpben 0al ? 

SDat (0 te 0effg;en, ib ben ber^ 
0etiert uit fiet 0eg;ffen ban (Eiob0 
tooorb, en geloobe met mpn ge^ 
moeb, bat (Eob be llaber een uit- 
berboren fieiliff bolk fieeft, ttoelb 
ban ttn beginne tot t^tn einbe 
be0e0 toerrelb0 bp een bergabert, 
en fferoepen toorb boor l)et tooorb 
(Eiob0 uit alle ffe0lacljten ber 
aarbe tot fiet eeutoiffe ljemel0clje 
leben, om met (Eob bereenifft te 
toorben in 0pnen &oone 3|e0u 
C|)ri0to tot een liffljaam, t0amen 
berbnocfit0^nbe inben toaren ge^ 
loobe* 77- <E^ 



A-i-jor a autat tnni ta Deos 
ummior o autat o chono Deos. 

73. Ja ta Deos paga maunis a cho 
de ta mint ? 

Paga. 

74. Ja tapos o babosa paga maunis, 
so-o aulcattan a chono Deos ? 

Maini : ta Deos piri o maunis 
a cho so-o aukattan a sisjiem innai 
tapos o tupponodon de ta. 

75. Tomm'ija decho ? 

Tapos o gagil ma-autat a cho 
paga sisjiem o Deos. 

76. Numma micho a patitte : na-a 
pittau o aigarrorro-no cho Christan 
o ma-achimit, o ai pinaga ani aicho, 
paga pia, so-o kapapoetautachsar ? 

Michosar a patitte, kamachaggi 
ja ina innai al'o ranied o Deos, so-o 
pittau'o na-a tsjes, alia Deos o 
tamau paga adokken a chono ma- 
achimit, o ai ipaigarrorro innai 
aisas'ate sisi o mini tapos ai, so-o 
aloddan o ranied o Deos innai 
tapos o tupponodon de ta pana 
morich o ma-achonsar i boesum, 
ino aarpanni i ta Deos inni choa 
sjiem ta Jesus Christus pana natta- 
sar achieb, barroon o rorr6 inni 
autat o gagil. 

77- > 



Hcnnngthen spoken on faith in God^ we have now to consider the faith of God* s people, 

73. Has God a peculiar people here on earth ? 
Yes, He has. 

74. Are all men the peculiar and beloved people of God ? 

No ; God chooses a peculiar people and beloved children from all the generations of the 
earth. 

75. Who are they ? 

All true believers are children of God. 

76. What does this signifv — I believe in the community of a pure and holy Christian people, 
which has been from of old, now is, and always shall remain. 

It signifies — The testimony of God's Word assures me — and I believe this with all my 
heart— -that God the Father has a peculiar and holy people who, from the beginning to the 
final end of this world, are gatherea together ; that they are called by the Word of God from 




Instruction 



63 



77- <Cn bergaat or bergaUerfnge 
Her ffelootifffen nfet op hmv aar« 
Hen? 

i^een: fittvbtn anUere, an-^ 
Here toorDen toeUer toegetioefft 
d^oo De 9}aDer tierft(e0t na pet 
toelgeballen &pne0 tofllen^* m 
&oone (Eio&0 bergabect Uoor He 
bracfit &pn0 tooor&0, tier^oent^ 
berlo0t en betoaan De uftbertoo^ 
rene« fiat0e lUet en bergaan. 9De 
% (Dee0t (l^oD0 tooont in fiace 
.0ielen, om gebuecig hv liaar te 
blpben, berlfclit Ijaac ber^tanb, 
blaa0t l)aar (emel^clie gebacjiten 
in, bermeerbert l^aar iiznnl0fit 
tnt^t geloobe aan (Eiob, bat fiet 
n(et uitgeblu0t en toerbe, refnfgt 
Ug^aam z\\\it 0iele, mht maakt 
liaar bequaam om met d^ob bee- 
eenfgt te toecben« SDe gant^clje 
becgaberfnge aller geloobfgen (0 
al0 een Ifgbaam, ttoelb 0amen 
geboegt toorb uft bele leben. 
fber bp0onbec geloobfge (0 al0 
een Kb ban bit Ugliaam* 9De 
&oone (Eiob0 i0 l)et toare liooft, 
b(e liet Ifg^aam enbe alle be leben 
lebenbfg maabt. (Bob be (Uabec 
(0 be fonbateur be0 \){il0ez0iti0^ 
tnr^t noemt be geloobfge 0pne 
kfnberen* SDe 1^. (Btm regeert 
liet iu(0 (E!ob0 boor&pne ticaclit. 

iaibu0 



77, Ja aigarrorrono ma-autat a 
cho alii moribal de ta mini ? 

Maini : kamach'ija roman, 
chippan ja roman Deos o tamau 
ummadok kamaibas o aukat o 
cho'airab. Ta sjiem o Deos pai- 
garrorro inni barr'o choa ranied, 
lummaslas, parras, so-o maladik o 
adokken a cho, depa moribal. Ta 
Auchar o Deos o ma-achimit sum- 
mos*i choa tsjes, alia tallochon o 
par'i decho, p^rar'o choa saan, 
pauchar i tsjes o tattupp*o boesum, 
pauab o aba so-o autat inni ta 
Deos, depa otuppen, pachimit o 
bog a tsjes, so-o paatsikap i decho, 
ino aarpanni i ta Deos. Aigar- 
rorro ma-arummono tapos o ma- 
autat a cho paga maibas o nattasar 
achieb, o ai rorro-no aarpanni innai 
mapan a raag. Atatta ma-aunionis 
o ma-autat a cho paga maibas o 
raag o achieb o mini. Ta sjiem o 
Deos paga oeno o gagil, o ai pau- 
rich o achieb, so-o tapos o choa 
raag. Deos o tamau pauchodon a 
arie-eddan, so-o pattonan o ma- 
autat acho choa sisjiem. Ta 
Auchar o ma-achimit o choa barra 
chummimit o don o Deos. Ma- 
sinisar natorroa-da boa, Deos o 
tamau, ta sjiem, so-o Auchar o 

ma- 



all the generations of the world unto an eternal and heavenly life, to be united with God in 
His Son Jesus Christ in one body, they being joined together in true faith. 
77. Does not the gathering together of the believers cease in this world ? 

No ; when some die, others are added : God the Father chooses them according to His 
good pleasure. The Son of God gathers them by the power of His Word ; reconciles, redeems, 
and guards over the elect, so that they may not perish. The Holy Ghost dwells in their 
souls, and continually abides with them, enlightens their minds, inspires them with heavenly 
thoughts, increases their knowledge of and faith in God, so that it may not be extinguished ; 
purifies body and soul, and renders them fit to be united with God. The entire gathering of 
all believers is like unto one body, which is composed of many members : each individiial 
believer is, as it were, a member of this body. 




64 



Christian 



SHHixfi bolmaken ffe^amentUb He 
tirfe pet0oon£it (Eoti tie Planer, 
He &oone, enDe oe 1^. (Bee0t liet 
Ugfiaam Uec bergaUennffe Her 
gelootifgen, oat'et bermeerDere, 
enne fftoot toa00e fit &enni00e 
enUe toaren ffeloobe^ ba0t aait een 

frebonDen 0pnOe boor onberUnffe 
leCbe. 3|nb£ bergaberfnge ber 
geloobfgeit toorb (Eob toaarUb 
be&ent tn aangeroepen, enbe 
tooonb int mibbeit ban fiaar, 
toaarom h'Htlbt genaamt toorb 
^n l)u(0 (Eiob0, be bergaberinge 
(Eiob0, 0pne &fnberen enbe fiui^^ 

frenoten, eeit uftberfcorea ge0- 
acfite, ttn fiefUg boU, ttn brp 
gefcocgt ofte bec&regen bolfc^ 
SDaareittegen bfe (Eob nfet en 
&ennen 0pn buembelingen, en 
al0 0onber (Eob^ 

78. (EielooCt gp maar 000 0lecbt 
een bergaberinge ber ^tilU 
gen? 

i^een: (fc geloobe mebe bat ik 
fiet lig^aam be0er bergaberinge 
fngelpCt 0p boor ben toaren ge^ 
Ioobe« al0 een lebenbig lib, ttoelb 
fb ooR bipben 0aU 

79. IMat 0cientit (Eob be ge* 
loobige ? 

&pne 



ma-achimtt rorrono ummoob o 
achieb o aigarrorrono ma-autat a 
cho, alia moab so-o summoos o 
mato tnni aba so-o autat o gagil, 
barroon o didden o karri-aukat. 
Inni aigarrorrono ma-autat a cho 
darrammen o gagil so-o eachannt ta 
Deos, so-o summos'o inni babat o 
decho; inau decho attonannansar 
don o Deos, aigarrorrono chono 
Deos, choa sisjiem so-o ari-eddan, 
adokken a tupponodon, chono ma- 
achimit, laslas-en a cho. Kasja- 
baan chono mautsiri i ta Deos, 
paga azjies so-o maibas o marotul 
i ta Deos. 






78. Ja pittau o baak ijonoe o 
aigarrorrono chono ma-achtmit ? 

Maini : na-a channumma pittau 
all'inaarpan ja in'o achieb o aigar- 
rorrono innai autat o gagil, maibas 
o raag o morich, o ai na-a mamach- 
onsar channumma. 

79. Numm'ija ta Deos passosono 
ma-autat a cho ? 

Mapan 



The Son of God is the true Head who quickens the body and all its members. God the 
Father is the Founder of the family, and calls the believers Ilis children. The Holy Ghost, 
through medium of Hb power, reigns over the house. In this way, the three Persons, God 
the Father, the Son, and the Holy Ghost, render the body of the believers gathered together 
perfect, in order that it should increase and grow in knowledge and true faith, closely united 
to one another by mutual love. In the meetings of the believers God is really acknowledged 
and called upon ; He dwells in the midst of them, therefore thev are called the house of God, 
the meeting of God, His children, and members of the family, a chosen race, a holy and 
ransomed people, whereas they who do not know God are strangers, and, as it were, without 
God. 

78. Do you only believe in the community of the holy ? 

No ; I also believe that I am incorporated into the bodv of these meeting ; that is, 
throu^ faith, I have become a living member thereof, in which I shall also remam. 

79. What does God grant the believers ? 




Instruction 



65 



&pne gaben ttibt toelUaDeit 
\>tUy enUe Drfe toel He boor- 
naam0te, Ufe filer toorfien op- 
gerekent« al0 He tiergetifnge Dec 
otiertrelimgen, He op^tanofnge 
tie0 bUe0cie0, enDe l)et eeutoige 
leben. 

80. fl)ntfangea alle geloobfge 
lie0e ffaben ? 

3|a: alle toare geloobfge ^eb^ 
ben gemein0cl)ap aait be toeU 
baben enbe gaben (Efob0. 

81. (Belooft gp be mebebeel, bat 
(0 gemefn0cfiap bet fieiUgen ? 

la: fb. 

82. &eg aan, toat (0 be mebebeel 
ber befUgen ? 

m mebebeel bet fieflfgen bat 
(0 te 0eggen, bat alle geloobfge, 
bfe met (Bob in &pneti &oone 
3|e0u Cl)tf0to beteenfgt blpben, 
ge^amentUft beel ontfangeit (nbe 
bolboeiidige enbe getecfitlgfiefb 
C|)tf0t(, enbe anbete gaben 
(Efob0. 

83. J0fitt 00k een onbetHnge 
gemefndcbap bet liefUgen ? 

3|aa't: toant alle geloobfge 
moeten toebet0pt0 htn naa^ten 
met bare gaben (elpen, en ten 
iemeuoaatt leiben« 

84. mit 



Mapan choa asoso a tataap o 
rio, so-o niaso matassc natorroa, o 
ai toch-en insini, maibas o ibono 
tataap o kakossi, aseas o boa, so-o 
morich o ma-achonsar. 



80. Ja tapos o ma-autat a cho 
marach o asosono mini ? 

Hena : tapos o gasil ma-autat 
a cho paga rorr6no ad'inni tataap 
o rio so-o asosono Deos. 

81. Ja pittau ijonoe o rorr6no ad'o 
chono ma-achimit ? 

Hena. 

82. Ipab^ numm'ija rorr6no ad'o 
chono ma-achimit r 

Rorro-no ad'o chono ma-achi- 
mit michosar a pattite, alia tapos 
o ma-autat a cho, o ai machonsar 
aarpanni i ta Deos inni choa sjiem 
ta Jesus Christus rorro-no marach 
o ad'inni lalaslas a babisse o ta 
Christus, so-o roma-roman aso- 
sono Deos. 

83. Ja paga karri-ad'o chono ma- 
achimit channumma ? 

Hena : inau tapos o ma-autat 
a cho maspot a karri-a-olli-eul o 
choa asosono ma-achaddik o cho, 
so-o karri-a-i-jor pana boesum ai. 

84. Tomm'ija 



His gifts and manifold blessings, of which three of the most important may be thus 
enumerated : — the forgiveness of trespasses, the resurrection of the body, and life eTer- 
lasting. 

80. Do all believers receive these gifts ? 

Yes ; all true believers participate in the benefits and gifts of God. 

81. Do you believe in the communion of saints ? 
Yes ; I do. 

82. Explain this : What is the communion of saints ? 

The communion of saints means, that all believers, who remain united with God in His 
Son Jesus Christ, jointly participate in the redemption and righteousness of Christ, and in 
the other gifts of God. 

83. Is there also a mutual communion of saints ? 

Yes, there is ; for all believers should mutually assist their neighbours with their gifts, 
and lead each other heavenwards, 

I 




66 



Christian 



84. miz 0pa W fiefUgen ? 

SDe bare geloobige toortien 
fiedfffeit genaamt, om Uat^e ge- 
toa00c|)eit toeuDeit in fiet bloeD 
C|)ri0ti ban l)are onfieuclit enfie 
obectcelifnffen, enUe een nieu 
leben aanbangen in alle gecec)'- 
tigfiefli (Efoli0* 

85. d^elooft g:p be betgebinffc 
bet 0onben ? 

3|a: ib ffdoobe 0etierUti bat 
(E!ob be 92aber om bebolboenfnge 
&pn0 &oon0 3|e0u Cirf0t( gant^ 
0cgeUti alle mpne obertuebfnffen 
beuffeeft, tnbe be boo0tieib be0 
berten, ban be toelkke tk toaarlik 
berouto b^bbe, enbe mp baaren^ 
tefffn 0cbenkt be fferec^tiffb^iti 
txi\\z liefKffiefb Cbcfdtf, op bat 
(& ban be 0traffen bee 0onbe bet^ 
Io0t toerbe« 

86. diiuat gelooft gp ban be op- 
0tanbfnge be0 blee^c^e^ ? 

3|ti geloobe bat mpn Ifg^aam, 
0c^oon battet in ben gcabe berrot 
f0, ten efnbe be^er toeruelb ban 
ben booben opgetoe&t, enbe met 
mpne 0fele toeber bereenfgt 0al 
toerben, om ten b^niel opgeno^ 
xatxi^ enbe Cfirf0to gelpfcformici 
gemaafct te toecben. 

87. &al 



84. Tomm'ija chono ma-achimit o 
micho ? 

Gagil o ma-autat a cho atto- 
nannansar chono ma-achimit, inau 
orichen ja decho inni tagg'o ta 
Christus tnnai choa arapies a ka- 
Icossi, so-o tummalpon o bao a 
mortch inni tapos o babisse o Decs. 

85. Ja pittau ijonoe o ^bono tataap 
o kakossi ? 

Hena : na-a pittau o gagil alia 
Deos o tamau inau lalaslas o choa 
sjiem ta Christus mabono auchos 
tapos na-a kakossi, so-o arapies o 
tsjes, o ai machi'o gagil ina, so-o 
passoso ina kasjabaan o babisse a 
chimit o ta Christus, ino barrasan 
innai chachalt o kakossi ina-e. 



86. Pittau onumm'ijonoe innai 
aseas o bo*ai ? 

Na-a pittau alia na-a micho 
bog, pagatomma mabocho i ro- 
baan, ka sisi o mini tapos ai allecho 
ipaseas a mach^, so-o aarpanni o 
tattaul'o na-a tsies, ino alappan i 
boesum, so-o ipaibas i ta Christus. 



87. Ja 



84. Who are those saints? 

True believers are called saints, because the blood of Christ has cleansed them from their 
Iniquity and trespasses, and because they commence a new life in all the righteousness of 
God? 

85. Do you also believe in the forgiveness of sins ? 

Yes ; I surely do believe that God the Father, for the sake of His Son Jesus Christ, 
forgives all mv transgressions and the wickedness of my heart, whereof I sincerely repent ; 
and, on the other hand, erants me the righteousness and holiness of Christ, so that I may be 
delivered from the punishment of sin. 

86. What do you believe as regards the resurrection of the body ? 

I believe that my body, though lying in corruption in the grave, will at the end of the 
world be raised from the dead, and win be again united with my soul, so that it may be 
taken up into heaven, and be made conformable to Christ. 




Instruction 



67 



87. &al fiet tistn Ug^aam opge^ 
toefct toeclitn, Hat szfitotbtn toa0 ? 

88. mtl maar, 0^11 filee^c^ (0 
fietrot enDe bergaan, ban toaar 
0al fiet Uffliaam te booc^cfi^n 
liomen ? 

(EoD, Dfe ^n ligfiaam uft Hen 
0tof ffemaa&t ^eeft^ 0al fiet UooUe 
Ugfiaam toeDer letienUfff maken 
uft Hen 0tof Hoor 0pne (EoHHe'* 
UMiZ kracbt. 

89. &al 9et Ifg^aam becffank-^ 
lieUk opgetoe&t toeu&en ? 

i^een: fk geloobe een eeutofg 
lebtn. na Hit leben. 

90. mat la fiet eeutofge leben ? 

I^et eeutofge leben (0 een 
onbergankkelik leben in ben fie^ 
mel, in fiet toelkke plaat0e fieb^ 
ben 0al b*aan0c^outofnge (Eiob0, 
brebe, ru0te, enbe blpb0c|)ap be0 
(Eee0te0, 0onbei: einbe, bU be 
ooge nfet en beeft ge0fen, be 
oore nfet en fieett ge^oort, enbe't 
bem en be gebac^ten noit en 
gebben begcepen ; Slmtn^ 

Kort 



87. Ja allecho tpiseas maunts a 
bog, o ai mtnacha ? 

Hena« 

88. Oedan, kamabocho choa boa, 
innainumma tatummoach o bog- 
sar ? 

Ta Deos o ai mtnerien o bog 
tnnat borrabor, allecho paurich o 
tattaul'o bog o machad'tnnai bor- 
rabor o choa barr'o Deos-^r. 

89. Ta allecho tpaseas ma-aurtbal a 
bog? 

Main! : na-a pittau o morich o 
nia-^chonsar,a-i-jora morich o mini. 

90. Numm'ija morich o ma-4ch- 
onsar? 

Morich o ma-dchon^ paga 
morich i boesum o ai alii moribal, 
inninumma pagaga ai-all'o ta Deos, 
^borra, arra, so-o aukat o tsjes, 
pasisi-ech, o ai macha atli minita, 
charrina alii minasini, so-o alii 
tsinummaap tsjes a tattuppa; 
Amen. 



Ma- 



Sy, Will the self-same body that has been dead be raised again ? 
Yes. 

88. Well now, with its flesh decayed and corrupted, how can the body again come forth ? 
God, who has made the body of the dust, shall make the dead body again aliTe oat of 

the dust, by His divine power. 

89. Will the body be raised to perish ac;ain ? 
No ; I believe in eternal life after this life. 

90. What is life eternal ? 

Eternal life is an imperishable life in heaven, where we shall behold God face to face ; 
where we shall have peace, rest, and rejoicing of the heart, without end ; which the eye 
hath not seen, neither ear heard, nor the heart and thought have ever conceived. Amen. 




68 



Christian 



XIV. 

Kort Onderwys om den 
Christelikken Doop te Ont- 

fangen. 

1. aaiat in tie Cl)tf0teIftitie 
Ittvt ? 

SDe C^ti0teliktie Iznt ifi ttn 
Itzvt lie0 tooorti0 (EioDiS bait &pn 
tistti \x>tfitn tntz toerftben^ 

2. Hiot beel d^oUeit 0pnlier ? 
2>aai: la een toare (EioD. 

3- Wlit in Hie to are (EoU ? 

SDe toare (Boo la Hefioba, 
&c|)eppet ban kernel, aarbe ett 
0ee. 

4- 9iZUat betuffft fiet be^cljceben 
toootb (Eiob0 baa (et toe^en 
(E!ob0 ? 

SDat &pn toe^en 0p bp0onbeu, 
nizt ffelpliRertop0 be Itcfiamen. 

5- ^eeft (Eiob ffeen licfiaam of 
Ucfiamelilike gebaante ? 

i^een: %p (0 gefieel een 
(Bzt0ty 0onbei* Iifffiaam enbe 
blee0cfi, en &pn toe^en of per< 
0oon en toorb niet s^^izn. 
6. l^oe beel per^oonen 0pnber 
f n liet toe0en (E>ob0 ? SDaar 



XIV. 



Ma-apapp^a Attlino Ardcho 
Christ an a Sasikhr i to. 



1. Numm'ija atil o Christan ? 

Atil o Christan paga atil o 
ranied o Deos innai choa micho ga 
so-o choa tataap. 

2. Naida Deos paga ja ? 
Paga nattasar gagil o Deos. 

3. TommMja Deos o gagil o 
micho ? 

Deos o gagil paga ta Jehova, 
Airien o boesum, o ta, a abas. 

4. Pab'ija onumma kabidoan 
ranied o Deos innai ga o Deos-sar ? 

Alia maunionis choa ga, alii 
maibas o bogsar. 

5. Ja alli paga bog, ja isas o bog- 
sar ta Deos ? 

Maini : paga tsjes o auchos 
icho, niarotul o bog a boa, so-o pa 
itan choa ga ja boa. 

6. Naida boa paga ini ga o Deos-' 
sar. Kamaunionis 



XIV. A SHORT CATECHISM BBFORB RECEIVING CHRISTIAN BAPTISM. 

I. What is the Christian doctrine ? 

The Christian doctrine b a doctrine found in the Word of God, of His being and works. 
a. How many Gods are there? 

There b but one true God. 

3. Who is the true God ? 

The true God is Jehovah, Creator of heaven, the earth, and the sea. 

4. What does the written Word of God declare concerning God*s being ? 
That His being is peculiar, not like unto our body. 

5. Has God no body, or bodily form ? 

No ; He is essentially a spirit, without body or flesh, and His being or person is not 
visible. 

6. How many persons do there exist in God s being ? 




Instruction 



69 



SDaar 0^n tiufe bp^onUeue 
pet0oonen, tie WLahtt, He &oone, 
en&e Dm refneti iaDem, Hen !^. 
(I^ee0t« 

7. &Hn0e ffeen DcU bp0onDere 

i^een: om tiat^e te 0amen 
een toe^en (Eio&tf ^ebben. 

8. (EielooCt ffp in d^ofi ? 

|a: (ft geloobetoaacUb batter 
een (rob 0p in brie pec0oonen. 

9* ^at ffetuffft (Eiob0 tooorb 
ban &pne toechhen ? 

9Dat (Bob (n ben beginne 
gemaaftt Ijeeft Ijemel enbe aarbe, 
twtit alle be0e bfngen. 

10. i3)nbec0tcuiu, en beljotib, en 
cegeert ^v ooh alle bingen ? 

3|a: l^p onber0teunt allejj 
met &pne feracbt en regeect na 
&pnen toflle. 

11. I^eeft (Eiob 00k (nben begfnne 
gemaaftt ben nten^clje ? 

3a: J?p beeft er ttoee ge-- 
maaRt, man ti\\}t topf uft be 
toelkbe booctgetfproten 0pn alle 
ge0lacbten op Htw aarbbobem* 

12. I^oebeeft d^ob htix men0cbe 
gemaabt U\ ben begfnne ? 

(Eiob 



Kamaunionis natorroa-da boa^ 
o tamau, ta sjiem, so-o ta Auchar 
o ma-^chimit, ta Spirito Santo* 

7* Ja alii maunionis natorroa 
Deos dechonoe ? 

Matnt : inau dechoa rorrd paga 
nattada ga o Deos. 

8. Ja poetautat inni ta Deos 
ijonoc ? 

Hcna : na-a pittau o gagil alia 
paga nattasar a Deos inni natorroa- 
da boa. 

9. Pab'ija onumma ranied o Deos 
innai choa tataap ? 

Alia ta Deos inni aisasa mine- 
rien o boesum a ta, so-o mini 
tapos ai. 

10. Ja icho tumica, maladik, so-o 
chunimimit channumm'o tapos ai ? 

Hena : icho tumk'o tapos ai o 
choa barra, so-o chummimit, kam- 
aibas o choa airab. 

11. Ja ta Deos inni aisasa mine- 
rien o babosa channumma ? 

Hcna : mincriensar o narroa 
cho, sjam a sini, innai tamasea 
tsinummoach tapos o tupponodon 
de ta. 

12. Mocda ta Deos minerien o 
babos'ani pesasa ? 

Ta 



There arc three separate persons : the Father, the Son, and the pure breath, the Holy 
Ghost. 

7. Are they not three separate Gods ? 

No ; because they form together one being of God. 

8. Do you believe in God ? 

Yes ; I truly believe that there is one God in three persons. 

9. What does the Word of Gotl declare concerning Ilis works? 

That in the beginning God made heaven and earth, and all these things. 

10. Does He sustain, keep, and reign over all things ? 

Yes ; He sustains them b^ His power, and He governs according to His pleasure (will). 

11. Did God make man also m the beginning? 

Yes ; He made two, man and woman, from whom have sprung all the generations of the 
earth. 
13. In what way did God make man in the beginning ? 




70 



Christian 



(Boh lieeft hm mtnat^t ge-- 
maabt tot &pit beelD, tot ten 
beein (Eioti02 fiat (0 te 0eggen, 
ffant0 en gegeel recbtbeecfiig. 
13. (UUel, 0pn ban alle men^cben 

recbtbeeufiie: ? 

(E!een0fn0, 0p fiebben alle 

oberptcefien, enfie toorfitn ge^ 

teelt in boo0^eifi oCte betfierffe- 

nffitfite 

14- 32Uat (0 fie boo0beffi fie0 fiec^ 
ten (nfien men^cbe ? 

(Eiofie \Defier0panniff te 0pn, 
enfie &pn ffebofi te obeitcefien* 

15- 92an toaac compt fie^e booc(- 
beifi fie0 ^tvtzn in fien men^cbe 
boort ? 

illit fie obectcefiinge on0er 
eeu0tec boououfieren iaifiam enfie 
(Cba in bet pacafip0. 
16. doiat i0 fie 0ti*afFe fier boo^- 
iieffi enfie obertcefiinge ? 

iaifierlei ftcankbefien, 0c^rik, 
breeze, enfie ficoeffeni00e fie0 ge- 
ntoefi0, fie fioofi, enfie na fie fioofi 
Ijet bel^cbe bier. 

17- 3|00er geen bolfioeninge boor 
fie obenrefiinge, op fiat fie 
tnen0cbe fie^e 0tcaffe ontga ? 

laa't. 
18. mit ^ztft boor fie obertrefi- 
inge fier men^c^en geboet ? 

1e0u0 



Ta Deos minerten o babosa 
pana choa isas, pan'isas o Deos, 
michosar a pattite, o auchos ma- 
abissc-bisse tsjcs. 

13. Oedan, ja mabisse tsjes tapos o 
babosa? 

Pagaga chaddat : ktnummossi 
ja patapos so-o ausjimen inni 
arapies. 

14. Numm'ija arapies o tsjes inni 
babosa? 

Kummosst i ta Deos, so-o 
chumpir o choa atillo. 

15. Innainumma tummoach o 
arapies o tsjes o mini inni ba- 
bosa? 

Innai kakossi o ta Adam a 
Eva torroa boeboeno pesasa lallum 
paradiso. 

16. Numm'ija chachalt o arapies a 
kakossi ? 

Mauromaroman a dig, aurtsi, 
ikkil, a zichil o tsjes, machi, so-o 
a-i-jor a macha chau o Gehenna. 

17. Ja alii paga lalaslas o kakossi, 
ino barrasan o babos'o chachalt o 
mini ? 

Paga. 

18. Tommada cho linummaslas o 
kakossi o babosa ? 

Ta 



God made man in His ima^c, to be an image of God, that is to say, altogether righteous. 

13. Well, then, are all men righteous? 

By no means ; they have all transgressed, and 1x:cn conceived in iniquity and corruption. 

14. In what does the iniquity of the human heart consist ? 

In rebellion against God, and transgressing against His commandments. 

1 5. Whence does this iniquity of the heart in man arise ? 

It originates in the transgression of our first forefathers, Adam and Eve in paradise. 

16. In what does the punishment of iniquity and transgression consist ? 

In all kinds of sicknesses, terror, fear, and affliction of the mind ; with death, and, after 
death, hell-fire. 

17. Is there no redemption for these transgressions, so that men may escape them ? 
Yes. 

18. Who has paid the penalty for the transgressions of man? 




Instruction 



71 



3t0n0 Cfir(0tu0 be &oone 
(Bot}tSy Hie toaracfitic^ (EoU enUe 
mendclie 10 fn een pec0oon. 
19- ^oe tieeft C^t:i0tu0 boor He 
otiettreDfnffe Der meu0cien ge^ 
boet? 

!^p fieeft boor on0 geleben, 
&pii bloeb bergoten, enbe (0 
getftorben cm on^er obectreb' 
fnge toflle. 

20. l^eeft Cirf0tu0 boor &pn 
I]?beu (Eiob met be meii0ctien 
ber^oent ? 

3|a: !^p (0 be 9^tbbelaau 
tnnfit^tn (DOb enbe be mem 
0t5en. 

21. QjQin (E!ob om be genoegboen^ 
fnge &pn0 &oon0 be men0c])en 
genabfg 0Pit ? 

3|a: C|)t:f0tu0 0preelit baar 
tu00c^en met &pn genoegboeib 
fnge op bat be men0cl)e berge^ 
bfnge bet 0onben berhcpgt 

22. iDntbangen alle men0cl)en 
bergebfnge ber 0onben ? 

(Efeen0fn0, alleen bfe berouto 
debben ban gate donben^ enbe 
0pn geboben acljtecbolgen. 

23. iUllocben be ongebooc^ame 
enbe ongeloobfge nfet bedo0t 
banbe 0trafFe bee 0onben ? 

i^een : ben tooen (Eiob0 blgft 
op l)aae« 

24. diQlat 



Ta Jesus Christus sjiem o 
Deos, o ai paga Deos o gagil so-o 
gagil o babos'inni nattada boa. 

19. Moeda ta Christus linummas- 
las o kakosst o babosa ? 

Minachote, sinummaod o tag- 
ga, $0-0 minachadau t torro, inau 
torroa kalcossi. 

20. Ja ta Christus o choa machote 
pinaborr'i ta Deos o babosa ? 

Hena : icho paga ma-^borra 
tuppach o Deos a babosa. 

21. Ja ta Deos merab o mabono 
babosa, inau lalaslas o choa sjiem ? 

Hena : ta Christus pazinaddno 
choa lalaslas, alia babosa marach o 
^bono kakossi. 

22. Ja ta|x>s o babosa marach o 
^bono kakossi ? 

Maini-ena ; ma-akammichi o 
ai machi'o kakossi poetautat inni 
ta Deos, so-o ummior o choa atillo. 

23. Ja alii barrasan o chachalt o 
kakossi chono ma-achachuppir, so-o 
marotul o autat inni ta Deos ? 

Main! : rais o ta Deos machon 
i babosar o decho. 

24. Maspot 



Jesus Christ, the Son of God, who is verily God and man in one person. 

19. In what way did Christ pay the penalty for the transgressions of man ? 

He suffered for us ; He shed His blood, and died on account of our transgressions. 

20. Has Christ reconciled, by His sufferinps, God to man? 
Yes ; He is the Mediator between God and man. 

21. Will God be merciful to man for the sake of the atonement of His Son ? 

Yes ; Christ by His atonement intercedes, so that man obtains the forgiveness of sin. 

22. Do all men receive the forgiveness of sin ? 

By no means ; only thev who repent of their sins, and follow after His commandments. 

23. Are the disobedient and the unbelieving not delivered from the punishment of sin ? 
No ; the wrath of God abides on them. 




7a 



Christian 



24« mat moet he men^cfie ge^ 

loofien ? 

Sl\ toattet be0cf|tebeit (0 in 
let tooocD (Efoti0, toaar ban &otte 
ioofti0tubben begcepen 0pn, in 

jet C|)n'0teUkfte geloobe. 

25. Hona ffp be articulen betf 
geloof0 ? 

3|a: (& geloobe in (Eiob ben 
dOiabet, etc. 

26. t^eeft (Eob fn &pn tooorb 
betufgt bat l?p be 0onben 0al 
bergeben ? 

3|a: en l^p 0telt be berge- 
binge ber 0onben ten toone in- 
ben Cbti^telibften SDoop enbe 
bet iabontmaal Cbti^ri. 

27. I^oe, bocb in\}z Cbridtelibbe 
ceremonie be0 2Doop0? 

Silfi l?p gebieb bet bolb te 
boopen op bat bare 0onben ber^ 
geben toorben. 

28. !^oe in ^n ^abontmaal ? 

Sllfi Ci)ri0tu0 0egt ban ben 
brinbbeber bat i0 mpn bloeb, 't 
toelfc bergoten toorb tot berge^ 
bing ber 0onben. 

29. HSlat toptft b^t toater aan 
intiz ceremonie be0 SDoop0 ? 

I?et toater, tboelb ge^prengt 

toorb. 



24. Maspot a poetautat onumm'ija 
babosa? 

Tapos o ai kabintdoan inni 
ranied o Deos, innainumma paga 
ma-apapp'a tuppo tnni autat o 
Christan. 

25. Ja mab'ijonoe o tuppono autat 
o Christan ? 

Hena : ka-na-a poetautat inni 
Deos o tamau, etc. 

26. Ja ta Deos inni choa ranied 
pinab'o pape'o abono kakossi ? 

Hena : so-o patorrod o ibona 
kakossi inni Christan a sasikir i to, 
so-o man o marpes'o ta Christus. 

27. Moedasar inni Christan a dog 
o sasikir i to ? 

§abanno pattillo sumkir i tono 
cho, ino aboan choa kakossi. 

28. Masanno ini dog o man o 
marpes^ ? 

§abanno maunis-o-ala ta Chris- 
tus innai ai-cham-an o, micho ja 
na-a tagg'o ai, sa-odden ino aboan 
kakossi. 

29. Pait'onumm'ija to inni dog o 
sasikir i to ? 

To, o ai ip^bichi, pait'o tagg^o 

ta 



24. What must man believe ? 

All that is written in the Word of God, the short heads of which are found in the 
Christian Belief. 

25. Do you know the Articles of Faith ? 
Yes : I believe in God, the Father, etc. 

26. Has God declared in His Word that He will forgive sin ? 

Yes ; and He shows us in Christian Baptism and in the Lord's Supper what the forgive- 
ness of sin is. 

27. How by the Christian ceremony of baptism ? 

When He commands to baptize the people, so that their sins may be forgiven. 

28. How by the Lord's Supper? 

When Christ says of the cup : That is Mv blood, shed for the remission of sin. 

29. What does the water at the ceremony of baptism signify ? 




Instruction 



enUe He Dedpceiifffnge Iie0toater0 
ti£ betfptenginffe &pn0 bloeD0. 

30. aierblaairt Ueit 0fn ban be^e 
ceremoitfe* 

(Eielpkliecto^0 fltt Ucbaam ge« 
tDa00en toorb met toarer, al0oo 
toorb 0fel enbe Ucfiaam ffetoa00en 
met l)et bloeb Cl)rf0ti ban be 
boo0|i^(b mht 0onbe. 

31. (Uttaar toorben top geleerb te 
bfbben om becgebince bee ^on-. 
ben? 

31 nt gebeb on0e0 l^eeuen 
3|e0u C^tijStf* 

32. Honb gp be toootben b£0e0 
gebeb0 ? 

3|a (&: S)n0t (Uabec bfe fnbe 
liemelen 0pb, etc^ 

33- SDe leece ban bergebfnge bet 
0onben geeft b(e t^tn men^cbe 
geen oor^abe om te 0onb(gen ? 

i^een : 0e port beel meec aan 
om te 0tcpben tegen be 0onbe, 
enbe goebe toerbhen te betracl)ten, 
op bat (Bob, enbe &pne genabe 
gepre0en toerbe. 

34- 9iZUat noemt sn goebe toetb^ 
(en? 

iSIUe toerbken bet getecfitfg' 
%tih enbe l)eflfcl)efb, bie (Eob in 
be t^fen geboben gebfeb. 

35. afllat 



Z3 

ta Christus, so-o abtchi o to pait'o 
abichi o choa tagga. 

30. Illaggana o lido o dog o mini. 

Maibas orichen o to a bo^, 
masini orichen o bog a tsjes o taggV) 
ta Christus tnnai arapies a kakossi. 



31. Dem'ija atillan ja namo me- 
ach'o ^bono kakossi ? 

Inni ai-ach'o ma-achachimit ja 
torro ta Jesus Christus. 

32. Ja mab'ijonoe o atite o ai-ach'o 
mini ? 

Hena: namoa tamau tamasea 
paga de boesum, etc. 

33. Ja atil o kbono kakossi alli 
p^kossi o babosa ? 

Main! : kamaso pizich o ma- 
piech o kakossi, so-o ummior o 
mario a tataap, ino adassen ta Deos, 
so-o choa bo. 

34. Pattonan onumm'ijonoe o 
mario a tataap ? 

Tapos o tataap o babiss6 achi- 
mit, o ai pattillo ta Deos inni 
tschiet o itillo. 

35. Numm*ija 



The water which is sprinkled signifies the blood of Christ, and the sprinkling of the 
water the sprinkling of His blood. 

30. Explain the signification of this ceremony. 

Even as the lx)dy is washed with water, in the same way the soul and body are washed 
with the blood of Christ from iniquity and sin. 

31. Where are we taught to pray for the remission of sin ? 
In the prayer of our Lord Jesus Christ. 

32. Do you know the words of this prayer ? 

Yes, I do : Our Father which art in heaven, etc. 

33. Does not the doctrine of the forgiveness of sin encourage nuoi to sin ? 

No ; it rather incites man to struggle against sin, and to strive after good works. 

34. What do you call good works ? / 

All the works of righteousness and holiness commanded by God in His ten commandments* 

K 




74 



Christian 



35. QiQIat ffebfeb (Eioti lnt>z t|)fen 
ffeboneix ? 

%\x>tz 0tukken: tie lieftie 
(EioD0, enUt tie liefbe De0 naa-* 

36. Bonn ffp He tijfen jje-. 
boUeit ? 

3|a: (E!oti 0ptafc ifi ben He 

l^eere Utoe (Boa, etc* 
7- QiQIocU (Bob ffept:e0en al0 
»pne bfnDeren nabomen &pne 

ffeboDen ? 

?a: al0 He breemDe aan- 
ben De recfitfieerlitce toecb'. 
ken ban (Eiob0 fcinberen, 0^ bee- 
toonberen baar, enbe prp0en 
(Bob enbe &pne tecbten* 
38. QjQlel boe f0t, toilt gi? fiet 
Ci)r(0telfkbe geloobe om$el0en, 
enbe ben ^. 9Doop ontfangen tot 
bergebfnge utoer 0onben ? 

3|a: mpn 0fele bor0tet na 
be0e genabe* 

J 9. ^el maar, ber^aakt gp ben 
aibo0 enbe 0pne leugenacljtige 
0uper0t(tfen ? 

la: mpn 0fele neemt ten 
af0cbeib ban |)aibo0, ban iaibam, 
enbe alle pbele 0uper0tftien. 
40. QjQliIt sn aaeggen tnt^z toeg- 
toerpen utoe oberttebfngen, zn^t 
boo0i)eib, al0 bronkien^cfiap) 
(oereufe, n^\\^ leugen, biebetie, 

enbe 



35. Numm'ija pattillo ta Deos inni 
tschiet o £tillo ? 

Narroa-da tuppo: aukat o 
Deos, so-o aukat o ma-achaddik o 
cho. 

36. Ja mab'o tschiet o atillo ijonoe ? 

Hena : ta Deos macho : ka- 
ina paga ta Jehova oa Deos-oe, etc. 

37. Ja adassen ta Deos, sabanno 
choa sisjiem ummior o choa atillo ? 

Hena : sabanno azjies miall'o 
tataap o babisse o sisjiem o Deos, 
makakki ja choa tsjes, so-o sum* 
moal i ta Deos a choa bisse-btsse. 

38. Mat numma, ja merab o um- 
mior ijonoe o autat o Christan, 
so-o marach o ma-4chimit a sasikir 

• 

i to, ino aboan oa kakossi ? 

Hena : taggogon ja na-a tsjcs o 
b6no mini. 

39. Oedan, ja lummido i ta haibos, 
so-o choa arien o ma-atattosik ? 

Hena : mori-edd'i ta haibos, i 
ta Adam na-a tsjes, so-o tapos o 
arien o baak. 

I 40. Ja merab o tummis oa kakossi 
a arapies, maibas o arab, chachod^ 
sannan, tattosik, achab, so-o mik- 
kap i ta Deos inni autat o ma- 

achimit. 



35. What does God command in His ten commandments ? 
Two things : to love God and to love our neighbour. 

36. Do you know the ten commandments ? 

Yes ; God spake, I am the Lord thy God, etc. 

37. Is God praised when His children follow His commandments? 

Yes ; when the strangers see the righteous works of God's children, they admire them, and 
praise the Lord and His statutes. 

38. Well now, will you embrace the Christian faith unto the forgiveness of your sins ? 
Yes ; my soul pants after this mercy. 

39. But do you then forsake haibos and his lying superstitions ? 
Yes ; my soul forsakes haibos, Adam, and all vain superstitions. 

.40. Will you put away and cast from you your transgressions and iniquity, as drunkenness, 




Instruction 



75 



enUt (Eob aanblebeti in reinen 
ffeloobe enUe ten nieu lefien, bat 
(0 te 0egffen fn toare ffeuecQtfff'- 

3|a: fhtfal (BoD0 fiulpe enUe 
ffenaoe begeren, op bar fb be-, 
quaam 0p fiat te bolbreng;en. 



achimit, a bao a morich, michosar 
a pattite, tnni gagil o babisse a 
chimit ? 

Hcna : mameach'o a-olli-eul o 
Deos so-o choa bo, alia na-a matsi- 
kap o ummoob o micho. 



whoredom, envy, theft, lies ; and cleave unto God in pure faith and in a new life — that is to 
saj, in true righteousness and holiness ? 

Yes ; I will seek God's assistance and mercy, in order that I may be rendere<^fit to do 
so. 



FIRST SERMON. Isaiah Ivi. 7. 



A Ukattan a ma-akakriel. 
-^^ Don o ai-acha allecho at- 
tonannan na-a micho don, macho 
ta Deos inni ma-ai-aab Esaias. 
Narroa-da tuppo pab'ija namoatitc 
o minisar : kapesasa, ta Deos pat- 
tonan o arorroai-an don o ai-acha, 
inau merab alia pedarra tapos sja- 
sjam, sini-sini a sisjiem ka mitoa 
zijsja, alia sai tumbocl o choa don, 
tump'o choa naan, rorro-no masini 
o choa ranied, so-o me-ach'icho 
tapos o ai masabb'ija decho. Masini 
a don paga, indema mitarroach 
tapos ocho, barroon a rorro karri- 
aukat. Dem'ija eachanni o gagil 
naan o Deos, dem'ija ipaba choa 
airab, dem'ija akaukauan choa adis. 
Mai, don o arrorro-ai-an o mini 
paga channumma don o ai-acha, 
dem'ija atiilan imoa meach'i tamau 
de boesum, so-o maibas o sisjiem 
pattonan i ta Deos, namoa tamau 
tamasea paga de boesum. Dem'- 
imoa mai tumboel i ta Deos inni 
choa don, alia mamadarram icho 



rummi-es, so-o paga rorro-no 
ad'tnni choa b6-noe. Hai pesor o 
don o baak o mini, hai pesor o don 
o lalloog. Maini-ena. AUi mai- 
bas o roman don o mini. Lallum 
aicho-ies man, micham, summarra, 
macheauboen cho-na« Maunis a 
don o mini ^ don o Deos, don o 
atite, don o ai-acha, don o atil. 
Insini eachanni ta Deos, adassen ja 
naan o kummasjies a maro. Tama- 
sea mauranies, mais, ja manniki 
insini, mannach'i ta Deos, so-o 
tummallas ochoa asiel o atil o 
boesum ai. Mauchus o rumme o 
micho ta Deos; cho-no mini, 
macho, dummaat ina o choa ranied, 
so-o madas ina ochoa dorren« so-o 
maro ja choa tsjcs innai Ina-e. 
Inau decho alanni inni bido o 
Deos, e-illa-na oa asiel, sabanno 
mai dummoro i don o Deos, so-o 
aga-a a chaddik, all'oa masini. 
Maibas attitean, ja merab o moss'i 
don o arorroai-an, e-illa-na depa 
mauranies, ja me o atil o Deos, 




76 



Christian 



inau ta Deos miall'oa tsjes, kailau 
mate'ijo-noe. Miall'o tapos o cho 
innai boesum ta Deos, mab'o tat- 
tup'i tsjes, maibas o chau mansar 
o tapos o ma-arapies. Oedan, 
tamasea sai dummaat icho, so-o 
alii mikkil o choa rais o mato, 
gagil maraas a tsjes, so-o charri o 
zijsja tatummala, alia maraas o 
tummok o bato ja asiel. Mai, hai 
mannach'i ta Deos. Alii annachan 
o baak ja icho. Ja tummalpon o 
mosse dummoro i don o Deos? 
Abissassa tau-aab oa boa, o-oa, joa 
tsjes-oe katinnaam atil, itiss'o tat- 
tuppau rapies innai imo-noe. Don 
o mini don o atil, don o ai-acha ; 
hai tump'insini oa don, oa tatapan, 
ja bonna, ja tumkach, ja maribari- 
bat, ja micham. Hai para joa tsjes 
de don o atil ai-an tattuppa masini. 
Tattup-pau mini alii matsikap 
de don o mini. Paulapp'o tsjes, 
so-o kummatto innai ta Deos, 
innai boesum aicho-ies. Maso 
rapies channumma moa taulan 
tump'i ta haibos-ech. Alii par'i 
haibos ta Deos-oe. Kamazjies 
dechonoe. Sja machonsar o paan 
i haibos imo-noe, kamaibas oa dog, 
sabanno tummalpon o man, o 
micham, ja alii pattonan o baak 
o naan o Deos ? Ja alii mannach'o 
choa naan ? Alii tummosik oa 
tamau ja icho ? Oedan, ta Deos 
allipa ara. Allipa ja roman mai- 
bas icho. Makammichi-sar gagil 
o Deos, so-o kummasjies a maro, 
a mabarra, a mabada saan. Ma- 
kammichisar chummimit o tapos 
o ai de boesum, de ta. Masannan 
o baak o choa, chachimit ta haibos, 
o ai initis innai boesum inau a$ies o 
tsjes. Tsinummallas icho de rapo 



choa asiel ta Deos. Achoa mikkil 
so-o paan icho. Mauchus ma- 
karrichi ranied o Deos, inau poetat 
inni adam, inni haibos, so-o tump'o 
choa arien cho. Itiss'o raras a dog 
o micho. Tapos oai baak, so-o 
sasall'o haibos. Pinaulakies icho 
oa boeboe-no anibaas. Pazigal'i 
ta Deos, alia summall'o cho. ra- 
ikkil o cho, alia me-il so-o paan 
icho. Baak o ikkil o micho. 
Oedan, mikkil onumma? Mata- 
1am mamakabol icho? Pagatom- 
ma: maso mato, a mabarra ta 
Deos. AUi mabarr'ija icho parapies 
i namo, sja alii pauss'icho ta Deos. 
Maspot a poetautat inni ta Deos, 
inni choa ranied imoa, ino barrasan 
o ikkil o haibos. Maspot a mikkil 
i ta Deos ma-akammichi-sar, o 
ai mato o gagil, so-o mato choa 
barra. Maukat ja Deos, so-o mala- 
dik o tapos cho-no ai, kame-il icho. 
Ikkil o Deos mario. Merien o 
maba-da saan, pa-ikkil o tsjes, so-o 
micl o kakossi. Ikkil o haibos 
rapies, so-o paulakies o tsjes. Inau 
micho atillan ja namo, meach'i ta 
Deos : Barras i namo innai rapies 
ai. Maibas pala ja namo, Deos o 
tamau hai pauss'i haibos paulakie& 
so-o lummal'i namo, kailau kum- 
mossi oa atite torroa tsjes, so-o 
ummior o airab o haibos. Mau- 
kat o parapies icho, so-o pallidollido 
maibas o ibien, alia sumbach i namo. 
Inaudechoattonannan-sar inni bido 
o Deos raras a ibien, so-o tamau o 
tattosik. Inau sasalla matapo choa 
tsjes, maibas matapo tag bog o 
ibien. Mai, ja alii masum a salla- 
an imo-noe, hai masini icho. Obea 
innai ta haibos, maibas innai ibien 
o boesum. Ip^chappa, ipauach'o 




Instruction 



n 



choa naan. Tsinummalpono dum- 
maat i ta Deos o pia, tamasea mc- 
rab o paircibs imonoe o choa sisjiem 
badda ta Jesus Christus. Hai 
machonsar mikkap i haibos. Alii 
masum o ara ta Christus. Oa 
tsjes, oa bog, imo tapos maunis 
icho. Hai gummcroa oa tsjes, hai 

gi'o geroan ta haibos, geroan ta 
eos. Alii masum o geroan a 
tsjes icho. Merab o ma-arummo, 
merab o tapos ; tapos ja tsies, tapos 
ja tattuppa. Ka-ochal itis masini 
tattuppau rapies, maube-na, asinia 
o ranicd o Deos. Tsimis'o micho. 
Aladikka so-o tuppi micho, alia 
matapo joa tsjes tattupp'o boesum. 
Kamadabbi ja chaan o man, mich- 
am, alii tump'ija imoa tsjes. Alii 
tump'o inochan o tsjes, maibas 
tump*o inochan o chaan. Masabb'o 
inochan oa tsjes-oe, marotul o saan, 
baak-sar, maibas o binnan o bonna. 
Mautsiri i ta Deos, mautsiri o choa 
atillo, choa airab, choa bo, a tataap 
o ri6. Mautsiri ja innai boesum, 
so-o morich i boesum ai. Atite o 
Deos paga inochan o tsjes. Atite 
o Deos merien o cho maba-da saan. 
Tumka so-o tummalattal'o ma- 
azichil a tsjes. Mai, tapos o ai 
chipassanan, so-o mach^-da tsjes, 
ja merab o madabbi ? $add'o ino- 
chan o ma-^chonsar ai, tsimis^, 
masanno machdo atite o Deos. 
Aukat o tsjes ja micho. At- 
atta, aunis-o-aracha o atite o 
Deos, so-o mamorich oa tsjes 
aicho-ech. 

Masini mach6 ta Christus sjiem 
badd'o Deos; alii mamorich uppo 
ma-akammichisar cho, tapos o atite 
channumma ka- soss'innai ranied 
o Deos. Illaggen o pia tuppo-no 



pesasa, so-o ipaba, pattonan on- 
umm*o don o ai-acha ta Deos. 
Ummior o narroa-da tuppo, an- 
numma pattonan o don o ai-acha 
choa micho don : don o ai-acha 
allecho attonannan na-a micho don, 
mach6. 

Hai pesor all'attonannansar in- 
sini don o Deos, inau maunis icho 
pattodon maibsus o cho. Maini- 
ena. Paga tsjes o auchosta Deos, 
marotul o b^. AUi ma^bb'o 
don ja icho maioas o babosa. AUi 
man, micham, summarra, mero-os, 
moas, mababat. Paga kummasjies 
a mato. Pariaut o boesum a ta« 
AUi tapen charri o ta. Oedan, 
don onumma mamatsikap icho. 
AUi summos'i don inerien o rim'o 
cho ta Deos, tamasea minerien o 
boesum a ta. 

Paga roman a lido atite o mini, 
Pattonan o don o ai-acha choa 
micho, choa maunis a don ta Deos, 
kapesasa, inau pasos'ochoa naan 
indecho, ino eachanni maibas inni 
choa don, so-o chan- numma, aUa 
mamaba cho inni don o ai-acha 
decho tummoach katinnaam o 
morr'o Deos. Kanarroa, inau 
katalan ta Deos inni don o ai- 
acha, maibas katalan o sjam inni 
choa don, micho-sar a pattite, 
katalan choa bo a rio, sabanno 
masini so-o tump'ija icho torroa 
annoggonoggo a ai-acha. Masini 
mach6 sjiem badd'o Deos ta Jesus 
Christus dem'ija migarrorro narroa 
ja natorroa boa inni na-a naan, 
indecho ina paga inni babat o 
decho. Maibassar icho pala, alU 
maro ina, pagatomma macharrieb 
na-a boa. Machaddik ja ina, so-o 
inni babat o chono ai, meach'ina. 




78 



Christian 



alia mabo dechoa, so-o ummior 
ochoa ai-aduu 

Ela-inillag o lido o adte, so-o 
minasini imoa alia don o Deos paga 
don o ai-acha, idem'eachanni ta 
Deo6| akaukauan choa ranied, adas- 
sen ja choa naan. Dem'ija talan 
ta UeoSy so-o dummaat i namoa, 
sabanno mai meacha so-o pannc^- 
gonoggonojanamo. Mai,aukattan 
o don o arrorroai-an o Deos^ maube 
tumboel o choa don o ai-acha. 
Tsichir'i ta David o ma-ai-aab 
so-o mario-a-cho : natta-sar ai. 
macho, mineach'i ta Deos ja ina, 
so-o na-a sasummad'o micho, alia 
na-a summos'i don o Deos tapos o 
zijsj'o na-a moridu Hai oraichan 
imo padl ai,hai malleak oadl o boe- 
sum. Ma-arich ja ina pala, mich- 
onsar o padl imoa, so-o acho mab'o 
narroa ja natorroa-da tuppo-no atil 
o Christan. Oedan, ja kamicho, 
alia tummoach o baak i don o 
arorroai-an ? Alia mero-os o 
baak ? Maini. Maspot a tump'o 
adl, maspot a maladik o atite i 

a'es, so-o karii-atite aicho-ies. 
aibas patdllo ta Deos: na-a 
ranicd, mach6, papaga inni joa 
tsjes, so-o allecho patdte aicho, 
sabanno mero-os inni oa don imoa, 
so-o sabanno mababat de tarran 
imoo, so-o sabanno summarra, so-o 
sabanno maseas imo micho-sar a 
patdte, maspot a tumpa tallochon 
o ranied i tsjes, depa poach imoa. 
Kanarroa, minasini channumm'- 
imonoe, alia don o ai-acha paga don 



o Deos, maunis a don, doa o 
ma-ichimit, dem'iia mero-os imoa 
kadnnaam o morr o Deos. Tapos 
o ai matsikap de oa don, alii mat- 
sikap de don o Deos, maspot a 
micho-no ma-allas a tsjes insinL 
Maspot a kummerid insini inni 
chimit o tsjes a ikkil o Deos. Ja 
alii arich, matsipi a karri-al'insini 
cho ? Mapor, mais, ja mauranies 
o sisjiem charri o cho moba roman 
a cha Oedan, pa ja doa o sum- 
marra, ja mapor imoa ? Ja poetat 
o don o Deos don o lalloog I Hai 
molappa. 

E-illa-na, depa lummoog o adte 
o Deos, depa Iwnmoog o adte o 
ai-acha, kailau pisor ochoa rais 
maibas o chaiu Ja mankat o choa 
bo, choa tataap o ri6 imonoe? 
Alia patoach o zijsja, alia pautas o 
tsinaap, alia pibo'o mochan, maube 
i don o ai-acha, insini atillan imoa 
meach'o micho. Kriella, eachi-na, 
illo-iloa, so-omamarach o gagil imo- 
noe ; sadda-na so-o tatummala ^ 
t6kka-na, so-o allecho tannaanni ja 
imo. Ja masabb'o saan oa tsjes-oe. 

Ja marotul o aba ? Eaclid i ta 
Deos, o ai ma-al-il, alia pe'o tsjes 
o mab^-da saan ; alia moa madar^- 
ram o gagil o Deos, a choa sjiem 
U Jesus Christus, so-o marach o 
morich o nut4chon-sar inni choa 
naan. Micho ja maukat a ina, 
alia ta Deos passosso imoa inau ta 
Jesus Christus choa sjiem badd*- 
aukattan; Amen. 




Instruction 



79 



SECOND SERMON, i Timothy ii. 5. 



A Ukattan a ma-akakriel. 
-^^^ Ta Apostel Paulus aran o 
Jesu Christ! inni choa bido masini 
macho : paga n^tta-sar a Deos. 
Natorroa-da tuppo ino torrodden 
paga inni atite o mini-sar. Kape- 
sasa, alia gagil paga ta Deos. 
Kanarroa, alia Deos o gagil alii 
boddo maso paga a natta-da ma- 
akammichi-sar. Ka natorroa, tom- 
m'ija Deos o gagil ai. Assanman-a, 
na-a a-ummillag o lido o atite o 
mini, amoos'imo kummeriel ai. 

Ka pesasa, alia paga ta Deos, 
alii kamachaggi ja imo. Matalam 
poetat oa tsjes, sja ta Deos paga, 
annumm'alli itan-sar icho ? Pa itan 
choa boa. Oedan, ja cho minit'- 
icho ? Indema, ja mocd'icho ? 
Matalam naan o Deos tsinosik. 
Naan o baak. AUipa ta Deos, 
allipa ja choa boa. Hai molappa. 
Hai poetat all'autat o Christan 
inni ta Deos paga baak. Maini- 
ena. Autat o gagil ja micho. 
AU'ina pait'ailo, na-a allecho tum- 
maam o naspat a chachod o mini. 
Ka pesasa innainumma darrammen- 
sar ta Deos. 

Ka narroa inaunumma alii itan 
choa boa. Kanatorroa, moeda choa 
boa ja morra ? Kanaspat, dem'ija 
icho, ja de babo, ja de rapo, ja 
mar 6, ja machaddik. Ka tatta- 
bach, alia paga ta Deos, paita cho 
tataap, so-o darrammen ja icho 
innai choa maunis o tataap. Ta- 
taap onumma ? Tataap mauchus 
a mato, ma-abarra, ma-atisso, mai- 
bas o boesum, tapos o ta, abas, zijsja. 



idas, baboan, aisennas, rabbo, lalka, 
bioa, sasio. Ja babo&a, mab'o me- 
rien aicho-ies ? Ja mab'o patillo-no 
boesum, zijsja, idas, barri ? Sja 
torro pattillo moetas, sai ja oetas ? 
Sja pattillo pirroos a barri, sai ja 
barri ? Pa. Kasai oetas, ja alii sai, 
torro mit'o baak. Pa ja ab'inni 
tsjes, pa ja barr'inni torroa bog, alia 
chummimit o ai. AUi ummior o 
airab o cho aicho-ies. Mai numma, 
ja maunis tummoach o tapos o ai, 
ja alii erinen-sar ? Ja moetas ja 
mabarri, ja n^unis tummoach a 
zijsja, idas? Maini-ena. Oedan, 
torro mita, alia zijsja a idas alii 
poelakies o tummoach o meodup ; 
alia barbar a masoan alii poelakies 
o pirroos atatta geroan a baas. Sja 
maunis tummoach o tapos o ai, 
mamachitachitat ja tummoach, 
so-o mamariggonggo aicho-ies. 
innainumma ummior, all'erinen- 
sar o tapos o ai. 

Mai, tomm'ija Airien ? Ja boe- 
sum ? pa. Oedan, alii morich o 
boesum; pa saan ja ab'inni choa 
achieb. Ja ta haibos o Airien ? 
Maini. Alii mab'ija haibos chum- 
mimit o boesum. Marotul choa 
aba so-o barra. Alii patoach o 
zijsja, a idas, alii pautas, alii pabo'o 
inochan : rapies a tsjes icho, alii 
mabo-no babosa, maukat o sum- 
bach, lummila, so-o parapies. Oe- 
dan, tomm'ija Airien, so-o indem'- 
icho ? Ja de ta ? Ja de abas ? 
Ja lallum rabbo ? Ja inni boesum ? 
Annach, Airien o boesum a ta paga 
de boesum, Choa naan ta Jehova. 




8o 



Christian 



Ta Deos paga Airien o mini. Ma- 
kammichi-sar icho babo tapos o ai. 
Kummasjiek a maro, a mabarra, a 
maba-da tsjes. Chummimit o boe- 
sum a tapos o ta. Inni boesum, 
so-o innai boesum pait'i namo-no 
choa aba, choa barra, ad^ al-il, a 
tataap o rio, alia namo sasummad'- 
icho-noe. Masini darrammen so-o 
talan ta Deos inni choa tataap, 
sabanno torro miall'o auchos aicho- 
ies. Torro babosa tummoach i ta 
mini ma-asabba so-o barrabarraan, 
maibas dummoro i don o mato, 
dem'ija mapan arribil. De babo 
torro mit'o boesum kamauchus 
mato, mogarinigini, machalloch- 
alio maibas o tattorroddauron ; 
choa baan o lallum inaalli o 
mapan rar£, mato, kotsi, mai- 
bas o tattakkoob. Zijsja ma- 
barra magarieb tallochon de 
ailo, so-o madaap o parar'o tapos 
o ta, alia cho mit'o tummaap. 
Kameodup a zijsja, odum o 
bi-ini tummallo-no cho sum- 
marra, so-o pissassen o tum- 
maap. Sja innai, boesum torro 
mitirpo, paga mampa, mapan 
baron de ta, baziep, inochan, 
bo'o baron, binnan, kannas, 
loan, mapan ja tsjes de abas, 
ino ipaan torro babosa. Ja tapos 
o tataap o rio o mini alii pait'o 
Airien o ai ? Mai, tamasea mit'o 
baak o tapos ai, so-o mautsiri ja 
lummido i ta Deos, paga gagil 
bachorren, so-o marotul o saan ; 
maibas o ma-ai-aab ta David rumme 
o otsiri o cho : ta Deos mache 
innai boesum minitirpo-no sisjiem 
o babosa, sja charri o cho macheer 
a tsjes, o ai summad'i ta Deos. 
Minollapp'ija pa tapos, paga choa 



tattuppa tapos; pagaga ta Deos 
chaddai. 

Kanarroa, marmini o tsjes charri 
o roman, inau alii itan-sar ta Deos. 
Oedan, sja paga icho-noe ? In* 
naunumma alii tuminoach, ino- 
numma macharrieb ? 

Mai, tummaam ja ina, alia ta 
Deos ani-aicho, innai aisas'o inerien 
o mini tapos ai, tsinummoach o 
mapan a cho, ta ma-ai-aab ma- 
abisse-bisse tsjes anibaas, maibas i 
ta Abraham, ta Jacob, ta Moses, 
ta Samuel, ta Jesaias, Jeremias, 
Ezechiel, Daniel, so-o romaroman, 
tamasea minasini o choa char-sar, 
so-o tsinummaap o atil o boesum, 
alia maibas o sjam-sar o Deos, so-o 
ma-atil a maba-da tsjes allecho 
pattil o cho-no baak decho-noe. 
Rummi-es channumma pinauss'o 
choa maun is a aukattan a sjiem 
badda ta Jesus Christus, gagil a 
isas so-o tat-sar ochoa boa, o ai 
tsinummoach i babo ta mini, kabi- 
nodd'o patomammali ta Maria, so-o 
katsinala gagil o Deos inni isas o 
babosa, alia pait'i namo ta Deos, 
so-o pattil o tarran i boesum ai. 
Ochal pab'o tapos choa airab so-o 
atillo, patok-sar ta Deos, so-o me- 
rab, silla tapos o cho poetautat inni 
choa ranied kabinidoan inni ta ma- 
ai-aab anibaas, so-o tschiet narroa 
cho aran o Jesu Christi. Na-a 
chummod channumma, ja alii 
macharrieb torroa tsjes a barri ? 
Ja itan tsjes, ja itan barri ? §0-0 
pagatomma micho, tomma-da cho 
marmimi ja mautsiri o barri ? Inau 
de ta mini itan choa barra. To- 
dacha mautsiri o tsjes ? Marmimi 
ja inni babosa paga tsjes? Inau 
katalan inni bog choa saan a tataap. 




Instruction 



8i 



Oedan, ja alii papaga mato a otsiri 
maibas o bachor, marmimi ja 
lumtnido i ta Deos ? Pagatomma 
macharrieb) so-o pa itan choa boa, 
inau itan-sar choa tataap, torroden 
ja choa aba, so-o barra inni tasso- 
no boesum so-o tapos choa rar^, 
inni tataap o tapos o ta, a abas, 
so-o mini tapos ai lallum choa 
baan. 

Kanatorroa, chummod roma- 
roman a chono ai mautsiri i ta 
Deos, moeda choa boa ja morra? 
Tummaam ina, alia maunionis a 
ta Deos, alii maibas o babosa. 
^a ja charri o ai de boesum, lallum 
rabbo, de ta, ja de abas maibas icho. 
Pa itan, pa siddo-on choa boa mai- 
bas o bogsar, inau tsjes o auchos 
ta Deos. Pa oot, oggach, tagga 
boa, bog-sar icho pa. Aisasa pa 
sisi icho. Pinaga taulaulan tin- 
naam o mini tapos ai. Acho ja 
boesum, pagaga ta, pagaga abas, 
pagaga cho, pagaga tapos o ai. 
AUi inerien-sar, alTi moribal choa 
ga, machonsar o taulaulan, paga- 
tomma moribal o mini tapos ai. 
Masini ta Deos. Mai, tomma-da 
cho mab'o pattite numma ja moud*- 
icho i Torroa macha alii mab'o 
mabaddabadd*o zijsja, masini maso 
mauchus marotul o tummaap o 
auchos i ta Deos torroa saan. 

• 

Natta-sar a mario a cho mantas 
chummod o maba-da saan o sjam, 
nummMja ta Deos. Natorroa 
rummi-es tump'icho, so-o mach- 
onsar marmimi, sacha-na tum- 
maam, kamaso milip na-a tumpa, 
maso qua na-a maba-d'ai. Masini 
paba aha mauchus maro so-o ma- 
char rieb ab*o Deos. Bior taulan 
kanaspat a chachod ai, dem*ija ta 



Deos, Ahij alia ta Deos paga de 
boesum. Paga^ chaddai, alia choa 
boa tapen inni boesum. Maini. 
Boesum so-o boesum o boesum ai 
alii tummaap ichonoe. Maibas de 
boesum icho, masini de ta, de abas 
channumma. Pa sies o choa ga, o 
ai pariaut o mini tapos ai, so-o 
maibas o choa rima tummattam o 
boesum, o ta, a abas. AUi maro 
ja icho innai atatta cho-sar. Torro 
patapos morich-sar, chumsar so-o 
paga inni icho-ech. Maibas paba 
ma-ai-aab ta David : ta Deos, 
macho, pana dema mamobe ina 
innai joa micho Auchar-ech, so-o 
pana dema mamobe ina innai oa 
morra-dech ? Sja ina pana babo 
moss*i boesum, paga ijo indecho. 
Ja p£sar-ra na-boa de rapo ta, \ti 
ijo indecho. Sja ina morag o 
chaarsar o sasaksak o baijan, sja 
pattodon ina maro de sies o abas : 
indecho channumm*allecho pa-i- 
jor ina joa rima so-o tummattam 
ina joa kallamas. Mai, sja paga 
de ta, de abas channumma ta 
Deos, annumm*alanni, all'icho pa- 
ga de boesum ? Abd, all'icho 
minerien-sar o boesum, maibas 
choa don o gagil, a mato, mauchus 
ma-adidden, so-o tapos a ballag 
de lallum alii moribal. Kasjabaan 
minerien-sar o ta, maibas choa don 
o sassaian, dem*ija pasos'o babos*o 
ai moribal, maibas o tapos a ballag 
de babo ta. Inau decho pattonan 
ja o boesum choa ba o rasan, inau 
summosM boesum, so-o pait*o choa 
chachimit matoto ; maibas-sar pat- 
tonan o ta choa tattallas-an o asiel, 
inau alii pattodon o gagil indecho, 
pagatomma paga de ta, de abas 
channumma. Ka-inipait*o pia 




82 



Christian 



tuppo-no pesasa, alia gagil paga, 
soo innainumma darrammen ta 
Deos. Ummior a-i-jor a natta- 
da tuppo, alia Deos o gagil alli 
boddo maso paga a natta-da ma- 
akammichi-sar. Paga natta-sar a 
Deos, mach6 ta Paulus tapos cho- 
no ai mautsiri i ta Deos o gagil, 
poetat o mapan Deos-sar. Charri 
o cho poetat o zijsja, o idas ta 
Deos, charri o roman o chau. 
Charri o roman mauchus bach- 
orren poetat o bottoos, ia ibien, 
ja loan ta Deos. Molapp ija pata- 
pos, so-o poetat o baak. Alli ma- 
pan a Deos. Oedan, Deos o 
gagil kummasjies a ma to, a ma- 
barra. Pa ja roman maso mato, 
ja maibas icho. Choa aba, choa 
airab, choa barra, choa chachimit 
kummasjies a mato, o ai alli ilen 
innaide romanech. Mai, alia Deos 
o gagil alli boddo maso paga a 
natta-da ma-akammichi-sar, na-a 
paita taulan masini : Deos o gagil 
paga natta ja mapan. Alli mapan. 
Oedan, sja mapan, roman maso 
mato, roman a-i-jor a mato, ja 
pagaga tapos maibas-sar a mato a 
ma-abarra. Pa ja Deos maso 
mato, pa ja a-i-jor a mato, inau 
Deos o masini mamarotul a ma- 
masabba maibas o babosa. Alli pa 
chainnumma mapan a Deos maibas- 
sar a mato, a mabarra, inau alli 
matasas kummasjies a matp, a ma- 
barra. Mai, sja nattasar kummas- 
jies a mato, a mabarra, a maba-da 
saan, makammichi mamatsikan o 
chummimit o mini tapos ai, mai- 
bas o zijsja natta-da matsikap o 
mini tapos o ta ; so-o roman ma- 
sini pagaga baak o Deos. Innai- 
numma ummior, alia kummasjies 



a mato, a mabarra, a mabarda saan 
paga Deos o gagil, so-o alli boddo 
maso paga a natta-da ma-akam- 
michi-sar, maibas o gagil macho 
ta Paulus, paga natta-sar a Deos. 
Me taulan alia na-a ummillag o 
natorroa-da tuppo ai, tomm'ija 
Deos o gagil o ai. Alli madarram 
ja torro i ta Deos o gagil innai 
autat torroa micho. ragatomma 
tapos o tataap o mini innai babo 
pana rapo pait*o choa Airien, alia 
paga charri obo a ja tsjes, kummas- 
jies a macheer a mabarra, maibas 
o rar£ o zijsja paita alia paga zijsja, 
pagatomma takkoban o rabbo paid- 
dabo ja aicho-ech. Ka-itan o 
choa, rara ja asiel, pagatomma pa 
itan cho'achieb. Masini tataap o 
mini talcho a mato paita alia paga 
charri o Airien' o ai makkesjap o 
ummoop o tataap o mini, paga- 
tomma machon-sar o macharrieb 
icho-ech ; ka-itan choa ab'o saan 
mato, choa barra inni tattorrod- 
daurono choa tataap, pagatomma 
pa itan choa boa. Torroa tsjes a 
saan maspot a tumpa masini, tapos 
o achieb o ai marotul o morich, o 
saan, o aba, alli mab'o merien o 
choa maunis a boa. Maibas sja, 
talan assaban mato, dem'ija ma- 
pan don, so-o don o baak tapos, 
marotul o babosa, torro poetat so-o 
pittau o gagil alia pinaga babos'ani 
pesasa, tamasea minerien o assaban 
a don micho, inau alli maunis tum- 
moach o assaban ja don, ka-erinen 
innaide babos'aicho-ech. Masini 
sabanno torro miall'o boesum, o 
choa rara, o ta, o abas, achieb o ai 
mauchus mato, marotul ja tapos o 
morich ai, o saan, o aba ; torro 
mit'o boesum, o zijsja alli pittol o 




Instruction 



83 



maamgach a mabarra magarieb, 
alii mab'o orachan, machon-sar 
tummoach a meodup, alia patta- 
dach so-o parar'o tapos o ta j torro 
miall'o al£ o boesum maibas o tat- 
takkoob a chochcho. 

Atassan o mapan rar£, maibas o 
tollalis o chau ; torro mit'o zijsja 
chumpochpod o rar^, so-o maukat 
o choa ri-6, makkesjap channumma 
namo poetat so-o pittau o gagil, 
alia paga charri o Airien, tamase'- 
ani pesasa minerien o tapos ai, so-o 
taulaulan tumka maibas o choa 
rima, taulaulan maladik a chum- 
mimit o choa barra so-o aba ; inau 
alii maunis tummoach o boesum, 
o ta, a abas, sja alii erinen innai- 
de roman aicho-ech. Assanman-a 
inau ka-itan gagil inni tattor- 
roddaurono tataap, alia paga charri 
o Airien, o ai attonannan ta Deos, 
makkesjap i torro babosa poetautat, 
$0-0 pittau o gagil o tuppono pe- 
sas'o mini, alia paga Deos. Ta 
Apostel Paulus pachip o a-i-jor a 
nattada tuppo, silla, makkesjap o 
chono ai, kasai pana ta Deos, 
poetautat channumma, alia paga 
ma-achachad o chono ai kasum- 
mad'ichonoe. Alia paga Deos, 
paita choa tapos o tataap ; tomm'ija 
paga gagil o Deos, alii mab'o pait'- 
aicho-ies. Torro miall'o Airien o 
ai inni tattorrodaurono choa ta- 
taap ; tomm'ija Airien o mini, 
moeda choa ga ja boa, so-o tapos 
choa aunis o gagil, pa itan inni tat- 
torroddaurono tataap o ai. Inau 
micho babosa maspot a summad'i 
ta Deos, maibas pab'ija ta Paulus. 
Matalam marmimi ja tsjes, indea 
maspot a summad'i ta Deos, ja dc 
babo ja de rapo ; ja de boesum, ja 



de ta. Ass^nman-a na-a sasum- 
mabas o ummillag o micho. Kape- 
sasa, maspot a maba, alia pa itan 
ta Deos o mach£ o bog, tamasea 
tsjes o auchos, so-o summos'i rar^ 
pan'o ai alii mab'o mababat o ba- 
bosa. Inau micho ani pesasa 
maunis pinas o choa boa ta Deos, 
so-o pana choa tataap pinachip o 
choa ranied kabinidoan, inninumma 
pattas o choa ga, patorrod o choa 
boa, so-o tapos choa aunis o gagil. 
Masini ja itan ta Deos maso gagil 
a chaddik, inni tattorrodaurono 
choa ranied kabidoan, katalan ja 
icho inni choa maunis a rar^, rar£ 
o ai paga maunis choa ^a, al'o 
choa ranied innai choa ga, innai 
choa boa, innai choa maunis a 
siiem, inni choa Auchar-ech, ta 
Spirito Santo, innai choa barra, 
cho'airab, choa bisse-bisse, cho'- 
atillo, choa bo, choa ri-6, cho'al-£l, 
cho-asoso, choa tapos o tataap. 
Kanarroa-da tuppo pait'o choa boa 
ta Deos o babosa, mauois a tuppo de 
ta, maunis a tuppo de boesum. De 
ta pait'o choa boa maibas inni tat- 
torroddauron, de boesum maibas o 
morr'a morra, michosar a pattite, o 
auchos gagil. De ta icho dummar- 
ram o babosa madarram icho maibas 
inni tattorroddauron, alia madarram 
o auchos icho inni boesum. Pator- 
rod ja choa boa inni narroa-da tattor- 
roddaurono de ta, tattorroddaurono 
choa tataap, so-o tattorroddaurono 
choa ranied kabinidoan. Tattor- 
roddaurono tataap o ai paita, alia 
paga Deos. Tattorroddaurono 
kabidoan ranied o ai paba, tomm'- 
ija paea gagil o Deos o mini, 
numm^ja icho, numma choa airab, 
numma choa tataap, indema pat- 




84 



Christian 



todon ja icho: pait'o tarran pana 
choa l)oa, pa-i-jor o babosa pana 
boesum-ech. ^abanno torro ba- 
bosa inamoos summad'i ta Deos 
inni narroa-da tattorroddaurono 
mini, icho tummillag i torroa saan, 
tummoach i torroa tsjes, so-o patal'o 
choa boa. Ita, indea torro maspot 
a summad'i ta Deos, inni choa ta- 
taapy inni tataap o bocsum a tapos 
o ta, so-o maso achaddik inni choa 
ranied kabinidoan, inni numm'icho 
pattas so-o pab'o choa boa. Kabi- 
doan ranied o ai paga bido o Deos 
pana babosa, bido o ai in^cho innai 
boesum, inni numm'aloddan o ba- 
bosa, alia machi'o kakossi, so-o 
mabarr'i ta Deos, alia pacheoach 
ma-auri-edda-da tsjes, pana tamau 
o tsjes ai, alia summad'i ta Deos, 
dummauko o cho'Airien, pittau o 
gagil o choa boa, so-o poetautat 
inni choa bo, maibas insini pab'ija 
ta Paulus, alia babosa maspot a 

Sietautat channumm'inni rio o 
eos, a al-^1 o tsjes, so-o pittau 
alia paga ma-achachad o chono ai 
kasummad'ichonoe. AUi masabba 
ja marotul o charri o ai ta Deos, o 
ai paga chuppod o gagil o tapos 
rio. Boesum a ta so-o choa tapo 
maunis icho. Kamabarr'ija tapos 
o ai, so-o ummoob o tapos choa 
airab. Sja merab o chummad o 
choa azjies-in, so-o chummote i 
decho, makkesjap choa barra, so-o 
alii ilen innaide charri o ai. Na-a 
micho paga chachad, macho, na-a 
chachummad. Kasjabaan sja mau- 
kat o choa aran, choa sisjiem, sja 
merab o chummad o choa aukattan 
a cho, so-o passoso i decho, mapan 
ja choa asoso, de babo, de rapo, 
lallum abas, de ta, inni boesum 



so-o alii magamgam pea. Ta 
Paulus summoal insini o choa al-il 
o tsjes, so-o pattonan o ma-ach- 
achad michosar a pattite, ma-a-al-il 
a ma-ai-a, tamasea kumrar o choa 
rima, so-o p^dabbi o tapos o ai 
morich. Pagatomma matasas o 
babosa de tapos o ta, so-o matapo 
a cho tapos o assaban a don, matsi- 
kap ja choa inochan tallochon a 
baas, so-o paga rot channumma. 
Naida tuppono inochan ino ipaan 
tapos o kibosa de borroch o ta 
mini ? paga adda, batur, baziep, 
bo'o baron, mapan a binnan, nau- 
qua, saam, babono bonna, loan o 
baron, mapan a mario atsi de abas, 
de sabbadech. So-o azjies tum- 
maramar de roman a ta paga roma- 
roman a inochan channumma. 
Marach ja patapos innai ma- 
adaldal choa rim'o tapos o ai ma- 
sabb'ija decho. Mauromaroman 
ja choa asoso, zikakas, naupoot, 
dippi, barieg, soe o kakan, barri, 
oetas, rara, tadach, binnas o bog, a 
barra, morich o ma-ilip, saan, ^ba, 
so-o cheer o tsjes. So-o can o 
baak o tapos ai, so-o tapos o ba- 
bosa ; ean channumm'o chono ai 
mautsiri i ta Deos, so-o alii meach'- 
ija icho, inau mabd-sar alia ma- 
sabb'o aicho-ies decho-noe. Mas6 
masanno pape'o asosono choa sis- 
jiem a choa aran, tamasea madar- 
ram icho, poetautat inni choa rio, 
so-o tallochon meach'ija icho, mai- 
bas pab'ija ta Paulus, alia chum- 
mad o chono ai kasummad'ichonoe, 
alia paga ma-achachad o choa ma- 
aunionis a cho. Masinisar icho 
pal'i ta Abraham : hai mikkil 
Abram, paga ina badsig o malam 
a oa boa, so-o joa micho chachid 




Instruction 



8s 



o mauchus mato. Chummad o 
mario a tataap, tataap o babisse a 
chimit inni choa sisjiem ta Deos, 
so-o narroa tuppo paga choa cha- 
ch^d inni morich o mini dc babo 
ta so-o a-i'jor a morich o mini 
boesum. De babo ta mini chum- 
mad o choa bo a tataap a rio, 
maladik o choa aran, so-o p^dabbi 
o rio choa tsjes-oc, pe'o morich o 
ma-ilipy binnas, ^rra, aukat o tsjes, 
so-o roma-roman choa asoso. Inni 
rio a al-al o Deos pinoetat o auchos 
mario-acho ta David, inau dccho 
pila-sar, ta Jehova paga na-a micho 
ma-arari, alii mamarotul o charri 
o ai ja ina-e. Chachad i boesum 
paga chachad o gagil, o ai ummior 
a-i-jor a morich o mini. Innai- 
numma pala ta Christus, it^, matoa 
mai ja ina, so-o na-a micho cha- 
chad rorro-no ina, alia na-a chum- 
mad o atatta cho, kamaibas o choa 
tataap. Chachad o mini o ma- 
acharrieb aladikkensar i boesum 

ino ean. sabanno ta Christus sasai 

' • • • 

pacheoach, alia merien o chachalt 
o cho morich-a, so-o machada ai, 
so-o tatummoach lallum rabbo 

• 

maibas o ma-achach£lt o tapos o 
cho, so-o ma-achach£d o chono 
Deos. Ass^nman-a, alia na-a po- 
sisi o ranied, so-o paatsikap o atil 
o ta Paulus imo-noe. Tuppana 
narroa-da tuppono mini, o ai pab'- 
ija ta Paulus, alia babosa, tamasea 
merab o sai pana ta Deos, maspot 
a poetautat inni ta Deos, so-o 
chaimumma alia maspot a poet- 
autat inni choa bo, al-al, a rio o 
tsjes. Alii karri-dadaat ta Deos 
a babosa, machonsar ribdllen, sja 
marotul o ab'o Deos, marotul o 
autat inni ta Deos choa tsjes-oe. 



Maro innai ta Deos, innai choa b6, 
innai boesum, so-o morich i boe- 
sum o babosa tamasea mautsiri ja 
lummido i ta Deos. Na-a pal o 
gagil imo, mamoribal inni odum o 
otsiri oa tsjes-oe, mamarotul i ta 
Deos, mamarotul o choa bo, ma- 
marotul o chachad i boesum, sja 
alli pittau o gagil, so-o poetautat 
inni ta Deos imonoe. $ai malod 
o choa ranied imoa ta Deos, ma- 
chaddik ja imo, alia tummoach 
so-o pat^'o choa boa; sja alli 
machi'o auri-edda, sja madaddo 
pacheoach pau'icho-sar, alia ma- 
borr'icho-noe ann^ch, mamachon- 
sar o t^Uochon choa rais i babo 

• 

imoa, mamarior imoa inni morich 
o mini chachalt o kakossi, so-o ai- 
i-jor a morich o mini chachalt o 
chau i gehenna. Inau decho hai 
machon-sar molappa joa tsjesK>e, 
hai machon-sar mautsiri maibas o 
loan a binnan o bonna, o ai marotul 
o saan. Tuppana, babosa ja imo ; 
imo pa^ tsjes a saan, alia miall*o 
Airien mni choa tataap, so-o sum- 
madM ta Deos. Abanni ja imo 
choa ranied channumma, o ai mai- 
bas o tattorroddauron, alia tatum- 
morrod a chaddik, $0-0 madarram 
o gagil icho. Tomm'ija Deos o 
gagil o ai ? Ja maddobor o pachip 
o choa ranied ta Deos, so-o pattas 
o tatschier o choa boa, alia namo 
mamadarram. Icho-noe ? Mai, 
e-illa-na, depa moa ummior o autat 
oa tsjes-oe, hai poetat o joa tsjes 
charri o tatschier o Deos. Alli 
tummaap o g^ o Deos ma-audum 
a tsjes. Chodd'o ranied o Deos, 
asinia o choa atite. I-jorra o ka- 
kirrich kabinido-an ai. Oetautatta- 
na inni o tamau, inni ta sjiem. 




86 



Christian 



so-o inni ta Auchar-ech; natta- 
sar a gagil o Deos inni natorroa- 
da boa, so-o natorroa-da boa inni 
natta-sar a gagil o Deos. Ab^, alia 
maunionis natorroa-da boa^ allipa 
natorroa Deos-sar. Pagaga maunis 
a g£ o tamau, pagaga maunis a ga 
o ta sjiem, pagaga maunis a ga o 
ta Auchar-ech. Pagaga maunis a 
airab o tamau, pagaga maunis a 
airab o ta sjiem, pagaga maunis a 
airab o ta Auchar-ech, pagaga 
maunis a barr'o tamau, p^g^g^ 
maunis a barr*o ta sjiem, pagaga 
maunis a barr'o ta Auchar-ech. 
Pagaga maunis a chachimit o 
tamau, pagaga maunis a chachi- 
mit o ta sjiem, pagaga maunis a 
chachimit o ta Auchar-ech. Mai- 
bas o tamau, masini ta sjiem, ta 
Auchar-ech rorro-no paga nattada 



ga o Deos, nattada airab, nattada 
barra, nattada chachimit. Mar- 
ummo ga o Deos inni o tamau, 
inni ta sjiem, so-o inni ta Auchar- 
ech. Masini-sar o tamau paga 
gagil o Deos, ta sjiem paga gagil 
o Deos, ta Auchar-ech paga ga^il 
o Deos, so-o nattorroa decho fuii 
boddo maso paga a natta-sar a 
Deos. Maibas pala ta Johannes 
aran o Jesu Christi ; paga natorroa 
inni boesum, o tamau, ta ranied, a 
ta Auchar-ech, so-o natorro'o mini 
paga natta-da. Masini mach6 ta 
siiem-ech, moa poetautat inni 
Deos, oetautatta inni na-a boa 
channumma. Mai, alia na-a posisi 
o ranied, maibas pinesas'ina, paga 
natta-sar a Deos, maunis o ai 
chachimit o tapos, a barra, so-o 
adas, taulaulan ; Amen. 



THIRD SERMON. Hebrews xi. 6. 



A Ukattan a ma-akakriel. 
^^ Ta Deos minerien o babosa 
mabada saan, so-o alappoon ja 
morra pana boesum ai, alia decho 
mamiall'o a-la o boesum, so-o 
sasummad'i ta Deos o ma-achar- 
rieb, o ai summos'i boesum-ech. 
Allipa ja talan icho inni isas o 
bogsar, inau tsjes o auchos ta 
Decis. Torro maspot a summad'i 
ta Deos o autat o tsjes-sar ; torroa 
saan a tattuppa maspot a tummaap 
icho. Maibas pab'ija ta Apostel 
Paulus aran o Jesu Christi inni 
cho'atite o minisar : tamasea sai 
pana ta Deos, maspot a poetautat 
alia paga icho-sar, so-o alia paga 



ma-achachad o chono ai kasum- 
mad'icho-noe. Ita, sja torro mai 
pana ta Deos, sja merab o sum- 
mad'o gagil icho torro maspot a* 
poetautat inni choa boa. Maspot 
a poetautat inni choa b6. Torro 
maspot a poetautat alia gagil paga 
icho-sar. alia chummad. so-o ma- 
bono tapos chono ai, kasummad- 
icho-noe. Tamasea sai pana ta 
Deos, macho. Maibas o babosa 
sai pana ta Deos, masini chan- 
numma ta Deos sai pana babosa, 
so-o karri-dadaat. Moeda babosa 
sai pana ta Deos, ja mababat o 
asiel-sar, alia dummaat i ta Deos ? 
Maini. AUi dummaat icho-noe 




Instruction 



87 



bog a boa, inau tsjes o auchos ta 
Deos, o ai pa itan pa siddo-on. 
Tamasea merab o sai pana ta 
Deos, maspot a ummallappono 
tsjes pau'icho-sar. Paga tsjes o 
auchos ta Deos, so-o tamau o 
tsjes ai, tamasea pinaisas'o torroa 
tsjes-oe ani pesasa, ka bao inerien- 
sar o babossi, so-o acho kinummossi, 
madarram i ta Deos, so-o maukat 
par'icho tsjes. Kasag-i kinum- 
mossi inni ta Adam torroa tsjes. 
Innai kakossi tsinummoach o mau- 
nis a airab, innai maunis a airab 
azjies o Deos, innai £zjies ikkil o 
Deos, innai ikkil auri-edd'o ta Deos, 
innai auri-edda au-ach o Deos, innai 
au-ach ma-audum a tsjes o otsiri o 
Deos. Masini riballen inau kakossi 
ta Deos a babosa, tamasea marorro 
ani pesasa ; minori-edda ja tsjes i 
ta Deos cho'Airien, so-o kaminatis 
o iWo saan, o £b*o Deos. Innai- 
numma ummior all*ababad o ba- 
bosa pana ta Deos paga acheoach o 
tsjes pana choa aisasa ja cho'Airien, 
innai tamasea minobe ma-auri-edda- 
da tsjes. Maspot a maba taulan o 
pia, alia babos'o ai mautsiri o gagil 
o Deos, so-o channumma mikkilo 
choa rais inau kakossi ka-ilen-sar 
maunis o mababat pana ta Deos. 
Makapos a tsjes ai alii mialFi ta 
Deos inni choa tataap, mautsiri o 
cho'Airien, mautsiri o tarran ai 
pana ta Deos. Torro babos'alli 
meaab o summad'i ta Deos, alii 
meaab o mai pan'ichosar, molapp'ija 
patapos, so-o ummior o autat o 
baak ; maibas o ma-aijaab ta David 
rumme o otsiri o cho : ta Deos 
macho innai boesum minitirpono 
sisjiem o babosa, sja charri o cho 
machcer a tsjes, o ai summad'i ta 



Deos : minolapp'ija patapos, Paga 
choa tattuppa tapos : pagaga ta 
Deos chaddai. Inau micho ta 
Deos ani pesasa maddobor o pab'o 
choa boa, so-o patorrod inni choa 
ranied kabinidoan, inninumm'icho 
pinattas o choa maunis a ga, pa- 
kaukau so-o palod o babos'alla sai 
pacheoach pan'ichosar. Gagil ta 
Deos meaab o summad'o babosa, 
meaab o sai pana torro boa, pait'o 
tarran, tummono choa rima, alia 
pa-i-jor i namo pana choa boa, 
maibas palasar inni ta ma-aijaab 
Esaias ; katalan ja ina mach6, innai 
chono ai paga chinummod innai 
ina-e, katalan ja ina innai chono ai 
paga sinummad'ina : so-o o chono 
ai, paga minarach o na-a naan, 
pinala ja ina: iti, insini ja ina, 
ita, insini ja ina. Masini aloddan, 
so-o maibas kattoon o babosa sai 
icho pana ta Deos. Kasjabaan 
ta Deos channumma sai pana ba- 
bosa, michosar a pattite, tummoach 
o tsjes, dummaat o babos'o choa b6, 
al-al, a rio. Ka ochal paita moeda 
babosa sai pana ta Deos, assin- 
man-a na'-a-ummillag o narroa 
tuppono ai ta Apostel Paulus paat- 
sikap o chono ai merab o sai pana 
ta Deos. Tamasea sai pana ta 
Deos mach6, maspot a poetautat 
alia paga ichosar, so-o alia paga 
ma-achach£d o chono ai, kasum- 
mad'icho-noe. Kapesasa, matsikap 
o chono ai kasai pana ta Deos, 
poetautat alia paga Deos. Gagil 
o micho ; oedan, sja torro mar- 
mimi, ja lummido i ta Deos, 
moeda mamai ja torro pan'ichosar ? 
Sja alii kamachaggi so-o pittau o 
gagil i ta Deos, papaga baaksar 
torroa autat, annc^gonoggo a 




88 



Christian 



ai-acha. Tuppono pesas'o mini, 
alia paga Deos, na-a mineaab o 
paba innai ranied, so-o al'o ta 



raulus 



o mini, 



pa^ 



nattasar a 



Deos. Ja achai pittau o gagil, 
ja machonsar marmimi imoa ? 
Chodd'o tapos o tataap o mini, 
tataap o boesum, o ta, a abas, Ja 
alii pakaukau alia paga Deos, ja 
alii pait'ocho'Airien ? Chodd'oa 
maunis oa tsjes ; ja alii patorrod 
o choa isas, choa ab'o saan ta Deos 
inni torroa tsjes ? O ai minerien 
so-o pinaal-li o mini tapos ai. 
Pagatomma itan choa aba so-o 
barra, pagaga aban chaddai, tomm'- 
ija Airien o mini. Kapapoetaut- 
ach-sar o Auchos ma-acharrieb 
Airien o ai, sja alii pinachip o 
choa ranied ta Deos, sja inni choa 
atite kabinidoan anibaas alii pin- 
attas o tatschier o choa micho boa. 
Masini-sar ga o Deos o ma-ach- 
arrieb ipatorrod inni choa ranied 
kabinidoan, maibas inni tattorrod- 
dauro-no, alia torro mamialla, so-o 
mamadarram o gagil icho; o ai 
pinab'o choa boa, so-o minaunis-o- 
ala, alia choa ga, paga ga o tsjes- 
sar, o ai alii moribal, pa aisasa, pa 
sisi-ech kummasjies a mato, pa sies 
o choa boa, kummasjies a maba-da 
saan, a mario, machijmchimit a 
tsjes, kamabarr*ija tapos o ai, Airien 
o boesum, o ta, a abas, o ai inni 
natorroa-da boa paga natta-sar a 
Deos, o tamau, ta sjiem, so-o ta 
auchar o ma-achimit, ta Spirito 
Santo. Mai, ja chummod imoa, 
numm'ija ta Deos? Ab£, alia 
tsjes o auchos icho, choa ga gagil 
ga o tsjes, o ai alii rorro-no aar- 
panni innai bog a tsjes mabas o 
babosa. Innainumma ummior, 



alia pa itan, pa siddo-on, pa adon- 
sar choa ga, mabas o bog-sar, alia 
patassaban, pa taggogon, pa man, 
micham, summarra, mababat icho. 
Oedan, inau maunis a ga, maunis 
channumma choa tsjes, alii maibas 
o tsjes o cho, maunis choa airab, 
choa tattuppa, choa barra, choa 
tapos o tataap ; maibas pala-sar : 
na-a tattuppa pagaga joa tattuppa, 
so-o joa tarran pagaga na-a tarran. 
Mai, maibas o bo^um maso maro 
a ta, masini na-a tarran maso maro 
a joa tarran, so-o na-a tattuppa a 
joa tattuppa. Torro babosa sja 
alli man, so-o paan o bog atatta 
zijsja, alli mamilip ja morich. Ta 
Deos alli masabb'o inochan. Paga 
morich ai inni icho-sar, maibas inni 
zijsja-da rar^ inni chuppod o to. 
Tapos o bog paga choa raae, so-o 
atatta raag maunis. Demija ri, 
pa ja chaan. Dem'ija charrina pa 
machi. Dem'ija oeno, pa ja asiel. 
Bog o mato paga raag o mato. 
Kotsi, kotsi-sar. Ta Deos alli 
maibas; pagatomma kummasjies 
a mato, pagaga raag icho-sar. 
Pagaga charri o choa raag de boe- 
sum, charri o de ta, charri o de 
abas. Rorr6-no a ma-arummo-i 
o paga de boesum, de ta, de abas' 
icho. Torro babosa paga ranied o 
pattite, charrin'o asini, macho ita, 
rim'o tataap. Pa ranied icho, so-o 
mab'o pattite. Pa charrina, so-o 
masini o tapos ai pa macha so-o 
mit'o tapos ai. Allipa charri o ai 
macharrieb icho-sar. Pa tea, ja 
rima, so-o tummaap a tummattam 
o tapos ai. Tapos o bog paga 
choa sies, so-o ootten. Sja torro 
paga de don, maibassar a rorr6 alli 
paga de ta, ja de bonna, inau tapen 




Instruction 



89 



ia bog inde don. Pa ootten ta 
DeoSi pa tapen inni boesum icho, 
pastes o choa boa. Alli alanni 
innai icho-sar, pa insini, pa ai-i, 
pa indecho. Rorro-no paga dc ta, 
de abas, de boesum icho, so-o 
pariaut o tapos ai. Maibas^sar 
maunis-o-al'innai choa boa : ja alli 
a Deos ina de maro, so-o a chad- 
dik. Ja ina alli pariaut o boesum 
a ta? Ga o Deos alli moribal, 
inau alli inerien-sar choa boa. 
Allipa charri o ai pinaisasMcho, 
mautsiri o dig, alli chipassanan, 
mach'ija. Machon-sar o tautau- 
lan, maibas ani tautaulan alli sum- 
moos, alli moab, alli ipachip choa 
to. Kamaro innai otsiri ja bachor. 
Chuppod o saan, a tapos o aba 
paga inni icho-ech. Alli mab'o 
sa^la ja tattosik, alli mab'o para- 
pies, mabisse a tsjes o auchos icho, 
so-o makammichi mario. Tapos 
o boesum, o ta, a abas matapo a 
choa bo. Alli marotul choa barra, 
ummoop o tapos choa airab. Alli 
ilen, alli orachan. Innai pagaga 
chaddai mimeriensar o boesum, o 
ta, a abas, inau choa airab kama- 
barr'ija tapos o ai. Pattite icho, 
so-o erinen ai ; pattillo so-o paga 
ai. Talc ho a mato a matasso Deos 
o gagil, so-o tapos ai inni choa 
boa. Ani tinnaam na-a pala, all'- 
inni ta Deos paga natorroa-da boa, 
o tamau, ta sjicm, so-o ta Auchar o 
ma-achimit-ech. Matalam poetat 
imoa, alia paga natorroa Deos-sar. 
Oedan, sja Deos o gagil o tamau, 
Deos o gagil ta sjiem, so-o Deos o 
eagil ta Auchar-ech, ja natorroa-da 
boo mini allipa natorroa Deos-sar? 
Pa, natta-da Deos ma-akammichi- 
sar. Gagil-na, sja o tamau maunis 



a ga o Deos, maunis a airab, mau- 
nis a barra, maunis a chachimit, 
alli maibas ta sjiem, ja ta Auchar- 
ech, alia papaga natorroa Deossar : 
pagaga o pia chaddai, inau nator- 
roa-da bo'o micho rorro-no paga 
natta-da ga o Deos, natta-da airab, 
natta-da barra, so-o natta-da cha- 
chimit. Marummo ga o Deos 
inni o tamau, marummo ga o Deos 
inni ta sjiem, so-o marummo ga o 
Deos inni ta Auchar-ech. Maunio- 
nis natorroa boa inni ga o Deos, 
allipa natorroa Deos-sar. Maunis 
a boa tamau, o ai pausjiem. Maunis 
a boa ta sjiem^ o ai ausjimen. Mau- 
nis a boa ta Auchar-ech, o ai soss'- 
innai o tamau, so-o ta sjiem. Alli 
maunis a Deos o tamau, alli maunis 
a Deos ta sjiem, alli maunis a Deos 
ta Auchar-ech, inau nattorroa bo'o 
micho rorro-no machon-sar inni 
natta-da ga o Deos. Tamau ma- 
chon-sar inni ta sjiem, so-o inni 
ta Auchar-ech. Ta sjiem, a ta 
Auchar-ech machon-sar inni ta- 
mau. Acho pinab'ina moeda naan 
o tamau, a ta sjiem alanni innai 
Deos. Matalam makakki a mar- 
mimi joa tsjes, moeda pausjiem ta 
Deos, ja naan o tamau, ta sjiem 
makkesjap icho, ja podda, ja paga 
sini-sar ? Mai, abd, alia maunionis 
choa pausjiem. Alli pausjiem o 
tamau choa sjiem maibas o babosa, 
alli podda maibas sini o cho. Ta 
sjiem a ta Auchar-ech soss'innai 
icho-sar, maibas o to chumpod innai 
chuppod. Torroa saan alli tum- 
maap o auchos o atil o boesum o 
mini o ma-acharrieb, mai, alia moa 
maso maba, na-a mamarach o tat- 
schier innai sijsja so-o tsjes-oe. Inni 
zijsja, paga natorroa tuppo-no mini, 



M 




90 



Christian 



asiel o zijsja, rar^ so-o tadach : inni 
tsjes paga saan, airab a tattuppa. 
Maibas paga natta-da zijsja, so-o 
natta-da tsjes inni babosa, so-o inni 
zijsja, inni tsjes maunis natorroa 
tuppo, masini pa^a nattasar a Deos, 
so-K> inni ga o Deos natorroa ma- 
aunionis a boa. Maibas o asiel o 
zijsja so-o rara soss'innai, zijsja, 
saan a airab innai tsjes, so-o alii 
riballen, machon-sar inni zijsa-da, 
inni tsjes-oe, masini-sar ta sjiem, ta 
Auchar-ech rorro-no soss'innai o 
tamau, so-o alii riballen innai choa 
boa, machon-sar taulaulan inni 
icho-ech. Maibas o zijsja, asiel o 
zijsja, so-o rara rorro-no paga nat- 
tada ga, masini-sar o tamau, ta 
sjiem, so-o ta Auchar-ech rorro-no 
paga natta-da ga o Deos. Maibas 
o zijsja alii pinaga tinnaam o choa 
rara so-o tadach, kapinaga so-o 
inerien-sar maibas-sar a rorro aicho- 
ies, masinisar Deos o tamau alii 
pinaga, pa choa sjiem, pa ta 
Auchar-ech, alii pinaga tinnaam 
o choa sjiem a ta Auchar-ech, 
kapinaga taulaulan maibas-sar a 
rorro decho-noe. Mai, pagatom- 
ma maibas-sar a rorro dechoa, o 
tamau paga bo'o pesasa, ta sjiem 
kanarroa-da boa, ta Auchar-ech 
kanatorroa-da boa. • O tamau paga 
bo'o pesasa, inau choa pausjiem, 
so-o makkesjap icho naan o tamau, 
inau pausjiem o gagil, so-o pattonan 
o ausjimen ai choa maunis, cho'- 
aukattan, choa natta-sar a binodda- 
da sjiem. Masini-sar Deos o gagil 
pinab'o choa boa, so-o pattillo torro 
pittau o gagil o choa ranied, alia 
poetautat inni choa boa inauchus 
o pia natorroa-da tuppo, so-o ini- 
paba, alia gagil paga ta Deos, alia 



Deos o gagil alii boddo maso paga 
a natta-da ma-akammichi-sar. so-o 
tomm'ija Deos o gagil o ai. Na-a 
pinait'o Airicn o boesum, o ta, a 
abas innai choa maunis o tataap. 
Attonannan-sar inni atite o azjies 
ta Deos : choa naan o gagil, mai- 
bas maunis pattonan o choa boa, 
paga ta Jehova, micho-sar a pattite, 
natta-da ga ja boa, o ai pinaga, 
P^S^ ?^>~^ machon-sar taulaulan. 
Mai, sabanno imoa mit*o abas, o ta, 
o boesum, o zijsja, o tapos cho'a-1^ 
hai masarrasarr o baak-sar maibas 

• • • 

o binnan, ja loan, i-£lla o barr'o 
Airien-oe, i-^Ua o choa saan, a aba 
matoto inni tataap o mini talcho a 
mato, a ma-atasso. Sabanno ma- 
rach o binnan, o tsi o abas, o ino- 
chan dc bonna, hai poach i ta 
Deos-oe, aukattana ma-^sosono ai, 
maibas moa maukat o choa asos6, 
so-alla o choa naan,adassa o joa tsjes, 
o joa ranied o cho'al-dl, a tataap o 
rio : ja Deos o gagil alii boddo maso 
paga a natta-da ma-akammichi-sar i 
Mai, e-illa-na, depa molappa joa 
t^cs, hai ummior o Deos o baak. 
Hai poetat inni hai bos, inni Adam. 
Hai paan o roman a Deos. Hai 
pe'o adas, kamaunis a Deos o gagil,- 
decho-noe. Mauchus makarrichi 
o kakossi o micho ta Deos. Pa- 
gaga mamabo-no atea, sja alii 
machi'o gagil, sja machon-sar imoa 
mikkap i haibos-ech. Mai, itiss'o 
rapies ai innai joa tsjes, innai joa 
tattuppa, all'ummior o natta-sar o 
gagil o Deos. Ja torro mautsiri 
innai autat torroa micho, tsinum- 
moach imo bao a rar^ o dba, hai 
maukat o odum a otsiri. Saddana 
i ta Deos, sabanno merab o talan 
ja icho, each£ icho, sabanno ma- 




Instruction 



91 



chaddik imo. Alii talan ta Deos, 
alii talan choa bo, sja alii taggogon 
o choa bo torroa tsjes. §adda-na o 
ab'o Deos inni tattorroddaurono 
choa tataap, so-o inni tattorrod- 
daurono choa ranied, o ai ipatorrod 
ja imo, alia moa madarram o gagil 
o Deos, so-o choa sjiem ta Jesus 
Christus, o ai paga ma-aborra tup- 
pach o Deos a babosa. Sadda-na 
bo, so-o chachad, alia tummila so-o 
marach o choa asoso a tataap o rio. 
Ta Paulus insini patorrod o chup- 
pod o tapos rio inni chachad o Deos. 



Ann^ch, sja merab o summabas o 
choa al-^1 a rio, alli sasummad'o 
baak icho-noe. Tatummal'o choa 
bo, al-£l a rio de ta mini, so-o a-i- 
jor a morich o mini i boesum, tau- 
laulan, pa sisi-ech. Alli mamaro- 
tul o charri o ai, alli mamarotul o 
charri o rio, sja tatummal'i ta Deos 
imonoe, inau tatummal'o tapos ai, 
sja tummal'icho-noe. Micho ja 
maukat a ina, alia ta Deos merab 
o pe'imoa, imau ta Jesus Christus 
choa aukattan a sjiem badda, 
Amen. 



FOURTH SERMON. John xvii. 3. 



G 



Agil o aba so-o autat inni ta 
Deos paarp'o babos'i ta Deos, 
inni tamasea paga gagil o morich, 
morich o ma-achon-sar ai. Ta 
Deos paurich o gagil, so-o paga 
inni icho-sar chupix>d o morich. 
Dem'ija alli paga morich, icho pe'o 
morich, dema paga icho paurich 
so-o maladik, depa>moribal. Ma- 
auricdda-da tsjcs, o ai riballen innai 
ta Deos inau kaJcossi, alli morich o 
gagil, pagatomma morich, inau alli 
machon-sar inni ta Deos. Kasja- 
baan mamorich o gagil, pagatomma 
mach'ija babosa, sja inni autat o 
gagil machon-sar barroon o rorro 
1 ta Deos, inau aladikken-sar choa 
morich inni ta Deos, maibas ja 
aladikken morich o baron inni 
bossor-ech, pagatomma mach'ija 
bia so-o a'o baron. Inau micho 
alia babosa marach o morich o ma- 



achon-sar, o ai paga inni ta Deos, 
maspot a madarram o gagil o Deos 
icho, so-o machon-sar mikkap i ta 
Deos inni autat o gagil. Maibas 
pab'ija ta Christus inni ranied o 
Evangelium kabinidoan inni ta 
Apostel Johannes, mini-sar, macho, 
paga morich o ma-£chon-sar ai, 
alia madarram ijo decho-noe, natta- 
sar ai gagil o Deos, so-o ta Jesus 
Christus, o ai pinauss'ijo. Inni 
a-illag o lido o atite o mini, torro 
tatummorrod o narroa-da tuppo. 
Kapesasa, alia babosa maspot a 
madarram o gagil o Deos, so-o ta 
Jesus Christus o ai paga ma-£borra 
tuppach o Deos a babosa. Kanar- 
roa, alia morich o ma-^chon-sar 
ummior o gagil o aba so-o autat 
inni ta Deos. Ta Christus pinal'- 
inni atite o tinnaam, alia Deos o 
tamau ummadok o choa chosar 




02 



Christian 



innai tapos o tupponodon de ta, o 
ai icho passoso i ta Christus, all'- 
icho pape'i decho o morich o ma- 
achon-sar, so-o inni atite o mini- 
sar pab'ija icho, moed'icho pa-i-jor 
o babosa pana choa tamau ; icho 
parar'o choa saan^ so-o pab'i decho 
o gagil o Deos. Ta Christus alii 
pa-i-jor o babosa pana ta §aitan, ja 
ta haibos, ja Deos o baak. Maini. 
Alii summall'o babosa ja icho. In- 
sini icho pait'o babosa choa tamau, 
so-o pa-i-jor i decho pana gagil o 
Deos. Mini-sar, macho, paga 
morich o ma-achon-sar ai, alia 
madarram ijo dechp-noe, natta-sar 
ai gagil o Deos. Ta Christus pat- 
tonan o choa tamau gagil o Deos 
so-o natta-sar ai gagil o Deos. 

Maibassar icho pala, pagatomma 
babosa poetat inni roman a Deos, 

Eagatomma ta Saitan pazigal'i ta 
)eos o gagil, so-o mapan ja Deos 
o baak, na-a ' kamachagei, all'ijo 
makammichi-sar gagil o Deos, alia 
Deos o gagil alii boddo maso paga 
a natta-da ma-akammichi-sar, alT'- 
inni oa boa paga gagil o morich ; 
inau micho na-a-pinab'o babos'oa 
naan, alia mamadarram ijo decho- 
noe, alia papoetautat inni oa boa, 
so-o mamarach o morich o ma- 

• 

achon-sar. Sabanno ta Christus 
insini paaunis o babos'o morich o 
ma-achon-sar, inau decho madarram 
o gagil o Deos, alii pab'ija icho, alia 
morich o ma-^chon-sar ummior o 
baak o ab'o Deos. Maini-ena. 
Icho pattonan o ab'o Deos gagil o 
aba, o ai par'o autat o tsjes inni ta 
Deos, inau sosse matas ab'o Deos, 
so-o marior autat inni ta Deos, 
chono ai mautsiri o gagil o Deos, 
alii poetautat inni ta Deos, maibas 



macho ta Paulus, moeda papoet- 
autat inni icho-sar, innai tamasea 
alii minasini decho-noe. Autat a 
aba rorro-no mababat. Torro 
pinoetautat so-o minab^ macho ta 
Petrus, all'ijo paga ta Christus, 
sjiem o Deos morich-a. Inau 
micho autat inni ta Deos so-o ab'o 
Deos maspot a rorrd mababat. 
Autat inni ta Deos maspot a pis- 
sarr'o ab'o Deos. Baak o ^ba, o ai 
marotul o autat inni ta Deos, alii 
marach. Pagatomma ta saitan 
mab'o Deos o gagil, alii marach 
ja icho morich o ma-£chon-sar, 
inau ta saitan alii poetautat inni 
ta Deos, mab'o baak-sar, so-o ma- 
tirtir. Inni autat o gagil paga 
natorroa-da tuppo. Tuppono pc- 
sasa paga gagil o ab'o Deos, micho- 
sar a pattite, alia torroa tsjes mab'i 
ta Deos, mab'o choa ga, choa airab, 
cho'atite a ranied kabinidoan. Ga- 
gil o aba parar'o tsjes, so-o alii 
pautach otsiri, maibas o rar£ paube 
odum. Ma-audum a tsjes alii 
poetautat inni ta Deos. Innai 
otsiri alii tummoach autat o gagil, 
tummoach innai a ba. Torro ba- 
bosa pittau o gagil, o ai torro 
kamachaggi. Innai otsiri tum-» 
moach aulakies so-o autat o baak. 
Inau micho ab'o Deos, so-o gagil o 
ab'o choa ranied paga tuppono 
pesasa inni gagil o autat o Deos. 
Kanarroa-da tuppo inni autat o 
gagil paga arach o ranied o Deos, 
micho-sar a pattite, alia torroa tsjes 
ummior o atite o Deos, so-o 
pittau o gagil o tapos choa ranied. 
Autat o gagil alii marmimi ja 
dummori o ranied o Deos, inau 
alii summalla ja tummosik icho 
maibas o babosa. Mabisse choa 




Instruction 



93 



tapos atite, so-o o auchos gagil. 
Torroa tsjes maspot a marach o 
tapos atite, o ai pab'ija ta Deos 
inni choa ranied kabinidoan, so-o 
pittau o gagil o micho, pagatomma 
alii mab'ija lido tsjes. Mini-sar 
paga narroa-da tuppo inni autat o 
gagil. Kanatorroa-da tuppo paga 
aikap i ta Deos, micho-sar a pattite, 
alia torroa tsjes tallochon mikkap i 
ta Deos, so-o didden o poetautat 
inni choa ranied. Autat o gagil 
ma-didden Ja autat, o ai miction- 
sar, so-o alli pittol, ja mori-edda. 
Autat ai, inniumma paga natorroa 
tuppo-no mini, paga autat o gagil, 
o ai mauchus marach innai ta 
Deos. Masini-sar torro babosa 

• 

maspot a poetautat inni ta Deos. 
Icho merab o autat o gagil, madas 
so-o maukat o gagil ma-autat a 
cho, so-o malleak o autat o baak, a 
ma-atattosik. Ka ochal pait'o choa 
tamau, so-o paba, all'icho paga 
gagil o Deos, ta Christus paito 
choa micho boa channumma, so-o 
pab£ all'icho paga ma-azinado tup- 
pach o Deos a babosa. Alia ma- 
darram ijo decho-noe, machd, 
natta-sar ai gagil o Deos, so-o ta 
Jesus Christus o ai pinauss'ijo. 
Inni ga o Deos, kamaunionis na- 
torroa-da boa, o tamau, ta siiem, 
so-o ta Auchar o ma-achimit, ta 
Spirito Santo. Ta sjiem o Deos o 
ai paga kanarroa-da boa inni ga o 
Deossar, rorro paga Deos a babosa 
inni nattada boa. Ga o babos'inni 
choa boa aarpani o ga o Deossar, 
all'icho mamatsikap o ummoob o 
^borra tuppach o Deos a babosa. 
§inai ja icho innai choa tamau, 
tamasea pinauss'icho de ta mini. 
Deos o tamau pinauss'o choa sjiem 



pana torro babosa, pinatoach o inni 
o isas o babosa, alia torro mama- 
darram icho, so-o papoetautat inni 
choa boa, maibas pab'ija icho, alia 
madarram ijo decho-noe natta-sar 
ai gagil o Deos, so-o ta Jesus 
Christus o ai pinauss'ijo. 

Ta sjiem o Deos, o ai tsinum- 
moach mni ga o babosa, marach o 
naan ta Jesus Christus. Deos o 
tamau pattonan o choa sjiem ma- 
sini, alia naan o mini papab'i torro 
choa maunis a tataap, so-o ino- 
numma ta Deos pinauss'icho de ta 
mini, all'icho paparras o babosa 
innai chachalt o kakossi. Ta 
Jesus micho a pattite, ma-ababir- 
ras, so-o choa maunis a tataap, 
paga babarras o babosa. Naan o 
ta Christus pait'o airab o Deos, 
tamasea pinauss'o choa sjiem alia 
pap^cho-no ranied o Deos pana 
babosa, so-o a-ummillag o atii o 
boesum. Inipaussa ja icho innai 
choa tamau, alia rarumme o babos'o 
choa ranied, so-o pattil i decho 
machi'o kakossi, tummis o tataap 
o arapies, maborr'i ta Deos, so-o 
ummior o choa char-sar. Naan 
ta Christus pab'ija, alia Deos o 
tamau pinaatsikap o choa sjiem o 
ummoob o aborra tuppach o Deos 
a babosa, so-o paita, all'icho paga 
gagil o ma-^borra, ma-azinado, so-o 
ma-adau o babcKsa, tamasea dau 
i torro minachote a minach^ inau 
torroa kakossi, alia mamarach o 
choa tagg'o ^bo-no torroa kakossi, 
so-o si mien ta Deos a torro boa, 
alia miel o rais o Deos o cho'azinado, 
depa achan tapos o ta, maibas 
pab'ija ta Apostel Johannes, sisjiem 
macho, na-apido o mini imoa, 
depa moa rarummapies, $0-0 sja 




94 



Christian 



rinummapies a cho, torro paga 
natta-sar a ma-azinado de tamau 
ai, ta Jesus Christus, ma-abisse- 
bisse o ai) so-o icho-sar lalaslas o 
torroa kakossi. Sjiem o Deos ta 
Jesus Christus tsinummalattal'o 
rais o Deos inau kakossi o babos'o 
choa machote a macha,so-opab6rr'o 
choa tamau, alia ka-itis o azjies, 
alii tatump'icho torroa kakossi ; 
inni choa boa torro paga arra so-o 
^borra rorro i ta Deos, so-o inni 
choa tagga paga lalasla^ o torroa 
kakossi. Machon-sar i boesum 
icho alia tallochon papazinadono 
choa sisjiem, cho'aukattan a cho-sar 
o ai machi'o kakossi, so-o poetautat 
inni choa boa. Ta Christus 

Eatorrod o ma-aborra tuppach o 
)eos a babos'inni choa micho boa, 
tamasea paarp'o babos'i ta Deos, 
so-o pa-i-jor o cho-no Deos pana 
boesum. Inau kakossi ilen o 
babosa maunis a mababat pana ta 
Deos, choa rais talcho a mato 
mauchus pa-ikkil so-o paube a ro 
torro boa. Sinai innai boesum ta 
sjiem o Deos ummoob o ^borra, 
tsinummoach de ta, alia pa-i-jor o 
sisjiem o Deos pana boesum. Inni 
choa boa minaborr'i torro babosa 
ta Deos, inni choa boa torro paga 
ababad pana tamau i boesum, so-o 
marach o £bono kakossi inni choa 
naan. Mini-sar pab'ija ta Christus, 
so-o pait'all'icho paga ma-aborra 
tuppach o Deos a babosa, alia choa 
tamau pinauss'icho, so-o pinaspot 
a ummoob o ^borr'o mini, alia 
babosa maspot a madarram icho 
channumma, so-o poetautat inni 
choa boa, maibas icho pala, so-o 
pab'o choa aran, moa poetautat 
inni ta Deos, mach6, oetautatta 



inni na-a-da boa channumma. 
Maibas o tamau pinauss*o choa 
sjiem pana babosa, masini babosa 
maspot a tummaap o autat o gagil 
icho. Ta Deos alii marach o 
babos'i boesum, sja babos'alli marach 
o choa sjiem, so-o mabich o autat 
o gagil de ta mini. Torro babosa 
maspot a rorro madarram i ta Deos, 
so-o choa sjiem, maspot a rorr6 
poetautat inni ta Deos, so-o inni 
choa sjiem. Ta sjiem o Deos so-o 
ma-aborra ta Jesus Christus pari-jor 
o choa rim'o tapos sisjiem o Deos ; 
tarran ja icho, sandon, so-o kittas 
o boesum. Tamasea merab o sai 

• 

pana ta Deos, maspot a ummior 
so-o par*o choa sjiem. Torro 
babos'alli matsikap o tummoach a 
dummaat i ta Deos inni torroa 
micho boa, inau torroa arapies 
pisor o choa rais, so-o paube a ro 
torro boa. Ta Deos mabisse o 
auchos, so-o choa mach£ o ma- 
achimit malleak o ma-arapies, inau 
micho torro maspot a dummaat 
icho inni ma-aborra, inni choa 
sjiem ta Jesus Christus, tamasea 
tummakkoop torroa arapies o choa 
babisse a chimit, so-o makkesjap 
paubarri a chaddik torro boa, so-o 
padaat i ta Deos : Maibas-sar icho 
pala, paga ja-ina tarran so-o morich 
ai, allipa ja cho sai pana tamau, 
sja alii passji ina. Maibas o 
babos'alli dummoro i don, sja alii 
pasji sandon, masini alii sai pana ta 
Deos, alii soss'i boesum, tamasea 
poelakies o tarran, so-o alii pasji 
sandon o gagil. Tarran o mini 
paga ta Christus, tsinummann'o 
boesum icho, o ai kinapos inau 
kakossi o babosa, paga sandon, so-o 
inni choa boa torra paga ababad 




Instruction 



95 



pana ta Deos ; icho pazinado torro 
boa, so-o pa-i-jor o rima pana 
choa tamau. Kamillag o pia 
tuppo-no pesasa inni ranted o ta 
Christus, so-o ipaba, alia babosa 
maspot a madarram o gagil o Deos, 
so-o ta Jesus Christus, o ai paga 
ma-aborra tuppach o Deos a 
babosa. Inni narroa-da tuppo 
pab*ija ta Christus, alia niorich o 
ma-^chon-sar ummior o gagil o 
ibz so-o autat inni ta Deos. Mini- 
sar macho paga mbrich o ma- 
ichon-sar ai, alia madarram ijo 
decho-noe natta-sar ai gagil o 
Deos. Ta Christus insini pattonan 
o morich o ma-achon-sar morich i 
boesum, morich o gagil, o ai paga 
inni ta Deos, so-o choa sjiem ta 
Jesus Christus. Rapies a ma- 
auribal o morich de ta mini inau 
kakossi a auri-edda. Kamoribal 
ja bog, so-o mach'ija tapos o 
babosa. I boesum torroa bog a tsjes 
mamorich o taulaulan, mamorig o 
gagil, so-o mauchus a rio. De ta 
inni torro maspot a paan, so-o 
porich o bog. Torro orachan o 
tummaap, o tummod, o marana, 
so-o moddon o tataap tallochon a 
baas. Torro tassaban so-o taggogon, 
madig a chaan, a bachinan, rapies 
so-o mauromaro man a dig pauribal 
o torroa bog atatta zijsja i boesum 
torro mamorich o ma-a-arra, 
maibas o ta Angelus o Deos, o ai 
alii man, alii micham, pa tassaban, 
pa taggogon, pa tummaap, pa 
madig, pa mach'ija. De ta mini 
torro paga zichil, so-o mauchus 
chummanied torroa tsjes. Pa ja 
zichil i boesum, pa ja chachannied. 
De ta mini alii pittol o kakossi, o 
sannan, o ^zjies ; morich i boesum 



marotiil o kakossi, o sannan, o 
azjies i ta Angelus patapos a babosa 
paga borra, so-o ummior o atiUono 
Deos. Paga aborra, aukat, so-o 
^rra, paga aukat otjes inni aijall*o 
ta Deos, aukat o taulaulan, pa 
sisi-ech. Mini-sar a paea morich 
o ma-£chonsar, morich i boesum, 
o ai ta Deos passoso inni choa 
sjiem ta Jesus Christus, o ai babosa 
marach inni autat o gaeil, maibas 
o ta Christus pala inni ranied o 
Evangelium Johannis, masini-sar, 
macho, ta Deos minaukat o tapos 
o ta, micho-sar a pattite, tapos o 
babcKsa, alia pine*o choa natta-sar ; 
a binodda-da sjiem, ino pa ja riballen 
atatta chono ai poetautat mni icho, 
kasjabaan alia paga morich o 
ma-^chon-sar. $io-o insini pab'ija 
icho, alia morich o ma-achon-sar 
ummior o gagil o ^ba so-o autat 
inni ta Deos. Ka ochal ummillag 
o lido o atite, bior alia torro 
tummorod o atil, o ai torro maspot 
a paaunis torro boa. Innai atite 
o mini atillan torro alia chachad o 
ab'o Deos paga morich o ma-achon- 
sar i boesum. Deos o tamau 

• 

chummad o gagil o aba, so-o autat 
inni choa boa, so-o pe*o morich o 
ma-^chon-sar o babos o ai madarram 
pittau o gagil, so-o poetautat inni 
choa boa. Morich o ma-ichon- 
sar paga asosono Deos inni choa 
sjiem ta Jesus Christus, so-o babosa 
paaunis o choa boa morich o 
ma-£chon-sar inni autat o gagil, o 
ai maibas o rima tummaap, so-o 
maunis-o-arach o tapos asosono 
Deos, tapos o ai ta Deos pinassoso 
torro inni choa sjiem ta Jesus 
Christus. Innainumma ummior 
I alia tapos o ma-autat a cho marach 




96 



Christian 



o morich i boesum, morich o 
ma-ichon-sar inni autat o gagil. 
Tamasea poetautat inni ta sjiem o 
Deos, paga morich o ma-achon-sar, 
mach6 ta Apostel Johannes inni 
cho atil o mini torro tummorrod 
o ri6 o Deos, so-o choa bo matoto. 
Sja icho papachalt o babosa 
kamaibas o lallalak o choa ranied 
makesjap o kakossi alia kartattisan 
ja patapos i chau o gehenna, ino 
chotein taulaulan rorr6 i ta saitan, 
pa sisi-ech. Chachalt o kakossi o 
mini attonannan inni bido o Deos, 
tattea so-o rais o ma-£chon-sar, 
chau o gehenna, so-o macha a 
manawassar, inau ta Deos a-i-jor 
a morich o mini mamerien o 
chachalt o tapos Angelus a babosa, 
so-o papa-itis o chono ma-arapies 
rorr6 i ta saitan i chau o gehenna, 
ino tean taulaulan kamaibas o choa 
tataap o arapies. Alii mamotup 
o chau i gehenna, alii papittol o 
dig, papaga aurtsi, alli-alli, akirkir 
o zien, so-o chachannied o taulau- 
lan. Ta Deos alia pait'o choa rio 
inni ibono kakossi, depa mamoribal 
i gehenna tapos o babosa, pinauss'o 
choa sjiem de ta mini ta Jesus 
Christus, alia paparras o babosa, 
so-o pinachalt o kakossi o babos'inni 
choa sjiem natta-sar o binnodda, 
alia mamab6no ma-akakossi. 
Masini pagatomma deeg, alia 
mamachote babosa taulaulan i 
gehenna, barrasan ja inau mac bote 
o ta sjiem o Deos tapos chono ai 
kamachi' o kakossi, so-o poetautat 
o gagil. Makakki ja tsjes o 
bablrras o mini, babosa chumpir 
so-o kamazjies i ta Deos, so-o 
maborr'o choa izjies-in ta Deos, 
babosa kummossi, so-o ta sjiem o 



Deos lummaslas o 
alii las-las-en o so-e babos'a, las- 
las-en o tagga, o machi o ta sjiem 
o Deos. Minachote inni choa bog 
a tsjes ta Christus depa mamachote 
taulaulan, depa mamoribal i gehenna 
torroa bog a tsjes. Minach£ ta 
sjiem o Deos, minotup o baboan o 
marara, alia mamorich taulaulan 
rapies a ma-auri-edda-da cho. 
Ranied alii mab'o pattite, tsjes 
alii mab*o tumpa, so-o saan aili 
mab'o tummaap o rio o tsjes, o ai 
tum-sar inni babarras o babosa. 
Inni tuppono mini inipaita ja aukat 
o Deos pana torro boa, mach6 ta 
Apostel Johannes, alia ta Deos 
pinauss'o choa sjiem natta-sar o 
binodda de ta mini, alia mamorich 
ja namo inni icho-sar. §0-0 mar- 
ach^chimit ta David pizich o choa 
tsjes o madas o tataap o ri6 talcho 
a mato, inni raraid o manna-achpil 
a teis natorroa adassa na-a tsjes i 
ta Jehova, macho so-o tapos o ai 
lallum ina choa naan o ma-achi- 
mit, adassa na-a tsjes i ta Jehova, 
so-o hai poach o choa tataap o ri6. 
Tamasea mabono tapos oa arapies, 
tamasea patausono tapos oa dig-oe. 
Tamasea parras oa morich, depa 
moribal, tamasea summammisam 
ijonoe o rio o tsjes a bo. 

Kanarroa, torrodden o tassono 
autat o gagil inni atil o mini, o 
ai marach o morich o ma-£chon- 
sar, so-o romaroman asosono Deos. 
Autat o gagil paga maibas o rim'o 
tsjes-oe, ino arach o tapos, o 
ai passoso ta Deos. Pagatomma 
Deos passoso, so-o pe'o baak o choa 
asoso, pagatomma babosa mauchus 
merab, so-o meach'aicho-ies, alii 
marach o charri o ai, sja marotul 




Instruction 



97 



o autat inni Deos, marotul o autat 
inni ranicd o Dcos, marotul o 
autat o gasil choa tsjes. Mach^ o 
Deos mialro autat o ai, alia chum- 
mad o choa asoso a ai-a. Ma-autat 
a cho ma-£rach, sja ineach'i ta Deos 
inni autat o gagil^ so-o kamaibas 
o choa airab. Tapos o ai ma- 
meach'oa annoggonoggono, oet- 
autatta alia mamarach, so-o allccho 
ean ja imo macho ta Christus. 
Inau decho ja maukat o morich ai, 
ja maukat o morich i boesum ? 
Ja maukat oa bog a tsjes morich o 
taulaulan, so-o mauchus a rio ? 
Oetautatta inni Deos o gagil, 
so-o choa sjiem ta Jesus Chnstus. 
Asinia, kriella, abicha o ranied o 
DeoSy tupp£ so-o aladikka micho, 
alia rsLxi o ab'o Deos tummillag i 
tsjes. Innaide asini o ranied o 
Deos tummoach o autat a ^ba. 
Autat ai pa^a asosono Deos, ezchi 
ichOy dobdobba, illo-iloa, alia pe'o 
iha, pauab o autat imoa, alia 
madarram icho-noe, alia poet- 
autat inni choa boa, so-o marach 
o morich o ma-^chon-sar, kamai- 
bas o ab'o ranied o ta sjiem o Deos. 
Torro attillan taulan innai atite o 
mini, alia ta Christus paga ma- 
a-i-jor o babosa pana choa tamau, 
tamasea pa-i-jor o ma-autat a cho 
pana boesum, pana ta Deos. 
Karri-azjies ta Deos a babosa, alii 
karri-dadaat inau kakossi. Inau 
decho masabb'o ma-aborra babos'a 
ma-azinado ino aarpanni i ta Deos. 
Ma-aborr'o mini tuppach o Deos 
a babosa paga maunis a tsjes o 
Deos ta Jesus Christus, tamasea 
tsinummoach inni ga o babosa, so-o 
inipaussa de bab'o ta, maibas insini 
maunis-o-ala, alle lummaslas o 



choa tnsLchi. o kakossi o babosa, 
alia simien ta Deos a babos'o choa 
azinado, alia paborr'o choa tamau, 
so-o p^daat i ta Deos o babosa. 
Inau decho rorr6-no padarram o 
babos'o gagil o Deos, so-o choa 
sjiem, o ai pinauss'icho, micho-sar 
a pattite choa micho boa, maibas o 
ma-aborr'o o babosa, innainum- 
m'ija ummior all'inni autat a ab'o 
ta Christus paga gagil o morich, 
morich o ma-£chon-sar, ean o ba- 
bos'icho innai Deos o tamau, alia 
parras o mzchi dechoa, so-o pe'o 
morich o ma-^chon-sar ; kamaibas 
o choa £la, mini-sar paga morich o 
ma-^chon-sar ai, alia madarram ija 
dechonoe natta-sar ai gagil o 
Deos, so-o ta Jesus Christus o ai 
pinauss'ijo. Mabarra ta Christus 
paurich o morich-a so-o macha-da 
ai, inau sjiem o Deos o gagil icho. 
Maibas o tamau paurich, masini 
channumma ta sjiem paurich tama- 
sea merab. Inni ma-aborr'o mini 
torro babosa dummaat i ta Deos, 
so-o madarram icho, maibas torro 
madarram o cho inni choa sisjiem ; 
tamasea minit'ina, minit'o tamau 
channumma, macho ta Christus, 
inau gagil o sjiem o Deos icho, so-o 
tatsar o choa boa, gagil a isas o 
choa tamau o ma-acharrieb. Ani 
maro innai ta Deos, inni ta Chris- 
tus machaddik ja namo. Ani paga 
azjies, inni ta Christus torro sis- 
jiem o Deos, choa aukattan a cho, 
a ari-cddan. Ani karri-azjies ta 
Deos a babosa, inni ta Christus 
karri-aborra dech-onoc. Ani torro 
mori-edd'i ta Deos, inni ta Christus 
torro pacheoach pana choa so-o 
torroa micho tamau. Deech o 
I machote so-o moribal torroa bog a 

N 




o8 



Christian 



tsjes taulaulan i gehenna inau torroa 
arapies, inni ta Christus barrassan 
torro o chachalt o mini, tamasea 
dau i torro minachote o dig a aurtsi 
o gehenna inni bog a tsjes, alia 
chachummalt torroa kakossi. Ka- 
minatis o boesum ja torro, so-o 
morich i boesum inau kakossi, ta 
Christus o choa babisse a mario 
a tataap minarach o boesum o tat- 
taula, so-o paaunis torro aicho-ech. 
Masini inni ma-aborra ta Jesus 
Christus torro marach o babarras o 
kakossi, so-o morich o ma-^chonsar: 
icho pario torroa bog a tsjes inni 
morich o mini, so-o paatsikap i 
namo ino aarpanni i ta Deos, micho- 
sar a pattite pesas'o ummoob o bao 
a isas o choa babisse a chimit inni 
torro boa, pachimit o bog a tsjes, 
alia ka-itis o tataap o arapies, mai- 
bas o sisjiem o Deos torro tummal- 
pon o bao a morich, tummalpon o 
mababat inni tapos o babisse o 
Deos. Pasji ausoan tar ran o mini, 
tarran o babisse a atillono Deos pa- 
i-jor o sisjiem a chono Deos ma-a- 
i-jor ai ta Jesus Christus, so-o pi- 
doro i boesum-ech decho-noe. A til 



o mini paita so-o padarram tomm'- 
ija sisjiem o Deos. Tapos o ai 
ummior i ta Christus, ummior o 
tarran o atill6no Deos, so-o ma- 
babat inni babisse a chimit, maibas 
minababat icho babo ta mini, paga 
gagil o sisjiem o Deos. Maibe^ 
sar pala, na-a sisjiem masini na-a 
char-sar, so-o ina madarram dechoa, 
so-o ummior ina decho-noe, so-o 
ina pe*i decho morich o ma-£chon- 
sar. Kanarroa, ja ta Christus 
paga ma-a-i-jor o sisjiem, o Deos, 
ja icho pait'o tarran pana boesum, 
maibas inipaba o pia, mai, atil o 
mini maspot a pizich imoa tsimi- 
chicr i ta Christus inni oa morich, 
alia masini o choa char-sar, so-o 
mabaddabadd'o o tattorroddan 
ochoa morich. Masini o gagil 
sasummossono tarran i boesum, 
sja a-ummior o kakirrich o choa 
ranicd, sja ma-machon-sar o ma- 
babat inni tattallas o choa asiel-sar. 
Micho ja maukat a ina alia ta 
Deos passoso imoa inau ta Jesus 
Christus choa aukattan a sjiem 
badda, Amen. 



FIFTH SERMON. John xvi. 23. 



A Ukattan a ma-akakriel. 
-^^ Maibas o sisjiem o babosa 
meach'o tamau a tanai, so-o pab'i 
decho, sja masabb'o inochan, ja 
romaroman,so-o babosa pagatomma 
mab*o tump'o choa sisjiem, so-o 
merab o maunis pea, alii makarrichi 



o sisjiem sja decho sai meacha; 
kasjabaan maso maukat o sisjiem, 
maso maukat o pea, inau um-illo- 
ilono meacha, so-o maibas o dumbor 
o pea dechonoe. Masini maso 
makkesjap o babos'o ai tummoach 
de ta mini barrabarraan so-o ma- 




Instruction 



99 



asabba, pab*o tamau de boesum 
choa sabba. so-o meach'i ta Deos 
tapos o ai masabb'ija decho. Inau 
ta Deos pagatomma ma-al-£l a 
tsjes ichO) so-o merab o maunis 
pea, maukat o annoggonoggo a 
aiacha, so-o merab alia babosa 
madarram o choaal-al, airicho paga 
ma-a-daldal a ma-ai-a so-o chuppod 
o gagil o tapos rio, alia babosa 
dummauko o boesum pana tamau 
o rar^, innai tamasea sai tapos 
asosono mario airum-illo-ilono 
meacha, so-o paspot i ta Deos o 
choa ai-acha. Maibas pab'ija ta 
sjiem o Deos, each^ macho, so-o 
allecho, ean, ja imo. $adda-na 
so-o ta tummala tokkana, so-o 
allecho tannaanni ja imo. $0-0 
inni atite o minisar icho pizich 
o choa aran tschiet narroa cho, 
meach'i ta Deos choa tamau, inau 
gagil allecho ean tapos o ai, decho 
mameach'inni choa naan. Annach, 
annach, ina pala ja imoa. macho, 
alia tapos o ai mameacho tamau 
inni na-a micho naan, o ai icho 
pape'imonoe. Ta Christus insini 
patorrod o naspat a tuppo inni 
ai-acha. Kapcsasa, alia torro 
maspot a meach'i ta Deos o tamau 
de boesum. Kanarroa, alia maspot 
a meach, o Deos o tamau inni 
naan o choa sjiem. Kanatorroa, 
numm'ija makkesjap o meach'i ta 
Deos. Kanaspat, alia maspot a 
meacha inni autat o gagil. Ai-acha 

Sga sasaod o tsjes katinnaam o 
eos. Ranied pallil o baak, sja 
alli ummior so-o pissarra tsjes a 
tattuppa. Tinnaam ai-acha torro 
maspot a mabissas, so-o ummalap- 
pono tsjes a tattupa pana ta Deos 
i boesum. Maspot a maba, alb 



torro sabanno mai meacha, turn- 
moach katinnaam o Deos, tamasea 
mialla, so-o mab'o tattupp'i tsjes. 
Malleak o ai-acha ta Deos o ai 
bossot innai dorren, alli tummoach 
innai-de tsjes. Chono mini mach6 
dummaat ina o choa ranied, so-o 
madas ina o choa dorren, so-o 
maro ja choa tsjes innai ina-e. 
Inau micho torro maspot a miel 
depa mortatach, ja molappa torroa 
tsjes a tattuppa. Torroa rima a 
rorro alappoon pana bab6, sabanno 
torro tummalpon o meacha, paita, 
alia torro maspot a dumbor so-o 
pauss'o tattuppa pana boesum, alia 
tump'i ta Deos, alia tump'o ranied 
o ai-acha, so-o tuppono ai, torro 
merab o meach'i ta Deos. Mak- 
kesjap channumma, alia katinnaam 
ai-acba torro tummis o asies o 
tsjes, so-o dummaat i ta Deos inni 
atirtir a ikkil, ma-arich inau torroa 
kakossi. Malleak o chono ma- 
asies a tsjes ta Deos, so-o pait'o 
chono ma-a-arich a ma-a-sabba 
choa b6. Kanatorroa, maspot a 
maba, alia kakossi simien ta Deos 
a babosa, so-o miel o ai-acha depa 
pasji boesum pana ta Deos, tamasea 
alli masini o chono ma-achachuppir, 
o ai moddon o tsjes, so-o chumpir 
o cho'atillo. Kasjabaan maukat o 
zichil inau kakossi, so-o mabo 
chono ma-azichil a tsjes, tamasea 
machi'o kakossi, so-o ummior o 
bisse-bisse o Deos. Inau micho 
torro maspot a tummis o arapies 
o tsjes, so-o tapos o tataap o 
kakossi, alia mai meach'i ta Deos 
inni chimit o tsjes. Ka-ochal 
ipaba moeda torro maspot a 
mabissas o tsjes tinnaam ai-acha, 
ummior o naspat a tuppo ino 




lOO 



Christian 



ipatorrod inni ai-acha. Kapesasa, 
pab'ija ta Christus, alia choa aran 
maspot a meach'i ta Deos o tamau 
de boesum. Tapos o ai mameach'o 
tamau, macho. Icho pattonan o 
tamau insini, o gagil o Deos, 
tamasea minerien o mini tapos ai, 
so-o maibas o tamau porich o 
tapos o babosa. Torro patapos 
paga natta-sar a tamau, so-o 
nattasar a Deos minerien torro 
patapos, macho ta ma-aijaab 
Malachias. Kamaunionis icho 
pattonan o tamau, bo*o pesasa inni 
ga o Deossar, so-o madarram o 
pattonan icho-noc choa micho 
tamau, inau pinausjiem o narroa- 
da boa inni ga o Deos ta Jesus 
Christus, gagil a isas so-o tatsar o 
choa micho boa. Ta Christus 

Eattil o choa aran meach'i ta 
)eos, so-o pa-i-jor i decho pana 
choa tamau, inau ma-^kammichi 
makkesjap ino eachanni ta Deos. 
Mab'o tapos o ai, masini o ai-acha 
dc tapos o ta. Kamabar'iia ta|X)s 
o ai, so-o ma-^bo a tsjes, alia 
tummo cho*a-oIIi-eul o babosa, 
maibas pab'ija ta Christus inni 
ramied o Evangelium Mathei ; 
tomm'ija babosa, macho, paga 
lallum imoa, sja choa sjiem 
mameach'ichono uppo, alia pape'- 
ichono bato, so-o sja mameach'- 
ichono tsi, alia papc ichono ibien. 
Ocdan, sja imoa, o ai paga rapies, 
mab'o pe'o asosono mario oa 
sisjiem, maso masanno oa tamau, 
tamasea paga dc boesum papc'o 
asosono mario, chono ai meach'ija 
icho aicho-ies kasjabaan pa ja 
a-olli-eul inni Deos o baak. 
Chubbocn tsjes tapos choa aran, 
tamasea summad'i decho. Ma- 



meach'i ta Jehova oa Deossar, so-o 
allecho aran icho ma-akammichisar, 
macho ta Christus. Kanarroa-da 
tuppo inni ai-acha pait'o azinadono 
ta Jesus Christus, so-o pab'ija alia 
maspot a meach'o Deos o tamau 
inni naan o choa sjiem : tapos o ai 
mameach'o tamau inni na-a micho 
naan, mach6 : micho-sar a pattite, 
inau na-a-da boa so-o azinado. 
Ta Deos a babosa kamauchus 
maro. Inau decho simien ta 
Christus alia karri-dadaat dechoa 
inni choa-da boa, o ai machaddik 
o choa tamau maibas o sjiem o 
Deos, so-o machaddik o babosa, 
maibas o sjiem babosa, rorr6-no 
Deos a babos'inni natta-da boa, 
so-o inau decho matsikap o 
pazinado tuppach o Deos a babosa. 
Masini Deos o tamau dummaat 
o babosa, masini o ai-acha so-o 
annoggonoggo - no inni choa 
aukattan a sjiem, tamasea tallochon 
pazinado i namo de tamau ai. 
Maukat o cho sjiem tamau, so-o 
tallochon masini icho, so-o inau 
choa azinado maukat channumm o 
chono ai poetautat inni choa sjiem, 
so-o masini o choa ai-acha. Micho 
babosa maspot a maba, soro 
tallochon tump'inni ai-acha, sja 
merab o meach'i ta Deos charri 
o ai, alia meach*icho-noe inni naan 
o choa sjiem, so-o inau choa 
azinado. 

Gachanni o baak ta Deos, alii 
ma-£rach o babosa, sja alii tummo- 
ach o ai-acha innaide autat inni ta 
sjiem o Deos, sja marotul o choa 
azinado. Mini-sar choa pab'o aran 
ta Christus, acho mincach*inni naa 
micho naan, mach6 : each£, so-o 
mamarach, alia matapo ja oa 




Instruction 



lOI 



aukat-ech. Ta Christus ochoa 
azinado tummaklcoop o aulakies 
inni ai-acha, so-o patoach aicho 
inni choa naan tinnaam o choa 
tamauy alia mabasso ja, so-o mar- 
ach. Ummior o natorroa-da tup- 
po ino torrodden inni ai-acha, 
numm'ija makkesjap o meach'i 
ta Deos. 

Tapos o ai mameach o tamau, 
macho ta Christus. Torro babosa 
marotui o tapos rio inni torroa bog 
inni torroa tsjes^ so-o tapos aso- 
sono mario kasai innaide babo, 
innaide tamau o rari. Inau decho 
ta Christus inni atite o mini 
tapos o aiy pauss'o meach*o choa 
tamauy tapos o ai masabb'ija namo. 
Mapan a mato torroa sabba. Mar- 
otui o aba so-o autat inni ta Deos 
torroa tsjes, marotui o chimit a 
babisse o Deos. Micho ja pattil 
o meacha ta Christus inni ai-acha, 
namoa tamau. Masabb'o inochan 
so-o romaroman torroa bog. Micho 
channummaatillan ja namo meacha 
inni atite o mini : £pe-e namono 
piadai torro uppo ma-atsikap. Torro 
masabb'o a-olli-eul o Deos so-o 
choa aladik. Inau decho attillan 
torro meacha, barras'i namo innai 
rapics ai. Mapan ja tuppo, ino 



eachan. Mauroma-roman asosdno 
bog a tsjeSy maibas o inochan, oetas, 
ma-allas a boesum, naupoot ino 
takkoban o bog, binnas, roos a sis- 
jiem ma-allas a tsies, morich o 
ma-ilip, ab'o saan, no o tsjes, ab'o 
Deos, autat a ikkil o Deos, arra, 
aukat o tsjes, kakoeno, tattalattal'o 
ta auchar o ma-achimit inni zichil 
o rapies. Tapos o ai, so-o roman 
maibas aicho, makkesjap ino eachan. 
Inni naspat a tuppo pab ija ta Chris- 
tus alia babosa naspat a meacha inni 
autat o gagil. Inau decho pachip 
o atite annach, so-o pala manawas 
annach, annach, alia miel o armi- 
mi, so-o pizich i namo didden o poet- 
autat inni ai-acha. Machi o Deos 
miall'o autat ai inni ai-acha. Ta- 
masea meicha, alia meach'inni 
autat-ech, macho ta Apostel Jaco- 
bus, inau tamasea marmimi, paga 
maibas o badono abas, o ai itis 
bab6 rap6 imaide barri ai-oe. 
Inau decho hai pesar masini a ba- 
bosa, alia mamarach o charri o ai 
innai Deos-sar. Aninman-a mina- 
sini o tuppo-no ai-acha; aladikka 
o atite i tsjes all'ailo padarram imoa 
meach'i ta Deos. Acho madarram 
o meacha, eachd, alia marach. 

Jac. Vertrecht. 





I02 Sek-hoan Dialect 



*^* The foregoing sheets had just been printed when a communication 
was received from Rev. D. Ferguson, M.A., of the English Presbyterian 
Mission in Formosa, which may be inserted here. It is dated Tainanfu, 
31st March 1896, and was sent in reply to a request that he would have 
the Lord's Prayer written out in the language now spoken by the Toa-sia 
aborigines ; Toa-sia being the name of a Township about fourteen miles 
north of the city of Chiang-hoa. Hundreds of families of this same tribe 
are also found among the villages of the Pawsia Plain, some two days' 
journey to the east of Chiang-hoa. The version he sends is as follows : — 

THE LORD'S PRAYER IN THE PRESENT-DAY SEKHOAN 

DIALECT OF FORMOSA. 

Niam a A-bah kai-dih ba bau ka-wuss. 
Ni-suh a la-ngat tsah, ma sii-zau-u hau riak. 

Pa-pang-a-sai ni-suh-ah ki-nii la-an. 

Pa-pa i ta-du-i ki-ni-siu-a li-ni ^-dan, di-ni da-^^iih hai-ki, ba bau ka- 
wuss. 

Ba-;^ei'au-no da-li-o nu-sau-a ki-na-sa-de-lan yam-i-kah, i-la a na pi-ter- 
iit-o niam-a-ki-na sa-de-lan. 

A-na pa-pa ;^i-ta-lam-i yam-mi-a ai-za sei-sei. 

Tu-tul-i niam-mih pa-ter-ia-di de-sa-del. 

Hhamoh ki-nii la-an, wa-riit %i-na ria-ria-kan, ka kai-i-swoan da-duah, 
mau sei-o ma-si-lo ba-zu ba-zoach. 

Lai-ki niam-a hi-niss-a ^i-na la-tii-dan. 

Mr. Ferguson remarks on the above : — * A good many of the brethren 
helped in making this translation, especially A-sin, Hau-hi, A-iam, Ta-mu- 
li, Aw-hoan and Bau-keh. Every petition is kept separate, and begins with 
a capital. The letter " ii " is pronounced as in German, " % " as in Greek, 
and ^^ Hh " as a somewhat aspirated form of the single letter. Several words 
had to be translated in a roundabout way, as they have no such expressions 
as " kingdom," " hallowed," " glory," " will," and one or two others.' 




DIALOGUE 



Between A 



JAPONES E 



AND A 



FORMOSAN, 

About Some Points of 

The Religion of the Time. 



By G. P 



tn 



r. 



Fabula- 



■^id rides- 



LONDON: 

Printed for Bernard Lintott 
at the Crofs-Keys next Nando s 
CofFee-Houfe, Fleetjlreet. 1707. 




THE PREFACE. 



^HE chief Thing I purpofe in 
the following LineSy is to vin- 
dicate the Japonefes from that un- 
ju/i Charaeier this Part of the 
World is f leafed to give them^ viz. 
of being a People much given to 
SuperJIition. What Reafons they 
had who firji fpoke fo of them^ I 
cannot telly but this I am fure of 
that no People under the Sun are 
farther from it than they arey as 
will more filly appear by the follow- 
ing Dialogue, 

*Tis true indeedy the meaner fort 

of People are wholly led by Prieji- 

crafty and fo are made to believe 

what the Bonzes pleafe ; But as 

for the finer and better Sorty they 

would have you to know they fcorn 

to captivate their Reafons to a few 

Writings of their Law-giverSy con- 

firued and altered [as they humbly 

conceive) by the Prieflsy whofe In- 

terejl is to keep People in the greate/l 

Ignorance and Subjection. 

I hope therefore that my fetting of 
*em in a fair Lighty will be taken 



by the World as a great Argument 
of my Candor and Generofity ; and 
having this Colloquium frejh Jlill 
in my Memoryy which I know will 
go a great Way by far in vindi- 
cating them than all I could fay of 
my own Heady I thought it would 
agree better with the Character I 
hope to gain by thisy to publijh it juji 
as I heard //, becaufe you have here 
the Japanner Jianding up for his 
Nationy as well as himfelfy and alfo 
a Formoian making his Objections 
with the Japonefe's Jnjwers to 
them ; fo that the whole Matter 
being jujlly and impartially laid 
before yoUy the Reader may the 
better judge as he Jhallfee meety and 
that I take to be the only hone^ 
way of dealing with Readers, 

jfnd I muji confefsy that tM I 
was Confcious of my Ignorance of 
the Englifh Tongue, yet I would by 
no means fujfer any Body to methodize 
or correct //, becaufe I was afraid 
left the Reader Jhould hence find 
Occafion of fufpeCling the Sincerity 




io6 



The Preface 



dfmy Narrative. Wherefore I here 
muft beg of him to excufe all the 
Faults hejhallfind in the Language^ 
which he cannot reafonahly expert a 
Stranger to be free from^ efpecially 
in fuch a refined one^ as the Engliih 
at prefent is. 

I flatter my felf with the HopeSy 
that it will be not a little entertain- 
ingj the ^e/iions therein handled 
bearing fo near a Refemblance to the 
Difputes^ which make fo much Noife 
here at prefent. yi«7//f/^?Japanner, 
who out of meer friendjhip and kind^ 
nefs comes to free a Man from the 
Bondage of Priejlcrafi^ Prejudice^ 
and Ignorance; and on the other 
ftde^ you 7/ fee a Formofan, like a 
willing Prifonery endeavouring to 
bring his Friend unto the fame 
Condition as he is himfelf; and 
both uftng all the Arguments they 
are Mafiers of towards effecting 
their Defign. 

However^ that the Reader may 
not expert more of me than he is 
likely to find at the long run^ and fo 
be obliged to throw away the Book 
in a Furyy it will be very necejfary 
to tell himy that tho' I was fo for- 
tunate to be prefent at the opening 



of the Conference^ yet I was unluckily 
calPd away upon fame very earnefi 
Bufinefsyfo that I could not flay for 
the Conclufion^ which was however 
fo near at Handy that if he will 
take the fame Liberty of guejjing 
as I have done^ he^U be able to find 
out which way the FiSiory turned: 
However^ Uwill fiill anfwer my 
Defign^ which is to vindicate the 
Japanner when the Reader obferves 
him all along arguing not like a 
Bigoty but like a Man of a free 
born Underftanding. 

One favour more I muft beg of my 
Reader^ isy that if he finds either 
of my Difputants to be out in his 
Logick, Philofophy, or Divinity, 
he would not think the worfe of me^ 
or think me guilty of the fame Errors 
in my private Opinions ; as v.g. if 
one of them Jhould happen to affirm 
Fire to be hoty contrary to the 
Modern PhilofopherSy who affirm it 
to be cold: For as I have refohed 
not to omit any of their Arguments^ 
or diminijh the Strength of V»i, fo 
neither will I add any thing to it ; 
but fuch Blunders as they fhall 
commity let them anfwer for them- 
fehes. 




A DIALOGUE 



Between A 



yaponefe and a Formofan 

About fome Points of The Religion of the Time, 




IR, you are heartily wel- 
come to Formofay it is 
fo long fince we were 
bleft with your Com- 
pany, that I almoft defpair'd ever 
of enjoying it again. 

yaponefe. 

Sir, I value yours fo much, that 
had I not been detain'd by Bufi- 
nc6, I had not been fo great a 
Stranger : But to tell you the 
IVuth, I fell into the Acquaint- 
ance of fome Gentlemen of great 
Parts, who made me freely ac- 
quainted with fome new Notions 
of theirs which put me for fome 
time into a brown ftudy, till at 
laft, partly by their help, and 
partly by my own Application, I 
came to fettle my Mind on the 
Matter. 

Formofan. 

Now you talk of Learned Men, 
pray give me leave to aflc you how 
your friend does ? 

yaponefe. 
Meaning who ? 



Formofan. 

Why, the Prieft that was here 
laft time with youj do not you 
remember ? 

yaponefe. 

Oh yes! Why I think he's well; 
but have feen him but once fince 
I was here laft: For vou muft 
know we fell out migntily that 
time upon certain Points of Re- 
ligion ; and I believe never will be 
reconciled ; at leaft I never will 
with him, whatever he does with 
me. 

Formofan. 

How, &llen out with a Prieft ? 
I am forry for that, with all my 
Heart. I thought vou had more 
Refpe£l for Men of his Robe and 
Dignity. 

yaponefe. 

A Fig for their Dignity and all 
that belongs to them \ thejr fhall 
never catch me with fuch Chimeras 
again, I '11 promife you \ I have 
been their Fool and Slave long 
enough, to mv (bame be it fpoken ; 
but now, I tnank my Stars, I am 




io8 



Psalmanazar's 



grown a little wifer, and have (hook 
off the Toak, and fet my felf free 
from their pretended Authority ; 
and to be plain with you, this is 
the very Buflnefs : thcfe Gentle- 
men I was telling you of, com- 
municated me, and which indeed 
did give me no little Trouble -, but 
I am at prefent fo fatidied of the 
Prieft's Confidence in claiming any 
Authority, that I wonder how any 
Man can be fo beibtted as to ac- 
knowledge it. Neither is this my 
Opinion only, but alfo that of the 
greateft Wits of our Age; tho' 
indeed, I muft own, it never broke 
out fo plainly as it has done within 
thefe Two Years, yet you muft 
needs think it had been a long 
while a brewing before. 

Formo/an. 

This is a fudden alteration in- 
deed, and fuch as I little dreamed 
of; but for G — d's lake, Sir, do 
you confider what you are a doing ? 
Do not you know that Priefts derive 
their Authority from the Law- 
givers, and their Law-givers from 
God ? So that you cannot deny 
that of the one, without rebelling 
at the (ame time againft the Two 
others. 

yapone/e, 

Pho ! One may fee plain 
enough : You live in a Land of 
Darknefs and Ignorance, wholly 
influenced by Prieft-craft ; were 
you but to live 3 Months in Tedo 
or Meakoy you would fee what a 
refined Air we live in ; and I don't 
doubt but the changing of Climate 
would make you alter your Notions. 



You cannot go into any Book-feller's 
Shop, but you fee there fbme Books 
againft the Authority of the Priefb ; 
nay, even of the Law-givers them- 
felvcs ; fo that in a Ihort time, I 
hope, we'll fend them both a 
packing, which Work, if once 
done, will immortalize this Gene- 
ration ; infomuch, that I would 
not for the whole Empire be to be 
born in the next. 

Formofan. 

Nay if thefe be the EflFe£b of 
your Climate, I'll e'en tarry at 
Home. 

yapomfe. 

You may do what you pleafe for 
that, but I '11 afTure you what I (ay 
is pofitivcly true ; and the Autho- 
rity of the Law-givers as well as 
of the Priefts is finking down as &ft 
as 

Formofan. 

You fill me with wonders, I 

proteft What, all the Writings 

of the Law-givers which have been 
fo long in the greateft Veneration 
and Credit, oppofed now with fuch 
Violence? I thought it was fo 
well grounded, and fo univer(ally 
received, fo well confirm'd by 
Miracles, that it was not in the 
Power of Man to overthrow it. 
But pray what Arguments do they 
make ufe of to overthrow the 
Authority of fuch great Men as 
Amidoy Xakhay Cambadoxi^ and the 
reft, who have ever been reverenc'd 
as Gods from the Time of their 
leaving the World ? And what 
do the Priefb fay to all thefe ? Do 



Dialogue 



109 



they not op|>ore it with all their 
Strength mid Might ^ I fhould 
think 'tis their Intercft as well as 
their Duty. 

There have been a few who 
have endeavoured to do it, but 
after fuch a way, that it does more 
Good than Diflervice to our Caufc. 
The generality of them hold their 
Tongues \ but however, this is 
agreed on by all the judicious Per- 
fons, that our Arguments are un- 
anfwerablc. 1 mould have told 
you, that there is one (not a 
I'riefl) who pretends to anfwer it 
not all at once, but piece by piece ; 
viz. to Day one, to Morrow 
another 1 but his Charadlcr is 
already fo blacicned 

Formafan. 
I fupiwfe by fomc of your Party 
on purpofe to render him odioutt, 
and fo hinder People from rcadijig 
his Papers. But pray what are 
thcfe Arguments of yours, that 
you fay all judicious rerfons own 
to be unanfwerable, how do you 
know but if they appear fo to me 
I 'U be one of your Profelytes ? 

Japmrfi. 

My Arguments ! You miflake 
me, Sir, I do not give them you as 
tny own, neither would I have you 
to think that I am of their Muid, 
for they go upon one Ground and 
1 uiran another : BcfiJes, 1 don't 
carry the thing fo far by half as 
they do, I do allure you j but how- 
ever you (hall hear what they fay. 

Firfl lays one, if the Writings 



of jfmida^ Xakha, Cambadoxi, and 
other Law-givers do give the leaft 
Authority to the Priefts over the 
People, then we may fafely fay, 
they are of their own inventing j 
or elfc thefe Law-givers in the 
Head of being encouraged and 
admired while alive, and deified 
and worlhipped after their Deaths, 
dcferved rather to be punifhcd and 
made to fufTer the moll ignominious 
Deaths that ever Slave was put to, 
as being Ufurpers of that Power 
lodg'd in every Man. 

Farmsfan. 

What Power do they mean ? 
yaponifi. 

Why, Sir, you muft know they'll 
have it to be, that neither Kings, 
nor God himfcif hasany Power over 
Men, but what they have receiv'd 
from them. Now what do you (ay 
to this f 

Fermofan. 

So then God's Dominion and 
Power over us is as much denied 
as that of the Priefts j Is it not 
what I told you from the firft, 
th.it we could not refufc our Sub- 
million to the latter, without turn- 
ing Rebels to the former f How- 
ever, t did not much wonder 
at People rebelling againll the 
Priefts. But that Men Ihould 
attack God's Authority fo pub- 
lickly, is fomething airtazing to 
me. For I never thought that 
Men in their Senfes would go to 
deny that as they had to their Coft 
To often felt ; I mean the Judge- 
ments he has Tent to Men for their 




no 



Psalmanazar^s 



Sins. The Chinefes tell us of an 
univerial Flood : We can pro- 
duce fome fuch Puniihments in 
our Hiftory; and as for yours, it 
is brimful of 'em. Now this is a 
certain Sign of God*s Power over 
us, therefore either we muft fay, 
that it was evilly gotten, namely, 
by Ufurpation ; or elfc we muft 
fubmit to it. 

Besides, Reaibn as well as the 
Writings of the Law-givers tells 
us indeed, that God did give us 
Being, but not that he did give us 
any rower over it, and much lefs 
that we gave it back again ; and if 
we have not this Power in us, how 
can we pretend to give it to Kings, 
or any Body elfe ? No Body can 
give what he has not himfclf. 

But ferther, granting that 
Reafbn goes very near to tell us, 
that we have a power over our 
fclves J yet if the Writings of our 
Prophets, whom we have all the 
Reafbns in the World to believe 
were fent from God, do aflure us 
of the contrary ; ought not our 
Reafbn to give place to them ? 
Befides, that fame Reafon that tells 
me I have that Power, tells me 
alio, that he who gave me Being, 
gave me that Power over it ; and 
if (b he can take it from us when 
ever he pleafcs : So that which 
way foever we look, we*ll find 
Goirs Power and Authority to be 
over all his Works. 

One thing I wonder mightily at, 
is, that neither the Emperor, nor 
the High Pricfts fhould hinder fuch 
Dodlrines from taking Ground : 
For, if People are once perfwaded 
that the rower of Kings and 



Priefts is derived from the People, 
nothing can hinder them from 
withdrawing it when ever they 
fee Occafion ; fo that neither of 
*em can be fafe on their Thrones. 

Then as to the Argument, vi%. 
that if the Writings of Amidoy &c. 
does give any Power to the Pricfb, 
then it is of*^ their own inventing, 
is to me not only a very bold, but 
alfo a moft fcnues lefi Aflertion. 
For how is it poffible, that fuch a 
Nation as yours fhould have all 
thefe Stories impofed upon you by a 
few Priefb; nay, not only yours, 
but alfb other neighbounng Na- 
tions, fuch as China^ Tartary, &c., 
in a Time when Learning feemed 
to flourifh in every one of 'em, 
ere£led, and made other Countries 
ere£l Statues to thefe pretended 
Gods; fuppofe their Writings, 
which, as it might be made appear 
the Chinefes themfelves copied while 
the Authors of them were alive, 
all thefe and fcveral other Circum- 
ftances make it a Demonftration to 
me, that it was not in the Power 
of the Priefts to put fuch notorious 
Cheats upon fo niany Nations 
together. 

Neither can it be faid, that the 
Priefls did alter thefe Writings; 
for as I told you before, fo many 
other People having had Copies 
of 'em ever fince ; and fince they 
do all agree, it is unreafonable to 
think that ever they did fufFer the 
leaft Corruption. 

Befides, do but confider the 
various Sc£h, that are and have 
been in Japan ever fince the 
Departure of the Law-givers, 
which Se£b are in continual Dif- 




Dialogue 



III 



putes one with another about 
(bme Points of Religion. Thefe 
Difputes do not arife from any 
Difference of the Copies, but from 
the Darknefi of the Writing 
Now had any one of the Se^ 
|one to make any Alteration to 
ferve their Turn, the others would 
have immediately expofed them, or 
done the fame themfelves, neither 
of which can be proved. There- 
fore it muft be owned that thefe 
Writings are the lame that Amida^ 
Xakhoy &c., wrote themfelves. 

And fince it does appear by all 
the Circumftances that accom- 
panied their Lives, as well during, 
as before and after it, that they 
were Men fent from the Great 
God to give Laws, and to efta- 
blifh his worfhip; And fince, as 
I have proved, God has a Power 
over his Creatures, if thefe Pro- 
phets did claim any to themfelves, 
we ought to thinic that they had 
it from God, and that whomfoever 
they did communicate it to, might 
juftly, nay, were bound to exercife 
it in their feveral Stations. Which 
leads me to the reft of the Argu- 
ment, namely, that if Amida^ &c., 
arc the true Authors of thefe 
Writings, they deferved to be put 
to Death for pretending to any 
Authority, or to give it to others ; 
which is indeed a very fevere and 
unjuft Sentence ; For thefe that 
were fent from God muft furely 
know better to whom that Power 
belonged, and confequently could 
lay the furer Foundations ; and 
yet we fee that they were fo far 
from pretending to anv Authority, 
in Matters of Civil Government, 



that they renounced it as contrary 
to their Profeffion ; nay, they 
enjoin'd all their Followers to obey 
thofe that were put in Authority 
over 'em; and fettled the Kings 
Rights upon the beft and fureft 
Foundations that ever were, viz. 
on God*s Authority and Com- 
mands, his Rewards and Punifli- 
ments. Now therefore, (ince all 
the Authority they claim, is only 
concerning Spiritual Matters, can 
any body be lb unjuft as to think 
them guilty of Death? Or fo 
incredulous as to refufe them their 
Obedience, and fliut their Eyes to 
the great Proofs they bring of 
their juft Right to fuch Authority ? 

yaponefe. 

But, Sir, hear what another 
Learned Author bjs to this, 

* There being fuch great Reafons 

* for refpeftmg and reverencing 

* thofe Men who are fent from 

* God ; this might very well have 

* pufhed on fome proua, ambitious 

* Fellows to pretend to fuch 

* Miffion : But however (con- 

* tinueth he) if thefe Men do 

* claim to themfelves any Power 

* over Men, we may jufUy and 

* lawfully fufpe£t them.* 

What I have &id to the laft 
Argument will in fome Meafure 
aniwer this; however, I'll add 
this, that as it is not thefe Men*s 
bare Saying they are fent from 
God, tnat ought to make us 
believe them fo ; neither can fuch 
a filly Exception as that of their 
pretending to fome Authority, be 




112 



Psalmanazar's 



a fufficient Pretence for our re- 
jecting of 'em. Every Man that 
pretends to be fent from God, 
muft do fbmething to confirm his 
Miffion : Wherefore we fee that 
all of 'em have wrought fome kind 
of Miracles, then is it left to us 
to judge whether thefe Miracles 
were real and true ones, fuch as 
none but God, or them whom 
his Hand was with could work, or 
whether they were meer juggling 
Tricks. Now, that there have 
been fome of the latter Stamp, 
every where muft be owned, be- 
caufe they have been diicovered; 
and fome received their Puniih- 
ment in this World. But however, 
this can never be an Argument 
againft the former. What Miracles 
Amiday Cambadoxy^ &c. have 
wrought, is fufficiently known to 
the World, and by every impartial 
Man own'd to be aoove every 
Power but God's. It will be alio 
granted, that God will never help 
Men in fb particular a manner, to 
deceive People, and confirm an 
Impofhire ; it will therefore follow, 
that thefe Prophets challenging a 
Power in Ecclefiaftical Matters, 
can be no fufficient Bulwark 
againft thofe ftrong Proofs given 
us by God himfelf in behalf of 
them. How ridiculous then would 
it look in me, becaufe I believe 
without any (or to fpeak more 
properly) againft all Reafon, that 
I am my own King, and that no 
Body has Power over me, but him 
whom I Rive it to, how foolifli, I 
fay, would it be in me to go to 
deny fuch ftrong Evidence ! Be- 
caufe, forfooth| it contradids that 



Notion of mine, and demands that 
Submiffion of me, which I thought 
I did owe no Body but whom I 
pleafed to give it freely. 

Now farther, I would afk you 
whether you know of any Law- 
giver that did not pretend to this 
Authority, I don't believe you can 
produce one : So then we muft at 
that Rate throw away all manner 
of Revelation, and go to the Play 
of Blind-marf i^buff^ or rather to 
the Children's Play of Hide and 
Seekj we muft ftiut our Eyes to 
this Light we have, and let our 
ftiallow Brains go and look for 
another. Now what can fuch a 
fhort-leg'd Jade as Reafon ridden 
and led by Interefl, Self-love, and 
many other fuch Blind and Sinifter 
Rulers, find, but a Religion fuitable 
to every one of them, and confe- 
quently as far from God as he is 
from them. You fee therefore, 
that while we endeavour to fct 
Reafon free, as we think, we 
rather make her the more a Slave, 
and in the ftead of one Mafter, 
viz. God, we find her Forty ; 
fuch as Pride, Ambition, Interefl, 
Self-love, and Four and Thirty 
more of the like nature. 

To conclude therefore, fince we 
find by woeful Experience, i. how 
fhort-fighted and weak our Reafon 
is, and how unable of it felf of 
finding the right Worfliip of 
God^ and fecondly, that God in 
Compaffion to this our Infirmity, 
did infpire fome Men to come and 
teach it; and has confirm'd their 
Dodlrine with fo many Signs and 
Wonders, fuch as do not leave us 
the leaft Occafion to doubt of it's 




Dialogue 



coming from him ; it will follow, 
that thefe infpired Men, as well as 
their Succeflbrs, not onlv might 
juftly, but alfo were anci are in 
Duty bound to exercife this Au- 
thority which God gave *em in 
their feveral Stations, and all the 
reft are of Confequence obliged to 
obey. 

yaponefe. 

But now, Sir, my laft quoted 
Author will tell you, that the 
Door-keeper of the Temple has as 
much Right to pray, preach, and 
offer (acrifices to God as the beft 
Prieft of 'em all : Therefore they 
(hould in the ftead of boafting of 
their Authority, own themfelves 
no better than Servants hired and 
payed by the People : For doing 
of thefe things that belong to 
God's Worfliip, and fo, any body 
that will may as well be a Prieft 
in his own Family, and perform 
all the Divine Rites there, as well 
as the Prieft at Church. 

Formofan. 
If the foregoing Arguments had 
been (as you faid, all ingenious 
Perfons own) unanfwerable, then 
this would have followed of Courfe. 
But as we have ftated this Power, 
viz, upon the inconteftable Power 
of the Law-giver, which was 
immediately and undoubtedly de- 
rived from God ; their Author had 
as good tell me, that I have as 
much Right to go and fit in the 
Emperor's Privy-Council, or to 
lead his Army, as thofe whom 
he has chofen to it. However, 
not to take too much upon me, 
in pretending to know Religion 



113 

better than vour felf : You may 
fati(He your lelf this way, if by the 
Writings of the Law^giverSj and 
other Authentick Hiftories, it do 
not appear that Amida^ Xakha^ 
&c., chofe themfelves Succeflbrs 
from among their Difciples, whom, 
and whom alone they communi- 
cated this Power to. But on the 
contrary, if it does appear, that 
they gave Power to every one, 
ana that they accordingly made 
ufe of it, then your Hypothefis 
ftands firm enough ; then the 
Door-keeper's Cook-maid can claim 
as much Right as the Prieft : but 
if I miftake not, both the Prophet's 
Writings, and the Hiftory of thofe 
Times tell us auite different 
things : In the Firft we read, that 
they chofe fome Men, whom in a 
particular manner they infefted 
with that Power of Preaching, and 
performing the Ceremonies of 
Divine Worfliip ; and that thefe 
Chofen Men did do the lame to 
others as the Dodrine did propa- 
gate. In the Second we have no 
mention of any particular Con- 
gregation, which was not with a 
rridl, not chofen as a Servant^ 
but ordained by other Priefts in a 
higher Degree, which has con- 
tinued from that time till this. 

Now if you can from what has 
been faid, nnd out your Author to 
be in the right, you had as good 
be of his Mind ftill \ but if the 
contrary, then I would advife you 
to put up that Pride of yours, and 
return to your primitive State, 
and confider that thefe Priefts are 
as Ambafladors from God; and 
confequently ought to keep up 




114 



Psalmanazar^s 



their Dignity and Authority with- 
out bating one jot of it, confidcr- 
ing whom they reprefcnt : And if 
fomc Envoys have been feverely 
puniihed by their Sovreigns, for 
doing of Things unworthy the 
Perfons they reprcfented j much 
more ought thefe Vicegerents of 
God to fear left by their too much 
facility, they make the People 
defpife them. Refpedt we cannot 
(hew 'em too much ; but we can, 
and, I am afraid, generally do (hew 
'em too little. However, this may 
always be faid for us, that 'tis no 
Aftront either to our Reafon or 
our Manhood, to reverence and 
obey the Priefts under the notion 
of Legates of the Almighty ; 
becaufe then all our Submiffion is 
direftly paid to him, whofe Power 
and Authority over us, none but 
Fools and Madmen can call in 
queftion. But, Sir, however I am 
glad to hear of what you told me, 
viz, that thefe were none of your 
Arguments ; and I wi(h they may 
not be your Principles neither : 
But however, tho' you tell me 
you don't carry the Thing fo far 
as thefe Authors ; yet you feem to 
have but a mean Opinion of the 
Priefts, or rather do intirely rebel 
againft their Authority : Where- 
fore I (hould be glad to hear of 
four Complaints againft 'em ; for 
have more reafon to care for 
you than for thofe Gentlemen who 
have drawn you away. 

Japonefe, 

To be plain with you, Sir, what 
thefe Gentlemen and I were 
alledging againft the Prie(k, was 



their impoflng upon Men's Reafons 
things quite contrary to it under 
the notions of Myfteries; which 
they muft be either Fools for 

believing, or Kn s for making 

others believe. And this was the 
Thing that I told my quondam 
Friend that time we fell out; 
whereupon he was (b exafperated 
at what I faid to him, that he 
went away, and never came to me 
again ; and I to be fure was not 
fuch a Fool to go after him. Now 
therefore the Grounds I go upon 
are thefe; the Priefts cannot 
ftretch their Authority beyond the 
fet Bounds of it, witnout turning 
Ufurpers, Tyrants, Deceivers, lie. 
Now when they are once liable to 
all thefe Denominations, they do 
no more anfwer the Intention of 
him that ordained 'em ; and there- 
fore we may (afely deny them 
that Submiffion which they might 
have challenged, had they kept 
within their Compa^. Now that 
they do deferve the afore&id Ap- 
pellations, docs fufficiently appear 
by the Abfurdities they crowd in 
their Creeds ; and oblige every one 
under pain of Damnation moft 
firmly to believe : Therefore, I 
hope, you won't condemn me for 
taking my leave of them. 

Formofan. 

Before we call 'cm all thefe 
odious Names, we ought to con- 
fider 2 Things; Firft, whether 
the Writings on which our Faith 
is grounded, be true or not : If 
they be true, whether they oblige 
us to believe thefe Myfteries under 
pain of Damnation ? For if they 




Dialogue 



do, then the Pricfts affirm no more 
than the Scriptures do. Now as 
for the Truth of thefe Writings, 
I believe we have fufficiently 
fettled ; neither do you feem to 
deny that Point. And as for their 
affirming fuch Do£lrines, any body 
may be fati(Hed that reads them. 

yaponefe. 

What then, if thefe Writings 
do tell me Contradidtions, and 
Things that fhock my Reafon, I 
muft believe them, muft I ? 

Formofan, 

But, Sir, do but fee how your 
great Zeal againft Contradidtions, 
leads you into a notorious one. 
You own thefe Writings to be of 
Authority, and at the fame time fay, 
if they teach me Contradictions ? 
Which is as plain a one as can 
be. 

yaponefe. 

Well then, to fpeak plainer, my 
Opinion is, that God cannot oblige 
us to believe Things contrary to 
Reafon : If therefore there is any 
thing of that nature in thefe Writ- 
ings, I '11 very fiiirly rejeft it. 

Formofan. 

You muft be very fure how- 
ever, that thefe Things propofed 
do imply that Contradi^ion before 
you rejeft them ; for there is no 
doubt, but if you find fault with 
one part of the Writings, you do 
Quite overthrow the Credit and 
Authority of the reft. 

yaponefe. 
I beg your Pardon for that, I 



"5 

may reject one part of them, and 
yet believe the other, as b& as you 
do your whole Creed : For I 
don't think the whole Mais of 
Writings to be of that fame 
Authority. Some there be that 
are undoubtedly and unqueftion- 
ably true, and of Divine Infpira- 
tion ; others that may be reckoned 
Apocriphas, tho' the Priefts would 
make them pafs for Canonical \ 
and there be others, which are 
apparently falfe, which might per- 
haps have been very true and 
Authentick when firft written ; 
but afterwards, cither by the Care- 
lefnefs of the Tranfcriocrs, or the 
Malice of the Keepers, have been 
(b corrupted, that at prefent we 
may lawfully rejedt them as falfe. 

Formofan. 

As to the firft, I can't (ay much ; 
there may be Miftakes committed 
by the Tranfcribers ; yet I ftiould 
think there is yet enough left of 
the Writings in which all Copies 
do agree to prove thefe Dodrines ; 
but as for the latter, vix. of their 
being corrupted by the Keepers, 
(b as to render them liable to Sus- 
picion, I thought I had proved un- 
feafible. But yet, grant all this, 
what Kriterion will you make ufe 
of to know which is which ? That 
feems to me a very difficult matter ; 
and if you can furnifti me with any 
Rules for the diftinguiftiin^ the one 
from the other, eris miht magnus 
Apollo. 

yaponefe. 

Well then, to (hew you I am 
not unprovided with that neither, 




ii6 



Psalmanazar's 



I '11 give you Three Rules, which 
indeed, are not the Produd of my 
Brain ; for I had 'em from one of 
our Party, who wrote fometime 
ago a Book concerning Infpiration. 
The whole would be worth your 
Reading ^ and if you did, I don't 
believe you woula go away with 
your Bigotry, but to the Rules. 

The Firft is, that Amida being 
the greateft Law-river, the greateft 
Demi-eod, and all the reft being 
only Witneffes, as 'twere to him, 
we are obliged to believe no more 
than Amidols own Writings, and 
that with this 

Second Rule, thdt we ought to 
believe no more even of Amida^ 
but what we find all the Copies to 
agree in ; and whatever we find in 
one of the Copies which is not, or 
is otherwife in another, that we 
may fefely rejcft. 

The Third Rule is, that when 
we have fummon'd up all that the 
Copies do agree in, I mean of 
Amida s only j we are bound to 
believe no more of that neither 
than we find agreeable to our 
Reafbn. Now thefe be the Three 
Rules 

Formofan. 

And very good ones too, I pro- 
tcft : But, Sir, do you not per- 
ceive what a Credulous Man you 
are grown, when even you intend 
to be the Reverfe ? you will not 
believe what God has revealed, 
becaufe it feems to you again ft 
your Reafon ? But you can take 
thefe Rules, nay, I am confident a 
greater part of vour Gentlemen, as 
well as your felf, can believe Things 



upon the Authority of another 
Man. Now, what would you 
think if a Man (hould overthrow 
thefe your Rules you depend (b 
much on ? 

yaponefe. 

I fliould think he has at once 
undone what another has been a 
long while a hamering, but that I 
think impoffible. 

Formofan. 

However, 'tis worth aiming at ; 
and to begin, your Author bys 
that Amida being the greateft 
God, and the reft only Witneflcs 
to him ; you '11 believe the former, 
but not the latter \ that 's a Con- 
tradidion : For Firft, before you 
can believe in Amida^ you muft be 
fure that thofe that witnefled of 
him are true Prophets, and do not 
lie : And then how can you un- 
believe that again. 

Secondly, these Witnefles did 
prove the Truth of their Tcfti- 
mony by Signs and Miracles, as 
well as Am'iday and confcqucntly 
their Authority muft be equal, as 
being both confirmed by God ; for 
a Thing, let it be ever fo true, can 
amount to no more than a Truth : 
I '11 allow you therefore that Amida 
is a greater Hero in Dignity, but 
not in Credit than the reft. 

Thirdly, you know very well 
that Amida refers the Authority of 
his Miflion to the Prophets that 
were before him, and bore witnefi 
of him ; fo that if any of the Two 
may be queftioned, it fliould be 
the former. Befides, we fee that 
Amida fpeaks with all the Refped 
in the World of thefe Law-givers, 




Dialogue 



commends them, and in (hort, 
bears as much witnefe of them as 
they did of him : Now that a 
Man may be miftaken in another 
Man, may be well (aid ; but that 
a Prophet infpired by God (hould 
give a good Charafter to an Im- 
poftor, is abfurd ; therefore the 
Authority of both, depending fo 
much upon one another, we cannot 
pull out one of the Pillars without 
bringing the whole Houfe upon 
our Heads. 

As to your Second Rule, viz. 
that you 11 have all the Copies 
agree in one Article before you 
believe it, I'll tell you what the 
Confcquence of it will be ; you 
muft firft take the Trouble to 
romage all the extant Copies, 
compare them very exaftly, which 
by the way is no eafy tafk, before 
you can fettle your Religion ; 
which, when done, may be in a 
little time altogether deftroyed : 
For it is but bribing fome Book- 
fellers or Tranfcribers to make a 
new Copy, contradifting one of 
your fettled Articles ; then off 
muft it go out of the Book, till at 
laft by throwing out one Article 
after another, you proceed Reli- 
gionlefs. 

And your Third Rule, viz. of 
believing nothing but what is 
agreeable to your Reafon, is as 
comical a one as ever was invented : 
For firft, if it is a true one, and 
may be depended on, what need is 
there for the Two foregoing ones ? 
If you '11 believe nothing but what 
appears to you reafonable, you 
need not trouble your felf who it 
is that writ thcfc Things, nor 



117 



whether the Copies do agree in : 
For let the Author be who he 
will, let the Copies contradid one 
another ever fo much, what is 
agreeable to Reafon, will be fo ftill 
for all that, and confequently will 
challenge our Belief. 

idly, this is afmuch as if you 
fhould fay, I '11 believe no more of 
thefe Law-givers than I will of 
any other Man, nay, left: For 
when to my knowledge, you have 
been told by feveral Men, that in 
very cold Countries they had feen 
the Water grow fo hard, that a 
Cart went over it : You have 
bcliev'd it upon the Honefty of 
thefe Relators ; tho' I don't know 
how you 'U make this and Reafon 
agree. 

If fo, what need have you to 
talk fo much of Infpiration, Divine 
Authority, Vc. fince it appears by 
this Rule that Amiday Xakha^ and 
whofoever do pretend to anv, may 
e'en go whiftle with it : aflbon, if 
not rather believe any honeft Men, 
as you will them with all their 
Divine Infpiration. You had as 
good therefore coin your Three 
Rules into this one, viz. That we 
are not obliged to make a DiftinSfion 
between a Man fent from Gody and 
an hone/i Learned Many that /peaks 
of his own Head ; but believe as 
much of either as our Reafon will 
admit. 

What neceffity was there then 
for God's working fo many and 
great Miracles, to confirm the 
Doftrine he revealed unto us, if 
after all, it is left to every body to 
fcrve it as People do a Market, 
chufe what beft pleafes their 




ii8 



Psalmanazar's 



Palate, and leave the reft for le6 
nice Cuftomers; we might all 
have done that without the help 
of one fingle Miracle. 

Farther, if God defigned to 
reveal nothing to us but what was 
agreeable to our Reafon, then that 
very Revelation was needlefs ; for 
our Reafon could have found it 
out of it felf: But however, let 
that pais as a Suppoiition, becaufe 
it is not much to the prefent 
purpofe whether it may be true or 
no ; this will however follow, that 
without the Help of any Super- 
natural Conviftion, we might have 
given our Aflent to fuch rcafonable 
Propofitions. 

My Opinion therefore is, that 
thcfe Law-givers were to declare 
to us fomething above Reafon ; for 
which the Power of Working 
Miracles was given them, that 
they might challenge our Belief 
to a Thing which Reafon doth 
not comprehend ; which when dc- 
clar'd unto us, we muft not cxpcft 
to underftand better than before ; 
they will be above our Reach ftill, 
as the men who told you of the 
Water growing hara in cold 
Countries ; they gained indeed 
your A/Tent as to the matter of 
Fa<St ; but as to the manner how, 
they left you as ignorant as they 
found you. 

Befides, you muft own that the 
Name of Myjlery is ufed in the 
Writings of the Law-givers ; under 
what Notion muft we underftand 
it ? Can we fay, that what they 
call great and high Myfteries, arc 
only Things agreeable to Reafon, 
but only more Sublime than the 



common Truths? Still does not 
this anfwer the Notion of Myftery. 
Let us therefore conclude, that 
when the Priefts do teach us any 
thing that is above our Reafon, 
under the Notion of Myfteries, 
they do no more than the Law- 
givers themfelves have done : And 
if thefe Dodlrines were Myfteries 
to them that had, befldes Divine 
Infpiration, a great many other 
Advantages we want, well may 
they be fo unto us, and well may 
we be thought very prefumptious 
to rdedl them, becaufe our fliallow 
Reafon can't reach them. 

Let me therefore make bold to 
give you the following Advice. 

Firft, always to diftinguiih thofe 
things that are above Reafon, from 
thofe that are againft it. We call 
that Thing againft Reafon, that 
contradicts our former Ideas, 
framed on a due confideration, or 
on felf-evident Principles; as for 
Instance, to fay that fire is cold, is 
againft Reafon ; becaufe we have 
upon good grounds conceived the 
Idea of Fire, as of a hot Thing. 
But when we come to fpeak of 
God, and of his Nature, there is • 
nothing can properly be faid to 
contradi(^ our Idea, becaufe we 
never did frame one that we could 
fay was to be depended upon. 

Now if we are to fet fo great 
Value upon thofe ideas our Reafon 
has framed, how come Men all 
generally to agree in the Worfliip 
of God, which is certainly againft 
thofe Ideas we had or ought to 
have framed of him. The Worfliip 
of God confifts in praifing of him, 
in praying to him for what we 




Dialogue 



ftand in need of, and in giving 
Thanks for what we have received. 
The Idea we have of a God, is of 
a Being infinitely Good, Merciful, 
Juft, &c. We reckon up all the 
Excellencies that we find in Men, 
and attribute them to God in an 
infinite manner. When then we 
praife God, and tell of his Attri- 
butes, may not that fhock his 
Modefly as praifing a Man before 
his Face. To pray to him for any 
Bleflings, contradicts the Ideas we 
• haveof his Goodnefs and Liberality. 
He is no generous Perfon, that 
knows another to be in Neceffity, 
and will not relieve him till he 
afks for it : And fo to give Thanks 
to a generous Spirit for any 
Favour, is a kind of an Affront to 
them, like praifing of 'em \ and 
much more to God, if we follow 
our Ideas before fram'd. I wonder 
therefore, that it never came into 
your Heads to abolifh the Worfhip 
of God, as contrary to Reaff>n, 
and then you 'II have a \cty lazy 
Religion, and a gcxxl Timer on't. 

Nay, what do you think fo Iw- 
lieve that G^xi is a Spirit, i% not 
that quite contradicting all th<; 
Ideas we had framed ? And t\\%t 
fame may alfb be faid of beli«rving 
God to be Infinite, Kternal (/i. 
For our Underftanding \% Uh) lilfl< 
to receive anv Idea%, but what Ki«f 
limited to Time, Plaor, (^i, un4 
Infinity, Eternity, being infiniii^iy 
too large to M)uet7>e mOf fa< h 
narrow compfb, are forotd f> Im? 
without I>x>r^. |'aftiM:r, y(k iUu^ 
Reaibn ij4^ your% tliai will Wufv* 
nothing titat <»nifa4ICI% it^ h/w 
(he corner to btlieve (pf^% HffiHu 



119 



and his Attributes, to be the fame 
without compofttion } for it it cer- 
tain, it will always apprehend hit 
Wifdom and Power as diflinA, 
his Jujfict and Mercy at oppofite. 
How can we believe God to be 
intiie in all Places, and yet not 
circumfcribed to any } that he 
penetrates all Subflance, and it 
mixed with none ( that he under- 
ftands without the Reception of 
any Idea \ that he lovet without 
Paffion, it angry without Diftur- 
bance, rcpentt without Change, 
and fo many other PerfeAiont that 
are efTcntial to hit Godhead \ afk 
your Rcafon, I fay, whether it 
doet fully underfland them, and 
it will anfwer negatively ^ whv 
then do you believe 'em» It \% 
evident therefore, that it wat left 
even to Reafon to clip Religion, 
till it thought it enough, it would 
not ceafe. till it had made it im- 
perceptihir* to the niceft Eye, 

Brcondly, lirforc we tan jwfi- 
livrlv aflirin, that a Pro|¥imJon 
iinplM* a ConfrMili^lJun, wt* niufl 
\k furi*, fhaf the (oniradi^totv 
Idea W(* had UmWA SwUntt^ \% well 
li^roundrd, Vm Jnflani^, lK:fi>rir 
wi* A MM fi«^, fhtii 'fu a LUmtfti' 
df/ti^/n u* MffiMM \\m iUn Sun i% 
<old or 4a»b, w« inufi hut (ma ihai 

wh«n w«^ mmn u^ l^m^k ^/f Thing* 

(i^y iUhi I hi: 4t*^iu^ iff Amidti 

itiA:m ^ym Uuik;^ AuiliwJiy, ^ich- 




I20 



Psalmanazar's 



Reafon : Therefore, tho' we 
might very well think our No- 
tions extraordinary good and firm 
at firft, i,e. before the Revelation ; 
yet when God's Authority comes 
and tells us the contrary, I think 
Reafon her felf will think it moft 
naJonabU to give place. 

Thirdly, how do you know but 
one time or other, if not here, at 
leaft in the next World, our 
Underftandings will be opened fo, 
that (tho' at prefent they cannot fo 
much as fee the poffibility of thefe 
Arcana) yet, then they mall fee all 
thefe plainly, even fo far as to be 
afhamed of our Dulnefs, while on 
this fide the Grave ; and yet this 
is the Promife of one of the Dif- 
ciples of Amida, 

What a heavy Rout would not 
a raw, untaught. Country Plow- 
man make, if you fhould go to 
perfwade him that the World 
turneth round as Meat round 
the Spit ! How many obieftions 
would he make, which tho to you 
would appear very filly and im- 
pertinent, yet to him would feem 
very wife and fubftantial ones : 
Now how do you know, but 
whilft you are crying out Abfur- 
dity! Abfurdity ! thofe bleffed 
Men who for ought we know 
are already admitted to the Sight 
of all thofe Things we fee here 
but thro' a Glafs, darkly, would 
laugh, or at leaft, which would be 
more agreeable to their State, pity 
us for our Blindnefe ; but much 
more for our Incredulity, if they 
were to behold our wife Proceed- 
ings here ! 

How many Things are there 






which have appeared contrary to 
Reafon, impoffible, l^c. which 
either by a more mature Con- 
fideration, or by experience, have 
been made as clear as the Sun ! 
And if we may be allow'd to com- 
pare mean little Things to great 
ones, I'll tell you a Story, not 
foreign to our purpofe. A Gentle- 
man in Europey having a mind to 
make himfelf merry with fome of 
his Fellow-Mathematicians, came 
one Day to 'em with a chearful 
Countenance, and told them. He 
had found the way to make an 
Egg ftand on end on a Table, 
without any other Support at all ; 
upon which they all flood amaz'd ; 
and after having debated the 
Matter ferioufly, they voted it 
Nemitne ContradicenU impoffible, 
and thought he was in jeft ; 
wherefore to (hew he was in 
earneft, took the Egg, and broke 
one end flat, and fb fet it to ftand 
upon the Tabic. 

Japonefe, 
Ha, ha, ha, ha ! 

Formofan, 

When they faw the Thing 
done, the next Word one fpoke, 
was, I could have done it. Blefs 
me ! cries another, that I fhould 
not have thought on't. You fee, by 
this, a Thing which appeared im- 
poffible to a whole Company of 
truly learned Men, which when 
fhewn, nothing feems cafier ; I 
need not make any Application. 

A certain Gentleman of your 
Party wrote a Book in vindication 
of your Opinion, and concludes 



Dialogu 



121 



with thefe Words, Tliat he refers 
his farther Conviflion till the next 
World. 1 woidd not advife you to 
do the fame, it will not be time 
then. And I had as good fancy 
firft, that a Man may be laved 
without Holincfs, and Jo wallow in 
Sill all his Life-time, and refer his 
farther Conviction, and if need be 
his Converfton till the Day of 
Judgment; I thinic their Cafe 
woiud not be much unlike, unlcfs 
it be that the firft might have 
more Right to plead Igno- than 
the latter : You fee I have been 
obliged to (land up for your Reli- 
gion, as much as if it had my own, 
and that bccaufe we in our Religion 
have our Myfteries as well as you 
in yours ; and are bound tg obey, 
refpedl and reverence our Priefts 
as well as you yours. But what 
was you going to fay, for I have 
done? 



J.t.n,fi. 
But now, Sir 

Here at laft we arc come to 
that btal Minute, in which I was 
unfortunately call'd away without 
flaying to fee the Condufion ; and 
therefore I muft here leave oif en- 
treating the kind Reader not to 
cenfurc mc for making the fa- 
panner begin a Speech, and not end 
it; asifllhould go by the common 
Proverb, which fays, that Parifli- 
Clcrfcs, Women and Fools will 
always fpeak the laft Word ; 
which was very far from my 
Thoughts; but intending from 
the beginning to be as juft in 
this Relation as I could, I thought 
it would be took as an Argument 
of my great Sincerity, not to omit 
even Three fuch inrignificant 
Words as, 2h/ how. Sir. 





122 



Favorlang 



HAPPART'S FAVORLANG VOCABULARY 



a, and ; as chau a to, fire and water ; boesum 
a ta, heaven and earth. 

a-a, a twig, a branch ; as a ook, a twig of a 
bamboo ; a-o baron, a branch of a tree. 

a-apach-an, a step; fr. ummapag', syn. 
tataisan, 

a-arrai, a step, a pace ; fr. ummarras, 

a-arrit, the tress of a woman's hair. 

a-auton, a measure or instrument to measure 
with, as salt \ fr. moet, 

alMJc, a small boat or sampan. 

abas, tlie sea. 

a-bauch, a bowl. 

abi, pinang or betel-nut. 

ablBBas, things ready for travelling ; to make 
ready. 

abo, ashes or cinders ; lime. 

aob, rust ; ach o dhpa, the rust of iron ; ach 
barrieg, the rust of copper j ach, and inach, 
ino-ach-en, injured by rust. 

achaohab, five and five, by fives. 

aohau-an, a fireplace } the hearth. 

achl, semen. 
. acbleb, or bog, the body. 

aoho, not yet } acho man o micham, I have 
not yet eaten or drunken ; acho aban ja ina, 
rummies mamaba, I do not yet know it, by and 
by I shall know it -, also written achat and 
achipa, 

acboa, or change, enough. 

ada, a part or share ; fr. mada, to divide. 

a-dach, a peg, as that on which arms are 
hung ; a-dach o balasau, a hanger ; fr. ummadag \ 
alfK) written a-adag. 

adaoh, a coral chain; it may be of poor 
materials, but much prized by the natives. 

adam, a certain small bird, less tlian a spar- 
row ; variegated, with a long tail ; from whose 
cry future good or bad fortune may be pre- 
sumed ', if it cries out twice, or four times, it 
betokens misfortune } but if once, or thrice, or 
five times, then good success -, if anything above 
this, it intimates a still greater blessing, accoixi- 
ing to the number of cries. 

adaudon, the roof of a house. 

adda, paddy or rice \ used for that production 
in its various stages; numatojorien, as it just 
shoots forth ; minochargaro, as it puts forth a 



broad leaf; tummaabbi-alallabach, as it has two 
leaflets on the side, and one on the top, a 
resemblance being supposed to the lallabach, a 
green leek : madorka ja adda, as it is now, one 
and a half or two spans high; gummasor 
tummabaron summatis, when it has attained its 
full length ; tummedinnis, when the ear begins 
to form ; paikon ja adda, when the ear is 
perfect, and hangs bent down; tummaberook ja 
adda, when the ear is half ripe ; machiech ja 
adda, when it is ouite ripe, and nearly scorched. 

addabon, a calabash; chachied, cfitto; tabo^ 
a large calabash, wherewith to scoop up water. 

addad, a piece, an end ; addad o ariem, a 
piece of a lemon ; fr. paddat, to cut or break ; 
syn. wonts, kattach, biiii, borbor. 

addas, and adtfas o rima, the palm of the 
hand. 

a-een, a stink. 

A-enig, a wont or speech uttered quietly, as 
if one were ashamed or abashed ; fr. ummenig, 

aga, or alam, all kinds of missile wea|x>n8, as 
spears, javelins, etc. ; fr. magga, to cast. 

aggan, a crab. 

agganak, seems to mean, it is done ; when 
any end is reached. 

ai, he, that, here, there ; but nothing remote ; 
%y\\. words, ai-i, ai-ies, ai-inies, ailo, ano-ies, and 
ailemons. 

aiag, a cockroach. 

aicbo, and aicho-ies, there, but not far efT; 
alcho, aichoies, so-o aicho echies, yonder; pait 
ta, so-o roman kallach, gannumma, there, 
beyond, yonder ; paita innai maro maicho and 
machoies, it is so, there it is ; aicho-ech, beyond, 
outside, far out of sight. 

a-llljt, the stalk or stem of coarse grass. 

aiodup sysha, the setting of the sun. 

a-i-or, the following ; a-i-or natta, the next ; 
ajor narroa, etc., a-i-or a mato, next after the 
large one, that is, the smaller. 

airien, a creation, a fonnation ; fr. merien, 

aire, and esurro, to suppose, to imagine; 
aissen is frequently used ui different senses; 
when alone, it seems to intimate the doing 
away with anything, as when anytliing is burnt; 
aissen o chau, it is burnt in the fire ; aissen o 
cho, some one has taken it away. 




Vocabulary 



123 



alro-osaen, a chair cushion. 

alBemiM, small stars. 

^tffafil^v^ nearly hit ; syn. chadsja pila. 

alto-lto, seven and seven, by sevens. 

aks, a word of excuse, when you unknow- 
ingly run against any one ; as, pray excuse me. 

ak«ranio, a form of complaint, when any- 
thing falls down. 

akoboi, a hunting-net, placed in the fields to 
catch beasts ; fr. pakobos^ to catch in a net. 

al-al, kindness ; fr. ma-allal, to be kind. 

alam, all kinds of projectile or missile 
weapons ) fr. malam, to fight with missile 
weapons. 

aliod barrl, a whirlwind. 

alia, that, in order that. 

alia, show, finery, ornament j fr. malla, or 
palia^ to set one's self off. 

alladocli, called in the south kalladoch, a 
sort of red beans, which the natives wear round 
their necks instead of coral beads ; they are very 
poisonous. 

alle, a mouth, a child ; a word used in 
calling children. 

alleobo, or alleic/io, added to a word betokens 
doing or suffering ; it also refers to the future j 
summada alUicho na-amaif which is the same 
as summada na-a mamaiy to-morrow I will 
come. 

allolo, or eebf firewood \ marach ailoloy go 
and get some firewood. 

amaaoh, the filaments of roots. 

ami, a prohibitory expression ; as ami a . 
mochafty bring no food ; ami a man a dat-ai, 
do not pick it ; fr. man, to eat. 

amii, or amisan, the north \ matamis-mi-ma, 
northward ; paiamis, trans.ito go to the north. 

amo, a plum, a plum-tree ; also a peach or 
peach-tree ; amo ranna, cherry, or a cherry- 
tree. 

amorra, the liver. 

amorr' rixna, the muscle of the hand. 

anUni, see anibim, 

ani, before this, ago ; ant rummies, in former 
da)rs J ani xcftieia a rummies, ten days ago ; ani 
naspaat a idas, four months ago ; ani tannacAo 
a baas, nine years ago; animunma and ani- 
banno, when did it happen ? ani marpesa, 
yesteiday, or last evening j am naassa, a little 
while ago; anissima, this morning early; 
amiach, certainly, verily; ansia, yesterday; 
ansiutta, the day before yesterday ; ani bi-ini, 
and anbini, last night j ani baas, or ani mossa, 
last year ; am milip, a long time ago ; ani aicho, 
a very long time since. 



anlbanno, see amnumma. 

aniblni, or anbini^ last night. 

ani-oioho, see ani-milip. 

animarara, it was to-day ; in the evening. 

animarpaia, yesterday evening. 

aBimllip, or ani-eicho, a long time ago. 

anlnaaiiita, just now, not long ago. 

anlnnmma, or ani-banno, when was it } 

anlmriina, this morning, early. 

anitlnnaam, first, or before. 

anliummiei, former days. 

annaoh, truly, certainly. 

annomannonia, or assanmana^ set forward. 

ano, pickle. 

anilia, yesterday ; ans/iada somma, yesterday 
morning. 

anihutta, day before yesterday. 

a-omo, a lady's fillet fx>r the hair. 

a-onoBoa, salt and water, with which the 
natives wash their wounds; compounded of 
ao (see ano), pickle, and soa, a wound. 

a-orran, maorran, ino-a-orran, fiiddled witli 
drinking, sick ; people also say, madich a marab 
a-orran ja ina, sick with drinking, fuddled am I. 

a-ot, or autan, a measure, an ell ; fr. moet 

apillo, a finger; sini apillo, the thumb; 
gakotul rima saioot, the forefinger; babat 
apillo, the middle finger ; aior shiem apillo, the 
last finger; shiem apillo dautatsilien, the little 
finger ; apillono asiei, a toe. 

aran, an adopted child, a servant brought up 
in the house, but who works for his food ; as 
aran cho, one who serves for board and 
lodging. 

arapodi, a sack or wallet, in which the 
natives put their food and clothing, for carrying 
on their backs while travelling. 

araraatta, level plain country. 

arararaan a Idas, or modarandan ja idas^ 
full moon ; fr. parara, to enlighten. 

ararroa, two and t^vo; ararroa don natta 
cho tumkach, from every second house is some 
one gone out to hunt. 

arai, grass. 

arassa, a kind of breeches made of the bark 
of a tree. 

arat, tow, lint, a rope, a cord (lighted for 
matchlock ; hence a match). 

arauto, a tub or barrel. 

arilMiritMit, all sorts of hunting implements ; 
as bows, arro^vs, fish-nets, etc. ; fr. maribaribat^ 
to hunt, or to so a-fishins. 

ariem, all kinds of lemons and citrons ; 
baron ariem^ the tree of the same ; ariimmato^ 
a pumelo. 



JP 




124 



Favorlang 



aril, towards j bajan mataris^ to go to the 
east ) bajan patarh, gone towards, i.e. trans. 

arodo, a trevet. 

arorroan, or arwroofan^ a place of assembly j 
ta (or don) o arorro-aijan, tne plain or house 
where people hold meetings, the palaver house 
or gpround. 

airabis, the breast. 

arrar, a fence, a garden ; fr. parar, to fence 
round. 

arrasta, a clod of earth. 

arrlbll, or baUag^ household furniture, all 
kinds of implements, clothing, and ornaments. 

arrlbodan, fr. inarribodan, or inoarribodan, to 
cast the skin, to moult ; root, paribod. 

arrllK»rriboii, the neck, and the back part of 
the head) chauch o arriborribou, the hollow 
part of the neck. 

arrl-eddan, an inmate, a household ; cAo Jon 
takaUa, a household or family j areddan takalla, 
ditto. 

arrlna, great bamboos. 

arrlpas, a centipede; arripas mahahasis 
and arripas gagily these are rare kinds ; arri- 
pas morrun and arripas a bi'uog, these are 
commoner. 

arro, a native arm ring of iron or copper j 
also a certain instrument wherewith to pluck 
up grass; caliaba, the ring of round copper 
wire on the forepart of the arm ; tallatuisy the 
second ring underneath. 

arrobo, the rump of a man or beast ; taddo- 
gon being understood as the upper pait of the 
body, without neck or head, including the ribs 
and breast, and whether there be flesh on or 
not ; botorrOy the stump of a man's body when 
the head is taken off. 

arron, a roll, anything rolled up; arron o 
bidoy a roll of writing ; arron o badsige^ a sheet 
of paper rolled up ; n*. ummarron. 

arroro, a top, a whirligig, a branch. 

arro8-(Mi, fr. inimarros-i" a-ar-naros-osy the 
noise of the sea; arros-os o abas, the sea 
roars; root, parros-os. 

arrotsenach, a kind of shield. 

aaa, wares, merchandise. 

asalMMUi, an instmment for carrying loads 
between two, as a bier ; asaboan o macha, the 
bier of a dead man ; fr. passabo, to carry be- 
ween two. 

la, a certain kind of bamboo. 
I, a threshing floor. 

aaa-o-babo, a pi^*s stye. 

aiai, laziness, idleness; fr. masas^ lazy, 
slow. 



aiaf pat, four and four, by fours. 

aiau-an, a barn-floor, where people beat seed 
out of the stock ; fr. masau, to thresh. 

asi, a sieve ; asi o riba, a shirt ; lit. the white 
rim round the neck of a coat. 

aaian, a pole in the middle of a hjuse; 
bandoHy the two outer supports where the ridge 
pole rests. 

aslel, a leg, a thigh; chauch o asiel, the 
hollow part under the foot ; asiel o zhisya, rays 
of the sun. 

atinok, a handkerchief; fr. passinok, to blow 
the nose. 

asdoddon, the sides of a house. 

aao, a nail of the finger. 

aaoan, a large kind of bean, great trees; 
ieran, small trees ; a-tsi-tsi, small peas. 

asopietpiet, a seam ; ix.passopietpiety to hem. 

asoplr, a cast-net. 

asoBO, a gift or present ; fr. passoso, given. 

aasalMui, a village. 

asBal, a field rat, nearly like the mole. 

RBiiannlaTia, or assanoman-a, or amtoman- 
noma, to set forward. 

atap, a patch, anything used for stopping a 
hole or tear, whether sewn, darned, or woven 
in ; fr. pattaPy to stop a hole or tear. 

atas, a picture or drawing, a letter; fr. 
pattaSy to write. 

atasaian, or ataz-ajany a table on which 
people eat ; a board or tray on which to put 
cups and saucers. 

atascblet, ten ami ten, by tens. 

atatta, either, one by one ; ararroay two and 
two i atattorrooy three and three ; asaspaty tour 
and four; achachaby five and five; atattalafy 
six and six ; aito-itOy seven and seven ; maas- 
paaspaty eight and eight; atattannacho, nine 
by nine ; atatschiety ten by ten. 

atattalap, six by six, by sixes. 

atattannacho, nine by nine, by nines. 

atattorroa, three by three, by threes. 

atauso, a medicine. 

atai-ajan, see atasajan, 

atas-auznan, same as ataz-ajan ; ataz-ajasiy 
ditto. 

atai-ayan, see above. 

atasyei, a scarecrow to frighten i birds; fr. 
pattazicSy to make a scarecrow. 

ate, until; as, ijo tatummaap ate o lalUan^ 
you must work till mid-day; ate poaja kaUa- 
man ate cabat ; fill the pot half full. 

atll, instruction, a lesson ; fr. pattily to learn ; 
atiUaijaSy school, church, etc. 

atlUo, a command ; fr. patiUoy to order. 



Vocabulary 



liS 



atim, or atum, caltrops. 

atippOi a sparrow-net, a firelock or musket ; 
fr. paitipoy to shoot. 

ante, a word, a speech, aii oration to the 
people, a sermon ; fr. pattiie, to speak openly 
to the people. 

atoua, sets forth the special relation be- 
tween sister and brother j thus, from this worI, 
a brother is called not after his brother, but his 
sister; and a sister, not with reference to her 
sister, but her brother. 

atokar, a mast. 

a-tal-tal, small peas. 

atom, see atim. 

au, a sign by which one calls to another ; as, 
ho ! but it is generally placed after the name 
of the person called, as, CabhaUy or Cabba au, 
ho ! Cabba. 

an a-Ui, fright, astonishment. 

aabo, a fish-basket, or basket for catching 
fish, like a net ; aubon, a hen-coop. 

aaohad, cock's spurs. 

audik, a swelling, an enlargement ; see 
ponno, a boil or swelling that comes of itself. 

aukat, joy, love ; fr. rnaukai, to love. 

ankor, a stopper of a tankard or jug} fr. 
pokkory to put on a stopper. 

anroff, the kidneys. 

aosa, wax. 

antean, a Chinese water jar, such as are 
seen in junks. 

aoBoan, a way or course, leading anywhere ; 
as, dema au soan mosse Batadair wnere are 
they going after Bat-a ? 

autan, see a-ot. 

aatat, an opinion, a suspicion, a feeling \ fr. 
poetat, to suspect. 

ansii, terror, amazement. 

atiei-in, an enemy. 

ai(ji68, strangers, who do not belong to our 
town or country; an enemy j fr. maxjies, 
enmity. 

aslman, a treasure ; fr. mazJma/if to lay up 
treasures. 

aiotMit, or a zo babat, half full. 

ba, a stool ; ba o asielen, a foot-stool. 

Iwak, unemployed, plain, private, vacant, 
useless, anvthing unserviceable. 

baan, the su^Krficies of, anvthing both out- 
ward and inward ; baan o Ulfum, baan o babo, 
circumference on the inside, and the surface on 
the top. 

baas, a year. 

baat, a fruit, like the European pumpkin; 



boat baam (or baun), a pumpkin; baat o 
gagil, a melon ; baat o pool^ a water-melon. 

babaas, tidings, a message; fr. paas, to 
bring tidings. 

baban, an earthen dam ; fr. pan and paban, 
a dam. 

babassoei, a kiss ; fr. pabajjoes. 

babat, the middle, in the midst; babai a 
bi-ini, raidnieht ; babat a don, the inner floor of 
a house, the mner chamber ; babat a piilo, the 
middle finger ; babat o cho, a man of middlhig 
stature; babat mato matjtlo, moderately great 
or long. 

babecbab, a nig or coverlet ; fr. pabechab, to 
cover any one with a rug. 

babennonno, a basin or gong. 

bablar, the shoulders, a shoulder of meat; 
babiar o abi, a branch of a betel-nut tree. 

babidan, the place where men gird themselves. 

babido, writing instruments, as pen, pencil, 
etc. ; fr. pido, a writing. 

babied, a girdle round the loins ; fr. pied, the 
place of a girdle. 

babilla, an instmment wherewith to split 
anything ; fr. pido, to cleave. 

babiog-1, a certain tree, bearing blue flowers 
like the lilac ; aiabos, aras, same, satik, the 
leaves are used for a wounded or sprained limb 

babiai, standing ^in, such as rice, millet, 
etc., before the seed is formed. 

babe, above, up high ; also the cry of all 
kinds of birds, the squeaking of mice, rats, or 
snakes ; ei'ro assi babo bada i, sit on the stool ; 
tummal ponotaxi pana babo, the kite flies up 
high; mampa babo, the cry of birds; mata- 
babo, mi, ma, above, up high ; pata-babo, 
trans. 

babo, or babot, a pig. 

baboan, a great star ; baboon o marara, the 
morning star. 

baboar, lionev ; also, the soittle or saliva that 
is used for makins; strong drink ; fr. poor, to 
prepare the saliva for making strong drink. 

babobo, a sieve ; asi, ditto. 

babodol a ooff a wm%, about half past four. 

baboe, or babo, a pig. 

baboellekb, a pig stye. 

baboMian; btnaboessan into baboessan, the 
sleeping of the hands or feet ; baloessan o asiei, 
the hand sleeps; fr. paboessan, not used. 

baborra, the foundation of a house. 

baborrajan, and baborran, a bamboo fnuue 
for drying fish or flesh ; fr. pwra, a drying 
place. 




126 



Favorlang 



balMMrrat, a bandage, that wherewith any- 
thing is bound ; fr. porrat^ to bind. 
baboia, or chOy a man, people, 
babot, shoes } babot o asiel, the feet; tr. 
paboty to put on shoes. 

babrlea, a loose knot, a snare \ babries o raro, 
a hat-band ; fr. pries, to tie. 

tMilmrraa, deliverance, redemption. 

baob-an, said of any one who has a bone in 
his throat; kabach-an ja ina, I have, etc. 

baoban, a load, also a pair; it is only used of 
such things as by nature or art are coupled 
toother; nata bachan a bahat acharrod, a pair 
oi shoes or stockings. 

baobas, dryness, drought. 

bAobinan, the fever; also the verb pret. 
biHOchinan ; fiit. ino bacMnan, 

baobor, folly, contention ; bachorreu, a simple- 
ton, a fool; c/mbboen, ra-^hoen, and rausan, 
ditto. 

baoban o tairren, coral. 

badda, joined to sjoem, a child ; refers to all 
children of the male kind, whether of man or 
beast ; when used alone, it means a full-g^wn 
male among beasts ; and among men, a bache- 
lor; badda is no longer used alter marriage; 
from this comes bas a badda, a great boy; 
bahat a badda, a half-gprown young man. 

baddoa, or battan, or tupfo, persons bom on 
the same day. 

bade, a wave, a billow, a gulf. 

bag, or bage, horns; fig. a buck, or deer; 
other^vise, o basan. 

bagcbaji, a burden, a couple. 

bagcbo, a fruit like small cucumbers. 

bagcbono-adar, the muscles above the thick 
part of the leg. 

bagobonotea, the muscles under the armpits. 

bagga, the lungs. 

bagga cbau, or boat o c/tau, a burning coal. 

boi-lalian, about half past nine. 

bajan, the east. 

bajus, a storm ; fr. the verb pajus, to storm ; 
trans, pabajus, 

balat, a row of two, one beside the other ; 
fr. palat, to spread one^s self out twice. 

ballag, or arribil, household furniture; all 
kinds of implements, clothing, and ornaments. 

ballaaaa, a hanger or chopper. 

ba-o a Idas, the new moon. 

bao, new, young. 

barbar, the south wind. 

bardon, the outer props on which the ridge- 
pole rests ; all the props of a ridge, whether in 
the middle, or at the end. 



barieg, or baro, copper. 

barok a bok orl, the dewlap of a cow. 

baron, a bush, a stock, a tree, a wood { barM 
iel'iel, a mulberry tree ; baroH o bilpii, a plantain 
tree ; baron o roggo, a cocoa-nut tree j baroH o 
abi, an areca betel-nut tree; baron o amo, a 
plum or peach tree; baron o amo ranna, a 
cherry tree ; bcuron o ariem, a lemon or citron 
tree. 

baron o obaar, the shaft of a pen. 

barra-baraan, naked ; fr. pabarra-baira, to 
strip naked ; batrabarraas, naked. 

barranaob, an iron pan. 

barraa, or bior, the remainder, tlie overplus, 
superfluous ; ka barras o koste, ja nurien^ ka 
batras o natta cho saro baddo, there is very litde 
left to do, there is only one more man needed 
{koite is here used for koexi, little) ; tlie word 
thus used is from tne, and is the same with bwr\ 
barras is used when there is an overplus; mi 
refers to that which remains. 

barren, natural spots on the human bodv; 
borrah, large spots ; also drinking spots on the 
clothes. 

barri, the wind; bar-bar, the south wind; 
bar-bayan, the east wind ; bar-ts'tpan, the west 
wind; mas oan, the north wind; bar-bqjfon a 
ivannan, the south-east wind ; bar-tsipana 
ivannan, the south-west wind ; barri tabo^, 
the north-east wind ; bar-tsipan a amisau, the 
north-west wind ; fr. mabarri, to blow. 

barri-barren, fr. bitutrribar, ino-barri-barren, 
like barri'barra, the foolish tricks of simple 
people ; fr. parribar, not used. 

barritok, paper. 

barrl-ya-oetaa, a shower. 

barro, a sheaf or bundle; barrono aras, a 
bundle of grass ; fr. parra, a sheaf. 

barrobo, a fiekl-rat ; kamossimos, a field- 
mouse ; kadxys, a mouse ; kadxies, ditto. 

bart, a fly ; taitai, turriturri, a firefly ; rieb, 
a mos()uito, a gnat ; verb, mabart, 

baaioen, mouldy. 

basaarro, an onion. 

batbat, a rope or binding of bamboo ; tat- 
kack, a binding for the hunt; choa, a small 
binding of rattan ; batbat tsiaas, a short ban- 
dage; batbat tasso, a bandage one fathom 
long. 

bato, a sione. 

batono macba, the pupil of a fisirs eye. 

batono obacbaob-oan, a grindstone. 

battan, see baddoa, 

batnr, millet; the word is used regarding 
millet in all its stages ; tummochar o bart, when 




Vocabulary 



127 



the millet just springs out of the ground ; 
tummottarria ja batur^ when it has two leaflets 
on the sideSy and one straight up ; when it has 
three stalks, it is called natoeroa c hoard i addoho 
koUn^ when the plant is a little lai^er ; it refers 
also to the growing of rice ; moeaboar ja batuVy 
when the rice first shows itself; tummamachiho 
thretten, and tummachtha tnadoy when the rice is 
half ripe $ machiech ja batur, when it is quite 
ripe and nearly burnt up. 

tMiu-o, to take the small-pox ; bau bibo 
bauoa ; pass, bau as, binau, fr. ino-bauoas, to 
have the small-pox. 

tMiyan, the east. 

bayna, a stonn, a hurricane. 

baiiap, all kinds of pot-herbs and greens, 
that do not grow on trees, but spring oirectly 
out of the earth ; bazaap baan, mallows ; robar- 
robouialoaSf nearly like the mallow, with a 
prickly seed ; siihien rannOy argentaria ; 
babinniky wild marjoram ; saro/ady perhaps 
basil or balm ; babiar, bugle ; dirrOy sage ; 
awwyty wormwood ; togea, marjoram } tarra- 
ras, purslain ; tarraisan, wild chervil ; tai/iliy 
sorrel ; or, mead ; bazjep poot, the mustard 
plant ; rasafiy leaves of the violet ; tari-masoan, 
a lily; arosat and dalobe, sweet smelling plants; 
daien a ta, bata, atomo, ditto; roo/ babo, 
thistles ; ooly hemp. 

baiiegli, the skin of a beast ; also a shield 
to fieht with ; otherAvise, baxiegh malamy a 
warrior's shield. 

baiU, the hide or skin of a beast; bazij 
maiam, a shield. 

bai-o, devil's bread, toadstools. 

be-Mes, a word by which a younger brother 
is spoken of with respect to his elder brother; 
also a younger sister with respect to her elder 
sister; inabieSy the youngest child ; inababaty the 
middle child ; 'tnamacherty the eldest child. 

beida, the milt of a pie. 

beries, a younger brother or sister. 

betoto, a dove. 

bla, the leaf of a tree or plant ; bionoty the 
two elevated leaves on the side of the rose ; 
biorooly the buttocks; chaUaniy the leaf of a 
book ; challam baritoky a sheet of paper. 

bianot, the nostrils. 

biarool, the buttocks. 

bido, lampblack, ink, paper with ink on it, 
black paint ; generally all kinds of soot adher- 
ing to pots or chimneys ; fr. fuio, to write. 

big, scurvy, scabby, scabbiness ; big A or big- 
eny ditto ; bigA-en, scabby. 

bigenOy scum ; fr. pigeno, to foam. 



M-lBl, the nijg;ht 

blgkalc, or btgkaghy a porkline, a young pig. 

billa, a deft, a split, a bresuc in anything 
hard ; fr. pUUty to cleave. 

bUlaak, the breadth of anything. 

billabo, a coral; a soldier; voung felk>ws 
who have beaten the enemy are thus called. 

billang, split bamboos. 

billlk, coarse cloth woven by the natives ; a 
handkerchief, a sail-cloth. 

billooog, a split bamboo ; pron. like billaak, 

biloag, or buoaghy a broad spear, a hog-spear, 
or halbert. 

bilpil, a plantain tree ; bo bilpily plantains ; 
— staibosy a small plantain with a red skin ; — a 
sabba, a long plantain ; — a siil baba, another 
sort,'laree and thick ; — 9 ta oor, a small phui- 
tain with a thin skin. 

binnan, a deer, whether buck or doe ; masmrroy 
a roe ; sinni binnany a hind ; bag basaHy a 
full-grown buck ; bao binnamy a deer one year 
old or thereabout ; chaddooy a young deer with 
small horns ; mashamy an old buck. 

bio, all kinds of juice or soup in which anv 
food, whether fish or flesh, is cooked; or, it 
may be, pickled, in order to preserve it. 

bioa, thunder ; foa bioa^ it thunders. 

bioac, the same as barraty superfluous. 

bloei, the paunch ; tiles. 

blor, see barras, 

blsa, a dart or arrow; bua roddoky a 
common kind of dart ; bis taUatnechy a large 
dart; borroy a hard reed of which arrows are 
made. 

biUk, a word used when anything is pulled, 
cut, or broken in pieces, leading people to 
exclaim, it is all over I see giechy to tear, and 
ossoty to plunder ; bossoty it is out I also chosy 
cho-oSy when it has been drawn out long, pe<hy 
used when anything is torn ; boch-iesy it is in 
pieces! i.e. when anything falls in pieces; 
bottoky it is advised; gochy it is in; bottoky it 
cracks. 

bitil, a long piece or end broken off or cut 
from the lengtn of anything; it differs from 
borbor and kattach, 

bo, depth, deep, far from the bottom ; b^^ 
tOy deep water. 

bo, kindness, compassion ; elUpa ja bo no cko 
xiesy there is no kindness in that man's loul. 

boa, all kinds of seed and fruit of a tree or 
plant ; also the flesh of beasts and flshes ; alto 
a person ; boa ieUiely the mulberry ; boa rogto^ 
(he cocoa-nut ; boa amoy a plum or peach {hoa 
amo ra/tna^ a cherry; boa piifilf a plantain; 




128 



Favorlang 



Ifoa ably an areca nut; boa arten, a lemon or 
citron; boa idoan^ grapes; ba-o^ the dregs of 
native liquor. 

boah, a word of mockery, the noise of a 
musket ; also of a shock or blow. 

bo-al, a tankard ; also bagi and tapoiiagi, 

bo-ar, mud, a layer. 

bo-at cbau, live coal. 

bobor cbe, a beetle. 

boob-les, a word used when anything falls to 
pieces ; see bittik and gicA, to fall to pieces. 

bocb-o, a stink ; fr. mabocho^ rotten. 

bodda, an abacus; boddo^ ditto; the stick 
and other instruments by which the natives 
reckon ; fr. pado, an abacus. 

boeboe, forefathers; boeboj, ancestoi*s in 
general ; grandfather, grandmother, etc. 

boolaBBl, the bladder. 

boesini, a grandmother. 

boesjam, or boesyam, a grandfather. 

boesum, the heavens, heaven. 

boe-8ing, or boe-tsina^ a fan ; tatabbis, ditto. 

bog, or bogAy the body ; the skin of a man 
or beast before it is stripped off; also the outer 
bark or shell of anything; bac/t o aJJa, the 
husk of paddy with the grain inside; bac/i o 
biipii, the skin of a plantain ; bac/t o barofty the 
bark of a tree ; bog o macha^ the eyelids ; bogh 
luUachy the foreskin, the preputium. 

bokkebok, filled up ; ribokbok^ a stuffed coat ; 
baliabalf wadding, as cotton, etc. 

bokkir, the throat. 

bokkob, anything stuffed ; as Japanese 
cloaks, or old Flemish breeches ; fr. this cumes 
ribokboky a stuffed coat. 

bokkol, a deformity of person whereby people 
go bent or double ; bokkolien, to go bent through 
infinnity ; mabokkoUen mima^ crooked ; pabok- 
koUen^ to make crooked ; bokko/ien, one who has 
such a deformity. 

bollabol, stuffing, such as that put in Japanese 
cloaks, cotton, etc. 

bon, blunt at the point, dull ; verb, mibonbon, 

bonna, a field, all kinds of fields. 

bonnad, sand. 

bonnao, the member from the groin to the 
knee-pan, the thigh. 

bonn aribaribattan, hunting ground, 
bonn tataapan, tilled ground, 
bonnon, same as bonnao, 
bo-o, the lees of native wine ; cha^ the dregs 
pressed out therefrom. 

boo, a floor raised above the ground, 
boot, a plank; a floor raised above the 
ground, &ucn as are seen in the granaries of the 



natives, or before their doors, to prevent damp ; 
boot /tatta^ a cage ; boot o baron, a plank. 

borbor, pieces of fish or flesh, cut up to 
pickle or cook. 

bo-rl, the flesh of the neck cut ofl* from the 
bone. 

borra, to appease, to be at peace; boor o 
aziesy or borra azies, allies ; fr. maborroy peace, 
and aborro, to pacify. 

borrabor, dust, matter; fr. porpor, to raise 
the dust. 

borrak, large spots, with which men are 
sometimes bom; also the stains with which 
drinkers soil their clothes. 

borrason, verb, binorrason^ fiit. inoborrasom^ 
eer. borrasoa, to become mouldy and spoiled { 
borrason a uppo, mouldy bread. 

borrere, a wen. 

borro, a sort of hanl reed, with which darts 
are made. 

borroch o ataadan, the edge of a table. 

borroch o not, a boil on the nose. 

borrocb o ta, an island. 

borrog, or borrogh, anything that projects 
above another or lumpish ; borrog o not, a bump 
on the nose, etc., see under borroch \ verb, 
rnaborrock miy nia, 

bossor, the root of a tree or plant. 

bosaot, a word used when anything is drawn 
out, leading us to say, it is out; also when 
any one comes forward, as bassot ja icAo, he is 
come forward ; fr. pabosjot, to draw out. 

bottooB, a cat ; proverb, assouk i orrati mausi 
bottoos, i.e. to pass for a fool in the world ; 
bottoos aJiia, a musk cat. 

bottoro, the trunk of the human body with- 
out the head. 

bottul, a spear. 

breo, a bow. 

buttoots o adda, a musk cat, so called be- 
cause it eats paddy in the fleld. 

cba, the dregs of strong liquor, in which 
there is no more juice ; it differs from 
rasras, 

cbaan, the belly. 

cbaar, a feather, or wing, or arm of a mill ; 
cAaaran, a feathered fowl. 

cba-at, a com, a swelling under the ball of 
the foot. 

cbacli, or cAag/i, the powder of groimd seed, 
the refuse of bruised com. 

cbacbaab, a scoop-net; the same as cAi^- 
chaaby a flsherman's sweep-net ; fr. chummaab^ 
to fish with a sweep-net. 




Vocabulary 



129 



ftlmohad, wages, recompense, whether good 
or bad ; fr. chummad^ to repay. 

duudiap, the covering ot a pot, pan, canister, 
or chest ; also a door or window. 

ebmdiap an maoha, a burial place. 

ebadiap po^, the knee-pan. 

ebadian, a besom; or chagchau\ fr. chum- 
mauy to sweep. 

dHadierlel, a saw. 

ftliacMHp, a tailor's shears, forceps; fr. 
ckummitiep^ to cut with the shears, or scissors. 

obachlrrloh, a line or stripe. 

tfhadi bonnan, any frame for the setting up 
of arms ; fr. chummouan^ something lying over 
one another. 

cbachod, a query, adultery ; fr. chumma, 

cihaoholok, gloves. 

cbachorol, a mast. 

dHadiuppir, stubbornness, opposition; fr. 
cAumpir, to break through. 

chad, the calf of the leg. 

ebadqja, or c/iaJsia, or oUa^ nearly, almost ; 
chadsia madich^ almost sick; chadsia macha^ 
almost dead ; chadsja manja ina^ I have nearly 
had enough, e.g. olachal adsia, olochal adsja^ 
olamamoeoiif all these words are of similar 
signification, and appear to denote a kind of 
complaining; olamamaeda, olach adsja macha^ 
he is nearly dead. 

chagh, see chach, 

ohagcbaab, see chachaab, 

Ohagcliau, see chachau. 

cbagobi, a bodkin; fr. chumm^ to make a 
hole with a bodkin. 

chagohled, anything to scoop with, as the 
native gourds ; fr. chummied^ to scoop out of a 
pot or pail. 

chagclio, lye, with which the natives wash 
their linen or heads ; fr. chummachcho^ to wash 
with lye. 

cliaggal, a remnant of silk or worsted stuff; 
chagchaiy a small napkin of silk or woollen. 

oliaggl, to purpose ; maho chaggi, to know, 
to mean ; chc^iy to do to purpose ; kama 
cAaggi, to know very well. 

chaiboi, or Aaibos, a name given by the 
natives to the devil ; proverb, gi-roan haibos a 
sjies, a half devilish mind. 

chalapiet, the milt. 

cliallam, a leaf ; challam bido, a leaf of a 
book; challam barritok, a sheet of paper; 
michalla challam^ a book with many leaves; 
also linen folded up. 

challo, soft reeds, growing among the grus. 

chamma, a sort of drink or fugar-beer, a 



liquor made from water and dregs ; also sweet 
beer ; fr. michan^ to drink. 

Oban, a shore ; lo and roos^ ditto. 

obanna, an otter. 

ftha^fimimfna^ also ckouck^ a hole or pit in the 
ground ; also a hollow place in anything ; 
chauch arriborribofiy the hollow in the neck ; 
chauch aiUlj the hollow place under the feet ; 
fr. packauck ; chauch ranna^ a valley. 

char, the breath or voice of a man or beast, 
the smell of anything ; also clay ; char cho^ 
the cry of a man or beast, the smell of anything, 
clay ; ombo no char bassaro biman, to smell 
vinegar ; tsimmis char machan chamma^ 
to try the taste of food or beer. 

char-don, the environs of a house so far as 
the ground around belongs to it, within the fence. 

chareo, stagnant water ; ckBor chareo^ full of 
pools and manhes. 

charra, the space between the lattice. 

oharrina, the ears. 

charrl vdjsia^ idai^ baas^ some days, 
months, or years, but not all. 

oharrod, stockings. 

chaii, a bat. 

ohatto, smoke, tobacco. 

ohau, fire. 

chauch, a ditch, all kinds of indentation in 
anything ; chauch ranna, a valley. 

ohaugt, enough; as acho and ami, words 
whereby men signify they desire no more ; it 
differs from ka micho and ochal, 

ehanlachol, the great gut. 

Che, dunff, refuse ; chi o mocha, matter from 
the eyes ; che charrina, ear-wax. 

oheiion, wild chervil. 

ohemo, pus, matter ; fr. chummimg, 

ehi, rushes for making into mats. 

chlrtchlel, the claws or hoofs of a beast. 

ohUl, the testicles. 

chimoffh, foulness, sweepings. 

ohlmoior, the elbow. 

ohin, certain brown insects, which sit and 
sing in the grass, very much like grasshoppers. 

^-oor, a turbot, a bud, such as shoots forth 
from the trees ; fr. chummioar^ to sprout. 

chtpaaianan, chimpassanan, imchitassamm^ 
to fall down through weakness, as those who 
are become thin through sickness, or who have 
lost their strength by travelling or fasting. 

chirrap, food sticlcing between the teeth. 

cho, a man ; also a people ; cho </««, kindred, 
the people of the house. 

ohoa, small rattans, 
the belly. 



R 




I30 



Favorlang 



ohobon, the sheath of a sword or other 
weapon } fr. chummobon^ to sheathe. 

oho don, kindred, the people of the house. 

chogoho, bhie. 

choma, a bear. 

ohome, or chomi^ tlie milt or roe of a fish. 

ohomi, yam for weaving, worsted. 

diommottal, chummottol, cha-chummottoly ger. 
chottoUa^ inf. chottoUen^ c/iimttol, inchottolUn^ to 
beat with the fist ; chummottol^ chachattol^ a 
blow with the fist. 

oho-o, a sprout, when it first shoots out of 
the ground j fr. chummo-o^ to spring out of the 
ground. 

ohor, the fat of the inwards. 

chorrien, hard of hearing, deaf. 

ohubboen, a simpleton ; one who has the 
falling sickness; chubb<xhubboenf intens. chub- 
botft, verb act. mahubboen and machubbochubboen^ 
chumaabf chinummaab^ chachummaab^ ger. 
chaaba^ inf. chaaben^ chinaab^ tnnchaabbeny to 
fish with a sweep-net. 

chumda, chi^ cha, cheda^ chedaan^ chienda^ 
inochedaan^ early in the season ; = fadaat^ 
fachdoy trans, nom. chachda, early time. 

ohmnmabal, cAinummabai, c/iacAummabal, 
m. c/tabalia, inf. ckaballen^ chinabal^ inocha- 
bcdUn^ to say anything to put one out of counte- 
nance, or make one afraid ; fachahbaly to cause 
sudi to be done} chachabal^ a tlireatening 
= laJJalak, a frightening; ma-achachabaly = 
marais a cho^ a threatened 

cbummaolia, chinummacha, chachummacha^ 
chachachachaan^ chlnacha^ inochachaas, to look 
for, to seek out ; fachacha^ pi^ pa^ apachac/ta^ 
ipachacha^ inipachacha^ ino-ipachacha^ to search 
out ; piri mario^ to seek out the best j chum- 
macho o arribel o naupoot^ to look out for eood 
clothes ; chummacho'mammaly to look out tor a 
lover, it is used for men as well as things ; 
chachachay a searching out; maachachacha, a 
searcher. 

dranmiachclio, chinummachchOy chachum- 
machchoy chachchoay chachchoariy chinachchoariy 
inochachchoan, to wash with lye ; pachachcho^ 
pinachachchOyPapac/iachchOy ipachachchoay ipach- 
achchOf inipachachchoy inoipachachcho^ to do as 
above ; chumachcho no riba^ to wash clothes ; 
ma-achachachchOf a washerman j chach-choy lye 
to wash with. 

ohummaolio, chinummachoy chachummac}tOy 
ger. chacho-Oy inf. chachouy chinackOy inochach- 
Off, to polish ; pachacho, to polish, etc. ; cho 
chummachoy imchachony bato achoany the man 
polishes, ^e knife is whetted, the stone 



grinds it sharp; chachach-Oy a grinding; mor 
acha chach'Oy a grindstone. 

chunmuul, cniuwmtncuiy chackummad^ ger. 
ckoiUay inf. chadden, cfunoiiy itto^/taJden^ retri- 
bution, whether good or bad; pachad^ trans. 
c/iachady reward ; nia-achachady a rewarder. 

oimnmiaddip, chiy c/Mj chaddippa^ to cut off 
anything close to the ground. 

clmmmadik, chi, cha^ c/taddikkoy chaddikken^ 
cMnaddii, ino^haddikken, to approach ; packad- 
dik, to cause to draw near; chachaddik^ an 
approach ; tna-achachaddiky activ. any one who 
comes near; activ. ma-achadtUky one who is 
come near; fr. mac/uiddik, chaddik^ the draw- 
ing near of a matter. 

elmmmagolill, chinummagchil^ chackunmu^- 
ckily ger. chachillay inf. chagchUlan, cAimagcM- 
larty tnochagchiUatiy to come up witli anv one in 
walking or running; pachachU, chachachclul^ 
nom. subst. ma-ac/mchachily a good runner that 
can overtake others. 

dmnimai, cMnummai, c/iachummai, ger. cAas- 
a, inf. cha-itty chinaiy imchmttiny to cany on the 
back ; pachaiy trans, chachai^ nom. subst 
ma-achachcd, 

chummaiB, cMy chOy chrnsa^ pass, chaisas^ a 
putting off; pac/iaisy trans. 

cliummalfipEd, chiy chay chalgaUa^ the barking 
of dogs; pachalgaly trans, c/iachalgal^ a bark- 
ing; nom. ma-achchalgaly to bark. 

dmrnmallat, r///, cka, challakkay chilakken^ 
c/timailak, imc/tallakkeny to cover over, as turn- 
makken'y ac/iallaky trans. 

chummallam, chinummallafny chachummal- 
Uufiy ger. chcdlamay anything that lies over 
another, as clothes, etc.; also to hang or put 
one thing over another. 

chummalt, chinummahy chachummalty ger. 
chattay inf. c/iattatty chinattany inochattany to pay 
a ransom for a murderer ; according to the old 
native custom, a pig for a man ; also to pay a 
fine for any misdeed ; pachalty trans, to cause 
such to be done ; also simply to give back or 
repay one thing for another, like for like, what- 
ever it be ; chachalty the punishment laid on 
any one as a ransom for murder; also the 
judgment that is annexed to murder ; atea zij- 
jja chachalt o tapos o ckoy until the day of the 
judgment of all men ; ma'OchachaUy a ransomer; 
that is, one who pays the ransom. 

chunimanied, chinmumaniedy chachummamed^ 
p;er. channiduy the screaming, howling, and ciy- 
mg, whether of children or adults. 

chnmrnannaglt, chiy chay channaghoy chamm- 
ghatty chinamiaghaHy itnchwmaghany to make a 




Vocabulary 



131 



notch in an arrow, in order to fix it on the 
string. 

ehnmmap, chinumapy chachummap^ ger. 
chappa^ inf. chappen^ chituxp, inochappen^ any- 
thing put into the ground; as chummap 
ffuuTta^ to plant anything in the ground, so 
that a part sticks up, as when people plant 
trees j also to shut a door, window, chest, etc., 
but with these two last meanings the word is 
changed into ichappa^ ichap^ imcAap, inoichap^ 
inf. chappoftf chinappan, inochappan ; chappen 
mocha barony to bury the dead, or to plant 
the trees ; ichap ja telp ja don, the chest or 
house is shut up ; chappen Ja telp, to shut a 
box; ma-achochap mocha, a sexton; mo- 
achachop a haxtep, a gardener; chachop, a 
plantation; also a planter; ditto, a^cover, a 
door ; ta chappen ja chappantd baron, bossor, 
baziep, etc., the earth covers the trees, roots, 
plants, etc 

chammappachappa, chinummappachappa, 
chachummappachappa, ger. chappachappa, stub- 
bom, shameless, haughty, to bawl and tear in 
a quarrelsome manner ; chummappachappo, cho, 
the same as; chummabal, chachappachappa, 
stubbornness; mO'achochoppachappa, a stub- 
bom, troublesome person. 

chommar, chinummar, chachummar, ger. 
charra, inf. charren, chinar, inocharren, ino- 
chaan, to bum up ; pachar, trans, cho chummar, 
aros baron, don charren ; or chaan, chaumon, 
people have set the grass on fire, and it is bumt, 
the fire consumes ; chuchar paga chachar assa- 
ban, there is a fire in the village ; ma-achachar, 
one who sets anything on fire. 

ohnxnmaraddo, chi, cha, charaddoa, charaddoon, 
chinaradodo, inocharadodoon, the same as rum- 
marro, to encircle ; pacharadodo, trans, chacho- 
radodo, nom. chummarapo, chi, cho, charopoa, 
charapoon, chtnarapo, inocharapoon, to cover a 
chamber with anything, to guard the window 
with a bamboo ; chacharapo, from pacharapo, a 
covering, or placing. 

ohtunmarillochillo, chi, cha, chariUochilloa, 
the writhing of snakes. 

chimmiarod, chinummarrod, chachummarrod, 
ger. charrodda, to put on one^s stockings; 
pacharrod, pi, pa, ipocharodda, to cause one to 
put on stockings; charroddas, chinarroddan, 
ino-charroddan, charroddan, ja asiel, the legs 
are covered with stockings ; charrod, ipachar- 
rod, the stockings are on ; charrod, stockings ; 
ipacharrod asia shiem, put on the child's stock- 
ings. 

chnnunarop, chinummarop, chachummarop. 



ger. charoppa, inf. champpan, imcharop, inocha- 
roppan, to gather and tikt up with the hands, 
as rice, baxley; also to raxe dirt together; 
pachorop, trans, chacharop, such scrapmg to- 
gether ; ma-achacharop, one who thus scrapes. 

chnmmarrad, the same as chummaUom. 

ohummaaclias, chinummaschas, chachummas- 
chas, ger. chaschassa, inf. chaschassen, chinas- 
chas, inochaschassen, to scrape anything even. 

chommat, chinummat, chachummat, it is high 
water, but this is only said of the sea, and not 
of rivers ; it is used when the water stands still, 
and does not flow; chachat, high water; so- 
banno,ja chummat ai? when is it high water? 
chummatja to, it is hi^h water. 

ohvnmiattad, chi, cho, chattadda, chattaddan, 
chinattoddan, inochottoddon, to shadow, to over- 
shadow ; pachattad, trans, nom. chattad, a 
shadowing; choitodan or chattodayan, a 
shadowy place, a covering for the sun. 

dmnmiaii, chinummou, chachummau, ger. 
chau-^, inf. chaucm, chinau, inochaunan, to 
sweep ; pochau, trans, chachau, a besom ; ma- 
2uchachau, a sweeper ; cho chummau, the man 
sweeps ; chauanjo don, the house is swept 

ehmnmo, chinumme, chachumme, ger. chia, 
to do that which is suitable. 

chnmmeoheo, chinummeocheo, chochummeocheo, 
cheoche-oa, cheocheoon, chineocheoon, inochto- 
cheoon, to bore a hole a little wider, as with a 
knife, the point of a bill, etc ; pacheocheo, pin- 
acheocheo,papacheocheo, ipacheocheoa, ipacheocheo, 
inipacheocheo ino-ipcuheocheo, to cause such to 
be done. 

eiinmmexiel, cMnummeriel, chochummeriel, to 
saw; cherilo, cherilen, inocherilUd; pocheriel, 
pi, pa, ipocheriUa, a saw; ma-ochacheriel, a 
sawyer. 

ohammero, chimtmmero, chachummero, ger. 
chera, inf cheroan, chinero, inocheroon, to 
make straight ; tachero, trans, chummero no 
tees, an upright forehead ; chacht-ro, nom. sub. 
a making straight ; also that by which anything 
is made straight. 

ehiumni, chinummi, chachunum, ger. cMa, 
inf chien, chini, inochien, to bore a hole with a 
bodkin ; chagchi, a bore. 

ohuxnmibar, chinummibar, chachMmmihar, ger. 
chibarro, inf. chibarren, chimbar, inochibarren, 
to stir about food in the cooking, that it may 
not be bumed ; also to row ; pocfabar, trans. 
chibarren, inochan, obak, the food is well stirred, 
or the boat is rowed; chachibar, a stirring 
about ; chachibar obak, the rowing of a boat ; 
ma-achachibar, a boatman, a rower. 



r 




132 



Favorlang 



oliimimltbl, cMnummcM^ chachummchi^ ger. 
icfttchia^ inf. ichicha^ inicMcAa, inochichiy to pour 
in, to cast in, as in a pot, can, or bottle, etc., to 
pour out ; pachicMi trans, chumma^ o to icAicAi, 
the beer, or water is poured out $ chummichi o 
to, bonnad, to pour out water or sand ; a turn- 
mis, to throw awav ; chachicM, a pouring out or 
pouring in ; chacmchi o to o chamma, a pouring 
out ot water or beer; ma-achachich, one who 
pours out, a cupbearer. 

chumnded, chinummed, chachummied^ chida 
c)ttdin, chiniedf inochiden ; from whence chidan, 
c/dmdan, inochidan, to draw with a pot or pail \ 
when anything is drawn out of one vat into 
another, the bucket is called c/ndan, as chidan 
ja mallo, a bucket for lading ; kaijo chacMchied, 
a receiving vat. 

chnminled, cM, cha, cfaeddan, chidden, chimed, 
inocMedden, to fence in, to inclose ^ porchied, 
trans, chached, a fence; ma-achachted, to in- 
close. 

ehamnileffj chtnummeg, chachummieg, ^r. 
chiegcha, inf. chiegchegen, chiniegch, inochteg- 
chen, to roast ; = summoso, pachieg, trans. 
chachieg tsi binnan, the Hsh or flesh is fried; 
chachieg, a roasting, or frying; maachachien, 
one who fries. 

chnmmillip, chinummUlip, chachummllip, ger. 
chilippa, inf. chilippen, chintlif, inochinitippen, to 
cut with shears; chummilUp naupoot, to cut 
linen; naupoot chilippen, the linen is cut up; 
chachiiip, scissors ; ma-achachitip, one who cuts 
with scissors. 

clminiuiine, chinummime, chachummime, che- 
mea, cheme-in, chineme, inocheme-in to press out 
pus from a boil; pacheme, pinacheme, papa- 
cheme, ipachemea, ipacheme, inipacheme, tno- 
ipacheme, to cause such to be done ; chummime 
soa, to press out a wound ; chemeis sou, the 
wound is pressed out ; cheme, pus. 

ehuinmliiiit, chinummmit, chachummimit, ger. 
chimta, inf. chimten, chinimit, inochimten, to 
secure, to cause to take care of, to protect, to 
rule, to take charge of; pachimit, trans, ma-ach- 
achimit, a superintendent, a ruler ; chachimit, a 
rule; pachimit, to take care of; pachimit o 
assaban, a garrison to take care of^a town. 

clinmmimo, the same as chummibar, 

chiumninnl, chi, cha, chinnia, chinni-in, chinni, 
ino-chinni-in, to grin, to laugh ; pachini, trans. 
cfiachinni, a grinning ; ma-achachinni, one who 
grins. 

duunmlnooh, chinumminoch, chachumminoch, 
chinoch-a, chinoch-en, chininoch, inochinochtn, 
that which is disapproved of in anger, or cast 



away in contempt ; pachinoch^ pOy pa, ^acJti' 
nocha, etc., to cause such to be done ; it betokens 
also to throw away anything in anger and 
break it in pieces. 

chommio, chinummio, chachummo, chsoa^ 
chioan, chimo, inochioan, to put away ; ckunmm 
no man michan patite, to avoid eating and 
drinking openly ; chummio no cho, to get away 
the people ; cho chioan, the people are gone. 

clmniinior, cMnummior, ckachummior^ to 
sprout forth as trees; paclaor, trans, oeteu 
pachior o barros, the rain makes the trees bud ; 
chioor, a bud. 

chummir, chi, cha, chirra, chirrom, chhdr^ 
inochirran, to hover as birds, when ther 
keep their wings still; pachier, to cause such 
to be done ; it is used also of trees or gnus, 
when they gently wave their heads. 

ehammlrrich, chirrichen, chimrrich, m^ 
chirrichen, to draw a right line ; pachirrich, pi, 
pa, ipachhrricha, ipachirrich, impachhrrich, 
ino-ipachirrich, to cause such to be done; 
chummirrich, as kummirrichy chacfmrrick, a right 
line. 

chunmlflcliis, chinummischis, chachunmtcMs, 
ger. chischissa, inf. chischisjen, chinischis, cm- 
chischissen, to produce fire by the rubbing of 
two bamboos together ; pachischis, trans, cmim- 
mischis o chau, to produce fire. 

chnmmlMl, cm, cha, cMsetta, chiuUem, 
chimisel, inochiseUen, to take by force what 
another has chosen, as a young maid, or goods 
of any kind. 

ohammo, chinummio, chachummo, choa, cktem, 
chino, ino-choon, pacho, trans, to lace anything 
with a string or rattan ; tiuries choon o sanies 
chacho, beads threaded on a string; chacham 
tairies, a stringing of corals. 

chnmmoa, chmummoa, chachummoa, ger. 
choa, inf. choan, chinoa, inocho-an, to Moe 
together; pachoa, trans, chachoa, a lacing 
together; chummoa o gagir, to lace the nets 
together, to fasten. 

ohummo-a-dio, chi cha, to root, to poke. 

cbmnmo-aclio-ar, chinummo-acho-ar, cha- 
chummo-ach o-ar; ger. cho-acho-arra^ inf. 
cho-acho-arren, chino-acho-^ir, ino^ho-achehiorrem, 
to mix one thing with another ; to stir up from 
the bottom; as chummibar ^ pacho acA^-ar, 
trans. 

clinmmoar, the same as chummibar. 

chnmmobbeohob, chinummobbechob, chachtm'^ 
mobbechob, ger. chobbechobba, inf. chMechobbem, 
chinobbechob, iwhchobbechobben, to tuck up, to 
strip up, as the sleeves of a coat ; also to sdr 




Vocabulary 



133 



up to diligence in work ; fachobechoob^ trans. 
cnacfubichoob^ nom. ; chummobechoob turn- 
fftaap^ to stir up, to work; cho^ chobechoben^ 
chuftmobbechob nba, lilt riba^ to strip up the 
sleeves, up to the armpits. 

chimiinoboii, cAinummobon, chachummobonf 
ger. ecAoboma^ inf. ickoboriy im-cAioboon, ino- 
cktoboftf to put into the sheath, to sheath ; 
cAobotptan, cninobonnan, inochobonnan \ pachoboriy 
trans. \ chobon^ nomen. a sheath. 

chimimod, chinummod, chachummod^ ger. 
chodda^ inf. chodden^ chinody inochoddefty to 
commit adultery, to seek an improper connec- 
tion, or the improper connection itself; sat 
fim, su chommod tna^ mirab pallo achachod^ 
sjiiMy there is a woman come to ask me to let 
her son go free; pachod, trans.; ckachod^ 
whoredom, adultery; ma-achachady a whore- 
monger, an adulterer. 

ohnmmolUohol, chinummolUcholy cha-chum- 
moUicholy ger. choUichoUoy inf. choUicholUny 
chinolUcholy inoc/tollic/wileft, to put out, to put 
away ; pacholUcholy trans. chachoUichol, 

duumndUlet, rAr, cha^ choUiettay choUietteny ino- 
choUiefiy inochoUietteny the same as hummahim- 
motto ; chachoUieny nom. chummoUicholp riba, to 
undress ; chummoUichol baxig/t, to flay ; nom. 

ehimiinollok, chinummoUoky chachummoUohy 
^r. choUokka, inf. choUokkariy chinoUokkafty 
tnochoUokkatiy to change things of the same sort 
one with another, whether openly or in secret ; 
pachoUoky trans. ; chachoUoky to exchange, 
Darter; chachoUok arribUy to exchange fur- 
niture. 

ohummomaoli, chinummomachy chachum- 
momachy chomachay chomachetiy chinomachy 
inocho-machetiy to rub ; chummomach sassiy to 
salt ; pacho-machypipapa-chomachy ipachomach-ay 
ipachomachy inipachomachy ino-ipiuhomachy to 
cause such to be done ; chummomach aboy to 
plaster with lime ; chachomach abo a plaster- 
ing. 

ohmnmomoohomo, chinummomochomoy cha- 
chummomochomoy chomochomoay chomochomooHy 
cMnomochomoofiy inthchomochomoofty to rub any- 
thing gently with the palm of the hand ; 
pachomochomOy to rub with the hand any place 
that itches. 

drammonagh, chiy chay chinaghay chonagheHy 
chinonaghy ino-chonagheny to tempt; iutnmaUay 
ditto ; tachonaghy as hdala ; ma-achachonagy as 
ma-alalay a tempter. 

clinininonolioii, chiy chay chonchonnay a plough ; 
ponchonchosy to plough ; chachonchoHy a plough- 
ing. 



oliiimmo-Oi cfnnumnuhCy chachummo^y to 
spring out of the ^und ; pachihOy piy pay 
ipachthoay ipacho-Oy tnipacho-Cy ino-ipacho-o, to 
arise, to spring up ; cho-Oy a sprout. 

olinnixiioselios, chimimmoschasy chachum- 
moschosy ger. choschossay inf. choschossniy 
chifioschosy inochoschosstHy anything badly, or 
niggcdly cut. 

ohmninofohos, chiy choy choschosscy pass- 
choschosseny chinoschosy inochoschossefiy idem 
tummaschoSy to cut off; pachoschos, trans. 

chnmmote, chinummotey chachummoiiy chotetiy 
chotCy chittotty inochottHy to punish ; as tummea 
and pachote'y chachotiy punishment; ma-achor 
chotfy punisher. 

olinmmottol, a blow with a fist 

olminpe, chtnumpey chachumpty ^er. chtppea^ 
inf. chuppeiny cUmippey inochtippetfiy bamboos 
made flat like boards ; pachuppty trans. 

dramplr, chinumpiry chacfmrnptTy chuppirra^ 
chupptrntty chitnpifTy ino-chupfirreny to break 
through ; as men say, chunoptr arrosy tOy 
axjiesy to push through the grass, the water, the 
enemy, etc. ; pachuppiry pinachuppiry papachttp- 
piry tpachuppirray to cause such to be done; 
chachuppify a breaking through ; chachuppir 
tOy the bresiking through of water. 

chumpod, chinumpody chachumpody to spring 
out of the ground, as water. 

oliiimrar, chiy cha, the shooting forth of many 
sprouts from one root 

dramsan, chinumsany chachumsoHy the in- 
and expiration of the breath ; it differs from 
pauchoTy which means, to blow strongly; 
chachsasy nom. the breath. 

ohappe, a flattened piece of bamboo; fr. 
chumpod, 

chnppin, the woof of a garment ; thuppin 
naupoot. 

ohappod, a well, a fountain ; fr. chumpod. 



da, an aflix, as macha-doy dead, dry; 
baday wise, to know. 

daal, a straw; after the seed is threshed 
out 

daai, the scales of a flsh. 

dabe, a pail, a water-pot. 

daehum, the shadow or darkness which the 
clouds make on the ground, when they obscure 
the sun, for otherwise the shadow of a tree is 
called rofifw ; *uerbumy trndach-mm ; padach-um^ 
trans. 

dadaeli, the stalk of plants, melons, etc. 

A^Aiim\imA^ a daucc ; Ir. dummalisu. 

dartdami, the crop of birds. 





134 



Favorlang 



dagh, over, done ; ka daghja zicAU^ the sor- 
row is over; ka daghja tnapich^ the fight is 
done; ka dagh ja oba^ the drowsiness is 
past. 

dakrap, cannot well be translated ; dakrapja 
mampa^ there sits the bird ; intuu bonna da mat 
dakrapy I am come out of the field, and here I 
sit. 

dalai, a platter. 

dallasBan o l>am, darri darri, a clock. 

dalli, a wagtail $ hence the proverb, tumcha 
masoan, sat don ja dalli, nameroos ja badda, 
masumak ja baas, the northern monsoon 
approaches, the swallow returns to her house, 
the bachelors wish to marry, it is now the time 
for pairing. 

dalloleef, a tree like birch. 

dasso, rice. 

datta, the bank of a river; written datta^ 
laUabbo, lobbokas, the seashore. 

danUrrap, a double flute on which people 
play with their nostrils. 

dautaUitlielien, the little finger. 

daxino, a flying kite ; as taz-i. 

daido, the blade of a sword or knife, to which 
the handle is fixed. 

de, in, somewhere, there ; de don, in the house ; 
de Tackais, near Tackais ; but the de is com- 
monly joined to two other words, as lelium 
(also UiUum), and pana, which the first means 
* in,* and the second ' there ' ; thus, instead of 
the above, they say, de lelium don, pana de Jac- 
kals ; de is not seldom found after innai, and 
thus serves to point out a place ; as inndi (also 
iw//), de errenerren j fr. Favorlang j de means 
also near, paga barron de tabaipau ja don \ nata- 
roa, mini, de lelium, inni, is of the same mean- 
ing ; sometimes / is used, as kakoren i barrien, 
for lelium. 

declio, they. 

deeg dllUJ, any evil that we deserve, or have 
brought on ourselves; thus they ssLy,jo a deeg, 
or ddlij, it is well arranged, you have your 
deserts. 

dema, who, what, which, where. 

dema, indema, indea, inde, de, are all of one 
meaning, as pana dema, pana de, where are you 
going? N.fi. numma is sometimes used for 
de?na, as mosse-numma for mosse-dema, where are 
you going ? 

dicli, a sickness ; fr. madich, 

dille, all sorts of young birds, just hatched 
and not yet fledged. 

dixnmo, zinemmOf dadimmo, ger. doa^ inf. doon, 
zinoon, inodoon, to pull upwards, to hoist, as 



people draw water out of a well ; pado, tram.; 
dummono dale, to draw up a pitcher ; dabe ka- 
doon, means also to take a pot off the fire, 
dipa, lest 
dippi, iron. 

doat, coarse long grass, a jungle fiiU of reeds 
and rushes, such as grow on the banks of riven 
and morasses. 

dogli, manner, custom; kadogh, costume, 
ceremonies ; kadog o assaban, kadog o ambaai, 
the custom of a village, the usage of former 
years ; the same as madarram, to be accustomed 
to. 

dollldol baron, the top of a tree, 
don, a house, a great vessel ; don o adonm^ 
a kitchen, a cook-house. 

doogli, to beat ; ka doogh ja na oeno^ my 
head beats; syn. iummok^ to beat; doegA hat 
no tenses. 

dorren, the lips; dorrogen, slanting, wiy 
teeth. 

dadappul, nom. arson; ma adaddupu!^ one 
who sets on fire. 

dumbor, zinumbor, tadumbor, doborra^ 
doborren, zinobor, inodoborren, padabor^ trans, 
to take away against one's will; as maupis 
poas ka sai dumbor na mochanja madoy the dog 
has taken away my food, to constrain another 
to do anything, either willingly or not, to hokl 
fast, and not to let go ; as tnadabdab, elli pittol 
meac/ia, dombor o maumali o meroos ; dumber 
arribil, dumbor o cho, to take away clothes, to 
steal a man ; nomen. subst. daddobor, dadJobor 
ballag, depriving another of his goods ; ma 
adilobor, an oppressor, a tyrant. 

dummaat, zinummaat, tadummaat, ger. 
daatta, to approach, to draw near ; passi. daatiem, 
dssnaat, inodaaiten, that which is approached ; 
padaat, to draw near; dumtnadaat, intens.; 
tadiiaat, a drawing near ; dummaat o assabam o 
sabba, dummaat ta deon, to draw near a village, 
or a river, to draw near to God. 

dnmmachal, dsi, tad, dach-alla, dach-aUen^ 
zinach-al, ino^iach-allen, to turn over the 
ground with a sjKide or hoe; pailach-al^ 
daddach-al, a digging up, also a hoe; ma 
ataddach-al, a digger. 

dommadach, dii, tad, dadacha\ dadachen^ 
etc., to climb ; padadach, trans. 

dummaggo, zinummaggo, tadummaggo, imp. 
daggo-a, not to stand upright, to overhang, is 
generally said of men, houses, trees, etc ; 
padaggo, trans, dummaggo, o moddan asjoddom^ 
the gable or wall hangs over; tade^Oy nom. 
subst. 





Vocabulary 



13s 



dnnmuikkalf dsi^ taJ, see tummakkal^ to 
bind } daddakkaly a ribbon, a bandage. 

dimmialimoffliy sdnummalimogA, tadummali- 
moghf is said of the sky, when it appears hazy 
as in a drizzling shower ; dummalimogh husum, 
the sky is lowering. 

dfunmalixi, %i, tad, dalizia, dalisdan, xi- 
naliza/tf inodaliztan, to dance ; padali:d, trans. 
daddaUzi, a dance; ma adaddatixi, a 
dancer. 

dmmnallap, dsi, tadum, dalappa, to thatch a 
house with grass, that is when a portion of the 
old thatch remains. 

dnminapi zinummap, tadummap, dappa, dap- 
pen, xinap, inodappen, = chummagchil, to over- 
take. 

- dnnunapal, zinummapal, tadummapal, ecr. 
dapalla, inf. dapaUan\ dapaUan baron, bato 
astel, rima oenoete idapal, idapal, inidapal, tnoida- 
pal, zinapaUan, inodapedlan, to run a^inst any- 
thing, as kadoogi padatal, trans, daddapal, a 
push, a clash ; daddapal asiel, to knock the 
foot against anything. 

dnmmaraggadaggal, sdnummaraggadaggal, 
iadummaraggadaggal, darraggadaggalla^ to 
stumble. 

dnnmiaran, xinummarau, tadummarau, ger. 
darau-a; inf. daraun, xenarau, inodaraun, to 
bend half round, to make a semi-circle ; padarau, 
trans, madarau, semi-circular ; neutr. daddarau, 
a semi-circle. 

daxnmaraudan, to make into a circle \ imp. 
daraudaun, a circle. 

dammaribodlbo, the same ; imp. taribodiboa, 
modaraudau, modaribodibo, like a circle; 
daddaraudau, daddaribodibo, a circle. 

dmnniariei, zinummaries, tadumfnarries, ger. 
darriesa j inf. idarries, inidarris, inoidarries, 
darriessan, inidarries, inodarriessan, to lock up 
or fasten; padarries, trans, chachap idarries, 
don darriessan, to fasten on a lid, to lock up a 
house ; daddarries, a lock. 

dmnmarraab, xinummarrab, tadummarrab, 
ger. darrabba, inf. darraban, xinarraban, ino 
darraban, to line, or to fix the lining in a gar- 
ment ; also to put one garment over another ; 
also to live in adultery ; padarrab, trans. 

dnnunarradarrab, the plural of the preced- 
ing ; p€idarrab, trans. ; hence dardarab, lining. 

dnxninarram, xinummarram, tadummarram, 
ger. darrama, to practise one^s self in anything, 
IS used both for teacher and learner ; passi. dar- 
ramen, dsimarran, inodarrammen, dummarran, 
tummoch bido, to practise one^s self in read- 
ing, is verbum act.; dummarram sisjiem 



tummoch bido, the children exercise themselves 
in reading; madarram, = maba, to know; 
padarram, dummarram, acho maba, not yet 
known ; dummarram meach ta deos, to practise 
one's self in praying to God ; daddaram, nom. 
exercise ; daram, to exercise one's self; tadda- 
ram, one who is practised ; daddarran aiacha, 
a meeting for prayer; ma adaddarram, one who 
exercises himself or another. 

duininarrogigodoggo, XAnummarrogigodoggo, 
tadummarogodoggo, ger. darroggodoggo-a, to walk 
double, as old people or those who are deformed 
do, to spy out anything ; the same as kokkoUen, 
pikkon Jtes, bent at the end ; daddarreggodcggo ; 
nom. the same as ababad pikkon, a hunchback. 

damniasdiB, dsi, tad, imp. daidissen, to sit, 
to squat down, as when men sit on their heels ; 
padasdis, trans, nom. daddasdis, 

dommau, to do anything in the place of 
another, or to succeed to one, dsi, tadum\ 
imp. daua ; nom. dau, instead of another ; 
maanau, one who comes in the place of another 
to do or suffer anything for him. 

dnnunankaiika, xinummaukauka, tadum- 
maukauka, ger. daukauka-a, is said of drunkards 
who go staggering about the streets. 

dammauko, xtnummauko, tadummauko, ger. 
daukoa, to lift up the head high, either because 
people can see with difficulty, as mitebabo baak, 
merely to look up high ; inomaso kummeriei, 
to pay the more attention ; padauko, trans. 

dnmmeodeo, xinummeodeo, tadummeodeo, lone 
and trailing, as a long garment, a long tai^ 
lone hair, etc. ; dumeo£o, arriba, tau, the gown 
trails, the hair hangs long. 

dommeosli, zinummeogh, tadummeogh, ger. 
deogcha ; inf. deogchen, xineogh, inodeogchen, to 
brush or nib off ; dummeego sesnab, to brush 
down with a brush: dummeog rima, to rub 
down with the hana ; padeoch, trans, taddeock, 
nomen. subst ; dummeogk magcha, to rub the 
eyes ; dummeogh nok, to blow the nose. 

dammlrdir, dsi, tad, dintirra, dirderren, dis- 
imrdir, nom. dirdir, to tremble; as tummirthr, 
act. ; padirdir, trans, dadirdir, nom. a trembling; 
maadaddirdir, one who shakes another. 

dunxnlUiii, scinunumttin, tadummittin, ger. 
dittina, to stop half way, not to go on. 

dmnmo, sweat. 

dummo-an, scinummo-an, inodummoan, to 
sweat ; dummoanja ina, I sweat ; dummo, sweat. 

dnmmoai, dsi, tad, doassa, doassen, dsinoas, 
inodoassen, is said of liquor when it is too fresh, 
that people may make it more sour or more 
sweet ; padoas, trans, daddoas, dmmmoas mackock^ 





136 



Favorlang 



to put some more add in it ; daddoas^ make it 
sweeter. 

dammoMob, tsi^ ta^ dohdohha^ dobdohheny 
dsinobdob^ ma dobdobben, to wake up any one ; 
padobdob^ trans. ; sadobdob^ nom. ; ma addobdob, 
one who wakes up another. 

dummocholy zinummocAolf tadummochol^ 
dochoUa^ dochoUettf xinocAoi, ino dochoUeriy to 
strike with the fist on the breast; dadochol^ 
nom. 

dummodoB, dsi^ tad^ didossa^ pass, do dossen, 
etc., ja to, to tap, or let off liquor ; padodosy 
trans. 

dummoAlalllB, zimimmoeialiis, tadummoeiallts, 
eer. doelalissa, inf. doelalissen, zinoelaliis, 
tnodoeUdlissen^ to hit people slightly, without 
hurting them. 

dnnunorab, zimimmorab, tadummorab, dorab- 
ben, scinorrab, inodorrabben, the beating in of 
rain into a house, through a door or window. 

dnnunoragli, %i, ta, ger. doragcha, inf. to 
flay, chummorach, idem. 

dummorat, zinummorat, tadummorat, ger. 
doratta, inf. doratten, zinorat, inodoratten, to 
relieve } chummorat, idem. ; padorat, trans. ; 
dadoraty nom. 

dummori, zinummori, tadummori, ger. dorria, 
to deny, to speak against. 

dummoro (the last sounded short), 
zinummoro, tadummoro, ger. dorroa, to go in; 
contract, dorro, dsinorro, etc., daddoro, nom. 

dummosdof , dsi, tad, dosdossa, pass, dosdossen, 
etc. ; ja ta, to trail one^s feet on tlie ground -, 
padosdos, trans. 

dompnl, z/, ta, duppulla, duppulUn, dsinumpul, 
inoduppuUen, to set on fire ; paduppul, trans. 

dnppocli, the hair of all kinds of beasts, also 
of the human body. 

edimma, pot-herbs. 

e-e, mead, honey and water. 

eab, firewood, oxallola. 

eet, firewood. 

elobam-an, anything to drink out of; fr. 
micham, to drink. 

elohaman obatto, a tobacco-pipe. 

elll, to deny, as with us, no } but it is only 
used in connection with another word, as elli 
mabisse oasies, your heart is not true ; elti pa 
is so common tnat nothing can exceed it, and 
yet I do not know what is the real meaning of 
It ; it seems to signify that something is not in 
existence; as, elu pa ja adda de assahan 
amisan\ or that something is not in one's 
possession ; as, ellipa ja oa bido ina-ai, the first | 



of which I cannot otherwise understand than 
that < there is no rice in the village on the 
north,* and the other, <I have not got your 
book * ; see iff alU. 

ema, a field. 

erab, spittle ; the will. 

eran, certain small beans. 

erien, the hip. 

erotorutto, a toad. 

gaat, a point; fr. maggaat ^ gummaat, gi, 
ga, gata, gatan, ginaat, to sharpen, to bring 
anything to a point, to carve; giftaatg cut; 
gagaat, a sharpening ; ma-agagaat, to sharpen | 
ma-aggaat, a sharpener. 

gagoor, the penis. 

galan, the stomach. 

geninea, gi, ga, gea, to belch, to eructate } 
pagea, trans, nom. ; gagea, a belching. 

giaebo, water mixed with herbs, with which 
the women wash the houses. 

gldaig-gld, a fish. 

glecb, a word that is used when anjrthingteark 

glroan, half. 

goeng, a pipe, a vat 

gomlla, gi, ga, imp. gomiia, pass, gomilam^ 
etc., to blow out the gills ; pagomd, trans, gag^^ 
mil, nom. 

gorrogot, or gogoptoto, a dove ; don ogorrog§tf 
a dovecot. 

gummabgab, gi, ga, gab^abba, the cutting of 
paddy or millet ; rummabies, idem ; pagabgab, 
trans. 

ff^^i>i''^^^<^l^l^<^> Sh g^f gachhacha, pass. 
gachhachen, etc., pagachhach, trans, to hoe 
away the ground from a house in a sloping 
direction ; gagachhach, nom. 

gammaggri,^*,^^, gagria, the same as gum" 
magidsi, 

gnxnma-iecb, gi, ga, ga-iecha ; pass, ga-ieckam^ 
gi-na-iech, ino-ga4echen, to bear, to endure ; act. 
paga-iech, trans, gagariech, a lengthening ; act. 
maagagaitch, to lengthen, to delay, one who 
delays. 

gnxnmatacb, gi, ga, gatacfta, gatachen, gtma- 
tach, inogatachen, pagatach, trans, gatach, nom. 
to split up large pieces of wood; but when 
bamboos are spoken of, pilla is used ; it is also 
U5ed in the cutting up of pumpkins, melons^ 
plantains, etc. 

guxnmeacb, r/, ga, giacho, giachen, gimack, 
ino-giachen, to fence or secure ; people say alto 
giachen ja sahba, as if the river were suddenly 
swollen, and therefore a fence was made ; pagt- 
ach, trans, nom. gagiach, a fence. 




Vocabulary 



137 



gammamgan, the same as gummoch, 

gnmmeooh, gi^ gay geocha^ to thatch a house. 

gunimesar (let die 'e' be scarcely heard), 
giy ga, gesarra, gesarratty the same as gummid- 
diggit \ gcsoTy just as if people said gsar^ a 
gripe, a handful. 

gnmmlach, gi, ga, giacAa, giacAen, giniacA, 
inogiachen^ to stretch out the arms, as lazy 
people do ; as paggeas^ merely, to reach out the 
arm, leg, finger, etc., neut. magiach, 

gumxniddiggit, gi^ ga^ guLUggitta^ giddiggit- 
ten, gimddiggit, sno-giddiggitten, to close the 
hand ^ also to grasp anything fast, nom. gagid- 
diggit, a fist. 

gnrnmigidfli, gi, ga, gagidjia^ to tickle, 
act fagagiesif trans, gagidjt, a tickling ; maaga- 
gidst, a tickler. 

gninmo, small. 

gnminocb, gi, ga, gocha, gochen^ giftoch, ino- 
gochy pagoch, trans., gagoch^ nom. to bind 
together. 

gammomacli, ^', ga^ gomacha, gomachen, 
ginummachy inogomachen, to nib out anything 
that is drawn or written; fagmnach^ trans., 
gagomachy nom. 

gnnmab, gi^ ga, gnabba, gnabben, ginab, ino- 
gnabben^ to begin; as ptat and pto\ gagnab, 
nom. as paptat, 

baadid, a bamboo pole to carry with. 

bai, a denial, used only in foroidding, as hat 
magiepe, make no noise. 

baiboi, the devil. 

bema, all kinds of fat on man or beast; 
written ema \ hemo tiliij, badger's fat ; written 
emotillij. 

berlen, the hip ; see erien. 

hanftigo. 

ibian, a snake ; * ibien ota^ small red snake, 
makaka*^ ibien aras, korrokarroan^ a spotted 
snake; ibien abo, a large-bellied snake, ma- 
toatsi ; ibien baron, or isaijs, a snake hard in the 
back, mattilo, maraas asieg; ibien marali, a 
snake with large eyes, matoto macha\ ibien 
ribiu snakes that creep quietly alone the g^round 
ancf remain in the granaries; *ibten atei^ a 
snake that blows its cheeks up, mato a ri\ 
* ibien boesum korrokorron mausi, snakes 

rtted with black and white ; * ibien tagotago 
ibaSy korrokorroan mekach, mausi, malt kach 
ja ki-oTf snakes found in the sea, spotted green 
and white, with broad tails. 



icbien, a hook, like a parrof s bill 

icbo, he. 

Idas, the moon, also a month. 

idod, a shell, also a spoon ; fr. midod^ to lade 
out. 

idooxn, doits, small coin. 

idorrodomis, a fan, a species of mouse. 

iel-iel, a mulberry ; baron iel-iel, the mul- 
berry tree ; bo* iel-iel, the fruit 

iem-dan, small fiery pimples. 

ieran, small trees. 

i-Jojnm, a chicken ; also kuki-jum. 

ikkll, fear ; fr. mikkil, afraid. 

Ima, ye. 

imlgb-igh, inimigh'igh, amigh-igh, ^r. igk- 
igha, inf. igh-ighen, mgh-igh, ino-igh-tghen, to 
gnaw, to nibble; indgh-igh aso, to bite the 
nails. 

imoch, weeds. 

imogl^ all kinds of herbs that spring out of 
the ground, weeds. 

ink, I, mine, it serves also to point out 
every kind of cause (except the immediate) ; 
ina elU arioon, pattas btdo^ ina papagcha jo^ 
because you do not write well, I will flog you. 

Inab, the will ; fr. merab, 

Inalnnmina, as innai demo, 

inan, trees. 

inanwmitn asks evcry kind of cause, except 
the immediate ; inaummima jo pi^cha ina? why 
do you strike me ? 

Ina-o, because, therefore ; perhaps &om itmau 
and innau ntimma. 

indeeho seems to mean ' therein.* 

indema T who, what, in what place ? indea, 
the same, also edea, 

inUdrrlgli, a line drawn; fr. knmmrrich^ 
pass, praet 

innki, from a place ; 9%fana^ to a place. 

innal doma T whence, nom what pbce ? ka 
mm jana, innai Takais ? from whence do you 
come, from Takais? people also say, itmm 
demajo mabaddai T whence know you that ? 

Innl, in a place ; ima Taiwan, m Taiwan ; 
inni don, in the house. 

Ino betokens the immediate cause, as to, in 
order to ; ino airien arrar, in order to make a 
railing. 

inoehan, all kinds of food. 

Inonmnma T why, wherefore ? this asks after 
the immediate cause. 

IniiBl, here. 

left, ye, you. 



* Thote msrked thni arc very poisonoai. 

S 



138 



Favorlang 



isa, I, inisa, a-isa, imp. pass, isasoft, imsa, 
inoisasan, to imitate ; paisasoy trans., isasy nom. 
a likeness. 

isabbesab, inisabbesab, ino-habbesab, struck 
down ; isahbesab i ta, beat down to the ground, 
as millet or rice in the field. 

isan morrl o otao» the break of day. 

iyoiy a basket. 

i-yo-3nun, a chicken. 

1x168, a sand-hill. 

UJled, a sand-hill. 

Ja, a particle denoting interrogation; ja 
matlarram jonoe ta Deos o BausieF do you know 
the God of the Dutch ? 

Jenmanat T whv do you give me that ? 

Job, the roe of nsh. 

kabel, a sack made of bulrushes, a purse. 

kadslei, a rat ; kaJzys, ditto. 

kager, a fisherman^s net ; fr. kummir. 

kagll, certain, sure ; written gagiL 

kagUlaolio, rich, affluent. 

kalbll, a swallow. 

kalian, in order that, perhaps not; as 
dopa, 

kalrl, the left; ma kairi, verbum; kairi a 
ri/fta, the left hand ; kairi a tea, the left arm ; 
kairi o magcha, the left eye. 

kakalbach, a brush. 

kakallomos, the womb. 

kakam, a chair. 

kakaronot, the partition in the nose. 

kakas, redness ; verb, makakas. 

kakattOB, a razor ; fr. kummatos. 

kaklrrlgli, a line, or long stripe; see 
chachirrichy under ch. 

kakosacli, a chisel ; fr. kummahesach. 

kakossl, disobedience, transgression, fr. 
kummogi, 

kale, see dalli, 

kallaman, a great pot. 

kallamas, the right ; kallamas a rima^ atea, 
magcha^ the right nand, arm, or eye ; verbum, 
makallatruu. 

kamachaggl, kaminacAaggi, kamamachaggi, 
to know certainly ; kamachaggi o maba, idem ; 
merien o chagchi^ to do anything to purpose. 

kaman, relations by marriage. 

kamaa, a he-goat. 

kamkam, covetousness ; see magamgam. 

kamosslmoB, also kamossi^ a field-rat. 

kar, and karri^ compounded with nouns, 
signify the same as tnau, when compounded 
with nouns or verbs, to do anything mutually. 



karm, gristle. 

karo, a grasshopper. 

karri, or mau^ aan a tamnuu^ or karri^ or 
maUy aatiy o rarozi, is the manner of the natives 
when they will make a treaty of peace with 
each other, they pluck a thread out of each 
other^s clothes and eat it up, which is a sign of 
peace ; this contract is made midway between 
their villages. 

karrlaan, mau-aan, ki, ka, karri, auima^ to 
eat together, to give food to each other. 

karrl-ada, ki, ka, karri-ada, to share ; idem, 
mausaJa, 

karrl-apleok, kinarri-apiecA, ka karri-apUcA, 
karri-safiecha, to fight with each other ; idem, 
mau-aptech, 

karrl-atlto, ki, ka, karri-atita, to speak 
together or to converse; idem, karri-ala, and 
mau-ala, to tell each other. 

karrl-bablsso, to cast lots ; in the chan^ of 
tenses, karri is inflected and not babisso i kt, itf, 
karri, babissoa, ditto, maubabisso, 

karrlohl, wrath, anger ; fr. makaricho, 

karrlkles, a muscle. 

karrl-mau, ki, ka, karriau^ aumsa, belonging 
to each other. 

karrlsasopat, ki, ka, karrisasopatta, to stand 
over against each other. 

karr-tattubboel, ki, ka, karautaiubbeela^ to 
pay visits backwards and forwards, idem, mum- 
tattubboeL 

karsasaklmotto, see mausasakimotto, 

kartattlB, to throw before each other ; kiHar- 
tattis, kakartattis, im. karattisa. 

kattacli, a piece of anything; differs from 
bitd, and is said of fish or flesh ; kattack 9 
ariem, o bilpil, o abi, o baat, a piece of a citron, 
plantain, betel-nut, or pumpkm ; written' also 
gatach, see gummatach. 

kau-08, a hoe. 

kaur, a reap hook or scythe ; fr. kummaur. 

kayo, a tincture, anything drawn out. 

klacli adda, a branch of the paddy stalk. 

klbaoh, a notch, shears; see mokiback^ 
notched. 

kler, a tail. 

klklet, a rent ; fr. makikiet. 

kUal, an earth-worm. 

kl8-ln, fine, adorned ; as mauchus, malla, 

kls-taboe, as koU-akis, 

klttaa, a bridge, a ladder. 

klau, a flute blown through the nose. 

ko, a word of strong denial, as no, by no 
means ; sometimes also koa and k(hm. 

koekoen o oog, a cuckoo. 




Vocabulary 



139 



koeii, few, smaJI of itself; smaller than many 
is ma'jed\ written kots'u 

kokkOy a hen bird. 

kokko-an, hard of hearing, deaf. 

k6kko badda, a cock. 

kokko Bini, a hen. 

kole, a lark \ hole a kis, a yellow finch. 

koUgga, a frog ; goiiggo, TaJkeis, 

korro-an, party-coloured. 

korrokorro-an, very much variegated. 

koxTonot, certain small vermin. 

kumbor, kinumboTy kakumbor^ ger. kohorra, 
inf. koborren, kinebor, ino-koborren, to draw 
water, to lade. 

knmmaar, kinummaar, kakummaar, ger. 
kauroy inf. kauron, kinaar, inokauron, to reap, 
to mow ) kaur, nom. a scythe, a reap hook. 

kanmiaarohab, ki^ ka^ kaarcAabba, to break 
wind ; ka, kaarchaby foul wind. 

kammaat, kinummaat, kakummaaty ger. 
kaattOy inf. kaattan, kinaaUafty ino-kaattany to 
dip, to cut,; written gummaat\ kummaat 
cAaaty to make a pen. 

kmnmabacli, kt, ka, kabachoy kabacherty kina- 
bachy inokabacheriy fakabachy trans, nom. kaka- 
bachy a sort of binding from under the bottom. 

kuxnmaber, kty koy kabberroy kaberrefiy kin- 
abbety ino-kabberre/fy pakabber'y also a kind of 
binding as kummabach kakabbety nom. such 
kind of binding ; ma-akakabbeTy a binder. 

kuxnmadoi, kinumfnadosy kakummadosy ger. 
kadossoy inf. kadosserty kinadosy ino-kadasseny to 
take in the arms. 

kmnxnagglmo, kinummaggimoy kakummag- 
glmOy ger. kooggimoay kooggimoofty kinaggimOy 
ino-kooggimoorty to bring into confusion ; 
written gumaggimo. 

knmxnai, ktnummaiy kakummaiy ger. kaioy 
inf. kai-iriy kinaiy ino-kai-m, to carry on the 
back ; written gummai. 

knmmaibach, kiy kay ka'tbachay kaibacheny 

kiftaibac/ty ino-kaibac/ien, to put on a sling ; pakai- 

bac/iy to cause such to be done; kakaibacYiy a sling. 

kuinmaiziii, kinummaiziziy kakummatTJxiy 

kaiziziay to do anything softly. 

kammalaclikaoli,)^/, kriy ka/ac/ikac//a, kalac hefty 
kinalachkac/ty imkalachkachen j pakalachkachy 
trans, to cut an animal in two, lengthways ; 
the same as summarabsab. 

knmmaUabei, kiy kay kallabeiany kinaUabeiany 
ino-kallabeian ; as kummabach, 

kninmalloboi, kinummallobosy kakummallobosy 
ger. kaUobossOy inf kallobosseriy kinalloboSy ino- 
kallobosun, to fold anytliing up, as tobacco- 
money, etc., in paper. 



koininalOBsikos, kinummalossikosy kakumma- 
lossikosy kalossikossoy inf. kalossikosseity kinaksji- 
kosy ino-kahssikosseHy to uncover, to discover. 

kommaloBsikot, kiy kay kalosjikottay kalossi- 
kotteriy kinalossikoty inokalossikotteny to curl, act., 
pakalossikoty trans., kakolosjikot, nom. a curling, 
a curl. 

knmmamiiio, kinummammoy kakummammoy 
ger. kammooy inf. ikammoy imkammoy itrnkammay 
to fold the arms lazily. 

knimnapier, kiy kay kapieray pass, kaperietiy 
kinapieTy ino-kapiereny to hook on; pakapiery 
trans, kakapiety a hooking on. 

kuxnmapoB, kinummaposy kakummaposy ger. 
kapossay kapossafty and kiftapos, kinapossatty tno- 
kapossaHy to stop up ; kammapoSy kaltamafty 
to close a pot; kummapos tarreny one who 
stops up a road ; kakoposy the stopping of an 
action ; ma akakapos, to stop up. 

kummaram, kinummaramy kakummaray eer. 
karamay inf karraman and kinarranty kin- 
arramaHy inokarramarty to rake together. 

kamxaargar, kinummargary kakummargary 
kargarroy kargarran, kinargarreny inogargarraUy 
when a house is in danger of being blown down 
by the wind to fasten it to a pole stuck in the 
ground ; also a vessel lying at anchor ; written 
gummargoTy gagargaty nom. an anchorage, a 
cable ; gagargaran aijany an anchorage, a road- 
stead. 

kammarini, to roll; kinummarimkiniy kin- 
ummarrimkiniy kakummarrimkiniy ger. karrini- 
kinioy inf. karrimkimetty kinarimkinieny inekar- 
rinikimerty to make round like a ball, to roll up; 
activ. written gummarim, 

kuxnmartnppo, kinummartuppoy kakumrnoT' 
tuppoy ger. kartupfoay to dive under water; 
kakartuppOy a ducking ; maakartuppoy a 
diver. 

kmnmanunmokuiimio, kinummarummokum- 
moy kakummarummokummoy ger. karummokum- 
mooy inf. kammmokummoofty kinarummokum' 
moony ino - karummokammoouy to wrinkle 
together, inf. gummarummogummoy nom. ga- 
garammogummay to rumple. 

kummiaia, kiy kay imp. kasay to dream ; 
pakasa, trans, kasay nom. a dream ; minit naa 
kasay I saw in my dream. 

kummaskaa, kinummaskasy kakummaskas, 
kaskassay inf kaskassetiy kinaskaSy inokaskassen, 
to scrape ; inf gummasgasy gagasgas. 

kummasfliefl, makes tlie superlative degree, 
as kummasies a matOy manoy the greatest, 
best 
knoiniatoay kimuHMotoSy kakummat$Sy ger. 



r 



140 



Favorlang 



katossa, inf. katossan^ kinatossitn, inokatossan, 
to scrape the beard. 

kummatiir, kinummattir^ kakummatir^ ger. 
katirra, inf. katirren, kinattiry inokatirren^ to 
bind with a long cord, as a fence and the roofs 
of houses are bound. 

kmnmatto, kinummatto, kakummatto^ ger. 
kattoa^ inf. kattoon, kinattoH^ ino-kattoon, to 
draw, to pull to one^s self; pakatto^ trans, ka- 
kattOf nom. people say ; kummatto no morabbies, 
the ebb begins to draw. 

knmmelokkolo, kinummelokkolo^ kakumme- 
lokkolo, ger. kolokkoloa, inf. kolokkoioan, kino/ok- 
kohan, inokolokkoloany to jump over any place. 

kummemnoli, ki^ ka^ kumga^ kinumga, kinu- 
muchy etc., to close the sleeve of a coat. 

kommenis, kinumrnenisy kakummems^ kimssa, 
khtisseft, kininis^ inokinissen, to appropriate what 
was common by division, or to tear anything in 
two; YfTittcn gummenees, 

kammeriel, k'tnumnuriel^ kakummeriel^ ger. 
krieUa, inf. krieUan, kimrieiian, ino-kriellan, to 
listen sharply ; kakriel, a listening ; ma-akak- 
riei, a listener. 

kommerles, ki, ka, kerisa, pass, kerises, 
kirieries, inokeriseSy to lay the head on one side, 
to take aim ; pakeries^ trans, kakeries, nom. 

knmmeroa, kinummeroa^ kakummeroa^ ger. 
keroa or eroa^ inf. keroan, or eroan^ kineroa, or 
ineroa, ina-keroan^ or ino-eroan^ to divide in 
two ; written gummeroay gageroa^ such division ; 
* the inflections come from peroOy see under p. 

kommi, kinumm, kakummi, ger. kia, inf. 
kian, kinian, inokian, imkkan, to look behind. 

Irommlagh, kinummiagh^ kakummtagh^ ger. 
kiagcha, inf. kiagchetty kimagc/i, inokiagchen, to 
stretch out ; kummiaghy asjiet^ to stretch out the 
legs ; written gummach, magiachy stretched out. 

kommiboklbo, kinummibokiboy kakummibo- 
kibOf ger. kibokiboay inf. kibokiboofiy kinibokibo, 
ino-kibokibooriy to disturb, as by quarrelling; 
pakibokibOf trans., kakibokibo, nom. 

kuxmnikiet, kinummkiet, kakum/nikiet, ger. 
kiekiedJay inf. kikieJJeny kinikiet, inokikieiUen, 
to tear anything in pieces ; pakikiedy trans, ka- 
kikieJy a rip. 

kumminkln, ki, ka, ki/ikin/ta, khikinneny kin- 
htken, iftokif/khmen, to clink as with small bells; 
pakinkiriy trans, kakinkiny a clinking. 

kommio, kinummioy kakummioy ki-o-a, kiooM, 
kineOy inokioorty to butt with the head, as goats, 
oxen, etc. 

kummiol, ki^ ka, kiolUiy kioUen, kiniol, 
inokoiUft, to sharpen at the point; act. pakioi, 
trans, kakioi ; ma-akakiel, one who points. 



knmmir, kinummir, kakummir, ger. kirra, inf. 
kirren, kimr, inokirren, to fisli with a net adied 
kagir ; inf. kummir, nom.gi^irf a net ; also fishing, 
kommirgir, kinummirgiry kakummirgir, ger. 
kirgirra, inf. kirgirren, kinsrgir, inokhrgirrem^ to 
erase, to cancel ; see gummirgir, nom. gaprgar^ 
an erasion, a cancelling. 

kuxmnirigli, kinummirighy kakummrigky ger* 
kierga^ inf. kiergan, kinirgan, i/tokirgan, to draw 
a line on paper or wood, etc ; kakirricA, a line, 
a ruler. 

knmmirkir, ki, koy kirkira, kirkirren, kimrktr, 
inokikhrren, one who gnashes with the teeth) 
act pakirkir, trans, kakirgir, a gnasliing ; $rta- 
akakirkir, to gnash. 

kummlrra, kkrafhy ki, ka, ger. khrra^ 
kirragcha, see kummtrragh, 

kammirragli, kinummirragh, kakummirri^A, 
ger. kirragcha, inf. kirragcheu^ khrrirrgack^ 
inokirragchen, to tear to pieces. 

kummiBsiklBBlel, kinummssikissiel, kakmrn- 
mssikissiel, ger. kissikissilla, slowly, to do any- 
thing quietly, whether walking, eating, working, 
etc 

kommlssoklBflo, ki, ka, kissokissoa^ kiss^- 
kissoon, kinissokisso, inokissokissooH, to move up 
and down as the tail of an animal; nuun 
kurmrussokisso, the dog wags his tail; ki§r, 
kissokissot, nom. kakisso, is said of the rudder of 
a ship because it moves backwards and for- 
wards ; otherwise kakisso, and kakissokisso^ the 
motion itself. 

kummitor, kinumndtor, kakummtor, ger. 
kittorra, inf. kittorren, kimtor, inokitorrem^ to 
plait anything, as a reed, bamboo, etc 

kommltta, ki, ka, kitta, kitian, khatta, 
inokittan, to stick the toot out behind ; paHUa^ 
trans, kakitta, a sticking out 
kummitUkit, written gummiMggit, 
kummoagli, kinummoagh, kakummoagk^ mr. 
kaoagcha, inf. kaoagchen, kinoagh, inokoagciim^ 
to loose, to unbind, to put off, as clothes ; it it 
also used respecting the mind, and means to 
draw in one's courage ; paka-ach, pi, pa, iptdto- 
ach-a, etc., to loose; kummoach obre^ to un- 
string a bow. 

kummoar, kinummoar, kakummoar, ger. 
koarra, inf. koarren, kino-ar, inoko-arren, to 
jump over ; kakoar, nom. a jump ; maakakoar, 
to jump. 

kummoen, kinummoen, kakummoen, ger. koeita, 
inf koenen, kinoen, inokoen, to imprison, to bind; 
kakoen, chains ; ka koen-an, a pnson. 

kununoesaoh, to chisel ; ki, ka, kakcesacJk, a 
chisel. 



J 




Vocabulary 



141 



knmmogli (written gummoch) kinumrnoch^ 
kakummoghy to bind ; ger. kogcha^ inf. cogchen^ 
kinoghy inokogchettf kummogh loan 1 barron^ to 
tie the horse to a tree $ nom. gagoch^ a bindinZ' 

knmmoglikooh, kinummoghkochy kakummogh- 
kochy jger. koghkogchoy inf. koghkogchen^ kinog- 
koghy tno-koghkogchefty to wasli out. 

kununolrot, kinummokot, kakummokot^ ger. 
kokottOy to lie bent 

kununoliet, as kummcdback. 

knimnolot, kiy ka, imp. kobttOy pass, kobtteny 
kinohty inokolotten, to loathe } pakdot, trans. 
kakoloty a loathing. 

kninmoinogli, kinummomoghy kakummomoghy 
^er. kummogchoy inf. kummogcheny kinummoghy 
tnokummo^cheny this word is only added to 
faniedy rtmay and rr'^a, signifying to shut up 
the mouthy the hand, or the clothes. 

knmmomolnmunOy kinummomokummoy kakum- 
mokummoay kummokummoofiy kinummokummoony 
inokummokummoony to rub the hands one against 
the other. 

kummono, kinummonoy kakummonoy ger. 
koHooy kono-OKy kiftonoafiy inokonoany to bear, to 
endure; kakoeno, patience, endurance; ma- 
akakoenOy one who is patient 

knmmoragli (written gummorach)y kinum- 
moraghy kakummoraghy ger. koragcAa, inf. 
koragchefiy kinoracA, intens. to flay; nom. 
gagorachy ma-agagwrachy a flayer. 

knmmossl, kiy koy kossioy kossiatiy kinossiy 
in<hkossen 'y ftakossi, trans., to disobey, act. 
kakossiy wickedness, disobedience ; tna-akakossiy 
a wicked fellow; pakossiy /f, pay pakossiay 
ipakossi-iny inipakossiy inopakossiy to disobey. 

knmmotkot, ki, ka, kotkottay to bow, as 
lummogot, 

knnunumkam, kiy kay kumkummay to lay hold 
of with all the Angers at once; pakumkumy 
trans., kakumkuMy nom. 

knmpi, kinumpiy kakumpiy ger. kufioy inf. 
kuppietty kinuppiy inokuffietiy to fold up, to roll 
up, to pack together in a box. 

kamral, kiy kay to crawl ; used only of plants 
and vegetables. 

knmrar, kiy kay karray to open, to unfold the 
hands only ; kumrar rimai. 

knmiljr, kinumxijry kakumxijry ger. kiaajrray 
inf kixirreny kiemajry inokixijrreny to nip, to 
pinch, to pick, to pluck ; people say also, 
kumxijr tthi, draw out a splinter ; kakezJjry a 
nip. 

kuppi, anything folded or rolled up, a 
bundle ; kupf*i aJkakaSy a roll of silk ; kuppi 
bazig/iy a roll of deer skins. 



lAbiat, the tusks ; baho labisan^ a bear with 
tusks. 

lablab, a pan, a shovel ; fr. paJabiab, 

lAbo, suided to tOy means fruitful ; joined to 
baroHy it means weak, unable to work ; malaboy 
the verb. 

lallan, and lalian azijhja^ mid-day; Udian 
aidaSy midnight. 

lalka, the lightning; fr. lumka. 

lalla, boiled rice. 

Imllaas, a fine yellow kind of bark, which 
people use, and sometimes insert for ornament, 
as tneir spears are wound round with red rattan 
and this bark alternately, the natives also weave 
the same split very flne, here and there, in their 
own coats, for ornament. 

lallabaob, a green leek. 

lalladan, a cushion. 

lallama, pap made from rice and water. 

lallaUch, a wooden stand, for a light; fr. 
lummatagh, 

lallokogh, a comb ; fr. lummokogh. 

lallom, in, within; molaUumy in, deep; 
paolaUumf trans, to make anything deep, to dig 
deep. 

lalpl, the eyelashes. 

Utmo, the dew; verb, malamoy to bedew; 
bedewed, or damp. 

la-Ob, an out-nouse, where people keep all 
kinds of implements, rice, etc. 

la-obbomaa, an out-house, where people 
keep flsh or flesh ; compounded of la-A and 
momas, 

lenMOlato, inf. limmsoUsOy laUnesoUsOy Une- 
soUsoay to shout after the native manner, 
when the women have concluded a dance or 
song. 

libbo-adippi, tin. 

Udo, meaning, interpretation, explanation, Zf, 
lay Udoa ; palido, trans, lidoy opinion, meaning. 

llli, the armpit. 

llmka, linimkay lalimka, ger. ilka-ay ilka-afty 
lienka-afiy ino-ilka-OHy to lighten, to blink with 
the eyelids. 

llmmabit, liy lay labitta, labittetty DHobity itn- 
labitteHy to pinch between two; but to press 
underneath is jummerik ; it means also to press 
against another. 

limmioliob, limmmickoby lalimmmicAoby lick- 
obboy lichobbefiy Bnichoby imBchohbetty to sip. 

limmiod, tininuody lalimody Hodday uoddeity 
lifiiody ifiolioddeny to wring once round, to give 
one turn. 
lo, as roosy a shore. 
loan, a horse, cow, buffalo, etc ; alto a servant. 




14^ 



Favorlang 



a slave $ in this last sense the word is used in 
contempt or in anger. 

loki yum, a chicken. 

limmiala, Unummala^ lalummala^ lala^ lalan, 
iinala, inolalan, to induce, to incite to evil, 
also to haunt; palala, to tempt j laUda^ a 
temptation, a ghost 

Innunalak, Unummalak^ iaiummaJak, leUakka^ 
Uilakken, iniUak, inoleUakke/t, to threaten by 
word or action. 

Inmmalieeli, U, la, laliecha, iaiiecAen, linaUech, 
imlaUchen, a little sick, indisposed $ palaUech, 
trans., paliech, nom. 

lonunapies, linummapus, Udummapies, la- 
piessa, lapiessen, iinapies, inolapiessen, to kneed, 
to press down; kalapies, a kneading; ma- 
alUuapies, 

laminapllapies, iinummapilapies, lalummapila- 
pies, lapiiapiesja, etc., the same as lummapies^ 
laliapilapies, 

lommaalaa, Unummaslas, lalummaslas, laslassa, 
iasiasseftf iinaslas, inolaslassen, to redeem any one 
from punishment, with money, etc. 

lonunatagli, tinummatagh, Udummatagh, 
latagcha, latagchen, Unatagchan, imlatagchany 
to set on a stand. 

Insunauk, linummauky lalummauky iaugga, 
lauggerty linaug, inolaugen, to court, in order to 
marriage; palauk, courtship; ma-aUdlauk^ a 
lover. 

Inmmaulanb, linummaulaub, lalummaulaub, 
iauiauba, iaulauban, linauiauhan, inoUmlauban, 
to make bum brighter or clearer ; also to cook 
or boil anything by a clear fire ; palaulauby to 
cause such to be done. 

lummias, /r, la, liassa, pass, liassen, linias, 
inoliassen, to open, as the eyes, lummias o 
macha ; palias, trans. 

lummibach, lula, imp. Ubacha, pass. Ubachen, 
etc., to draw in one*s belly. 

lummido, It, la, lUoa, lidoan, to deny; 
lalliilo, a denial. 

lommiollio, tinummioUio, lallummiollio, liollioa, 
lioUioan, linioUio, inoliolUon, to run after, to hunt. 

lummifl, linumms, lalummis, lissa, lissan, 
Unissan, inoUssan, to glow, also to look angry. 

lummitulllto, li, la, luUituUitoa, to totter, to 
wave ; is only used concerning great things, as 
trees, bamboos, etc. ; diflfers from tummaratab ; 
palitullito, trans. 

lummo, //, la, loa, loon, lino, ino-loon, to accom- 
pany ; paloa, to cause such to be done ; lallo, 
nom. 

luinmobo, linummobo, lalummobo, loboa, lobooH, 
Unobo, imloboon, to steal ; laUobo^ ma-aUallobo, 



Inmmochod, Unummocftod, lalummochod^ lock- 
odda, lochodden, limcftoJ, inolocftod, etc., to veefy 
to give out rope. 

lummogot, /r, la, logotta, logotten, linogot, ino- 
logotten, to vow ; as kummoikot 

lummokogli, linummokogh, laUummokogh^ 
lokogcha, lokogchen, linokogh^ imlokcjgc/ien, to 
comb. 

lommolo, U, la, hloan, linolo, inohloam^ to 
drive together from all sides ; is used of animals, 
as deer, goats, etc., when they are driven and 
hemmed in ; palob, to cause such to be done ; 
lalolo, nom. 

Inmmoob, li, la, looba, to look wantonly; 
paloob, trans.; lalloob, nom. a wanton look; 
rna-alalloob, wanton fellow. 

lummooff, linummoog, lalummoog, loegga, 
looggen, linoogh, inolooggen, to touch, also to 
trifle, to pass away the time ; paloog, to cause 
such to be done; lalloog, nom. trifles; ma- 
alalloog, a trifler. 

lummooff , //, la, loomma, pass, loommen, limcom, 
ino-loommen, seems to mean to arrange an3rthing 
with the acknowledgment of a previous benefit ; 
as lummoott o atite, o ranied, to arrange a dis- 
course or speech ; lalloom, nom. ; whenever any 
one will acknowledge that another has done 
a service for him he presents something of 
what he has acquired to him who procured 
it for him; which people call, lummoon 9 
atite. 

lommoBagli, linummosagh, lalummosagh, 
losagcha, losagchen, linosag/i, inolosagc/ten, to dig 
anything up that was buried, also to bring up 
old things long since done. 

lumpi, li, la, lupfia, luppian, linuppiatt, mo- 
litppian, lumpielpi, b. La, luppielpia, etc. ; lum^^ 
to twinkle as the fixed stars, to blink ; paluppi^ 
and paluppielpi ; trans, lulpi and lalpiilpi, nom. 
a twinkling; lulpi, also the eyelashes. 

ma-a-addo, a dissuader ; kannaddo, 

ma-aat, a measurer ; fr. moet. 

ma-a-ba, a wise man, from tnaba ; ma aijaab^ 
a prophet j from me-aab. 

ma-ababaaa, a messenger, one who brings 
tiiiings J fr. pas. 

ma-ababoa, fruitflil, used generally of plants, 
animals, or men ; fr. poa, 

ma-ababodda, fruitful, said of beasts. 

ma-abalixlch, a transporter ; fr. pizkh. 

ma-aclia, a murderer ; fr. pacfta. 

ma-aobab, a thief ; fr. machab. 

ma-aobaobad, a rewarder of good or evil. 

ma-aobacbnppir, stubborn, disobedient 




Vocabulary 



143 



ma-ado, one who understands cooking, a 
cook ; fr. tnado. 

maaff, vinegar. 

ma-aita, a sharp-sighted man ; fr. mita, 

ma-aja, a giver ; fr. pea, 

ma-akak088l, a disobedient ring-leader of 
rebellion ; fr. kummossi. 

ma-alabo, fruitful, said of the ground. 

ma-alalloog, frightened, appalled ; ger. ulaUo- 
egcha, 

ma-allal, kind, benevolent ; fr. thence come 
mnaaiial, manudUud a-allalia, a-Udal-Un, ina- 
alalUn and ino a-aUdUn ; al-id^ bland. 

ma-allallobo, a thief; fr. lummobo. 

ma-allas, calm, cleared up ; is said of wind 
and weather, also of the feelings; pa-alUu^ 
act. et trans, imp. a-alUissa^ a-alUusen^ ina- 
allassen, ino-a-edlasseny tpaUassa, etc.; alias, 
nom. calmness, clearness ; ma-a-aUaSy a soother. 

ma-apparrach, a whoremonger. 

maar, a quail. 

ma-arab, one who makes dnmk ; fr. parab, 

ma-aragli, one who receives or obtains much ; 
fr. marach, 

maa-rapie*, a sinner, a villain. 

ma-ararait, one who can sing well in com- 
pany ; fr. rummait, 

ma-ararl, a watchman ; fr. rummL 

ma-arlcli, ma, mi, imp. a-aricha, pass, aari- 
chatty ina-aarichan, ino-aarichan, to honour, 
act. fond of distinction, shame-faced, to carry 
oneself modestly towards another whom men 
honour ; aaric/iag ; paar'tch, to cause any one 
to be honoured or re?ipectcd, or to be ashamed 
before any one; a-arich, honour, a sense of 
shame ; ma-aarich, one who honours another, or 
conducts himself modestly. 

ma-arlen, a priestess ; see mariefty heathenish 
customs. 

ma-arles, a priest, a priestess. 

ma-arra, unemployea, one who has nothing 
to do; also at peace and undisturbed; ger. 
a-arra. 

ma-arrat, a sort of fish, like the cod. 

maam, mi, ma, cold ; as masumah. 

maai, mi, ma, to catch, as chummau ; also 
a certain mode of fishing with a net, to take 
by a sweep-net, called auart', aas, a besom, 
but onlv such as are made of a certain plant 
called also aas, otherwise it is chachau, 

ma-asaiman, an envier ; fr. masannan, 

ma-asasarra, one who sleeps much, a slug- 
gard ; fr. summara. 

ma-asaiat, a smith ; fr. summatsaU 

ma-asaairl, a crier; fr. sipuri. 



ma-aeawabach, poisonous ; fr. sumbach, 

ma-asas8li, a tailor ; fr. summis. 

ma-asiklan, a fifer, one who plays well on a 
flute ; fr. klau, 

maaspaipat, eight by eight 

maaspat, eight 

ma-asoio, a giver ; fr. passoso, 

ma-assas, a sluggard ; see masai, 

ma-aiaelakko, useless through indolence, 
worthless. 

maat is used only of the swelling of rivers, 
not occasioned by the sea or tide ; pret jm, ^t 
ma ; trans, paai, nom. oat ; mabarrija oat 
sabba, the fresh of the river is very strong, or 
the stream is strong ; aataijan, the lower part 
of a river where the running out of the water 
makes the river greater and stronger. 

maat, xm, ma, aata, is used for nrewood ; thus 
they say, maat-eeb, to cut firewood ; trans, paat, 
pi, pa, ipaata, 

ma-atattaai, a predecessor in anvthinc^. 

ma-atattotik, or ma-atattose, a bar ; it, turn* 
mosik and tummose. 

ma-atattnppa, one who has a good memoiy ; 
fr. tumpa. 

ma-atauio, a doctor ; fr. pattauso. 

ma-atinnaam, a forerunner. 

ma-aUte, one who speaks openly to the 
people, a preacher; ma-atil^ a minister; fr. 
pattite and fr. patiL 

ma-aUallalattala, a comforter. 

ma-an-acXi, forgetful ; fr. poach, 

ma-anlia, one who is always drowsy; fr. moba. 

ma-annat, one who sets anything on fire ; fr. 
ponnad or monad, 

ma-anridda, a man or woman who deserts his 
or her partner ; fr. moriedda, 

maauo, a widow or widower ; m, ma, amuoa^ 
paauso, pi, pa, ipaausoa, 

ma-annl, one who hides anything in plav ; 
for it differs from ma-achab, and maallaiioio j 
fr. poji or pausL 

maba, minaba, mamaba, to know, to under- 
stand ; ma bada soon, and fdes, an understand- 
ing heart; ger. fnaba seems also to mean 'to 
acknowledge * ; maabam charsar ia ta Labba, I 
know LablM*s voice; pala, trans, am, knowledge, 
science ; ma-aba, a wise man ; intens. mababa ; 
nom. ababa ; aba ko taposai, omniscient 

ma-baas, mi/iabaas, mamabaas, abasa, 
abasen, inabaas, i/io-Mbasen, to creep; pabaas, 
trans, to crawl ; mabaas morab, to creep out, as 
in fine weather; mabaas mwioBo, wnen the 
beasts eat grass, when it is foul and rainy 
weather, good weather for crawling out, the 




144 



Favorlang 



beasts lie in the grass; nom. abaas, a creeping; 
ma-abaaSf a creeper. 

mababat, mnababat, m/tmababat, abahadda, 
the gait of men and beasts ; also the moving 
onwards of anything that moves locally; 
pababat^ trans, imp. ababadda, ipababadda ; 
ababad, a path, a way ; pass, ababadbad, wi- 
den, inababad, imababaddeny ipabapababad, inoia- 
pabad ; ababadden iata, the ground is trodden. 

mababosa, an old man, one who is getting 
old; mif ma, ababossa\ pababosa, trans., ma- 
ababosa, an old man. 

niftl>fi^>iM| mi, ma, abachasa, to be dry; 
bachas, drought ; pabachas, to dry; activ. imp. 
ipabachasa, trans, pass, abachassen, act. obacn- 
assen, imbachas, inoabachasen, ipabachas, ini- 
pabachas, inoipabachas, contracted forms, mabas 
and paUu ; ma-abachas, one who dries. 

mabaob-ieh, unbent; from paback-ich, mi, 
ma, an unbending, a diversion ; ma-abachchich, 
one who diverts. 

mabad, mi, ma, abadda, abadden, inabaddan, 
imataddan, the running of the paper in writing ; 
mabad o barritok, differs from momach ; pabad, 
trans, abad, a flowing. 

mabadaa, m, ma, same as mamacho, 

mabaddabadda, minabaddabadda, mamabad- 
dabadda, abaddabadda, abaddabaddan, imbad- 
dabaddan, inoabaddabaddan, to look hard, to 
stare ; pabaddabadda, imp. ipabaddabaJda, 
trans, abaddabada, far-sighted, a good sight ; 
ma-abaJdabadda, one who sees far. 

mabag (the last a is scarcely heard^, mina- 
bagh, mamabagh, abagcha, abagchen, tnabagh, 
inoabagchen, to embrace, to take in both anns, 
also to carry on the arms : pa-bag, trans. 

maballa, mi, ma, obai/a, o baUaan, inoballa, 
ino-oballaan, to leak, diff*ers from misosso ; ma- 
balla, when the hole is large and it leaks much, 
and misosso, when the hole is smaller and it 
leaks a little ; pauballa, trans. 

mabarra, to be strone ; ger. abarra, mi, ma, 
barra, strength ; ma abarra, a strengthcner ; 
pabarra, trans, ifabarra, act. imp. abarra, 
pass, ipabarra, tnipabarra, inoipabarra, act. 
abarran, inabarra, tnoabarran ; abarra, streng- 
thening, from pabarra, 

mabarran, m, ma, abarranna, neut. not 
naked ; pabarran, act. and trans. 

mabarras, minabarras, mamabarras, abar- 
rassa, abarrassen, inabarrar, inoabarrasen, to 
proceed against the enemy, in order to fall on 
him by surprise; pabarras, ipabarrassa, imp. 
trans, nom. abarras, a going forth against the 
foe ; ma abaras, one who goes forth. 



mabarri, mnabarri, mamabarri, abarria, to 
blow; pabarri, trans, abarria, ipabarria, imp. 
to blow, pas. barrin, binarrin, ino-barrin, tiana 
ipabarri, ittipabar-ri, inoipabarrii barri, nom. 
the wind. 

mabart, m, ma, like maries. 

mabaaso, scented ; mi, ma, abassoa, also well 
tasted, neut. is said of salmon, which smells or 
tastes well ; basso, nom. taste or smell ; pabassQ, 
smelling good, to make tasty, imp. act. ahassoa, 
trans, pabassoa, pas. bassoan, Innassoan^ inobas- 
soan, pabasso, impabasso, iwdpabasso. 

mabaoaas, m, ma, imp. abauasa, a dangling 
in play, after which they shout. 

mabasibat, mi, ma, abazibadda, just, even ) 
mapospos, contrarium, mi, ma, aposfossa, papos- 
pos, trans., pospos, nom., pabazibai, pi, pa, 
ipabazibadda, trans, act. abazibadda, nom. 
basdbad, pass. act. bazibadden, binazibad^ iao- 
bazibadden, trans, ipazibad, inipazibad, 

mabido, mi, ma, abidoa, to be black ; pabido, 
trans, and imp. ipabidoa, ipabido, impabidOf 
itudpabid, act abidoa, pass, abidoan, inabidoasi, 
ino-abidoan. 

mabilla, nu, ma, abilloa, neut. cloven ; pabiUa, 
act. and trans; billa, a cleft: maabilla, cUft, 

mabillaag, mi, ma, abiUaga, pabUlaof^ to 
enlarge, nom. billaag, breadth; ma abtUaag, 
trans, en act. one who enlarges, imp. abUiaga, 
pass, abillagen, inabillaag, inoabillagen, ipabilL^a^ 
tpabillaag, inipabiUaag, inoipabillaag i mabwa- 
billaak, flat. 

mabinnas, mi, ma, abinnasse, healthy ; pabin- 
nas, trans, to heal, trans, et act imp. abim- 
nassa, ipabinnassa, pass, abinnassen, inabiunas^ 
inoabi/tnasa, inf. pabinnassa, ipabimtas, impabim- 
nas, inopa-binnas ; binnas, health; abinnas, a 
healing ; mabinnas, a restorer, a healer. 

mabinni, mi, ma, abinnia, fat, fleshy ; pabinm, 
to fatten, trans, and act., imp. abinnia, abinm- 
in, inabinni, inobinm-in ipabinnia, pass, ipabinm^ 
inapabinni, ino-ipabinni \ binm, fatness; abinm, 
a fattening ; maabinni, a fattener. 

mabior, mimibior, mamabior, abiorra, to 
remain behind without going forth ; pabiar, 
trans, and act. imp. abiorra, ipabiorra, pass. 
inabiorran, inoabiorran, ipabiorra, ipabior, im- 
pabior, inaipabior; bior, nom. is used as a 
preposition ; ma-abior, one who remains behind. 

mabirblr, nu, ma, abirbirra, abirbirren, ina- 
birbir, inoabirbirren, abirbirren, a composing of 
the mind in an^r ; mabirbir i tsies, to compose 
the mind ; pabtrbir, to cause such to be done $ 
abirbir, nom. a composing, a pacifying, a 
padfler. 




Vocabulary 



HS 



maMstaB, mimtbissas, mamabissaSy abisassa, 
to make oneself readv, to go anywhere or do 
anything; perhaps also ready, pass, pahissas, 
trans, and act. abissassa, abissassatty inabissas, 
inoabissassen, ipabissassan^ pass, ipabissas, ini- 
pabissaSf inmpabissas ; abissas, nom. preparing ; 
maabisjoj, a preparer. 

mabisse, mi, ma, abissa, upright in mind, 
virtuous ; pabissen, trans, and act. imp. abissea, 
abissei, inabisse, inoabissein, ipabissea, pass, ipa- 
btjsi, inipabisse, inoipabissen ; ma-abisse, a justi- 
fier ; babisse, righteousness. 

mabisse bisse, as mabisse \ bisse is only said 
of many j ja mabisse bisse tapos ja tatakorroe, 
all as straight as a line, intens. mabisse ; bisse 
bisse, intens. babisse, see pisse ; ma-abisse bisse, 
to make right, upright. 

mabo, minabo, mamobo, aboa, aboan, inaboan, 
ino-aboan, to pity, to forgive, to deliver j pabo, 
pinabo, papabo, ipaboa, ipabo, inipabo, inoipabo, 
ditto ; anything done out of compassion is abo, 
iniabo, ino jabo ; abo, nom. forgiveness ; abon 
no babosa, a compassionate man; bo, grace, 
mercy ; bo no tsies, a compassionate mind ; ma 
abo, one who pities. 

mab-o, mi, ma, ab-oa, newt, to rot, pass, 
rotten ; pab-o, trans, ab-o, a rotting. 

maboas, minaboas, mamaboas, aboasa, to 

remove ; paboas, trans, pass, aboasas, inaboasas, 

inoaboasas, ja, ta, i-aboas, ini-aboas, ino-iaboas 

ja ballag ; nom. aboas, a removal ; ma-abaas, a 

remover. 

maboob-o, minaboch-o, marnabogh-o, to stink } 
paboch-o, trans, and act. imp. aboch-oa, pass. 
aboch-oan, ipaboch-oa, ipaboch-o, inaboch-oan, 
inipaboch-o, ino-ipabocho ; bocho, stink. 

maborra, minaborra, mamaborra, aborra, to 
be pacified, neut.; borra,^Ti ally, fr. maborra-, 
ma-aborra, a peacemaker; aborra, pacifying; 
paborra, trans, and act. imp. aborra, ipaborra, 
to pacify; the pass. act. trans, aborran, ina- 
borra, ino-aborran, ipaborra, inipaborra, ino- 
ipaborra. 

maborrled, mi, ma, abon'ieda, neut. over- 
turned ; the root, porried. 

maborroob, raised, bumpy, ang^ular, not 
round ; maborroch a sies, maborrovh a tarran, 
maborroch ja morra, a humpback, a crooked 
road, or a distorted countenance; paborrogh, 
trans, and act imp. aborrogga, ipaborrogga, 
pass, aborroggen, inaborrogh, inoaborrog/ien, 
if>aborroggen, inipaborrogh, ino ipaborroghen \ 
borroch, a bump. 

maboso, mi, ma, abosoa, neut to wear away, 
to change; paboso, pi, pa, imp. abosoa, pass. 



abosoan, inobosoan, ipabosoa, inipaboso, inaipaboso, 
to wear off. 

maoha, the eve, dead ; cAo mocha, a dead 
man ; also dry, dried up ; macha da baron, dry 
wood ; macha da ta, dry land ; pacha, to kill ; 
act. imp. acha, achar, incuha, ino achan, trans. 
ipacha, inipacha, inoipacha; the neut has no 
other noun than macha itself; it is also the 
verb macha, mi, ma, acha, to die; acha, a 
death-blow; nom. ma-^cha, a murderer; 
machada idas, an eclipse or dead moon ; machada 
aras, dry grass. 

macbab, minachab, mamachab, achabba, 
achabban, inachabban, inoachabban, to do any- 
thing secretly; fachab, trans, achab, theft; 
ma achab, a thier. 

maoh-aoblo-a-oogb, as machio-a-oozh, 

machaobod, an adulterer or adulteress; Ir. 
chummod. 

maohaddak, near, not far, mi, ma, achadikka, 
neut, pach addik trans, and act. nom. chaddik, 
is used as the prep, near ; root, chummaddik : 
maube a chaddik, to look near; ma-achaddik 
ocho, a neighbour, one who is near. 

macballo, mi, ma, achaUoa, dear; machaUo 
a to, clear water; machaUo a boesum, clear 
air ; machaUo a tattorrodauron, a clear mirror ; 
pachaUo, trans, and act ; gaUo, nom. clearness ; 
machallochallo, intens.; ma-achallo, clearer; 
pachaUo, act. achaUoa, pass, ipachalloa, trans. 
achaUoon, inachalloon, inoachaUoon, ipachaiio, 
inipachallo, inmpachaUo. 

maobal-pod, the end; im, ma, achal-podda, 
to come to the last, completed, as machil; 
achalta, or achalpodda dummoro tapos, come in 
together; ndnachalt, or mimuhal-pod sohsa 
tapos, they are all gone in tc^ether ; pachalt is 
act and pachalpod trans, nnished; achalta, 
achalten, inachait, inoachalten, imp. pass.; 
pachalta, ipachalt, inipcuhait, inoipachaii. 

wftiia mni#u»ii^iwfwA^ deep; machammocham^ 
mo-nochauch, spoken of a well; mina, mama, 
achammochammoa, anything dark and dismal, 
as in a well; mamarorammo, is used also by 
the Takey people; chammochammo and m^ 
rammo, nom. 

maobanagli, mi, machanacha, neut. notched ; 
see chummanach ; chanag, a notch in an arrow. 

tnaobapor, mi, ma, wtr. achaporra, of few 
words, not to speak much, to be still ; pachabor, 
trans, and act.; machapochapor, intens.; chapor, 
nom. silence, is chapachafor^ ma acfu^or, one 
who keeps silence ; imp. achaporra, achiporran, 
inachaporran, imachaporran, ipachaforra, pass. 
ipachapm'. 




146 



Favorlang 



maobaoffh, pitted, rumpled, rough ; pachauch^ 
trans, and act. imp. achaucha^ achauchen^ 
inachauchy ipachauchuy pass, ipachaucheny ini- 
pachauchy imipachauch ; chauch^ a well ^ ma 
achauchy a well digger. 

maoharapOy miy may acharapoay neut. ; see 
chummarappo, 

maoharrleb, /ni, ma^ ac/iarrifbha, invisible, 
is used of wind, spirit, etc. } acharrUb^ nom. ; 
ma acharrieby one who renders anything in- 
visible. 

mach-a-to, water dried up. 

machatto, miy may achatioay to smoke \ pack- 
otto, act. trans, imp. achattooy achattoany in- 
achattoayinoachattoafiy ipac/iattoa, pass. ipachattOy 
inipachattoay inoipacfiattoa ; chatto, nom. 

mach-do, sweet; mi, may achedoa (the e 
short), chedoy sweet ,* ma achedoy a sweetener \ 
pacfudoy trans. 

maclie, miy may imp. acheay pass, acheetiy 
inac/iCy inoacheeny to guess whether anything is 
even or uneven. 

maohe-aubon, mitiacheaubony mamacheauboiiy 
pass, acheaubonnatty inacfieaubonnariy inoachau- 
bonnan-y acheauboniUMy to jest, to joke, to sit 
idle, to dally; acheuahny nom. dallying; ma 
acheaubony to trifle ; ta ja don acheaubonnany 
the place where people play. 

maclieda, intens. machedacheda \ miy muy 
ac/UiUiy pass, acheilaaity etc., to change one's 
word or will ; pacheday trans, j cheday change- 
ableness. 

macheer, ingenious; miy may acheer ; pa- 
cheery trans, and act. //,//?, imp. acfuray ac/ta'any 
inacherafiy inoacherany ipacheray pass, ipacheery 
inipachcer^ inoipacheer 'y cheer (pron. khayr)y wit. 

maclien, an elder brother or sister, cousin or 
nephew. 

machia, minachiay matnachia, achia, to re- 
pent, to change one's mind ; pachia, trans, to 
change any one ; achiay repentance ; ma achiay 
one who exhorts to repentance. 

maclii-agchi erab, miy may to drivel ; achi 
achi eraby or machi achiy miy may achi a chia, 
this is also to leak ; nom. achi a chiy and achi a 
chi craby slaver ; ma achi achiy one who drivels ; 
pachia chi eraby and pachi a chi, trans. ; ma 
chiagchiy composed from machiagchiy to leak, 
and eraby spittle ; machiagchi kallamany the pot 
leaks ; achiagchi ifiy viachiagchi in^ ina achiag- 
chi inja tOy the water is leaked out. 

maobiegb, minachieghy mamachieghy neut. 
to roast ; achiechay to broil, inf. trans. ; pachiechy 
to boil, the root is chummieghy see the nom. 
act. ; see under letter p ; cfiieghy a roasting ; ma 



achieghy a roaster, as ma achachieg\ c9aig^ 
roast ; ma achiegy anything roasted. 

machigb, sour; ndy may achich-a^ pachkh, 
trans, and act. imp. achichoa, achuh f«, im- 
achich //r, ino achich in, ifachich a, pass, ipa- 
chichy impachichy ino ipachtch ; chichy sourish. 

maohigilla, mi, ma, achigiiiay nearly like 
medotiorri i Takeijs, 

maobimit, miy may achimta, spruce, neat, 
clean, avoiding filth ; pachimity trans, and act. 
imp. achimtay achimteny inachimtiny inoachimttHy 
ipachimtOy pass, ipachimty inipachimty inoipa- 
chimt^ tnachimchimity idem; ma ackimit^ a 
clearer; chimity nom. subst. cleanliness, neat- 
ness ; used also as an adverb. 

maobio-a-oaffb, minachio-a-oagh, mamachio^- 
oaghy a returning. 

macbo, minachoy mamachoy achooy achon^ im- 
achony ino achotty to take elsewhere; but this 
word in construction takes », as inachon 
bidoy take away the book. 

macbobbeobob, miy may achobbechobboy neut. 
inf. chummobbechoby to be hasty ; chobbechob^ 
act. and trans. ; chobbechob, nom. hasty. 

macbobot, nunpled, rough; jm, moy packth 
boty trans, and act. ; machobochobo intens. ; ch^ 
bory a niftle; ma achobwy one who makes 
ruffles ; imp. achobottay pass, achobottan, inacho- 
bottan, inoachobottany ifachobattay pass. ipacAo- 
boty inipachoboty inipachobat, 

maobomorraja, miy may achomonrajay fright- 
ened, confounded ; pachomorrajay trans, and 
act. ; achomonrajay confusion ; ma achomorrajay 
fright, imp. act. achomorrajay achimorraja^ 
inachomorraian, trans, ipachomorrajay pass. 
ipachomorraja, inipachomorraia, inoachomorraia^ 
ino ipachomorraia, 

macbonagb, mimachonaghy mamachmagh^ 
achonagchoy to haunt ; pachonaghy trans. ; Jor^ 
naghy haunted ; ma achonaghy a haimter ; pa- 
chonaghy act. achonagchay inachonaghy trans. 
ipachonagchay pass, ipachonaghy impachonagh^ 
inoipcuho-nagh. 

macboncbon, miy may achochomuiy neut. 
ploughed ; see chummonc/wsy nom. chonchon^ 
a ploughman. 

macbonBar, everlasting; pachonsary trans.} 
ma achonsary one who perpetuates ; achoy noin. 
ma achOy one who causes continuance. 

macbopnl (the short), to taste well, act. 
miy ma, imp. achopuUay pass. achopulUny inocko- 
puly inochopuUeUy a taster, one who prepares the 
food. 

maoboraap, miy may achorapa, neut., the 
same as pedaroy to mix dilTerent thing 




Vocabulary 



147 



together ; pacheraap^ trans., achoraap^ nom., as 
mdarra \ pachortutp^ act. trans, imp. achorafa^ 
achorapeny inachoraap^ ipachorapOy pass, ipacha- 
raapy impachoraapy ino achorap^ inotpachorap. 

maoliote, minachotey numachote j achotea^ 
averse to anything that is unpleasant ; also to 
suffer punishment; the root is chummote\ see 
also act. pachotey in p., punishment ; maachotey 
a sufferer ; chote^ suffering. 

maohotiil, miy moy achotulUxy neut. bent, not 
straight, physically and morally ; pachotuly act. 
and trans, pty pa^ imp. achotulUiy ipachotulUiy pass. 
ipachotuly etc \ chotuly a curve. 

machommacliimiiiia, miy may achummachum- 
ma^ indistinct, the opposite of marimasal'y 
chummachummay nom. ; ma achummachumma \ 
paehummachummay act. achummachummay 
achummachummany inachummachummany ino- 
achummachummany trans, ipachummachummay 
pass, ipachummachummay etc. 

mada, minaday mamaday acUiy adany inadany 
inoadafty to divide } padoy trans. $ aday a share ; 
ma aday a sharer. 

fw^i|A|^ miy may ada-aUa^ neut. dishonour- 
able, shameless ; pa-da-aly act and trans, da-aly 
nom. 

madaap, minadaap, mamadaap, adapay ada- 
peny inadapy ino-adapcfty to make haste ; padaap, 
imp. ipadabay trans, ada abay act. j pass, ada 
aberiy inadaaby inoadaabetty padaaby inipadaaby 
irmpadaaby adaaby haste ; ma adaaby one who 
hastens another. 

madftbbi, to be satisfied; miy may adabbia\ 
padabbi, trans, satisfied; dabbi, satiety; ma 
adabbiy a satisfier ; adabbiy satisfying, act ; 
padabbiy act. adabbiay adabbifiy trans, ipadabbia, 
pass, ipadabbiy inipadabbiy ino adabbie/iy inoipa- 
dabbi. 

madaddo, ininadadiloy mamadaddo ; adaddoay 
to refuse ; pass, adadoarty inadadoafiy adaddoan ; 
padaddoy daddoy a refusal; ma adaddoy a re- 
fiiser. 

madallal, ger. miy may adaldaUay gentle, as 
ma-allal'y padaldaly ta-al-aly trans.; daldaly 
mildness; ma-adaldaly one who wishes to be 
kind ; padaldaly act. adaldaUay ailailalleny ina- 
daldaly pa-al-alj trans, imp. ipadaldallay pass. 
ipadaldaly inipadaldaly inoaaaldaUen. 

madalloleea, miy may neut. glistering, shin- 
ing, as if well scoured ; but this only refers to 
anything that has a white ground, and differs 
from raosan ; daUoleeSy nom. a shining ; it is also 
the name of a tree, the bark of which shines 
like the European beech. 

madarram, minadarramy mamadarramy adar- 



ramoy darrammeny madarramy inodarrammeny 
trained; see the root dummarramy and there 
the neut. darramy experience ; ma-adarrany one 
who is trained. 

madas, rmnadasy mamadasy adassoy adasseuy 
inoadasseuy to praise; madadasy also padasy 
praise ; ma-adasy a praiser. 

inaddllr, minaddiky mamaddiky adikkay etc., to 
forbid ; paddiky adiky a prohibition ; ma adiky a 
prohibiter. 

maddobor, miy may eer. odMorra, busy, en- 
cumbered, neut.; padoboKy trans. ma-adobWy 
troubled ; adoboTy trouble, act dobboTy care ; 
padobwy act. adoborray adoborrefiy inadobofy trans, 
imp. padoborray pass, padobor, etc. 

madich, or madighy sick; miy may adichOy 
nom. adj. ; ma-adigy a sickness, one who makes 
sick ; adighy a sickening ; dichy nom. sickness ; 
madeadigy intens. nom. padichy act. adichay 
adichy inadich, trans, ipadichay pass, ipadichy 
inipadichy inoadicheny inoipadichy etc. 

madidden, miy may ger. adiddenay firm, close, 
fast holding ; madidden arroTy a strong rail- 
ing; adiddenja taiaap-ofy hold it fast; applied 
to tJie mind, firm, undaunted; daddeny firm; 
paSddeny trans, ma adiddeny one who makes 
fast ; adidden, a fastening ; padiddeny act. a^d- 
denay etc., trans, padiddenay pass, ipcuiiddeny 
etc. 

madirdlr, minadirdiry mamadirdiry adirdirray 
to tremble; padirdiry act. and trans, dirdiry 
nom. a shaking. 

made, a dog. 

mado, minadoy mamadoy adoay adoany inadoany 
inoadoan, to cook ; padoy trans. ; adOy a cooking ; 
ma adOy a cook. 

madobdob, minadobdoby mamadobdoby dob- 
dobbay dobdobbeny zinobdoby inodobdobbeny hurried 
and in difficulty; padobdobytnxi%,\ see dumrnob- 
doby to hasten, neut. nom. dobdob ; ma adobdoby 
one who hastens another. 

madocballam, mnadochaliamy mamadochal- 
lamy adochaUamOy the calmine and clearing up 
of wind and weather; also of anger ; padochai' 
lamy act. and trans, imp. adochatiamy adochai- 
laman, ipothchallamay pass, ipadochcilam, rna- 
dochellamany inoadochaiUmany inipadochaJlamy 
inoipadochallam ; adochallam ; ma oiiochaUoMy 
one who calms people. 

madodeibo-ibo, faint, weak ; miy may adodeibo- 
ihoay lax ; padoddbo-iboy trans, and act. imp. 
adodeibo-iboay adodeibo-iboany inadodeibo-iboatty 
etc., pass. ipadtkUibmbOy etc; adodeib<hib9y 
faintness; ma adodeiboiboy one who makes 
faint. 




148 



Favorlang 



magagldsl, and fnagagri, mi, ma, both neut.; 
fr. chummagids and gummagri, ticklish. 

magaiech, m, may agmechay neut.; fr. 
gummaiechy to delay ; a^aUcA, lateness, used ad- 
verbially, late ; ma agatecA, a delaying, adject. 

magak, miy may agakka, pass, agaiken, etc., 
to call out, as pmlaeb^ p^g^K trans, intens., 
ffMgagaky agaky nom. 

twftgamg^ni^ agamgamma, to be covetous; 
pass, minagamgamy fut. mamagamgam\ ma 
agamgamy covetous, a miser; gamgam, cove- 
tousness; pagamgamy act. trans, imp. agam- 
^ammay agamgammeny ipagamgammay pass. 
tpagamgamy inagamgamminy etc. 

magareogeo, mi, may gareogeoay flat and 
round like the wheels of a coach ; pagareogeoy 
trans, and act. nom. gareogea. 

magcha, the eyes. 

magohitagchltat, miy may unsettled, change- 
able; mi, may agchitagchitatta is not said of 
men*s will or words, but refers to things that 
exist now and then, as magchitagchitat moetaSy 
it rains sometimes ; agchitagchitaty changeable- 
ness. 

magoho, miy may mamagchoy ipagchoay ipag- 
ehay inipagchOy inoipagchoy to spesdc. 

magga, minagga, mamagga, agga, the means 
in order to an end ; yaga, mijagga, iftojagga, 
the object or aim ; agan, inagan, inoaggan, to 
throw out of the hand ; maggo taggargar, to 
cast anchor ; paga, trans. ; agOy the throwing 
of projectiles; ma aga, one skilful in throwing. 

maggaat, miy may sharp; agaatay pointed; 
maggaat zinoe, a sharp knife ; maggaato raro, 
a three-cornered hat ; maggagaat, intens., fr. 
gumfnaat ; gaaty a point ; ma agaaty anything 
pointed. 

maggaga, tmnaggagay etc.; see maggay to 
throw after ; maggag batOy to stone. 

magge, miy ma^ imp. aggeay tough, sticky, 
paste made from rice, starch, etc. 

maggo-aan, mi, ma, aggo-amiy compounded 
of magga, to throw, and aany food ; when two 
parties, after having promised their children, 
previous to the marriage, feed each other; 
P^ggo-an, trans., aggo-aan, nom. subst. 

maggogh, m, ma, aggocha, to annoy by 
vexation ; maggogh ja na, azijel mababat, 
maggoghja, maggogh ja na babiaro machip; 
pagoch, trans, goch, vexation ; ma agoch, a 
vexer ; pagoch, act agocha, etc., trans, ipagocho, 
etc. 

maggOB, miy may agossa, to flsh with a 
sweep-net, by which tne fishes are inclosed; 
pagosy trans. 



maggotarrar, miy may to bend anything on 
the edge or end, as the edge of a napkin, etc. ; 
also to go slanting upwards, as a way; 
pagotarrary trans, and act. imp. agotarrarray 
agotarrarraHy ipagotarrary pass. tpagotarraTy etc. 

magliappo, glowing ; metaphorically used of 
ardent spirits, because they make the face to 
glow ; pagappOy to glow, act. trans. ; pachippOy 
chappOy nom.; ma agi^pOy one who glows; 
pagappoy act trans, imp. agappoa, agappoaUy 
inagi^poan, inoagappoafty ipagappoa, 

magkagh, minakaghy mamakaghy akacha, 
akachen, etc., to bite ; pagachy trans. ; agach, a 
bite ; ma agachy a biter. 

magogach, minagagach. mamagagaghy ag^g- 
agchay to itch after, to desire strongly; ma- 
gagagagachy intens. magagach\ pagagacky 
tnns,gagachy an itching, a desire ; ma-^gagacky 
one who itches. 

magomaoli, im, may agomachay neut. blotted 
out; scegummach, 

magoragh, miy ma, agorachay the skin 
rubbed off; magoragh ja rima, the skin is off 
my hand ; magar aggorachy intens. 

magonlSTk, miy may agoulykay neut. to sprain 
the foot, to wrench ; pagoulycky act. and trans, 
a sprain of the foot ; the natives cure this fay 
the leaves of a certain tree, called satiky with 
which they bind up the limb in order to soften 
the skin, or to disperse the extravasated blood. 

mal, mimai, mamai, imp. moa, to come ; the 
3rd person has saiy sanaiy sasaiy trans, only in 
the 3rd person, pasai, //, pa-, ipasaya; maiP 
is he well ? interrogatively. 

mal-acbo, all those who are related to us, 
whether male or female; also stepfather and 
mother; seems to be compounded from the 
verbs maiy to come, and machoy to bring; 
because when the daughters marry, they bring 
their husbands home to dwell. 

maibas, alike ; mi, ma, imp. aubasay aibas, 
nom. likeness ; ma aibaSy one who makes aliket; 
paibas, act. and trans, imp. aibasa, aibajott, 
ifiaibasan, inoaibasan, ipaibasa, ipaibas, etc. 

maibat, minaibat, mamaibat, aibadda^ 
aibaiLlan, inaibadJan, ino-aibaddan, to work 
for another for one's lx)ard, as the poor do for 
a meal; men say also mikat ; paibat, trans, 
with respect to the person who is served ; aibat^ 
nom. service; maibaty a servant, a labourer) 
pass, aibadiien, inaibda, inaibadden, inaibad^ 
moaibadden, with respect to the hire that is 
obtained. 

ma-im-it, makiliy idem; ma-imimit, intens. 
makilikiliy idem, middling, not too much, pass- 




Vocabulary 



149 



able, neither too laree nor too small; is also 
usea as mackapcr and machapochapw^ and then 
means moderate in conversation, neither too 
still nor too talkative. 

malmooh-a-ta, a wilderness. 

mairo, kagmmro^ im, ma^ aiman^ airoan^ 
airoa^ inairoan, ino airoan, to change, as men 
do the teeth, or bucks the horns ; pairo, trans, 
nom. airo, a changing ; ma-airo^ a changer. 

nudi, minaiSf mamaiSf assay aisartj tnaisaftf 
ifufossan, to laugh ; pais, trans, ais, a laugh ; 
ma-^iSf a laugher. 

ma-lEial, mina-issal, mama-issal, a-issalla, to 
repeat, as children do before their master ; ma- 
issal, bUOf to say out of book ; ma-issai sies, 
to say by heart. 

maiil, mi, ma, aitcia, near, at hand ; people 
say also mai%i, aizi, and arri, neighbourhood ,* 
aisci, faizi, act. and trans, imp. aizia, mxian, 
inaixt, inoaizian, ipaizia, pass, ipaizi, inoipaisd ; 
maaizi, nom., and ma arzi, one who brin^ near. 

xoajed, mi, ma, small, fine; but it is only 
said of many, for with reganl to few, it is 
koezi; also thin, not thick, as makieJ; paied, 
to make small; ma-a-ied, one who makes 
small, smallncss ; ma-i-ied or makikiid, thin ; 
pa-i-ied, pakikied, trans. 

nutkabol, mi, ma, akaboUan, to be angry, to 
chide, act. trans, pakabol, akaboUa, akabolUn, pak 
boHa, pass, ipakobol, inakobol, inoakoboUen, etc. ; 
kobal, anger, wrath ; ma-akabol, angry, wrathful. 

ma-kairl, mi, ma, to do anything with the 
left hand, as makairija simioc/t, pattite, to stretch 
out the left hand and speak, etc. ; ma annige, 
idem ; ma akairi, a left-handed man. 

makakan, to be red ; mi, ma, akakama, 
pakakam, trans, and act. imp. akalanna, ipaka- 
kamia, kakan, redness ; ma akakan, a red 
dauber ; pass, akakanna, inakakannan, ipakakan, 
inikakannan, impakakan, inokakannan, etc 

makakossi, mi, ma, akakossia, to be dis- 
obedient ; pakakossi, pi, pa, akakossia, akakossia- 
in, inakakossi, ipakakossia, pass., ipakakossi, 
inipakakossi, fut. pass, inoakcxossi-in, imtipaka- 
kossi; see act. kummossi, to render any one 
disobedient. 

ma-kallamas, mi, ma, to do anything with 
the right hand ; as makaUamas ja stmioch, 
pattite, etc. ; ma allamas, ditto. 

makammiclil, to be solitary, alone ; mi, ma, 
akammigia ; pakammieg, trans, and act. imp. 
akammichia, akammicfn-in, inakammichi, ima- 
kammichi-in, ipakimmicAia, pass, ipakimmichi, 
etc. ; kammichi, solitude ; ma akammigi, one 
who is solitary and alone. 



makammodl, mi, ma, to be covetous (as 
magamgam), akammocha, imp. ; pakammoch, act 
trans, imp. akammocha, akammochan, tpakam- 
mocha, pass, ipakammoch, inakammochan, ima- 
kammochan, impakammoch, etc. 

makapier, mi, ma, akapitra, neut to be 
hooked on ; kapier, a hook ; ma akapier, 
adject, hooked to. 

makapoB, m, ma, akapossa, close, stopped 
up ; also clownish, incapable of understanding ; 
makapos aisies, the mind closed up; fr. kum- 
mapos ; pakapos, act and trans, kapos, a closing 
up ; makapos, anything; stopped up. 

makarleb, minakaneb, mamakariib, akariba, 
to run ; also written magarieb ; pa^arieb, trans, 
pass, agarieban, inagarieb, inoi^aruban, a circle 
m which men run ; ma-agarieb, a runner. 

makanlehi, mi, ma, makarrichi, mama- 
karrichi, akarrichia, to quarrel, to snarl ; 
pakarrichi, trans, imp. ipakarrichia, pass, ipakar- 
richi, inipakarrichi, ifioipakarrichi, pass, akar- 
richi, ipakarrichi, i/ioakarrichi-in ; karrichi, a 
quarrelling ; ma-akarrichi, angry ; mizy, idem. 

makarro, mi, ma, akarroa, as mausselakko\ 
pakarro, to be idle, act. akarro, nom.; ma- 
akarro, a lazy fellow ; pass, akarroan, akarroan 
tsim>ep a arrien, the work is neglected. 

mAWfiiriw, mi, ma, akinkinna, neut to rinp; as 
little bells ; see kumminkin, nom. kinkin, a little 
bell. 

makiol, mi, ma, akioUa, as maggaat; kioi, 
nom. pointed ; makiol ja oog pama dol, a pointed 
bamboo, tapering towards the top ; morokiU, 
anything pointed; pakiol, trans, and act. to 
sharpen to a point; imp. akioUa, pakiolUn, 
inakioiUn, inoakioUen, ipakioUa, etc 

makirkir, mi, ma, akirkirra, neut., see kum- 
mirkir, to Knash the teeth ;^i(irlir, act. and 
trans ; akirkir, a gnashing otthe teeth. 

wakkaa, ma, mi, akkassa, akkassin, inakkas, 
inoakkassen, to revile any one, to accuse, to 
reproach ; takkas, trans. ; makkas ma atattosik, 
to accuse falsely ; akkas, a reviling ; ma-akkas, 
a reviler. 

makkoahap, proper, just, suitable, sufficient ; 
mi, ma, akkieshappa\ keshap, and akkcshap, 
nom. ; ma-akkeshappa, act and tx2Xi%,pakkeshap, 
imp. akkeshappa, akkeshappen, inaikeshappni, 
inoakkeshappen, ifakeshappa, etc 

makorllaa, mt, ma, akorilasa, neut the same 
as meroobroob. 

makoa, minakos, mamakos, akossa, akossen, to 
scratch, to scrape; pakos, trans., akos, nom.; 
ma-akos, an extortioner. 

makoiiim, to be jet blacki mi, ma, akosumma^ 




ISO 



Favorlang 



pakosum^ paosum ^ trans, and act. imp. aosumma, 
aojum, inaosum^ tpoasumma^ pass, ipaosum, etc. ; 
osum^ blackish ; ma-aosum, blackener. 

malnwuii minaksas, mamaksas, aksojja, aksas- 
san, etc., to desire ; paksas, aksas, desire ; ma- 
aksas, one who desires. 

malaag, mi, ma, alaga, alagen, etc., to catch, 
to surprise one in sleep, as the natives catch 
game while asleep, or pierce them with a 
spear. 

malaohab, mi, ma, alachabba, long, slow, 
intens. malachalagab ; palachab, act. and trans, 
imp. alachabba, alachabben, inalachabben, inoal- 
ackabben, ipaUuhabba, pass, ipalachab, etc.; 
lachab, laziness, slowness ; ma-alachah, a slug- 
gard ; malachalachab, intens. ; fr. malachab, 

malachach, mi, ma, alachacha, loose, not 
tied tight, the opposite of madidden \ palachach^ 
act. and trans, intens. malachalachach, imp. 
alachacha, ipalachacha, alachachen, inalach- 
achen, inaalachachen, pass, ipalachach, etc.} 
lachach, looseness; ma-alachach, one who 
makes anything loose. 

maladik, mtnaladik, mamaladik, aladikka, 
aladikken, inaladik, ifioaladikken, to take care, to 
protect, to rule over ; aladik, nom. a protection, 
rule; ma-aladik, a protector, a ruler; aladik, 
aijan, a seat of government. 

malaklmni, minallakkum, mamallakkum, allak- 
kumma, to turn things upside down ; allakkum, 
the turning as of a nder ; ma-allakkum, one that 
does that; pallakkum, pi, pa, imp. act. and 
trans, allakkumma, ipallakumnia, allakkummati, 
inallakkumman, inoallakkumman, pass. ipalUik- 
kum, etc., to turn things over and over, but is 
only said of such things as nature or art has 
adapted for turning over. 

malalpi, and malalpielpi, mi, ma, neut. glit- 
tering ; fr. lumpi and lumpielpi, 

malam, minalam, mamalam; alamma, one 
who fights with missile weapons; alamma, 
inalam, iruhalammen, the place where the battle 
is fought; alammen, inalamman, inoalamman, 
alam, missile weapons; karri alam, and mau 
alam, to fight together ; ma-alam, one who is 
skilful with missiles ; alam-an aijan, a field of 
battle. 

malama, minalama, mamalama, alama, ala- 
man, inalama, ino-alaman, to cook pap ; palama, 
trans, lallama, pap ; ma-alama, a pap-maker. 

malapan, to be flat; mi, ma, alapama, 
palapa, trans, and act. imp. alapanna, cuapan- 
nen, inalapannen, ipalapanna, pass, ipalapan, 
etc.; lapan, nom.; ma-alapan, one who 
flattens. 



malapilapies, mi, ma, alapilapsa^ kneaded^ 
pressed down ; see lummapilapies, 

malat' o sitam, a bill hook. 

malatta, a hammer ; written malata. 

malaulaub, minalaulaub, mamalauiauh, the 
sparkling of a flame, hence clear, to bum well $ 
palaulauh, pi, pa, etc., see gummaulauh. 

maliod, mi, ma, aliodda, aliodden, inaliod^ to 
blow a whirlwind ; paliod, trans., oHod, nom. a 
whirlwind. 

malitullito, mi, ma, alitullitoa, to reel, neut| 
see lummitullito. 

malla, minalla, mamalla, alla-a^ aUa-OM, 
etc., to adorn oneself; palla, trans, to adorn 
another ; al-la, ornament ; ma-alla, an adomer. 

maUabagb, minalabagh, mamalabagh, choos- 
ing things equally good, not to know which to 
take, imp. allabagha-, ma allabagh, act. and 
trans. ; pallabagh, pi, pa, allabagha, allabaghen, 
ina-aUaba^hen, inoaUabaghen, ipallabacha, sUd- 
labagh, impallabagh, inoipallabagh ; but makag, 
mi, ma, abagga, abaggen, inabag, not to know 
what to choose, to be anxious about a choice % 
palag, abag, nom.; ma-abag, one who brings 
another into anxiety. 

xnallas a boesiun, clear fine weather, 

mallas a ta, a plain. 

malleak, mi, ma, alleakka, as machote, neut 
pass, alleakken, inalleak, inoidUakken, act. trans. 
tpalleak, inipalleak, inoipalleak ; palleak, to be 
averse ; alleak, aversion ; ma-alleak, a perK>n 
who is loathsome. 

mallegallicli, and ffudlegallegallich, mi, ma, 
pallegalUch, and pallegalligich, as malacfiach^ 
and malachalacfiach,palachach, and palachali-' 
chach. 

malli-alll, minalU-aUi, ma maUi-alU, alli-aUia^ 
to thrill, to shake, alli-alli, nom. subst. ; ma-alli- 
alii, a shaker ; palli-alli, imp. act trans. 
alli-allia, alli-alli-in, inalli-alli4ft, imhoUi-aUi-im, 
etc. 

mallo, a cup, can, or dish; mallo idai^ a 
saucer. 

mallosos, a silver scale. 

malmal, mi, ma, almalla, tender, soft, not 
tough, ncut.; also malbo, mi, ma, albea (con- 
tract, from malilbe) ; paalbe, ncut. and trans., 
albea, ipalbea, lilbe (the / short), nom. softness ; 
Ummel (the e short), nom. softness, even as 
malummal ; ma-abummal, a softener ; palumsmd, 
act. //, pa, imp. alummalla, alummallen, i/iaimm' 
mal, etc. ; palummal, trans. 

malod, minalod, mamalod, alodda, aloddast^ 
inaloddan, inoaloddan, to call; palod, trans., 
alod, nom. ; ma-alod, a crier. 




Vocabulary 



151 



malokogli, mi, ma^ alokogchay meaere ; pal(h 
kogh^ trans, and act. imp. aokogchay aiokagcAen, 
iftalokocAf inoalokogcheny tfalokogchay pass, ipalo- 
kochy etc., nudokolokoghy idem, intens. nom. 
lokocky leanness } ma-alokochy ma-alokolokochj 
one who makes thin. 

maloog, minaloogf mamaloogy aloogga, to 
swaim, to make a stir ; see lummoog, 

malpo, light, not heavy ; mi, ma, alpoaypalpoy 
act. and trans, imp. alpoay alpoafty inoalpoatty 
ipalpoay pass. ipaltOy etc. ; alpoy lightness j ma- 
alpOy a lightener or a burthen j alpOy a lightening. 

malum, miy may alumnuiy same as moar \ pa- 
lufrty act. trans, imp. alumnuiy alummafiy inabtm- 
mafiy inoalummany ipalummay pass, ipalumy etc. ; 
alumy nom. as auar ; ma-alumy as ma-auar, 

mifc-mftuha., mwamachay mamamachay ann- 
acha-Oy amachariy imannachay imannachafiy to 
play the fool with any one, to joke ; pannachay 
trans, annacfuty jesting ; ma-amachay a jester. 

mamacho, miy may same as mabadasy by 
which is expressed any joy, or satisfaction over 
any gift, or anything found; imp. amachsay 
ahadaasa, 

mammall, a miss, a sweetheart, a spinster. 

mamgliaglL, to be quick, ready; amakagcha, 
miy ma-y pamgachy act. trans, imp. amgachay 
amgacheity inamgachy ipamgachay pass, ipam- 
gacAy ctCy magachy quickness, readiness; ma- 
amgachy one who stirs up another. 

mammarro, the mommg, to-morrow. 

mammom, dumb ; m/, may amonna ; pamosy 
to strike dumb, act. and trans, amonnay amon- 
neity inamoriy inoamonnerty ipamonnoy pass, ipa- 
mofiy etc. ; amofty dumbness ; ma-amofiy one who 
strikes another dumb. 

mamoos, miy may amossoy diligent ; ma-moachy 
idem ; pamooSy pamoachy act. and trans, imp. 
amoosay amoossariy inamossafiy inoamossany ipa- 
mosojOy pass. ipamoosy etc., mooSy moachy diligence ; 
amoojy and amoachy nom. a rendering diligent ; 
ma-amoosy and ma-amoachy one who renders 
another dilisrent. 

munottorsimply. 

mamottomoUo, angular, cornered, not round ; 
nuy may amottOy mottoa, intens. pamotto-mottOy 
act. trans, amottomottoa, etc., ipamottomottoay 
pa.ss. ipamottomottoarty etc., nom. motto-mottOy an 
angular form ; ma-amotto-mottOy one who makes 
angles. 

mampa, a bird ; ac hoary dako€y or damorijy 
unknown ; maarsy a quail ; koU-a-kisy kissabrey 
a finch ; doUijy kaloy a wagtail ; koekoen-o-oogy a 
cuckoo; Tueriy a sparrow; kabily a swallow, 
togeay a snipe ; UOy a stork ; pooy a hen ; sarra 



oa oay SL crow; gorrogoty gogoptotOy beioiOy a 
dove ; pooky an owl ; kokkoy a hen ; tehabony a 
duck. 

man, mifta/ty mama/ty cAanna, channatty ino^ 
chatty to eat away, to wear ; poatty piy pa, to 
feed, to give to eat, imp. tpantiay chantuoy pass. 
chatttiatty ittattatty ittocnatmatiy with respect to 
the person who is fed; but horatiy tttipoany 
ittoipoatty with respect to the food one eats; 
nom. fr. tnatty is ittochatty food ; fr. ^o/r, is aatty 
feeding, a meal, and ttia-aatty a feeder; kairi 
matt-aatty to feed one another ; aati marpty 
supper ; magg o-aatty to feed ; ttiati patji" 
simtttay breakfast ; ftiati ialliatiy dinner ; ttiatt 
maroopy afternoon's meal. 

mananat, atiattaddoy to do anything first; 
mittattattiaty tttatttatiattaty or anatiade de botPtOy 
eo forward into the field; attattadd* man 
ittottofy do you eat first ; attatiaddetiy ittattattady 
ittoattattaddetty ah tumtnati-aab ; pananady act. 
trans, attatiadday ananadditiy itumanady pass. 
ipatiattady etc. ; tna atianady one who precedes 
in eating, drinking, working, etc. 

manna-aclipll, to repeat five times, mi, may 
patitta-achpily to do anything five times ; piy pay 
imp. act trans, atia achpiUiy ana achpilany 
ittattia achpily ipatta achpilay pass, ipatta achpily 
inipana achpily etc., nom. ana achpily nve 
times. 

mamia-maspatil, eight times. 

mamiapida, to be often repeated ; miy may 
panapiday to do anything often ; //, pay imp. 
act. trans, atiapiday attapidany itianapiday ino 
attapidany ipattapiday pass, ipanapiday etc. 

mannapllo, seven times. 

mamia-Bpattil, four times. 

mannatannacho, nine times. 

mannatapll, six times. 

mamiatorro-as, three times. 

manna-tsohlet, ten times. 

manna-was, twice. 

mantantas, sometimes, occasionally ; mantasy 
now and then. 

manias, once ; tiUy may antassa, 

manniki, ininannikiy tnamamdkiy attakiay to 
jest, to trick ; ditto, adorned, as rnaUa ; pan- 
ttikiy imp. anttikiay antakieny inatnkietty ino 
anttikien, ipattikia, pass, ipanikiy inipanikiy inoipa- 
tttki ; annikiy show, mockery ; tna anmkiy a 
mocker, a showman. 

mannoa, mi, tna, annoay the twistine together 
of twigs for basket-work, as miricmckoOy to 
twine. 

maoom, to be ripe, is said of fruits ; mi, may 
aooma ; pihoom, a-^oma, ipaootna ; 09m, ripe. 




»S2. 



Favorlang 



ma-osimi, jet-black $ see makoium, 

mapan, many, many times ; m^ ma, ma- 
papartf intens. mepan \ f apart, to multiply, imp. 
apanruiy apannan, inapannan, inoapannan, ipa- 
panna, pass, ipapan, tmpapan, etc. \ ma apan, 
one who makes much, a multiplier. 

mapappa, to be short j mi, ma, mapappa- 
pappa, pi, pa, imp. apappa-a, apapapa \ papaan, 
mapapaan, pass, inapappa, etc. ; pappa, short- 
ness *, ma apappa, a shortener ; apappa, a short- 
ening. 

mapatilaik, mi, ma, apoulaik, pass. neut. bald- 
headed, imp. apaulaika, apaulaikan, ipapau- 
Imka, pass, ipapaulaikan, etc. ; papauUuk, pi, 
pa, to make bald \ paulaik, baldness \ apau- 
laik, a making bald ; ma-apauUuk, one who 
makes bald. 

mape, to be bitter ; m, ma, ape, apean, 
inapean, inoapean ^ pap, to embitter ; imp. apea, 
apean, inapean, tpapea, pass, ipape, tmfape, 
apean, etc. -, ipe, bitterness ; ma-ape, an em- 
bitterer. 

mapiegh, minapiegh, mamapiegh, apiegc/ia, 
to fight with weapons ; pass, apiegapiechcha, 
inapiech, inoatiegchen, the party is attacked ; 
ma-apieck, a nghter ; papiech, trans. 

mapiei, mnapies, mamapies, apissa, apissen, 
in pis, ino apissen, to snatch anything from any 
one and take it away -, papir, trans, nom. apis, 
a deprivation ; ma apis, a depriver. 

mapil, to break in pieces ; papil, trans. 

maplr, mi, ma, apirra, iapir, with respect to 
the person who is attacked ; inapir, inoipir, 
with respect to the hand with which people 
fight, to strike the contrary way, to sway the 
arms backwards and forwards ; papir, trans., 
apir, nom. a smiting backwards ; ma-apir, 
one who so smites. 

mapocliipoglL, muddy, thick. 

mapor, mnapor, mamapor, aporra, etc., the 
chewing of betel nut. 

mapoto, mi, mi, apotoa, neut. to be thin as 
water } patato, pi, pa, imp. apotoa, apotoan, 
inapotoan, tnoapotoan, papotoa, pass, ipapoto, etc., 
to make thin as water. 

mapiigh, anything held together in the 
mouth. 

maraag, a hare or rabbit. 

m^rnai^ mi, ma, araala, neut. intens. ma- 
raraal ; paraal, act. and trans, flat, level, as 
land} intens. pararaal, nom. aroal, and ara- 
raal, evenness -, ma-araal, one who makes 
even. 

maraaa, the heart 

nmrfi«ff, mi, ma, hard ; araasa \ maraas o 



bato, a hard stone $ maraas a o, hard drink} 
maraas o ramed, a hard voice \ maraas a ta^ 
hard stiff ground \ maraas a W-ya^ about half- 
way ; paraas, trans, to make nard. 

marab, mi, ma, arabba, drunken \ arab^ 
drunkenness j morroarab, a great drunkard, 
inured to drinking ; ma-arab, a drink ; parab^ 
trans, and act. to make drunk ; /i, pa, araba^ 
araban, inaraban, inoaraban, iparaba^ etc. 

marabal, minarabai, ma, arabaUa, standine^ 
upright ; marabal o assaban, the village u 
aroused. 

marabbo, the drawing together of ck)uds; 
mi, ma, arabboa ; parabbo, pi, fa, cloudy, ara- 
boa, rabboan, rinabboan, inorabboan, iparabboa^ 
pass, ipaparabbo, etc ; rabbo, clouds. 

marach, m, ma, raclus, rachen, inarack, 
inorachen, to take, to fetch, to obtain, to receive | 
parach, trans. ; arach, nom. a reception \ ma- 
arrach, a receiver j mararach, intens. 

maraggaragga, minaraggaragga \ aragga- 
^^SS^i ^^ creep on the hands and knees ; pa- 
raggaragga, to cause to creep. 

maragliragli, thick, coarse; maragkragk a, 
naupoot, coarse linen ; maragkragk a baron^ a 
thick piece of wood ; ragkragk, thickness. 

marallen, minarmlen, mamareaUn^ andla^ 
arailan, maraila, inoarailen, to be suspicious of 
any one. 

maraia, mi, tna, araisa, brave, intrepid, di»> 
turbed ; rais, disturbance -, arms, a disturbing \ 
ma-arais a sini, an amazon, a shrew, a scold i 
parais, to disturb another ; act. and trans, imp. 
araisan, inaraisan, pass, ifaraisa, etc. 

maramoramo, twilight, between light and 
darkness ; see also mackammockammo ; 



ammo, nom. 



maran, an ekler tree. 

marana, minarana, manarana, rana, inarwm, 
inoaranan, the cutting of millet or rice, to 
mow ; porarana, trans, arana, a mowing \ 
ma-arana, to mow; arrana, time or place or 
harvest. 

maranoad, mi, ma, mama \ aranoadda, pan. 
aranoadiiisit (with respect to those who near 
it), the singing of the bird named adorn on the 
right hand. 

marapal, mi, ma, arapaUa, neut blind t 
nom. rapid, blindness ; adject, ma-art^m^ 
blind. 

marapies, mi, ma, arapisa, wicked ; parafUs, 
pi, pa, arapisa, iparapisa, to do wickedness j 
irapisen, inarapies, inoarapisen, ipara^s^ mn 
parapies, inoiparapies, rapies, wickedness j fr. 
marapies, neut. ; marapies, bad, adject j are^s. 




Vocabulary 



•S3 



to make bad; fr. parapieSf act., and it is the 
same that rarapies is in rummapies, 

marar, ordinary, inferior. 

maxara, minararay mamarara^ imp. arara-a, 
to enlighten ; rara, the light ; parara^ trans, 
and act. imp. arara-a^ arara-an^ inarara-an^ 
inoarara-an^ iparara-a^ pass, iparara^ impararaf 
inoiparara ; mararararay intens. ; rara^ light j 
mibst. arat'a, enlightening ; ma-araray an en- 
lightener ; hence araraan-a idasy the full 
moon, that is, an enlightened moon, because 
when full it is fully enlightened by the sun. 

mararach, miy nuiy ararachay neut. low, on the 
ground ; pararachy to lower, imp. ararachay 
ararachy tnararachy inoararacheny ipararachay 
pass, ipararcuhy etc. j rarachy lowness, neut. j 
ma-ararachy a lowerer ; ararachy a lowering. 

mararain, big with child ; miy nuiy araraina ; 
pararaifty to be pregnant; //', pay imp. act. 
trans, araraina, araraincn, inararainy iuoanir- 
ainneriy ipararainay pass. ipararaWy etc. ; raraisy 
pregnancy ; ararain, ditto j ma-ararain, one 
who gets with child. 

mararam, minararamy mamararamy the 
dazzling of the eyes j ararammay pass, araram- 
meriy inararamy inoararammen j pararam, trans. 
rararriy a dazzling ; ma-araramy one who 
dazzles. 

mardiarclia, miy may archarcha, neut. clear, 
able to see clearly j parcharchay act. and trans. 
piy pOy archarcha-ay archarcharty iparcharcha-ay 
pass, iparc hare hay etc. ; arc hare ha, clearness. 

maredo, miy may aredoay neut. stretched, 
extended, as tumcho, 

mariatoas, contract, for marach\ abaSy that 
which is taken in the sea ; miy ma, imp. aria- 
bassa*y pass, ariabassefiy etc., sea shell-fish, 
mussels ; pariabaSy trans. 

marlbaribat, minaribaribaty mamaribaribaiy 
aribaribattay aribaribatteriy inaribaribaty inaari- 
baribattefiy to hunt wild animals, birds, beasts, 
or fishes. 

marlbo, turbid j mi, may artboa ; pariboy act. 
and trans, imp. ariboay ariboatiy inariboariy 
inoariboatty ipariboay pass, iparibo, etc.; riboy 
nom. muddy ; hence ariboy a befouling ; ma- 
ariboy one who befouls. 

marichom, miy moy as maritup, even, cut off 
straight, as a bamboo, or piece of wood trans- 
versely ; see rummichum, 

marlderled, miy may ariderieday neut. heavy 
laden ; parideriedy piy pay imp. arideriedoy etc., 
pass, iparideriedy etc. 

marid, to dry, as in puddles, morasses or 
rivers, to be dried up by the sun. 



marien, according to heathen custom } mr, 
may arieriy a heathen practice. 

marleiniep, m/, may to earn ; same as hmti- 
chum and marisap, 

marleB, miy may that is, to be bitten by 
mosquitoes. 

mariggo, and intens. mariggoriggo^ miy ma, 
ariggoa, neut. changeable j mariggo o atiu 
airaby etc., to change one's wora or will j 
PariggOy act. and trans. 

marij, miy may ariay pass, ari-in, inari-iriy 
inoari-ifty do. on the left hand. 

marikak, miy ma, arikakkay neut. straddling 
wide ; see also rummikak ; parikaky piy pa, imp. 
arikakkay arikakkeny etc.; iparikakka, pass. 
iparikaky etc., act. and trans, to straddle. 

marimawal, nuy may arimojalla, clear-sighted, 
to look with wide open eyes. 

marimmoamoa, to swarm, to crawl. 

mario, mi, ma, imp. arioay good, and rioy 
goodness; arioy an improvement; fr. pario\ 
ma-arioy one who makes ^;ood ; parioy piy pa, 
etc, see under p ; mono rio, nom. riorioy 
intens. 

mario-acho, a lord, a regent; lit. a good 
man. 

marior, minariory mamariory ariorra, to 
follow after, neut. pariory to^leave behind ; imp. 
ariorray ariorrariy inariory inoariorratty ipariorray 
pass, ipariory etc. ; rior, a following behind ; 
arioKy a leaving behind ; ma-ariory to leave 
behind. 

maripoch, mi, may aripochay aripochetiy inari- 
pochy inoaripochtfiy disturbed, fretted ; maripoch 
ja ina siesy my mind is uneasy; paripochy a 
disturber, 

iiiaripoedpo6d, mi, may aripoedpoedJay to clew 
up, to wind ; aripoedpoed, nom. one who 
clews. 

maritnp, roughly, cut ofF ; fr. rummisttpy mi, 
ma, as a bamboo, round stick, etc., transversely ; 
idem, marrichum. 

markarkagh, clear, clean, not foul. 

marmlxnl, to doubt ; minarmmi, mamarmimi, 
mamirmiayarmimiaHy inarmimiany etc. ; aramim, 
a doubting ; parmimi, trans. ; ma-armmi, a 
doubter. 

mame, still, calm ; also weak, pass. ; wcparfte 
and rummene ; arnty calmness, stillness, still 
weather. 

maro, far, deep, mi, ma, aroa, ro, distance, 
deepness; parOy imp. aroay aroan, inarOy i/toaroam, 
iparoa, pass, iparo, impiarOy ittoiparo i ma^aro, 
one who deepens { aro, a deepening. 

marob, drunk. 



U 




1 54 



Favorlang 



maromoxTomo, round, neut. ; fr. rummomor- to make whole ; imp. arummoa^ act 



rwno^ mi, ma, rommorromo, roundness; ma- 
aromorromOy one who rounds. 

maronno, mt, ma, shadows, neut ; see rum- 
momto, shadow; ronno an aijatt, a shadowy 
place -y parofiHO, act. and trans. //, fa, aronnoa, 
aronnoan, imtroftnoan, inoaronnoan, iparonnoa, 
pass, iparonno, iftt^aromto, inoitarotiHO. 

maroop o ziaia, the time from afternoon till 
sunset j mi, ma, verb. neut. 

maror, nu, ma, arorra, arorren, etc., to nm 
against anything. 

marorro, arorroa, together, in common, etc, 
a crowd or assembly ; see parorro, 

maroaaoaUa cbaan, a rejection of food, the 
squeamishness of the stomach after having 
eaten anything nauseous ; mi, ma, marossoalja 
ma-achaan inai o micAam, 

marotol, without anything, deprived of every- 
thing ; Ta Deos marotul ja bog, God is incor- 
poreal, i.e. without a body, pres. mi, fut. ma, 
nom. deprivation -, see the root rummutui; ma-a 
otul, one who is destitute. The Favorlang 
people do not use this word thus, but for the 
end of anything, as the end of a chair or table ; 
still it comes to the same thing, for where 
anything ends, there it exists no more. 

marpeta, the evening, the evening time. 

marpilil, minarpibi, mamarpibi, arpibia, neut. 
to wake up, to awaken j parpibi, pi, pa, imp. 
act. trans, arpibia, arpibi-in, inarpibi, inoarpibian, 
pass, iparpihi, etc. ; arpibi, a waking up. 

marri o toob oebcs, to dig out ; mi, ma, 
arria, pass, arrin, etc. \ see above. 

marri o toi, to pick out a splinter with a 
knife or needle ; inarri, mamarri, arria, 
arrien, narri, inoarrien, 

makalllen, mi, ma, akallia, idem, Takeis. 

marroak, loose, not close together ; marro- 
akonaupoot, a loosely woven stuff; marroak o 
aJda, paddy thinly spnmg up. 

marroom, an ornament made of shells. 

marman, black. 

marmp, minarup, mamarup, aruppa, aruppen, 
itiarup, inoaruppen, to wave with the hand. 

manoaaoal, mi, ma, arsoasoaUa, neut. to 
seethe or bubble up, as water does when it 
boils ; parsoalsoal, imp. arsoasoaJla, arsoasoallen, 
inarsoasoal, inoasoasoal, iparsoasoalla, pass, soa- 
soallen, a seething ; ma-arsoasoal, a seether. 

marts!, ripe, spoken of field fruits ; artsi, 
nom. ripeness. 

martuatual, to tumble head over heels. 

mammmo, whole, not in pieces, nor broken ; 
written mammmo, mi, tna, arummoa ; parummo. 



tnarummoan, tnoarummoam, tparummoa^ pan. 
trans, iparummo, etc. ; nummo, soundness j mm- 
arummo, a healer ; arummo, a healing. 

masa, minasa, mamasa^ asa, asan^ uuum^ 
inoasan, to barter, to sell ; asa^ ware, merchan- 
dise; ma-asa, a seller; masa, is also a noun, 
and means the same in the Takeis dialect 

maaa, well cooked. 

masaba, poor, necessitous; masabba o wtackam^ 
destitute ot food ; masabba o arribil^ Tnthoat 
furniture ; nn, ma, asabba ; sabba, nom. pov* 
erty, necessity ; pasabba, imp. asabba^ asmobmn^ 
etc, pass, ipasabba, etc, to make poor. 

maaallaad, mi, ma, asaUadJa, the trunk of a 
tree from which the branches are cut off, but 
the roots still left in the ground ; saUaaJ, such 
a trunk. 

maaallalr, nice, in eating and drinking- 

masammo, mi, ma, asammoa^ wimcicd i 
metaphorically used of those who are 
by sickness. 

iwawnnaw^ mnasaHHan, mamasanmm^ 
nama, asanannan, inasananmam, to be envious 
or jealous, to hate ; sannan, nom. envy, jealousy, 
hatred ; ma-asannan, one who envies. 

masanno 7 how ? masanm mat9 aimsas ? hofw 
large is the picture ? qua manuuri; a little good. 

masaod, mnasoJ, mamasoJ, to pour out j see 
jummaoJ, 

maBarammosammo, mi, ma, asari 
neut. the dazzling of the eyes; pasan 
sammo, act. and trans. ; sarammosammo, num. a 
dazzling. 

maaaira, minasarra, inamasarra^ msmnm^ 
asarran, inasarra, inoasarram, to look al^ tn 
behold; asarra, a beholding; 
spectator. 

masas, asassa, lazy, slow. 

maaaso, minasaso, mamasaso, asas9a^ 
inasasoan, inoasaso, to loiter, to be 
to hate ; pasasso, trans. ; marasso ijo imm^ I SB 
dissatisfied with you, and thus is taken to wttem 
dislike and hatred; sasso, displeasure, halved} 
ma-asasso, a ))outer. 

masasoom, mi, ma, to bring two ends li»- 
gethcr ; Tabai Paus a don masasoom ja 
Tabai Paus's house adjoins mine; 
and summasoom ; sasoom, nom. pasasmm^ 
the place where two things join ; 
masasoom, also masasoom abaas, a complete ; 

masat, minasat, mamasat, asaitA, 
inasat, inosatten, to carry two burthens 
the road, bearing them by turns, and 
setting them down. 




Vocabulary 



iSS 



masau, mmasau^ mamasau^ asau-a^ as/men^ 
inasaUy inoasaueny to beat seed out of the husk, 
which is done on the ground, with a beater 
called tatta ; tasau^ trans, asau, 

maseag, nunaseas^ mamaseasy aseasa^ aseasen^ 
etc., to stand up, to rise up ; pasean^ to cause 
to arise ; piy pa^ ipaseasay asecuy resurrection. 

masear, miy ma^ asearroy right on end} 
paseaVy to set up j asearrerty inaseaVy tnoasearrefiy 
as array ipaseary etc. j aseary nom. a setting up j 
ma-aseary a founder. 

maselakko, miy may aselakkoay entirely useless 
through idleness; pajelakkoy trans, and act; 
selakkoy laziness; ma-aselakkoy one who makes 
another lazy. 

masliam, an old man. 

masi, miy may asUiy asiafiy inasiy inoasiatiy to 
shower j mast a oetasy a shower of rain ; asiy or 
asi a oetaSy a shower. 

masilNia, m'masibauy mamasihauy asibauay asi- 
bauefiy inasibauy inoasibauy to wrestle, to strive ; 
pasibaUy trans. ; asibaUy a wrestling ; ma-asibau. 

masich, miy ma ,imp. asicha ; masesichy intens. 
to pain ; neut. also smarting from ardent spirits ; 
pasichy act. and trans.; sic/ty pain; sesesich, 
intens. 

masid, Tftty may asidday asiddetiy inasidy inoa- 
siddeny to be high, elevated ; the d is pro- 
nounced hard ; masidaijay babochy i.e. the 
throw, or the shoot is high ; sidy nom. high j 
pasidy trans. ; thus men say, mauc/tus asidy very 
high ; masid a /<?, spring flood, very high 
water, 

nuuddaaklrrap, to play on a double flute 
with both nostrils; minasdaukirrapy mamasi- 
daukirrap. 

masik, tough ; miy may asikka ; pasiky trans. 
asiky toughness ; ma-asiky tough. 

masiklau, minasiklauy asiklauay to play on the 
flute, also to set upright. 

■manllnrilr, as madsdden. 

maBlliollio, minasi/ioWoy mamasilioUiOy to 
transfer, pass. ; pasilioUioy trans. asiliolUoy nom. 

maslnaan, to echo; miy may asinana\ pasi- 
naatiy trans. ; sinaariy an echo. 

masliian, minasinasietiy mamasinasieriy asina- 
si nay asinasinan, i nasi nan y inoasinnsinan^ to pro- 
duce an echo in a church, or a closed chamber ; 
pasinasieny trans. ; sinasieny an echo. 

masiiii, minasiniy mamasiniy asiniay asimany 
inasiniy inoasiniany to hear ; pasiniy piy pay 
ipasiniy, trans. ; asiniy a hearing ; ma-asiniy a 
hearer. 

mairinl, to be like an old woman ; ma-asiniy an 
old woman ; masim, to be thus ; mi^ may asima ; 



pasiniy piy pa, ipasifUy to do thus ; ma-asim, one 
who does thus ; asiniy thus. 

masiomim, miy ma, asiorrummoy to play on 
the trumpet ; pasiorrum, trans, nom. ; orrumy a 
trumpet 

masipir, miy may asipirray neut. to push up 
slantwise ; pasifify act. trans, imp. asipirra^ 
asipirreny inasiptr, inaasipirren, ipasstpirrOy pass. 
ipasipiry etc 

maslflarratok, miy may asisarratoky to play on 
a certain instrument like a bow ; sarratok, the 
name of the instrument. 

masiBlilem, childish ; pasts hiemy trans. ; ma- 
asishiemy one who is childish. 

masislet, minasisiety mamasisieiy to cool, the 
cooling of things which have been heated by 
Are; pasisiety act. and trans.; people also say 
mosisiety pausisiet, 

masitabblllo, miy may asiiabbilloay to blow on 
the trumpet ; pasitabbiUoy trans ; tabbiiloy a 
trumpet ; ma-asttabbilioy a trumpeter. 

maaitik, to button to*; miy may asitikka ; pa- 
sitiky trans, nom. ; sasitiky a button, or anything 
to button with, imp. asitikkay and ipasitikka, 

masitiritlk, intens. root stimmikstk, 

masitosarrl, minasitosarriy mamasitosarriy 
assitosarriay assitosarrieny masitosarriy inoassito- 
sarriefiy to blow with the nose; assitosarrieny 
ina-assitosarrieny inoassitosarriany to blow with 
the nose on a certain flute called tosarri ; pinasi- 
tosarriy piy pay etc. 

masitam, miy ma, to be sharp ; situmy sliar]>- 
ness ; pasitumy trans, imp. asitummay etc. ; ma- 
asitum, a sharpener. 

ma^Jam, to oe an old man ; miy may asjamma\ 
pasjamy trans ; ma-asjemy one who makes 
old. 

maso, few, is never used alone, but always in 
combination ; thus people say, m/uo quay tor a 
few, maso koesziey a little, small; item, masOy 
matOy marOy madichy mchamy many etc., rather 
great, far, sick, void of drinking, eatine, etc. 

masoab, minasoahy mamasoahy asoabbay pass. 
asoabben^ inoasoabben ja ramedy to open the 
mouth, to yawn, to gape ; pasoah, trans, asoaby 
a gape ; ma-asoab, a yawner. 

masoan a barrl, the north wind. 

masom, miy may asomma ; inasomy inoasommeny 
to will ; as merab. 

masoparreopeo, miy may asoparreopeoay aso- 
parreopeoany inasoparreopeoany to go round, to 
run round ; masofarreoy to go round frequently, 
or once; asoparreOy asoparreopeOy a running 
round; <uopmrreoan or aijasty asoparreopeoan 
aijan, a place for running round, a course. 




IS6 



Favorlang 



asofiscfpa^ eren, onlinaiy ' 
as msUts^ikiX. 

afcii.'J^i'o/, z«AaJ;>j^1rl/n^ to Vpinj the spindle 
with which ctne spins. 

r, not ot the same weight, «, ma^ 
rjs ; /lOMr, tnns. 

r, «f, flu, asjrrjj as matsilc qxA, neut. 
to project a little in length beyond another j 
w . 7f > > i ? jy, intense ; A^-**"! tnnsw ' j 

Buoiicb ia ocao, headache, m', ma-AtsrifSoy , 
a piin in the head) f*^*9 ^^^-S trans, nom. ! 
^srii\ headache. ' 

Baurro> a hind or n«. 

maMiror, ic, *«.:, «z/<jjrr«, same as mjikias { 
A£a.-*r, tru;s. ^zjsr^ accusation, mrproich j j*a- 
jsi^*'^^ ar. accuser. 

initMft> knpthnise; kj ^jzx'j: *cJL^f/J «2.^^, 
I see the Ivvat lengthwise, imp. .fj.v^ j f^szsi^ 
cans. ; //j^f, length ; tKJh^iszs,\ long. 

Bttspe, wet ; tti, m^ ^/^^^ /^T'. ^'-^ ^^ • 
trar.^w r.om. ^'Pt^ moi><« mj-^^ijpfy x^iX, 

1Mfp<yt> «:, na^ ^-/tfi-VJ, to he b.:>y. to have 
sc«::^:h.:"ig to do; iTifar.s a;x^ a'.I C.v.d o: »:i>- 
c..;j:..-^e o: mir.d, which i* i;:"'.iw\.:iy*e ; fcj- 
/vr. :ri:.5^ ; see i.r.d;r the Jetirr p, sxc^ Vickt., 

the r.K\tr.er.; '.tkv.s^xx:, Lt. a cvV^i w.no ; 

Bat&btabi. Ft. mi. *v^\-j.\'u, r.eut. hig^- 
Ur^c, as f«.v--vr'; fi-::^,v-:.\ :*^ h«^v.*.:er. ; an. 
an.: trir.s. -..v-jv *:i.r.v^.\»w:, js:*5.\vc ; ;b^.-,;.v^\ 

V ■ ' ■ • - • 

1 r. i^ , iRLf ^ :^.v^\ *v:e « r .* i v •. iicv 

.^ •. A ^ ^. * • 

N.:r>; ..aV, •«., mi, ji-ji. Li ^ fK::A U lTx:.i< 
mi-^:^ / . a ; .; , o^ :v.4 1 er . 

*v ..:-.o.x.<o. . s»':"»T> a:N.'> t,- <\.\:\>> ;rc g-:v«:r. 

:ri-x :,• ^, ;: . iu -i -jl / / .•».:-.:* ^,^ ,*, ** 
^;«2..^ #, « a:*v -g , m^^ ^ ii ^ ,-*v t» • ,* 



matagsa, to let blood, to be bloody; ^aU^a^ 
tians^ and act., /f, /tf, /tf;«,noin. blood ; A^fipt 
tmam^ the menses | jBa-otofftf, one who lets 
blood. 

"«•*•*«■, fresh, iu)C salted ; Itfibur « U^ ficsh 
water; fatakam^ trans^ to nuke fresh; iidbn^ 
to refr»h; atakan^ a refreshing; ma-iitakmrn, a 
refresher. 

mitalaiiii perhaps, it is pocsiUe; an, aw; 
/•iZjjh, nvMn. 

f taitoi trodden down, as a field of rice, 
barky, grass, etc 

wt*f JMMfm mi^ moj tahumtiumma, ooveicd 
lip, in order to pamoce perspiratioQ. 

flULta-od^ heavy, also pregnant ; UuuA, 
heanness, trans^ and act. ; f^aumck^ ma-itfamrJk, 
<x»c who makes heavy. 

flULtapo, full, spoken also of the mind; 
/ur.!^ to £11, trans, and act. pi, fa, imp. 
.1:^7.^, «=::^^B, etc.; pass, i/isz^^ etc.; U^ 
fulness; ^t£sf9c^ a dJ&ng up; mj flffl/f*, a 
nlier. 

Bafeuxibftt. athwazt ; isttImU, Dom.crasflkes ; 
•Kj-u:-^^.:.'^:, cross. 

BULtaxnci* to Isy on one »de, to do anytbing 
Ir. a s:r.i>:c: :r.am:er; :^£ij tKxn. sinister. 



m^r/^ :o dr^arr: ; ^ur^mi — .t, impu ; 

• .'\*-««i. A ^*a ^JLm»A « J^te*«^ r 4«^aMa* 

m^::^ a drrar.*£T. 
BULtta. :o o.^ ar.yti'jig 

r.^rr.irc*,sis :s ncK appEed further 




and 



«-.a.. *k' '.f^Va. ^ 7bv.Mk.>*.. . %» ^ I m\ i 

Tiu^.::.:.^.:.-, *xje >«io n:-Jr.plies^ 

r-iiua.1, (vc^Lk. :. «.ct:.T ; iiq 
fxi.'x .< .v:; ; mz-^z^Lsi^ xa who ^ 

1^ Vk I. ...«^. \t « ... ••. 

% m 

:rar.x t*^ t*^ ^^^^ 

rr re .m . f»^:^-ie.\s. u xz. stk: 

s. ,. ..\ 4^ 7iJr*r-v^. ftfiirrj* to jowct; 
• ^ ..:. ^:.^ -.wi.. ziLSZ^r.'A^tL. etc | 
w* , v^Vs a* ".fl^-a. I , ^^crr/. as jB^frari. 
nalML m Cii . ^ n^Zi-^ ; J=^^ as IM 



v^... 



^— *^ »^'^ .«**!-*. j;.*^ .r,^ ^i\ .*.i^ .V ;j». o»v: , 



;.af.x« «^-.v. u.'ki/.., ;i*( ct.&>»T;^ .*c a sa^YTK. 




Vocabulary 



^5? 



nift^nHir^ mi, nuif aiUlikka, neut. blind of one 
eye, so that men cannot see the light ; tillik, 
such blindness ; ma-atUIik, one thus blind. 

matinoho, minatinc/w, is said of the sea water, 
when it stands still between ebb and flood, 
because the sea then appears swollen ; it is also 
said of the belly, when men are full, or when 
the belly swells ; it betokens also a little putrid, 
because when anything begins to stmk it 
swells up. 

matlnnaam, minatinnaamy mamatinnaam, 
atinnama, etc., to precede, to lead a train ; 
patinnaamy pi, pa, etc., to go before \ tinnaam, 
before 5 ma-atinnaam, a foreninncr. 

matis, lost, gone ; mi, ma, atissa, neut., patis, 
ti;^ns. 

mate, to melt, neut. mi, ma, atoa, or melted, 
pass., pato, trans. 

mate, great ,* matoto, intens. mato, mi, ma, 
atoa, pato, trans, and act. ; ato, greatness ; ma- 
ato, a magnifier; comes from pato, ato, a 
magnifying. 

matoa, minatoa, mamatoa, atoa, to hasten; 
patoa, trans., atoa, nom. 

mato a babat, a large, unwieldy person. 

matobodi (the first short), mi, ma, atobcuha, 
as mauranies, 

matoUas, mi, ma, atolassa, neut. blind of one 
eye, so that men cannot see the light ; toiUu, 
such blindness ; ma-atollas, one thus blind. 

matorrl toni, mi, ma, and ma-tai-tai, in the 
same way as maries, pestered with fireflies. 

matorro, minatorro, mamatorro, atorroa, ator- 
roan, inaton'oan,inoatorroan, to doze, to slumber ; 
patorro, trans. ; atorro, slumbering ; ma-atorro, 
a slumberer. 

matflhesy, mi, ma, atshesia, atshesian, inat- 
shesy, inoatshesian, odd numbers, as 3, 5, 7, etc., 
where one exceeds ; patshesy, trans, tshesy, un- 
evenness. 

matshis, brackish, saltish, mi, ma, ats/tisa, 
pats/ties, act. to salt, trans, imp. atsfna, atshisin, 
inatshis, inoatshisin, ipats/nsa, etc.; tshis, salt- 
ness ; atshis, a salting ; ma-atshis, a Salter. 

mataiaboro, mi, ma, atsiahoroa, to hit the 
mark ; patsiaboro, trans, ahoro, aim. 

matflUo, long, high ; tsilo, length, height ; 
patsilo, trans. ma-atsUo, long. 

matsiole, mi, ma, atsioUa, atsioUan, inatsioU, 
inoatsiolean, to game, to play, as the Chinese do ; 
patsiole, trans. ; olf, nom. gaming ; ma-atsioU, 
a gamester. 

matnppacb, mi, ma, atuppacha, neut., patup- 
tach, act. and trans, between two, nom. tuppach, 
between ; tuppach aijan, an intervening space. 



mau, a father, an uncle is also called mau, 
with the addition of his own name ; maupattala, 
a stepfather. 

man, and karri, or kar, compositum cum 
nomine, praeter signiflcationem verbi a quo 
nomen derivatum est, vicissitudinem ejus m- 
cludit, imitation in doing anything, as man- 
tattis, nom. ; fr. tummis, to reject mutually, or to 
reject at the same time. 

mau-aat, minau-aat, mamau-aai, imp., auauta, 
neut to be infested, as with lice, scurvy, pock, 
etc.; pauaat, trans, and act au-aat, nom. an 
infection ; ma-au-aat, infectious, as ma-au-aat 
digh arapies, an infectious complaint, that 
which affects another, as original sin ; pau-aat, 
pi, pa, imp. auaatoa, auaaten, inauaat, etc., pass. 
ipauaat, etc. 

mau-adat, minau-adat, mamau-adat, auad^ 
adda, to fall to logger heads; auadadden, etc; 
pauadat, trans, auadan, nom. logger heads ; ma- 
auadat, a quarreller. 

man (or kar) aitaita, minau-aitaita, mamau- 
aitaita, auaitata, auaitaitaft, inauaitaitan, to 
imitate what men have seen; pauautaita, pi, 
pa, etc., to do the like ; compounded of kar- 
mau and ataito, nom. ; fr. mitaita ; kar and 
mau both mean mutually. 

man - aioiMJopak, to come against one 
suddenly. 

mau-aso-asot, of different lengths, not the 
same length ; mi, ma, ojoojodda, ckauaseMon^ 
trans. 

mau-asot, the same as two ; mi, ma, ojodda ; 
pau-asot, trans., euon, nom. 

maubebiech, mimaubebieck, mamaubebiech, 
aubebicha, aubebic/ten, inaubebich, inoaube- 
bichen, to pull by the hair ; aubtbicA, nom. ; 
ma-aubebicA, 

mauohil, mi, ma, auchilla, neut accomplished, 
as mac/iuU ; pauc/tiL, to accomplish ; trans, and 
act. imp. ipauchilla, auchiUen, inauchil, ino- 
auc/iilUn, aucMUa, pass. ipaucMl, etc ; authd, a 
consummation ; ma-aucM, a finisher. 

maocbo, lousy ; mi, ma, aochoa ; paocho, 
trans, acfto, a louse ; ma-aocho, a louser. 

mauohUB, very ; mi, ma, achmsa ; mauckus 
madich, very sick, perhaps also too sick, w^ 
mauchus maxilo, too long, also bold, courageous, 
mauchus aga, skilful with missile weapons; 
mauchus babido, clever at the pen ; auchusso^ 
auchussen, inauchus, inoauchussen, imp. tpaU" 
chussa, pass, ipauchussen, or auchussan, with 
respect to the instniment with which anything 
is done ; pauchus, trans, and act betokens any- 
thing consummated, also leaving off; means 




is8 



Favorlang 



also to dart across, or run through; auchuSy 
completeness, used also adverbially \ ma-auc/ms^ 
an accomplisher. 

maudum, dark, applied also to the mind ; /«/, 
ma, audumma j paudum^ trans, odum^ darkness ; 
vaa-odumy a darkener. 

man kar motto, lit. one across the other; 
chacholliety mi^ ma, the same as mau-sasaki 
motto, 

maokat, minaukat, mamaukat, aukatta, au- 
kattan, inaukattaa, inoaukattan^ to love, to 
rejoice ; paukat, trans, aukat, love, joy ; ma- 
aukatj a lover. 

maokatir, mi, ma, aukatirra, etc., as ma- 
daddo \ paukaiir, trans, nom. katir, 

mauloom, mi, ma, auloma, the same as mita- 
room', auloom, nom. a coming together; Jon o 
auloman, as don o arorroaijan, a meeting house. 
- maunionis, mi, ma, aunionisa, aumomsen, 
inaunionis, inoauniomssen, intens. inaunis, 
especial ; paunioms, trans, nom. aunionis, par- 
ticularity, peculiar property. 

manxiis, mi, ma, aunisa, private, not common, 
se maunis patodon, he is gone to reside at his 
own place ; paunis, act. and trans, imp. aunisa, 
aunisaa, iftaunissen, inoaunissen, ipaunisa, pass. 
ipaunis, etc. ; aunis, property ; maaunis, pro- 
prietor ; maunis o ala, mi, ma, imp. aunis o ala, 
to speak to particularly, to testify. 

manniaso arach, minaunisso orach, ma- 
maunisso arach, aunisso arach-a, aumsso orach- 
en, etc., to appropriate to oneself, by taking 
possession or inheriting of another^s goods ; 
paunisso-arach, trans. ; aunisso-arach, nom. 
ma-aunisso-orach, an heir. 

maupl, minaupi, mamaupi, anything beaten 
small or fine ; see paupi ; ma-aupt, a beater. 

maupies, minaupies, mamaupis, aupisa, aupi- 
san, inaupisan, inoaupisan, to strive about any- 
thing, to scramble; paupies, trans, aupies, a 
scrambling ; ma-aupies, a scrambler. 

maupnlla, mi, ma, aupuUa, to seek gain or 
advantage by any means ; aupuUa, nom. a seek- 
ing of gain ; ma-aupuUa, a gain seeker. 

mauranies, minauranies, mamaurames, au- 
ranisa, auranisen, etc., to play, to joke ; 
pauranies, trans. ; auranies, play ; ma-auranies, 
a jester. 

mauroman, and mauroma-roman, intens. mi, 
ma, imp. auromanomama, to differ, to vary; 
pauroma-roman, pi, pa, act. and trans, to make 
different ; auroman, nom. difference. 

mauaa, mi, ma, is said of a field when the 
weeds are burned down, or otherwise cleared 
away ; pouso, pi, po, osaa, pass, osa-an, inosa- 



an, ino-osaan', osa, nom. a clearing away; fr. 
peso; ma-aosa, one who clears away; ausa^ 
clearness ; fr. mausa, 

mau-sasakimotto, mi, mo, transverse; com- 
pounded from mau and sasakimotto, 

mauBi, white; mi, ma, ausia\ pausi, trans; 
osi, whiteness ; ma-aosi, white, as ma-ausi, 

maatatarroggl, changed, either knowingly 
or unknowingly, to change another's TOods 
through deceit; fr. tummaroggi, comp. of moK 
and tattarroggi, 

maatattis, to reject, to abandon, as kartattis, 
mi, ma, autattisa, autattisan, inautattis, inoautat- 
tisan ; pautattis, trans, but includes changes. 

mau-tattubboel, mi, ma, to visit each other 
backwards and forwards. 

mautod, unfruitful, spoken as well of beasts 
as men ; also fruitless, as people give up any- 
thing that is fruitless; pautod, trans, autod, 
unfruitfulness ; ma-autoii, unfruitful. 

mautairl, minautsiri, mamautsiri, artless, 
ignorant, inexperienced ; imp. autsiri ; pautsiri, 
trans. ; autsiri, ignorance ; ma-autsiri, an ignor- 
amus, as ma-autsiri, 

mashles, minazhies, mamazhies, axMs-a, 
axhiS'in, etc., to carry on enmity ; pazhies, pi, 
pa, ipazhies-a, etc. ; azhies-in, an enem^ ; 
aschies, enmity, whence karri or mau axJttis, 
to be mutual enemies ; ma-axhies, an enemy. 

mazilMaiach, foul, improper ; mi, ma, azibal- 
lacha, trans, pavdhallach, mabaUach, mi, ma, 
abaUacha, to be foul, nom. ; baiiach, all kinds 
of things ; ma-aballach, one who acts dis- 
ortlerly. 

masibochor, minazibochor, mamazibochor, 
azibochorra, to lie comfortably, without pillow, 
coverlet, etc. 

masichil, minazichil, mamasuchil, azichiUa 
(the inflections are not otherwise used than 
with respect to the persons who are lamented, 
and are formed not from the neut. but from the 
act. pazichil), azichillan, inazichilian, inoaxJich- 
illan, sorrowful ; paidchil, act. and trans, pi, 
pa, act. imp. trans, azichilla, ipazichiila, etc, to 
make sad ; pic/iil, sadness ; ma-achil, one who 
is sad. 

masich-sicli, that which is badly smoothed 
and ironed out, mi, ma, oTdchzic/ta; pazich" 
zich, nom. ; the root zimch-zich, see under i. 

mazigingin, minazigingin, mamaxigif^n, 
aziginginna, to halt, to limp ; pazigingiM^ 
atzigingin, a halting ; ma-otsigtn^in, a halter. 

maiikoar, minaztkoar, mamaztkoar, axikoora^ 
azikoarran, inazikoaran, to jump, to jump over 
anything. 




Vocabulary 



159 



maiikap, just, enough, sufficient ; ma-atsikafy 
sufficient ; patsikap, trans. 

maiilocli, miy ma, aziiocAa, diligent ; mazi- 
lock a rima, dexterous ; paziloc/t, trans. ; scihc/tf 
nom. ; ma-azilocA, 

maitman, minaximany mamaTuman, axt- 
manna, aximannan, etc., to lay up treasures; 
patsiman, trans, atsiman, a treasure \ ma- 
atsiman, a hoarder. 

masipl, minazipi, mamazipi, azipia, to rage, 
to make a noise; azipi, a row; ma-azipi, a 
fury ; a: in the preceding paragraphs is often 
changed into is, 

maslporrlporri, minaz^porrit>orri, mamazi- 
porriporri, aziporriporria, to fall down through 
giddiness or weakness; spoken only of men 
and beasts. 

mba, as moba, that by which ; pauba, trans. 

mbarri, minobarri, manobarri, obarria, abar- 
rian, to stand ; paubarri, trans. ; it is really 
mobarri, but the is so pronounced that it is 
not heani. 

mbe, minobe, mamolte, obea, obean, inobean, 
to go away, to leave ; it is mobe, but the is 
bitten off snort, so as not to be heard ; paube, 
trans., to drive away. 

mbod, mienbody maambod, the falling off of 
hair, or feathers. 

mbnkkas, white, blank ; bukkas, the u short. 

mchab, mienchab, maamchab, chabba, chc^btn, 
ienchab, inochabben, to steal ; is also taken for 
machaby in general. 

mchach, mienchachy maamchachy chach-a, 
chach'tn, unchach, inochacheny to dream. 

me, mine ; mame, ea, ean, ineany inotany to 
despise ; paie, trans, nom. act. a despising ; 
meay a despiser. 

me, to ao anything superfluous ; differs from 
barras and bior, 

me*aab, mineaab, mameaaby eaba, eabany 
inoaban, inoeabany to precede another in doing 
a thing ; hence meaah mabay to know before- 
hand ; meab paboy to preconceive ; mrapattisy 
to foretell ; fr. meaab-maboy nom. aijaab-maboy 
foreknowledge j fr. meaab-mitay nom. aijaab- 
mitOy prescience ; fr. meaab-pattitey nom. 
aijaab-patitey prophecy ; fr. meeaah - meraby 
nom. aijaab-meraby predetermination ; fr. 
meaab-mei'iesy nom. aijaab-meries, preparation ; 
and so in other cases. 

meab, mlneab, mameaby eappay eappan, 
ineappany to assist, to help in battle. 

meacha, mimeachay mameachay tachoy eachan, 
ineachany to beg, to pray. 

me-adam, m, ma, e-adamma^ eadamman. 



ineadamman^ inoeaddam, to drive birds away 
from the fruit ; pe-adam, trans. ; aiadam^ nom. 
a driving away. 

mebabo, mimebabo, mamebabo, to drive, not 
to sink ; neut. morfies, 

mebonna, see mtbonna, 

medadorrl, minedadoni, mamedadorri, eda- 
dorria, edadorrian, inedadorrian, inoedadorrian, 
to quarrel with another ; aUadorri, nom. quar- 
relling ; this word is compounded of mau or 
koTy and means to quarrel together, again and 
again ; ma-aidadorriy a quarrelTer. 

me-ich, narrow ; mi, may echa ; pm-tch, trans, 
nom. e-ich, a strait ; ma-e-ich, narrow. 

me-11, mine-ily mame-il, e-iUa, e-illan, ineilUm, 
inoe-iUan, to fear, to take care, to avoid. 

mekap, mime, mame, ekapta, pass, ekappag- 
geie ja baron, the settling ox binis on trees or 
houses after their flight ; this is the same as 
mikkapy pakap, 

mema, hi, anything very fat ; ema, fatness. 

meodup, mimeodup, manuodup, eoduppa, the 
setting of sun or moon ; aiodup, nom. a set- 
ting. 

merab, mnerab, mamerab, erabba, erabbcn, 
inerab, inoerabben, to will. 

merled, an eel. 

merlen, minerien, mamerien, erina, erimn, 
inerien, inoerien, to do, to make, also to arrange 
between parties ; we use it also for create ; 
pairien, to do, to make, to form ; nom. subst. 
airien, a making, creation ; ma-airien, maker, 
creator, as ma-atap, 

merles, slanting, sly ; mi, ma, 

mere, m/, ma, eroa, eroan, etc. ; tairo, trans., 
the teeth on edge by eating sour tnings ; atro, 
nom. on edge. 

meroobroob, rm, put, eroobrooba, neut. to turn 
the edge of a knife, etc. ; pairoobrvob, act. and 
trans. 

meroos, mineroos, mameroos, erosa, erosan, 
ineroos, ino-eroosen, to marry, to be united; 
meroos badda, the young man is married; 
erosan ja sini, the woman is married ; mroostm, 
a son-in-law ; tamau airoosan, tanai airoosan, 
father and mother-in-law; pairo-os, to marry 
out, imp. airoosa, airoosan, inairosan, inoairosan, 
etc. ; ipairosa, pass, ipairoos, etc. 

mero-08, minero-os, manuro-os, ero ossa, ero^ 
ossan, inero-ossan, ino-ero-ossan, to sit ; Takeis, 
mikoii, idem ; pairo-os, imp. act and trans, to 
sit or cause to sit ; airossa, airo-ossen, inmro-os, 
inO'Oiro-ossen, ipairo-ossa, etc, airo-os, a sitting. 

memmmm, mmirumrum, mamirumrum^ to 
sink in the water, as morpUs, 




i6o 



Favorlang 



metorro, msmetorro, mamctorro, etorroa, etor- 
roan, snetorroan, inoetorroany to warm oneself at 
the fire J fudtorro^ pi, pa, ipcutorroa, ipaitorro, 
etc 

mgagb, anything strong, as arrack, etc. 

miadi, foul, dirty ; ml, ma, iacka j pa^ach, pi, 
pa, trans, and act. to infect ; aiach, nom. Pithi- 
ness, infection ; ma-aiach, one who infects. 

w^^^iia^j mitttaUa, mamialla, jalla, jallan, 
iniallan, inojallan, to look at anything with 
attention ; alalia, observation, beholding. 

mian, miman, mamian, ianna, iannan, inian- 
nan, inoiannan, the rest and relaxation which 
the Favorlang people observe for several days 
whenever a chief dies ; also the proclamation of 
holy days. 

miarar, foul, dirty; mi, ma, inoarra, paiarar, 
trans. 

mibieoh, mini, ma, ibicha, ibichen, imbich, 
inoibiechen, to drag along. 

mibonbon, mi, ma, the point blunted. 

mibonna, minibonna, mamibonna, ibonna, 
ibonnan, inibonna, inoibonnan, to seek for game, 
to hunt ; paibonna, trans. 

micham, minicham, mamicham, ichammam, 
ichamman, etc., to smoke ; micham o chatto, to 
smoke tobacco. 

micho, right, well, as it should be. 

mldaclium, mi, ma^ idachumma, pass, idach- 
umman, etc., to overshadow j paidachum, trans. 
dachum, a shadow. 

mldardar, mt, ma, idardarra, close, near 
together, nut loose, the opposite of marroak \ 
paidardar, act. and trans, aidardar, nearness; 
ma-aidardar, one who makes close. 

mididten, as madidilen. 

midod, mimdod, mamidod, idoiUa, idoddan, 
inidod, inoidodden, whereout ? i.e. the place 
whence the liquor is taken ; idoddan, inidoddan, 
inoidoddan, to lade, to take out with a spoon -, 
paidod, pi, pa, ipaidodila, etc., idem. 

ml-ech, mi, ma, stupid, not sharp; mi-eer, 
neut. ; pai-ec/i, trans, aud pai-rcr. 

xniel, miniel, mamiel, ila^ Hen, iniel, inoilen, to 
twist rope ; also to stop, to prevent, to keep 
back, to dissuade. 

mlgarrorro, mi, ma, igarrorroa, igarrorroan, 
ja, ta, to assemble, to come together, as mitar- 
roan and mautoon; paigarrorro, trans, aigar- 
rorro, an assembly; aigarrorroan, a place of 
meeting. 

mlgogh, mi, ma, igog/ia, slow, lazy. 

mikkap, mi, ma, means to hold on, to cleave, 
is said of the birds when, after a flight, they 
come and rest on a tree or house, because they 



hold on with their claws, and, as it were, cleave 
fast ; imp. ikkappa ; paikap, to stick, to cleaTe, 
activ. and trans, aiiap, nom. 

mikkll, minikkil, mamikkil, ikilla, ikiUan^ im^ 
killan, inoikillan, to fear, to be afraid, alao to 
gird oneself, to watch. 

miUnno, damp, clammy ; mibo^ paibo^ in the 
dialect of Takeis, paikinno, 

miko, wrinkled ; iko, a wrinkle ; paik9^ 
trans. 

mikod, as meroos, to sit ; mi, ma, ikodJa, etc j 
paikod, trans, nom. aikod, 

xnikorros, minikorros, mamikorros, ikorrossa^ 
to descend; from this imp. appears to come 
the Tiloese word, mikorrossokosso tarran, a steep 
descent; in the Favorlang dialect, mikaussa- 
kosso, tarran, 

mikotlko, same as miko, 

xnilieb, minilieb, mamilieb, iliba, iliben, imUeh, 
inoiliben, to look behind over the shoulders; 
pailieb, trans. 

mllip, the lapse of time, whether past or 
future ; mi, ma, pailip, trans. 

miloBlos, mi, ma, aloslossa, neut. the same as 
meroobroob ; pailoslos, trans. 

mlmoos, minimoos, mamimoos, imosa, imasam^ 
inimosan, inoimosan, to look sour; patmooj, 
trans, nom. aimoos. 

minannls, and minanunnis, mi, ma, imp. 
inunanissa, the same as mauroman, to diflfer, 
and mauromaroman ; painannis, act. and trans. 
ainanis, nom. difference. 

mini, this ; is also a verb. 

mio-a, mi, ma, i-o-a, to clear away new fields 
that have not been worked before. 

miochooch, miniochoock, mamiochooch, iochoo- 
cha, to sink down, to shrink. 

miog, miniog, mamiog,jogga,joggan, inioggan^ 
inojoggan, to fall from a high place; also an 
untimely birth ; hence ioggan, a miscarriage ; 
paiog, trans, nom. aiog, a fall. 

mien, minion, mamion, imp. ionna, jonman, 
inionnan, inoionnan, to shrink together; miko, 
ditto ; paion, as paiko, trans, nom. aion, albaiko, 

mlooch, to shrink at once ; nom. aiooch, aioo- 
chooch, paiooch, paiooihooch, trans. 

mipies, minipies, mamipies, ipisa, ipisen, iid' 
pies, inoipisen, to cut through ; paipies, trans, 
nom. aipies, 

miponpon, or moedippas, — a %ien, broken teeth. 

mirras, minirras, mamirras, irrassa, irras^ 
san, inirrassen, inoirrassan, to weep, to lament; 
pairras, trans, nom. airras; mirrairas, intens. 
nom. airrairas, 

mixrlty minirrit, mamrrit, irta, irten, imrit. 




Vocabulary 



i6i 



imritterty to make packthread ; pai-irrit^ trans, 
nom. airrit, 

mlBapiel, miy may isafnla ; see summapieL 

mlshleB, miy may idshesay pass, auhieseny etc. ; 
ja chauy to make fire with a piece of wood ; 
pashiesy trans. 

misl, mimsiy mamssiy isia, to make water; 
paisiy trans, nom. tjiy urine. 

mlsor, minisoKy mandsoTy isorra, isorrefiy im- 
soTy inoisorreny to set fire to. 

mlsosso, miy may isossay a leak, used only of 
pots, pans, and not of a house or roof; paisossoy 
trans, nom. aisosso, 

miiyk, miy may asykkay asykkeny inasyky etc, 
to hang or lean over j paisyky trans, nom. msyky 
a jutting out. 

inita, minitay marmtay itay itarty imtarty ino- 
itafty to see ; paitay to show ; aitay sight ; ma- 
entOy one who sees well. 

mitaita, same as mtay nom. aitaita. 

mitam, minitamy mamitamy itammay itam- 
mefiy initamy inoitammetty to borrow ; paitam, to 
lend ; piy pay ipaitam, 

mltapao, miy ma, itapady itanpaoy initanpaOy 
etc., nearly like mitay but it means to look on 
anything with attention. 

mltara o tarran, when two ways come 
together in one. 

mltaronno, smooth, slippery. 

mitarroom, to meet together, the coming 
together of a multitude j minitarroom, mami- 
tarroomy itarrommoy etc. ; mitarroom o assahan o 
capiuiftythe village collects when the chief comes. 

mltas, minitasy mamitasy itassay itassariy ini- 
tassarty'trKntassafty to stay out all night. 

mltatsiel, to cleanse ; mitatsiel o dofty o tay to 
cleanse the house, or the place j ta Deos miu 
atsily torro boa innai araptes, God cleanseth us 
from sin. 

mltebabo, minitebabo, mamitebaboy itebaboay 
to look up hieh. 

mltirpo, minitirpoy mamitirpOy itirpoa, to look 
down below. 

mltooh, tough, not easily torn asunder. 

mitUn, mimttiny mandttiny ittinnay ittinneny 
irdttiny inoittinneriy to threaten any one behind 
his back. 

mkach, yellow, green. 

mkakach, pale, like sick people. 

mkar, hoarse ; mkarjiriy a hoarse throat. 

mo-ab, minoaby mamoaby o-abbay to increase 

in number or size, to cause increase ; see pauab. 

moab makes the comparative degree, as 

moab a matOy marioy greater, better. 

moar, spoken of food, means lukewarm ; 



spoken of a sick person, it means hot ; spoken 
of the face, it means ashamed, angry, or rather 
blushing j differs from matadach, 

moM, ndnoaSy mamoas^ oasoy oasan^ inoasariy 
ino-oasarty to waJk. 

moba, minobay mamoba, aba, drowsy, as mba. 

mobarri, same as mbarriy to stand. 

mobe, same as mbe, to go either from, or to, 
one's place ; paubty piyPay tpaubcy to drive away. 

mocharaiina, and moc/uaranTut'channay miy 
may ocfiaranna-channoy pass, ocharanna'chan' 
nan \ recovery from sickness of the mind, is 
mocharanna-channay of the body, ocharanna- 
channan \ paucharanna-cfuumay trans. ; aucha" 
ranna-channay recovery. 

moohlb, ndnocldby mamochiby ocMbbay ocMbben, 
inochiby ino-ochibbeny to carry alone } fauchib, 

mocho, ndy may ockooy ocAoan, inochoamy ino- 
ochoany to seek lice. 

modarau, half round ; modarauja idasy the 
half moon. 

modaraadau, round as a circle ; modaraH- 
dauja idaSy the full moon. 

moddon, the gables of a house. 

moddon means to take up a burthen ; also 
to increase one's burthen, and generally to in- 
crease or double a person's work, for the first 
people say, moddon o pauchiePy and moddon o 
paiobo ; and for the second, fnoddon o pataapy 
or pairien, 

modon, minodony mamodon, odomay odomen^ 
inodony ino-odonneny to harden oneself against 
anything. 

moeda, miy ma, oeda, oedan, inoeday ino-oedany 
how is it ? 

moela, minoeUiy mamoeUiy the fall of the dew j 
oeUiy the dew, hoar frost 

moelapillap, full, overflowing. 

moetas, nunoetasy mamoetasy to rain \ oetMsan, 
tnoctassany ino-oetassen ; pautaSy pi, pa, ipau- 
iassa, etc. ; oetas, rain. 

mogasTgimo, miy ma, disturbed, neut ; see 
gummaggimo ; applied also to the mind ; ma- 
gaggimo axjesy disturbed in mind. 

moffoob, miy may imp. ogocfuzy pass. ogocAen, 
inogocky ino-ogocAeny to play; paugocky trans, 
ditto, augoch, 

mokakiaoh, indisposed, a little unwell, a 
weariness in the limbs. 

mokalOBsikot, miy may to curl, neut; see 
kummalossikot. 

mokap, minokapy mamokapy okappay okappen, 
inokapy ino-okappany to meet any one. 

mokaralakala, loose, open, not ck>se woven, 
used only of linen, stuffs, and mats. 




l62 



Favorlang 



mokarinli and mokarinigim, round like a 
ball, also to roll j pass, written mogarim ; fr. 
kummarimkini, 

inokl1)ach, notched ; mokibach o silok^ the 
knife is notched } kibacA, a notch ; okibacha^ 
neut. ; see the root ma-aukibachf notched, 
adject, kummibach, 

mokikiet, torn; fr. kummikiet\ miy may oki- 
kieJJa, act. and trans, aukikieti, piy pa, auki- 
kieJJa, aukikieJJan, inaukikieiidafiy inoaukikied- 
datty ipauukikldday pass, ipakikleddatiy etc., nom. 
kikiedy a rent ; rna-aukiku'dy rent. 

molappa, minolappay mamolappay olappoy 
olappatty etc., to wander, to err. 

molliol, m'tnoUioly /namolliol, oUioUa, oUioUany 
inolUolUiny ino-oUioUafiy to help any one in a 
work for friendship's sake, and not for pay ^ 
a-oUi-oly help, as aulUol \ ma-a-oUi-oly a hel})er, 
as tna-auUiol. 

molflo, the stanchions or posts which stand 
by the side of houses. 

momach, //r/, ffuiy the running of paper in 
writing, but with large blots; it differs from 
mabad. 

momas, minotnasy mamomaSy omassay omassafty 
inofnasy ino^massetiy to salt, to pickle. 
momataB-o, as rnatas-o, 
memo, a mole ; the people of Fonnosa con- 
sider these as poisonous, and will not approach 
them. 

monach-onaclio, mnonachonach-Oy etc., the 
overflowing of rivers. 

monad, minonady mamonady to bum ; onady a 
flame. 

moocli, miy ma, oochoy pass, oocheriy etc., to 
carry earth in a basket. 

« mood, miy moy ooday oodeHy inoody 'mo-o(hietty to 
bind sheaves or bundles, as of paddy or millet ; 
nom. oody a sheaf; oad aiUoy ood baiur, a bundle 
of paddy or millet. 

moor, miy may imp. ara, pass, orfn, etc. ; 
paoor, trans, same as gummoch. 

moot, minooty mamoot, aotta, ootteny inooty 
ino-ooteny to measure. 

moiML, minopa, mamopOy as mpay aupa^ nom. 
flight ; aupaijarty a place to fly to ; aupaijan o 
chaaVy the resort of birds. 

mopakko, minopakkoy mamopakko, to over- 
flow, to nm over; mopakkopakko, to overflow 
much. 

mopareopeo, miy may oparfopeoa, opareopfoany 
to delay ; paripareopeOy trans. aupareopeOy lin- 
gering. 

moiMit, minopaty mamopaty opattOy opatteny 
inopaty ino-opatten, to go to meet one ; other- 



wise written mfaty the m short, vnthout a 
vowel ; hence umpat, as it were ji (inf. sossi^ 
or sinosst) mpat. 

mopeaik, miy ma, opesikka^ neut. bruised^ 
broken ; see pesik, 

mopiech, miy may opiechay opiechatty ino^eck^ 
im-opiechefty to shrink ; the opposite oi podJik. 

mopuB, same as gummosy to pull out grass 
with a piece of wood called arro, 

mora, whorish, a whore; mor* i slibus^ an 
abandoned woman, given up to prostiiiition. 

morab, miy may orabbay to go and return the 
same day to and from any place. 

morabbiea, mimrabbiesy mamorabhies^ the ebb 
of the sea ; aurabbieSy nom. the ebb. 

moracta, minorac/ty tnamorachy oracha^ iorack, 
iniorachy inoioracky to grumble. 

moranni, miy may oranmay as morrod, 
moribal, decaying, dilapidating; mi, ma^ 
oriballa ; pauribaly act and trans. auribaUa^ 
auriballafty inauriballany inchauribaUan, /i, fn, 
ipauribaUay pass, ipauribaly inipauribal, utoipaM' 
ribaly nom. auribaly dilapidation ; ma-auribal^ 
anything falling to decay ; oribaUoy to cause to 
decay. 

morlch, minorichy mamarichy otricha, orichen, 
etc., to live, to maintain one's life j porick, 
trans, to support, itifi^\y and maintain another} 
nom. porichy is not in use for being, but means 
maintenance, feeding. 

morlcb, miy may orichoy neut. has no noun, at 
morichy to keep alive ; porichy piy pay oricha^ 
pass. orichcHy inorichy ino-oricheny to feed; 
aurichy a feeding ; ma-aurichy a feeder ; paur- 
ichy piy pay ipaurichay pass, ipaurichy impmurich^ 
inoipaurichy to make lively; also to cure of 
disease. 

morich, miy may orichay the growing of the 
body ; pass, orichan, etc. ; aurichy nom. a grow- 
ing; porichy idem, ut supra, to feed another; 
hence ma-aurichy such a feeder; paurich, ut 
supra, to provide for another. 

morledda, minoriedday mamoriedday oriidda^ 
orieddofiy inorieddarty ino-orieddan, to run away 
from those to whom we l>elong, as parents, 
partners, village, etc.; pauriedda, ditto; the 
root is rummiedda j ma-aurieddoy such a fugi- 
tive ; auricdday such a flight, 
moriet a zysya, about half past one p.m. 
morikak, to stride, as the legs of a man ; wd, 
may oriktikkay see rummikak ; also morikak^ 
imp. arikakka ; hence aurikak, a straddling ; 
rikaky ditto ; ma-aurikaky straddling. 

moroog, minoroogy mamiroog, orogay omgan^ 
iftorogafiy ino-orogarty to fall down ; murroqg o 




Vocabulary 



163 



chubboen^ to have the falling sickness ; pauroogy 
trans. 

morples, m/', may to sink, the opposite of 
mebaboy to drive. 

morra, the countenance. 

morraia, nuy ma, auraia, neut., same as 
macho moraia, see above ; aurraia, nom. 

morraB, roomy, wide. 

mon o asiel, the bottom of the foot. 

morrod, tmnorrod, mamorrod, orrodda, orrod- 
derty inorody in(horroddeny to forsake, to dissimu- 
bte ; paurody see under p. 

morroor, minorroory mamurroory orroroy 
orroren, inorroory ino-orrorerty to scratch the 
ground after the native manner, to plough ; 
paurooTy ditto j aurooTy nom. a harrow, a 
ploilgh. 

mortatach, to scatter; neut. mnortatachy 
mamortatachy ortatachay with regard to the 
place 'y ortatachatty inortatachen \ see also pauta- 
tachy act. 

moruB, cool, fresh ; pauruSy trans. 

morzi, frightened ; nom. aurxi, 

mosishien, or masis/tierty mi, ma, oshMenay 
neut. the root summashiesy notched, indented, 
a.*; certain plants ; pausishies, to make notches ; 
act. and trans, nom. shieny verbum. shhieny to 
notch. 

mossa, minossay mamossOy osjfy or moneay to 
go away ; it has sossQy in the third person 
pres., in the per. sinossay and in fut. seuossa, 

mota, minotOy mamotOy otay iota jo iota, 
mo-iotay to vomit ; dummochay idem. 

motakkotakko, minotakkotakkoy mamotak- 
kotakkoy same as mapakkopakko, 

motarram, mi, may otarraroy neut. high land ; 
pautarrary to exalt j imp. autarraryautarrarariy 
inautarrarafty inoautarrarany ipautarraroy pass. 
tpautarrary i/tipautarrar, inoipautarrar ; tarroTy 
height of land, neut. autarroy a rise ; act ma- 
autarrary an exalter. 

moto, a comer, a shop. 

motosyslia, miy ma, to be all day about a 
thing; as motozysha bachinan tummaapy to 
work the whole day with a fever ; pautozyshay 
trans. 

mottil, wearied, done up ; miy ma, 

motnp, minotup, mamutuPy imp. otuppa, the 
going out of a candle or fire ; also the healing 
of a wound, neut. etc.; patupy act.; pautupy 
trans. 

mpa, as mopa. 

mpakko, as mopakko, 

mpakkopakko, as mopakkopakko, 

mpat, as mopat. 



mpQB, to pull up grass witli a piece of crooked 
wood called arro, 

mean, soft, easily cut ; also hoarse, 
msasan Ja pattite, to speak hoarse. 

naan, a name. 

naankankan, the apple in the throat. 

naas, the roof of the mouth. 

naassa flusles, after a little while. 

nal, a mother, an aunt, with the addition of 
the name ; nai pattalamy a stepmother. 

naida, how many, plur. naidaida, 

na-ies, or na-isy the bowels. 

naito, seven ; naito a rumnneSy a week. 

name, we, differs from torroy because torro 
includes those with whom we speak, but namoy 
not so. 

nasa, by and by, used only of the future, 
but people join it to aniy as am/tasay and relat- 
ing the past, men write naasa, 

natta, one. 

nattagsar, a handful (from maitay one, and 
gsoTy a handful), like narroa gsar, natarrod 
gsary a gripe, a handful ; fr. gummesar, 

naupoot, linen, clothes. 

nauqua, a buck, a he-goat. 

noano, a bramble. 

nok, snot. 

nok baron, resin, gum. 

nok xinl, the white of an egg. 

nomomot, minomosnoj, mamomosnosy msnossay 
nosnosierty inosnoSy inonosnosseriy to smell after 
something; nomosnos numa imaF what do 
you smell, or snuff after ? 

nono, a raspberry ; written noenoy this is 
plural; Hoeno babo is a smaller berry; noemo 
gagily a larger berry, like the raspberry. 

not, the nose. 

nomma, what ? 

nnnimoohl, ninummocMy nanummochiy nochUiy 
nochiany inochtatiy to knit one*s brow, to purse 
up one^s mouth. 

0, all kinds of strong drink. 

obo, a claw, a hank of yam ; fr. pa-vbo, 

obon, a hencoop. 

ochal, enough, sufficient ; praet. imchaly fut 
ino-ochal\ hence the yerhy paacAaly piy pa, imp. 
ipaochaUa, pass, ipaochal, impaockcu, to satisfy, 
to pay. 

oclio, a louse. 

oda, the intestines. 

odar, fine split rattan, djred red, which people 
wind round the spears, darts, eta, but when 
painted red it is called ach9^ 




164 



Pavoflang 



odo, the gall-bladder, 
odor, the breast-bone, 
odum, dark, darkness, 
ooba, sleepy, drowsy. 

oobasan, a deer; sobocfietty a buck that has 
shed his horns; tummokko, one whose horns 
begin to grow, 
oedan 7 what then ? how then ? 
oola, hoar frost. 

oono, the head, handle, or hilt; oe/to pausy 
the handle of a bill hook. 
oono abi, a bundle of areca nuts. 
oeno bilpU, a bundle of plantains. 
ooraas, grev hair, greyness; ma-auraaSf a 
grey-headed old man ; oeraasse/iy inoeraas, to 
become grey. 
oetas, ram. 

ogga, a cloth for the loins, 
oggoch, a binew, a vein, 
oggom, an ant. 
olla, as chadsia, 
onutrrlnuirndi, an eructation, 
ombarrl, m'tnobarriy mamoharriy obarria, 
obarria/iy inoharnay imabarriay to stand ; the 
Uiort bitten off. 

ombo, minoboy mamoboy obooy obouriy inoboaHy 
ino ohoany to Mrwrll; act. it iH written mibo-y 
nuboy ^irtf'M; othrrwiMT, ombo in to thatch a 
lioii^ with yj'A^'iy a^ ttummalafi and y^ummeoch. 
omlcho, iM'vi-r, n^ vrr a^^aiu. 
om|Minu;hpacb (the nhort), minOytnaampary 
ipnrtufipaihuy tin: U-ui^; free, or ntU cleaving to 
anyiliifi}^ ; op|>miif: to fnuyj'o. 

ouiul, .i II411K: ; tr. tfOtitrnJ or moniuL 
oob, the whA of tin: rliiinnry; hence oobeHy 
tnutthf tno QuUetiy blurkriicd with MM>t ; pa-ooby to 
lovff Willi ntffot. 

OOlTy xtUJkW ImihIioo. 
0U%, a ilfiiiii, lictnp. 

OOi, thr \HHic% I ma ootetty to l>c bony; oot 
urnQy tin- ikiill ; (mt artQiQy a ril); oot o sieSy 
the iMiklKiiir; out teety the UiUc of the fore- 
lirud. 

oriu;baii, tirrd. 

oriiii, ^,iry h:iirn ; lirncr oeraastCKy inoeraaSy 
ino ormiir/t, to Ih-coiih* y,iry. 

or\itn in nuid of anything that falls into the 
ryrn and o(:<'asionn inconvenience ; hence people 
fcay irnpcriing the ryes, orina/ty inorinan. 
oroau, a wril ; m Oy ditto. 
oroboa, the diin. 

orrum, a wind instrunicnt wherewith they 
play, not unlike the trumpet, 
orriim a maotaa, the apple of the eye. 
od, white ; osi a machoy the white of the eye. 



od, a shelter. 

osian, a refuge ; fr. post. 

080, a tortoise. 

08 08, the shin-bone. 

08118, the tresses of hair, whether worn by 
the Chinese or natives ; also the bushy tops dF 
the long grass, which are tied together to 
frighten animals. 

otattan, otatteoy to do things moderately; 
otautattariy otautattea, ditto. 

otoppiet, the eyebrows. 

pa, a wortl of denial ; patziy there is no fi&h ; 
joined with nouns it means to make, as fa 
chauch, to make a grave ; also to do anything, 
as paucho'y fr. pa and ochoy a louse, to louse; 
but mixed with other words it means to cause 
to do, as papiechy to cause to fight unjustly ; 
paborroy to pacify ; or to suspect or accuse any- 
one, as pacnaby to accuse of theft ; fachod^ one 
who raises an unjust suspicion. 

pa, pinQy papcy aay pass. a-€Hy ina^ inoaem^ to 
rub a sore limb with a warm handkerchief, 
etc. 

pa-acb, pina-achy papa-achy ipa-ach-ay ipa- 
ac/ty inipa-achy iftoipa-achy to roast. 

pa-aga, //, pay a-aga, a-agatty ina-aga^ im^ 
agatiy to cough ; a-agay a cough. 

paa-oabi (the first a short, to distinguish it 
from pa-oabty to cause to sow), pina-oabiy papa- 
oabiy a-oabioy a-oabi, inaoabiy to sow tlie hekls ; 
thus ao-abiany ifuioabian ; babosay pa-oabi, the 
man who sows; aJiia ipa-oabty the paiUly is 
sown ; bonna aoabiatiy a field that is sown ; 
aoabiy a sowing ; aoabi arty aoabi aijaxy the sow- 
ing season or place. 

paard, pi, pa, aarday aardetty inaardy im- 
aardeuy the binding up of the hair of females; 
aardy the tresses of^omen ; also the binding of 
the same. 

paarpa, pinaarpay papaarpay aarpoy ipaarpa^ 
aarpanniy inaarpatty htoaarpamdy to join to- 
gether, to join oneself to any society; cAo 
Abasshe pinaarfo Batshekariy those of Abasshe 
have joined with Batshekan ; paarpa o dippiy to 
weld iron together; note that paarpa rec|uiies 
that the ends come over or into one another; 
see summasoom. 

pa-arroo8, Takeis,^/,/a, a-arrosa^ Temeren, 
patuttotuttOy piy pay atuttotuttoay the trembling 
and shaking of one, when slung in a sling. 

pa-as (let the last a be scarcely heard). 
p'maaSy papa-asy a-assOy to sneeze; a-assem^ 
ina-asy ino-a-assefty a sneezing. 

ptL-KtXAty pina-attaty papa-attat, to stammery 




Vocabulary 



1^5 



written pa-at-at ; Ternercn, pa-ap-ap j Takeis, 
pamaama^ imp. at-atta, 

I>at>a, pinaba^ fapaba^ abaya, to give to 
understand, to inionn, to reveal, to tell, to 
proclaim ; trans, fr. maba, which see ; part. 
abaijeriy inabaijen, inoabaijen, abanniy this par- 
ticiple is used with respect to the person who is 
informed j ipaba^ inipaba, with respect to the 
business which is told. 

pabach-ich, pinabach - icA, papabach - ichy 
abach'tchoy abach-icheny inabacMchy inoabach- 
ichefiy to unbend, to unteam ; fr. ipabach-ichay 
inipabachichy etc. j trans, fr. mabach-ichy which 
see. 

IMLbarrabarra, pinabarrabarra, papabarra- 
barrOy ipabarrabarray inipabarrabarray to strip 
one naked j trans, fr. parrabarray which see. 

pabarras, pinabarraSy papabarraSy ipabarasay 
to let loose ; trans, fr. parraSy which sec j ma- 
ababarrasy a redeemer; ca Cristus paga ma- 
ababarras o habosay Christ the redeemer of 
mankind j babarraSy redemption. 

pabasso, pinabassoy papabassOy ipabassoay ipa- 
bassOy inipabasjOy to make strings; trans, fr. 
pasjo, which see. 

pabasBoes, and pabasoesy see passes. 

pabecbab, pinabechaby papabechaby abech- 
abbtty abfchabbetty inahechaobeny inoabfcAabben, 
to cover any one with a coverlet, also to cover 
oneself J babec/tapy a covering. 

pabechibecbl, pinabechibechiy inopabechibechiy 
abech'tbechiay inabechibechiy inoabechibechty the 
person for whom j abechlbechiany inabechi- 
bech'tany inoabechibechiariy to swing anything 
backwards and forwards ; act. ipabechibechUiy 
ipabechibecMy inipabec/tibechiy tnoipabechibechi, 

pabich-i, piy pay abic/i-iay abicAi-ifty inabich-iy 
to sprinkle with water, as pashipie j abic/tiy 
aboasy nom. a sprinkling. 

paboas, pinaboasy papaboasy ipaboasay ipaboaSy 
inipaboaSy inoipaboaSy to remove ; trans, fr. 
maboasy which see. 

paborren, />/, pay ipaboorenay the flowing of 
blood ; act. barren ja taggOy to let blood. 

pabot, pinaboty papaboty abotta, aboltatiy ina- 
bottany inoabottany to put on shoes (this with 
respect to the feet, but with regard to the shoe, 
aboty inaboty inoabot) j ipabottay ipaboty etc. 

pacbabbecbab, //', pay achabbechabbay said of 
the birds as they move their wings in the flight, 
and thus beat the air ; chabbechaby nom. sub. 

pacbanacb, pinachanachy papachanag/ty to 
place the arrow in the bow; ipacAan-ag/m ^ 
changed, with regard to the arrow, into ipach- 
anaghy tnipachanaghy inoipachanagk \ but with 



respect to the bow, achan-agJiany inachan' 
aghatiy inoachan'aghaH\ see the root chunuS' 
nagh, 

pactaarod, pinacharody papac/tarody acharoday 
acharoddany ifuuharoddafty inoacAaroddan, to 
put on stockings ; trans, fr. cAummarod, which 
see. 

pacheo-ach, pinacheo-achyPapacheo-acky c/ieo^ 
achay cheo-acheriy chinethochy inocheo-acheny to 
come again, to return, to give back ; also 
applied to the mind, when it retires into itself, 
or withdraws itself from anything. 

pacblcbicbicbi, piy pay achichichUhlay to hiss, 
as hot iron put into water. 

paobiecb, pinachiechy papachiechy cuhichay 
achtchefty inacfnechy inoachtchetty to roast ; trans, 
fr. chumnueg, 

pachlp, pinachipy papachipy achippay achippoHy 
inachipy inochipariy ipachippay ipachipy inifiuhipy 
inmpachipy to add to ; chacltipy an addition, 
nom. 

paobtrrap, piy pay achirrabbay acAirrabbafiy 
inachirrabbafiy to insert anything in between 
where things adhere, can be suitably em- 
ployed for ingrafting or incorporating. 

paobitcbit, piy pay acAiichittay ac/iitc//itie»y 
inachitchity to beat as the arteries or the heart ; 
ma-achitchit ja oggachy an artery. 

pacbote, pinacnotty papachotty choteoy cAoteifty 
cAinotfy to punish. 

pad, pinady papady badda, baddaarty binaddan, 
linen, or such like stuff. 

padaat, //, pay adaatay adatteny inadaaty 
inoadaattefty ipadaatOy ipaJaaiy inipadaaty inoi- 
ptuiaaty to do anything early in the morning, 
as cAumda ; padadaaty intens. nom. adaaty be- 
times. 

padadi-o-daob-o, pinadacA-o^ch-Oy papa- 
dacA-o-dacA'Oy adacA-o-dacA-oay to wander 
through the country. 

padakkodakko, pinadakkodakkoy papadak- 
kodakkoy adakkodakkoa, to nod with sleep. 

paddabo, pinaddaboy papaddaboy addahoa, 
addaboafty inaddaboaHy inoaddaboany to keep 
oneself entrenched or secreted ; ma-addabo^ a 
concealer. 

paddacb, pinaddacAy papaddacAy addacAay to 
end, to leave off. 

paddam, pinaddamy papaddanty addamme/ty 
inaddamany irtoaddartimany to eat the paddy, 
or rice, in the field, as is sometimes done by 
wild animals. 

l^dAOaXypinaddaty papaddaty addadoy addaddn iy 
inadaddiHy inoadaddeHy to hew or cut anjrthing 
to pieces. 




i66 



Favorlang 



|MLddi<11| phiadduUf padaditidi^ aJdUia, to 
shiver as one in an ague ; paddidi a sMen, to 
chatter with the teeth. 

paddik, pi, pa, addikka, to overhang, as long 
gnus hangs over the path. 

ptddo-oddo-ol, meagre. 

padduppo, pinadilopo, papaddopo, adduppouy 
to stoop forward, also to lean forward with the 
head resting on anything; thus adiiopoan, inad- 
dopoan, inoaddopoan\ paadduppo, imp. ipaad- 
duppoa\ Favorlang, pagguppo, trans, ipaag- 
guppoa, 

padirdir, pinadirdir, papadirdir, adirdirra, to 
tremble } act fr. madirdir. 

padocta, pinadoch, papadoch, adoch-a, adochen, 
inadoch, inoadochen, to give a rap, as at the 
door; padoch-doch, to rap frequently. 

padnllo, //, pa, aduUoa, adulloan, inaduUoan, 
inoaduUoan, to strive, to see who shall finish first. 

paga, to be, to have ; it is also a denial, as 
pa, and in this sense is doubled, as pagaga, by 
no means { pret. pinaga, fut. papaga, imp. 
aga-a ', item, as, as when, without question \ 
pagaja sarosono de bonna, there is a mist in the 
field ; paga, means quantity. 

Pftffa-j Ph P^i ipoga-a, ipaga, inipaga, to cause 
to be, e.g. ja alii oa inipaga ? is it not you that 
has done it ? that is, have you not caused it to 
l)e ? ga, essence, a being j agaijan, the place 
where anything is, as agaijan oia Deos, con- 
tracted tor agauta Decs, the place where 
Gud is. 

pagagagaga, //, pa, agagagaga-a, pagagag- 
aga-o-to, to gurgle with water. 

pagaigal, pinagalgal, papagalgal, agalgalla, 
to pant. 

pagasan, //, pa, agasanna, agasannan, ina- 
gasan, inoagasannan, to love ; agasan, desire, 
love ; ma-agasan, a lover. 

paggai, a little time, a minute. 

paggeas, pitiaggeas, papaggeas, aggeassa, to 
stretch oneself, as yawners do. 

paggi, pinaggi, papaggi, aggia, the snarling 
of dogs. 

pagoegoe, pinagoegoe, the raging of the wind 
and sea, the rumbling of thunder, or of the 
belly J pagoegoegoegoe, mtens. 

pagorgor, pi, pa, agorgorra, to snore. 

pagotgot, pi, pa, the cooing of doves. 

paicliam, in act. trans, imp. aichamma, 
babosa, aichamman, inaichamman, inoaichatn- 
tnan, ipaichamma, pass, pichamman, imchamman, 
inoickamman, ipaicham, inipaicham, inoipaicAam, 
to drink, to offer to drink; aichan, nom. a 
drinking ; aic/taman, a drinking-cup. 



paiohasarra, pimuchasarra, papakhasarra^ 
for the imp. people say, sarra o kagil, to sleep. 

paichleoli, pi, pa, the pain of the stomach ; 
imp. aichiecha, pass, aichiechen, itudcHtck, 
inoaichiechen. 

pales, pifiaies, papaies, aisa, ipmes, impaus, 
inoipaies, to put away. 

paikap, trans, fr. mikkap, which see. 

paikiek, pinaikiek, papaikiek, to crack. 

pakietUet, //, pa, idem. 

pailieb, pinailieb, papaUieb, aiUeba, ailieham^ 
inailiban, inoailiban, to call, to fetch any one; 
paailieb, imp., ipaailiba, trans, nom., aiBtb^ a 
calling. 

pailielieb, intens. 

paior, pinaior, papaior, aiorra, aiorren^ 
inaiorren, inoaiorren, to precede any one, to 
show the way; the way, aiorran, inaiorram, 
inoaiorran. 

pairas, pinairas, papairas, airasa, ipasrojOf 
to be stubborn in anything ; ipairas, in^atras, 
inoipairas, as pasies, nom. Mr as, as asies. 

pairoos, trans, from meroos, which see. 

pais, pinais, papais, aisa, aisan ifudsam^ 
inoaisan, to pester. 

paisis, pi, pa, to whistle through the teeth. 

palta, pinaita, papaita, ipatta, to show, 
what > ifaita, inipaita, inmpaita, to whom ? 
aitanni, tnaitanni, inoaitanni, trans, from miia, 
which see. 

pajus, //, pa, bajussa, bajussen, binajus, 
inobajussen, to blow a gale, to storm ; pabajus, 
trans., bajus, nom. a stonn. 

pakaqua, pinakaqua, papakaqua, kaaqua-^, 
akaqua-an, inakaqua, inoakaqua-an, to do any- 
thing moderately; also ipakaqua-a, ipakaqua, 
inipakaqua, inoipakaqua, nom. qua, a little, 
moderate ; akaqua, diminution. 

pakarot, //, pa, imp. akkarotta, to crack; 
pakarot, trans, nom. karot, cracked. 

pakaukau, pinakaukau, papakaukau, akau- 
kaua, akaukauan, inakaukauan, inoakaukanna, 
to bawl out loud. 

pakeas, //, pa, akeassa, akeassan, inakeas, 
inoakeassan, to stick out one leg behind, as 
kummitta. 

pakeas, //, pa, ipakeassa, ipakeas, inipakeas, 
inoipakeas, to cause such to be done, nom. 
akeas, the sticking out of the leg. 

pakibokibo, pinakibokibo, papakibokibo, akibe* 
kiboa, to flutter, trans, fr. kummibokibo, which 
see. 

pakikeUkke, pi, pa, akikkekikkea, to swanii, 
as pakikkekikke tsi, binnan, to swarm, as fish or 
deer. 




Vocabulary 



pakillekilley pi, fa^ imp. akilkkiHea, to rattle, 
but 80 as that a ringing is heard, as from money, 
or the rings on the arms; differs from paseerseer, 

pakkio, pinakkio, papakkiOf akkio, aikioa, the 
cry of deer. 

pakkol, pif pa, akkoUa, to dig deep. 

IMUcobos, pinakoboSy papakobos^ akobossa^ ako- 
bossafiy inakobossan^ inoakobossatty to hunt with 
nets ; also ipakobossay ipakobos, inipakobos, 

paJcotkot^ //, pa^ akotkotta, the cackling of 
hens. 

pala (let the last letter be scarcely heard), 
pinala, papaia, ipala^ alanni, inalanm, inoalanni^ 
to say, to tell; aJay nom. a saying; this noun 
is compounded with karri, as karri ala and 
mauy as mau ala, to converse together. 

pala, trans, fr. malla, which see. 

palablaba, pinalablaba, palablaba, alablabba, 
alablabbarty inalablabbafty tnoaUtblabban, to fan 
with a fan. 

palachach, pinalachachy papalachachy ala- 
chachay alachacherty inalachachy inoalachachen, 
the opposite of padidJen\ see malachachy to 
make anything loose, of which this is the 
transitive. 

palachach means also to make anything 
loose, to put loosely together; but then the 
inflections are thus, ipalachachoy ipalachachy 
irdpalachachy inoipalachack, 

palalat, pinalalaty papalalaty balabalatOy 
binalabalaty balalabalattetty inobalabalattcfty to 
nut things in a row, or side by side; palalat 
ja se malam o bisay arrange the javelins and 
arrows ; it differs from palat ; see palalat y 
pinalalaiy papalalaty ipalalattay ipalalaty inipala- 
laty to arrange in a row ; add thereto, baUdaty 
the noun. 

palapilaples, trans fr. lummapilapies, or 
malapilapieSy which see. 

paiat, piftalaty papalaty balattay balatteny 
binalaty inobalaiteny as palalaty except that palat 
extends itself to the conveying, but taken 
transitively the inflections are, ipalatta, ipalaty 
inipalat ; add thereto balat, the noun. 

palaulanb, pinalaulauby papalaulauby laulaubay 
laulaubafty linaulauban, to sparkle, etc. 

palil, trans, allily a noise. 

pallaJcknin, trans, fr. mallakkum. 

pallldollldo, finalUdolUJoy papallidoUidoy alii- 
dollidoay aUidolltdoafiy inallidollidoany inoallidolli' 
doarty to nm backwards and forwards, spoken 
also of a crooked way ; pallidollidoay trans. 

P<^UU« pi* P^t allillay pass. allUletty inallUy 
inoallilletty as mauchusy matsipiy to roar an<i 
tear ; pallillily intens. palliL 



167 



pftUo, pif pa, imp. alloa, to reach to, to 
reach anything to any one, is also used for the 
giving of a pledge of marriage, etc., as the 
Formosans are sometimes accustomed to do ; 
paloy trans, nom. alloy a reaching out, a pledge, 
which is given as a pledge of a contract. 

pallosaa, pinaUossay papaUossOy allossay alloS' 
santtty inaUossanmy inoaUossanmy to discover or 
reveal a little to any one. 

palololollo, finalololulloy fatalololulloy aUoUd- 
loan, inalololulloany inoalololuiloany to make a 
noise, as by the feet of those who tread hard, or 
as from a shower of rain ; people say paldO' 
lulloja oetas, 

pamamma, pinamamnuiy panamammay amam- 
may to cover a field with grass, cover the field 
with what ? amammamanni and amammayany 
inamammanm and inamammayafty inoamammanm 
and inoammammayan 'y wherewith cover the 
fleld ? ipamammay impamammoy inoipamamma, 

pamean, ameeuay the mewing of cats. 

pamoggimoggi, piy poy amoggimog^y ttmog- 
gimoggiffty inamoggimoggieny inoamoggimoggieny 
to murmur, to mumble ; omoggimoggiy a mur- 
muring ,* ma-amoggimorgiy a murmurer. 

pan, ptnarty papan, hannoy bannatiy btnannany 
inobannatiy to stop up with earth ; pabtuiy pina- 
bafty papabatiy ipabarmay ipaban, tnipabafty to 
cause such to be done ; babafty a dam. 

pana, somewhither, to some place ; pana 
BaziekaHy to Batsjekan ; sometimes de is added, 
as pana de Timvany to Taiwan ; it is also a 
verb, and has in the pres. pinanOy in fut. papana, 
in imp. afuiy act. ipanay trans. 

pannab, pinannaby papannaby anabbcy wash 
the hands with what; annabbeny inannaby 
inoannabbtny wherewith wash the hands ; atma^ 
ban, inannahaHy inoannabany the washing of the 
hands. 

panno, pinannoy parumnOy anwMy to dress 
oneself, wnat? annoatiy inannoany inoamiotm, 
wherewith ? ipannoy impannOy inmpanno ; panoy 
trans. 

pannonnononno, //, pay the singing of mos- 
quitoes. 

pano, pinanOy papanOy to clothe another, 
what or who ? anoany inanoafiy inoanoany where- 
with ? ipanoy impanoy inoipanOy see pamtOy a little 
above. 

panoggonoggo, pinanokkonokkoy paparnkkoH- 
okkoy annokkonokkoay annokkonokkoaHy or amUy or 
aijafty inanokkonokkoaiiy inoanokkonokkoany to in- 
treat ; annoggonoggOy an intreaty. 

pa-oa-oa, a-oa-oa-ay the cry of crows. 

pa-obo, pina-obOf papa-cboy a-^boOy a-^boany 




i68 



Favorlang 



inaoboan, inoa-oboan, to clue, to clue up, to | 
draw up into a clue; also ipaoboa, ipa-obo, 
inipa-obo. 

paoB, a pairing. 

papaoha, an oyster. 

papadda, phuipapaJJa, fapapaJJa, apapacLia^ 
apapadJan^ inipapadJan^ tnoipapaddan^ to wash 
the feet ; wherewith ? apapadJanra^ or ayan^ in- 
apapaiUanniy vioapapaadanfd, 

papappa, fr. mapappa^ which see. 

papil, fr. mapily which see. 

papillepillik, apilUpiilikka, to clap together, 
as two hands, two planks, etc. 

para, pinara, papara, ara, aran, ifutra, hio- 
aran^ to be with any one, to accompany ; 
araosse ta Cabba oe? does Cabba keep company ? 
ara^ a comrade, pass, araa^ inaran^ to be 
accompanied } this passive is used with respect 
to those who attend on any one, as Tataba 
aran o Takalla^ i.e. Takabba is waited on by 
Takala } or Takaba inara o ichoy i.e. Takabba 
is attended by him ; and aran is also taken 
for the person who serves, that is the servant 
and maid. 

parab, pinarab, paparab^ iparaJ'aj to impreg- 
nate, to get with child ; see rummab^ the tran- 
sitive of which this is, and means, to impregnate, 
or to cause a woman to be pregnant, while 
rummaabf means to be pregnant, and ntbien, 
the child ; rhtab is received. 

paraba, pinaraba, paparaha^ ara^ araHy m- 
ara^ inoaratiy fr. para^ to adopt as a child, also 
to give up for that purpose, in which case it 
is iparaba-a^ iparaba \ paraba^ act. and trans. ; 
the child, rumntaka, takes another for his father, 
the real father lets the child be taken by 
another j paraba choa^ refers to those who take 
the child ; it is also said paraba^ to take a 
child \ an adopted father, rabaam o sh'tem \ 
the real father, iparabo j the child is called by 
the adopted father, aran, 

paxsiMibBl, pinarallibal, paparallibalf bara/li- 
balla, barallibalf binaraUibal, ino-barallibaly to 
put out linen, etc., to dry \ but has not such an 
extensive meaning as porra j pabaraiiiba/, to 
cause such to be done. 

parapies, fr. rummapies, which see. 
parar, fr. marar, which see. 
parara, fr. marara, which see. 
paraurat, fr. nunmaurat^ which see. 
parant, fr. rummaut, which see. 
ptadoasLa, pifiarJosan, paparJosan^ to choke, 
as those do who take food or drink the wrong 
way J paaniosartj iphmarJosan^ papaarJosafiy 
ipaarJosana, etc., to cause such to be done. 



pareMbl, pi^ pa^ imp. aresshiay itressM-im^ 
inaresshi, inoaresshi4n^ pass. iparessAif to set up 
to fight; aresshi^ nom. a setting onj am- 
aresshiy one who sets on. 

pariaut, pifiariaut, papariaut, ariauta, art- 
auiafif inariautf inoariaut, to fill, to make full ; 
also to let fill, in which case ipariauta, tpariaMt, 
ariaut, nom. 

Tpaxid, phuirU, papariJ, ortddeH, itiarid, itn- 
aridden, the place or part from whence ; arid- 
den, ifiariddan, inoariadan, to dry up, act. ; ice 
marid, neut. 

pazlggo, as rumtniggo, pinariggo, papaiigg9, 
^ggoay ariggoan, huw/ggo, inoartggoan^ arig- 
goan J see mariggo, 

parikak, see rummikak, 

parikoriko, pinarikoriko, paparikoriko^ rika- 
rikoa, rikorikoan, rinikorikoan, to shake any- 
thing, to wave it backwards and forwards, or 
let such be done, in which case it is iparikori- 
koa, iparikorikoy iniparikoriko, etc. 

pario, pinarioy papario, arioa, arioany etc., to 
make good ; mario, ario, an improving, a 
making gomj. 

pame, pinarne, paparne, iparnea, iparne^ as 
rumne ; paarne, see rummene, 

paroch-i-boch Ja boeenm, a clear sky. 

parokail, //, pa, arokaila, pass. arokaUetgf 
inarokaily to lay the hands or feet over each 
other. 

paroob, aroba, pass, aroban^ inaroban^ mo- 
arobanja bonna, spread about in the field. 

parrabarra, ptnarrabarra, taparrabarra^ 
barraharran, barrabarraan, binarrabarram^ 
inoharral*Qrraany naked, to make oneself 
naked. 

parrach, />/, pa, iparracha, iparach, to oom- 
mit fornication ; shlem parachy a bastard ; rimi 
parachy an egg, that is put in a wrong place 
outside the nest. 

parrar, piuarrar, paparrar, arrarrOy arra- 
raan, inarrarran, inoarrarraUy to hedge round j 
arrar, a hedge. 

parraa, pinarrasy paparraSy barrasOy barra- 
sany biftarrasany to let go, to free, tt) put out of 
one's hand, to set down, in which case it is 
iparrasay etc. j ma-ababarraSy a redeemer j 
ca Christus paga fna-ababarras o babosa, that 
is, Christ is the saviour of mankind. 

parri, trans, fr. Marriy which see. 

parrlbrieb, pinarribrieby to shake j arri- 
brieba, all kinds of shaking. 

parried, pinarriedy paparricdy arruhy arri- 
dany inarrUaNy the superstitious use of old en- 
chantments. 




Vocabulary 



169 



parrinon, pinarrinonf paparrinon, arrinoaf to 
quarrel, to do that which cannot be named ; 
rattirrien, idem. 

parrloriot, pi, pa, imp. arrioriotta, the in- 
tcns. of parriot j is said of ivy, etc., which 
climbs up long sticks or trees, and embraces 
them. 

parriot, ptnarriot^ paparriot, ariotta^ ariottafty 
inarriottatty to wrap up ; the same as rummiot^ 
but from another root. 

parriparrl, pinarripaniy inoparriparri^ parri- 
parriafparriparri'in, pinarriparrif inopamparri' 
in, to bore a hole. 

parrlpieripl, pi, pa, imp. arripieripia, pass. 
parripieri-in, pinarripieri-in, with a turn or the 
eye, to see anything dimly. 

parrlpieripit, ^/, pa, arri/itr/pittay pass, arri- 
pieripitterty inarrtpieripit, to cackle, to jabber; 
paripieripit, trans, arripieripity a prating, a 
babbling ; ma-arripieripit, a babbler. 

I>arro, pinarroy paparrOy harroay barroarty 
hinarroy to bundle up, to make up into bundle 
or sheaves; pabarroy pinabarrOy papabarrOy i 
pabarroay ipabarrOy etc., to cause such to be 
done ; barrOy a sheaf. 

parroa, pinarroay paparroay arrooy arroafty 
inarroany inoarroatty to dig up. 

parrorro, p'marorroy paparrorroy arrorrooy 
arrorroafty as rummorrOy to assemble ; parorroy 
pinarrorroy paparorrOy tparorroOy iparorrOy ini- 
parorrOy inoiparorrOy to cause such to be done ; 
mind that it must be written parorrOy act. 
from marorro. 

ptLTtf piftarty paparty artay artcfty inarty ino- 
arteny to bruise or break anything, as a reed, or 
such like. 

pas, pinasy papaSy bassay bass'iny binasy ina- 
bassifty to stop one in anything, to dissuade, 
also to carry a message ; toftiada cho pinaas 
assabafiy tnachas ja badda Terneren? who has 
infonned the village that the men of Favorlang 
have been beaten ? pabaSy trans. babaSy a mes- 
sage ; ma-ababasy a messenger. 

pasaas, pinasaasy papasaaSy a-aasuny inasaasy 
to occasion a looseness. 

pasaa, //, pay asasay ipasasay to carry on the 
head or on the neck, as an ox, the yoke, also to 
carry on the shoulders ; asasatiy the place where 
men carry anything; asasau loariy the yoke 
which the ox bears. 

pasaso, fr. sumntasoy which see. 

paaassar, pinasassary ipoiassaroy ipasassoTy 
inipasassary inoipasassary to whisjicr or say any- 
thing softly ; see passassar, 

paslKUiy pinabas^ papaibas, basbassa^ bas- 



bassefty biruubas, inobasbassen^ to bite flat, to 
gnaw even. 

pasear, fr. maseary which see. 

paseerse^r, /i, pay imp. aseerseery to rattle 
without noise ; see pakilUkiUe, 

pashadda, pinashadday papasjaddoy ipaskadday 
irdpashadday inmpaskadday to put a roof on a 
house. 

paahemar, pituuhemary papashtmary asht' 
marray ashemarrany inashemarrany iwuukemar- 
rofty to smear, to rub over, wherewith ? ipashi' 
moTy ifttpashemary tnoipasjemary to let the same 
be done, in which case it is ipasAemarray ipa- 
sheTnoTy etc., as above ; sashemary fat. 

pashi, to pass along ; pasfn abasy along the 
seashore ; mosoy ditto. 

pashimit, piy pay imp. asfdmday pass, astum' 
darty to stroke with the hand. 

pBisi, piy poy as'tOy ostotiy ifuuMtHy inoasiwiy 
ipasiy pass, //a//, inipasiy inoipasiy to shell ; asiy a 
peeling. 

pasies, fiery, courageous, pastes ramied, 
bold in words, to boast, to vaunt; posies 
mababaty proud in one^s gait; asies, nom. lofty ; 
ma-asiesy one who is bold. 

pasiet, pinasiety papasiety having taken cokl, 
to cough ; asiety a cough. 

pasikBik, pinasiksiky papasiksiky asiksikka, 
asiksikkeny inasiksiky inoasiksikkefty as madiddetiy 
to make Bist, close ; in thisf orm it is active, so 
also masikisiky but imp. ipasiksikkoy pass, ipa- 
siksiky inipasiksiky inoipasiksik ; fr. summiksik. 

paslncdc, finasinoky papasinoky iteuinokkoy ipa- 
sinoky inifastmky inoipasimky to blow the nose ; 
see passtnok. 

pairiniiln, pinasinsiny papasinsifty the headache. 

pailsiet, pinasisiety papasisiety asisitOy asisitetty 
inasisiety inoasisiterty to cool any food that is 
hot, also to let cool, in which case it is ipasis- 
itay ipasisiet. 

pasisse, and pasissississesey to rattle, as a 
broken gong, the bell, etc 

TPBMOtiy pimisoay pa^ajooy asooy asoasty inasoa, 
inoasoariy or soariy stttoany to wound, to cause 
to be wounded, in which case it is ipasoa, 
inipasoa. 

pasobi, pinasobiy papasobiy ipasobiay ipasobi, 
inipasobiy inoipasobiy to strew and sprinkle with 
anything dry, as salt, sand, etc 

IpdMi^iwo^iypinasoeisoeiytapasoeisoeiy asoeisoeiay 
to whistle with the mouth. 

p9i»09Uy pifiasoesy papasoeSy ipasoesoy ipasoeSy 
inipasoesy inoipasaesy to cause to hear ; pabasoesy 
fnnabasoesy fapahasoesy ipapajsoesoy ipapassoeSy 
i/tipapajsoej, ixoipapassoesy ditto. 



lyo 



Favorlang 



puoes, see under ptusos, 

V^MOV^f pif pa, assopirra^ assopirrafty inasso- 
plrrarty inoassopirrany to fish with a cast-net; 
pasop'tKy piy pay ipasopirrOy ipasopity to cause 
one to fish thus ; assopify such fishing ; also the 
instrument employed, a cast-net. 

PCUK>r, piy pay imp. asorray pass, ipa- 
sorray to join together two things that are 
separated from each other, and which ought 
to be united, as two houses, two letters, 
etc. 

pa8O8Ot,/i/rAr0i0/, papasosoty asosota, asosotoHy 
inasosotoHy inoasosotauy to deal out, to distri- 
bute, what is distributed } asosoUn, inasosooty 
inoasosoteHy or ipasosot, 

paspas, piy pa, paspassay paspasseuy pinaspas- 
seHy inopaspasseny to rain gently ; paaspasy trans. 
paspaSy nom. a drizzling rain. 

paspot, pinaspoty papaspoty ipaspottay ipaspot, 
inipaspoty inoipaspoty to occasion any one work, 
or trouble, to bother } trans, fr. maspoty which 
see. 

passabo, pinassaboy papassaboy assaboay assa- 
boHy ifiassaboy inoassaboriy to carry anything 
between two ; pasaboy pinasaboy papasaboy ipa- 
sabooy ipasaboy inipasabOy inoipasabOy to cause 
this to be done. 

passap, piy pay asappay ipasapy inipasapy to 
seam, so that the ends lap over each other; 
asaPy nom. ; trans, pasap, 

passapa, pinassapay papassapOy to lisp. 

pasflasar, pinassassar, papassassary assassaray 
assassarrafiy inassassarrany inoassassarrany to 
whisper. 

paasliadda, pinasshaJJay papasshmUay to 
cover a house j what ? asshaAday asshaddauniy 
inassioilanniy wherewith j ipashaddatiy sipasfiad- 
day etc. 

passhipir, //, /^, assMpitTay to sprinkle with 
water, same as babichi j ashipiry nom. subst. a 
sprinkling. 

paaahlr, pinasshiry papasshtTy isshirray to put 
anything down or in j pashiry trans, nom. 
sashiry the putting anything down; sashirany 
or sashirayatty the place where men put any- 
thing down ; sashiran o tattuUoy conlractcil ; 
sashiran tuttuUoy a candlestick. 

pasalkasar, piy pay assikasarray to lay one 
over the other. 

paasinok, pinassinoky papassi/toky assinokkay 
assinokkany to blow the nose. 

pasBO, pinasso, papassOy bassoOy bassoaHy bin- 
assoauy inobassoan, to make a string of bam- 
boo. 

ptuuohiy piaasjobiypapassobif assobiay assobiany 



inassobiafiy imuusobiany to strew with anything 
dry, as salt, etc. 

passoes, a bore, a clown; passes^ pi^ fa, 
passosstty passosauy ^nassosany to bore. 

passopietpiet, puiassopietpiety papassopietfiei, 
assopietpietay assopietpietafiy inassopietpUtam^ am- 
assopietpietarty to seam ; pasopietpiety pi^ fm^ 
ipasopietpietay ipasopietpiety incpasopietpiet^ mo- 
ipasipietpiety to cause to be hemmed. 

passes, //, pay bassosay bassosariy btnassatOH, 
inobasiosauy to kiss ; pabassosy piy pay ipabassosa^ 
ipabassosy inipabassos ; babassosy a kiss, nom. 

passoso, pinassosOy papauosOy assojoa, to 
whom ? assosoany inarsosoany inaassosooM, to 
^ive, to present, to give for nothing, what? 
tpassos, iuipasjoso, inoipassosoy ditto ; passok^ pi^ 
pa, imp. asiokka'y from wlience seems to be 
derived the name of the village Assok, which is 
the noun, from the verb passoky meaning a gift, 
because the site of the village Assok was for- 
merly given to the inhabitants of Tamachan j 
psaoiOy trans. ; asosoy a g^ft. 

patacta, finatachy papatachy ipatachoy ipaUuk^ 
inipaiachy tnoipatachy to make the teeth black ; 
see pattach. 

patapa, pitiatapay papatapay to let anything 
fall down from alx)ve, what ? ipatapa^ ipatapOy 
inipatapay inoipatapay on whom ? atapa-ay 
atapa-aity inatapa-ariy inoatapaan ; also to cause 
this to be done, in which case it is ipaiapa^ 
etc. 

patarion, //, pay papatta-ariofty to put any- 
thing behind ; see fnatarron, 

patippo, ptnattppoy papatippOy atippoOy atip- 
poauy inatippoaity tnoatippoaUy to shoot with a 
musket, or to cause to shoot, in which case it 
is ipatippoay ipatippOy inipatippOy inoipaiippo, 

patis, pinatisy papatisy ipaiissay ifaiisy iftipatisy 
inoipattSy to throw away or lose j trans, fr. tkatis^ 
which see. 

patoom, piy pay atoamnuiy atoammauy etc, to 
let dogs play together. 

patsikir, //, pay atsikirray the singing of the 
larks, nom. tsikir, 

patsillek, the chattering of sparrows. 

patsy simma, the morning, until half mid- 
day. 

pattach, pinattachy papattachy attachay 
attachany to blacken the teeth. 

pattadach, p'mattadachy papattoilachy ata- 
dac/uty atadacheny to warm ; patadachy piy poy 
ipatadachay ipata^lachy inipatadachy to make 
warm. 

pattaggal, as paggai, 

pattala is never used alone ; but mau pauda^ 




Vocabulary 



171 



stepfather ; naij pataia, stepmother ; lAiem 
patala, stepson ; atoasa patala^ stepsister or 
brother. 

pattallaijacli, pinattallaijach, papattallatjach^ 
attallaijachay attaUaijac/tan^ inattallaijachen^ to 
lie on one^s back ; patallaijach^ pinattaUatjach^ 
papatallaijach^ ipatallaijacha^ ipaiallaijacA, to 
put on the back. 

pattallakknm, pinattallakkufn^ papataUakkum, 
ataUakkumma, inataUakkumman^ inoataUakkum- 
fftartf as paliakkum ; but paiaUakkum, pinataUak- 
kum, papataUakkuniy ipatallakkumma^ ipatal- 
lakkum, inipatallakkum, inoipatallakkum, the 
same as palakkum, 

pattap, pifiattap, papattap, attappa^ aitapptn^ 
inattapparty inoattappan^ to stop up a hole or 
rent, either with patching, dammg, or plaiting. 

pattapa, plnattapa, tapattapa^ to fall, to fall 
down, as the drops of water from the roof j 
hence attapa-an^ inatapa-an, inoatapa-an, to 
cause to fall, patapa\ hence attapa^ nom. a 
drop. 

pattarran, pinattarrany papattarran^ aiar- 
ranay atarraneriy inatarranj tnoatarranneny to 
get out of the way, to] makei room j to cause 
that such be done, patarrany pinatarrariy papa- 
tarrariy ipatarranay ipatarran, etc 

patarrlgl, fr. matarrigi, which see. 

pattas, pinattojy papattas^ atassa^ atasserty 
inattassatiy inoattassarty to paint, to write ; pataSy 
ptnatasy papattasy tpatassay ipataSy to cause to be 
written or painted. 

pattaulieb, pinattauUeby papaiiautieby atauliboy 
ataulibany inataulibarty inoataulibatty to hold any- 
thing behind or under one ; pataulieby pinatau- 
lieby papataulieby ipataulibay tpataulieby impatau- 
lieby to shelter any one, 

pattauso, pinaitatisOy papattausoy atauioOy 
atausoafty inatausoy to heal j patausOy pinatausOy 
f*apatausOy ipatatuoay ipatausOy to cause to be 
healed. 

pattaute, pinattautey papattautCy attauteay 
attautifty inatatitey inoatautiny unexpectedly to 
take fire ; patautfy pinatautey papatautty ipa- 
tautea, ipatautfy inipatautey inoipatautey to cause 
such to be done. 

pattazies, pinattaxieSy papattaxieSy atfazisay 
to make a scarecrow ; pass, ipattasdesy inipat- 
tazJfjy iftoipataxieSy that of which a scarecrow 
is made ; also to set up a scarecrow, in which 
case it is at taxis an y inattaxisany inoattaxisan \ 
pataxiesy piy pay ipataxieSy ipataxisOy inlpataxieSy 
to cause such to be done. 

patUl, finattily papattUy ipattiUay attillay 
ipattUy atttUatty inifattily iHaitUlan, inoipattily 



inoatiUany to learn, to give lesson, act. ; patil^ 
pifutttily papatily ipatilUiy to learn, neut., etc ; 
this has no participle ; thus people say, cho 
attiUany the people are taught; attite Detu 
ipattUy the word of God is taueht 

l^txmoy pinattilloypapattillo, tpattiOoay attiUoa^ 
ipattilioy attiUoarty inipattilloy inattiUoafiy inoipat' 
tilloy inoattiUoarty to command, to order ; patiUoy 
pinatilloy papatiUoy etc., to cause to command ; 
attiiloan ja choy the people are commanded \ 
ipat'tUoja raniedy the order is given. 

pattite, pinattitey papatiitey attiteay attiteoHy 
inattiteatty inoattlteany to speak openly to the 
people, to preach ; patitfy piypayipatiteayipatitfy 
tnipatitey tnoipatitCy to cause such to be 
done. 

patto, pinattOy tlie tingling in the ears. 

pattodoch, pinattodochypapaitodochy attodochoy 
attodochejty inattodochy inoattodoc hefty to buy; 
patodochy pinatodochy papatodochy ipatodocha^ 
ipatodochy inipatadochy etc., to let buy. 

pattodon, pinattodorty papattodony attodomtay 
attoddoftnarty inattodonrtatty inoattodonmtny to 
dwell, to inhabit ; patodoriy piy piy ipatadimna, 
ipatodotty inipatodon, to cause to dwell. 

pattok, //, pay atokkoy to be still $ patoky fiy 
pay ipatokkay iiatoky inipatoky inoipatoky to make 
still, or to still. 

pattokar, pinattokoTy papattokoTy attokarray 
attokarrany inattokarratiy inoattokarrafty to fix a 
mast in a vessel ; patokoTy piy pay etc. ; ipat9- 
karray ipatokoTy impatokaTy to cause such to be 
done ; attokary a mast. 

pattonan, pinattonany papattonoMy attonamuiy 
attonannariy inattonannany to name; patonoHy 
piny papy ipatonatmay ipatonatiy etc., to cause to 
be named. 

pattoxTObodi, piy pay attorrobochay attorro- 
bocherty inattorrobochy inoattorrobochaiy to have a 
camp or place of meeting abroad in the field, 
when men go to hunt, nsh, etc, where tliey 
can stow away the baggage ; patorrobochy trans., 
robochy nom. baggage which people take with 
them to the hunt. 

paauch, piy pay auchay pass, to blow or snort 
through the nose, as the oxen, etc, from rage ; 
auchy the blowing. 

pau, to beget, to generate, generally betokens 
the taking up, the accounting, or the taking 
up of an affair, as pau baddoOy pan aUiy also 
pau sjiemy to take any one for baddoOy alUy or 
s/iiem (i.e. child) ; this pau is compounded with 
verbs as well as nouns ; see below. 

paoaat, trans, fr. mauaat, which sec 

panab, pitumaby papauaby ipaaaba^ ipauab. 



172, 



Favorlang 



inipauab, to cause to increase, to enlarge ; from 
moabf which see. 

pauba, pinauba, papauba, ipauba^ impauba, 
inoipauba, to drive away sleep, to wake any 
one out of sleep. 

paubftddoa, those who are bom on the same 
day call each other boiUoa ; to take one for 
such is paubaiUoa^ piunabaiidoa^ papaubaddoa^ 
aubadJoay aubaJJoan, inaubotUoa, inoaubadJoaf 
paaubaddooy pinaaubaddoa, papaaubadiha, 
ipaaubaddoOy impaaubaddoa, 

pauballag, pt^ pa^ auballag-a^ to take any- 
thing for one's own property j paaubaliag, to 
cause such to be done. 

paucbar, phumc/tar, papauc/iar, aucAarra, 
auc/iarran, snaucAarran, inoauc/iarran, to 
breathe j paaucAar, pi, pa^ ipaaucharra, 
ipaauchar, inipaauchar, to cause such to be 
done ; hence char, the breath, also auchar, the 
spirit. 

pauche, oh, you lackey, you poor fellow, 
paucbodon, pi, pa, auchodonna, to take any 
one for one's relation \ paauchodon, to cause 
such to be done. 

pauchuB, pinauchus, papauchus, auchussa, 
auchussen, inauchus, inoauchussen, to finish any 
work, to leave off} also to have used any 
instnmient or thing long enough, in which ca^e 
it is auchussan, inauchussan, inoauchussan \ 
paauchus, pi, pa, ipaauchussa, ipaauc/ms, 
inipaauc/ius, to cause or let leave off, etc. ; see 
mauchus, 

paudon, // , pa, auiionna, aiuionnan, inaudon, 
inoaudonnau, to account one's house one's own ; 
paaudon, trans. 

paukakOBsi, pi, pa, aukakossia, to account 
any one disobedient } paaukakossi, to cause such 
to be done. 

pau-kamain, pi, pa, aukamaina, to account 
any one a relation by marriage. 

paulallum, pi, pa, aulalluma, to dig deep, as 
if it were said, to make deep ; see above ; 
paollallum, see mokdum, 

pauloan, pinauloan, papauloan, auloanna, 
auloannen, inauloan, inoauloannen, to make any- 
thing matter of food, to take any one for a 
labourer or slave; also to cause such to be 
done, in which case it is ipauloanna, ipauloan, 
inipauloan, inoipauloan -, loan, victuals, a slave, 
also a quadruped; but whenever this wonl is 
used for a slave, it is always employed in a bad 
sense. 

pau-mabiflie, to account any one virtuous ; 
pau-tnachimit, to account any one clean; 
auahimta^ auabissea, ditto j pau-marapies, to 



account wicked ; pau-mario, to account good ; 
all of which are formed in the same manner. 

pau-xna]cak088, pi, pa, auakakossia, |)ass. 
auakakossi'in, etc., to account any one dis- 
obedient. 

paupi, see numpi, of which this is the trans, 
paurapies, pi, pa, aurapisa^ to account or 
consider anythmg bad. 

paure, ptnaure, papaure, aurea, aurin, imaart^ 
inoaurin, to make slices of flesh or fish j fa- 
aure, pinaaure, papaaure, ipaaurea, ipaawre^ 
ifdpaaure, inoipaaure, to cause such to be done ; 
re, dried flesh or fish. 

paurlo, pi, pa, aurio-a, to account or coa- 
sider anything good. 

panrod, see morrod, of which this is the tnuis. 
pauroos, pinauros, papauros, aurosa, attrosum^ 
iftauros, inoaurossen, to take any one for one*s 
consort; paauros, pi, pa, ipaaurosa, ipaoMros, 
etc., to cause any one to be taken for one*s 
consort. 

paurtatach, pinaurtatach, papaurtatack^ if- 
aurtatach-a, ipaurtatach, inipaurtatack, inotp- 
aurtatach, to scatter, act. paaurtaiack^ ptMa' 
aurtatach, papaaurtatach, pass, ipaaurtatacka^ 
ipaaurtatach, to cause to be scattered, tians. 
tr. tnortatach, 

panniB, pinaurus, papaurus, aurussa, aurui' 
san, inaurussan, inoaurussan, to cool, to refredi § 
paaurus, pi, pa, ipaaurussa, ipaaurus, to cause 
such to be done ; trans, fr. moms, which see. 
pau8, a bill, a hatchet ; the same as ^0-01. 
pausa, pinausa, papausa, ipausa, tmpausa^ 
inoipausa, to give permission to go, also to 
order to depart; really to let go, i.e. to give 
pcnnission ; or to cause to go, i.e. to oixler to 
go ; paausa, pi, pa, to cause such to be donej 
trans, fr. mossa. 

pausa-o, pi:iausa-o, papausa-o, ansa-o-n^ 
ausaoon, inausa-o, inoausa-oon, to embrace with 
one arm ; paausa-o, pi, pa, ipaausa-oa^ ipaausao^ 
etc., to cause such to be done. 

pauBbiem, //, pa, auskima, aushimen^ etc, to 
generate, also to acknowledge any one as one^s 
child. 

pansi, trans, either from tnausi, or posi^ which 
see. 

pautamau, ami pautanaij, pi, pa, 
pautat, pi, pa, autatta, autattan, inautaitam^ 
inoautattan, to mark anything, in order to dis- 
tinguish it from another's property ; paautat, 
nom. a mark, 
pautatairogl, trans, fr. tummaroggt. 
paya, pinaya, papaya, aya, ayanni, inajfwud^ 
inoayanni, to lean backwards. 




Vocabulary 



173 



payach, pinayachy fapayach^ ayacha^ ayachen^ 
inayachy inoayacheny whence iachen^ tpayach^ 
iniachetty inipayachy inoipayachy to make 
dirty. 

payocta, pinayochy papqyochy (xyochay to turn 
back ; also ayochan, inayochatty inoayochafiy to 
give back. 

p&zliesima, the morning, from sunrise to 
half midday. 

pasigala, //, pa^ to imitate, to ape. 

pazikakapol, pinazikakapoi, papaxikakapoiy 
azJkakapoUay axikakapollarty inavakakapollan, to 
run in theiway, also to cause such to be done, in 
which case it is ipaxikakapoUoy ipaxikakapoiy etc. 

pazinado, pinazinaJo, papaztnaJo, azinadoa, 
qxinadoTty inazinadoy inoazwaJofty to interpret ; 
pazinado tarratty to show the way ; paazinadoy 
p'ty pay ipaaxinaJoay ipaaxinadoy impaazinadoy 
to cause to interpret, etc. ; tummachoy ditto ; 
patachoy or pittOy ditto, nom. tattacha-Oy in the 
verb trans, and noun, used with kar and mauy 
as kar tattachoy mau taitachoy to interpret for 
one another ; aodnadoy an interpretation ; ma- 
azinadoy an interpreter. 

pazio, piy pay azioay pass, azioarty inazioafty 
i/ioaxioafiy to stamp with the feet on the 
ground ; paazioy trans. ; azioy nom. subst. ; 
maazioy a stamper. 

paiioessan, piy pay azioessanmiy axioessofmatty 
inaxioessatty inoazioesiannany to have the hic- 
cup ; paazioessatty trans. axJoessafiy nom. the 
hiccup. 

paiiogga, pinazioggOy papaziogga, azioggay 
azioggarty also anniy and aijatty inazioggatty ino- 
azioggarty to put on an under garment j pa- 
azioggay piy pay ipaaziqggay etc., to cause such to 
be done ; oggay an under garment. 

pax-ipat, pinaz-ipaty papax-ipaty bax-ibaddoy 
baz-ibaddeny binaz-ibat, inobaz-ibadde»y to 
make level, to make evenj paaz-ipaty piy pay 
ipabaaz-ibaddf/iy or ipaax-ibaddoy ipabaaz- 
ibadiietty or ipaasipaty inipabaaz-ibady or ini- 
paaZ'ipaty etc. j bazibaty evenness. 

pazipo, pinazipOy papazipOy azipoa, axipooriy 
inazipoorty tnoazapoariy the washing of the face j 
paazipoy piy pa, ipaazapoay ipaaztpOy inipaazipo, 
etc. 

pohab, pienchaby pabchaby bchabbay bc/tabbatiy 
bienchabbafiy to cover oneself with a wrapper, 
to cover oneself ; see pabechab. 

pea, pineOy papeay ipeay ipe-Oy inipea, inoipeay 
to give ; changed into eay eafty ineariy etc., it 
means to be presented j payoy pinayay papctyay 
ipayoy inipayay inoipayoy to cause to be given } 
this is written paia^ piy pa, to distinguish it 



from paijay to lean backwards; aija, a gift, 
ma-aija, a giver. 

pebe, pinebcy papebcy bebea, bebeen^ binebe^ 
ifiAebeetty bebea, to dissuade; pabebe, piy pa, 
ipabebe, to do thus. 

pebe, pinebey papebty ebeoy ebeany inebean^ 
inoebeafiy as pedarra \ paibe, piy pa, ipaibea { 
aibe, nom.; aibe raroboy dougn, i.e. flour 
mixed with water. 

peohab, pinechaby papechaby echabba, echab- 
barty inechabbariy inoechabbatty to murder 
secretly ; paichaby piy pay ipaichabboy ipaic/utby 
etc., to cause such to be done. 

pedarra, piy pay edarroy edarrarty inedarrafty 
inoedarratty when different things are mixed 
together, as machoraab *y aidarray nom. subst. 
and act. trans, paidarra'y original substance 
with which anything is mixed is edarrati'y 
two different things, pedarra \ a man, 
patdarra, 

pe-edda forms its inflections as peay to pre- 
pare and dish up food and drink in order to 
treat any one. 

pe-el, piy pay e-elLty e-ellany ine-eliatty inoe- 
ellauy to know carnally. 

pe-eo, //, pay e-eoa, to dangle ; pai-eOy trans. ; 
e-eoy one who swings. 

P9M> P'f P^i f^^^y pA^^ eesafiy ineesafiy inoe- 
esoMy to flle; paeesy trans.; aeesy a file, also 
steel, because they file with things in which 
there is much steel. 

peroa, pinerooy paperooy eroa, eroofty inerooy 
inoeroofiy in two parts ; pairoay pinairoay 
papairooy ipairoay impairaoy indpairoa, to divide 
into two parts. 

pesasa, pinesasoy papesasa, esasay esasan^ 
inesasay inoesasatiy to begin; paisasOy piy fa, 
ipaisasay ipaisasay etc., to be first to beg^in; 
i'ackaUa ja pesma ummoob tummaap borma 
Tabaipau ja riory Tackalla has finished his 
fleld before Tabaipau ; aiiasay a befi;inning. 

pesasorrl, pinesasorriy papesasorrty ejasorria, 
esasorriafty inesasorriany inoesasorriatiy to change 
similar things, but knowingly and on purpose, 
thus differing from tautatarrogi 'y paisasorriy 
piy pay ipaisajorriOy tpaisasorri, etc, thus to 
change. 

pesik, piy pay pesikkany pass, pesikken, pinesik' 
kerty to break in pieces. 

pesll, piy pay tesilUiy pesiUeny pinesilietiy 
inopesiUefiy is said of two fruits on one stalk, or 
when one root divides into two ; paisUy trans. 

pesor, pinesoTy papesor, esorray esorrany inesor- 
rany inoesorratiy to mean, to imagine, to sus- 
pect ; paUor^ pinmsor^ papmsWy ipmsmrra^ 




174 



Favorlang 



ipaisor^ inipaisor^ inoipMsor^ to imagine in 
general. 

pespattil, pinespattii, papespattily espattilla, 
espattiUetty iftespatiil, inoespattiUeny to divide 
into four ; paispattil, pi, pa, ipaispattiUa, ipais- 
pattil, iftipatspattil, inoipaupattily to cause such 
to be done. 

petam, pinetam, papetam, etamma, etamman, 
inetamnmn, htoetamman, to lean upon the hand j 
paietam (to be distinguished from paitam, to 
borrow), pi, pa, ipaietumma, etc., to cause such 
to be done. 

petorro, pinetorro, papetorro, etorroa, etor- 
roan, inetorroan, inoetorraan, to divide into 
three 5 paitorro, pinaitorro, papcdtorro, ipaitorroa, 
etc., to cause such to be done. 

petumino, pinetummo, papetummo, epetummoa, 
tpetummo, inipetummo, inoipetummo, to spit 
u]K>n) when it is also etummoa, etummoan, 
inetummoan, inoetummoan } paitummo, pinaitum- 
mo, papaitummo, ipaitummoa, ipaitummo, etc., 
to cause such to be done. 

phon (with an aspirate, not as fon), the 
insects which eat out, and render hollow the 
bamboos. 

pia, now j pia da sisja, to-day. 

pla, pinia, papia, bia, bian, binia, inobian, to 
drive away the wild animals, such as hogs and 
stags, who come and devour the fields -, babia, 
the nouns. 

piaoli, piniach, papiach, biacha, biachen, 
biniach, iuobiac/ien, to separate fighters ; pabiac/t, 
pinabiach, papabiach, ipabiacha, ipabiach, etc., 
to set apart. 

plar, piniar, papiar, biarra, biarren, biniar, 
inobiarrat, to pull out j piar bar, to lift up 
the arm, to strike; pabiar, pinabiar, pa, 
ipabiarra, ipabiar, impabiar, inoipabiar, to reach 
out. 

piohl, an ape, a monkev. 

piohir (let the first t be scarcely heard), 
pinic/iir, papichir, bechirra, bechirren, binechir, 
inobechirren, to let go anything that is bent, 
also to push away anything into a stick ; 
people say also, pichir chachaap, to haul up a 
scoop-net; pabichir, pi, pa, ipabichirra, ipa- 
bichir, inipabichir, inuipabichir, to cause such to 
be done. 

pido, piniilo, papiJo, bidoa, bitfoan, biniJoan, 
inobiiioan, to write ; pabido, pinabido, papabido, 
ipabido, etc., ditto ; bido, nom. a book, a writing ; 
pabido, a writing, instruments for ditto. 

pied, pi/tied, papied, bida, bidan, binidan, 
inobidan, to girdle ; pabied, pinabied, papabied, 
ipabiila, ipabied, etc., to cause such to be done ; 



babied, a girdle; babiedan or babiedayoM^ the 
place for the eirdle. 

piedpied, piniepied, pafiedpied, bifdbtda^ bUd- 
biden, biniedbied, inobiedbiden, to rub anything 
between the finders ; pabiedbied, pittainedbieay 
papabiedbied, ipabiedbida, etc., to cause such to 
be done. 

pigcharra, //, pa, igcharra, pass, igcharran^ 
etc., same as pigchilla \ charra, lattice-work. 

pigchiUa, ti, pa, igcMUa, pass. igchiUaH^ etc, 
to put one thing between two others, where it 
does not adhere, but where it has room | 
pichcharra, ditto; pmgchiUa, trans, nom. 
Mgchilla, the doing so ; c/iilla, lattice-work. 

pigeno, pinigem, papigeno, to skim ; fabifenQ^ 
pinabigeno, papabigeno, ipabigenoa^ tpabtgiiw^ 
etc., to do so. 

pikau, bent. 

pikler, the ankle or knuckle. 

pila, pinila, papila, ila, ilan, inila, iwdUui, to 
hit, to cause to touch ; paUa, pinaUa, papmla^ 
etc., to touch ; thus people say, pila ja auho^ 
the fish have got into the basket, i.e. are taken, 
whenever there are fish therein ; aila, nom. a 
hitting. 

pilla, pifdlla, papilla, billa, biUaan, bimlla^ 
inobillaan, to cleave, to split ; pabilla^ piMobiilaf 
papabilla, iftabilla, etc, to cause such to be 
done; babtUa, a cleaving; billa, a cleft, fr. 
malilla, anything to split with ; ma-ababillay a 
cleaver. 

pillala, pintUala, pi, pa, etc., to split fre- 
quently ; pabillahilla, etc., incnrases the sense \ 
pabilla, to cause such to be done. 

piUibiUl, pinillibilli, papillibilli, biUihilia, 
billibillien, bimllibilli, iuobilUbdlien, to turn round, 
act. to twist ; pabillibilli, pinatnllibilU, papabiUi- 
billi, ipabdUbilli, etc, to cause to be twistett j 
pillibilli sarries aroro, to twist thread, twigs, 
etc. 

pilliecli, pin'iUiecli, papillic/i, biUic/ta, billicheny 
binillic/t, «H;ems to mean to put one*s body in a 
position to do anvthing important ; pilueck 9 
fnauadet, makarieb, tummaap, etc., to put 
oneself in a posture to pull out each ulher*s 
hair, to quarrel, to nm, or to work ; pabilliec^y 
to cause such to Ih: d<»ne. 

pillik, intcns. pilUpdlik, pi, pa, lAUika, 
billikkefi, binillik, inobilUkkcn, to pa*ss or join 
anything underneath (not between), Mstufimicti 
pabilUk, trans, babillik, nom. a pressing, also 
that which people lay on a thing to press it 
down. 

plop, pifiiop, papiop, ioppa, etc., to blow up ^ 
piop chau, to blow the Hre ; piop tabillo, to 




Vocabulary 



175 



blow a trumpet ; piop o tattuUo, to blow out a 
candle J paiop, pi, pay ipaioppa, ipmop^ etc., to 
cause such to be done. 

plor, pimoTf papior^ ipiorraP what? ipioTy 
imptoTy inoipioTy to leave behind ; to whom ? 
biorraHy bimorrafty inobiorran ; pabior, pi, pa, 
ipabiorra, ipabior, inipabior, inoipabior, to cause 
such to be done ; bior, a remainder, is also used 
as a preposition. 

pirblr, pi, pa, birbirra, birbirren, binirbir, 
inobirbirren, the blowing about of the flame of 
a fire or candle. 

pirl, pimri, papiri, iria, irian, imrian, inoirian, 
to search out, to choose, to reject j pairi, pin- 
airi, papairi, ipairia, ipairi, to cause such to be 
done. 

plrraas (the i barely heard), the hair that 
grows on the forehead. 

pirraba, irraba, irraban, etc., to weed, to 
pull up the weeds or grass out of the streets or 
places near the houses; but to weed fields is 
ummo-o, nevertheless this difference exists be- 
tween the two, that pirraba is used when 
people gather the weeds from amongst the 
good seed, but umm(ho when people pull up 
weeds out of a field, where no good seed has 
been sown. 

pirras, pinirras, papirras, pirrassa, pirrassen, 
pinirras, tnopirrassen, to tear, act. j papirras, 
pinapirras, papapirras, ipapirrassa, tpapirras, 
etc., to cause such to be done. 

pirries (the i barely heardj, pineries, papirris, 
iperisa, iperies, iniperies, inotperies, to close, to 
button up ; pabries, trans. { babries, nom. a 
button. 

pirroos (the / barely heard), pinirroos, papir- 
roos, bitToossa, birroossen, binirroos, inobirroossen, 
to pull in from behind, to let go by ; pabirroos, 
pi, pa, ipabirroossa, ipabirroos, impabiroos, to let 
goby. 

piflblB, pinisbis, papisbis, bisbissa, bisbissen, 
bimsbis, inobisbissen, to hold fast j tabisbis, pi, 
pa, ipabisbissa, ipabisbis, inipabisbts, to cause 
such to be done. 

plBor, pimsor, papisor, isorra, isorren, irdsor, 
irunsorren, to set on ; pisifr o chau, to set on 
fire ; pisor o tazj, to send up a kite ; paisor, 
pinaisor, papaisor, ipaisorra, tpaisor, inipaisor, 
inoipaisor, to cause to set on. 

pissarra, pinissarra, papissarra, issarra, 
issarran, ittissarra, inoissarran, to get into com- 
pany; paisarra, pinaisarra, papaisarra, ipai- 
sarra, inipaisarra, inoipaisarra, to cause such to 
be done ; aissarra, an accompanying ; ma- 
aissarra, a companion ; sarra^ a lineal succes- 



sion, where the children and grandchildren 
follow each other ; see below. 

piisarraBarra, pi, pa, etc., when many follow 
one after the other, in the manner of the 
natives; paissarrasarra, pi, pa, etc., to cause 
this to be done. 

pissasBen, pirdssassen, papissassen, issassena, 
issassenan, imsassenan, to rest; paissassen, pi, 
pa, ipaissassena, ipaissassen, etc, to cause to 
rest ; aissassen, rest ; aissassenan, time of rest ; 
mssassemajan, place of rest. 

pisse, pimsse, papisse, bissea, bissein, bimsse, 
inobissein, to rectify ; pabisse, pinabisse, papabisse, 
ipabissea, ipabisse, etc., to cause to be rectified ; 
nom. bisse, justice, righteousness ; babisse, recti- 
tude, fr. pisse ; abisse, a justifying ; act. pissese, 
intens. ptsse, nom. bisse, 

pissUlo, pinisillo, papissiUo, bissi/ioa, bissiUoan, 
biensillo, inobissilloon, to wrap up anything in 
order to take care of it, as silk, monev, tobacco, 
etc., in paper; pabissillo, pi, pa, tpabissiUoa^ 
ipabissiUo, etc., to cause to be done. 

piBiir, pimsir, papissir, pissirren, piensir, 
inopiensirren, to close the hand fast, to press 
anything with the hand; papissir, pinaptssir. 
papapissir, ipapissirra, etc., to cause the hand 
to be closed. 

pisso (let the i be scarcely heard), pimso, 
papisso, bissoa, bissoan, inobissoan, etc., to draw 
out, as people do in drawing lots, and all kinds 
of drawing ; pabisso, pi, pa, ipabissoa, to cause 
to be drawn ; babisso, a drawing ; this noun 
compounded with mau or karri signifies lots, 
because such are made by the drawing out of 
tickets ; ma-ababisso, a drawer. 

pititU, pinititil, papititil, bietbitiUa, bietbiiiUen, 
to break, cut, or slice anything into small 
pieces, but is only used of things that are long, 
and which, bv many transverse sections, may 
be made smaller, as a bamboo, a fish, a plan- 
tain, etc. ; paititil, pi, pa, ipaititiUa, to cause 
this to be done. 

pittas, pi, pa, pittassa, pittassen, finittassen, 
inofnttassen, to cut the two hind legs of an 
animal in two, or to sever anything in two. 

plttassir, pinittassir, paptttasstr, ittasshrra, 
ittassirran, inittassirran, inoittassirran, to do 
anything by the side of another, as walking, 
standing, lying, sitting, etc.; paitassir, pifua- 
tassir, papaitassir, ipattassirra, ipaitassir, etc., 
to cause the above to be done. 

pittai-tassir, pimttaj-tassir, papittas-iassir, 
ittaS'tassirra, ittas-tassirran, as palalat ; pattoj- 
tassir, pi, pa, ipatas-tassirra, etc., to cause 
such to be done. 




176 



Favorlang 



pittatik, pimttatH, papittatikf bitUbittikka, 
bittebittikhn, bieniibbittiky inobittebittikkettf the 
multiplication of pittik, 

pittau, //', pOf imp. ittaua, to believe ; 
aitiaua, belief; ma-aiUau, a believer. 

pittik, pinimk, papittik, bittikka, bittikken, 
bientik, inobittikken^ a pause in speaking when 
people have finished a subject} also to rest 
oneself from all kinds of work, in order after- 
wards to go to work with new strength } 
pabittiky pinabittik, papabittiky ipabittikkay ipa- 
bittiky to cause to pause. 

pitto, //', pay bittoOy same as pazinadoy nom. 
babittOy as azinado, 

pittol, pinittoi, papittoly ittoHaetty ittoUia, 
iitoUeny or anniy or aijatty initoUafiy inoittoUany 
to let anything alone, either for a while, from a 
belief that it can be set aside for the present ; or 
to let it alone entirely, from despair of ever 
bein^ able to reach the end ; i Mttoly plnaittoly 
papatttoly ipaittoUay etc., to cause this to be 
done. 

pizi, an expression by which it is meant that 
we are constrained to do something ; na a p'vxl 
summaraiUiy pizd tia a matty tia a pixa 
m^ien biJo, i.e. I must go to sleep, I must go 
to dinner, I must make a book j ptniziy papixi, 
imp. paiziy pinmziy impaizjy etc., to require 
any one to do anything, trans. i^/Vz, ipizia, pass. 
iztafty etc. 

pizlch, pinizic/iy papixichy bixichay bizicAeft, 
biuizicAy inobixicAefty to direct j p'lzach pachay 
mabarieby many to lead on any one to fight, 
to nm, to eat, etc. j pabixlchy piy pay ipabizicAa, 
ipabizjchy to cause such to be done ; babtTuchy 
nom. a leading on ,* ma-abablzichy a leader. 

po, the cry or song of birds ; po a kokkOy the 
crowing of a cock. 

poa, p'lnoay papoay imp. boay to bring forth 
fruit } paboay pinaboa, papaboa, ipaboay etc., to 
cause to bear fruit j boay nom. fruit, seed, 
person, flesh ; ma-ababoay fruit fid ; ma-ababoa 
barofty a fruitful tree j but poay piy pay poa, 
pass, poatty pinoay inopoa/i, to dye ) papoay trans. 
papoa, nom. the dyeing and dye-stutt*. 

po-a, a heron. 

poach, pinoachy papoachy o-ach-ay oachetiy 
inoachy ino-acAe/ty to forget j pauachy pinauachy 
papauachy ipauachay ipauachy etc., to cause to 
forget; auachy nom. a forgetting; ma-auachy 
one who forgets. 

po-ar, pi/io-aty papo-^tty bo-array bo-arrany 
bhioar, inoboarren, to make honey, also to chew 
rice or barley, and to prepare the spittle where- 
with strong drink is made^ paboar, ptnaboar. 



papaboaTy ipaboara, ipaboar, etc. j baboar, nom. 
some spittle, fr. tnassjekau. 

peas, pinoaSy papoaSy boasOy boasin^ btMoaif 
inoboasifiy to rob, to lay waste, to destroy; 
pabo(Uy piy pay ipaboasay ipaboasy etc., to cause 
to lay waste. 

pobaas, obasuy to set up a flag or vanci 
obaaSy a flag which the young men stick on 
their heads. 

poberies, pinoberiesy papoberiesy oberisa^ obtt" 
iserty inoberieSy ino-oberiscHy to take leave, or to 
bid farewell , those who take leave say kamessa 
may i.e. I go, and those who bid farewell say 
sasay i.e. go in peace; pauberieSy pixaub^riei, 
papauberiesy ipauberisay impauberieSy to cause to 
take leave ; auberieSy nom. 

pobo, pinoboy papobfy boboOy bobooHy btnoboam^ 
inoboboatiy to sift, to let anything pass through 
a sieve whether wet or dry; paboboyptmi 



Mign 



papaboba, ipaboboay ipabobo, to cause this to be 
done; moparraparray idem; baboboy nom. a 
sieve, a sitting. 

pooh, pinochy papochy bochay bocheuy bsMOcAy 
inobocheny to shoot ; pabochy pinaboch, papabochy 
ipahochay ipabochy inipabochy tnoipabochy to cause 
such to be done. 

pocbarraddan, pinocharraddauy papocharrad- 
dariy to have the cramp ; pauckarratUaHy etc., 
to cause any one to have the cramp ; auchar^ 
raddariy the cramp. 

poch-ia, a large fruit, outwanlly not unlike 
the European pumpkin. 

TpQ(i\i-ipQQ\iypinocn-pochyPapO€h'Pochy to smoke, 
to make dusty ; papoch-pochy pinapoch-pocky 
papoch-pochy to cause to smoke ; ipafoch-pochay 
ipapoch-pochy inipapoch-poch, 

podarros, //, pay intens. podarrodarrosy to go 
on further and further in doing anything, e.g. 
pOiiarrodarros macheaubany to make game 
Hr&t with one and then with the other. 

podda, pinodilay papodday boddoy boddamiy 
bifiodda, inoboiidaarty to bring forth, to breed | 
pabodday pinabodday papabodiiOy ipabodday to 
cause to bring forth ; bodiiay birth ; baboddaamy 
birthplace ; tfia-ababodtay fmitful ; podiio tattaula^ 
to regenerate. 

poddik, pinOiidiky papoddik, to become thick, 
to swell, also to be swollen ; paudiky pinaudiky 
papaudiky ipaudikka^ ipaudik^ etc., to cause to 
become thick ; audiky a swelling. 

poddillon, pinoiidelotty pafoddeloHy to be 
costive: pauddilloy pitiauMiillOy papaudiBUo^ 
ipauditihoay ipauddilloy etc., to cause costive- 
ness. 

poddo> pitiotfdoy papoddo, boddaa, boddoam. 




Vocabulary 



177 



bintkUoan^ to calculate with an abacus ; paM- 
dOf pinaboddOf fapahoddo^ ipaboddoa^ ifaboddo, 
etc., to cause so to reckon ; hoddo, an abacus. 

poddodo, pinaddodoy papoddodo, oddodooy odod- 
dotty inoddodoofiy to complain ; pauddodoyfinaud- 
dodoy papauddodoy ipauddodoay tpauddodoy etc., to 
cause to complain. 

poelakies, pinoelakUsy papoelakiesy oelakhoy 
oelakisatty inoeUtkisany to wander, to err from the 
way, to have a misunderstanding; paulakieSy 
piy pay ipaulakiesy to cause to err. 

poc^Bl, a water bubble, a blister on the 
body ; to be written boelassi, 

poetacta, p'moetachy papoetachy oetach-Oy 
oetach-ofiy inoetachany to stay anywhere ; pau- 
tacky pinautachy papautachy tpautachay ipautachy 
impimtachy inrnpiaitachy to cause to remain. 

poetan, piy poy oetannay oeiannany inoetatnumy 
to do anything by way of provision, to lie in 
wait, or to lurk in secret ; as poetan araSy to 
fetch a quantity of grass $ poetan poay to make 
a store of wine ; poetan pala, to say by proviso ; 
pautany to cause such to be done ; piy pay ipau- 
tanna, etc. 

poetat, pinoetaty papoetaty oetattay oetattany 
inoetattany to mean, to suppose, to suspect; 
pautaty pinautaty papautaty tpautatta, ipautaty 
etc, to cause such to be done; autaty nom. 
meaning; ma-autat, one who intends any- 
thing. 

poetantadi, //, pay etc., as poetachy to remain 
an3rwhere long ; pautautachy piy pay to cause to 
remain. 

poetautat, piy pay etc., intens. poetaty to I 
mean sincerely, to believe firmly ; nom. autaU' 
taty belief. 

pogamgam, pinogamgamy papogamgamy oga- 
gammay ogamgammeny inogamgamy ino-Qgam- 
gammeny to do anything shortly or auickly after 
another ; pogamgam ja michamy to tlrink shortly 
after one another; paugamganty piy pay ipau- 
gamgammay inipaugamgamy etc., to cause such 
to be done. 

poggogo, pinoggogOy papog^ogOy oggogooy to 
rub, in general either with pamt, in which case 
it is oggogooHy inog^ogOy or by wiping, in which 
case it is oggogoany tnoggogoan j poggogo no mon' 
naupooty to wipe the face witn a towel ; pog- 
gogo no rib booTy to smear one's coat with 
mire ; pauggogOy piy piy ipauggogoay ipauggogOy 
etc., to cause to rub ; auggogOy nom. the wiping ; 
also the instrument wherewith anything is 
wiped. 

pOkbok, pinokboky tapokbok, bokbokkOy bokbok- 
keny binokbok, inobokbokkeMy to beat with the 



hand ; pabokbck, pinabokboky papabokbok, ipabok- 
bokka, ipabokboky etc, to cause such to be 
done. 

pokkor, pinokkoTy papokkor^ okhnroy okkorran, 
inokkorrany ino-okkorrany to put a stopper on 
anything, on a can, pot, etc ; paukoty pinaukwy 
papaukoTy etc., to cause this to be done ; aukoTy 
nom. a stopper ; pokkoTy a peg. 

pollibo, piy pa, ipoUtboay pass. olUboan, inoUi- 
boany to disguise, to conceal any dishonourable 
expression ; pauUibOy trans., auitiboy nom. 
poUol, the navel ; also piMuI, 
poLd, pinoisiy papolsiy same as poddik ; paulsiy 
pinaulsiy papauUiy ipauUiay ipatdsi, impanlsiy 
same as paudik, 

ponnad, pinonnady paponnaty onnadday omiad- 
deny inonnady ino-^mnaddeny to make fire bum, 
to make a fire ; paunad, pinaunady papatmadf 
ipaunnaday etc, to cause this to be done. 

ponno, a boil that comes of itself, for when- 
ever any part of the body, as the head, swells 
up, or when any swelling occurs through a fidly 
etc, the same is audik, 
po-o, the knee, the marrow in the bones, 
pool^ a nieht owl. 

poon, mould, the canker worm ; lee pAon, 
poot, a Chinese. 

po-plno, papo-ptMy the cry and song of birds ; 
paboy pinaboy papaboy ipabooy ipabo, inipabo, 
inoipaboy to cause the birds to ay i po signi- 
fies also the ay of rats, mice, snakes, etc ; 
baboy nom. 

poroliaoh-a, pinorcAacA-ay paforchach^ 
borckach-ay borchack-any binorchach-ay imbor- 
c hack-any to push in between so that people on 
either side must get out of the way; pabor-^ 
chack-Oy pinaborcmuk-Oy etc, to cause to be 
done. 

porpor, ptnorpofy P^tporpoTy porponroHy pimt" 
porraHy imporporroHy to raise dust; paporpor^ 
pinaporpoKy papaporpory ipaporporray tpaporpoTy 
impaporpoTy to make dustjr ; barraboTy dust. 

pom, pinorroy papvrray iporray borray bor- 
raoHy etc, to dry, to put out to dry ; pabarroy 
piy pay to cause this to be done; pabarray a 
dryine ; babor amy babcr aijany a drying place, 
as a inrnt on which people dry flesh. 

ponrat, piy pay orrattOy pass, orrattany inor^ 
rattany to wager, to guess at anything ; /toKr- 
raty trans., aurraty nom. 

porrl seems to mean to fall suddenly down, 
as a beast that is mortally wounded, as if one 
should say, there it lies. 

poRiad, putofTted^ pap^nmd^ btrriuAy bofrt^ 
detty bimnrud^ itmbinidemf to turn anything 




178 



Favorlang 



round from the one side to the other j bonridea 
ma dich aichoa xjabaan aunigay put the sick 
man on his left side ; jo fisdo porrUd naupoot a 
aUachoa mabachas^ you must turn the sheet 
that it may dry ; paborriedy finahorriedy papa- 
borriedy ipaborrida, ipaborried, etc, to cause to 
be turned. 

porro, a measure made of bamboo, 
porrooff, piftorroogf paporroog^ orroogga, or- 
rooggan, inorroogy ino-orrooggen, to overthrow; 
pauroog, pinauroog, papauroog^ paurogga, to 
cause to do so. 

l^rroX, pinorrot, paporrot, borrottay borrottetty 
Innorroty inoborroiien, to bind j paborroi, pina- 
borroty papabarroty ipaborrottay ipaborroi, etc., 
to cause to bind ; baborroty a binding. 

poia, phtosay faposay osaa, osaafty mosaafty 
imosaoHy to make the ground clean by the 
rooting out of weeds or jungle ; pausoy pinausay 
papausa, ausa-a, ipausoy inipausay etc. ; see 
mausa, 

poai, pinosiy paposiy osioy osi-itty inosiy iwhosiany 
to scour, to whiten } paus, pinausiy papausiy 
ipausiay tpausiy inipatuiy to cause to be scoured. 
poai, pinosiy paposiy osia, osiefty inosiy ino-osien, 
where? osian, tnosiany ino-osiany to stow any- 
thing away; pausiy pinausiy papausiy ipaustay 
etc., to cause to do so ; osiy a sheltering. 

posirrere, pinossirrercy papossirrerfy bossir- 
rereay bossirreri-in, binosirrercy inobosirrereiny 
to hang up by the neck j pabosirrerey pi, pa, 
ipabosirrereay ipabosirrerey inipabosirrerey to sus- 
pend -y people sav also pausirrtrea. 

poBial, pinosisty paposisiy osisiay osisiany inosisi, 
and inosisiany ino-osisian, to end, to leave off; 
pasisi rior, and sisi rioty to be the last ; pau- 
sisiypiyPay ipausisia, ipausisi, inipausisi, inotpau- 
sisi, to cause to end. 

POBOS, pinososy paposos, osossay osossen, inososy 
ino-osossen, to put up the hair in the native 
manner, to bind together grass, to dress the 
head, to adorn a field or any place with knots 
of grass J but then, osossany inosossany ino- 
ossosan are used ; pausoSy pi, pa, ipausossoy to 
cause such to be done. 

pouoor, pinossoTy papossor, bossorray bossorrany 
binossorrany inobossorran, to castrate ; pabossooTy 
pinabossoTy papabossor, to cause the same to be 
done. 

pottai, piy pa, ottma, ottaian, inottaian, ino- 
ottaian, to sleep on the same bed, and under 
the same covenng. 

poUan, pinottan, papotiasiy ottannoy ottannany 
imottannany ino-ottannan^ to lie in wait in 
secret ; pautasty pinauUuiy papautan, ipautamia, 



inipautany ino-ipautany to cause such to be 
done ; this is the same with poetan^ above, for 
if any one will surprise another secretly, he 
must first lie in wait. 

potto, a knot, a knuckle, a knot in wood | 
potto no eryuy the hip ; potto no sameery the jaws. 

pottnp, jnnottup, papottupy otuppay ottuppem^ 
inottup, ino-ottuppen, to put out $ sja jo pottnp 9 
chaUy elU tnaman ina bonnay if you had put out 
the fire it would not have burnt my field j ja 
otuppen ja tattullonoef is the candle put out? 
pautapy pinautafy etc., to cause to be put out j 
ipautuppi Takailaja tattulionoe, let Takalla put 
out the candle. 

poulabo, //', fay oulaboay same as moab, 

pos-i, pinoz-ty paposc-iy oz-ia, inoxriy inooxriim, 
to awaken ; pmix-ty pinaux-iy pi^auz4y ipamxr 
ia, ipauZ'iy tnipauz-ty inrnpauz-t, to cause to 
awake. 

posioB, pinoziosy papoziosy oziossay oziossam, 
inoziossan, ino-oziossany to come in any one*s 
place, to succeed any one ^ pauziosy pit unt x i oif 
papauzios, ipauziossay impauzioSy inoipausuM^ 
to cause to succeed ; ozios, succession | jnm- 
aoziosy successor. 

poiirrles, pinozirries, paposarriesy osckrism^ 
ozirrisan, inozirrisan, ina-ozirrisany to miss 
one's aim ; pauzirriesy piy pay ipauzirvisay etc, 
to cause one to miss the mark. 

praas, the hard Rumminess which sometinies 
sticks to the eyelashes. 

pries, pinerifSy paperiesy sperisOy iperisy im^ 
peries, inoiperies, to tie close; pabries, piy pa, 
ipabrisa, ipabries, inipabrieSy to cause it to be 
done. 

ptat, pientaty paptat, ptadday pass. Uaddam^ 
pientaddany to begin, to do anything irom the 
first ; paptat, nom. 

pto, piensOy paptOy ptoay pass. ptooHy pitmtt, 
inoptoony same as ptat ; paptOy same as paptai, 

pulla, pinullay papmuiy buUa-ay btdUhom, 
binuUa-any inobuUa-any to knock in pieces \ 
pabuUa, pinabuUay papabuUay ipabuUay to cause 
to be broken to pieces ; written poulia, 

qua, a little, small. 

rULgy see raggat. 

tUMy a fac^got. 

raat, smelt, a fish. 

rabboe, the clouds ; raboanja zijsjay ckmdj 
weather. 

raoh, a joint, as between the knots of bam- 
boos,* written raagy the verb; paroi^g, 
under the letter p. 




Vocabulary 



179 



noba, a ghost, an apparition, the mob. 

raoh oen, a man who is half silly. 

nggB^ the betel-leaf. 

nggat, a scar ; also written nu^, 

rais, wrath, anger } fr. manns, 

ramal, a burnt field. 

raneen, a hillock ; elsewhere ranna, 

raided, the mouth, the conversation. 

ranna, see raneen, 

ranniran, a leopard. 

ranob, the beard. 

rao, a well. 

raooba, the loins. 

ra-ol, a furrow. 

rao8, an eyetooth, or double tooth. 

rapal, blindness; yttmarapal, 

rapies, bad, in general \ verb maraftesy to be 
wicked { ma-arafteSy a baid man. 

rapo (let the a be scarcely heard), beneath ; 
morpoy the verb to be low 5 patarpo, pi, pa, to 
cause to be low. 

raracb, a low place in a field, where rain- 
water collects ; raas. 

rarain, a petrefaction ; fr. rummain. 

rarait, a song of many ; fr. rummait. 

raras, old, contracted. 

rarandon, a neighbours house ; paurarauJon, 
a neighbour ; raraudon sjam sim, neighbour 
man or woman. 

raried, a possession, or landmark. 

rarla, the parting of a river. 

raricberlcb, a strip marked off with a knife 
for a measure. 

rariot, a ring or ferrol, made to fasten anything. 

rare, a hat, a dog^s collar ; raro daaly a straw 
hat } raro ojan, a bank. 

raro-OMan, a bank. 

rarop san, the after-birth. 

rarot sien, the gums. 

rarot, bandages, with which anything is 
bound in order not to burst 

raroiiBflJa, a pot. 

rarrledda, a separation. 

rampe man mlcban, the esophagus. 

rasoom, time, season ; rasoom adoan 
sysyoy the time of cooking, i.e. past three 
o^clock ; it also means the time of high water 
at sea, when it is still water ; rasoomo a doan a 
vcysyay the time from the afternoon until the 
going <iown of the sun. 

ratta, a cage, a hair. 

ran-a, a hind. 

ranaaan, unwise, half foolish, as rachoen^ 
compounded of rau and saan, because the 
understanding is wanting. 



ranian, ri, ra, rausanna, rausannan^ ntum- 
jafmafif to shine, to glister, but is only said of 
that which had a black ground, otherwise it is 
madallolees, 

ranso, it is fallen, there it lies. 

re, dried fish or flesh. 

re don, the eaves of a house. 

ri, the throat, the neck. 

riba, all sorts of upper garments that cover 
the shoulders, no matter of what form or 
length ; rUf* tasso, a gown ; ribo chaiuk, a 
shirt. 

riM, a small house, where men put seed. 

ribOkbok, orriboikebokf a lined coat or jacket. 

rid, a bank, not entirely covered by water, 
the strand, a sandbank. 

riee, a mosquito, a hand ; fr. nuaiis, 

rima, a hand: rim kallamas, the right 
hand ; rim kairtf the left hand. 

rinakas, the space between the legs. 

rinas, a trevet, fire-irons ; see riuas. 

rinepit (the e short) erlen, a pair of legs, 
as the hind legs of a deer, etc., joined as they 
are in nature. 

rlnl, an egg. 

rlnlee, a verse. 

rior, after; fr. marior^ matarior, to be 
behind ; patariory trans. 

rlpocb, household furniture. 

rinae, instruments about a fireplace, where 
people set the pot on to boil, as with us trevets, 
roasters, etc., tne natives, however, merely fix 
three stones in the ground. 

ri-il, a native eatmg bowl. 

ro, distance, depth ; masanno a roja Taijoam 
oe ? how far is Taiwan ? masanno a roja chauch 
oe ? how deep is the well ? 

robaan, a grave. 

robad, the stalk or stem of a plant 

roboen, a sack. 

roddol^ a common sort of arrows. 

rodo, a certain fish called rabos, 

rogffa, a hawk. 

roggo, a cocoanut 

rokob, a wart, also a button on clothes. 

roman, another ; plur. roma-roman, 

ronnaan, the grass in the fields. 

ronno, a shadow, as of an umbrella, shed, or 
tree, etc, but not from clouds, which is dachiM\ 
see rummonm, 

rool, the bottom of anjrthing, especially the 
fundament of the body. 

rocs, a shore, also a root, as bassor, 

root (the contracted), a consort 

rool» remainder. 




i8o 



Favorlang 



liaUikHMk, nftoti^^ imimri^6€m^ to ^w dizzy, 
4« II vvviyduiii; wciU ivuuJy and people did 
itui ki»t»v^ \\hctv* thcv were. 

iu»44S iMic %\ith utiiKher, altogether, a heap 
4 it liU li .1 ihnigs •*» wkkk), straw, paddy, millet, 
«tt. I luiKv ih Jv4ivc\l fwriMWrfiAi, to distribute 
t-tl^'t^U I p^*»MfffM^MUu^ to cause such to be 
itiiiii . 

iMMHK gtit^vi i alkO written rossa. 

liiMv UMolM^ tvar«. 

iuuib^ '*t 'w, ruNnkiy rubhoWy paruhbo, 
li.ui4 u» fciuudi rarulfboy meal; rarubboan^ 
HI i.iii«.Vs/ u(/«iM, a place for grinding, a 
mill. 

iiuu^g^whov >'f««M«:A^'40> rammchorcko^ to 
i.tuli uji iikI sU»%%n, iu a ship at sea, or a weak 
LhuUks v»i» ^%hich anything is carried ; faar- 

. '*v/» iv^» cU'., u» cauMT this to be done. 

i uukJk^j ' tHumk^ty rurtuMka^ to gather branches ; 
fsu.i \.i, t^ifuuitkuy ^tpuarka, i^irka-a, etc., to 
t.ui^,. ^iuh iv» be iU»ne, to separate from one 
.4iu>iUst, *^ ihc blanches of trees shoot out on 
4)1 ^uUa , 'm/Mkuruy noin. a shooting out, as the 
(ii.iuihv.t \*t lives. 

Yuanr^V^ "• '**'» '**^^» '■**^*j rinaaly the u 
.luiii. u» ^a vui vHK-'s heels, as tsimsakal-^ paraal^ 
III v.iuw ilu^ lo tv ^lone. 

muu&uU, nuuMMhiif^ rurummahy received, 
|iikii»i4ni» iiupivj;natevl, alM> to occupy some 
mu. ku .Uui; au\ihiug, it is ro^ and rabta^ 
• ♦..^..., ',iuuKiHy \fM'ubuH\ ituiaap o rummias 
,.^v.. .i....u\.irt, tum»iub tUi tutumkachy six days 
viu wHa^v \\»ll lei pOMi by, that they do not go 
..III ui Uuui, wv ^uA i ru^», ri>w^, inoraUfty 
i>vsf^in\is\ i^ vKcasKUiedj raraby nom. subst. ; 
,■ > > ../^, ihv' wvukian is pregnant. 

(uuiUukUA, f i/i»*MMutXi^ runtmmahay raba-a^ 

...A u> vo\ct \Mih the wings, as birds do 

Ou 11 \vimU4, , ^Inv' u» lake any luie for a father, 

114 ,u.Ui u» wi^e ^u heli> him i see faraba-^ 

1... 4 luwaia*; , 'ii/uio*, a bnreiling-place. 

iuvuuuvii^ i:» viul v>l anythiug that |)eople 
I uiu>>w wvll ^wv ciihwi thum^h di^ance or 
.Uiku. .. vk Mi\ v>ihc4 obkUuctiim. 

\uiMUi4(^. '-''^'MiuuH^ raf'itfWfuufi, rtutuir- 
. . ., , ..-•w »<4-v*«, to (Vilify i fttrain, pitg- 

.. .. A. ^\. ....••, ./\«/«uA»Jt ipufMMy etc., to cause 

\.t l>. I*. I I .Uk tl 

\4«wuui^. ■ ..— viMdhii:, pummmait, raiJa, 

.^ ..»*ji *u^iUAt^ to sing in choms ; 

V :. iMp^ifiut^ ipuraiUy iparaUy 

. ;-. ■ ■ , ^%> 4 04UH «kt\h to be done. 

U^w^uAWMilb ••■••wMdWAMw*, rMitrnm am m i k, 
..■.^•. ^1* i.A« \Kw pto|K*ity of another under 



pretence that it belongs to ounehret) with 
regard to the matter it it said ratmksMf r i mam m k^ 
imoramktMy and to the person, ramkam^ rimam-' 
koMy iMmroMkami faroMmiky ftMoramMuk, 
paparamMuky iparaaUta^ etc^ to cause such to 
be done. 

mmmapid, rimtwrnafai, rarmmMufid, rapmBm^ 
rapalUmy rimap^^ to beat about blindly | 
parapaly trans, rarafal^ a blinding ; am- 
ararapoLf a blinder. 

mmmaiiiaa, riiaammapies^ rammmapiis^ 
rapisay rtnapiesy iMorapUuMy to do eviL to tin ; 
pa^apifSy trans, to cause any to tin, imp. 
iparapisity iparapUs ; babosa rmmMopies 9 mruu 
o€y to spoil what amy one has made or done) 
ra^s ja airitft, a man spoils his work, ix. the 
work is spoiled^ nom. rarapUs^ sin, also 
orates sen marapus\ wui ararapUsy a sinner) 
rummapirapusy intens., rapirapUsy nom. 

mmmarled, rinmmmanely ranummaritd, 
rarLLiy rarLiam, riiutrUamy iMoraruUm^ to make 
a division of land ) parariedy piiuaraHid^ 
papararttdy etc., to cause such a separation) 
rariidy nom. a separation ; rariidam and rwried 
aijuHy the place where the fields divide. 

nunmaro, rimunmaroy rantMutan, ranm^ 
raroaHy rhuuroany ittorarooMy to put on the luC| 
to put a collar on a dog ; parar^y pimarmn^ 
pafararoy paraartMy dm, m, intens., iparar%^ 
etc., to cause the hat to be put on, or a collar 
to be put on a dog ; rarQy a hat, a collar. 

mnmukucli, ritmnuiumchy ranummamck^ 
rauckay rauchany ruiauc/umy imrauckam^ to 
uncover the head for any one ; paroMcky piy pm^ 
iparaucAa, iparaucky etc., to cause the head to 
be uncovered ; ta Albert iparamck 9 ran im 
catitain ja sisjiniy the children are charged by 
Albert to uncover the head before the captains. 

nmuDJiiino, rinummaumiy rarummmiMy raatomy 
raunooHy rtnaunOy i/uraMmooity to behead ) 
paraunOy pinaraunOy paparmmOy iparmamm^ 
ipurauHO, imparauHOy to cause to be beheaded. 

mmmant, rtMummaMty rammmoMty ratuU^ 
rauditHy rimuuLtfty to remain out; imjud demm 
joii rummuut a miiip aif wherefore do you 
remain so long out ? paga sasai ta Cabboy sa m 
rummaut de d^ Hidlibo, Cabba will not come, 
he remains at Hallibo; parauty pimarmit, 
paparauty ipanatda, iparoMty to cause to remain 
out ; mmmaurauty etc., paraMrauSy etc., as 
alx)ve, to remain long out, or cause this to be 
done. 

mmmt, n', roy reoy retSy rimty imcrtem^ to 
sneak haid ) also to poke out the belly as if 
blown out, to threaten) the oppodte of 




Vocabulary 



i8i 



kummibachf also to boast; Pitn^ tnms. ma- 
arare^ a hsuti speaker. 

nmmiedo, n, ra^ imp. redoa^ pass, parido^ 
trans, to draw a bow. 

nunmedOB, rinummedoSf roddossa, rodossen^ 
riendoj, inoraddossen^ to snufF up ; paardos^ 
pinaardos, papaardoSf ipaardossa^ tpaardos^ im- 
paardos, inoipaardoj, to cause to snufF up. 

nmmiees, ri, ra, reessa, reesen^ rinees^ 
inoreesjertf same as chummisel, 

mmmemoremo, rinummemoremo^ rarum- 
mtmoremo, remoremoa, remoremoan^ rinimoremOy 
inoremoremoan, to look all round ; paremoremOy 
piy pa, iparemoremoa, iparemoremoy inipare- 
moreffiOf to cause thus to be done. 

mmxnene, rinummene, rarummene, rinmea, 
rinmeen^ rinmene, inorinmeeny to put to soak ; 
(the liquor in which anything) is soaked, 
renean, rinean^ inorinnean j paarrUy pinaanUy 
pa^ ipaarnea^ tpaarne^ inipaarne^ inmpaarne^ to 
cause this to be done ; nom. raarne^ a soaking. 

nunmere, rinummere^ rarummere^ rerea^ 
rerearty rintrean, inorerean, to go round, to 
encompass ; parere^ pi^ pa^ iparerea^ etc., to go 
on the other side, as if to get out of any one's 
way. 

nunmeries, rinummeries, rarummerUs, retisa^ 
reruettf rineries, inorer'uen, to put anything 
over from one place to another; parerieSy 
pinareries, papareries, etc., to cause such to be 
done. 

rumini, rinummi, rarummi, ri-a, ri-in, rim^ 
inori'in, to keep watch, to guard ; pariy pinari^ 
papetri, iparia^ etc., to cause watch to be kept } 
rarif nom.l a watch j rarian, or rariaijan, a 
watch-house; ma-arari^ a watchman. 

nunmiba, ri^ ra, riboa^ to hold the feast 
which is celebrated in the evening after 
marriage, to keep a wedding; nom. rariba, 
obaan o rariba, a wedding ; to keep a feast the 
day after marriage they call ummior o rariba ; 
de rariba, i.e. to follow up the marriaee ; and 
when they drink with the new married couple 
it is micham o ramain. 

rummilMd, rinummibal, rarummbal, riballa^ 
riballeftj rimbaly inoribalUriy to pull down, also 
to separate; paribal, pinaribal, paparibal, 
ipariballa^ ipartbal^ to cause to break down ; 
raribaly a breaking up ; ma-araribal, one who 
breaks. 

rjUDJDilArritibynnummibirrUb, rarummibirrUb^ 
ribirriba, ribirriben^ rintbirrieb^ inraibirribben, 
to fly hither and thither, as those who are 
assailed on every side ; pariberUb, pif pa, 
tparibfriba, etc., to cause to do so. 



rommioliimiy rinum, rarum, richumma, to cut 
off a bamboo or stick even ; panclmm, trans.| 
rarichumy nom. subst 

mmmieoberiecli, riftummcheriech, rarum- 
micheriechy richerkha, richerichenf rifdcheriech, 
to make a mark with a knife or such like, in 
order to fix a measure; paricheriich^ pi, pa, 
iparichericha, etc., to cause to be marked off; 
this does not mean to cut through a rope or 
bamboo with a knife or saw. 

roinmiedda, rirummedda, rarummedda, 
riedday rieddan, rittUddan, inorieddan, to make 
a separation ; parieddan, etc, to cause such to 
be done; rarUdda, a separation; rarieddan 
and aijan, the place where the way separates ; 
rummta as rumrmedda, 

roinmiet, a lapse of days ; ratorroa rummes, 
three days ; masamto rummiis ? how many 
days? 

roinmiel, rimpnmUl, rarummUl, rila, riUn, 
riniely inortkn, to dry skins in the native 
manner by spreading them out in the sun : 
rarieiy nom. such stretching out; pariel, 
pinariel, paparUi, iparila, ipariil, imparul, to 
make dry. 

niinmleperlep, rinumy rarum, riebrieba, same 
as rummchumy and rummuup, 

mmndggo, rinummiggo, rarummggo, riggoa, 
riggoon, rimggo, to turn oneself, or anything 
else, from one side to the other, in which 
sense it azrees with poariedi also to remove 
anything nom one shoulder or hand to the 
other ; that on which it is laid is roggaan \ 
pariggo, etc, to cause such to be done ; also to 
change, as rummiggo o ramiedy to change one*t 
word ; see mariggo ; riggoriggo, chang^ableness, 
fr. rummiggorriggo I rummiggorriggOy intens. of 
rummiggo. 

nmmilkBk, rimimmkaky rarummkaky rikakka, 
rikakken, rimkaky inorikakkeny to stride ; parikak, 
pinarikak, paparikak, ifarikakkoy etc, to cause 
such to be done ; rartkaky a striding. 

rummikoriko, rarikorikoay to move back- 
wards and forwards ; parikorikOy trans. 

niinmlot, rinummiot, rarummoiy rioita, 
riotteny riniot, inoriotten^ to environ, to encom- 
pass; parioty pinariot, papariot, etc, to cause 
such to be done. 

mmmlMrlM, rimtmmiseries, ranammsiriiSy 
riserisay riseriseny rimserifs, inoriseriseny to 
wash rice or millet ; pariserieSy pimaiseriesy 
paparisirisy ipariserisOy to cause such to be 
done. 

numnifap, ritmm, rarum, rimppa, same at 
rummchum \ parisupy trans. 




l82 



Favorlang 



nmimo, the whole : fr. marummo, 
niinmod, a kind of fish, 
mmmoggoroggo, to rumble water between 
the teeth, as when people wash the mouth, to 

momirroom, romirroma, romtrromen, rinomtrroom, 
inoromrroom, to wash the mouth ; paramirroom, 
pi, pa, iparomirroma, etc., to cause such to be 
done. 

rummomorromo, rinummomorromo, rarum- 
momorromOf romorromoa, romorromoon, rino- 
morromoon, inoromorromoon, to make round j 
paromorromo, pinaromorromOf paparomorromo, 
iparomorromoa, to cause such to be done. 

nunmoiino, rinummoano, rarummonno, ronnoa, 
ronnoan, rinonnoan, inoronnoan, to overshadow ; 
paroftno, trans, raronno, a shadowing. 

nunmoop, rinummoopy rarummaop, ropa, 
rofen, rinoop, inoropen, to shut the eyes ; paroop, 
ptfiaroop, paparoop, etc., to cause such to be 
done. 

rommoos, rinummoos, rammmoos, rosa, rosen, 
rinoos, inoraoseny to run after, to pursue ; paroos, 
piftaroos, paparoos, iparosa, etc., to cause to 
pursue. 

mnmiopa, ri, ra, ropa, erota, ineropa, 
inoeropa, to spit anything out of the mouth, 
but not spittle, for that is petummo j paropa, 
trans, raropa^ a spitting out. 

nmmioroBaii, rinummorosaa, rarummorosan, 
to gasp at the point of death. 

nunmorro, rinummorroy rarummorro, rorroa, 
rorraofty rinorro, inororraon, to call together, to 
put together, as clothes in a chest, drink in a 
pot, paddy in a sack, etc. j also parorro, see in 
parrorro \ also to encircle \ rummorrono cho, to 
encircle any one j rarorro, an assembly ; act. 
arorroarty or aroroaijatt, a place of assembly. 

nunmorrooi, rinummorroos, rarummorroos, 
rorrosa, rorrosen, rinorroos^ inororrosen, to col- 
lect, to ^therj parorroos, pinarorroos, papa- 
rorroosy tparorrosa, iparorroos, to cause to 
gather. 

rummot, rinummot, rarummot, rotta, rotten, 
rinot, inorotten, to wrap up anything ; parot, 
pinarot, paparot, to cause to be wrapped up ; 
rarot, a wrapper. 

nuninotos, ri, ra, ruttossa, ruttossen, rinotos, 
ittorotossen, to go against anything, as against 
the wind, stream, etc. } paruttos, trans, raro- 
tos, such a going \ ma-ararotos, such a goer. 

nuninotul, rt, ra, rotuUa, rotulUn, ritiotul, 
inorotulUn, to take to oneself, and thus to de- 
prive another of anything, or to cause that he 



has it not { parotui, trans., rarohU, nom. a de- 
priving ; ma-ararotul, one who deprives. 

mmpe, rinumpe, rarumpt, ruppea^ mfpiim^ 
rienpe, inoruppein, to swallow up ; paarpe^ pim" 
aarpe, papaarpe, ipaarpea^ etc., to cause to be 
swallowed up; rarutpe, a swallowing; raruffi 
man, o nucham, the passage for eating and 
drinking. 

■a-a, but, for. 

aaam, a partridge, a wild-fowl. 

■aan, the understanding. 

■aas, a looseness, a diarrhoea. 

salMulta, a street; fr. summabad, 

Babanno, when ; sasm o sabanno joa moMum 
oe ? when will your father come ? 

sabba, a river. 

■abba, poverty, fr. masaba, 

sabbacba, a mouth. 

sabbl, a carp that is full grown; autobahaif 
half grown; barobabbi, about a roan lonr; 
dille barobabbi, a young carp of^a smalfer 
sort. 

Bacha, or sachana, afterwards ; sacha a mm- 
taap rummies, after six days ; jocAa a nattada 
eidas, over a month; sacha a natorroa baas, 
after three years. 

sacbier, the lower part of the calf of the 
leg. 

salas baron, the stalk of a tree. 

sallaban, a screen to make a shadow. 

■am, a mat to sleep on. 

■amere, a cheek ; also written sameer. 

Bammarotta, the day after to-morrow. 

Bandon, the entrance of a house, including 
the door and threshold ; inaunumma jo saioi 
sandon? talla alia mossei dummora diiT why 
do you stay at the door? why do you not 
come in ? 

fannan, envy, jealousy; see masamum, 

Bapak, any unpleasant and stinking smell; 
anything that stinks or is nasty, so that the 
senses loathe it. 

Bapisab, a house or shed, such as is gener- 
ally seen in front of native houses, a roof. 

Baroko, the hump of the Indian cow. 

sarra, a row of persons or things, that stand 
one after the other; sarro mababat, to go (me 
after the other; sarro makarieb^ ditto; fr. 
pissarra. 

sarra oa oa, a crow. 

Barries, pack-thread. 

•arrisar, the net that incloses the bowels, 
the diaphragm. 

Mxrodon, persons who come finom one 




Vocabulary 



183 



as tabarroni it must be pronounced sarr*'<h 
don, and means a race, a line ; see pissarra, 

unroio, misty damp; foch-foch a sarroso 
de bonna^ the mist in the field; sarrosoan^ 
misty. 

■aiaainai, praet. pass, sinoainatan, pres. in<h 
samrnuy fut. a look-out house ; this has no cover- 
ing, and differs from tarrakal, which has a 
covering. 

lasaar, the headkerchief of the men. 

■asaat, white coral beads, which the young 
women wear on their legs ; sabitono sojoat^ the 
red corals which they wear about these ; and 
tatte opo, those which are worn underneath. 

sasaJJan, and sasosaijan, the place of any- 
thing, hence don sassc^an, a dwelling-house ; 
sino saijan, and iftosojotjafi, this has no other 
tenses than these three, pres. perfect, and fut. 
pass., it means also simply a residence ; sasas' 
jan merien, a work place; contracted into 
S(uau mcr'ten. 

saaakimotto, a cross, fr. summakimotto, 

■aaalla, deceit, fr. summalla, 

■aiiaUan, a ring, such as men wear on the 
fingers, fr. summallan, 

Baaannasanna, a spout 

saaappa, a sheet or anything spread out ; sas- 
app axaijan, a table cloth ; josap ratta, bed 
clothes ; sasam^an, a mattress. ; fr. summappa, 

saias, water grass. 

saaaaJlen, a notch ; root summashien, 

•aain, sinaas, to have a looseness. 

lasirau tattoUo, a candlestick ; jojtrau 
sasi, a salt-cellar. 

•aao-at, a rake ; fr. summoat, or the clawing 
itself 

aaaoom, the measure, where two things with 
their ends are joined together ; josoom ocAaatt, 
that which is joined on to the belly. 

sasBabaoh, a kind of poison. 

■aasas, a vessel in which people put food to 
settle, as with us, the skimmmg dishes. 

■assi, salt ; sojsif the same. 

■assieB, thread, yam ; fr. gummis, 

■aafrimar, fried grease. 

■assio, an earthquake. 

sasBO, disinclination, dissatisfaction, a mur- 
muring disposition ; annumma josonos ? what 
do you murmur about ? 

saaoelan, a pot or cup : written sasulan, 

■aimllan, a can, a bottle. 

•emat), a clothes brush. 

Bhag, a great mountain. 

Bbam, a man. 

ihiBm, a child ; sUUitn^ chiklren ; sMim 9 



sMem, grandchildren ; sAiem osso^ an orphan \ 
sMem hadda, a son, a boy ; shietn mammati, a 
daughter, a girl ; shiem iarrach, a bastard ; 
shUm pattala, a stepchild; sMem koAan, a 
young sucking child. 

BbiBB, the soul, a spirit 

Bles, the back, the shore, a strand. 

Bles, anything bioken off short, the back. 

bIbb, anything produced long, the end of a 
thing ; lies atzaijan, the end of a table ; sies 
borma, the end of a field ; sies abas, the end 
of the sea, where it washes the land ; it is not 
applied to thin^ that have no certain quantity, 
like the word stsi, see below. 

Bilok, a large native knife. 

Blmlda, sinimida, sasimida, an open space 
round a village or a field, to keep off fire; 
pasida, trans, sida, such a path. 

Bimilnuillr, simmkasik, sasimikasik^ sikasikka, 
sikasikkm, simkasiky inosikkasikken, to dangle 
with the legs or feet, as idle people do to 
drive away time ; pasikasik, pi, pa, ipasikasikka, 
etc., to cause such to be done. 

BtmlkOBikko^ simmikosiko, sikosikoa, sikosikoon, 
simkosiko, inostkosikoon, to drill, as people do 
with pikes; pasikossiko, pi, pa, ipasikosikoa^ 
ipasikosiko, etc, to cause such to be done. 

Bimiooli, simmioch, sasimioch, siocha, siocken, 
sinioch, imsiochen, to brine before the hand ; 
pasiocA, pinasiocA, papasiocn, ipasiocAa, ipasiocA, 
impasiocA, to cause such to be done. 

Btmiplr, simmipir, sasimipir, sipirra, sipirren, 
sinipir, inosipirren, to throw the wrong way, or 
behind one^s hand ; pasipir, pinasipir, papasi- 
pir, etc., to cause anything to be thus thrown. 

Bimiri, simmiri, sasimiri, siria, siri-in, simri, 
inosiri'in, to bawl out in the native manner; 
pasiri, pi, pa, ipasiria, ipasiri, etc, to cause 
any one to bawl out. 

BlmlBlch, simmiricA, sasimsicA, sisicAa, sisi^ 
cAen, simsicA, inosisicAen, to break or flatten 
anything with the palm of the hand or foot ; 
sistcAin rimaja bart, to crush the mosquitoes 
with the hand ; tapes sisjiem sasai stmsicA 
na^ babat donja cAo* asjiei, let all the chiklren 
come and merely rub the floor (lit middle of 
the house) with their feet ; pasisicA, pi, pa, 
ipasisicAa, ipasisicA, itdpasisicA, imipasisuA, to 
cause such to be done. 

Blmttllr, simmitik, sasismtik, sitikka, sitikkm, 
simtik, to bind anything; tij;h^ or to haul any- 
thing tort ; pasitik, ptnasttik, papasitik, ifasi^ 
tikka,ipasitik, impasittk, to cause such to be done. 

Btnaraiiroa, the fat of the kidneys, or suet; 
written also sisuvatru. 




184 



Favorlang 



■Inly the female among beasts; applied to 
men, it means a married woman who has had 
children, or who is become old, in which case 
also an unmarried woman is called Jt/ii, 

■ini-aplllo, the thumb, the great toe. 

■inien, jinimien, sasimU/t, sina^ si^utn, simnany 
imsinan^ to be in the way between two, to 
strike in between two ways ; sina osi ta Cabba 
inaojf come between me and Cabba ; pasiert^ 
pinasien^ papasun^ etc., to cause this to be 
done \ sasien^ nom. the name of that which 
people set between two. 

•iorra, a certain bird from which quills are 
obtained. 

sill, a sparrow. 

liia, the sun, a day ; written ziji-ja, 

tisi, the end of an^hing ; juia oetas^ the 
end of the rain; sista makarieb^ the end of 
travelling ; sisia patite, the end of speaking ; 
juia tummaap, the end of working. 

aja, if; sja moetas a somma, matalam cho 
aUi sasos" i tumkachf if it rain to-morrow the 
people will probably not go out to hunt 

ajach, a high mountain. 

ajam, a married man, or one who has been 
married ; also a father. 

aJilK), a bird*s nest. 

ajiem, a child, whether boy or girl; sjiem 
badda^ a boy ; sjiem mammalia a girl ; sjiem 
parrachf a bastard ; sjiem pattala, a stepson ; 
sjiem kakan^ a sucking child ; sjiem sjiem^ a 
granddiild. 

ajlen, the teeth ; plur. sisjien. 

io, a place where the grass is eaten off and 
is now bare. 

aoa, a wound. 

aoan, the south ; matasoan, southward. 

■oboohen, a buck which has shed its horns. 

io-e, silver-gilt ; so-e kakan^ gokl. 

BOloch, the darkness and stonniness of the 
sky in the east ; see summoloch, 

Bomma, to-morrow. 

•0-0, the conjunction ' and.* 

■orro, a pestle, with which people beat paddy 
out of the stalk. 

■oao, the length of anything. 

■OBonk aJlen, a sickness consisting of 
rotten teeth. 

soinmma, the yoke of an egg. 

lombaoli, sinumbach, sasumbacA, sabacAa, 
sabacAeft, sienbacA, inosabach, to administer a 
certain poison called sasabach-^ pasabachf piit- 
asabachy papasabach, etc, to cause to be 
poisoned. 

amnbo, simumbo^ sasumbo^ isiboa^ iseb^^ itdseb^^ 



inoisiboy to set anything down ; pasebOf pimue6$, 
papasebo, ipaseboa, etc, to cause anythmg to be 
set down. 

aiunkir, simtmkir^ uuumkir^ isekirra, tmsekhr^ 
inoisekir, to press down ; sumkir rarro, to put 
the hat on hrmly or to press it down ; pastar^ 
pinasekitf papasekir, ipasekirra, etc, to cauie 
such to be done ; sumkir i io no cAo^ to dip a 
person in the water ; sasekir i to no cJbriiUm, 
christian baptism. 

aiunkir and sekirra, sekirran, sienkirraM, imo- 
sikirran^ the making up of the betel-nut) 
pasekir, pi, pa, etc, to cause such to be 
done. 

anminatni, sttatmmMim, seuuMKUUSM, sit/twnM, 
saammen, simiam, imuaamsnem, to entangle or 
entrap; pasaam, pi, pa, ipasaamma, ipasaa^ 
ifdpasaam, etc, to cause to be entrapped. 

nunmabad, si, sa, imp. sahadda, to arrange 
anything in rows, as fiekls, trees, streets, plants^ 
etc. ; pasabad, trans. 

Bommabaa, sinummabas, sasummabas, tabaisa, 
sabassen, sinabas, inosabassen, to try, to tempt, 
to make a trial ; pasabas, pinasabas, papasabas^ 
ipasabassa, etc., to cause such to be done) 
sasabas, a trial, a temptation ; ma-^uasabas, a 
tempter, one who tries. 

fommabangarro, si, sa ; pasabougarro, tiani. 
a certain manner of binding, as if it were 
braided. 

anmmabot, simtmmabot, sasummaboi, saboitm^ 
sabotten, sinabot, inosabotten, to do anjfthing 
by guess, to guess at anything; tmmmaboi 
summot, to point out or by out anything by gueia 

Bummabaab, sinummabsab, sasmmmabsab, 
sabsahba, sabsabben, sinabsab, inosabbem^ to 
whip, to beat any one openly ; pasid>ui>, pi, pm, 
ipasabsabba, ipasabsab, etc, to cause such to be 
done ; sasabsab, such a blow ; also the instru- 
ment, as a stick, etc. 

Bummada, simimmada, sasummada, sadda, 
saddan, sinadJa, inosaddan, to seek; patadda, 
pi, pa, etc., to cause to seek. 

Bummadlch-iboch, simimmadich-ibock, saumh 
ma^iich'iboch, sadaudich-ibocka, sadaudick-ibock, 
sinadaudich'iboch, inosadaudich-ibock, to be 
hungry, to desire anything as hungry ; paseuUck' 
iboch, pi, pa, ipasadick-ibocka, etc, to cause 
such to be done. 

Bummakimotto, sinummakimoiio, sasmmmaki' 
motto, sakimottoa, sakimottoan, sinakisnoitomm, 
inosakimottoan, to make anything crosswise or 
with a cross ; pasakimotto, pi, pa, ipasakismttm^ 
etc., to cause such to be done. 

■BBuaakiaky linurnmaksak, smsMmamkudt^ 




Vocabulary 



I8S 



saksakka^ saksakken^ sinaksak, inosaksakken^ to 
trample, to tread, to tread down ; pasaksak, pi, 
pa, ipasaksakka, etc., to cause such to be done. 

BTuninakBak, etc., the breaking forth of the 
morning in the eastj summaksak a bajan, it 
dawns in the east. 

■nmmalla, jinummalla, sasummaUa, saHa-a, 
saUa-an, sinalla, inosaiia-an, to deceive with 
words or actions ; pasalla, pinasaila, papasalla, 
ipasaUa, inipasalla, inoipasaUa, to cause to be 
cheated. 

lummallalMUEi, sinummallaban, sasummal- 
Utban, sallabanna, saUabannarty sinaUabarmany 
inosaUabannan, that which makes a shadow 
(as an umbrella, etc.), to overshadow any one 
or thing J tasaUaban, pinasallaban, papasalla- 
ban,' ipasallabanna, ipasaUaban, to cause such 
to be done. 

rommallad, sinummallady sojummallady sal- 
ladda, salladderty sinallad, inosalladden, to dis- 
cover, to l>e aware of; pasallad, pinasaliat, 
papasallat, ipasalladda, etc., to cause to be dis- 
covered. 

Bimimallan, sinummallan, sasummallan, sal- 
lanna, sallannan, sinallanafty iftosallanaft, to put 
a ring on the hand } pasaUan, pi, pa, etc., to 
cause to be done. 

■ummamgean, //', sa, imp. samgeannay pass. 
samgeannefty sinamgeariy to offer, is originally 
a Chinese word, but adopted by the For- 
mosans and declined after their manner ; sam- 
geariy offering. 

Minrniiinifniaftni^ imp. sammisomma, sammi- 
samman, etc., to crown; pasammisan ; sam- 
nusamy a crown, garland; seuammsamy a 
crowning ; ma-asasammisamy a crown-maker. 

■ammamo, si, say samoay samoariy etc., to 
twist, a threefold cord ; pasamo, trans. 

wiininannaiiaiina, sinummannasannay sasum- 
mannasamta, sinannasannay sannasannay sanna- 
sannaany sinannasannay inosannasannaany to 
hiss at; pasannasannay pi, pa, ipasannasanna, 
inipasannasannay etc., to cause to be hissed. 

Buniinaod, sinummaody sasummaody saodda, 
sinaody inosaoddeny to pour out, either on pur- 
pose or by accident; pasaod, pinasaody papa- 
saody ipasaodday etc., to cause to be poured out ; 
masaody neut. ; see in m, the act. of which is 
pasaod'y sasaody a pouring out. 

smnmapar, sinummapary sasummapaTy sa- 
parray saparrany sinaparrany to grasp anything 
furiously, as those do who fear that it will escape 
them ; na a sinumpar o masorroy I have seized 
a young hind ; pasapaty piy pay ipasaparay ipa- 
sapar^ etc., to cause to be thus seized. 



niinmaplel, sinummafnely sasummapiely sa- 
pilkty sapUlany sinapily inosapilany to sit down on 
the ground, without stool, mat, or other article : 
pasapily pinasapily papasapil, ipasapilUiy ipasapily 
inipasapily to cause such to be done. 

lommappa, sinummafpay sasummappay sappa 
and sappaijay sapannty sinapanni, tnosapannif 
to overspread ; pasappa, pt, pa, ipasappaija, 
ipasappay inipasappa, to cause to be over- 
spread. 

Buminara, sinummaray sasummaray sarray 
sarranniy sinaranniy inisaranniy to lie down in 
order to sleep; pasarray piy pay ipasarray ini- 
pasarray inoipasarray to cause to lie down to 
sleep. 

■ummarabsab, same as sumnudachkach, 

sunmiarainmo, //, say to plait a rope of 
straw, i.e. four double; saramoay saramoan, 
etc. ; pasarmOy to cause such to be done ; sa- 
saramoy a plaiting; ma-asasaromOy one who 
plaits 

Buniiiar-o-aBSO, sinummar-o-assoy sasummar- 
o-assOy to seethe ; pasaro-asso, pi, pa, etc, to 
cause to be seethed. 

Bommaxp, sinummarp, sasummarty sarpeuy 
sinarpy inosarpeny the burning and smgeing of 
fire ; pasarpy pinasarpy papasarpy ipasarpay ipa- 
sarpy inipasarpy the fire singeing or Dummg 
anything. 

soinxnarriM, //, say sarriesa, sarrieseny sin- 
arriesy inosarrieseny to lace, to string ; pasarriesy 
trans. sarrifSy thread. 

snmmarTOBO, sinummarrosoy sasummarrosOy to 
grow fog^ or damp ; pasarrosOy piy pay ipa^ 
sarrosoay tpasarroso, impasarroso, to cause the 
same. 

lummas, see below imder summoso. 

Buxniiias, sinummaSy sasummaiy sassa, sassan, 
sinasy inosassan, to put food to settle, as people 
do in a skimming dish ; p€uas,pinasas,papasas, 
ipasassay etc., to cause to settle. 

snminaai, sinummasi, sasummasiy sasiy sasiauy 
sinasiany inosasiany to mix salt, as people do in 
food when it is being cooked, or after it is 
dressed, but is too insipid ; pasasi, trans., sasiy 
salt, nom. 

Buxnmavjlen, sinummasjieny sasummasjien, sas- 
jinay sasjinan, sinasjinan, inosasjinan, to notch, 
to make a notch, to make teeth ; pasasjien, 
pinasasjieny papasasjiaty ipasasjina, etc, to 
cause to be notched ; sasasjieny the notching ; 
root, sjien or shieny a tooth. 

■unniaao, sinummasoy sasummasoy sasoa, sa- 
soany sinasoan, inosasoa, to swim; pasaso, see 
above in pft. 



2 A 




i86 



Favorlang 



■ummasoom, stnummasoom, jojummasoom^ 
isasoma, isasoom, iwsMoom, inoisasoom^ to join 
together, so that the ends come together, but 
not over or in each other ; pasasoom, etc. 

imnmassio, //, sa, the shaking of the ground j 
sasiOf nom. eartliquake. 

sumxnatsat, sinummatsat^ sasummatsat^ sat- 
satia, saisatUn, sinatjat, inosatsatUrt, to forge, 
as a smith ; pasatsat, pi, pa, ipmatsatta, ipasat- 
sat, ittipasatsat, inoipasatsat, to cause to be 
forged. 

tummatta, sinummatta, sasummatta, sum- 
mattan, sinununattan, inosummattan, to eat food 
raw and undressed, or alone and without mix- 
ing with other food (as flesh without rice, or 
rice without any additions) } pasummatta, phta- 
summatta, papasummatta, ipasummatta, etc., 
to cause such to be done. 

■uxmneal, //, sa, sealla, pass, seallan, sineal, 
inoitallen, to spy an enemy ; paseal, trans, saseal, 
a spying. 

■ammedo, sinummedo, sasummedo, siddoa, 
sidiioon, siendo, inosiddoon, to feel ; pas'uido, pi, 
pa, ipasiddoa, ipasiddo, impasidito, etc., to cause 
to feel. 

siimmeit, si, sa, seitta, seitten, sineit, ino- 
settten, to pinch, to join, i.e. under, as pillik, 
but between two is lummabit. 

Buminerik, sinummerik, sasummerik, sirka, 
sirken, sintrka, inosirken, to press, squeeze, or 
wring out j pasirk, pi, pa, pinasirk, papasirk, 
etc., to cause such to be done } summerik o 
loan, to milk the cows. 

summeto (the e short), si, sa, sittoa, sittoan, 
sittittoan, inosittoan, to limp, as ummotul; pasito, 
trans, sasiio, a limping ; ma-asasitto, one who 
limps. 

summiksik, si, sa, siksikka, siksikken, siniksik, 
inosiksikken, to button tight, also summisik j pa- 
siksik, trans, sasiksik, a buttoning j ma-asasik- 
sik, one who buttons. 

BummiB, siuumms, sasummis, sissa, sissen, 
sinis, inosissan, to sew, also to stitch, in which 
case it is sissan, sinissan, inosissan, also to back- 
stitch, in which case it is isis, misis, inosis, pa- 
sis, pinasis, papasis, ipasissa, ipasis, inipasis, to 
cause to be sewed. 

Bummoal, si, sa, soaila, soallen, sinoaJ, ino- 
soallen, to remind of an old promise or debt ; 
pasoal, trans. 

summo ajoap, sinummoasoap, sasummoasoap^ 
soasoappa, soasappen, sinoasoap, inosoasoappen, 
to do anything blindly and by feeling. 

lummoat, sinummoat, sasummoat, soatta, 
soatten, sinoat, insoatten, to pull up and remove 



the weeds with which the rice fields are covered 
by means of a hook or hoe \ pasoat, pimuoat, 
papasoat, ipasoatta, ipasoat, inipasoai, i/iotfa- 
soat, to cause such to be done. 

8iixninoe8, sinummoes, sasummoes, to g^w, to 
increase, to become g^at; pasoes, pinasoes, 
papasoes, ipasoesa, ipasoes, inipasoes, to cause to 
grow, 

Buxninogo, si, sa, imp. sogoa, to bind two 
ends, as of string, rattan, etc., one over the 
other, and thus to lengthen ; pasogo, trans. 

Bummokad, sinummokad, sasummokad^ s^ad- 
da, sokaiiden, sinokad, inosokaJden, to push or 
kick with the foot ; pasokad, pinasokad, papaso- 
kad, ipasokadda, etc., to cause such to be 
done. 

lummokar, sinummokar, sasummokar (let the 
be scarcely heard), isokarra, isokar^ inisokar^ 
inoisokar, to push away from one, also to 
drive on people and urge them to do that 
which they are not disposed to ; summaloso^ si, 
sa, salosoa, salosoan, stnalosoan, inosalasoam^ to 
drive on and urge ; pasaloso, etc. ; sumsntkar o 
chau, to stir up the Are \ pasokar, pituuokar^ 
papasokar, ipasokarra, ipasokar, tmpasokar^ 
inoipasokar, to cause such to be done. 

Buxninokko, sinummokko, sasummokko, sokkoa^ 
sokkoon, sinokko, inosokkoon, to push or thrust 
any one with a stick, poker, sword, etc., also 
to point with the finger ; pasokko, pi, pa, ipasak- 
koa, ipasokko, etc., to cause to be pushed. 

BummokkOBOkko, sinummokkosokko, sasummok* 
kosokko, sokkosokkoa, sokkosokkoon, sinokkosokkoom^ 
inosokkosokkoon, to push frequently as above; 
summokkosokko no zjdo, to chum ; pojokkosokko, 
iftipasokkosokko, inoipasokkosokko, to cause such 
to be done. 

Bammolocb, sinummoloch, sasummdock^ the 
threatening drawing together of the clouds 
over the hills when the eastern quarter is set in 
for rain and thunder, as frequently in the 
south-east monsoon, takes place towants even- 
ing ^ pasoloc/i, pinasoloch, papas(doch, ipasolocJtia, 
ipasoloc/t, to occasion such. 

Bummook, sitmmmook, sasummook, soka, sokest, 
sinook, inosoken, to kick with the foot behind j 
pasook, pi, pa, ipasoka, etc., to cause such to be 
done. 

BummooBO, sinummooso, sasummooso, soossoa^ 
soossoon, sinoosso, inosoossoon, to follow up, to 
(race ; pa-oosso, piftasoosso, p<tpasoosso,ipasoossoa^ 
ipasoosso, to cause to be followed up. 

Bammopat, sinummopat, sasummopat, sopatta, 
sopatten, sinopat, inosopatten, to be over against, 
to do anything in op|)osition \ pasoput^ pinasQ- 




Vocabulary 



187 



pat^ papoiopaty etc., to cause such to be done ; 
sasopatf over against ; this word is joined with 
karri and mau^ as karrisajopat^ and means 
to be over against each other ; thus, karrtsaso- 
pat patodofiy to live opposite to each other; 
summapat meroos pattite, to sit or speak one 
over against the other. 

lummopisop, jinummopisopf sasummophop, 
jopisoppa, sopisoppen, sinopisop, to stroke or 
smooth with the hand, also to level; see 
mojopisop'y pasopisoPf pi^ pa^ ipasoppisoppa^ 
ipasophop, impasophopf to cause to be stroked. 

smnmoppo, //, sa, juppoa, to put up in heaps, 
as is done with the paddy after it is cut down 
in the field ; pasupfo^ to cause such to be done. 
suppOy a heap of com, such as is seen in the 
fields in the time of harvest. 

fommoBa, sinummosa^ sasummosa, sosasosanni 
and sosaijan, inososanm and sinojosaijan, inoso- 
sanni and inososaijan, to dwell, to inhabit ; 
pasosa, pi, pa, tpasosa, etc., to cause to 
inhabit. 

BommoBO, sinummoso, sasummoso, sosoo, sosoon, 
sinoso, to roast ; pasoso, pi, pa, ipatosoa, to 
cause to be roasted ; sasoan and sojosoaijan, a 
roaster or spit with which people roast. 

lummot, sinummot, sasummot, jotia, sotten, 
sinot, inosotten, to point towards, either with 
the finger, or musket, arrow, sword, etc. ; 
pasot, pirtasot, papasot, etc., to cause such to 
be done. 

Bumpo, sinumpo, sasumpo, suppoa, suppoan, 
iienpon, inosuppoan, to help, to lend a hand in 
any work, as moUiol ; pasuppo, pi, pa, ipasuppoa, 
ipasuppo, etc., to cause such to be done. 

ta, a particle prefixed to all proper names of 
men, as Ta Cahba, Ta Bai, etc. 

ta, territory, land, or dwelling-place, the 
conunon road or street, the ground ; ta-os ata, 
the earth ; ta baxiep, a garden. 

ta-aka-idas, a half moon, the last quarter of 
the moon. 

taamen rapiCB (lit. a bad begging), tsi, tat, 
imp. taamen rapisa, pass, taamen rapies, 
tsinaamen rapies, inotaamen rapies, to beg, 
to demand anything without shame, nom. ; ma- 
ataamen rapies, a beggar. 

taan, a snare, for catching wild beasts. 

tabba, a native chopper; fr. tummabba. 

tabboen, full-^rown, adult. 

tabboeron, a family spnmg from one stock, 
relations. 

tabillo, a bagpipe or trumpet. 

tabo, a large gourd. 



tabtab, a place where no water settles when 
it rains ; matabtab, the verb. 

tach, moisture, sap; tach sddo, milk; fr. 
matach, 

tacb-anaB, shrimps that are taken in fresh 
water ; also teor, a large kind ; rauno, a small 
kind of shrimps which are found in salt water $ 
auan, very small shrimps. 

tadaoh, heat ; fr. matadach, 

taddachal, an instrument with which people 
pull down earth. 

taddal, a sole, a sort of fish. 

taddakal, a head band, such as the women 
wear. 

taddarieB, a lock ; fr. dummaries, 

taddin, the shoulder-bbide. 

taddogon, the upper part of a man or beast. 

taddorrodanron, a looking-glass. 

ta^^ga, blood ; fr. matagga, 

taggaigar, a cable ; fr. takkar and arrat, a 
rope ; see takkar and kummargar. 

taggaoBaBan, certain cross bamboos placed 
above the entrance of the door of a house, on 
the inside. 

taggoggaoh, a vein ; compounded of tagga 
and oggach, 

taggogon, xinaggogoftf tataggogon, to thirst ; 
Pataggogan, pinataggogan, papaiaggogan, ipa- 
ta^ogannOy to cause to thirst ; toggogon, nom. 
thirst. 

tairien, a kind of beads, much esteemed by 
the natives. 

taitai, a firefly ; also written turriturri. 

takkar, an anchor, a post to which people 
moor a boat at a ferry. 

takkeeln, a dwarf. 

talcho, exceeding, excellent, as tale/io ma- 
barra, taUho matadach^ exceedingly strong, 
uncommonly hot. 

talohoach-o, one who excels or surpasses in 
might, wealth, beauty, etc. 

talla, what ? with indignation ; talla sum- 
mara imonos F what ? do you lie on rags ? 

talla no adda, a grain of rice. 

talla noeno, the brain pan ; written taJlao- 
n-oeno. 

tallapiech, a large dart. 

tallaB, a potsherd. 

tallili, sorrel. 

iallipallipan, the temples of the head. 

tallochon, continual perseverance ; tallackoH 
sisa, the whole day ; taUachon man, micham, maba- 
bat, to be constantly eating, drinking, going, etc 

taniaian, the Spanish pox. 

tannnlmm^, potatoes. 




i88 



Favorlang 



tammoeB, cnimbs, fragments, 
tammoesan, crumbled, 
tannaas, a particle of admiration, as ah I see 
that. 

tapach-a, a pair of breeches, 
taparri-parri, Takeis, a cart ; go-or or geor j 
tatearrau loan, the poles of a cart ; asasau loan, 
the yoke. 
tapes, all. 

tappoeBan, a honey bee. 
tar, all kinds of pollution, as fr. jnot, grease, 
etc. 
tarlboan, a rainbow. 

tarra, a thomback, of which there are two 
sorts ) tarra boetsina, a thomback j tarra paga 
aubaas, a fish somewhat resembling the shark, 
with a broad blotch on the nose, 
tarrabeoan, or tarraboafi, a rainbow. 
tarra ie rain, ///, tat, the trickling of the 
eyes ; patarra4e-ra-ien, trans. 

tarrakal, a small hut, standing high, in 
which the natives frequently sleep, such as are 
beside their houses or in the fields. 

tarran, a way ^ mitaronC o taran, two roads 
that meet together ; rariedda taran, a way that 
divides into two. 

tarran, tsinarran, inotarran, and arriban, 
inarriban, inoarriban and ribajen, rimbaijen, 
inoribaijen, seems to mean loathsome or hurt- 
ful; thus people speak of unwholesome food, 
arriban o mamacha ja micho, possibly because 
it is injurious or deadly, but these words 
require to be more carefully examined, 
tarrar, as tabtab ; verb matarrar, 
tarrara, a spider. 
tarraras, purslain, a plant, 
tarraras, pot-herbs, 
tarren, anything defiled with tar. 
tarrer, a kind of fish, 
tarrlbat, the obliquity of a thing, 
tarrogorogb, a fish, the kalkop. 
tassaban, zifiassaba», hiotassahan, to himgcr j 
patassaban^ pinatassaba», papatassaban^ ipatas- 
sabanna, to cause to hunger; nom. tassaban^ 
hunger. 

tassinan, tsinassinan, inotasslnan, tassio-a, to 
do anything for any one ; hiatassinan ja rum- 
mo7U-dau tamaUy I will pay for my father ; in 
the second and third person people do not say 
taisinany but tassi \ it is necessary that this word 
be examined ; it is to be written tas-ina^ just as 
iLiu-ina, for me ; so also tasi-je, for you ; tas- 
ichoy fur him ; pntt. tsifias, fut. inosas, imp. tas 
ioa, sa-a tasjoa hta, take my place. 

», that which is new and untried, is 



said of all implements that people are accus- 
tomed to use, as clothes, cups, dishes, etc. 

tasao (the o short), long, is onty used of 
lifeless things. 

tasao, a particle wherewith people in<juire 
after any place, 2£dema tassone Doubme? whither 
does Daubale leaH to t tassorto don o Baisjekan i 
whereabouts are the houses of Batsjekan i dema 
tassono Taijoan ? which is the way to Taijoan ? 
tassono aisi, that way. 

tataam, an answer ; fr. ttunmaam. 

tataap, all kinds of implements that people 
use for house building^ or agriculture. 

tatabbis, or boe-tsina, a fan. 

tatapannabonna, arable land. 

tatas, a ^thom. 

tatkach, the ropes wherewith the deer are 
encircled in hunting. 

tatkachannabonna, hunting ground. 

tatintin, weight. 

tatsaar, splendour. 

tatsibaul, and a-obog, both words of reserve, 
when people do not dare to mention scandalous 
persons. 

tatsira, the tongue. 

tatta, a rice-stamper ; fr. tummatta, 

tattabaoh, the first, the principal; tumma- 
bach, and matattabacA, verb, to be the first. 

tattabba, instrument for stabbing, as a sword, 
knite, etc. 

tattabbak, a dance, also the trampling of 
those who are about to fight 

tattabbi, a bed on which to sow anything, 
as in a garden, or a cultivated spot of ground 
a little elevated. 

tattachil, fr. tummachU, 

tattacbum, a cap ; fr. tummachunL 

tattagga, the jaw-bones. 

tattaggoch, an instniment to draw with. 

tattakal, riblxin, the head-band of women. 

tattakka, a stanchion, fr. tumka, 

tattakkis, anything to stitch with. 

tattakob, a covering, a pavilion, a cord. 

tattakor, a staff. 

tattallas, that with which people tread, as 
the feet ; fr. tummalas. 

tattallatala, that wherewith we compose any 
one ; fr. tummalnttala. 

tattullo, a bait ; fr. tummallo. 

tattallumtum, that wherewith people cover 
themselves in order to perspire freely ; fr. /Mt- 
tmiUumtum. 

tattannanno o parara, a window, 
tatta numma ? how do I know ? 
tattas kokko, the comb, etc., of cocka 




Vocabulary 



189 



tattomman bisa loan, the shaft of an 
arrow or pike. 

taUarody a beholdinc;. 

tattaa, a cock^s comb. 

taltalmln, a step ; fr. tummasm, 

tattanraija, a frightening. 

tatta, a fish-hook ; fr. tumme. 

laUaar, a stanchion ; fr. tummear, 

tatto lellnm riba, a shirt or coat. 

taltippl, the sting of anything that stings 
with the tail. 

tatlOy that wherewith people kindle. 

tailooliy a number j nuuanno aitoch? what 
number } fr. tummoch, 

taUolUUa, a spark \ fr. tummolilUs. 

tattoUo, see tattuUo below. 

tatUmiioi, the end where anything is broken 
off or torn, but especially pro extremitate 
membri virilis id quod est inhonestum. 

tattoob, an instrument wherewith to sprinkle 
water ; fr. tummoob, 

tatUH>obe, the fore-finger. 

tatto roog, the brain. 

tattoos, a plane ; fr. tummoos. 

tatto telp, a key $ tatto chirrap^ a tooth- 
pick ; fr. tum^, 

tattopooh, earrings. 

tattopooh, the ornaments worn in the 
ears. 

tattorrlk, tattose, and tattosik, a lie j fr. turn- 
morik, tummosff etc. 

tattorrodauron, a looking-glass. 

tattoirodon, a copy, an example. 

tattottoan, an anvil (native, a hard stone) ; 
fr. tumtnotto, 

tattngga, an instrument for cutting. 

tattollo, a candle ; fr. tummoUo. 

tattaltail, a bundle of straw or weeds, with 
which to drive away mosquitoes. 

tattmnmauka, see tummauka, 

tattapi>a, thought, memory. 

tattappnk, a number reckoned beforehand ; 
fr. tumpuch, 

tan, the hair of the head. 

taugo, a sort of fruit conically shaped. 

tanrok, a kind of vegetable which is cooked 
with the food. 

tautaiillien, the little finger. 

tas-1, a kite. 

tas-imo, all sorts of prepared food, whether 
fish or flesh. 

tai-lno, the beak of birds. 

tai-ipok, a pencil to paint with ; tax-ipok 
hUOf a pen. 

tailna, the tongue. 



taiirrisan, a pin or peg, on which to hang 
anything. 

tea, an arm. 

tebabon, a duck. 

tees, the pole or the upper part of the 
forehead. 

telp, a chest. 

te-o, a stork. 

teor, prawns. 

te-te, a stalk, to which the fruit is attached, 
whether standing in the field or already reaped. 

teten is said of those who strike every one ; 
eirrekeftf idem ; written teteen, 

tillablen, a sort of fish called stone bream. 

tilli, a badger. 

tlllik, blindness of one eye, so that the white 
of the eye cannot be seen, for then it is tolUu, 

tilllkken, one who is blind of one eye, this is 
the pres. from tummiUik, 

tlnnaam, before, with respect to place ; talla 
summada zinoe, ka oa^ tinnaam aiy what do you 
seek, it lies there before you ; matatin/taah, mi, 
ma, forwards ; patatinnaam, trans. 

tlppo, persons bom on same day; baddoa, 
and battan, ditto. 

to, water. 

to abbas, sea water. 

to-ak, a kind of bird. 

toch, a number, and tattoch, a numbering. 

toohab, a hole, a door, a window j fr. turn- 
mochab, tattocAab, an opening. 

toohab not, the nostrils. 

to cha-ocb, well water. 

tocborocben, xinochorochen, taiochorochen, to 
be set a-coughing. 

togea, marrow. 

togea, a snipe. 

to-1, a splinter. 

tok, a calm } fr. pattok, 

tokkilli, jingles worn by young men. 

toUalis, a spark. 

toUas, blinaness of one eye, but so that the 
white can be seen. 

tomma? who? 

tomo, pimples, like small warts. 

tomoon, full of pimples. 

tonso, a Chinese word (?) meaning Father- 
land. 

to-o, a sea-hom. 

to-obabat, an overgrown man. 

to oetas, rain water. 

tooma, /J/, tat, imp. ta-a, pass, ta-an, tsina, 
inota-an, the residing of a list ; pata-a, trans, 
nom. tattaa, the reading aloud j and nutMtttata- 
a, one who reads the roll. 




ipo 



Favorlang 



toop, the side. 

to-or, a lattice, a grating. 

toppi, a sort of reed, of which men make 
arrows. 

torritorrl, a firefly, as tai-tm, 

torro, we, us, but differs from namo, 

to Babba, river water. 

tosarrl, a sort of flute. 

toaarrl o a gorro, the same sort of flute, 
very long. 

tos-afljlen, //i, tat, tosasjiena, pass, tosasjienen, 
tsinosasjien, etc., to have the toothache; tos- 
asji, the toothache j toj-ojsi, a hollow tooth. 

totto, the heart. 

totton, the top or upper part of anything ; 
totton oeno, the crown ot the head. 

tretre, an animal named from its song. 

tsi, fish ; tji baUaiy all sorts of small fish, cat- 
fish J tsi sabbi, carp ; tsi meried, eels ; /// 
maarat, shell-flsh ; tsi rodo, cod ; /// tarra boet- 
sina, a roach ; tsi tarra paga oubaas, a sword- 
flsh ; tsi talus f a sand-creeper ; /// rocot, a 
smelt ; /// teen, a flsh that has scales like the 
carp, but smaller j /// kabea, almost like the 
teen, but smaller \ tsi tadJai, a sole ; tsi iaiUa- 
dach, a Chinese flsh, full of bones ) tsi tiUabis, 
a bream ; /// pausosan, a broad flsh, with a 
sharp nose, transparent and soft; tsi abaas, a 
shark ; tsi oar, almost like a shell-flsh ; tsi o 
bioog, a kind of sprat. 

tela, a needle, a pin. 

tslbaragoan, tsigan, or itorra, a large fleld 
lizard j tsikarra, smaller ditto, with a long 
tail ; tsipoUopoUul, a spotted house lizard. 

tslmiaima, tsini, tat si, tsianna, etc.; see in 
ximianna, to be distrustful. 

tsiznlbaraBabasa, tsi, tatsi, tsibarasabasaa, to 
aim at directly, as tsimisi. 

taimijk, tsini, tatsi, itsijka, itsijk, initsijk, ino- 
itsijk, to flllip, to make a point, thus [.] ; nom. 
tattsik, a tittle, a point ; see zi/niei, under tum- 
mesik, ditto. 

taimUtaJles, tsini, tatsi, tsijtsijsa, to cut off 
the joint of wood or bamboo. 

tirimlliak, tsini, tatsi, etc., see under in i. 

tsimikl, tsini, tatsi, tsikia, to leer, to look 
askance ; patsick, trans., tatsiki, nom. ma-atat- 
siki. 

tsimlmlB, tsini, tatsi, tsimisa, tsimisan, tsini- 
misan, inotsimisan, to take some food, to taste -, 
paksimi, to cause such to be done. 

Uimipl aiep, ///', tat, tsipisiepa, pass, tsipisie- 
pen, tsimipsiep, inotsitsiepen, to suck (but not 
the breast), as a finger, tobacco pipe, etc., pat- 
siptsiep, trans.; tatsiptsiep, a sucking; ma- 



atatsiptsiep, a sucker; tsiptsiepan, that of 
which men suck, as a tobacco pipe, etc 

tslmiBakai, see zimisakal, 

taimlBi, see zimisi, tatsisi, nom. 

tslniko, tsi, tats, tsikoa, pass, tsikoasi, tsimko^ 
inotsikoon, to right a house that hangs over \ 
patsiko, trans, nom. 

talo-taio, a clock or bell. 

taipan, west; matatsip, mi, ma, westerly; 
patatsip, trans. 

tnllala, a flower ; tuUala orasan, a violet 

tumbar, tsinumbar, tatumbar, tubarra, tu- 
barren, tsienbar, inotubbarren, to set oneself 
down fast as those who do fear being pushed 
away ; patubbar, pinatubbar, etc., to cause such 
to be done. 

tomboel, tsinumboel, tatumboel, tubboela, tub- 
boeien, tsienboel, inotubboelen, to seek any one ; 
patubboel, pinatubboel, papatubboel, ipatubboeia, 
ipatubboel, etc., to cause to be sought; taiulh- 
boel, nom., hence kar tattubboel, mau tattubboei, 
to seek one another. 

tumcho, tsinumcho, tatumcho, tuchoa f let the 
u be scarcely heard), tuchoan, tsimicAo, imo^ 
tuchoon, to bow; patucko, pi, pa, ipaiuckoa, 
to cause to bow. 

tumohoa, ///, tat, tochoa, the commencement 
of the north monsoon ; tumchoa masoam, ud 
don ja dalli, mameroosja badda, i.e. the northern 
monsoon approaches, the swallow returns to her 
house, and tne young men think of marrying. 

tomka, tsi, tat, tukka, etc. (let the u be 
scarcely heard), to support, to prop up ; patukka, 
pi, pa, ipatukka, etc, to cause to support ; tai- 
tukka, nom. a prop. 

tumkach, vunumkach, tatumkach, tukkacka, 
tukkac/ien, Tuenkach, inotukkachen, to hunt deer 
by concealing oneself in the holes and behind 
the hedges ; patukkach, pinatukkack, papatuk- 
kach, etc., to cause to hunt. 

tummaam, xinufnnuuun, tatummaam, tamo, 
tatnen, xinaam, inotamen, to answer; pataasm, 
pinataam, papataam, ipatama, etc., to cause to 
answer. 

tummaap, tsinummaap, tatummaab, tapa, 
tapen, tsinaap, inotopen, to do all kinds of 
work, either in the house or the fleld ; also to 
attack, to fall upon ; tsinaap, husbandry, etc. ; 
pass. pret. tataap, work, labour; ma-atataap, 
a worker, a labourer. 

tummaas, xinummaas, tatummaas, tasataum, 
zinasan, inotasan, to begin to do anythine firsts 
to be followed by another; pataas, pt, pa, 
ipatasa, ipataas, inipataas, to cause to begin, 
etc. 




Vocabulary 



191 



iiy tatf imp. tabachay pass. 
tabacAen, tsinabach^ tnotabachen^ to do any- 
thing first; see also ntatattabach \ patabachy 
trans, to cause to be done ; tattabachf nom. a 
commencement. 

tnnuiuibba, xinummabboy tatumm/ibba, tabba, 
tabbaofty zitiabba, inotabbaart, to stick ; patabba^ 
pinatabba, papatabba, iptitabba^ etc., to cause 
to fdck. 

tmnniabtek, zinummabbaky tatummabbakf 
tabakka^ tabakken^ zinabakkan, inotabakkivt, 
to dance, also the swaggering of those who 
fight, or who wish to fight; patabbaky pina- 
tabbak, papatabbak, etc, to cause such to be 
done. 

tnmmablils, zinummabbis, tatummabbis, tab- 
bisa, tabbisanf ztnabbisan, inotabbisany to fan ; 
patabbir, pinatabbisy papatabbUy ipatabbisa, 
ipatabbisy tmpatabbis^ inotpaiabblt, to cause to 
tan. 

tmnmaclial, zinummac/tal, tatummac/tal, 
tachalloy tachalleny vdnachaly inotachaUeny to 
remove the earth, as with a hoe, a spade, etc. ; 
it is changed into ^, see dummachal j padachaly 
pinadachal^ papadachaly etc, to cause to be 
dug up. 

tnnimaeb-il, sdnummach-ily tatummach-ily 
tach-illa, tach-iUeny to win, to win a bet; 
patack'ily pinatack'ily p€tpatach-ily ipatacA-ilia, 
ipatacA-Uf inoipatach-Uy to cause such to be 
done. 

tmninaoh-o, ///, tat^ tack-oa, same as pavdn- 
ado ; mautadach'Oy idem \patachOy nom. tattachoy 
interpretation, intercession ; ma-ataitacho^ an 
interpreter, an interceder. 

inmmaoh-os, ///, tat^ tachossan^ tsinachossaHy 
inotachossanf grass, etc., to cut off; patachosy 
also chummoschos, 

inmmaohiim, zinummachumy tatummachumy 
tackummay tachummany zsnacAummaft, ino^ 
tachummaHy to put on one*s hat, to cover 
one^s head ; paiachuniy pinatachuMy papatachumy 
ipatachummay etc., to cause the hat to be put 
on ; tattachumy the thing put on ^namely, the 
hat) ; tummakkumy tsiy taty imp. iakitmmay part. 
takkumman, etc., means all kinds of covering. 

tnmmagclia, tsinummagchay iatummagchay 
tagchay tagchaatiy zinagckay inotagchaany to 
chop, to hack, to hew; patatagchay piy pay 
ipatagchay inipatagchay to cause to be clu)p|)ed. 

tmnmagclio, zJnummagc/tOy tatummagcMoy 
tagchoy to overhang, not to stand upright ; 
it is sometimes changed into </, which see; 
padagchoy pinadagchoy dagchoa^ d^tkoMy 
zinagchoy inodagchoony to cause to ovtrbang| 



in which case it is ipadagckoay ipadagck$^ 
etc. 

tammagehocli, zimimmagchochy tatummag- 
chochy tagchochay tagchocheny sdnagchochy cm- 
tagchockefiy to scoop ; tummagchoch bigeMOy 
to skim, to scoop off the froth; patagcfnchy 
pinatagchochy papatagchocky ipatagchochoy im- 
patagchochy to cause to scoop ; tummagchoch 
to/to malloy to lade water with a bucket 

tnmmalha, tsiy taty taibay to do anything 
together or in company ; pataiboy etc, to 
cause such to be done ; hence comes attrri a 
teibay that is the drink-money eiven when 
people work together, as if they said aurUdda a 
teibay so that this noun seems to come from 
moriedda and tummaibay joined together : for 
they say also, moriidda tmba^ and maribai § 
taibay to leave off, to cease such working 
together. 

iommales, zinummaiesy tatummaies, taisay 
taisarty zimdsaMy inotaisany to climb up; turn- 
maies i kittasy to climb up a ladder; iataiesy 
fnnatmesy papaimiSy ipatauay ipataUsy impataUs^ 
inmpataiesy to cause to climb. 

tummalfl, zimmmmakaly tatummakaly takaUay 
takaUofiy zinakallany inotakalUoiy to put on a 
woman *s head-band ; patakaly puiatakaly papa- 
takaly ipatakallay etc, to cause such to be done ; 
written dummakai, 

tommakai, sdnummakasy tatummakaiy takassa^ 
takajsany inotakassamy to stop any one in the 
road, or to turn him out of the way ; tatakasy 
pinatakaSy papatakasy ipatakassay ipaUuaSy etc., 
to cause such to be done. 

tunmuLkkU, zimtnuMakkisy tatummakkisy tak- 
jay taksetiy suMaksafiy ittotaksaMy to stick to- 
gether and make one ; patakisy /«, pay ipataksay 
tpatakkisy etc., to cause such to be done. 

tmnmakkoob, zimummakkoob, tatntnmakkoob^ 
takkoba, takkoboMy zimakkobioiy imtakkobafiy to 
cover, to cover entirely ; tmmmakkoob macka^ 
to blind the eyes ; patakkooby piy pay ipa-^ 
ipatakkobay etc, to cause to be covered, also 
to cover with a rug. 

imnmala, ztmanmaloy tatummalay taiataUnty 
sdnaUty inoiaUuiy to find, to welcome; patala^ 
pinataUiy papaialay ipataioy etc, to cause such 
to be done. 

tammalaa, sdnummaUuy tattimmalasy talassa^ 
talasseny zitudassemy imtallassemy to tread under 
foot I patailasy pinataOofy papataUaSy ipataiUusa^ 
ipatauuy etc, to cause such to be done. 

tummalattala, seimimmaiattaiay taiummalai^ 

taliaitalaHf to padfy, to stilly to calm all torti 



of emotioni } palidalltda, ^nalalalltda, fafa- 
■•■■•-■ je ,uch to be done. 

lo/izi, tatummaUa, lalixie. 



Favorlang 



tmnmallsl, zi 



iitolalixian, 

paltiHxi, janalalixi, papatalixi, ipatalixJa, etc., 
to cause to dance ; lometimei the ( is changed 
into J, ue dammalixi. 

tnmmallo, xiaummallo, tatuiamaUa, lallaa, 
lalloen, xiaaUaon, hulnUaon, to allure, to baitj 
patalle, finalalle, fapatatlB, etc., to cause (o 

tnininallnmtimi, xinummtdlumlam, talum- 
maUiuntum, laltunUumma, laUumlumnua, xinal- 
lumtuM, inolailimiluM, to cover up oneielf or 
another in order to produce penpiration ; 
patallumlum, pi, fa, ipatailiimtiimiHa, etc. 

tnmmalpon, xJnuavnalpon, talttmmalpen, 
lalpeaiia, lalpannau, xinalpaanan, inelalfannan, 
to betake oneself anywhere, or set forward, 
also to stir oneself up, and exert one's strength ; 
patalpoH, pi, pn, ipalalpmna, ipalalpan, etc., to 
cause such to be done. 



, imlammeoi, lueilam- 
rneei, to crumble, to shred ; palammoatf pi, pa, 
ipalaatMBsa, ipalammoos, etc., to cause such to 
be done j lammaminiiei meajis to stick anything 
in the mouth. 

na, laiumnmnaa, iaana, 



oija, (hachap o dniae, open the 
house ; pataima, pi, pa, ipalanna, etc., to cause 
to open ; taltamianiia e parara, an opening to 
let in light, that is, a window. 

tnmmai), «itmmiiiai>, talumtiuiQ, laaa, laean, 
sdaaomi, iaelaoan, to sprinkle as with water, 
salt, thin mud, etc., but to cover with wood, 
stone, and other things that do not spread, is 
HU^a; the thing wherewith the sprinlcling or 
covering is made, ilaonn, inilaoen, iHeitaoen ; 
/•alao, pnatM, papalaa, ipalaaa, ipalae, iaipalae, 
etc., to cause such to be done. 

tnmnupaolw, xJnummapacAa, talaminapaeAa, 
lapacha, tapachanid and tapachaiyan, Sana- 
pachanid and sUnapaciajian, inotapac/iauni and 
inotapachafaa, to put on one's breeches; pala- 
paclm, pi, pa, etc, to cause such to be done, 

tummapal, lii, tat, tapalla, tapaltan, tiinapal, 
inolapaUaii, to stumble in the way ; patapal, 
trans, nom. laltapal. 

taaaaiploa,Kt>iuninuipiei,laiummttpiei,lapisa, 
It^iita, einapies, inelapiiin, to beat with a stick, 
■s people do their clothes, in order to knock 



tummaplUtplM, Kinumniapitapiii, 
fitapiti, tafilapiia, lapitapijen, Kimapitapitt, 
inelapitapiitH, to beat frith many stroke* \ 
patapil^ri, pi, pa, etc, to cause such to be 



inslaraa, to choose anything lint, as tumnuir' • 

cut down a field, to choose a lady j palara, 
trans, talara, a choice { hence karri talta-a, 
man lalta-a, to choose one another. 

tmnmanul, xinunanarad, lalummarad, 
laradda, taraJdtn, xinarad, imtaradJm, to 
gather up what another has scattered, as rice 
thrown over the floor ; palarad, pi, pa, 
ipataradda, ipalarad, etc., to cause such to be 

tnnunaruiiar, tii, tat, tamaramoTTa, lamam- 
marren, liinaraKUtr, iiiQtaraBuaTtn, to be bere 
and there, separated from one another, tome 
here and some there ; falaranutr, tnuii, aucfa 
a scattering. 

ttuumaratrml, iii, tat, taralraUa, t 
iits, and other little thing 
n bimmitidBic ; parakal, ttint. 

pa, ipatar 

tmnmarantan, same ai di 
raulau, fi, pa, s 

any one in his way j palariii, trans, j tummantt 
axiei, to intercept the enemy; nom. lattariei, 
an intercepting) ma-ataltariti, a hard runner 
who overtakes another. 

tnmmarofgl, sJituniiiiar^igi, . 

lan^a, larvggian, aiaartggiam, 

to change thin^ which are so much alike that 
ihev can be easilv mistaken one for the otber, 
and this with intent to deceive ; palartggi, 
pinatarsggi, papataroggi, ipatanggia, etc, to 
cause such to be done. 

tninnwioiDma, tii, tat, tanmiaoK, taMonm- 
man, iaolarammaa, to betray ; falaramma, traiu. 
laiiaremma, tieachety ; hence kani-tattanmma, 
maa-tatlaromimt, to deceive one another; atis- 



tarreba, tarreiaK, i 
cover as \Kov\t do the head with a fan, to 
protect them from sun or rain, thus not entirely 
covered, or to cover with a me or tuch lik^ 
in which itdiffen from iHmmakhtti ptOarrttk, 
fi, fa, ipalarroba, etc., to cause to cover. 

ttUBinuiOl, lii, ttU, imp. tmvia, to pick 
anything bete and there, Just aa pMpk 





Vocabulary 



^93 



pluck the ripe ears in a field ; patarros, 
trans. 

tnmsiassal, zimtmmassal, tatummassaly tas- 
saUa, tassaUen^ zimujal, inotassaUen, to catch 
at once, to apprehend j patojsal^ pi, pa, 
ipatassallay etc., to cause such to be done; 
tattasaif nom. 

tomxnajiiin, xinummassirtf tatumrfuusitif tas- 
dtuiy tassin, ximusin, inotmsin, to entertain 
any one \ patassin, pi, pa, ipatassin, impatassina, 
inmpaUusin, to cause such to be done \ tattassin, 
an expectation, hope. 

tnmmatas, sdnummatas, tatummatas, tatasa, 
iaiasan, zinatat, inotatasan, to fathom ; patatas, 
pi, pa, ipatatasa, etc, to cause to be fathomed ; 
iotas, a fathom. 

tnmmatta, zinummatta, tatummatta, tatta, 
tattan, zinattan, inotattan, to stamp seed out of 
the husk ; patatta, pi, pa, ipaiatta, impatatta, 
inmpatatta, to cause to be stamped out ; tatta, 
a rice stamper. 

tnmmattal, vdmunmattal, tatummattal, tattal- 
lau, zi/iattal, imtattaUan, to trample with the 
feet ; paiattal, pinatattal, papatattal, ipatattaUa, 
ipatattai, impatattal, etc, to cause such to 
done. 

tommattam, sdnummattam, tatummattam, 
tattamma, tattammen, xinattam, inotattamnun, 
to hold fast ; patattam, pi, pa, ipatattamma, 
ipatattam, etc., to cause to hold East 

tomman-aat), zinummau-aab, tatummau-aab, 
tauba and taumasan, tauban and taumasan, 
tsinauaban and tsinaumasan, inotauban and 
imtaumasan, to do anything first or before 
another, whether drinking, speaking, or tasdng ; 
paUm-aab, pi, pa, ipaiauaba, ipaiau-aab, etc., 
to cause such to be done, as mananat ; tattau- 
aab, or tau-aab, nom. subst., is used adverbially 
as before. 

tamnianlni, zimtmrnauka, tatummauka, tauka, 
taukoH, zirumkoy inotaukan, to do anything 
over again; patauka, pinatauka, papatauka, 
ipatauka, inipatauka, inmpatauka, to cause such 
to be done ; tummaukauka, zi, ta, to increase ; 
tummauka, trans. ; pataukauka, etc., as patauka, 

tommanla, same as tummauka '^ pataula, 
same as patauka ^ gummalich, idem., nom. 
gagaBch ; pagaUich, idem, nom. gagallich. 

tn mmM}hn}n MHummauiauia,tatummauiaulay 
taulaula, zinaulaula, inotaulaulan, to do any- 
thing very often; same as tummaukauka \ 
patmdaula,pi, pa, etc., as pataukauka, to cause 
anything; to be done frequently 5 gummalU' 
gaUtch, idem ; pagalUgalUch, idem. 

tiuniiiaiiiiiany ^mmmaumasa^ tatummau- 



masa, taumasa, taumasamn and taumasaj^an, 
zinaumasanftt and sdnaumasayan, same as 
matiftnaam ; fataumasa, pi, pa, ipataumasa, 
impataumaja,tfioipataumaja, same sapatimtaam. 

tommaxoMyK, zimtmmaura^a, tatummauraja, 
tauraya, taurayan, zinaurayan, inotaurayan, to 
put into a fright; patauraya, pi, pa, ipatauraya, 
tfiipatauraya, inoipatauraya, to cause to be 
afraid. 

tnxnme, tsimtmme, tatumme, tea, teen, tene, 
inoteen, to angle ; pate, pinate, papate, ipatea, 
ipate, inipate, inoipate, to cause thus to fish; 
iatte, nom. 

tommea, tsinummea, tatummea, ie-a, te-aan, 
tene-a, inote-aan, to punish ; patea, pinatea, pa- 
patea, ipate-a, inipate-a, iwnpatea, to cause such 
to be done ; tattea, nom. that wherewith 
people punish, or the punishment itself. 

iammean, tsi, tat, tsamna, tsean, tsinean, iruh 
tean, same as tummmba^ patsan, trans., team, 
nom. 

tnmmear, tsimunmear, tatummear, ettear, in- 
etear, inoetear, to draw forth, to drag along ; 
patear, pinatear, papatear, ipatearra, ipatearen, 
inipatear, inmpaiear, to cause to be dragged ; 
tattear, nom. a drawine forth ; this word is 
also applied to the poles of a cart, between 
which an ox is fastened in order to draw it. 

tnmmear, tsinummear, tatummear, tearra, 
tearren, tsinear, imfiearren, to support, to prop 
up ; patear, pinatear, papatear, tpatearra, ipa- 
tear, inipatear, inoipatear, to cause such to be 
done ; tattear, a prop. 

tnmmeer, zinummeer, tatummeer, tera, terin, 
zjneer, or tineer, inoterin, to avoid, toi shun 
either a stab or a blow : pateer, pinateer, papa- 
teer, ipatera, ipateer, impateer, imteer, to cause 
to avoid. 

tommenon, zinummenon, tatummemm, tinmma, 
tinnonnen, tdmnnon, inotonuomten, also timnanmm^ 
sdninnonnan, inotinuomum, to weave ; paHunon, 
pi, pa, ipatinnonna, ipatimton, impatimnn, ina- 
ipatinnon, to cause to weave. 

tnmmepar, zinummepar, tatummepar, teparra^ 
teparran, zineparran^ inoteparran, to lean on 
anything with the hand or arm ; paiepar, pina- 
tepar,pa, ipateparra, ipatepar, impatepar, iuo- 
ipatepar, to cause to lean. 

tnmmerap, zinummerap, tatummerap, ter^ 
appa, terappen, zinerap, tnotentffen, to lick ; 
paterap, pinaterap, pafaterap, inoipaterap, to 
cause to lick. 

tommlUa, zinummitta^ taturnmOa, itiUa-a, 
imtilla, inoitiUa, to set in, to print in, to stick 
in, at people pierce a deer with a spear, or to 



2B 




194 

imprint, as people press a seal on wax, while 
the impression is expressed by the pass. pret. of 
the verb initiila, that is, that which is impressed, 
it means also to cook food for children ; fa- 
iUUif tinatilla^ papatUla^ ipatiUa^ inipatiUa^ iwh 
ipatiUay to cause an impression to be made. 

tummlllak, xinummtUak, taiummU/ak, tUlag- 
gf»f zi/iiiiag, inotiUaggen, to appear, to seem ; 
patiUak^ pinatillakf papatiUak^ tpatiliagga^ ipa- 
tiiioAf inoipatillak, to cause to appear. 

tnnunlllik, xinumrnUUk^ tatummiUik^ tilBkkay 
tiUikken, zimUik^ inotiUikkcn, to be struck with 
blindness in one eye, so that the white of the 
eye cannot be seen, for then it is ioUassen, fr. 
iummoUas'f tatiUik^ pinatiUik, papatiUik, ipa- 
titlikka^ ipatillik, inipatillik, inoipattltik, to cause 
such to be done; tatUtik, such a blind- 
ing. 

tummilllk tebora, to level the ground for 
the foundation of a house, and to beat it hard 
with flat pieces of wood. 

tnmmlrtlr, tsi, tat, tirtirra, to tremble j pa- 
tirtir, trans, tattirtir^ nom. a trembling. 

tommli, xinummis, tatummis, itissa, tth, intth, 
ifioitis. to throw away, to lose ; patis, pinat'uy 
papatUf ipatissa, ipatis, impatis^ inotpaiisy to 
cause to be thrown away ; ma-atattis^ one who 
throws away. 

tummlsian, xiuummisjan, tatummissan, tis- 
sannay to sigh ; patissan^ pinatissafiy papatissan, 
ipatissana, tpatissan, inipatissan^ inoipatisjon, to 
cause to sigh } tatissan, a sigh j ma-atattissan, 
one who sighs. 

tummlttU, zinummittil, tatummittil, tittiUa, 
tittilian, xinittiUan^ inotittiUan, to beat in j pa- 
tiitilf pif pa, ipatiltiUa, ifatiltU, etc., to cause 
such to he done ; tattiltil a nail or peg which 
|>cople drive in, also the driving in itself. 

tuxnino, zinummOf tatummo, toa, toon, zino, 
inotoon, to reach out the hand to receive any- 
thing ; //I/O, pinato, papato, ipato, inipato, ino- 
ipato, to cause such to be done. 

tumxno-aoli, zinutnmo-ach, tatummo-ach, to- 
acha, toach-in, scino-ac/t-an, inoto-ach-an, to 
come out, to come to light ; thus the sun and 
minm arc said tummo-ach, to rise ; grass and 
vegetables, tummo-ack i bobo ta, to come above 
the (rn)und ) and men, tummo-ach ta, to come 
out into the street \ patoach, pinatoach, papa- 
touch, ipntoacha, ipatoach, impatoach, inoipa- 
toach, to cause such to be done; tattoach, a 
rising, a amiing up. 

tummooh, vdnummoch^ tatummoch, tocA-a, 
tocktn, ziMocA, iHOtocM-tm, to number ; tummock 
bUo, to read ) patocA, pimUock, papatoch, ipa^ 



Favorlang 



toch-a^ ipaUch, impaioch, immpaiBch^ to cause 
to be numbered. 

tmnmoeliab, xiM u mmockab, iattuiumckab, /»- 
chabba, tockabbam^ xtmocAabboM^ imiochabbam^ 
to make a hole ; patochab, pimatochab, pafa- 
tochab, ipaiochabbaj ipaiochab, pdpatochab^ f iw- 
ipaiochab, to cause such to be done ; iaiiocbab^ 
the making a hole ; tochab, a hole. 

tmmnod, zimtmmaJ, tatummotL, todda fthis 
passive is used respecting a field ; bammi toaJemf 
the fiekl is planted; ^t itod, imtod, imoiud, 
means the rice, etc, is sown); toddem, xinod^ 
imtoJJen, cover the seed with earth when it is 
sown ; f!atod, pi, pa, ipatodda, ipatad, etc ; ta- 
tod, the covering of that which is sown after the 
sowing; taJJodcyaM,\\it sowing time or place. 

tnxnmoelAkldei, zi/mmmoeUukkUs, tatummoi- 
lakkies, toelakua, toeiakisen, xinoelakies, ui§i9e- 
lakkisen, to do anything unexpectedly ; sjume at 
poelakies ; tummoelakkies o poch o ch§, to ihooc 
a man suddenly; tummoelakkies o fayack 9 
riba, to soil a coat unexpectedly ; patoeUdtMes^ 
pi, pa, ipatoelakisa, ipatoelakief, impaioeUdtks^ 
inoipatoeiakies, to cause such to be done ; tel- 
toelaktes, a mistake, amissing ; hence kar iattoe- 
lakkies, mau tattoelakkies, to miss one another; 
ma-atattoeUtkkies, one who misses. 

tummok, zinummok, tatummok, tokka, tokkem^ 
sinok, inotokken, to overthrow ; tummok § uudio, 
to upset a cup ; tummok o bato, to knock against 
a stone, to stumble ; tummok, o dxm, to knock 
at a house or a door ; tummok o taxtnisam^ to 
hit a nail or pin in order to drive it in ; ptOok^ 
pi, pa, ipatokka, ipatok, itdpatok, iuoipaiok^ to 
cause such to be done ; tattok, a knocking, abo 
that wherewith we knock ; tattok a oot, gmad 
tattokaus, the beat of a drum ; tattoksajtam, the 
place where people beat, also the time when 
the gong is beaten. 

tommokko, tsi, ta, tokkoa, tokkoam, past, etc, 
to heap up, to lay in a heap ; paiokko, to cause 
such to be done ; tokko, a heap. 

innunokkotok, xinum, tatum, tokkotokko, tok- 
kotokken, xinokkotok, inotokkotokkem^ the re- 
doubling of tummok I patokkotok, pi, pa, ipa- 
tokkotokka, ipatokkotok, etc, the mloubling of 
patok. 

tuxnmolalla, tsi, tat, tuUttUa-a, tuUoBsMm^ 
tsinuUaUa-an, the blossoming of trees ; ismhi&- 
alaUa-ani patuiialla, trans., taUaUa, nom. 
blossom. 

tnxnmollas, tsi, tat, toUassa^ toUassim^ tdndUu^ 
iuoioUassen, to be blind of one eye, but to at 
that the white can be teenj paioBai, trant. 
tataUaSp such blindnett. 





Vocabulary 



195 



tommolUlis, tsinummolillisy tatummolillis (imp. 
toUaUsa^ part, tolioiijsen, tsinullolis^ iftotiolloltjscfi, 
nom. toiialij, a spark, a bit of fire), to give out 
sparks, as red-hot iron does when it is beaten ; 
patoUiUsy pi, pa, ipatolillissa, ipatoliUis, inipato- 
lillis, inmpatobUis, to cause to give out sparks. 

tnmmoUo, zinummoilo, tatummoUo, toUoa, 
toUoan, xinoUoan, inotoUoan, to set on fire ; 
tummoUoy iatoUo, to light a candle ; patoUo, pina- 
tollo, papatoUo, ipatoUoa, ipatoUo, impatoUo, ino- 
ipatoUo, to cause to be lighted ; nom. tattoUo, a 
candle. 

tammoltal, xinummoltol, tatummoltol, toltoUa, 
toUolUtn, xinoUoUan, inotolioUan, to smoke with 
a wisp of straw, called tattoltol, in order to 
drive away the musquitos j patoltol, pinatoltd, 
papatoltoi, ipatoltoUa, ipatoltol, impaltotol, to 
cause such to be done. 

tmnmonog, tsi, tat, tonnoga, tomtogan, 
tsimnog, innotonnogan, the first rising of the 
water in the sea or rivers ; tummonok sai to, 
de, aboj, de sabha ; tattonnog, nom. the com- 
mencement of flood tide, the rising of the 
water, of the sea, or a river. 

tmnmoot), zinummooh, tattummoob, itobo, 
itoob, initoob, inoitoob, to sprinkle water, also to 
sprinkle with the same, when it is toba, toban, 
sdnoban, inotaban ; patoob, pinatoob, papatoob, 
ipatoba, ipatoob, inipatoob, inoipatoob, to cause 
to be sprinkled. 

tmnmo-ol, zsnumma-ol, tatummo-ol, t<hoUa, 
to-oUan, xina-oUan, inoto-oUon, same as tummollo \ 
pat(H)l, pi, pa, ipato-oUa, ipato-ol, etc., same as 
patoUo. 

tnmmoos, zJnummoos, tattummoos, tosa, tosan, 
zjnosan, inotosan, wherewith ? itoos, initoos, 
iftoitooj, to rub ; patoos, pinatoos, papatoos, ipa- 
tosa, ipatoos, inipatoos, inoipatoos, to cause to be 
rubbed ; tummoostoosy intens. 

tmninorraicli, ztnummorraich, inttummor' 
raich, torraicha, torraichen, xinon'aich, inotor- 
raichen, to slide or slip off, to slide out; 
patorraich, pi, pa, ipatorraicha, ipatorraich, 
inipatorraich, inoipaioirmcb, to cause such to 
be done. 

tuinmorrik, zinummorrik, tatumMorrikytorrika, 
torriken, zinorriky inotorriken, to tell lies; pa- 
torrik, finatorriky fapatonik, ipatorr'tkka , ipa- 
torrtk, inipatorrik, inoipatonik, to cause to lie. 

tiiinmorritorrik, tsi, tat, tonitonin, torri- 
tonian, tsinotoiriiorri, inotorritorrian, to flicker, 
to glitter, as fireflies in the dark, also as stars 
m the night ; tummaitas, idem ; pataitas, idem ; 
patomtorri, trans., torritorri, nom. a glittering, 
also a firefly ; t^tai, idem. 



tommorrltorrlk, zinummorritorrik, tatum- 
morritorrik, torritorrikka, torritorrikken, zi/tor- 
ritorrik, inotorritorrikken, to tell lies often j 
patorritorrik, intens. of tummorrik, 

tummoxro, zinummorro, tatummorro, torroan, 
zinorroan, inotorroan, to leak, to leak out, 
either through roofs or through broken vessels 
and so forth ; patorro, pinatorro, papatorro, ipa- 
torroa, ipatorro, inipatorro, inmpatorro^ etc. 5 
tummorrotorro, intens. 

iammorrooli, tsi, tat, torrocha, torrochen, 
tsinorroch, inotorrochen, to drag, to pull after 
one, neut; patorroch, trans, to draw, act. to 
cause to be drawn ; tattorroch, nom. a dragging ; 
tummorrotorroch, intens. 

tummorrod, zinummorrod, tatummorrod, tor- 
roda, torrodan, zinorradan, imtorrodan, to look 
downwards, to look in a glass ; patorrod, pi, pa, 
ipatorrodda, ipatorrod, impatorrod, inoipatorrod, 
to cause such to be done; tummorrotorrod, 
intens. 

tommose, zinummose, tatummose, tosea, tosein, 
zinose, inotosein, same as tummorrik; fatose, 
pinatose, papatose, ipatosea, ipatose, impatose, 
inoipatose, same as patorrik; tummosetose and 
patosetose, same as tummorritorrik and pator- 
ritorrik, 

tummoilitok, tsi, tat, tos/iieka, pass, toshiekan, 
etc., to spatter, to bedaub ; patoshiek, trans., 
tattoshiek, nom. 

tiiiiiino€ik, zimimmosik, tatummosik, tosikka^ 
tosikken, zinosik, inotosikken, same as tummorrik ; 
patossik, same as patorrik ; tummositosik and 
patositosik, same as tummorritorrik and pator- 
ritorrik. 

tummot, tsi, tat, totta, to let wind ; patot, 
to cause such to be done ; tottat, foul 
wind. 

tammotto, zinummotto, tatummotto, tottoa, 
tottoon, ziHotto, inotottoon, to forge, to beat any- 
thing to powder; patotto, pinatotto, papatotto, 
ipaitottoa, ipatotto, inipatotto, inoipatotto, to 
cause such to be done. 

tammotto, tsi, tat, tottoa, tottoon, tsinotto, 
inolottoofty the budding or shooting forth of the 
fruit after the blossoms fall off. 

tum-o, zinum-o, tatum-o, to-a, toan, zino, ino- 
ioan, to pick, to stick ; tum-o chirrap, to pick 
the teeth ; tum-o-taddarries, to put the key in 
a liK-k, to lock it up, the locking up itself; 
also to gore, as a deer with his honis. 

tumpa, zinumpa, tatumpa, tuppa, tuppaan, 
xieupa, ittotuppaan, to think, to reflect ; 
paiMppa, pi, pa, ipatufpa, inipatuppa, i/toipa- 
tuppa, to cause to think ; tumpa tuppa, intens. ; 




196 



Favorlang 



latiufpa, thoughts } ma-atatlufpe, one who 



, lattumfai, tuppaia, lup- 
patitt, aienpai, inoluffasiHf to tread with the 
foot on one side ; patufpai, fiaaluppas, pafa- 
tuppaif ipalupl^tia, ifatuppat, mipatappas, lao- 
ipatafpai, to cau&e such tu be ilone ; laltufpai, 
nom., tumpaluppai, iniJic tumpas. 

tnmplM, xjnumpiet, latitapici, lupfaia, tup- 
pistH, vnup'ui, imluppiin, ume as luramagga ; 
paluppies, pi, pa, ipaluppaia, ipaluppiti, same as 
palaga. 

tumpooli, Kimimpock, lattumptch, ituppocha, 
ilHppotii, i'liluppecJi, inmluppMh, to fix iii [lie ear- 
lingi, where to } tuppicJm, luppKhan, zien- 
pechoH, inaluppocAan ; iatuppock, pi, pa, ipaUip- 
ptcha, ipatuppoch, iiapatuppech, tHoipatuppoch, 
to cause such to be done ; tatluppock, ear-rings. 

tniDpOT, tii, la, lupparra, tapparrtn, tiitnpor, 
i/Mupporrra, to hatch as birds ; ptduppor, 
trans., talupptr, nom, a liaiching. 

tnmpnlc, xJiaimpui, laltumpuk, tuppuHa, 
tuppukkeit, venpui, ineiappuim, to count, 



piaatup] 



ipui,pa. 



lyihing in tlie mind; palufpui, 
ipaiuppukka, ipaluppuk, etc 
lumrach, lallumrach, lirracha. 



lirracAen, xinirrarh, imiirrachtn, the bursting 
of water through a dam, the escaping of a fiih 
througli a hole or rent in the ne^ the running 
out of paddy or such like article through a 
sack } the place where it leaks is lirrachan, 
xiidmuhan, ino, etc. j patirrack, pi, pa, ipatir- 
racAa, etc. 

tnmBar, iiiimmiar, laliumtar, Isarrea, tsiensar, 
i/wlfarrfj>,IOGhine, to illumine; patar,fiiiaaar, 
papasar, ipaxarra, ipaxar, iaipaxar, iitmpaxar, 
to cause to iliine ; laisar, nom. appearance. 

ttunnr, Iti, ta, liarra, to stick, 10 slab; 
tumsar a bimian, to stab a deer with a spear. 

tunulk, tii, tal, tiHa, tiiken, liinick, ineliiken, 
to stain, to spot ; paliik, trans., laliik, a 

tnmio, liinumsa, latumio, isaa, Isoan, liieaioan, 
iaolioaa, to assent by a nod ; pang, piaaiio, 
papaltB, ipatioa, ipalie, iiilpaliB, iaeipalio, to 
cauNC such (o be done ; laM, a nod. 



, J fast. 

(u deny (he stomach Its foiKl ; patumluai, pina- 
lumlum, papalumlum, ipalumlumma, ipalumlum, 
inipalumlum, intupalumlum, lo cause such to be 

tnppMb, between ; titppach dm, between 
(he houses ; tuppach ranua, amuiigst the 
liills ; the verb iieiil is maluppach, to be be- 



tween two. Mid the act patuppmh, ft. the nxtt 
tufpach. 

tnpplell, the italk wherewith the fruit it 
fastened to the tree 01 plant. 

tappo, a troop of men or beasts, a generatioa, 
a principal reason. 

tnppocb, the hair on the ikin of men or 
beasts, excepting the hair of the head, faeatd, 
or eye-brows ; it is written ditffoch. 

toppooa, sugar ; tuppaai # baU, tu^-candjr. 

ttUTltnnl, a firefly, tame at laitai j the vob 
malurrilitrri i malaitai. 

tDttft, the heart ; also written UtU. 

tattoaoh & lyiya, suitnsc. 



ariolien, iaacAol, tnoacJwUan, 



muAol, acJkOa, 
. 'lay anything 
out of the way ; paachol, piiiaachol, pafaachm, 
ipaachoUa, ipaachiil, iitipaatkiJ, imipaackal, to 
cause to be laid aside. 

nrnmadaeli, inuiHmaJaeh, tuimmaddKh, adacka, 
aJachtn, inaJacAan, inoadachan t what 1 iadack, 
iitiadach, ioQiadach, (o hang up j mnmadarA * 
litiriea, (o hang up beads ; uiunuidacA » btdUuMt, 
(D hang up a sword ; paadath, pinaadath, pt^tt- 
adach, ipaadixch, inipaadack, ampatidach, to do 
so to another, to cause to be done. 

nnmuLdo, immuiuidt, aammaJe, adJta, iiYihiiM. 
iitadJean, inoadJaaH, to dissuade ) paoMt, 

inoipaadde, to cause to dissuade; ummaoiM, 

tuoniAdok, iimmmaJak, atimmadek, tuhkka, 
oiinkktB, iaadak, imadokkin, to pick and choose ; 
tlli chimimmar bamje lapai ja aiiaitm, iwum- 
inadtk ciano kiaummttii, i.e. the Ducdi have 
not burnt down the whole Tillage, they have 
picked out the disobedient | p-aadA, pi, pm, 
ipaadokka, ipaadai, etc, to cause such to be 

unmialappo, inumnudappo, 
alappea, aleppoon, inalappe, 
which arc derived aiappoa/:_ 
alappean, to heave up, to lift upj 
pinaaUippo, papaalappa, ipaalappaa, 
irapaalappe, inoipaedappo, to cause to lift up. 

tunmOO, iaum, aum, aoa, aeen, inao, imama, 
(o dissolve salt j trans, pa-ae, melted salt, brine { 
ao-ao-ioa, hrint for washing wounds. 

nmmapaeh, iHumtaapach, aummapatk, apaeJia, 
apadiaii, iaapae/ian, iHoapacAan, to climb, to 
climb up J paapacA, pmaapacM, ft^aaftek, 
ipeapticha, ipaafath, inipaapacM, ma^aapatAf 
(o cause to climb. 

>/ar, oMmmapar, mpmrrm^ 



'""'SSS 




Vocabulary 



197 



aparren^ inapar^ imafarren (that out of which 
it is taken) ; aparran, imiparran, inoaparran, 
to take anything out with the hand or fineera 
pinched close together; ummapar inocXan, 
mm malloy to take food out of a aish ; ummapar 
dassono innm roboen, to take rice out of a bag \ 
ummapar boa no innai kallaman, to take fruit 
out ot a lar^ pot, etc. ; paaparypi^ pa, ipaaparra^ 
ipaatar^ impaapar^ intnpaapar^ to cause such to 
be clone. 

nmmarap lalian, about half-past twelve. 

wnmaron, inummarony aummaron^ aronna, 
aroftnen, inarotiy inoaronnen, to roll up ; paaron, 
pinaaron, papaaron, ipaarottmi, ipaaron, im- 
paaron, inoipaaroft, to cause to roll up j the r is 
sometimes doubled. 

uikunarrai, inummarras, aummarras, arras sa^ 
arrasan^ inarrasan^ inoarrajan, to stride, to 
step over, to pass by; ptutrras^ pinaarras, 
papaarras, ipaarasaf tpaarras, inipaaras, inoi- 
paarraSf to cause such to be done. 

mnmataty inummatat, aummatat^ atatta^ atat- 
tefty inatatf inoatatterty to chew ; paatat^ pinaa- 
taty papaatatf ipaatatta^ impaatat^ inoipaat^ to 
cause to chew. 

nmmelli, inummeiis, aumelis, oUssa^ oUssoan^ 
inoUssan^ ino-olusan, to take off the lid or 
cover ; ummeiii bahecAab, to open the lid of a 
pot; p^oits, pinaoUs, paaotis, ipaolusa, ipaolu^ 
tmpaolis, inoipaoUsy to cause such to be done. 

ummenig, inummenig^ aummemg, eniggay 
emggan, ineniggan, inoeniggatty to speak gently, 
as one ashamed or abashed \ f)aimgy pinaemgy 
pafaenigy ipaenigga, ipaenigy tnipaemg, inoipa- 
emgy to cause such to be done. 

ninmerap, inummtrap, aummerap, erappa, 
erappan, inerap, inoerappan, same as tummrrap, 
to lick ; paerap, pi, pa, ipaerappa, ipaerap, imi- 
paerapy inoipaerapy to cause such to be done. 

nmmictilch, inummichichy aummcMchy ichi" 
cAay ichtchefty inichichy imnchichy to gnaw 5 
paicfnchy pinmchichy papaicfnchy pMcMchay ipas- 
chichy inipaichichy inoipaichichy to cause such to 
be done. 

nmmietiet, inumietiety aumietiety ietitay ietiteriy 
inietiety inoietitetty to bite off the ends, as of 
thread, etc. ; paietUty pinaietietyPapaietUty ipau- 
titOy ipaietiety inipaietiety inoipaietiety to cause 
such to be done. 

ammillag, imtmmiUagy aummiUagy iUaggay il- 
iaggefty iniUagy inoiilaggen, to unfold, to open outj 
ummilag naupooty bUoy to unfold a cloth or 
a book 'y ummilag rimay a straight hand ; 
paillagy piftaillagy papailiagy ipaelaggay ipaelagy 
inipaelagy inmpaelag^ to cause such to be done. 



mnmiUo, inummUoy aummilloy iUoOy iliooHf 
iniUoaHy iuoilloany the winding up of a chiki in 
swaddling clothes, also to speak behind one*s 
back, either fl;ood or ill ; paiuOypinaUioyPapaiUo^ 
ipaiUoay ipasSo, impaiUoy hmpciuo^ to cause such 
to be done. 

nxmnilloilo, inumy aumy iOoiloay ilbilan^ 
inilloiloy inoillmloony to continue to desire any- 
thin? long and earnestly \ paHioHo^ nom. 
Ulmto, 

nnimior, inummory aummor, iorrcy iorram^ 
imorratiy inotorran^ to follow, also to agree to ; 
ummor ramed atitey to obey the word of 
command ; pi^or, pinayory papayor^ ipqjforra^ 
ipayor, impayory to cause to follow; ummior 

ninmitip, imtmrntip^ aummtipy iiippOy itippen, 
or itippaan, imtippaaHy inoitippeuy or tnoitippaaUf 
to cut through, to cut off; paitipy pinmtipy 
papaitipy ipaitippay ipaitipy impmtip^ inotpattp^ 
to cause to be cut off. 

nnimitto, inummittOy aummittOy ittoay ittoauy 
inittoiMy imnttoany to sin^ in solo, to sin^ before 
any one ; paittOy pi, pay tpaittoay ipattto, tmpaittOy 
inoipaittOy to cause to sing. 

unmiitap, imtmy aumy ituppa, the sharpnesa 
of strong drink. 

rnmt^^i^ to tran^lant a tree or plant, and 
for that purpose to dig it up ; paoai^ to cause 
such to be done. 

nmmoo, to weed, to root weeds out of a 
field ; /oo-ff, trans. 

uxmioob, imtmmooby aummooby oppoy oppen^ 
inooby ino-oppetiy to carry out, to bring to an 
end, to finish ; paooby ptnaoob^ papaooby ipaoba^ 
ipaooby inipaooby inoipaooby to cause such to be 
done ; aooby nom. 

nnunoino, imimmomoy aummomoy omooy omoau^ 
ifio-omoafiy to put on a female head-dress ^ 
paonOy pinaonOy papaonOy iptmtoOy ipao/tOy iui' 
paonOy tnmpaoHOy to cause such to be done) 
aomoy nom. 

nnunoiror, i/mmmoroTy aumoroty $rorray croT" 
reriy imorory itto ormremy to fry out fat ; faorw^ 
piy pay ipaororray ipaoroTy impaorory iuoipaoror, 
to cause to fry out j aaroTy nom. 

nmmotiil, to halt, to limp 1 imuumoiwi, 
aummotulj otulia^ oiulUn^ imdul^ m oe i u Ue u ; /m#- 
tuly trans. 

nmparaclipftcb a ta, kx)8c earth. 

ampo, iftumpOy aumpo, uppaoy uppootiy iemp^ 
ifiouppoouy to knead with the foot; foi^P^t 
pinauppOf papauppOy ipauppoay ipauppOy impOMppo^ 
iuoipauppOy to cause such to be done. 

iq^po^ native cakes of ground rioci biead. 



ipS 



Favorlang 



waanui, the touth ; m. 
loudiward j fai^waimaii, truis. 

lehltt, ten ; written tichin. 

MM, the braiiu. 

■Iiabuii, the half or tide of anything, htnce 
people >aj, xhahaan-atdg and aUaniai, the left 
and tight aide) an opposite party, written 
iMabaan, verb j mathabaait, paihataait ; it i) 
alio used ai a prepoutlon againal. 

■Uir*, the tun, a day ; xJUsya » aiasitnaii, 
the day of ml, Sunday ; xhUya o tatupfan, * 
TTOrk day. 

■1, iish ; written isi. 

lU, a needle J written liia. 

itdo, the breut, nippk), mitkj fr. xiiaA. 

dCa, Email worms generated in food i written 
ttig". 

mm, gtief j fr. nutxitiil, 

■Uak, a ipM or itain { fr. tsiadlak. 
■ lUo, length, height j fr. mattile; written 
tiUt. 

HkKku, a lilkwonn, tilk either woven or 



auspicious, to do anything from mistrust j 
poKtanna, pinaxianna, papaxianim, ipaxiaxna, 
iidpaxianita, iaoipaxianaa, to cause such to be 
done J written Isimanna, see under I. 

KlmlduJli], ximmicAalla,] tazimichalh, zieh- 
tdlaa, xicfuiltvon, simcMallo, inKdcAalloon, to 
Ekin off the clear portion from the top, so that 
the dregs undemeath be not disturbed ; ptai- 
challa, pi, pa, ipaxicAatlaa, ipaxJchaUn, iiapaxi- 
e/iaUo, inoipaxichalh, to cause such to be 

lUnlOlilar, xiidimchitr, taxjmchier, xirAirra, 
xicAirran, jdnicAirrtm, immchirraii,\o resemble, 
to imitate ; paxiciier, pi, pa, ipoKicMrra, 
ipaxicAier, inipazic/iitr, invipaxicMer, to make 
anything like i also written liimkMtr, see 
under I ; palailack, idem j lalscUer, nom. like- 

(tmlchilata, Tciitimichxich, lazimichxich, xuh- 
xjcha, vc/ixichen, sanickijch, im^chnichea, to 
smooth anything that in folded or rumpled ; 



smoothed. 

■Imldo, xiioniiJf, laxiirude, xJJaa, xjdean, 
umJoan, iHoxidaan, the sucking of infants } 
fazJiJa, piiuaJida, papaxJid», iptndiJea, ipax- 
Jida, impaxdido, impaxJuh, to gire luck j 



tammi a ximUa, to wean ; thitm imiu o xiKudt, 
a weaned child. 

illiil«k, tdainatk, taximuk, ixiia, hcut, Ud- 
suik, imixjtk, to fillip, to gire a fillip, to dip as 
meat in the sauce i paxiek, pinaxui, papaxuk, 
ipaxika, ipaxitk, inipaziek, iimpaxifk, to cause 
such to be done ; also written idmfk, nom. 
talijk, see under t. 

■imlMto, xiidmiMa, imtKimtitt, aatitttt, 
xUiioaH, xiitttilo, inozurlaaH, same as iMMfag 
patUtito, pi, pa, same as patuppa. 

■Imlgonw, xitamigtgga, latdmigegge, xig^- 
goa, xigi^aan, tciidg^tan, inadgaggoaK, to 
stand on tip-toe; /<nj;^i^a,^«aKi^^^o, - 
^goggo, ipazigfggaa, ipavgoggo, iKpax; 
inapaxigoggo, to cause such to be done. 

'^"tlltwfc, xiiamikak, laximHak, Kikaiia, 
xikakkax, xiaikak, iiaxikaikan, to open j ■* 
tukak raaitd, to open one's mouth, etc; 
patdkak, pi, pa, ipaxikakka, ipaxikak, intpaxiiai, 
ineipoKikak, to cause to be opened, said of the 
mouth and ear ; also written tiimikai, lee 

ritiiHj>, sdnimilak, taximilak, xilakka, Kilak- 
kaa, and xiinlakkait, iiwzHakkaM, to befoul f 
paxitak, pinaxjlak, papaxJlak, ipaxUakka, ipa- 
xiiak, irdpaxilak, iimpaxilak, to cause such to 
be donci also written Itimilak, tee under t| 
numtn xjlak, under liUak. 



to lattci ftad- 
uiiti, piaaxitniti, papaxiimei, ipaseimiia, ipti- 
ajnuti, iaipaziaiei, inoipaximiei, to cause to 
taste ) written liimimit, see under t. 

ilmloeh, xinimiecA, laximixi, xiocka, KiocAem, 
ziaioch, intaitcJieit, to couple j paxieck, pima- 
xiati, papaxieti, ifaxiecia, ipaxiocA, i/apaxioci, 
imvpaxittch, (o cause such to be done, 

almlplM, xinimipiti, laximfiift, xipiia, xipiirm, 
xiiiipiti, i/axipisrn, to culj paxipiei, fi, pa, 
ipaxipiia, ipazJpiei, inipaxJpiei, imapaxJpiiem, to 
cause to cut ; written liimipiti, see under t. 

xiffllposapoei, xiniinipotipiifi, laximiponpati, 
^pQtipaeisa, vpvtipotssen, xinipeeip«ei, iMaxi- 
poeipatiitn. In |>ick out cnunbs or filaments ; 
paxjpatipws, etc., lo caii»; such to be done. 

dmlpo-o, xiaimipo-o, xJpo-aa, xJpeaii, xiai- 
peuii, iaoxipoaa, to fall on onc'b knees j faxip«-t, 
pimizipo-Q, papasipv, ipatipt-ea, ipaxipo-e, im- 
jiiixipihO itsipaxipo-t, to cauiiC such to be donei 
utho written lumipe-a, 

ilinlpak, xiaimipek, laximipok, vptka, xipt- 
' ipekan, inezifotaa, to paint, to write | 
piaaxipok, papaxipc'- -— — »- ^ — ■" 
pvk, inipaxipok, imipaxipoi. 



Vocabulary 



199 



done I alw written liimipai, *ee under t ; 
DOR), tatiifai, a tfridng, alra (he instrument 
emploxMl ; laliipvkaii and latMipokajaa, a mit< 
■ng place or table. 



Jri«, whereto f «ari 
imKirijoH, to hanc anything up) fauriii, 
ftMoxirut, papavrut, ifanfue, tpaxiria, iu- 
ptairiii, intitiaxiriej , to cause such to be done ; 
trritten Itiimries, see under t) latiiriii, a hang- 
ing up { laliirieian, and laliirieiajiaii, the place 



a reach) f^f"*, pinaxirB, 
ipaxirea, ipaxira, iiapaxin, ineipO' 
KUV, 10 cause to reach. 

■Imlnit, sdnimirrit, taxiimrrit, xjirta, xjirlaa, 
Kirmrlaii,iaVKJirtim,\o hold or lead by a string) 
peeyirril, piiiaxjirrit.papai^irril, ipaxjir/a,ijia»- 
jhril, inipaxjirril, impaxjirril, lo cause luch to 
be done j also written tsimrril j nom. talijirl, 
that nhcrenith we lead, as a ttring. 

ilmHHwl, xiirimisaial, Urumitatiti, Kiiakaila, 
sttakaUan, limtaiailaii, inmitataUan, to squat 
doiTO I paxitatai, pinaxitaial, pa, tpioKiiakalla, 



ipaziiakal, inifaxiiaiat, u 



3 be done ; ako written Uimimhd, tee 
under t 

■twit«i, ziKinaii, laximia, xiaa, yimmy *im- 
tian, i?iBsdtiait, that which j xiiitn, tamiiy am~ 
xiiim, to leer throu^ ■ hok, to aim or look 
directly f paxiii, pnuadti, papaxia, ifmi i'm, 
ipaxiii, impaxiii, iaBipaxiii, to caaac luck to be 
done ) alto written trimiii, kc under k. 



■Ino, a knife. 

■lo, the heel j ua m rAarriKO, ■ nttall piece 
of tkin under the ear*. 

■to«-ilM-BO-n«iii, a chicken of the wOd 
fowl. 

■Ipu, west) xipam a tamswi, Dortb-wctf) 
aim written tiipan, tec under t) nfam a «w 
(r«n, soutli-west. 

■ltd, a littb dog. 

4m, the soul I written tijtt. 

^■n, the sun, a dajr. 




Printed by T. »tti A. Cmhtah*, CfhHM lo Mm M^Mlf, 



This preservation photocopy was made at 
BookL^, Inc., in compliance virith copyright 
law. The paper is Weyerhaeuser Cougar 
Opaque Natural, which exceeds ANSI 
Standard ZMAB^19B4. 1991 



i 



•. < 




3 2044 019 820 570 



THE BORROWER WILL BE CHARGED 
AN OVERDUE FEE IF THIS BOOK IS 
NOT RETURNED TO THE LIBRARY ON 
OR BEFORE THE LAST DATE STAMPED 
BELOW. NON-RECEIPT OF OVERDUE 
NOTICES DOES NOT EXEMPT THE 
BORROWER FROM OVERDUE FEES. 

Harvard College Wldener Library 
Cambridge, MA 021 38 (61 7) 495-241 3
Internet Archive Audio

Featured

Top

Images

Featured

Top

Software

Featured

Top

Books

Featured

Top

Video

Featured

Top

Mobile Apps

Browser Extensions

Archive-It Subscription

Save Page Now

Full text of "The Articles of Christian Instruction in Favorlang-Formosan, Dutch and English: From Vertrecht's ..."

See other formats
